Manual ProSteel v8i SS4 English

1

Manual ProSteel V8i Professional December 2010 Bentley Systems

DAA039890-1/0001

2

No part of this manual may be reproduced or copied and distributed by any form of electronic means (copy, microfilm, etc.) without written permission of Bentley Systems. Bentley Systems does not guarantee, either explicitly or implicitly, the suitability for sale or the capability for particular applications of these materials which are supplied only in the existing form. Bentley Systems does not assume any liability for collateral, accidental or indirect damages arising from the purchase and the application of these materials. Where a liability is assumed by Bentley Systems, such liability is limited to the purchase price of the materials described herein. Bentley Systems reserves the right to revise or to modify this product at their own discretion. This user’s guide describes the product at the time of publication. This description may not be applicable to future versions of this product. Please note: all indicated trade names are registered trade marks of the companies concerned. Content (responsible persons) C.Trinkner / G.Griesing Illustrations and Layout C. Trinkner © 2010 Bentley Systems www.bentley.com

http://www.bentley.com/

Table of content

3

Table of content

A INTRODUCTION 13

A.1 General Information 15 A.1.1 About this manual 15 A.1.2 Display Program version 17

A.2 Language Selection 19

A.3 Dialog Framework 21 A.3.1 ProSteel Dialog boxes 21 A.3.2 Template Manager 24 A.3.3 RollOver-Mechanism 29 A.3.4 Pick Frame and Auxiliary Graphics 30 A.3.5 Input Extensions 31

A.4 Input Options 33 A.4.1 Input Options in Input Fields 33 A.4.2 Input Options at Object Selection 34 A.4.3 Special Key-Commands 35

A.5 Project Manager 39 A.5.1 Working with Projects 40 A.5.2 Create New Projects 42

A.6 Global Settings 45

B MODELING AND PARTS LISTS 83

B.1 Layer Functions 85

B.2 Construction Utilities 89 B.2.1 Construction lines 89 B.2.2 Measure of distances 94

Table of content

4

B.3 3D Object Views 95 B.3.1 Object View / Object-UCS 95 B.3.2 Surface View / Surface-UCS 97 B.3.3 Global View 98 B.3.4 Top View 99 B.3.5 Free View 100 B.3.6 Cutting Plane 101 B.3.7 Perspective View 103

B.4 Move and Copy Parts 107 B.4.1 Move/Copy 108 B.4.2 Turn 109 B.4.3 Mirror 110 B.4.4 Align 111 B.4.5 Clone 113 B.4.6 Rotate 115 B.4.7 Settings 116

B.5 Display / Assign parts 117 B.5.1 Hide 117 B.5.2 Regenerate 119 B.5.3 Display Classes 120 B.5.4 Area Classes 122 B.5.5 Part Families 123 B.5.6 Process Status 127 B.5.7 Search Parts 130

B.6 Work Frames 134 B.6.1 Rectangular Work Frame 135 B.6.2 Cylindrical Work Frame 139 B.6.3 Wedge-Shaped Work Frame 140 B.6.4 Pyramidal Work Frame 141 B.6.5 Create Views 142 B.6.6 Axes Names 144 B.6.7 Additional Axes (Border Lines) 147 B.6.8 Options 148 B.6.9 User-defined Blocks 150

B.7 Choose View 152

Table of content

5

B.8 Insert Shapes 154 B.8.1 Straight Shapes 155 B.8.2 Bent Shapes 161 B.8.3 Additional Settings 162 B.8.4 Shape Series 164 B.8.5 Shape Segment 166 B.8.6 Girder Position 168 B.8.7 Automatic Insertion 170

B.9 Insert Plates 174 B.9.1 Flat Straight Plates 174 B.9.2 Flat Bent Plates 179 B.9.3 Gratings 180 B.9.4 Bent Plates 181 B.9.5 Additional Settings 187

B.10 Insert Solids 189

B.11 Create ACIS body reference 193

B.12 3D-Modifications 195 B.12.1 Divide / Combine 196 B.12.2 Modify Shapes 206 B.12.3 Modify Plates 209 B.12.4 Wall Processing 211 B.12.5 Additional Settings 213 B.12.6 Notch betwen two Shapes 215 B.12.7 Boolean Operations 225

B.13 Plate Editor 226 B.13.1 Boolean Operations 227 B.13.2 Chamfer / Rounding Off 230 B.13.3 Edge Processing 232

B.14 Drilling / Bolted Connections 235 B.14.1 Drill Holes / Drill Hole Fields 236 B.14.2 Bolted Connections 240 B.14.3 Additional Settings 243

B.15 Bolts 248 B.15.1 Bolting parts 249 B.15.2 Bolt Style Management 251 B.15.3 Insertion of Threaded Rods 259 B.15.4 Sort 260

Table of content

6

B.16 Insert Stiffeners 262

B.17 Plate Connections 269 B.17.1 Free Plate Connections 270 B.17.2 Connections Resistant to Deflection / Shear Forces 282 B.17.3 User-Defined Connections 285

B.18 Base Plates According to DSTV 287

B.19 Web Angle 293

B.20 Shear Plates 303

B.21 Splice Joints 311

B.22 Purlin Connection 317

B.23 Gusset Plates 328

B.24 Dynamic Bracing 332 B.24.1 Common Settings 333 B.24.2 Shape Bracing 338 B.24.3 Rod Bracing 341 B.24.4 Pipe Bracing 344

B.25 Static Bracing 346 B.25.1 Settings 347 B.25.2 Creation of Bracing Parts 351

B.26 Haunches 356

B.27 Connection Editor 360

B.28 Group Structure 364 B.28.1 General Information about Groups 364 B.28.2 Creation and Processing of Groups 366 B.28.3 Check Groups 370 B.28.4 Settings 374

Table of content

7

B.29 Positioning 376 B.29.1 Automatic Positioning 377 B.29.2 Manual Insertion 389 B.29.3 Automatic Insertion (Distribution) 393 B.29.4 Other Auxiliary Commands 399 B.29.5 Add Drawing Number 401 B.29.6 Depiction of Position Flags 403 B.29.7 Management of Styles 407

B.30 Drawing Information 408

B.31 Create Parts Lists 410 B.31.1 Register Parts Lists 411 B.31.2 Process Parts List 416

B.32 Drawing Parts List 426 B.32.1 Parts List Creation 426 B.32.2 Processing of Parts List Styles 429 B.32.3 Management of Parts List Styles 435 B.32.4 Processing the Content of Parts List 436

B.33 Containment List 438 B.33.1 Creation of Containment List 438 B.33.2 Processing of List Styles 440

C DETAILING 450

C.1 DetailCenter 452 C.1.1 The 2D-Detailing 452 C.1.2 Detailing with the DetailCenter 454 C.1.3 Launching DetailCenter 462 C.1.4 General Information – Scale and Dimension Styles 464 C.1.5 General Information - Detail Types 466 C.1.6 General Information – Group Structure 471 C.1.7 Intelligent 2D-Details 476 C.1.8 Display of Construction Component Lists 478 C.1.9 Component Overview 485 C.1.10 Views Overview 499

Table of content

8

C.1.11 Detail Block Overview (Insert) 508 C.1.12 Global Settings 515 C.1.13 Automatic Translation 522 C.1.14 Transfer Drawing Paths 525 C.1.15 Direct Detailing 533 C.1.16 Modification Management 535 C.1.17 Replace Detail Blocks 545

C.2 Detailing Style 548 C.2.1 Working with Detailing Styles 548 C.2.2 General Info 549 C.2.3 Global Settings 552 C.2.4 Dimensioning 594 C.2.5 Label Settings 707 C.2.6 Settings for ‘ProConcrete 3D’ Parts 716

C.3 Detailing Style Assistant 740 C.3.1 Easy creation of detailing styles 740 C.3.2 Launching the detailing style assistant 743 C.3.3 Content of standard templates 745

C.4 DetailCenter Express 760 C.4.1 Running DetailCenter Express 761 C.4.2 Selection Pages 763 C.4.3 Single Sheet Output 785

C.5 DetailCenter Composer 794 C.5.1 Start DetailCenter Composer 795 C.5.2 Manual Insertion Mode 798 C.5.3 Batch Insertion Mode 811 C.5.4 Format File 813

C.6 RevisionCenter 815 C.6.1 What is the RevisionCenter? 815 C.6.2 Structure of the RevisionCenter 818 C.6.3 Document Overview 821 C.6.4 Component Overview 824 C.6.5 Conflict Overview 825

C.7 Cranked 2D-View 829

Table of content

9

C.8 North Symbol 831

C.9 Manual Dimensioning Points 837

C.10 Manual Object Link 841

C.11 Global Scale 843

C.12 Drawing Border 845

C.13 Manual 2D-Cut 849

C.14 Manual Dimensioning 856

C.15 Elevation Flags 868

C.16 Weld Symbols 876

C.17 Caption texts 884

C.18 Short 2D manually 892

C.19 2D-Cutout 894

C.20 Hole Display 896

C.21 Automatic 2D-Cut 901

C.22 Flatten Viewport 906

D MISCELLANEOUS 911

D.1 User-Defined Component Parts 912 D.1.1 Special Parts 912 D.1.2 Special Shapes 913 D.1.3 Weld Shapes 922 D.1.4 Parametric Shapes 926

Table of content

10

D.2 BlockCenter 928 D.2.1 Structure of the BlockCenter 929 D.2.2 Creation and Edition of Blocks 931 D.2.3 Insert Blocks 933 D.2.4 Display of Block Structure 935 D.2.5 Database of Block Data 938

D.3 Roof/Wall Panels 949

D.4 Dispatch Bolts / Blocks 955 D.4.1 Insertion of Thread Bolts 956 D.4.2 Further Options and Data Base 961

D.5 Auxiliary Tools 964 D.5.1 Collision Check 964 D.5.2 Center of Gravity 968 D.5.3 Tube Unfold 969 D.5.4 Move Objects 971 D.5.5 Create ACIS-DWG 972 D.5.6 Create AutoCAD Drawing 974 D.5.7 Convert ADT shapes 975

D.6 Add Effective Static Analysis Lines 977

D.7 Data Exchange 981 D.7.1 General Information about Data Exchange 981 D.7.2 Exchange Lists 983 D.7.3 Interface Format Selection 989 D.7.4 Data Import Command 991 D.7.5 Data Export Command 996 D.7.6 Direct Data Exchange with RSTAB 1000 D.7.7 New Interfaces 1001 D.7.8 Previous Interfaces 1020

E APPENDIX 1038

E.1 Structural Element Straight stair 1040

E.2 Structural Element Winding stair 1051

Table of content

11

E.3 Structural Element Handrail 1065

E.4 Structural Element Hangar Frame 1093

E.5 Structural Element Truss Girder 1099

E.6 Structural Element Purlin Course 1103

E.7 Structural Element Ladder 1109

E.8 Structural Element Joist 1117

E.9 ProSteel Properties Dialogs 1127 E.9.1 Shapes 1128 E.9.2 Plates 1143 E.9.3 Bolts 1150 E.9.4 Volume Solids / Basic Primitives 1155 E.9.5 Special Parts 1157 E.9.6 Assemblies 1158 E.9.7 Work Frames / Views 1160 E.9.8 Structural Elements 1160 E.9.9 Roof/Wall-Objects 1160 E.9.10 Position Flags, Elevations, Weld Marks,.. 1160 E.9.11 Drawing Parts Lists 1160 E.9.12 3D Modifications 1161 E.9.13 Flat Cuts 1164 E.9.14 Poly-Cuts 1165 E.9.15 Edge Processing 1166 E.9.16 Notches (Outlets) 1167 E.9.17 Common Properties 1168

E.10 ProSteel Command Reference 1172

E.11 Own Notes 1178

Table of content

12

Introduction

13

A Introduction

Introduction

14

General Information

15

A.1 General Information

A.1.1 About this manual

Welcome to ProSteel You decided to buy our ProSteel program because you are convinced that you will cope with your daily tasks faster and in a more reliable way in the future by using a CAD software package which is successful, well tried and tested all over the world. We are pleased that you selected a product of our company and we hope that for a long time we will be your reliable partners.

Contents of this Manual This manual provides a complete description of all commands available with the ProSteel steel construction software package. Some of the individual descriptions contain examples, which facilitate the recreation of the different command applications by providing graphics and screenshots.

Not Provided in this Manual Working with ProSteel and this manual requires that you are already familiar with the use of AutoCAD. The chapters of this manual require knowledge of AutoCAD and Windows. If that is not the case, you should familiarize yourself with the most important basic AutoCAD commands to be able to work effectively with the new software. Although the program will help you to overcome many of the three-dimensional AutoCAD construction hurdles, you should be familiar with terms such as object snap, user coordinate system (UCS), blocks, etc.

General Information

16

Differences to your Current Version Our new CAD Abstract Layer (CAL) technology permits largely uniform functionality and appearance of ProSteel on different CAD-platforms. In addition, ProSteel is available in several licence models, which differ from each other with regard to their performance range. Due to the fact that the integration into the CAD system AutoCAD from AutoDesk is the most extensive implementation at the moment, the description of all functions of this manual refers to the version ProSteel Professional for AutoCAD. When you bought ProSteel for another platform other than AutoCAD or another licence model (e.g. without detailing), the actual performance range of your version may differ from this manual. In addition, there may be differences due to intermediate updates of the program after publication of this manual.

General Information

17

A.1.2 Display Program version

Executing the command PS_VERSION displays precise information at the AutoCAD command line on the version of the software you have installed, including build number and creation date. For example: ProSteel is programmed by

Bentley Systems

You are using ProSteel

Version V8i (SELECTseries 3) - Version 8.11.3.48 dated from Aug 25 2010

General Information

18

Language Selection

19

A.2 Language Selection

In ProSteel you can select the language of the menu prompt and thus of the configuration, too while the program is running.

The displayed dialog offers all languages which are installed at the very moment. To switch over to another language check the field beside the flag and confirm the modification with the OK-button. Apart from the language of the menu prompt, the modified settings for the configuration will be loaded as well when the program is started for the next time. If you switch over e. g. from German to English, nothing will happen first in the running mode except the language of the dialogs. However, if you start ProSteel anew together with the modified language setting, the configuration of the language setting will be loaded as well from the currently installed language set. This means that a plate will not be created with the name Blech but with the name Plate. The search paths of the program for blocks, temp- and varia-directories will change as well and another ProSteel configuration will be available. Please refer to the chapter Installation to see which installations depend on the language.

Language Selection

20

Dialog Framework

21

A.3 Dialog Framework

A.3.1 ProSteel Dialog boxes

In ProSteel you will mainly meet dialog frames based on a standardized appearance. The advantage is that you will always find certain repetitions of the different commands at the same place and with the same icon.

Dialog Frame Structure Each dialog consists of the basic control buttons such as OK, CANCEL, TEMPLATE, etc., which are placed at the bottom edge of the dialog. On the right, you will find auxiliary diagrams, preview windows or a pick frame also called “monitor” in the descriptions, appearing in some of the commands. The actual content of the dialog differs from one command to the other; additional buttons may appear in the lower button bar depending on the corresponding command. The following picture shows a typical dialog frame, containing all standard elements, for the example of an end plate connection:

The standard elements (lower button bar) as well as the general behaviour of the dialogs are described below. When the different commands are described, these things won’t be explained any more.

Dialog Framework

22

Dialog-Commands

OK

By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the last settings such as content of the dialog, position on the screen, selected dialog tab, etc. are stored.

Depending on the command, you are prompted to continue with other things like e.g. selection of component parts, etc.

CANCEL

By clicking on this button, you close the dialog and the command is cancelled. If possible, the previous status is restored as it was before selection of the command

HELP

When you click on this button, the Online-help is opened.

TEMPLATE

By clicking on this button, you can save or load again the complete settings of the dialog for the selected command under any template name you like.

Here, another dialog of ProSteel template management opens which is described separately in this subordinate chapter.

CLONE

By clicking on this button, you can read the settings of an existing connection and import it onto another one. This function is especially suitable for automatic connections.

It helps you to obtain an identical connection to an existing one, the exact default settings of which, however, you don’t know any more. For more detailed information, please refer to the descriptions of the individual functions.

Dialog Framework

23

UPDATE

When you click on this button, the connection, structure or the component part are updated according to your default settings. Normally in ProSteel, you are working in a dynamic mode. Each

modification of a parameter is directly translated into a modification of the corresponding object so that you can see the results immediately. In case of very complex structures or less powerful computers, it may be reasonable to deactivate this automatic update in the global settings of ProSteel and to activate it manually if need be.

ROLL-OVER

By clicking on this button, you alternatively switch on or off the so-called Roll-Over-mechanism. When RollOver is switched on, the visible dialog area depends on the current mouse position. For more detailed information, please refer to the separate description in this chapter.

GRAPHIC

When you click on this button, the auxiliary graphics of the corresponding dialogs are alternatively switched on or off. This influences the size of the dialog on the screen.

Dialog Framework

24

A.3.2 Template Manager

When working with the program, you will see that it provides a variety of different dialog boxes, which are used to enter settings for the functions and commands. Many of these settings are repeated for construction tasks in different orders or are used in a slightly modified for (e.g. connection plates with holes for specific supports) – it would be useful to save these settings for later use. For this purpose, ProSteel offers you a template management function. Many of the dialogs feature a TEMPLATE button. Clicking this button calls up the template management dialog box where you then can save or load the settings. Sometimes, the templates can also be accessed via the context menu of the right mouse key. Although this is always the same window, the saved entries depend on the type of dialog box from which you are using the template management dialog. The only items visible in the command ’Work Frame’ are saved work frames. The command ‘Plates’ correspondingly offers only connection plate specifications.

The methods of working within the template management are very similar to those of Windows Explorer. For example, you can organize the templates’ structure in different list branches and easily modify this structure at any time via Drag&Drop.

Dialog Framework

25

Dialog-Commands

LOAD

When you click on this button, the template marked in the selection list is loaded and the input fields of the dialog box are filled in accordingly. Then, the dialog will be closed immediately.

You can also double-click the list entry for this command.

SAVE

By clicking on this button, you can save the settings entered in the dialog frame using a name indicated by you. You first have to select the desired list branch where your template has to be saved and then click the SAVE

button. Now an entry with a standard name will be created the name of which can be modified immediately or at a later moment. To overwrite an existing entry, select the corresponding entry instead of a list branch.

NEW FOLDER

By clicking on this button, you can create a new branch (folder) on the topmost level or even within a list branch to save your templates. You first have to select the desired list branch and then you haver to click

the NEW FOLDER button.

IMPORT

Click on this button to add other templates of the same type to your current template file. This may be a single template, a list branch or the complete file.

A file selection dialog opens where you can select the template file to be imported. It is checked whether you selected the same type. If the name of some list branches of the imported template file is identical with the entry in the existing file, you can decide for each branch individually whether the existing data have to be overwritten or not. The new branches or templates are only added; they may be re-organized later by using Drag&Drop.

Dialog Framework

26

Order Click on this button, and the alphabetical order of the display list is turned upside down. You can reach entries which are placed further down without having to scroll up and down the list.

First, you have to select a list branch the order of which has to be changed. Sorting can be defined for each branch individually.

Context Menu Most of the dialog commands can be reached via the context menu of the right mouse key. Further commands are available here.

REMOVE

Select this command to delete the selected template or a complete branch including all subordinate branches.

EXPORT

Select this command to save the selected template or a complete branch including all subordinate branches under any file name you like. The data can be added again at any time using the IMPORT command or they can be made accessible to other users for import. After selection of the command, the file selection dialog opens where you can select a file name or a file path.

FAVOURITES

Select this command to add the selected template to the favourites’ list or to remove it from this list.

BLOCK

Select this command to block the selected template against overwriting. This function is only available in expert mode.

UNBLOCK

Select this command to unblock templates which were blocked against overwriting. This function is only available in expert mode.

Dialog Framework

27

Permanent and Temporary Dialog Templates The templates are saved as permanent dialog settings in the variants folder of the program and thus are available for all users at the same time in a network if the same folder has been set at this workstation. In addition, the last settings are saved in an individual temporary folder of the workstation each time the dialog is left. Thus you have fast access to the last entry when selecting the function repeatedly.

Version Control You are perhaps used to the fact that in other programs and in previous ProSteel versions already defined templates were often lost during an update. This is the reason why the data structure of template file was equipped with a version and type control. Your new defined templates remain compatible with the following versions and when former files are loaded, any new added values will have a standard value.

dBASE-Import and -Export Different functions additionally offer the possibility to export the template files into the dBASE-format or to import them from this format. You can create data records using Excel or comparable programs. These data records then are available as ProSteel-templates. Especially the creation of template records similar in quality (e.g. only with two variable dimensions) is considerably facilitated. Select EXPORT and IMPORT as file type dBASE III List in the dialog commands to export individual templates or branches into the dBASE-format or to import them from there. If the selection is not possible, format conversion is not available for these dialog templates.

Dialog Framework

28

Favourites You can collect selected templates individually in a favourites’ list. These lists are displayed in the dialogs of the functions to have a quick selection of templates available. First click on the corresponding entry to define a template as favourite. Then, select the option Add to favourites in the context menu. Now, the entry is displayed in bold type. To remove an entry, click on the entry again and select the entry Remove from Favourites in the context menu.

Dialog Framework

29

A.3.3 RollOver-Mechanism

The so-called RollOver-mechanism allows for a better use of your drawing surface in ProSteel because the dialogs are only displayed completely if you probably intend to enter something or to control the settings. Otherwise, the dialogs are reduced to the title bar allowing you at any time to recognize which dialogs are open at the moment.

The change from complete to reduced status depends on the movements of your mouse. When you leave the input area of a dialog with the mouse, it will be “folded up” except for the title bar shortly afterwards and you can look at your

construction. It is not until you move to the title bar again with the mouse, that the dialog is displayed completely because the program now assumes that you are going to modify something.

Individual Control Due to the fact that perhaps you don’t want to have a RollOver-mechanism activated for each dialog, it can be switched on or off for each dialog individually. You may even completely deactivate the RollOver-mechanism in the global settings if you don’t like this way of working at all. However, your individual defaults are kept in each dialog frame and become valid again when the mechanism is activated.

Dialog Framework

30

A.3.4 Pick Frame and Auxiliary Graphics

Many dialogs have a graphic depiction on the right. This is either a pure auxiliary graphic explaining the dialog parameters or – depending on the command – a pick frame for the determination of reference points (“monitor“).

Auxiliary Graphics The auxiliary graphics show a depiction in the form of a diagram, e.g. a connection or a structural element with the most important dimensions, which can be modified in the dialog frame.

Here, different numbers which you will find again in the labelling of input fields and which allow for a clear assignment marks the dimensions. In some dialog frames, the graphics change depending on the selection of an option or even of an input field. Thus they are sufficient in most cases as help for the parameters.

Monitor The monitor frame helps you to define the reference points e.g. at the insertion of shapes.

In this case, you usually find small circles serving as marks to be clicked. The activated reference point then is displayed in red. In addition, the monitor also shows a preview of your current default settings e.g. at the definition of position flags. In contrast to the auxiliary graphics, its proportions change.

Dialog Framework

31

A.3.5 Input Extensions

Apart from the ToolTips customary in Windows-programs, displaying an auxiliary text with explanations, when you move your mouse to an input field or button, further useful helps are available for you in the dialog frames.

Pick Lengths Most input fields for entering distances allow picking the distance in your drawing. Then, the picked length is entered into the input field. This extension permits comfortable seizing of distances from your construction. To do so, select the entry Add Picked Length in the corresponding field via the context menu; the dialog frame is temporarily hidden, and you can pick the distance via two points. If you select the entry Add Picked Length (without Z) instead, the distance will be calculated without Z-coordinates.

Pocket Calculator Most input fields for entering distances alternatively allow the use of an integrated pocket calculator to calculate the values. The new calculated value then is entered into the input field. To do so, select the entry Add Calculated Value via the context menu; the pocket calculator is displayed. If a value was entered into the input field before, it will be automatically displayed in the pocket calculator.

Dialog Framework

32

Input Options

33

A.4 Input Options

A.4.1 Input Options in Input Fields

Some additional functions are available in all fields where you can enter a length, distance or coordinate. These commands, however, are not available for fields where you enter texts, angles, or general digits such as factors or scaling values. You have access to these functions by calling the context menu with the right mouse key in the corresponding input field and then select the desired entry The well-known Windows functions for input fields such as e.g. Copy and Paste will of course be at your disposal there in future, too. Additional Functions

Pick Length If you select this function, the dialog is hidden and you can pick two points in the drawing. The distance from one point to the other is calculated and the result is entered into the corresponding dialog field. Then, the dialog is displayed again.

Pick Length without Z If you select this option, the z-coordinates are removed at distance calculation. Running is the same as described above.

Pocket Calculator A small pocket calculator is displayed when you use this option. When selected, the calculator takes over the content of the current field and you can directly calculate with this value. When the calculation is finished and you want to copy the result into the current input field, just quit the calculator using the COPY button.

Input Options

34

A.4.2 Input Options at Object Selection

When the program prompts an object selection, you can select the desired component parts via window or via selection. In this case there are two functions, which can be rather useful. Comparison In most of the functions, and in the case you want to select all

parts, you can answer the selection with RETURN. Then, all parts of the current drawing will be selected.

Filter When you interrupt the selection with ESC and SHIFT, the filter function is selected and the function is not left.

In this case you would filter your input for all parts being longer than 2000 mm. If you press the OK-button, the parts are selected on which the filtering is based. Then, the original function is carried out together with the filter result. For a detailed description of the filter possibilities, please refer to the description of PS_SEARCH command.

Input Options

35

A.4.3 Special Key-Commands

In some other cases, you can select another function by simultaneously pressing ALT, CTRL or SHIFT-key. The available options are displayed in the following list. Use of CTRL-Key Bolted Joint The bolted joint command saves the last created bolt to avoid

searching through the database if the next bolt is a bolt of the same type and length, etc. When you keep the CTRL-key pressed during bolted joint command, the stored data are deleted and the program is forced to read the bolt data from a file.

Select View At Select View command you can set whether double-clicking quits the dialog. This setting is turned upside down when the CTRL-key is pressed simultaneously.

Display Class You can move the dialog of display and area classes lengthways. To return to the original status, keep the CTRL-key pressed while the corresponding dialog is opened.

NC-Data The CTRL-key pressed while component parts for NC-creation are selected switches on the Debug-mode. Diverse graphical outputs are generated for NC-creation. They are rather meant for development, but sometimes they help to solve problems as well.

Positioning If you enter the starting value of positioning, the next following value will be calculated. If you have alphanumerical values, which start with A, this is not possible, because you have to enter a 0 and the result will be an <A> displayed. A pressed CTRL-key creates an <a>.

Work Frame If you want to delete the list values of a dimension, you have to put the focus on it and keep the CTRL-key pressed. Using the ALT-key allows elegantly editing of the field.

Positioning At automatic positioning the subsequent calculation of component parts can be switched off using the CTRL-key.

Modify Properties Keep the STRG-key pressed to modify the properties of exactly one component part.

Input Options

36

Use of ALT-Key

General The pressed ALT-key avoids working off the link update. No updates due to modifications are carried out. You can e.g. use this function to move parts without causing a reaction of the connected parts.

Render Export After the parts for Render-Export have been selected, a standard file name is used. The ALT-key permits file name selection.

Object View The object view first creates a non-aligned view on the part. Alignment is made via RETURN-button. If you press the ALT-key at selection of view direction, an aligned view will be directly created.

Free View This is not carried out using Clipping. If the ALT-key is pressed, the global clipping distances will be used.

Osnap A pressed ALT-key during Object Snap selection inserts the reference points as well, if existing.

Handrail At shape selection, the selection of the previous type can be taken over if you keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the shape class (post, hand rail, knee-high guard rail, etc.). The same function is valid at modification of shape status, i.e. whether the corresponding shape is used or not.

Edit Drill Holes At modification of drill holes, you can cancel the blocking of bolt fields by means of the ALT-key. These then can be deleted as well. Use this option carefully!

Truss Girders Same function as for the selection of handrail shapes.

Lattice Girders Same function as for the selection of handrail shapes.

At insertion, the lattice girder is created with the entered width. The Alt-key creates a frame with the width of the entered points.

Select View At Select View command, double-clicking on it activates the selected view. The ALT-key only moves to the corresponding UCS.

Hangar Frame At insertion, the frame is created with the entered width. The ALT-key creates a frame with the width of the entered points.

Input Options

37

Haunch If you press the ALT-key while seizing the connection shape, a ceiling joist is carried out.

If you press the ALT-key while seizing the supporting shape, the plate thicknesses are adapted to the supporting shape.

Ladder The ALT-key causes that the ladder length is calculated from the third point.

Insert Shapes If you choose Select Position, a pick into the drawing causes a rotation by 90°. The ALT-key causes a rotation by -90°.

Stiffeners If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, the program is forced to an input via angles.

Copy At selection via menu points instead of via dialog, the ALT-key causes a conversion of the setting, whether the operation is valid for group or not.

Working Areas Activating one of the three list fields for distances permits comfortable input of the distances. If the CTRL-key is pressed, the existing distances are deleted.

Line Cut Pressing the ALT-key at selection causes not only a cut but, if need be, an adaptation, too.

Connect Pressing the ALT-key at selection of the second shape avoids type check and everything is connected.

ArcShape Osnap and Center: The ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be seized as well.

Bolt Grips If a bolt is modified using its grips, the ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be moved freely in space, otherwise only in bolt direction.

Purlin Connect. If the frame is modified, moving of the grips along a line causes the movement of the line without modifying the size. If the ALT-key is pressed, the line is moved and the size is modified depending on the neighbouring lines.

Plate Grips Same effects as purlin connection object.

Shape Osnap and Center. The ALT-key causes that the endpoints can be seized as well.

2D Details In groups, the movement of an accessory part doesn’t cause new drawing of the main part. The modification will only be visible after regeneration. Pressing the ALT-key forces re-structuring of the group even without regeneration.

Input Options

38

Grips For shapes, you can specify whether the length modification has only to be effected in shape direction or freely. Using the ALT-key turns this setting upside down.

Project Manager

39

A.5 Project Manager

In all ProSteel versions it is possible to store drawing files, parts list files or similar things on the folder you like. This feature is often very useful; on the other hand, however, the problem is to keep all files of a project together. Up to now, it was not possible to store the pre-settings, templates or even configurations related to the project. In the current version, a project manager has been implemented offering exactly these options.

File Management Related to the Project You can choose for your temporary, template, style and format files whether these have to be managed related to the project or related to the workstation. Related to the workstation means that you only have a data record of the settings. In contrast, related to the project means that your settings may differ for each project and will be stored within the project. If you work e.g. with detailing styles and formats related to the customer, but use always the same settings and templates, you set the temporary and template files to ‘not related to the project’, the style and format files, however, are related to the project.

Project Manager

40

A.5.1 Working with Projects

In the upper line, you see the set project path where the projects are filed and from which the stored projects are displayed. In the list, all available projects are displayed, the lines on the right show the information stored for the corresponding project.

Use this button to load the currently highlighted project and to

carry out all desired modifications of the configuration. The available possibilities are displayed under Create Project. Alternatively, you can activate a project by double-clicking on it.

Load Project... If this option is activated, the current project is automatically activated when you start ProSteel. The prerequisite is, however, that ProSteel has been quit as usual.

Click on this button to finish the current project and to return to the basic configuration.

This option permits to create a new project. The available possibilities are displayed below.

Use this option to delete the currently highlighted project as well as all included files. Also, you have the possibility to close this function, and then the files will be deleted. The current project cannot be deleted.

Project Manager

41

This option allows the modification of project data and settings. Please refer to Create New Project.

This option permits the creation of a DwgInfo-table (drawing information) throughout the project. In each project drawing, these files can be taken over later into the corresponding DwgInfo-table.

The change of the AutoCAD main dialog informs you whether a project has been loaded. Name and file path of the loaded project are displayed there, instead of the information that you are working with a certain AutoCAD version. Open this dialog to see the name of the current project displayed in the bottom line as well.

Project Manager

42

A.5.2 Create New Projects

The following dialog appears when you want to create a new project. Use this dialog to enter the project data.

Project Name Enter the desired name of your project. The remaining paths

are modified as well according to your inputs. However, they can be overwritten individually.

Model Files Enter the path to be used for storing your model files. In contrast to the other paths, it is not possible to force AutoCAD to use this path as previously set. Therefore at storing, you have to take care manually that this path will be used to store your model files there.

This button allows interactive path selection if you don’t want to use the proposed path.

This button deletes your individual input and activates the previously set path again.

Project Manager

43

Detail Files This is the path for your detail drawings. The Detail Centre takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Parts Lists.. This is the path for your parts list files. The file for the creation

of parts lists takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the parts list creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

NC Files This is the path for your NC files. The NC-creation takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

PPS Files This is the path for your PPS files. The PPS-function takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the PPS-function, the path still is the one set for this project.

Export Files This is the path for your export files. The export function takes over the selection made here as pre-setting. Of course, only the new selection is concerned. If another project was activated at the last selection of the NC-creation, the path still is the one set for this project.

Temp Project If this option is activated, you can store the temporary files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the temporary files e.g. the last active dialog content, the dialog position, etc. are stored.

Temp Files Enter the path for your temporary files.

Copy from Enter the path from which all existing temporary files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

Templates Proj... If this option is activated, you can store the template files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. In the template files, all data are stored which have been created via the template management.

Template Files Enter the path for your template files.

Copy from Enter the path from which all existing template files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

Project Manager

44

Styles Project If this option is activated, you can store the style files separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project. This option is valid for all 5 types of style files (detailing style, position flags, weld marks, elevations, bolts).

Style File Enter the path for your style files. This path is used to file the corresponding subdirectories for the 5 types of style files.

Copy From Enter the path from which all existing style files have to be copied into the new directory. You don’t have to work with a bare installation, but you will find the usual environment, even if from now on it will only be valid for this project.

DWG Project If this option is activated, you can store the Dwg format templates separated from the standard storing place and organize your settings related to the project.

DWG Frame Enter the path for your frame files.

Copy From Enter the path from which all existing Dwg frames have to be copied into the new directory.

Project Descr. Here you have the opportunity to describe your project in 10 lines. The data are displayed at project selection and have to facilitate selection.

Global Settings

45

A.6 Global Settings

This dialog box and its pages allow you to enter the standard settings for several functions. You access the dialog by selecting the ‘ProSteel/Options item via the context menu of the right mouse button when no objects are selected. Identical values for the corresponding ProSteel-components resulting from these settings can be modified at any time for each part via the “Change PS Properties” command. Most entries are explained with the individual functions; therefore just some settings will be explained in the following. Options General settings

Grips Settings for grips and stretching; when no grip is entered for an object, the AutoCAD-command “Stretch” cannot be used.

Shapes Settings for shapes

Straight Plates Settings for any kind of plate (poly-plates)

Bolts Settings for bolt display

Work Frame Settings for work frame

Assembly Settings for assemblies

Values Settings for resolution of circular volumes for volume patterns (Facet-Modeler)

LogLinks Settings for links between elements

Revision Settings for modification control

Display Settings for display

Colours Settings for the element and other highlighting colours

Monitor Settings for the display monitor in the dialogs

Configuration Settings for iso-views, layers, flat steel tables

Dialogs Settings for all dialogs are specified.

Files Access to the most important system files; this is only visible in expert mode (see Dialog settings).

Global Settings

46

Options

Analysis View For shape properties, an additional tab for the static view is

available. If this option is not required, you can deactivate it here generally.

Double Click The part properties can be processed by double clicking the part.

Unit Dialog You are asked at the beginning of a new drawing in which unit system you want to work (metrical or British). Otherwise, the current AutoCAD-setting will be adopted.

As the consequent use of the same unit system within a drawing is indispensable for the correct display of shapes, the modification of the system variable MEASUREMENT that is responsible for this can cause unwanted results.

This option grants that the once selected unit system is kept and a corresponding hint will be displayed in case of (mostly unwanted) modifications.

Enable DSTV The shape and bolt designations in a parts list are named according to the latest DSTV standard.

Global Settings

47

Remove Modifications Drill holes e.g. which lie outside of the shape after a length modification has been performed, are deleted automatically.

Remove Links Logical links, which haven’t any meaning any more, are deleted when parts are deleted. During normal operation, this option should be turned on.

Remove References When the drawing is cleaned with the AutoCAD command “Purge”, in order to reduce the drawing size, unused shape references can be deleted after confirmation.

Check DWG Each time the drawing is opened, it is verified with regard to invalid group entries. In some cases, unexpectedly big drawings could be created which is avoided using this option.

Recalculate Parts Internal calculations are not carried out by ProSteel each time a part is „touched“, but only if it is really necessary. This shortens the processing time of some functions.

Group as a Whole This option permits selection of groups as a whole if the AutoCAD system variable “Pickstyle” has been set accordingly.

Convert Boolean In case of Boolean volume operations, the solid, which is responsible for the processing, will be parameterized. Thus it is possibly to modify the dimensions of the processing later, even if the solid responsible for the processing doesn’t exist any more (in the case it was e.g. only an auxiliary object and has been deleted again).

Ignore Detailing In case of Boolean deduction of parts, the component parts are deducted without detailing. Thus it is easier to switch over from Acis to Facet model and vice versa. However, it may be that not any detailing is carried out correctly.

Check Shape Lengths The shape lengths are automatically verified when a shape is inserted.

Check Hole Edges The admissible edge distances are automatically verified if drill holes are inserted.

Ignore Inner Contour

Description Layer Component parts are placed on the corresponding layer indicated in the description file

Execute Boolean When logical links are processed, the Boolean volume operations within the parts are carried out before a cut is made. The display of component parts can change by using this option.

Shapes as Acis New shapes are created by means of the Acis modeller.

Global Settings

48

Plates as Acis New plates are created by means of the Acis modeller.

Log Dwg Input A log file is created when a file is opened.

Grips

Shapes

Modify Length A grip is created for length change (or for position change) and all measurements can be altered.

Move Cuts A grip is created for the section. You might now have one grip for changing the length and one for changing the section.

Please note: When you move a section grip in a way to shorten the length of the shape, the length grip is moved simultaneously. When you move the length grip over the section grip, the shape will be cut off at the same spot, because you have not moved the sectional plane. When you move the section grip over the length grip, you eliminate the section from the shape (although the sectional plane remains at the section grip) the section grip “seizes” the sectional plane, while the length grip “seizes” the shape length. When you stretch a cut shape, the section angle within the shape remains the same, just like in reality.

Move Holes Drill holes receive a grip and can be moved. Otherwise they remain where inserted when the shape is stretched.

Global Settings

49

Move Polycuts Poly-sections receive a grip and can be moved (the original form of the poly-line is stored; therefore you only move the line). Otherwise, the section remains where inserted when the shape is stretched.

Only Along Center Line Shapes can only be stretched along their axis, i. e. a change of position is not possible.

Layout When you have entered a value > 0 in this input field, the length of the shape can only be changed via grips in preset modular steps. When you have entered 0, any kind of change can be performed.

Plates

Modify Plate Size A grip for changing thickness is displayed, in all other cases only form changes can be performed.

Move Cuts All other plates fields have same definition as the shape fields. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Global Settings

50

Shapes

With the exception of the additional dialog tabs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties. Offset Centre Line You specify the length beyond which the centre line has to

exceed the shape ends.

Maximum Shape If you enter a value bigger than 0 and you have checked the entry ‘Verify Shape Lengths’ under ‘Options’, and shapes are inserted, a message is displayed drawing your attention to the fact that the maximum delivery length is exceeded by some shapes. A hint dialog appears and the corresponding shapes are highlighted in colour.

Global Settings

51

Shapes...Labels

In the 3D-model a shape labelling can be displayed additionally, the configuration of which is set here.

Global Settings

52

Text Size Enter the text size of the shape labelling.

Distance Enter the distance between labelling and the upper side of the shape. However, don’t forget that the actual size depends on the set global scale of the drawing.

Position No. Prefix This designation is put in front of the position number.

Text Style The AutoCAD text style for the labelling text

Label The name of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Position Number The position number is additionally added to the labelling.

Length The length of the shape is additionally added to the labelling.

Note2 The content of the note2 field is output as well. If the ‘Below’ field is also checked, it will be displayed in a second line.

Global Settings

53

Dynamic The text of shape labelling is dynamically adjusted to the view for depictions in paper area if the “Viewport- support” has been activated. The advantage is that the text has the same size independent of the scale in the view window. Select the AutoCAD text style to be used for the labelling in the selection list Text Style.

Shape Type not to be labelled In this input field you enter the shape types, which have to be excluded from labelling. The advantage is that only shape sizes differing from a default value will be output individually.

Shapes...Sketch Display

Sketch Size

Sketch Length You can enter the length of sketch display from the centre in the Value input field below to outline the shape as solid. If you enter the value 0, the result will only be a cross-section display at the centre.

Global Settings

54

Relative Length You can enter the relative size of sketch display related t o the overall length of the shape in the Value input field below.

End Offset You can enter the distance of the end points of the displayed system line towards the actual insertion points in the ‘Value’ input field below.

Layout

Insertion Line The insertion line of the shape is displayed as system line of the shape (which could for example be the upper edge).

Middle Line The middle line of the shape is displayed as system line.

Here, you can see an example for a sketch display as well as some corresponding dimensions:

Global Settings

55

Shapes...Name Conventions

Input Fields Here, you can indicate a general default consisting of format

variables and constant designations for the indicated shape type in question. All format variables are placed in round brackets and start with a $-symbol outside the brackets. Thus they can be identified as variables at once. This is followed by the format specification for the desired dimension.

Format Specifications:

$(W) shape width $(H) shape height $(T) shape thickness $(D) outside diameter in case of round shapes or edge length at square shapes

Global Settings

56

Shapes...Flat Steel Selection

Select from List Dimensions of e.g. end plates which are preferably produced

of flat steel can only be selected from flat steels existing in the database. When the option is not activated, you can indicate any lengths and widths.

Metrical/Imperial

List Here, you select the kind of shape designation from the selection lists depending on the unit system of the model.

After decimal Here, you specify the accuracy of the dimensions in the list display depending on the unit system of the model.

E.g. it is possible to nevertheless use the American designations in models with metrical unit system and to have them displayed with a higher accuracy than metrical designations would normally permit.

Global Settings

57

Straight Plates

With the exception of the additional dialog tabs and some specifications, most of the settings can be found under the section describing the shape properties. Grid lengthwise Here you enter the lengthwise grid distances if a grid is to be

displayed.

Grid cross-wise Here you enter the cross-wise grid distances if a grid is to be displayed.

Grid Length This is where you specify the maximum grid length running from the outer edge of the plate or from existing inner contours. If you enter the value 0, the plate will be displayed with a complete grid. This option permits you to display the plate without complete grid. The display is limited to the contour edges. Shapes that are situated below remain visible by this way.

Grid Height Enter the grid height here.

Grid = Thickness The grid height always corresponds to the current plate thickness.

Global Settings

58

Offset Middle Line If you selected the display as middle line, this is where you enter a projection of the middle line over the two plate surfaces. In contrast to shapes, the centre line of plates is not running along the longitudinal direction but along the plate thickness.

Input Thickness You can indicate the plate thickness in the insertion dialog, as you like. Otherwise, only the values of a selection list are available (preference values).

Volume Weight The weight of the plates is determined by the volume.

Global Settings

59

Plates...Labels

Since this dialog tab is identical with the shape labelling, please refer to this chapter for the meaning of the input fields. Plates...Description

Global Settings

60

Standard Plate Name Name of the plate when it has been created by means of ProSteel.

Desired Plate Name Name of the plate which has to be used for PPS- / NC-output.; Keep this name later, otherwise there will be compatibility problems with output.

Description of Name Here, you specify the format default of the plate name as it is used e.g. at labelling and in the property fields.

Position Flags Here, you specify the format default of the plate name in position flags.

Export Here, you specify the format default of the plate name at the export of parts list data. Format Default Structure:

The names like e.g. $(N) serve as variable for the current value of the corresponding plate and are explained in the dialog itself. The ‘Name’ of the plate is the constant part like plate, grating, etc.

In the input fields of the corresponding description, you can enter a text consisting of the variables and any other characters. When the program is running, the variables are replaced by the current values e.g. for the length and the other characters will be kept as in the original input.

Round at... Here, you specify the accuracy to which the specifications concerning dimensions of the plate name have to be rounded. This doesn’t have any influence on the actual dimensions of the plate model.

Length greatest... The greatest value of dimensions is always regarded as plate length. This doesn’t depend on how you inserted the plate.

Global Settings

61

Plates...Calculation

Here, a dialog tab opens where you can determine the method for calculating the weight of the plate resp. the surface to be painted. These specifications influence the result in the parts list output.

The values can be defined according to the exact form, according to the rubber tape-method (as if a rubber tape was tightened around the plate) or according to the smallest surrounding rectangle. For plates having a grid (e.g. to display a gridiron) you can reduce the weight to the percentage value indicated in the input field Weight at Grid.

Global Settings

62

Bolts

Layout Bolts can be inserted into the drawing with different display

settings: as Middle Line, Line with Circle, Extruded Circles or in real Display.

Back to Back permits automatic bolted connections back-to-back; the bolts are guided through all parts (penetrating bolts).

Global Workloose It is not possible to set an individual clearance in the dialogs, but a uniform value is used instead.

Round...to When the bolt is attached, the found clamping length is rounded to a clamping length which can be divided through the indicated value.

Round bigger... The rounding is set to the next bigger value. The found clamping length is not decreased, but always increased.

Search smaller... If a bolt cannot be created with the found size, the next smaller bolt will be searched and used.

Bolt Weight The bolt weight is calculated approximately unless a weight has been indicated in the database.

Global Settings

63

Work Frame

Frame The outer frame will be displayed.

Diagonal The diagonal will be drawn.

Cut Plane The cutting planes are displayed.

Origin The coordinate system of the working area (ECS) will be displayed.

Area Name The frame text will be displayed.

Dynamic... The frame text will be displayed dynamically so that axis designations can be read well in 3D, too.

Size Adjustment The frame text will be adjusted to the particular size of the display.

Update Shapes Shapes inserted on work frame axes are moved as well if the work area is modified.

Left Designation The left axis designation will be displayed.

Right Designation The right axis designation will be displayed.

Global Settings

64

Assembly

Depiction Indicates how an assembly object has to be displayed in the

drawing. It may be displayed as UCS-symbol, sphere, envelopping box or not at all.

Character Size Sets the symbol size of an assembly object to be displayed in the drawing.

Global Settings

65

Values

Resolution: The input fields are used to specify the resolution for creating

circular volumes. The higher the resolution, the more detailed the display but the computer processing speed decreases. Use high-resolution settings only for large scales and important details. Due to some special features in the volume-modeller, you should only specify odd numbers here. However, this only influences the Facet Modeler.

2D Subpart Specify the size of the pick helper symbol for detailed construction groups. You need the pick helpers to access the individual parts of construction groups in the workshop drawing after the detailing.

Clip Plane Distance Specify the front and rear section plane distances of the object view.

Rounding Stiffener Thickness Here, you specify the accuracy the plate thickness of the calculated stiffener thickness has to be rounded at stiffeners in connections. An unnecessary accuracy can thus be avoided resp. only certain plate thicknesses, which are available in the workshop, will be used.

Global Settings

66

Front/Rear Distance Here, you specify the front or rear distance of the sectional area which is used as standard value for a limited visual depth (sectional area).

Specific Weight Steel Here you define the specific weight of steel to be used as basis for weight calculation.

Logical Links

Create Passive The active or passive links referencing the corresponding

components are created.

No Update Any changes made to a component are not passed on to its associated components using an update.

On Request You are prompted to indicate if any changes made to a component are to be passed on to its associated components using an update.

Automatic Update Any changes made to a component are immediately passed on to its associated components using an update.

Global Settings

67

Lock Part Properties The part properties created under the control of a logical link can only be read but not edited.

Structural Elements... The automatic update of all structural elements such as bracing, staircases, etc. is suppressed.

Allow additional data You can enter additional data of logical links e.g. an identification code.

Revision Check

Length Tolerance

Tolerances Here, you specify the tolerances to be used for comparing the component parts. You can specify the values for line length as well as the comparison of drill holes, lengths and weight. Modifications are determined by means of a type of comparison which is also used for positioning.

Global Settings

68

Single Parts

At Changes Here, you specify the behaviour of the single part position number at a changed part. Keep – The position number is not changed. Confirm – The position number is only deleted if this is individually confirmed for each part. Delete – The position number is always deleted.

Storing Here, you specify what has to happen with the invalid (former) position number at a changed single part. No Storing – The position number is ignored. Confirm – The position number is only stored as original position if this is individually confirmed for each part. Save – The position number is saved as original position.

Groups

Here, you specify the behaviour of the group position number at a changed part. The possible specifications correspond to those for single parts and are described there.

Others

Modify Flag The part is only checked as modified if it has already a position number.

Global Settings

69

Display

Viewport Here you can set the support of optimum depiction when

working with view windows in the paper area. Without Support – No adaptations are made within the depiction. Only for normal output – The depiction of the shape labelling is e.g. adapted to the depiction scale if dynamic adjustment option has been activated. Complete Support – A complete support of the depiction takes place.

Shape Clipping The active UCS plane (top view) displays the cross-section of the object tapered to it theoretically. This option should be turned on. When this option is switched off, you do not get a correct cross-section top view of an object if it starts below and ends above sectional plane.

Plate Clipping This option is identical with ShapeClipping, but it is only valid for plates.

Suppress... Any shape labelling inserted into the model is hidden if the function “Hide / Shade” is selected.

Global Settings

70

Cache 2D The result of all line calculations effected by the volume-modeller (e.g. at a 2D-depiction, object snap, etc) is written into an intermediate storage. A new calculation is only made in case of modifications. Thus the processing speed for the determination of AutoCAD- object snap-points especially in case of complex construction groups is considerably increased.

No Bolts... Bolts are not displayed when the function “Hide / Shade” is selected.

Real Bolts... Bolts are displayed as real objects when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be turned on during normal operation.

Real Arc... Curved shapes (arcs) are displayed as real objects when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected. This option should be turned on during normal operation

Position Flags at Shade All position flags placed in the model will not be hidden when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Additional Lines at Shade All lines in the model, like centre lines, gravity lines or other construction lines will not be hidden when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Workframe at Shade All work frames within the model will not be hidden when the function “Hide/Shade” is selected.

Structural Objects at Shade Structural objects are displayed when the function ‘Hide/Shade’ is selected.

Display Hole Holes are always displayed as polygons consisting of lines, even if it is a matter of real holes in ACIS-objects.

No Subpart Grips There is no output of subpart grips at plotting.

No System Lines There is no output of system lines of structural elements at plotting.

Global Settings

71

Colours

Input Fields Here, you set the colours to be used for the different display

markings and objects of the program by indicating the AutoCAD colour number. Please refer to the corresponding commands for the meaning of the different markings.

COLOUR SELECTION You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection.

Global Settings

72

Monitor Colours

Background The background colour of the monitor.

Foreground The colour which is normally used for displaying objects in the monitor.

Symbol Colour The colour which is normally used for displaying the pick points in the monitor.

Marking The colour which is used for displaying highlighted objects or pick points in the monitor

COLOUR SELECTION You can also select the colour in a comfortable way by clicking the corresponding input field and then loading the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection.

Global Settings

73

Configuration / Iso-Views

Here you specify how to set the global iso-views of the program. To define a view, zoom or turn the model into the view to be used as iso-view. Then, press the button and the pre-set values will be adopted as pre-set view iso1 up to Iso5. These views are also available in the DetailCenter.

Global Settings

74

Configuration...Layer

This dialog tab is used to realize the configuration of ProSteel. Here you set the layer names, colours and line types.

Global Settings

75

Configuration...Flat Steel Selection

This dialog is used to set the preset files for flat and wide-flat steel from which the flat steels have to be taken in the further run of the program.

Global Settings

76

Dialog Settings

Expert Mode Here, you can configure different display properties in the

dialogs. The following options are available for selection: Beginner, Middle and Expert. This setting has an influence on the display of constructional graphics in the dialogs and more.

Accuracy Here you specify the value for the display accuracy of lengths, angles and other values. If you selected the option “Use AutoCAD settings”, the accuracy depends on the system settings (LUPREC). Otherwise, you specify the desired value here.

RollOver Here, you switch on RollOver for the dialogs.

Input of Hole Dia You can specify any hole diameter. If this field is not checked, you can only specify hole diameters from a given list.

Dynamic Point Input This option permits dynamic zoom and pan during the picking of points or lines.

Tabs one after the other If there isn’t enough place, the selection tabs for the pages of a dialog are displayed one after the other instead of next to each other.

Global Settings

77

No Updates Switches off the dynamic update in the dialogs. The advantage is during operation in the case of very complex calculating processes. To permit a manual release of update an additional button with an exclamation mark is displayed in the command line of some dialogs.

Coloured Icons For some symbols different colours are displayed instead of the symbols of one colour (blue).

RETURN to select all ALL parts in the model are selected at a query when you enter RETURN in the selection functions of ProSteel.

Global Settings

78

Dialog Settings...ToolTips

Suppress... The ToolTips are not displayed in the dialogs.

Delay The period (in milliseconds) until a ToolTip of an input field is displayed at all.

Display Time The period (in milliseconds) how long a visible ToolTip of an input field is displayed.

Global Settings

79

Dialog Settings...Classes/Families

Here you enter the standard values for the number of available selection, display, area classes and part families.

Global Settings

80

Dialog Settings..Match Properties

In this dialog, you can specify the default settings for the properties of individual object types in ProSteel. Select the object type in the Selection List. The depiction of the dialog tab will be adopted. Please refer to the descriptions of the different object types for the meaning of the entries. The default settings are used by MatchProp-command in AutoCAD.

Global Settings

81

Configuration Files

The basic configuration of ProSteel is effected via different files which you can see by corresponding selection and which you can edit using the integrated text editor. DELETE TEMPORARY FILES

Click this button to delete any existing files in the temporary directory. By deleting the temporary files, you reset all command dialogs to the original state at delivery.

DELETE TEMPLATES

Click this button to delete all existing data in the template directory. However, please remember that in this case all dialog templates created by you will be irrevocably deleted. Important templates such as

e.g. certain company standards should be saved elsewhere.

Global Settings

82

Modeling and Parts Lists

83

B Modeling and Parts Lists

Modeling and Parts Lists

84

Layer Functions

85

B.1 Layer Functions

The program is equipped with an automatic layer control. Normally you don’t have to take care of this. If you use the program commands to create different objects such as shapes, dimensions, welding symbols, etc., these are created on their own layer. The activation, deactivation, and switching of layers is one of the most frequently performed tasks when using AutoCAD. ProSteel supplies its own switching functions for this purpose. Switching to the most important layers can be done with just one click, and without long searches. Select the command by clicking its associated button or enter PS_LAYER from the keyboard with the indicated parameter. Work Frame On: LFRAMEON

The layer with the frame for the work area is activated.

Work Frame Off: LFRAMEOFF

The layer with the frame for the work area is deactivated.

Element Layer On: LELEMON

The layers for the main elements are activated. These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and bolts.

Element Layer Off: LELEMOFF

The layers for the main elements are deactivated. These are the layers for shape, roof/wall shapes, plates, construction lines, and bolts.

Layer Functions

86

Additional Layer On: LADDION The layers for the additional elements are activated. These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights, welding symbols, etc.

Additional Layer Off: LADDIOFF

The layers for the additional elements are deactivated. These are the layers for dimensioning, midlines, position flags, relative heights, welding symbols, etc.

Object Layer Current: LOBJECT

The layer for a freely selectable element becomes the current layer. You can select the element by clicking it.

Object Layer Off: LOBJECTOFF

The layer for a freely selectable element is deactivated. You can select the element by clicking it.

Construction Lines Current: LCONSTAKT (black lines)

The layer for the construction lines becomes the current layer.

Construction Lines On: LCONSTON (brown lines)

The layer for the construction lines is activated.

Layer Functions

87

Construction Lines Off: LCONSTOFF

The layer for the construction lines is deactivated. Layer 0 Current: LNULL The AutoCAD-Layer ‘0’ becomes the current layer.

Layer Functions

88

Construction Utilities

89

B.2 Construction Utilities

B.2.1 Construction lines

The program offers several options to create construction lines, divide distances evenly or measure distances which all serve as design and constructional aids. These lines are created on their own layer (default is PS_CONST), so that all of them can be jointly hidden or deleted.

Direction Indicates how the direction of the construction line is defined.

2 Points You have to pick 2 points.

Line You pick a line.

Point Line You pick a line for direction and a point for position.

Line Type You can either use standard lines the length of which is determined by projection or X-lines which always run up to the edge of the screen.

Distance The distance of the construction line(s) from the displayed line in case of parallel or vertical construction lines; resp. the distance of one line to the other if several lines have been generated.


90

Scale Distance / spacing information is converted to the scale of your drawing indicated here. This allows actual dimensions to be used.

Angle The construction lines are rotated by the angle indicated here.

Number The number of construction lines or divisions created simultaneously when using the Divide function.

Offset The construction lines are extended at both ends by this value with respect to the displayed reference line.

Only in Plane All construction lines are only created on the current UCS (user coordinate system)-plane. In addition, possible picked points are projected to the current UCS-plane as well.

Create Reference Line A construction line is drawn on the reference line as well (even for a non-existing line indicated with only 2 points).

Loop The function is repeated until the procedure is interrupted.

This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-x-axis, either at the picked point or with the selected distance to the picked reference.

This creates a construction line parallel towards the current UCS-y-axis, either at the picked point or with the selected distance to the picked reference.

This creates parallel construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.

This creates vertical construction lines for a reference line selected or displayed via pick points.

The reference line created by two pick points is divided into equal sections with the help of construction lines running perpendicular to this distance.

A 3D distance is measured and displayed in different variations. Starting and end point have to be picked.


91

A 3D distance is measured and displayed in different variations. The end point of the previous measuring is used as starting point of the current measuring.

All construction lines created up to now on the layer are deleted.


92

Direct Use of Some Settings You may also use selected settings to create construction lines directly and to create construction lines much more rapidly. The number and type of the lines depends on the Number and Line Type settings as described in the previous dialog window regarding construction lines command PS_CONST. The commands remain active until terminated by pressing the ESC-key or the right mouse button. HINT: The construction lines are created only within the current user coordinate system plane. It is best to use them only in the views. PS_CONST_HOR

This command creates a horizontal construction line. Click a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_VER

This command creates a vertical construction line. Click a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_PAP

This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line. First click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.

PS_CONST_PAE

This command creates a construction line running parallel with a reference line using a specified distance. First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the side of the reference line along which the parallel line is to be created.

PS_CONST_SAP

This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line. Click the reference line and then on a point the construction line is to intersect.


93

PS_CONST_SAE

With Distance: This command creates a perpendicular construction line for a reference line. With Distance from a Reference Point: First enter the desired distance and then click the reference line. Finally, click the reference point and then on the side of the reference point where the perpendicular line is to be created.

PS_CONST_DVD

This command divides a reference line into equal segments and creates corresponding perpendicular construction lines along this line (also utilizing the start and end point). First enter the number of sections and then click the reference line.

PS_CONST_DEL This command deletes all construction lines drawn up to then on the layer created for the construction lines.


94

B.2.2 Measure of distances

Choose the Measure command if you would like to measure a distance. Then click two points, which returns the following dialog box showing a few measurement results.

The area ‘Coordinates in UCS’ shows the measuring results regarding the current user coordinate system!

Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points. Distance in X, Y, Z is the distance in the direction of the respective coordinate axis. Dist Direct is the direct distance of the points. Angle is the angle from the start to end point in reference to the user coordinate x-axis.

The section ‘Coordinates in WCS’ shows the measuring results regarding the current world coordinate system.

Start or End X, Y, Z are the coordinates of the two measuring points in the WCS and Cos X, Y, Z is the so-called ‘directional cosine’ of the vector from start to end point (a mathematical size which normally hasn't any further meaning for you).

3D Object Views

95

B.3 3D Object Views

B.3.1 Object View / Object-UCS

The object view is a very important tool because it allows you to look at nearly any ProSteel-object from a certain direction. The object view command is used to align the UCS plane on an object, which results in a perpendicular view on this plane. The origin of the UCS can either be perpendicular from the pick point to the centerline or be situated at the pick point itself. This depends on the selected setting ‘Object View’ or ‘Centered Object View’. The object is aligned in such a way as to center the pick point on the screen and align its insertion direction parallel to the X-axis. This means that a shape inserted into a work frame at a slant is displayed as running horizontally, and the surrounding work frame is rotated accordingly. HINT: If the view does not match the model position select the command again (e. g., using the right mouse button with the context menu) and confirm immediately with RETURN. The view is aligned. Alternatively, you can keep the ALT-key pressed while selecting the view direction. Thus, the view is forced to align as well. The command ‘Object-UCS’ runs analogously to the command ‘Object-View’. In contrast to object view however, this command only sets the UCS on the selected view direction. The view itself is not modified.

3D Object Views

96

The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Object View’ has been selected: Pick the steel component defining the view or hit RETURN to align the view. After part selection, coloured coordinate crosshairs are displayed on the selected component and the following message appears in the command line: Select the desired axis. Now use your mouse to click the corresponding coloured circle and the object view is displayed with the selected direction.

You want an object view on front. Pick the shape while keeping the ALT-key pressed, clicking one of these lines on the front,...

..and coordinate crosshairs appear at the pick point. You can now select the matching colour by clicking it.

The view is displayed, the UCS’s origin is aligned and parallel with the front.

3D Object Views

97

B.3.2 Surface View / Surface-UCS

In principle, this command is an object view; thus you can refer to the above chapter for the basic description. In contrast to the object view that only allows 6 possible view directions (rectangular or parallel to shape direction), the surface view offers you the option to look on each surface of the component part. In case of special shapes with sloping surfaces it is easier to obtain the suitable view. The picture below shows you an example of a surface view: By clicking the displayed line (component edge), you can get a view on the surface 1 or 2.

When you select the function, you first have to click the desired component part at a bordering edge between two surfaces. Then the coordinate crosshairs are displayed at this position and you can select the desired view by clicking an axis. If you have selected the command PS_FACE_VIEW_CEN, the origin of the view is situated in the middle of the clicked line.

Change only UCS Analogously to the command Object-UCS you can only set the current UCS on the desired surface view as well without modifying the actual view. Here, too you can choose between the picked and the centred origin.

3D Object Views

98

B.3.3 Global View

This command shows the 3D model in a global view display. The default is an isometric display of the model diagonally from the right front. However, four other global view variants with their own direct calls are possible as well: PS_GLOBAL_VIEW2 ... PS_GLOBAL_VIEW5. The different overviews are specified in the Global Settings

3D Object Views

99

B.3.4 Top View

The top view command is identical with the AutoCAD command “vpoint 0,0,1” , i.e. you are viewing the current UCS-plane vertically. This command switches to the true model top view from within the global view. It does not have a function in the other views because you already view the plane vertically. Remember the difference between this top view and the top view used for a work frame with roof:

3D Object Views

100

B.3.5 Free View

The ’Free View’ command creates a model view where you select a source and target point. The view then presented appears to be from your source point to the target point. The following message appears in the command line after the command ‘Free View’ has been selected: Select the target point of the line of vision direction. Now you determine the target point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it. The following message appears in the command line: Select the source point of the line of vision direction. Specify the source point by entering the coordinates or by clicking it and the view is visible on the screen. The cutting plane command is activated. Changing the distances is not possible here and can only be done using the global settings of ProSteel.

3D Object Views

101

B.3.6 Cutting Plane

Working with a 3D model can quickly turn complex, especially if many parts are spatially stacked. ProSteel offers a command to hide parts in front of and behind the current work plane – the cutting plane. This facilitates the design process since only those objects are visible that are close to the same work plane and prevents the accidental manipulation of stacked shapes. When selecting one of the defined views or an object view, such objects are automatically hidden, provided that you have not turned off this command globally. Sometimes it is however also reasonable to look at all component parts of the model in the depth – to have an overall orientation. This is the reason why this function can be switched on and off.

Principle of Cutting Planes When the function ‘Cut Plane’ is active, only those parts of the work frame are shown that are located within the limits of the cut plane distance. The cut plane distance is the distance between imaginary delimitation in front of and behind the active UCS plane.

Off The cut plane command is deactivated.

All component parts are shown. When switching to another view, the command is activated again, provided that it has not been turned off globally.

3D Object Views

102

On The cut plane command is activated. Only those component parts that are located within the delimitation are shown. If the command has been turned off globally, it is turned on again when switching to another view.

Flip The cut plane command is alternately switched on or off globally. This command makes sense when you do not want to work with the cut plane command for a long time.

Distance Input of the cut plane distances First enter the rear distance and then the front distance. When you enter the distance 0, no cut planes are created. When switching to one of the standard views, these values are overwritten.

3D-model of a stage construction in the global view (Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched on cut plane command (standard setting) (Object-) view on the upper stage frame with switched off cut plane command

3D Object Views

103

B.3.7 Perspective View

3D-design usually utilizes the isometric 3D depiction. This means that a line located very far back appears to be as long on the screen as the distance located further to the front. In reality, however, distances appear to shrink the farther they are removed from an object. This effect can be simulated with the perspective view. The perspective view is a form of free view using a fictional camera. You are prompted for the position of source point (camera) and target point (motif, centre of picture) and this determine the line of vision. The parameter Focal Distance is used to indicate - as in photography - the focus of the camera. Larger values are used to zoom the object as if using a telephoto lens. Smaller values create a wide-angle effect. The parameter Distance is used to subsequently change the distance to the target point and move back and forth along the indicated line of vision. If you select the command, the following message appears in the command line: Select the desired function Off/Distance/Focal Distance/ <Set>. You can now select a function or select the command directly using the corresponding button: Set The perspective view is activated.

This requires that you first enter the target and source point of the view and then the focal distance of the camera. The program switches now to the perspective view.

Off The perspective view is deactivated. The program switches now back to the isometric view.

Focal Distance Here you can change the focal distance of the camera.

Distance Here you change the distance of the camera from the target point.

Lines of vision changes are only possible using coordinates and the pick function is deactivated. Changing to the model global view does not yield the desired result until the perspective view is deactivated again.

3D Object Views

104

Remember that the perspective view is only a display view and does not allow any changes. For that, switch back to the isometric display. In the following, you will see some examples of the difference between the perspective and the isometric display as well as the effect of the focal distance on the isometric display: Isometric Display

3D Global View Isometric Display The point down on the left (0,0,0) is also the point of origin of the world coordinate system.

Front View Isometric Display You see a view with the settings Target point = (5000,0,5000) Source point = (5000,-100,5000)

3D Object Views

105

Perspective Display

Front View Perspective View Focal distance = 50 The source and target points are first set identically to the points of the isometric view. However, since the picture is much too large, the distance from camera to target is increased to 30000. This corresponds with the source point (5000,-30000,5000).

Front View Perspective View Focal distance = 100 The focal distance of the camera is increased but the picture shows only a section of the result.

3D Object Views

106

Move and Copy Parts

107

B.4 Move and Copy Parts

The notes about the AutoCAD standard commands mention the fact that ProSteel objects are treated as AutoCAD elements, and can be copied or moved the same way. This is correct, but the ProSteel copy and move commands offer you additional help by offering the option of limiting the direction of the move. Apart from that, you can specifically take the group structure into consideration. Using AutoCAD object snaps in a view may result in points being selected that are not in the proper plane. The ProSteel copy and move commands prevent this by limiting the direction of the move to the current user coordinate system plane or even to one axis direction. If several individual components have been assembled into construction modules or groups, this command can be used to process the entire group by selecting just one part of the group. This will eliminate unnecessary searching and collecting of the parts within a selection set. After the command has been selected, a dialog box will become available featuring the following options, each single tab permitting a certain action.

This button carries out the selected action for single parts

without taking into consideration a possible group.

This button carries out the action for complete groups. In the options, you can specify whether this selection has to be made only when the main part is picked or for each part of the group.

Ico_TransformSingle.bmp

Move and Copy Parts

108

B.4.1 Move/Copy

Alignment Here, you select the move direction of the actions. A cone shows you the move direction. 3D – The selected elements can be moved in all three dimensions. 2D – The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved within this UCS-plane. X-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the X-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the X-axis within this UCS-plane. Y-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Y-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved parallel to the Y-axis within this UCS-plane. Z-Axis - The start and end points of the move are perpendicular to the Z-axis of the current UCS-plane. This means that shapes are only moved in vertical direction to this UCS-plane. Free – You can move the selected elements in any of the three dimensions. The elements “drag” with the crosshairs and thus can be visibly moved.

Multiple The elements can be moved several times.

Move and Copy Parts

109

B.4.2 Turn

Axis Here, you select the desired rotation axis.

Free Axis – The rotation axis can be determined by clicking two points. Object Axis – One of the (parallel) coordinate axes of the element UCS is specified as the rotation axis. By specifying a starting point after selection of the parts you can move it in parallel direction.

Object Axis Here, you select the desired part axis if the ‘Object Axis’ option has been specified. The selected axis is displayed at the object selected first in colour for your orientation.

Angle Specify the rotation angle. Select either one of the defined angles or the ‘Free’ field for indication of any rotation angle you like.

Turn+Copy A copy of the component parts is created first which then will be turned. Otherwise, the original parts are rotated to the new position.

Move and Copy Parts

110

B.4.3 Mirror

Method Enter the desired mirror plane here.

2-Points – You can determine the plane by clicking two points. The mirror plane is then perpendicular to the current view and aligned with this line (for this purpose, it is best to use a perpendicular view of the component). 3 Points – The plane is indicated by clicking three points in space.

Mirror+Copy A copy of the component parts are created first which then will be mirrored. Otherwise, the original parts will be mirrored.

Move and Copy Parts

111

B.4.4 Align

Use this command to align a component or an entire construction group in respect to a certain plane or coordinate system. Specify two coordinate systems, which are then aligned congruently with one another. The calculated required movement and rotation are applied to the selected parts. You can determine the coordinate systems either by specifying three points for each one or via element surfaces. There, the point of origin is always regarded as the bottom point of the surface.

Method Determine the two planes either by specifying three points or

via part surfaces.

Align+Copy A copy of the component parts is created first which will be aligned afterwards. Otherwise, the original parts will be aligned.

Surface Method When applying the surface method, you can only make use of one element. Select the element at an edge neighbouring the desired surface. Then, you obtain a coloured display of the surfaces available for selection. The target surface is selected analogously.

Move and Copy Parts

112

3-Point Method If ‘3-Point’ was selected, specify the original position after object selection by clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis as a reference position. Then indicate the desired new position by clicking the origin as well as a point on the X- and Y-axis. The parts are then aligned according to the specifications with the origin points being identical. The example below shows how the left shape was aligned on the right shape as a copy. It is moved and rotated at the same time.

Move and Copy Parts

113

B.4.5 Clone

Use this command to transfer the manipulations performed on a component or an entire construction group to other components. A prerequisite for cloning is that the parts have a position number and that these match. The manipulations are transferred in such a way that all components are identical again after the transfer has been concluded. However, there is the option to limit the manipulations to be transferred to certain types such as only drill holes, etc. For example, use this command to apply the same modifications within a model at a later time. For example, if a hangar has been constructed with many identical supports and holes have to be added later to each support, they may be added to just one support and then transferred to all of the others.

Cuts All normal cuts are transferred. This includes the mitred cuts

as well.

Drill Holes All drilled holes are transferred.

PolyCut All poly-cuts are transferred.

Notches All outlets are transferred.

Boolean All Boolean operations are transferred.

Move and Copy Parts

114

When you start this action, you first have to select the component with the manipulations to be transferred. Then select the components, which are to accept the manipulations. However, only parts with the same position number as the original part will be considered. Please remember that the transfer of the manipulations refers to the coordinate system of the parts. For example, if you look at a shape whose parts coordinate system has its origin on the right side and you would like to transfer a drill hole to a part 100 mm from the right but its parts coordinate system originates from the left, this component will receive the new boring 100 mm from the left as well.

Move and Copy Parts

115

B.4.6 Rotate

This command permits a rotated copy with vertical offset to distribute e.g. the steps of a spiral staircase. Two methods can be applied. The number of steps and the angle between the steps, or by an angle area and the steps to be distributed within this area either/or defines the rotation.

Method Defines the kind of distribution.

Number Either the total amount or the number via the angle area.

Angle Either the angle between the steps or the complete angle.

Vertical Offset Vertical offset between the different elements.

The construction on the left has been created by rotating the flat steel around the central tube.

Move and Copy Parts

116

B.4.7 Settings

Swap Effect The meaning of the ALT-key during selection of the parts is changed. If these functions are directly selected via the menu, normally the selection as single parts is activated. If you keep the ALT-key pressed during selection, this has the effect that as group is selected.

Group only... The selection as complete group is only effected if the main part has been selected. Otherwise the selection is made at any part of a group.

Display / Assign parts

117

B.5 Display / Assign parts

B.5.1 Hide

This command can be used to hide components or whole groups, which means that the parts are made invisible, and cannot be selected. This command permits you to hide only selected components or to show only selected components and to hide all others. This provides a clearer view of the model. HINT: This command is most practical if individual parts are to be hidden from view. To hide/show entire groups of parts it is better to use display classes feature. PS_Hide

Select the parts to be hidden after selecting the command. The parts are no longer visible after pressing the ENTER key or using the right mouse button. The command →’Regenerate’ (not to be confused with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate”) will switch all parts back to visible.

PS_Hide_Exclude

This function is working just the other way round than the previous one. After selecting the command, you can choose the parts which you don’t want to hide. After pressing the ENTER key or using the right mouse button, all other parts are hidden.

PS_Hide_Group

This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is that the whole group is hidden, if you only selected one part of the group.

PS_Hide_Group_Exclude

This function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only difference is that the whole group remains visible, if you only selected one part of the group.

PS_Hide_Plane

This function is working like PS_HIDE. The only difference is that the whole component parts of a work plane are hidden, if you only selected one work plane.


118

PS_Hide_Exclude_Plane

This function is working like PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE. The only difference is that the whole component parts of a work plane remain visible, if you only selected one work plane.


119

B.5.2 Regenerate

This command shows all components hidden by the user or hidden automatically by the program. You have to use this command, for example, to generate a parts list since all processed parts are automatically hidden there for control purposes. This command is not identical with the AutoCAD-command “Regenerate” since the AutoCAD command does not reactivate the components again.


120

B.5.3 Display Classes

You can organize ProSteel-objects from different layers into ”Display Classes”, which are independent of the AutoCAD layers. Contrary to the command →’Hide’, which forces you to select all parts individually, here you can select entire object groups and make them visible or hidden. This will simplify the view of the model dislayed on screen. For example, bracings, bay rails, curtain walls, etc. could each be assigned to a display class and displayed or hidden as needed. Each element can exist in only one class at a time. This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another. After selection of the command, the following dialog opens.

Class Name The available display classes are listed and the desired class

may be selected. In the field Status you see if the elements are currently shown (On) or hidden (Off). You can edit the content of the field Class Name by double-clicking it.

Status Here, you see the current status of a display class. You can modify the status by double-clicking on it. It is also possible to highlight several lines and to carry out the modification for all highlighted lines.


121

This button permits to hide parts without creating an assignment to a display class. See PS_HIDE

Click this button to show all individually hidden parts again.See PS_REGEN.

The elements of the selected display class are hidden.

This command shows the elements of the selected display class.

This command hides the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.

This command shows the elements of all other display classes except for the selected ones.

Click on this button to assign elements to a display class. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be assigned to the display class in the model.

Click on this button to remove elements from a display class. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the button, select the elements to be removed from the display class in the model.

Count Indicates the number of available display classes. If you increase the value here, this increases the number of available classes in the drawing.

Complete Groups If this field is checked, the complete group will be selected at selection of elements, even if you select only one part of this group.


122

B.5.4 Area Classes

ProSteel objects may also be assigned to one of the “Area Classes” in addition to the display classes. While the display classes serve to present the 3D constructions in a clearly arranged manner, the area classes are better suited for a logical structuring of the model into construction sections or similar divisions. These “Area Classes” can be used as selection and sorting criteria during the detailing process. Each element can exist in only one of these area classes. This means that it will be removed from one class if it is assigned to another. Area and display classes are completely independent from one another. The function works analogously to the display classes. Area classes can be hidden as well. Please note that in case of overlapping with the display classes the last carried out action will be valid. This means if you hide parts with display classes, they can be displayed again by means of assigned and displayed area classes.


123

B.5.5 Part Families

The part families are another structuring variant of the construction. The belonging to family classes permits an automatic allocation of position number prefixes as well as a differentiation of the constructive groups by different colours. In addition, components belonging to one family class can have a common detail style for detailing. Each element can exist only in one family class. This means if it is assigned to another family class, it will be removed from its former family class. New is the possibility to assign certain colours and line types for detailing to the members of a part family. For example, you can assign another colour to the girders of a 2D-depiction than that assigned to the supports.

Display List The currently available family classes are listed as well as the

linked defaults of colour, prefix etc.

Single Parts If you click on a button of this line, the parts are treated as single parts at selection. In this mode, all data of the family classes will be adopted into the components.

Groups If you click on a button of this line, only the component groups are treated at selection of the parts. In this mode, only the prefixes of the family classes will be adopted for the position number of the group.

Both If you click on a button of this line, both the single parts and the groups are treated at selection of the parts.


124

Click on these buttons to assign elements to a part family. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be assigned to the family class in the model.

Click on these buttons to remove elements from a part family. The desired class must be selected in the list first. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be removed from the family class in the model

Click on these buttons to transfer the modifications of the entries in the part family to the component parts. After clicking the buttons, select the elements to be updated in the model.

Count Indicates the number of available part families. If you increase the value here, this increases the number of available part families in the drawing.

By double-clicking on a line, you can modify the definition of the part family.


125

Defining Part Families or Changing Properties Any number of different family classes may be defined, to which the components may be assigned. To create a class, just double-click an empty list entry. A dialog opens where you can define the properties. The same method applies to changing the properties of an existing entry.

Description: Enter the name of your part family here. The entry appears in

the selection list and the part properties.

Pos Prefix: Here, you enter the pos. prefix, which appears in front of each position number itself if the part belongs to this family.

Colour Enter the colour of the part family here. Indicate the AutoCAD colour number or select it by clicking the SELECT button.


126

Detail Style Enter the detail style to be assigned to a component part belonging to this family. Enter the name of the detail style or select it by clicking the SELECT button. Note that assigning detail styles normally should be done inside the DetailCenter. If the DetailCenter is open, the component part list has to be updated after modification of shape properties.

Select Line Type Here, you indicate the line type determined for the 2D-depiction. The settings can be defined individually for visible, invisible and center lines.

Detail Colour Here you specify the colour to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.

Line Type Here, you specify the line type to be used for 2D-depiction of the selected line.

Please note that the 2D line settings are only activated if the component parts are displayed in 2D. These settings don’t have any effects on the model display.


127

B.5.6 Process Status

The process status of the part is another possibility to check or classify the component parts in the drawing. This function helps you to check the parts in colour according to certain criteria and thus to display the current process status in production resp. installation in the CAD model.

Colours the parts according to their process status

The colour of the parts is removed.


128

A certain process status is assigned to the parts

The process status is removed from the parts


129

The preset file is edited (see below)

Permanent If this button is switched on, the colour cannot be removed from the parts.

Preset File You can define the preset values of the process status function (the names as well as the corresponding colours) in a text file. This can be seen and modified here.


130

B.5.7 Search Parts

Use this command to search for parts and components within a model, which meet certain requirements. You can define several conditions, which have to be met at the same time. If these conditions are met, the part is either marked or all parts not meeting the requirements are hidden.

Fields This list displays the search terms available to you by clicking

them.

Operator Select the respective condition operator between search term and comparison value.

Compare Value Here you indicate the value that has to be filled. Only values existing in the drawing are offered. In case of names, you can also indicate an asterisk (*) for any other characters such as e.g. HE* for HEA,HEB etc.

Buttons Use the following buttons to combine the filter condition with different logical operators.

Complete Filter Condition Here, the complete filter expression is displayed after insertion of all filter conditions. You can reset or restore the last step using the buttons or you can delete the complete filter condition.


131

Specifications Select the action that has to be carried out with the parts found.

Mark If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are marked in colour. Use the command ’Global Settings / colours’ to specify what colours to apply.

Hide If this field is checked all parts not satisfying the search condition are hidden. The hidden parts become visible again using the command ‘Regenerate‘.

Zoom If this field is checked, all parts satisfying the search condition are automatically zoomed to. A dialog opens permitting you to indicate the display size (zoom factor) and to make an iteration of the different found parts using the keys << and >>.

Condition List This list displays the current search conditions linked with

AND.

Click this button to add a search condition formed from the selected search term, operator and comparison value to the condition list.

Click this button to start the search. First, you have to select all objects to be included in the search, then the result will be highlighted or hidden, depending on your choice.


132

Define Search Condition A search condition always consists of the search term (e.g. length), the condition operator (e.g. >= for “greater than or equal”), and a comparison value (e.g. 2000). For example, if you would like to find all IPE shapes with a length between 1000 and 3000 millimeters, you need to define the following search condition: NAME = IPE* (for IPE80,IPE100 etc.) (and) LENGTH >= 1000 (Length greater than or equal 1000) (and) LENGTH <= 3000 (Length smaller than or equal 3000) Placeholders when Searching for Descriptions * Any other characters (blank spaces as well)

? Exactly one character you like in this specific position

# Exactly one numerical character you like in this specific position (0-9)

@ Exactly one alphabetical character you like in this specific position (aA-zZ)

, Separator to indicate two possibilities. Thus you can also, separated by the comma, reach an OR-connection such as e.g. (HEA*,HEB*)


133

Work Frames

134

B.6 Work Frames

Any ProSteel model generation is started with the creation of one or several work frames. These work frames aid 3D orientation because they can display the basic system dimensions (e. g. axes dimensions) as design aid objects, and automatically create the associated UCS systems of the views created by defining the work frame. A simple click of the mouse will change the view.

Basic Types Before defining a work frame, first decide basic shape desired. The following choices are possible: - Rectangular work frames - Cylindrical (also conical) work frames - Wedge-shaped work frames - Pyramidal work frames

Work Frames

135

B.6.1 Rectangular Work Frame

Workframe-Layout Here you specify the design of the desired work frame.

Length Specify the length of the work frame and its longitudinal division. If the Length input field is activated, you define the length by means of the overall length and the number of regular fields. If the field is not activated, the fields can be defined individually by specification of the width for each individual field. Please also refer to the hints at the end of this section.

Width The work frame width is determined analogously to the length.

Height The work frame height is determined analogously to the length.

Absolute Normally, you enter the height of the different fields. If this field has been checked, the list data define absolute height values.

Axis Descriptions Axes labels are added according to the settings in the text pages. The axes labels can be moved to their destination by means of grips.

Insert Position Defines the insertion position of the work frame related to the insertion point.

Work Frames

136

Roof Angle If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the roof slope in degrees.

Centre Height If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the ridge height.

Ridge Width If you want to have the form of a gabled roof for your work frame, you can enter the ridge width. If it is 0 or equal to the width of the work frame, only a roof surface will be created.

Asymmetrical Divisions To simplify the input of asymmetrical work frames, you can choose a special kind of input. The following dialog opens when you keep the ALT-key pressed while activating one of the three list values:

In the input field, you can either indicate the different fields separated by a comma or repeated sections by number*distance. This simplifies the input of complex divisions. Keeping CTRL-key pressed while activating one of the three list fields, you will delete the whole field definition in this dimension. Existing field definitions cannot be modified using this method. They will be completely overwritten.

Insert Work Frame After selecting the ’Work Frame’ command, click the point of origin of the work frame or enter this value in the form of coordinates. Just pressing the right mouse button causes the point (0,0,0) to be accepted as point of origin. Finally, indicate the spatial position by specifying the X-axis of the work frame. Pressing the right mouse button causes the current UCS X-axis to be accepted as alignment. The dialog box for the work frame opens and you can select one of the different types.

Work Frames

137

The entries of the dialogs above result in the following display of a ProSteel work frame in AutoCAD (no additional rotation):

Several Work Frames within One Model You can define as many different work frames within one model as desired, which are then distinguished from each other by their group names. This group name is a prefix preceding the view name, e.g. hangar_TOP and platform_TOP (with 'hangar' and 'platform' being the group names specified by you). This makes it possible to set and specify all-important areas of the project even before the 3D model is built and access them easily using the PS_SETUCS view selection.

With asymmetrical length divisionL=15000, B=8000,H=5000 X-axis: axis 1 Y-axis: axis A Z-axis: perpendicular to axis A/1 Origin: Axis A/1, Height H=0

A platform with the dimensions3000 x 3000 and the height 1500 is to be inserted as displayed. The coordinates of the origin are set to y=0, x=5000, z=0 and the group name is ‘platform’ – the other settings match the size and sections. The axes are not displayed although this is possible.

Work Frames

138

When selecting the views to be created, the overlapping views of the same work plane of other work frames may be omitted because normally they are of no further use for you (when selecting the corresponding plane, you will see the whole view). In connection with the object-oriented feature of ProSteel there are good reasons for creating these views. It is e.g. possible to move the complete work frame and this view is perhaps missing. However, if the above picture corresponds to the reality, you can omit the front and right side view of the platform because the ‘hangar’ work frame already provides them.

Work Frames are Objects One of the great strengths of ProSteel is its object-orientation; and work frames are good examples of this! This means that previously created work frames can be modified and manipulated using the standard AutoCAD commands. You can move, rotate, etc. the work frame or even just partial views – the displayed work planes - and the correct UCS settings ‘listen to every word’. If a view is selected, you will see the expected view. The associated UCS system has adjusted itself to the movement of the object. Additionally, you can subsequently set up individual cutting planes for each work plane and effect other modifications using the context menu “Change PS Properties”. Please remember: The frame layer has to be unlocked for any changes to take effect!

The platform is moved and the entire work frame 'hangar' and 'platform' is rotated. Click on the 3D-grid via "Change Properties", and the divisions or even the basic shape of the frame can be modified.

Work Frames

139

B.6.2 Cylindrical Work Frame

Base Base cylinder radius

Top Radius Top cylinder radius

Height You can specify the height of the work frame analogously to the height of the rectangular dimension.

Segmentation This input field indicates the number of circle segments into which the cylinder is divided.

All further options correspond to those of the rectangular work frame. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Work Frames

140

B.6.3 Wedge-Shaped Work Frame

At left The top of the triangle is modified to the left.


Work Frames

141

B.6.4 Pyramidal Work Frame

Roof Length indicates the length of the roof.

Ridge Width indicates the width of the ridge.


Work Frames

142

B.6.5 Create Views

Use this command to create views on all surfaces directly. You can directly select them later using the command PS_SETUCS. Depending on the selected form, some options are not available.

Front View A view on the front view is created.

Side View R A view on the right side view is created.

Side View L A view on the left side view is created.

Back View A view on the back side is created.

Top View A view on the horizontal roof area is created.

Underside View An underside view is created.

Roof View R A view upon the right roof area is created.

Roof View L A view on the left roof area is created.

Length Axis A view is created for each created axis into the depth.

Width Axis A view is created for each created axis into the width.

Height Axis A view is created for each created axis into the height.

Use Axis Descriptions You can either select standardized names such as X_1,X_2 for length and width axes or you can use the specified axes names.

Work Frames

143

Height with Coordinates For the height axes, the heights are additionally added to the name.

Group Name Since several work frames may be inserted into one drawing, these have to be equipped with their own code. The group name is placed in front of all views. In this case, it is R1_X2.

Distances Cut.Surfaces The views can automatically hide all elements situated outside a certain distance. Here, you specify these distances for all views of this work frame, separated in front and back.

Work Frames

144

B.6.6 Axes Names

The settings for the axes names can be made separately for x- and y-axis. We will only describe one axis here. The names can be generated automatically or you can add a name to each axis individually.

Depiction 123/ABC - Choose the axis name type. The designations may

either be numerical (123) or alphanumerical (ABC). Text, Circle... – Here you specify the depiction of the text. The text can either be displayed just as it is or with the selected border. If you have selected Block depiction, you may use an own text design. Please refer to Blocks for more detailed information.

Connection Line A line is drawn from the corresponding edge of the work frame to the text.

Start Value indicates the start of automatic axes names.

Size The text size is specified. At blocks it is defined by the attribute size.

Scale You can enter a scale for the blocks.

Work Frames

145

Distance indicates the distance of the text to the edge of the work frame.

Main Axis When several work frames are involved, you can here enter the name of the main work frame, if the current frame is rather considered to be a subordinate frame. It can also be used as prefix.

Suppress First Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the first axis.

Suppress Last Axis When frames are used, the axes names can overlap. This option suppresses the display of the last axis.

Avoid I, O When alphanumerical axes names are used, you can refrain from using I and O to avoid any possibility of confusion.

Decreasing Normally, axis labelling is effected in increasing order, e. g. 1, 2, 3, etc. This option has the opposite effect.

Position The axes can be attached either in front or at the rear, or on the left or on the right.

2 Lines Main and subordinate axes are displayed in 2 lines.

Dynamic The axes names are always adapted to the corresponding view direction. Thus, a good readability will be guaranteed at any time.

Axis Gap Here, the distance of the actual grid to the connection line of axis name is indicated. This entry is only displayed if you edit the grid in a 2D-detail.

Here is the example of an anchor plan with preset axis gap.

Work Frames

146

Individual Axes Names

EDIT

Click on this button to edit the different grid axes individually.

Here, you can enter the name and the main axis for each single axis. In addition, you can specify whether the axis name has to be overwritten manually (manual) and whether this axis has to be displayed (invisible). Switch over by double-clicking the entries in the first two columns. The entries of the last two columns can be edited by double-clicking.

Work Frames

147

B.6.7 Additional Axes (Border Lines)

Here, you can add any additional axes to the grid where work frame views can be built. e. g This can be existing constructional axes of architect’s plans.

An axis is added to the grid. To do so, click on an existing line

(position of the axis), and a new grid axis is built at this position. Numbering will be adapted correspondingly.

Several axes are added to the grid. To do so, click on the existing lines, and new grid axes are built at this position. Numbering will be adapted correspondingly.

A user-defined axis is removed from the grid. To do so, click on the desired grid line.

This function helps you to create an axis grid completely out of an existing 2D-axis plan. First, you insert a temporary grid into the plan and then you align it to a reference point as desired. Afterwards, you add the grid axes by clicking on the existing 2D-axes.

Work Frames

148

B.6.8 Options

No Lines The work frame doesn’t create any inner lines.

Axis on Edges This option has the effect that the axes names are not displayed in a fixed distance to the work frame edges, but always at the outer edge of the displayed view. You are informed about the corresponding position, even if the work frame edges are invisible. This option reacts to each command except for the use of dynamic Pan/Zoom commands. To update the display you can release a normal zoom or ‘Regenerate’. It is helpful to switch on the 'Dynamic' option.

Show Axis Lines The connection lines of the work frame edges are drawn up to the designations and even within.

Height Grid Lines In side or front views the height axes indicating the corresponding height are displayed as well.

3D Pattern The work frame is displayed as 3D-object.

Within The grid is displayed within the work frame, too. This enables snapping the endpoints of the grid on the planes.

Roof A grid is also displayed for the roof.

Lock Layer The layer for the view elements is locked.

Work Frames

149

Segmentation The circles of cylindrical work frames are displayed in segments.

Text Style Select the text style for axis labelling.

Line Type Select the line type for the connection lines of work frame edges and axes names.

Text Scale The axes names are scaled using this factor.

Colours The colours of the different work frame elements can be selected freely. Either enter the colour number directly or check the corresponding field and use the left button for dialog selection. All colours are reset to standard values with the right button.

Different Display Variants

With Lines Without Lines

On Screen Edge With Axis Lines

Work Frames

150

B.6.9 User-defined Blocks

You can also use your own block definitions instead of circles and rectangular for bordering the axis names. They have to be equipped with attributes, which then are replaced by the actual axes names. For more detailed information about creation of user-defined blocks, please refer to the separate technical information of your ProSteel-specialist.

From File Only blocks are used which have already been defined in this

drawing.

DWG Blocks Blocks of external drawings are used. They are loaded unless existing.

Block Path The path from which the blocks can be loaded.

Block Name X The selected block for the axes names in X-direction.

Block Name Y The selected block for the axes names in Y-direction.

Work Frames

151

Choose View

152

B.7 Choose View

Use this command to select the views defined by the work frames command or by adding new views. Once you select a view, ProSteel places the UCS into the selected work plane and displays the 3D model looking at the plane vertically. The specified cut planes are activated at the same time so that only the objects within this area are visible. In addition, you have access to all other auxiliary functions for view control using this dialog.

This dialog shows you the views, which are the result of the settings for a work frame with the area name ’R1’. The views available in the model are sorted and displayed in this list. Please note that you can modify the name of a view

Choose View

153

manually via Change Properties. Zoom Extents After a view has been activated a Zoom Extents is carried out

at once to have a complete look on the model.

Clipping-Plane If a view is activated, the clipping-planes are activated as well. This means: All elements in front of or behind the view reaching beyond the defined distances are not displayed.

Double Click If you double click an entry, the selected view is automatically activated and the dialog is closed. If this option is deactivated, only the view is displayed. If you keep the CTRL-key pressed during double clicking, you can inverse this setting.

If this option is selected, the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed.

If this option is selected, the UCS of the selected view is activated and the dialog is closed. The view is not modified.

If this option is selected, the selected view is deleted from the model.

This option allows the creation of another view. You are asked for the name and then you have to indicate a rectangle. After that, this view will be created in the current UCS and entered into the list.

This option allows the view via 2 points. The dialog is closed and you have to specify the target point of the view as well as the camera point of the view.

This option permits a view on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can select the desired view via coloured arrows.

This option permits an UCS on an object. The dialog is closed and you are prompted to select an object. Then, you can select the desired UCS-alignment via coloured arrows. See also PS_ObjectUCS.

Insert Shapes

154

B.8 Insert Shapes

The actual design work with ProSteel starts when shapes are inserted into the model. However, you need not deal with shape dimensions, representations, etc., but simply instruct the program which shape shall be inserted where and the program will carry out the operation. When inserting, you need not pay attention to overlapping shapes: there are many possibilities of correcting overlapping afterwards using a mouse click. First, make sure that the shapes are correctly positioned. Since the shop drawings are based on this position, proceed with care. From now on, you will work in work frames of the model that are smaller:

• Selection of an appropriate view and creation of further construction lines, if necessary.

• Insertion of some shapes and corrections, if necessary. • Adaptation of the shapes (e.g. shortening) and creation of connections. • Copying of identical parts, if any.

After selection of the command, a dialog window appears where you can specify the basic behaviour of the command and further settings. You can create any kinds of straight, bent or cranked shapes.

Insert Shapes

155

B.8.1 Straight Shapes

Shape Selection

Shape Type Select the general shape type here. The ProSteel shapes are divided into 5 different types: Standard Shapes – These are shapes based on a data base included in the standard delivery range. Special Shapes – These are shape definitions which you can create yourself by drawing the cross-section once and creating a shape out of this cross-section. Roof-Wall-Shapes – These are special shapes created by you which have been optimized for roof-wall installation. Combination Shapes – These are shapes which are combined out of several already defined types. Weld Shapes – These are also user-defined and permit any shape which can be welded by means of plates.

Resolution Here, you select the resolution of the depiction Low, Normal and High for special shapes to make the monitor display clearer in case of complex types. You can change the resolution at any time afterwards if e.g. a more detailed depiction is required.

Insert Shapes

156

Shape Class Depending on the selected shape type, the available shape catalogues are listed here. You can specify which catalogues for standard shapes are listed by means of the shape catalogue selection described in this chapter. For all other shape types, the created shape catalogues are listed from the corresponding directories on the hard drive.

Shape Size After a shape catalogue has been selected, all included shape sizes will be displayed in this list.

Key Each shape has its own clear access key. This access key can be entered directly here to be able to create non-standardized shape sizes of tubes, flat steel, round iron, etc.

Further Defaults

Material Select the material of the shape here.

Layer Here, you can specify on which layer the shapes have to be filed.

Part Family If family classes have been defined, you can set them here. The selection of the family class can influence the colour of the part.

Detail Style If detailing styles have been defined, you can set them here.

Display Class If display classes have been defined, you can set them here.

Area Class If area classes have been defined, you can set them here.

Description If general parts descriptions have been defined, you can set them here. The selection of the description can influence the colour and the layer.

Delta X The insertion offset in x-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).

Delta Y The insertion offset in y-direction; this field can only be entered, if you have selected the position ‘Free’ as insertion point (this is the biggest displayed insertion point).

Item An item number can be used directly here.

Length Specify the length of the shape. This is important if you want to insert shapes in the cross-section. Inputs in this field overwrite the length specified by the insertion points.

Insert Shapes

157

Turn Here, you indicate the angle of rotation used to turn the shape around the insertion axis.

Create Group This option creates a group out of the shape after insertion.

Insertion Points The standard insertion points of the shape are displayed on the monitor.

User-defined Insertion Points The user-defined insertion points of the shape are displayed on the monitor.

Monitor The selected shape is displayed as cross-section on the monitor. The possible insertion points are shown as well. Select one of these points to insert the shape at this insertion axis in longitudinal direction. Additionally to the corner and center points further points appear with a slightly smaller depiction (hole crack, center of gravity or manually created insertion points at special shapes) as well as a bigger point (free placing).

Insertion of Shapes After having selected the shape type, resolution, shape class and size, the shape can be inserted. There are several options to insert shapes. In general, a shape is always inserted by means of two 3D-points. These points can either be seized by picking the points or by picking a line. For this purpose, the shape is positioned in a way that – if you stood at the end point and looked into the direction of the starting point – the view corresponds to the depiction on the monitor. However, since two points alone don’t clearly define the shape position in the space, a third point is defined which determines the position (rotation) depending on the situation:

• You can indicate the third point. • When the two points are perpendicular in the world coordinate system

(WCS) the alignment is made according to the WCS x-axis. • When the points have been freely selected in the space, the alignment is

made in a way that the x-axis is aligned as parallel as possible towards the WCS xy-plane.

Insert Shapes

158

Insertion Commands

ALONG LINE

First you are prompted to select a line. The end points of this line are used as insertion points of the shape. Since in most cases it is not clear which one of the line points is the

starting and which the end point, the program displays a cone for asymmetrical shapes. This cone allows exchanging the insertion points and to obtain that the shape is mirrored at the y-axis. In the case of a dynamic dialog, this can alternatively be realized via the button. If the selected line is a poly-line, a cranked shape will be inserted along the poly-line. The bend radius is either taken from the input value on the option tab or if this is 0, the minimum radius will be used.

ALONG 2 POINTS

First you are prompted to pick any two points in the space, which then are used to insert the shape.

ALONG DIAGONAL

This option is also available if another point than the middle axis has been selected as insertion point. First you are prompted to select a line or to select two points using the

‘P’ option. Now the shape is inserted along these points as follows: The selected insertion position at the starting point is kept (e.g. center of the lower edge). At the end point, however, the opposite position is used (in this case center upper edge). If the ‘Select Position after Insertion’ option is activated as well, the positions are exchanged with rotations via the left mouse button.

ALONG 3 POINTS

You select the starting and end point where the shape has to be inserted. Dynamic mode (see options) will be activated automatically. In addition, you are prompted for the third point defining the alignment.

The shape dynamically follows each move of the mouse pointer and the position can be determined very precisely.

Insert Shapes

159

MULTIPLE ALONG LINE

This option permits the simultaneous insertion of several shapes. Several lines can be seized at the same time and the desired shapes are inserted along all line points.

If these lines are positioned in a way that the end points are overlapping, the inserted shapes will either get a mitered cut there (if the radius value is equal 0) or additional arcs with the corresponding radius will be inserted. Please note that – depending on the selected insertion point – the results cannot be correct. This proceeding is only safe if you insert along the middle line.

ALONG VIEW DIRECTION

You can use this option if you have indicated a fixed shape length. You are prompted for an insertion point and for an alignment. Depending on the selection of the insertion point, the shape will be

inserted along the alignment.

ALONG CROSS-SECTION DIRECTION

You can use this option if you have indicated a fixed shape length. You are prompted for an insertion point and for an alignment. Then the shape will be inserted on the current xy-plane of the UCS with the

corresponding length to the back (into the depth).

Additional Functions

INTERRUPT DIALOG

All inserted shapes are still connected with the dialog, so that subsequent modifications can also be transferred to already inserted shapes.

If you don’t want this option, you can interrupt the connection using this button. However, the shape is not deleted in this case.

Insert Shapes

160

SHAPE DATA

Click this button to open the following dialog where all relevant shape data are displayed:

MIRROR

All inserted shapes, which are still connected with the dialog, are mirrored along their y-axis. You will obtain this by exchanging the insertion points.

TURN POSITIVE

The shapes are turned positive (turned left in shape direction) around their insertion point using the entered value.

TURN NEGATIVE

The shapes are turned negative (turned right in shape direction) around their insertion point using the entered value.

FETCH INSERTION DATA

This option permits to select an existing shape from the drawing and to set the insertion parameters accordingly.

Insert Shapes

161

B.8.2 Bent Shapes

Apart from normal straight shapes, you have also the possibility to insert a bent shape. The bent shapes have a constant bending radius. All settings for selection of the shape type, material, etc. are the same as in the case of inserting straight shapes. For information, refer to this chapter. All settings on this tab are stored separately from the straight shapes so that your defaults on this page don’t disturb the settings for straight shapes.

Insertion Functions

ALONG ARC

First you are prompted to pick an existing arc on the base of which the shape will be inserted. The position of the arc in the space is not important.

ALONG 3 POINTS

First you are prompted to pick the center point of the arc, the starting point and the end point. The points are perpendicular to the current UCS plane and the shape

then is inserted on the base of these points. It is not possible to insert a shape, which is positioned in the space using this method. Nor can this command create an arc of 180 degrees.

Insert Shapes

162

B.8.3 Additional Settings

The third page contains some additional defaults influencing the behaviour during shape insertion.

Height The height above the current UCS-plane where the shapes

are inserted

Start Offset The offset at the starting point of straight shapes

End Offset The offset at the end point of straight shapes

Radius The rounding radius at shapes which are inserted several times

Scale The insertion scale if the shapes have to be inserted as 2D depiction

Horizontal Dist. The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected permitting an offset of several shapes in horizontal direction. (SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=HORDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)

Vertical Dist. The distance of the shapes if a shape class has been selected permitting an offset of several shapes in vertical direction. (SHAPECLASSLAYOUT=VERDOUBLE, QUADRUPLE, DIAGONAL)

Angular Insertion If you select an insertion along a defined length and position, you can select here which point of the shape has to be used at the pick point

Insert…X,Y Plane All picked points are perpendicular to the current UCS-plane before being evaluated.

Insert Shapes

163

Orientate This option permits to rotate the shape around its insertion axis immediately after insertion. For this purpose, click somewhere in the model with the left mouse key, and the shape will be rotated in increments of 90°.

Dynamic The shape is “hanging“ on the mouse pointer during insertion. Normally, the points are seized first and then the shape is inserted.

Reference Points The insertion points of the shape are entered as reference points into the shape. This permits later tracing back of the original insertion points and, if need be, their dimensioning.

3 Point Method This option permits the insertion by means of two planes.

As 2D-Shape After insertion, the shape is projected as 2D-shape onto the current UCS-plane. You can scale the shape for a depiction related to scale.

Close Dialog After the insertion is finished, the dialog is closed. If this option is not activated, the dialog returns and has to be closed explicitly. This behaviour of the dialog permits direct modification of already inserted shapes.

Keep Length The entry in the Length input field is restored at next opening of the dialog.

Enable Chains at Points Input At points input, the last point each will be used as starting point for the next shape.

Adjust to Work frame Supports are adjusted to the work frame into which they have been inserted.

Group Girder Position

These setting are only important if the command “Girder Position” is activated.

Connect AEC-Lines The AEC-lines (static effect lines) of the inserted subordinate girders are automatically connected with the AEC-lines of the main girders.

Notch The subordinate girders have a notch at the main girders.

Notch Template Select the desired notch template from the available templates.

Click this button to jump directly into the dialog ‘Notch’ where you can specify the settings for the notch and create new templates.

Insert Shapes

164

B.8.4 Shape Series

ProSteel is delivered with a great number of different international shape series (shape catalogues). Certainly, you will only need a part of them frequently for your work.

SHAPE CATALOGUES

Click this button to limit the displayed catalogues at shape selection to the types important for you. In addition, you can freely determine the order of the entries to find

frequently used types on top position in the selection list.

Available Shape Series In this list (on the left) all country specific shape series

available in the program are listed sorted according to countries. You can completely activate or deactivate the shape series of a certain country. The registration of a country is effected via a *.cfg file in the shape data directory.

Available Shape Classes In this list (in the middle) all shape classes registered by the activated country specific shape series are listed. The registration of possible shape classes of a country is effected via the entries in the corresponding *.cfg file in the shape data directory.

Insert Shapes

165

Current Shape In this list (on the right) all shape classes are displayed which are available in the commands as entry. These are displayed there in exactly this order. The database entries of the corresponding shape file define which shape sizes are available for the shape class.

Metric The shape names are displayed in metric unit system.

Imperial The shape names are displayed in imperial unit system.

Automatic The shape names corresponding to the setting of the current drawing are displayed. This means that in a metric drawing only metric shape names will be displayed.

Preferred Level In the different shape files it is provided that the data records can have a certain priority. If this field is checked, only the shapes are displayed the preference value of which is smaller or equal the value selected here.

ADD The shape class selected in the middle list will be added to the end of the selection list.

INSERT The shape class selected in the middle list will be inserted at the currently marked position of the right list.

DELETE The shape class marked in the right list will be removed from the selection list.

INSERT ALL All shape classes of the middle list will be taken over into the right list.

DELETE ALL All shape classes of the right list will be removed from there so that the list will be empty.

Please note that in all ProSteel functions only the shape classes in the right selection list are offered for selection.

Insert Shapes

166

B.8.5 Shape Segment

A shape can also be executed as a so-called cranked shape. For this purpose, bent or straight segments will be added to a straight or already cranked shape. SHAPE SEGMENTS

After this button has been clicked, the main dialog disappears and the following dialog opens.

You are prompted to pick a straight or already cranked shape

at the end to be extended. Then, the segment is added at this end.

You are prompted to pick a cranked shape at the end to be deleted. The last segment at this end is then deleted.

You are prompted to pick a cranked shape at the end to be processed. The data are read and can be modified within the dialog.

Straight Segment

Length The length of the straight segment to be added

Insert Shapes

167

Bent Segment

Radius The radius of the bent segment

Angle The opening angle of the bent segment

Rotation The current rotation angle of the segment with regard to the x-axis (longitudinal axis) of the shape

The segment is additionally turned positive (to the left) using the neighbouring angle.

The segment is additionally turned negative (to the right) using the neighbouring angle.

Turn Angle The angle by which the segment has to be turned additionally.

Insert Shapes

168

B.8.6 Girder Position

It often occurs that girders have to be inserted between two main girders (change). Instead of inserting the individual girders manually or instead of copying them, you have the possibility to insert subordinate girders at main girders using the girder position option.

Multiple Subordinate Girders After the command has been selected, you are prompted to click the first main girder at the starting point of the laying. Here, it is important to pick the correct end because the laying will start at this end.

After selection of the second girder another dialog opens where you can define the distribution.

Here you can continuously indicate individual distances or series of equal values. (number*distance). A comma separates the individual data. Now the subordinate girders are in any case inserted in a way that they are aligned to the upper edge of the main girders (the position setting in the dialog for shape insertion doesn’t matter). Depending on the setting, they are immediately notched as well. If the option ‘Connect AEC-lines’ has been activated, the static effect lines are automatically linked with those of the main girders. This saves you some work during transfer to a static program. Press the ALT-key while calling the function to insert a subordinate girder along a line. It will be appropriately inserted between the main girders.

Insert Shapes

169

Individual Subordinate Girders It is of course also possible to insert an individual subordinate girder, e.g. to create a diagonal. After selection of the command, you have to pick two main girders at the corresponding end in question. Then, the following dialog opens:

Here, you define the desired distances to the corresponding shape ends; a line displays the position of the shape. Now the subordinate girder is in any case inserted in a way that it is aligned to the upper edge of the main girders (the position setting in the dialog for shape insertion doesn’t matter). For the static effect lines and notches, the same is valid as already described above under ‘Multiple’.

Insert Shapes

170

B.8.7 Automatic Insertion

If you want to have several shapes inserted automatically, the program offers you several possibilities. A frequent application is e.g. the generation of a supporting grid with previously defined joints.

Insert Columns This function permits the insertion of columns with previously defined pitches (e.g. for joints). After having called the function, the following dialog opens, where you

can define the pitches in the list. Each line corresponds to a shape segment of the column. Then, you have several insertion variants at disposal.

Starting Height The starting height (Z-coordinate of the insertion point) of the

selected segment

End Height The end height (Z-coordinate of the insertion point) of the selected segment

Click on this button to insert a blank line in front of the selected entry. Then, you can indicate the starting and end height of this new segment.

Click on this button to remove the selected entry again.

Insert Shapes

171

Click on this button to remove all entries from the list.

Click on this button to insert the column at the position to be picked and to divide it into segments corresponding to the list.

Click on this button to insert the column at the intersection point of any two lines and to divide it into segments corresponding to the list. To do so, you have to click on both lines.

Click on this button to insert the column at the intersection point of the work frame axes (grid) which are situated within a rectangular area and then it is divided into segments corresponding to the list. To do so, you have to click on the lower left and the upper right point of the area.

Click on this button to insert the column at the intersection point of the work frame axes (grid) which are situated within any area and then it is divided into segments corresponding to the list. To do so, you have to click on the corner points of the frequency polygon describing the desired area.

Insert Girder

This function permits to insert several girders at the work frame axes (grid). At the intersection points of the axes, they are automatically divided into segments.

To do so, you should first be in a plan view on the desired area because the girders are always inserted in the current UCS. Then, you have to click on the lower left and the upper right point of the area. Now, all grid axes situated in this area are examined and the girders are inserted along the axes according to the specifications of the shape insertion dialog. Finally, these are divided at all intersection points of the grid axes. Press the ALT-key while calling the function to specify a polygon for the creation area. Press the STRG-key to specify a rectangular for the creation area.

Insert Shapes

172

The following example shows the automatic insertion of girders in an isometric view: In the upper figure, a frame is stretched out over the upper grid lines of the work frame. The figure below shows the result of the automatic insertion.

Insert Shapes

173

Insert Plates

174

B.9 Insert Plates

B.9.1 Flat Straight Plates

Apart from given standard shapes and freely defined special shapes of any kind, you can insert plates of any shape into the model – in the program, such plates are called poly-plates. Such plates are flat or three-dimensionally bent plates of equal thickness such as gusset plates or other types of connecting plates and butt straps. The other plate types commonly used for steel structures such as base plates, end plates or stiffeners can be created by the program using automatic functions. The program also names them. These functions are explained later in the user’s guide; here you find a general explanation of plates of any thickness.

Length Plate length at rectangular insertion

Width Plate width at rectangular insertion

Thickness Plate thickness; it is indicated in list form. The list can be edited to add certain thicknesses not included in the list. To do so, open the file ..\Prg\pro_st3d.ptt with an editor and complete it with the desired thicknesses. Alternatively, you can switch on overwriting with any values in the ’Global Settings/Plates’. Otherwise, you can only take values from this list.

Insert Plates

175

Insertion Height This is the height of the plate above the current UCS.

X-Offset x-offset of the plate related to the selected insertion position.

You can either enter this value or define the insertion point by means of the points on screen.

Y-Offset y- offset of the plate related to the selected insertion position. You can either enter this value or define the insertion point by means of the points on screen.

Item No. Here you can directly use an item number.

Grid If this value is activated, an additional grid is visible at the upper side that can be set. By this way you can show that it isn’t a plate but a component part such as e.g. gridirons. In the settings/plate, you can enter a reduction of weight in percent for this case.

Insertion Plane Indicates the user coordinate system to be used. The option Object-ECS is only possible if you want to enter the plate by means of a selected contour. Then, the plate is situated in the plane of the poly-line. The option Selected Areas is only possible at insertion of ’Rectangular Plate’ and ‚Insertion Point’. Then, you can define a UCS to be used by indicating two lines. For all other insertion options the current UCS-system in question is decisive.

Insert Plates

176

Insert Edge Indicates the vertical position of the plate related to the current UCS or ECS-system, depending on the selected input form.

Label You can take the name of your plate from an editable file. The content of this file is displayed in this list. The file is ..\Prg\pro_st3d.pdc. In addition to the name, you can define a weight as well which has to be indicated in plain text. After selection of a name, the material is directly set as well.

Material List of all available materials

Part Family If part families are defined, you can set them here. The selection of part family can influence the colour of the component part.

Detail Style If detailing styles are defined, you can determine them here.

Display Class If display classes are defined, you can determine them here.

Area Class If area classes are defined, you can determine them here.

Description If general part descriptions are defined, you can determine them here. The selection of the description can influence the colour and the layer.

Layer Here, you can specify on which layer the plates have to be stored.

This option permits free picking of a polygon. This polygon is used to form a poly-plate after the dialog was closed. No construction lines or similar things are necessary. Take care that no crossings are generated by your input. Then, plate creation will not be possible.

This option permits to form a plate on the base of an existing contour. The contour can be a poly-plate, a circle or an arc which is not closed. The plates can alternatively be created on the current UCS or on the contour ECS.

A rectangular plate with the desired dimensions is created at the selected insertion point using this option. The form of polygonal plates can be modified as you like whereas rectangular plates always remain rectangular unless you change this status using Change Properties.

Insert Plates

177

Insert a plate at any line using this option. The length of the line determines the plate length; the width and the thickness are defined by your input.

After having realized this insertion, you can select the position, rotation and the insertion point via the dialog. The rotation can either be modified in 90° increments or in freely selectable increments. The plate then is rotated around the insertion line.

+Phi The plate is rotated in positive direction using the entered angle.

- Phi The plate is rotated in negative direction using the entered angle.

+90 The plate is rotated in positive direction by 90 degrees.

-90 The plate is rotated in negative direction by 90 degrees.

Rotation The value used for rotation in the first two options.

This option permits creation of a plate by means of four points. These points don’t have to be situated in the current UCS. The first three selected points specify the plane. The order is: bottom left; bottom right, top left, top right.

A flat is transformed into a poly-plate using this option. All processing actions will be adopted.

A plate is inserted according to its diagonal. The alignment of x- and y-direction is specified by the current UCS.

CL After insertion, the plates are still connected with the dialog. Further modifications are still possible. Use this button to interrupt this connection.

Insert Plates

178

Dialog-Commands

SURFACE GRID

Click on this button to define the alignment of the surface grid. Usually this grid is aligned to the plate-ECS, it can be modified using this button.

PLATE DIMENSIONS

Click on this button to define the calculation direction. First select the plate and then the direction according to which calculation has to be made. You can cancel the manual specification of direction in the plate

properties.

BEND

Click on this button to add edged or bent segments to the plate. The result is a three-dimensionally bent plate which however is representing a single component part and which can be depicted as flat via unfolding.

A dialog opens where you can select the reference edges and make further settings (see under ‘Bent plates’).

Analysis of Dimensions The calculation of plate dimensions is either carried out according to an automatic pattern or it can be specified manually. At automatic calculation, the following order is respected: 1) Are there any parallel edges and is their distance sufficient? 2) Is there any rectangular corner? 3) Search for the longest side Depending on the geometry, the found direction is recognized as length direction and the plate dimensions are aligned to this direction.

Insert Plates

179

B.9.2 Flat Bent Plates

By using this option, you create a bent plate on the base of an

arc.

By using this option, you create a bent plate on the base of three points. Keep the ALT-key pressed at input and you can enter an arc with > 180°.

=0 Use this option if you want to return to the original position of your plate after rotation.

Insert Plates

180

B.9.3 Gratings

Gratings are a special case in plate production. In principle, you can call any plate a grating, but often customers ask to fall back on standard sizes depending on the manufacturer. Another problem is to determine the weight for the parts list which traditionally can only be calculated in an insufficient way. ProSteel is able to manage gratings (resp. tear plates, fence elements, etc) in their own database files indicating the exact weight per piece. Here, you can comfortably select and insert these elements.

Selection List Here, you select a grating element for insertion. The

dimensions are determined by the database and cannot be modified later.

Click on this button to insert the grating element selected from the list. In order to do so, you have to click on the point of insertion.

Click on this button to have distributed the selected grating element automatically within a boundary. In order to do so, you first have to click on the border (polyline) and then specify the alignment and the origin of distribution. See also under ‘Roof and Wall Covering’.

Insert Plates

181

B.9.4 Bent Plates

Apart from the different forms of flat plates, you can also create three-dimensionally edged or bent plates by using ProSteel. These represent a single 3D-component part which can be depicted in 2D as flat plate with the

corresponding bending edges via unfolding. Here, you see a bent plate (1) with several plate segments and its front view (2). Apart from the outside geometry, the created unfolding (3) of the plate shows the bending edges (A) as well.

Generation of Bent Plates To generate a bent plate, you first have to have inserted a flat plate. This plate determines the alignment of the bent plate. Now, click on the BEND button and another dialog opens.

Insert Plates

182

Flange Length Here, you enter the length of the segment in the direction of

the bending angle.

Front Distance Edge Here, you enter the front offset in the direction towards the reference edge. Positive values mean that inwards the segment becomes smaller.

Rear Distance Edge Here, you enter the rear offset in the direction towards the reference edge. Positive values mean that inwards the segment becomes smaller.

Bending Radius The radius of the bend related to the neutral fibre (half of the plate thickness). To avoid problems with the volume modeller, the radius should always be a little bit more that half of the plate thickness.

Bending Angle The angle of the bend; this is related to the reference segment (reference edge).

Insert Plates

183

Correction Value Unwinding The unwinding is carried out using a correction factor. The correction is multiplied with half of the plate thickness. K = 0 – unwinding on the inner radius K = 1 – unwinding on the center K = 2 – unwinding on the outer radius This correction factor is used for the whole bent plate.

Length Calculation Here you indicate the method how the length of the butt straps to be added has to be calculated. Measured for flange length from the end of the bending segment outside edge from the outside edge of the base plate inside edge from the inside edge of the base plate center from the center line of the base plate up to the end of the butt strap

Click on this button to rotate the current plate edge including the subordinate plate edges in positive direction around the reference edge. The rotation is effected with the angle specified in the neighbouring input field.

Click on this button to rotate the current plate edge including the subordinate plate edges in negative direction around the reference edge. The rotation is effected with the angle specified in the neighbouring input field.

Insert Plates

184

Combine Plates to Bent Plates

Apart from the adding of butt straps, you also have the possibility to create bent plates from existing plates. In order to do so, select the plates to be connected. Prerequisite for a correct connection of the plates is that you can generate a tangential transition between the two plates. Radius Indicates the radius of the bend between the two plates.

Inside Radius Indicates whether the radius has to be used on the inside or outside of the plate.

Delete The existing plate is deleted by taking it over into the bent plate.

Correction Value Unwinding Please refer to the explanations in the previous section.

Insert Plates

185

Dependance of Segments The following example vividly illustrates the connections between the segments and their dependencies. You see the isometric depiction of a bent plate and the plan view on the base plate (1). First, the segment (2a) was added to the base plate (1) by using a bending angle of 45°. Then, the segment (3) was added to segment (2a) by also using a bending angle of 45°, but in addition it was equipped with a front and rear (positive) distance to the edge. Finally, the segment (2b) was added to the base plate (1) with a bending angle of 90°. If you now delete or modify the segment (2a), you will also delete or modify the depending segment (3).

Insert Plates

186

Dialog Commands

ADD SEGMENT

Click on this button to add a new plate edge to the plate. In order to do so, you have to click on the plate at the desired reference edge of a plate segment. This determines the alignment of the new segment.

The new plate segment is always subordinate to the reference segment. If the reference segment is modified later, the new segment will also be modified in relation to this.

REMOVE SEGMENT

Click on this button to remove an existing plate segment (including all subordinate segments). In order to do so, you have to click on the plate segment at any edge you like.

MODIFY SEGMENT

Click on this button to modify an existing plate segment later. In order to do so, you have to click on the plate segment at any edge you like. Any subordinate segments of this plate segments will be modified too in

relation to this.

CHECK BENT PLATE

Click on this button to check an existing bent plate with regard to errors. In order to do so, you have to click on the bent plate at any edge you like.

Important Hint: Please take care that you don’t modify the basic polygon of a plate (e.g. by adding an edge, or similar things) when you have already added segments for a bent plate. The reference edges of the segments would be modified as well and the consequence could be an undesired behaviour.

Insert Plates

187


Always ECS If you want to insert a plate after an existing contour, you can

insert it either according to the current UCS or according to the object contour. This button has the effect that you always insert according to the object ECS. The settings on the first page will be ignored.

File Path The file path to possibly existing database files for gratings. Click on the neighbouring button to comfortably select the path.

Grating Catalogue The desired database file for gratings.

Close The dialog is closed after insertion of a plate.

Insert Plates

188

Insert Solids

189

B.10 Insert Solids

For volume modelling, ProSteel does not use the AutoCAD solid command ACIS, but rather a modified version, which works faster and produces smaller graph files. Consequently, you cannot combine ProSteel objects and AutoCAD 3D solids (e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the same performance range as with AutoCAD, all solids have been redefined. As these solids are real ProSteel objects, they can be processed with the help of ProSteel commands (e.g. drilled). These solids can be detailed as normal component part. Please note that the component parts need a clear direction for detailing. The X-axis of the UCS valid at insertion is taken as standard. You can, however, determine the axis anew by means of the context menu „Change PS Properties“. Cube/Rectangle: PS_SOLID_BOX

This command creates a rectangular object.

You determine the edges by clicking the two diagonally opposed corner points or by entering their coordinates. In case the volume cannot be determined by using the points you entered (maybe you clicked on two points on a UCS plane), the program prompts you to enter the missing dimensions.

Sphere: PS_SOLID_SPHERE

This command creates a sphere.

First, you have to enter the central point of the sphere and then the diameter of the sphere or click it.

Cylinder PS_SOLID_CYLINDER

This command creates a cylinder.

First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cylinder and then the radius or click it.

Insert Solids

190

Cone PS_SOLID_CONE

This command creates a cone or truncated cone.

First, you have to enter starting and end point of the cone axis or click it and then the starting and end point radius.

Torus PS_SOLID_TORUS

This command creates a torus.

This requires that you first click or enter the rotation axis and then enter the outer and inner radius.

Rotational Solid PS_SOLID_ROTATE

This command creates a rotational solid from within any poly-line. This requires that you first click the poly-line and then on the rotation axis. You can also indicate a rotational angle, around which the poly-line is rotated. Another option is that the poly-line can also rotate around the last drawn line segment, if you press the ESC-key when prompted for the ‘Rotation Axis’.

Conical Pipe PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE

This command creates a pipe that is conical on the inside and outside. First, you have to enter or click the longitudinal axis. Then you can enter the outer and inner radius at the respective starting and end point.

Pipe->Rectangle PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE

This command creates a transition from a circular to a rectangular cross-section.

First, you have to enter or click the lower left and upper right point of the rectangle and then click the circle.

Insert Solids

191

Enveloping Solid PS_SOLID_HULL

This command creates an enveloping solid formed by any points. This requires that you click the points that are to form the envelope. Using this command, you can create almost any shape (without arcs).

Extrusion PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE

This command creates a volume by extruding a poly-line, which you have drawn beforehand. You first click the poly-line and then enter the desired height. The poly-line is then extruded along positive Z-direction of UCS.

Insert Solids

192

Create ACIS body reference

193

B.11 Create ACIS body reference

Although ProSteel makes its own 3D-base elements, it may occur nevertheless that you must use AutoCAD-3D-base elements (ACIS solids) in your model. If this involves only the determination of some interfering edges or the representation of machine parts in 2D-overviews, then you can do that without special measures. However, if you later need dimensioned component part drawings of these objects, then you must create an ACIS body reference. The ACIS body is then assigned parts list characteristics and its own component coordinate system is available in the DetailCenter as a stand-alone component. An extended form is the ACIS bodies reference for massive construction, which can also cover reinforcement elements. Further information is available in the manual “ProConcrete”. Linkage with ACIS body After activation of the function you must first select the ACIS component which you want to connect. Subsequently, you determine the component coordinate system. For thisyou select first and second points of the desired x axis as well as an additional point which is situated on the positive XY-plane of the coordinate system. Instead of selecting the point on the XY-plane, you can have it determined from the current view in the model by pressing the ESC key. The x-axis you selected then remains valid and the current view direction becomes the z-axis of the component coordinate system. The coordinate system later has an effect on the orientation and dimensioning of the 2D-workshop plans. In particular with irregular bodies a practical orientation can be determined in this way. Default values It is also possible to refer back to the calculated inertia axes of the body geometry if the alignment of the axes does (or should) correspond or if a particular alignment is not required. Do this by pressing the ESC-key when determining the first point of the x-axis. Then the inertia axes determine the x, y and z-axis of the component coordinate system based on the size of their moments of inertia.

Create ACIS body reference

194

After you determined the axes, the ACIS body reference is represented as a symbol at the center of mass of the ACIS component and the dialog for processing the PS component characteristics is opened.

You have access to the characteristics via the symbol. The original ACIS component remains unchanged and is the definitive object. That is, if this is deleted, then the reference is also deleted. In the following example you see the effects of the component axes on the result of the elaboration:

3D-Model In the 3D-Model an irregular ACIS body is positioned diagonally in the space. By picking the points X1 and X2 the x axis (x) of the ACIS body reference is determined. The y axis (y) results from selecting the point XY. 2D-Drawing The ACIS body reference now allows creation of a component part drawing and the x axis determines the horizontal orientation. The view of the XY-plane is always the front view. All standard views of a component can be represented.

3D Modifications

195

B.12 3D-Modifications

It may be necessary to correct the length of shapes and plates already inserted or to provide bevels, notches, etc. When inserting the component parts, you have paid attention to inserting the shape at the correct position using the correct alignment, e.g., you have positioned the axis on a system line. Very often component parts overlap and must be adapted subsequently. Additionally, it may be necessary to rework your model due to modifications. ProSteel offers a large range of commands for the modification of component parts. Some operations can (also) be executed using the standard AutoCAD commands, and the grips. Others require the corresponding ProSteel commands. There are many different commands for a modification depending on purpose. In the following chapter, these commands are explained in detail. The modifications are divided into commands for all parts, commands only for shapes or only for plates, etc. When you select the command, the following main dialog appears with the commands for all parts.

3D Modifications

196

B.12.1 Divide / Combine

Cut at Line

This function allows complete shapes to be cut or extended at boundaries, just like the AutoCAD command for the stretching and cutting of lines. For this purpose, you first have to click the shape at the

end to be cut and then select the line. The boundary is formed only by a construction line, which is arranged vertically to the active UCS, plane and thus creating a cut plane. If the plane is slanted, the modified shape will have a slanted plane, too. By using this function, shapes that are too long or too short can be adapted to fit after their insertion. When you have typed a value in the Distance field of the main dialog, the shape will be shortened by this value after it has been cut. Please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cut plane. The shape is cut at an imaginary plane, the line being oriented vertically to the active UCS-plane. Working in a view simplifies your work, since the shape is cut “at this line”. If the shape could intersect with the line (i. e. you consider the line to be of infinite length!), the shape is cut. To extend the shape, hold down the ALT key while clicking the end to be extended.

3D Modifications

197

Cut at Shape The shape is cut or extended at another shape. When the shape is cut, the shorter section is always cut off. Click the shape to be cut and then the shape along which this shape is

to be cut. The plane actually hit by the centerline (or the extended centerline) of the shape to be cut will be the cut plane. If the centerline does not meet any surface, no cut can be made! Please note that a logical link is created between the parts if this option is applied. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated.

Divide a Shape By using this function, you can divide a shape at a cutting line into two shapes. A single shape, a plate or several elements can be divided into two independent elements.

To start with, select the shape to be divided. Then, click the cutting line. When you have entered a distance in the main dialog Distance, both new ends will be shortened by this value. Depending on the setting, you can divide several elements at the same time. However, please note that the distance refers to a vertical distance between shape and cutting line. Distance The two new shapes are shortened by this value at the cutting

line. The arising gap has the double distance value.

At Plane If this option has been checked, you are asked for three points, which have to form a plane. The parts are divided along this plane.

3D Modifications

198

The cutting line may be any line. If the line is slanted, the shapes are divided accordingly. If you indicate only one point, it will be used perpendicular to the centerlines. The information for the parts lists is identical for both parts with that of the initial shape, except for the length. In order to master the course of the cut line better, it is recommended to work in one of the view. Example for Platform Design For example, you can easily create changed girders at platform constructions by first laying the shapes to be changed as a whole and then dividing them at their rafters. Vice versa, rafters can be removed rapidly and the changes at this position can be cancelled.

Let us assume that you want to design a platform using the following shapes: platform beams IPE 300, platform edge girders IPE 200, headers HEA 120. Create a working area with these dimensions and insert the shapes at the construction lines Overlaps can be ignored!

Change to the top view and use the dialog box for the processing of the elements. As an alternative, you can also process the Y-axes of the general overview in the front view.

Since IPE 300 has a flange width of 150 mm, enter the value 75 in the Separation Distance field and click the button DIVIDE. Zoom the points of intersection one after the other, select the uncut part of the cross girder to be separated, and the construction line as cutting line. In the figure on the left, you see that you have several shape parts now that can be connected. You need not insert each partial shape and the risk for dimensional errors is eliminated. If you want to remove beams, you can easily close the gaps between cross girders and create a continuous shape by clicking the function “Combine”.

3D Modifications

199

Combine two Shapes This function allows shapes of the same length to be combined, provided that they are exactly aligned! Click the two shapes to be combined. If they are not in alignment, the

function will be aborted. The information for the parts lists of the new shape is identical with that of the first selected shape, except for the length. If you keep the ALT key pressed, the shape and the position are not checked. Then, you can combine any shape with any shape.

3D Modifications

200

Outlets (Milling Out) Using this function, you can insert simple geometrical shapes of outlets and countersunk parts into your shapes. You can create square, wedge-type, and circular shapes. The

dimensions are entered via a dialog box. After selection of the part and the insertion point at the part, the following dialog appears. Select the desired basic form by selecting the corresponding page. Rectangular Outlet

Width Specifies the width of the outlet.

Height Specifies the height of the outlet.

Depth Specifies the depth of the outlet.

Position Width Select the relative width position to the insertion point.

Position Height Select the relative height position to the insertion point.

Position Depth Select the relative depth position to the insertion point.

3D Modifications

201

Wedge-Type Outlet



Depth Specifies the depth of the outlet.




Horizontal Select the position of the wedge tip in horizontal direction.

Vertical Select the position of the wedge tip in vertical direction.

3D Modifications

202

Circular Outlet



Angle Specifies the angle of the outlet.




Radius Select whether the outlet has to be carried out as outer circle or as inner circle.

3D Modifications

203

Position

You still have the possibility to rotate the inserted notch or cut-out by any of the three coordinate axes. Just click the +90/-90 button, if you want to rotate the cut-out in 90° steps. If you require a different angle just enter the value into the Rotation Angle field and then click the +PHI/-PHI button.

The outer edge of the top flange is the cut-out insertion point, the expected cut-out is defined by edges.

Repeated use creates more complex millings.

3D Modifications

204

Polygonal Cut-Outs Using this command, you can cut out shapes along any freely drawn contour (poly-line). Thus, you can e.g. create notches that are not covered by the program via the special notch function. You can also subtract one shape from another to create penetrations, e.g. to obtain slotted tubes, penetrated handrail posts or others. If you have entered a value in the Gap Spacing input field of the main dialog, the cut-out is regularly extended to all directions by the indicated value to gain some “space” for inaccuracies of production. In any case, the created polygon will be extended to the top and to the bottom in the UCS Z-plane. Therefore, please pay attention that your UCS has been selected accordingly. In case of a direct use of this function via the command bar, the current settings of the main dialog apply. Click this button if you have not yet a contour in form of a poly-

line or circle or arc. You can enter the different points as you like, but be careful that the lines don’t overlap in the polygon.

Click this button if you have already a contour in form of a poly-line, etc.

Click this button if you want to subtract the contour of another solid from the selected object (penetration or solid to be subtracted).

Complete Here, you select whether the solid to be subtracted has to penetrate the selected object completely or partially. This is not valid for solids to be subtracted.

Gap Spacing Here, you can indicate a gap by which the cut contour is increased before the subtraction.

If you have ‘divided’ a shape using this function, you will not obtain two shapes. This has to do with the volume modeller of AutoCAD. You must take care not to create two parts of a shape - e. g., by prior shape shortening. If you want to obtain two shapes, please use first the function ‘Divide’ and divide the shape at a suitable point.

3D Modifications

205

In the following you can see two examples for the working of polygonal cut-outs: on the left, there is a normal poly-cut and on the right, there is a milling via a solid to be subtracted.

Create a Penetration Here is still another example for creating a penetration of tubes:

On the first two pictures, you see the situation in the front view and in the top view (the cutting planes are switched off so that you can see the depth. Put the selection for ‘Poly-Cuts’ on Remove and click the button POLY-CUT. Now click the big tube, then one of the small tubes in order to cut out the volume, Click the big tube again and then the other small tube, in order to cut out its volume, too. in the third picture, you see the cut-outs in the big tube (the two slanted tubes have been omitted in this representation).

3D Modifications

206

B.12.2 Modify Shapes

Shortening and Extending

Shortening

Click this button to shorten a shape by picking two points. Their perpendicular distance to the center line specifies the shortening value.

Click this button to shorten a shape by explicitly indicating the value.

Click this button to shorten the shape by the value indicated under default.

Default Enter the value of shape shortening according to default.

In all three cases, you have to pick the shape at the end to be modified. If you pick in the middle third of the shape length, each end is shortened by half the specified value.

3D Modifications

207

Extend

These functions can be used analogously to shape shortening in order to extend a shape. However, this doesn’t work if the selected end has been modified by a cut.

Cut and Cut Out

Notches

This command permits a parametric notch of a shape at another shape. Another dialog appears. Since you can also select this function directly, you will find the description in one of the following chapters under the command ‘Notches’.

Mitered Cut

Using this command, you can combine two shapes by means of a mitered cut, which can also be carried out as 3D-cut. The bisecting line determines the cutting plane. If the height of the two shapes differs, the outer edges are not aligned.

Using this command, you can also carry out a mitered cut. The intersection points of outer and inner edges determine the cutting plane here. This means that even shapes of different height are correctly cut aligned.

This function cuts two shapes in a way that an arc element of the shape type picked first can be inserted with the specified radius.

Radius The radius of the arc element to be inserted; this radius can either be entered as absolute value or as many times the maximum diameter of the first shape. In this case, you enter e.g. *2.

Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the shapes at mitered cuts.

3D Modifications

208

Please note that a logical link is created between the parts at these cutting commands. The result will be that if one part is modified, the cut will be automatically updated. Here, you see some examples for mitered cuts, which have been created using different variants:

Modify Connections of Structural Steel Work

Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the connections of ProSteel by means of the connection-editor. Click this button to open the corresponding dialog.

You will find the description of the connection-editor in a separate chapter of this manual so that you can refer to it for more detailed information.

3D Modifications

209

B.12.3 Modify Plates

Modify Contour

Use this function to add another edge to the plate. For this

purpose, you have to pick the plate at the position to be inserted. Now, a new contour point will be created at the picked position, which can be moved using the grips.

Use this function to delete an edge from the plate.

Use this function to transfer the contour of a plate to other plates.

This function permits to adapt the basic polygon of a plate processed by cuts to the current form. The corresponding modifications become superfluous and are deleted.

3D Modifications

210

If may sometimes be easier to modify the edges of a non-processed plate. In addition, this can be useful for data export if modifications of the contour are not supported there.

Mitered Cut

These functions permit mitered cuts between two plates. Since they are identical with those of the shapes, you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Gap A gap of this thickness is kept between the plates at mitered cuts.

Chamfers and Edges These dialog pages and modification options correspond to the pages which are also available in the plate editor. Please refer to this chapter for more detailed description for processing of chamfers and edges.

Processing by Means of the Plate Editor Using the 3D-modifications, you also can modify the plates by means of the plate-editor. Click this button to open the corresponding dialog. You will find the description of the plate-editor in a separate chapter of

this manual so that you can refer to it for more detailed information.

3D Modifications

211

B.12.4 Wall Processing

ProSteel permits you to create wall elements so that you can have displayed for example the neighbouring buildings of your construction as well, if need be. These functions help you for further processing the wall elements, e. g. to attach openings.

Windows/Doors

Height Height of the window or door

Width Width of the window or door

Radius The radius of the rounding of the upper edge of a window or door

Breast Height Breast height of the window

Click on this button to insert a window opening into an existing wall element.

Click on this button to insert a door opening into an existing wall element.

3D Modifications

212

Edges

Click on this button to insert an additional vertical edge into an existing wall element.

Click on this button to remove a vertical edge from an existing wall element.

Specify Height

Click on this button to specify the height of a vertical edge at the upper or lower side of the wall anew. Afterwards, the wall is running diagonally from the neighbouring corner points to the modified corner point.

Click on this button to specify the height of a wall segment at the upper or lower side of the wall anew. Afterwards, the wall is running diagonally from the neighbouring corner points to the two modified corner points.

3D Modifications

213


Multiple Selection

Cut at line You can cut several parts simultaneously at one line without having to select the function once again.

Cut at Object You can cut several parts simultaneously at another part without having to select the function once again.

Divide You can divide several parts simultaneously without having to select the function once again.

Polycuts You can cut an object simultaneously at several poly-lines without having to select the function once again.

Loop

Cut at Lines The command ‘Cut at Line’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Cut at Object The command ‘Cut at Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Divide The command ‘Divide Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

3D Modifications

214

Connect The command ‘Combine Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Shorten The command ‘Shorten Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Lengthen The command ‘Extend Shape’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Poly-Cuts The command ‘Polygonal Cut-Outs’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Mitre Cut The command ‘Mitred Cut’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Insert Corner The command ‘Insert Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Delete Corner The command ‘Delete Corner’ is repeated until it is explicitly interrupted.

Miscellaneous

Close Dialog The dialog is immediately closed after an action. Otherwise, you have to quit it manually, but you could at once select another command instead.

3D Modifications

215

B.12.6 Notch betwen two Shapes

Notches and shape cuts can be created automatically using pre-selectable distance dimensions. You may select from various variants and track your input directly in the drawing and change in “real time” if needed. All kinds of shapes (straight, bent, cranked) can be processed using this function.

Producing a Notch For this purpose, you first have to click on the shape, which has to be notched, and then the shape specifying the contour. When you select the command, the connection is created on the base of your last setting. Now you can fit the connection in the appearing dialog; you can check the result immediately in the model.

3D Modifications

216

Layout Here, you select the shape of the cope. The different variants are shown in the picture below:

On the upper left, the initial situation before coping is shown (the shapes are still overlapping), and on the upper right you see the contour. Pictures below from left to right: Fit Shape Start (the normal cope), Fit Shape Middle and Fit Shape End.

Corner Layout Edge – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with a beveled edge. Radial – The copes at the shape radii are carried out with adapted radii. In the Radius input field, the determined radius can be modified later. Access Holes – The holes are drilled in the inner corners of the cope. In the Radius input field, the radius of the drill holes can be preset.

Inner Edge If Not Inner Edge is activated here, the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange inside resp. outside refer to the outside of the flanges. If Inner Edge is activated, the dimensions refer to the inside of the flanges. If Not Inner Edge is activated here, the dimensions for the distance between top and bottom flange edge refer to the outside of the flanges. If Center is activated, the dimensions for the distance refer to the shape end (the exact position depends on the ‘Web Distance’ value).

Both Sides Equal The bottom of the notch is carried out with the data of the top and the data are transferred into the fields.

Exchange Sides The values of top and bottom are exchanged with each other so that you can turn the connection.

Distances The following dimensions can be set for upper flange and bottom flange separately:

3D Modifications

217

In the Radius input field, you can indicate the radius of ‘Drill Holes’ or ‘Radial’ option.

Clicking this button allows an unknown shape to be clicked. The flange thickness is then entered in the input fields for Top and Bottom Flange Inside. If you have entered a value in the +Distance field, this value will be added. Using this function, a flange distance can be swiftly determined without knowing the shape. As reference, you should select the setting ‘Outer Edge’.

+ Distance: This value is added to the result in the function GET FLANGE THICKNESS.

By clicking this button, you can transfer the data of the current cope directly to several copes, which have to be created anew. You have to click all shapes first which have to obtain the cope. Then you have to click the shapes to be coped.

3D Modifications

218

Standardized Notches

List This List shows previously defined notches from a database.

You can create these database files using any dBASE-editor you like. You can previously define a certain number of the most frequent notches. In the different List Fields you can have a look on the data, which are the base of the connection. Apart from this you can select the desired notch by clicking an entry.

3D Modifications

219

Notch at the End of the Shape Notch command is also available for treating the end of a shape with a notch. Just enter ESC instead of selecting a second shape and select the end of the shape where the notch has to be added. This function is also used to work on special shapes.

Notch Type Shape End creates a simple notch at the end of the shape,

US-Cope creates a complex moment-cope-notch (see below).

Edge Layout Here the following types are available as already described above: square, drill out and round off.

Web Distance The shape is shortened compared with its original length.

3D Modifications

220

Both Sides Equal The notches are carried out equally on the top and on the bottom of the shape.

Turn The notch is rotated by 90° compared with the longitudinal axis of the shape.

Center Hole-Flange Distance from the upper / lower notch to the flange of the shape.

Diameter Diameter of the drill hole for drilling out or radius of rounding

Center Hole-End Distance of the notch from the end of the shape without taking the web distance into consideration.

The results look as follows:

3D Modifications

221

US-Notch (Moment Cope) In California, special connections are produced which have to be earthquake-proof. Here, the joists adjoining the flange are notched. This function is also used to work on special shapes.

Different from the notches described up to now, the default settings of this notch are transformed into a poly-cut. The option for corner treatment is not available here. The result then looks as follows:

3D Modifications

222

3D Modifications

223

Here the definition of the values:

Web Distance FW

Flange Thickness t

Angle of Intersection A1, A2

Flange Distance FF1, FF2

Center Hole-Flange CT1, CT2

Diameter D1, D2

Hole Center FCL1, FCL2

Center Hole-End B1, B2

3D Modifications

224

Other results of treatment with special shapes would be possible as well:

3D Modifications

225

B.12.7 Boolean Operations

For volume modelling, ProSteel does not use the AutoCAD volume modeller ACIS but the modeller which is used in Architectural Desktop as well. This modeller works faster and produces smaller graph files. Consequently, you cannot process ProSteel objects with the Boolean operations of AutoCAD (e.g. subtract their volumes). In case you do combine objects, there will be no errors, but nothing will happen! In order to give you the same performance range as with AutoCAD, all Boolean operations were redefined (see also the command → ’Basic Solids’). Another option is to use the ProSteel properties to convert the ProSteel objects into ACIS volume models and then to process them with AutoCAD. Your drawings will then become larger and more sluggish. Add PS_ADD

This command creates a new volume by adding two existing volumes. You have to click both objects and the newly created object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on first.

Subtract PS_SUB

This command creates a new volume by subtracting one or several volumes from an existing volume. First, you have to click the object from which the other volumes are to be subtracted. Then click the objects whose volume is to be subtracted (these will be deleted in the process!). The new object receives all parts list information of the object you clicked on first. Please note, that you will not create two independent objects in case you “split” the first object in the process.

Plate Editor

226

B.13 Plate Editor

A special plate editor is available for processing of plates. This editor allows for modifying the contour by adding or separating poly-lines in a fast and comfortable way. You may see the poly-line as a plate of the same thickness and position like the plate to be processed. In addition, you can add chamfers and edges. All commands can also be carried out via the normal manipulation. The use of the plate editor is recommended when poly-plates have to be processed in complex situations because it can hide the other component parts and it automatically enters the plate level. When loading the function, click the plate to be modified first. Then a dialog appears where you can enter further indications with regard to the desired processing.

Plate Editor

227

B.13.1 Boolean Operations

Boolean Opera… Here, you specify what kind of processing has to be carried

out: either Add, Subtract or Common.

Side Select from which side of the plate the processing has to be carried out.

Contour You can use a polygon either as complete solid or as contour line. Please pay attention that the poly-line has to be closed, even if it is used as contour.

Distance If the poly-line has to be used as complete contour, you can enter an offset towards the contour.

Milling Width If the poly-line has to be used as milling contour, you can enter the width of the contour here.

Depth Here, you enter the depth of processing if the poly-line is not used completely continuous.

Hide Parts If this option is activated, all other component parts are hidden at plate selection. This is valid from the next selection onward.

Continued The poly-line is used as solid with the plate thickness, i.e. continuous.

Plate Editor

228

Click this button to determine the contour via the different contour points.

Click this button to determine the contour by picking a poly-line, a circle or an arc.

Click this button to add another edge to the plate.

Click this button to delete an edge from the plate.

Example for different Boolean Operations

Plate Editor

229

Example for different contours

Plate Editor

230

B.13.2 Chamfer / Rounding Off

Chamfer

Use this button to select the corresponding corner of the plate if you want to add a chamfer to a plate. Then, the input fields are released.

Layout Here, you select which kind of chamfer has to be carried out: straight, convex or concave.

Radius/1st. Edge Here, you indicate the radius at convex/concave version or the length of the first edge at straight version.

2nd. Edge Here, you indicate the length of the second edge of the straight chamfer.

Example for a plate with all possible three chamfer types

Plate Editor

231

Rounding Off

Use this button to select the corresponding plate edge to round off an edge. Then, the input fields are released. You can define the rounding off either via the radius or via the height of the rounding above the straight edge.

Radius Specify the rounding radius.

Min. Radius Here, the program shows you the minimum radius that is possible.

Height Specify the height above the straight edge.

Max. Height Here, the program shows you the maximum height that is possible.

Example for a plate with rounded off edge before and after the rounding off has been effected

Plate Editor

232

B.13.3 Edge Processing

This function serves for processing of one or more edges. The edges can be chamfered, rounded off, been equipped with a radius or seamed.

Use this button to select the corresponding plate edge to

process an edge. Then, the input fields are released.

Plate Editor

233

Layout specifies the kind of processing. six different kinds of edge processing are available for selection.

Top Side The selected processing is made at the upper side of the plate.

Bottom Side The selected processing is made at the lower side of the plate.

The following parameters are valid both for top and bottom side of the plate.

Var1 This value is either the length of the first edge, the rounding radius or the depth of the seam.

Var2 This value is either the length of the second edge or the height of the seam.

Selected Edge Here, you indicate from which edge to which edge the processing has to be made. When you click the edge and the side is switched on, the edges are displayed in a numbered way. You can select the processing area. If the starting value is equal to the end value, the processing will be carried out all around.

Select e. g. 0-1, 2-3 for the edges to be processed, when you

want to process the two opposite sides.

Plate Editor

234

Drilling / Bolted Connections

235

B.14 Drilling / Bolted Connections

Shapes and plates can be provided with different drill holes. Existing drill holes of a shape can be transferred to another shape, and oblong holes, countersunk holes or step borings can be created as well. Now, it is also possible to create thread holes. In addition, you can use this command to bolt component parts directly without having to generate drill holes first. Then, you can carry out the ‘Bolt’ command. The distribution of bolts is indicated in the same way as for drill holes but the bolts automatically create the necessary drill holes in all participating component parts. The program manages drill holes in the form of Drill Hole Fields. This means that groups consisting, for instance, of 2 x 2 holes will be drilled in one operation. In the dialog box you enter the individual hole pitches and then insert the complete hole group. The drilling depth is always along the Z-axis of the active UCS plane. A description of the drill hole field is given in the xy plane of the active UCS. Although it would be possible to drill holes in the general overview (global view), it is easier to work in one of the views. After selection of the command, a dialog box appears where you can set the basic behaviour of the command and other default parameters. Depending on the selection, the displayed content may differ.


236

B.14.1 Drill Holes / Drill Hole Fields

Layout Select the general form of the drill hole field here.

Rectangular – In a rectangular drill hole field, the drill holes are arranged in a rectangular way around the insertion point forming rows and columns. Radial – In a radial drill hole field, the drill holes are arranged in a complete or partial circle around the insertion point. Additional input fields are displayed allowing you to define round drill hole fields. Single Holes – The position of each single hole can be determined individually.

Rectangular Drill Hole Field

Definition In general, drill hole fields are described as follows:

Number1*Pitch1, Intermediate Pitch1, Number2*Pitch2, Intermediate Pitch2,...

Shape/X Dir Description of drill hole field in shape direction, for plates in x-direction of the UCS.

Cross/Y Dir Description of drill hole field perpendicular to the shape direction, for plates in y-direction of the UCS. Rectangular drill hole fields are described by indicating number*pitch of the drill holes and any existing Intermediate pitches (separated by a comma). At a number = 1 you can omit the pitch.


237

Radial Drill Hole Field

Number Number of drill holes

Radius The radius of the circle where the drill holes are arranged around the insertion point

Area The angle area throughout which the drill holes are distributed.

Start The starting angle from which on the drill holes are distributed.

Further Default Parameters

Diameter The bolt diameter is specified. It is taken from a list that can be edited, as you like. This list is stored in the directory.. \prg under pro_st3d.hdr. If you activate the option for individual diameter input in the global settings, you can also enter values not included in the list.

Addition If you don’t insert any thread hole, you can enter here the clearance between bolt diameter and hole diameter. In the above list, you can also define a Workloose for the bolt diameters. However, you have to activate the use in the Global Settings / Bolts. You can enter any value here.

Rectangle Hole Axis If rectangle holes have to be inserted, you enter the length of the rectangle hole axis here.

Layout Drill Through –Drill holes are created from one material edge to the other. Drill Blind Hole – The holes have only a certain length. Weld Crack – This is a small marking.

Depth Specify the depth of the drill hole for the layout ‘Drill Blind Hole.

Flange Indicates the flange to be drilled. You may either drill holes into the upper or lower flange or into both flanges. Upper/Lower flange results from the position of the component part and from the current z-axis.

Shape Centre The insertion point is perpendicular to the shape centre before use. Thus you will always obtain symmetrical drill holes related to the shape centre.


238

Creation of Drill Holes

Click this button to insert drill holes into a component part. Select a part, which is then drilled accordingly.

Click this button to insert drill holes into several component parts simultaneously. You can select several parts at the same time; alignment is made according to the first picked part.

Click this button to adopt the drill holes of one component part into another one. First click all shapes with holes to be transferred and then all shapes to adopt the hole. Using this function, drill holes from a copied connecting plate may be rapidly transferred to a shape. This option is only available if you didn’t select the option ‘Bolted Connection’. If you keep the Shift-key pressed at component part selection, you can select a XRef component part.

You can also adopt a drill hole field with simultaneous bolted

connection into a new shape so that the new shape is drilled first and then bolted. First select the properties of the shape and click on the EDIT button in the “Drill Holes” tab. The drill hole dialog described here will be displayed and you can adopt the drill holes with bolts using ‘Bolts/Add’.

Monitor Here you can see the creation of the drill hole field and define the insertion point.


239

Rectangular Drill Hole Fields The drill hole field is always entered in shape direction (from starting point to end point of insertion). The developing drill hole field is directly displayed among other things in the shape field of the “Insertion Position” tab of the dialog for control purposes.

This hole group is entered in the drill hole description as follows: Input field ‘shape / X Dir’ 2*60,200,1*,200,3*40 Input field ‘cross / Y Dir’ 2*100

If you only want to insert a hole group with single holes in longitudinal direction, just leave the box for crosswise direction empty. If you want to insert a hole group in the crosswise direction only, you have to enter 1* in longitudinal direction in any case (for one hole). One single drill hole field cannot cover mixed groups consisting of one and two holes in crosswise direction!

You can enter the predefined marking gauges of the shape by typing the letter W instead of a pitch, e.g. 2*W. If no specific marking gauge has been defined for the current shape, the program will prompt you to enter one.


240

B.14.2 Bolted Connections

Alternatively to drilling option, you can directly add a bolted connection to the component parts. For this purpose, you have to select at least 2 component parts the distance of which is not bigger than specified in the gap input field. All settings with regard to drill hole field, diameter, etc. are made on the first page.

Bolt Style Select the desired bolt style here.

Gap Maximum distance of one contact surface to the other; if the distance is bigger, no bolted connection will be created

Length Addition Length addition for the bolts


241

Touch Plane Normally, drill holes are created along the z-axis of the current UCS. At bolted connection option, however, the program can be prompted to search for contact surfaces. Normally, these are the surfaces where a bolted connection is inserted. For this purpose, the UCS doesn’t have to be placed normally on these surfaces.

In this example, the plate can be bolted to the shape although

the UCS is not aligned normally to the drill hole direction.

Single Hole Bolt The insertion of bolts into a part is allowed as well.

Turn The bolts are turned before insertion.

Update auto The connection is automatically updated if a component part has been modified. A logical link is created between the participating component parts.

Creation of Bolted Connections

Click this button to bolt several component parts with each other. Now, you are prompted by ProSteel to select the participating component parts and then to indicate the insertion point of the bolted connection (similar to a normal drill hole). Then, the bolts are automatically inserted and the necessary drill holes are created. You don’t have to specify in which flanges this has to be done because this is automatically determined by ProSteel.


242

Please note that the element, which was selected, first represents the main element of the connection. All others are only bolted elements. If you want to modify the bolted connection at a later time, you have to modify the properties of this main element. Since the drill hole fields of the bolted elements depend on the drill hole field of the main element, these cannot be modified independently. Please remember as well that the bolts are not assigned to a group. This assignment has to be made later using the command ‘Group’ if desired. Click this button to edit the bolt style.

Click this button to add new component parts to the bolted connection. Necessary drill holes are automatically generated.

Click this button to remove component parts from the bolted connection. Drill holes are automatically removed as well.


243


Hole Type Here, you specify the kind of bolt to be inserted.

Normal Drill The drill hole has one diameter at each position.

Countersunk The hole is drilled as countersunk hole. In this case, you can set the countersunk Depth and the opening Angle.

Step Hole The hole is drilled as step hole. You can determine the Depth of the step and the upper diameter additionally. The figure below shows you all three available layouts one beside the other.

Hole Type This setting influences the later 2D-depiction.

Offset You can influence the insertion point of the drill hole using an offset related to the selected insertion point.

Rectangular In this case you can enter the offset separately for x, y.


244

Polar In this case you can enter the offset by means of distance and angle related to the insertion axis. In the case of shapes, the insertion axis is the longitudinal axis instead of the x-axis.

Shape Centre The insertion point is perpendicular to the shape centre before use. Thus you will always obtain symmetrical drill holes related to the shape centre.

Pitch Lines During drilling, the crack lines of the participating shapes are displayed. After end of drilling they disappear again.

Centre Lines During drilling, the centre lines of the participating shapes are displayed. After end of drilling they disappear again.

Ignore Inner... If this field is checked, the drill hole is not interrupted at concave chambers, which occur due to inner contours. Thus, it is possible to drill through a square tube completely. Otherwise, only one side would be drilled.

Create Thread The drill hole is executed as thread hole. No Workloose is used and the drill hole is correctly displayed as thread hole in 2D depiction. In 3D depiction, additional lines are displayed to make the thread hole visible.


245

Edge Distances ProSteel can automatically verify the admissible edge distance during drilling of component parts. It is also possible to carry out this control manually for certain parts. If an automatic control has to take place, which is activated directly during drilling, you have to switch on the corresponding option in the global settings. You can specify the admissible edge distances of shapes and plates for each hole diameter in a table. The corresponding drill hole then will be verified by means of this table and the part will be marked in colour if the distance is too small. If the automatic control is activated, an info window appears during drilling. However, the drilling will be realized nevertheless.

In this table, you can assign the corresponding minimum distances for any existing drill hole diameter, separated according to shapes and plates. Click this button to start controlling the edge distances. You

are prompted to select the parts. If the drill hole distances of a part are smaller than the selected distances, this part will be highlighted in colour. You can remove this marking using the command PS_REGEN.

If you suppress any further display during automatic control, any existing smaller distances will not be displayed any more. This button serves for removing the lock of the display.

If you have activated the ‘Expert’ mode in the global settings, this button will be additionally displayed. It permits editing of the diameter table.


246

Editing the Table After double-clicking on a line, an input dialog appears where you can define the values:

Dia. The corresponding diameter

Shapes The specified edge distance for shapes

Plates The specified edge distance for plates

When you quit this dialog with OK, the indicated values are adopted into the table and this list is sorted anew according to the available diameters.

Automatic Control If the automatic control of the edge distances has been activated and the program detects smaller edge distances during an operation, a warning message will be displayed. However, this warning is only a hint; the corresponding drill hole will nevertheless be inserted into the component part. Please note that this message might not appear before end of the action.


247

Bolts

248

B.15 Bolts

Bolting of component parts is the easiest form of automatic connections provided by ProSteel. In previous versions, the components to be bolted had to be drilled first.which now is not necessary any more. Of course, it is still possible to continue working with the existing combination of drilling/bolting. Another option is the creation of user-defined bolt styles as well as the check and update of the bolting via logical links (please refer to ->'Logical Links'). In some connection dialogs, a lot of settings are not necessary and you can set the bolts exactly according to your requirements. After all component parts, to be bolted with each other are selected, the program checks the position of the parts with regard to possible bolting (if need be, with regard to drillings which are situated one above the other and having an allowable tolerance; but it does not check possible mounting). Necessary bolt lengths are calculated and the bolts are inserted according to your default settings with regard to type and possible washers. Then, the bolts are adopted into a bolt list for later parts list.

Changes to older versions 16.xx From version 17 onwards, ProSteel is able to adopt existing bolts and component parts in a new connection/bolting (back to back bolting). This permits e.g. to bolt automatically 2 web angle connections which are connected on the left and on the right of a girder and this bolting is designed completely and correctly. This process is running completely in the background; the only prerequisite is that bolts and connection parts are connected with each other via logical links. As an option, this process may be switched off in Global Settings/Bolts because it possibly requires a considerable amount of calculation time. Bolt management is still effected via styles, which may be created by the user. There is however one important modification: the necessary data from which the bolts are generated are not summed up any more but they have been divided into the corresponding components. This allows you to put together the components of a bolting completely; and length calculation is designed on the basis of the selected component parts. The result is considerably more flexible and bolt definitions more accurate.

Bolts

249

B.15.1 Bolting parts

The components are bolted automatically after part selection and selection of the bolt style. The holes in the component parts are analysed and the corresponding bolts are selected and inserted. After having loaded the function, you will get the following screen display:

Bolt style Here you select the bolt style to be used.

Single hole Bolting Normally, at least 2 component parts are required for a bolting. Sometimes you only want to insert bolts without bolting them. This option creates bolts for each hole of the selected component parts without requiring a second part.

Create dynamic Connection The selected component parts are connected with each other via logical links. The bolting is automatically updated in case of modification.

Diameter Indicates the virtual hole diameter if you want to create a single bolt manually. This process was chosen to preserve the compatibility with standard bolting function.

Work loose Indicates the virtual free play if manual insertion has been selected.

Bolts

250

Length Addition Indicates the value by which the bolts are extended. This is valid for all kinds of insertion.

Gap distance Indicates the maximum distance between two holes which are assumed to belong to the bolting. If this value is exceeded the holes cannot be bolted.

Angle difference This is the difference of the angles of the drilled holes in degrees. If this value is exceeded, the holes don't align and cannot be bolted.

Colours bolt= indicates the colour of the bolt on the monitor, monitor= indicates the colour of monitor background.

This button allows bolting of component parts. Select the desired parts and the bolts will be inserted into these component parts according to the existing holes.

This button allows bolting of component parts. Select the desired parts as well as the area of bolting and the bolts will be inserted into these component parts according to the existing holes.

This option permits manual insertion of a bolt. Select start and endpoint of grip length and the bolt will be inserted.

This button permits to attach a single nut and/or disk without the corresponding bolt. To do so, pick the insertion point of the nut or washer and then the direction of the bolt head (where it would normally be). To attach a nut and/or washer directly at a round bar steel, first press the ESC-key, and then click the round bar steel at the desired end.

This button allows rotation of one or several bolts. Select the corresponding bolts and they will be rotated. This button allows new weight calculation of the selected bolts on the base of their volume.

Bolts

251

B.15.2 Bolt Style Management

The second page permits the manipulation of bolt styles.

Bolt Style Here, user selects the bolt style, which is to be modified.

This button opens the dialog for bolt definition.

2nd Washer Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a 2nd washer.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the 2nd washer. It is only available if this option has been activated.

2nd Tapered Washer Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a 2nd wedge washer.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the 2nd wedge washer. It is only available if this option has been activated.

Bolts

252

Tapered washer Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a 2nd wedge washer.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the wedge washer. It is only available if this option has been activated.

Washer Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a washer beneath the nut.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the washer. It is only available if this option has been activated.

Nut Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a nut.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the nut. It is only available if this option has been activated.

Safety nut Activate this option if your style definition is to be equipped with a safety nut.

This button opens the dialog for definition of the safety nut. It is only available if this option has been activated.

The current definition is stored in the drawing and in a file. If the style is modified and you leave this page without having saved the modifications, you are asked whether you want to save.

Permits loading of the current style definition from a style file. All current definitions of the current style will be overwritten.

Bolts

253

Bolt Definition When the button for bolt definition is pressed, the following dialog opens:

Style name Indicates the current style

Data file Indicates which data file is used for bolts with this style. Only bolt files are displayed.

Parts list entry Here you specify the entry of the bolt, which is to be written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be used: $(D) stands for bolt diameter and $(L) stands for bolt length. In addition, the following two variables are possible: $(GLM) for min grip length and $(GLX) for max grip length.

Export name This name is used for data export. The above-mentioned conditions are valid as well.

Material Here the bolt material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been defined as bolt materials.

Tension Enter the tension as a percentage.

Length Addition Enter the additional length of the bolts. The bolt will be extended by this value after length calculation.

Bolts

254

Layout Specify whether the bolt has to be a shop bolt or an assembly bolt. This specification has influences on the parts list. When an assembly list is created, only assembly bolts will be taken into consideration.

Units Specify the units the data file is based on.

Coating Select the coating of the bolt.

Colour Select the colour of the bolt in the model.

Bitmap You may select a bitmap that is used in the selection lists of this style.

Click on this button to open the AutoCAD-dialog for colour selection. When you have clicked on the corresponding input field before, you can comfortably select the colour.

Click on this button to open the file selection dialog and you can select the bitmap for the bolt style.

Countersunk head

The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.

Parts list entry The bolt is adopted into the parts list.

Inner Hexagon The bolt is executed as inner hexagon.

No DM Check For this bolt, a diameter check will not be carried out. Normally, all entered diameters which are found will be reduced to standard values. Thus e.g. a bolt with bolt diameter DM=12.5mm cannot be created.

Individual Mounting Space The bolt has a standard mounting space or the bolt style has an individual mounting space.

Upper Area Enter the width of the mounting space at the bolt head either as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the diameter via *xx or as addition to the diameter via +xx. Enter the length of the mounting space at the bolt head either as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the length via *xx or as addition to the length via +xx.

Bolts

255

Lower Area Enter the width of the mounting space at the bolt base either as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the diameter via *xx or as addition to the diameter via +xx. Enter the length of the mounting space at the bolt base either as absolute value, i.e. as many times the amount of the nut height via *xx or as addition to the nut height via +xx.

Bolts

256

Nut Definition

Data file Indicates which data files are used for nuts with this style.

Only nut files are displayed.

Partlist entry Here you specify the entry of the nut, which is to be written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be used. $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.


Material Here the nut material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been defined as bolt materials.

Partlist Entry The nut is adopted into the parts list.

Definition of safety nuts takes place analogously.

Bolts

257

Washer Definition

Data file Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style.

Only washer files are displayed.

Parts list entry Here you specify the entry of the washer, which is to be written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be used. $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.


Material Here the washer material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been defined as bolt materials.

Partlist entry The washer is adopted into the parts list.

Bolts

258

Wedge Washer Definition

Data file Indicates which data files are used for washers with this style.

Only washer files are displayed.

Parts Entry U-washer This definition is used in case U-shapes are applied. The same is valid for I-washers. Here, you specify the entry of the washer, which has to be written into the parts list and position flag. Two variables may be used. $(D) stands for bolt diameter, $(L) stands for bolt length.

Export name this name is used for data export. The above-mentioned conditions are valid as well.

Material Here, the washer material is selected. Only those materials are listed which have been defined as bolt material.

Partlist entry The washer is adopted into the parts list.

Replace standard washer The standard washer is also executed as wedge washer for this definition.

Bolts

259

B.15.3 Insertion of Threaded Rods

On this page, you can define threaded rods and insert them into the model.

Bolt Style Use the indicated style to define the thread of the threaded

rod.

Diameter Indicates the diameter of the threaded rod.

End Offset Indicates the end offset of the threaded rod.

Round to Rounds the overall length of the threaded rod to the indicated value.

The threaded rod is inserted into the model by using 2 points.

Bolts

260

B.15.4 Sort

This dialog page serves for management of bolt style selection lists and for creation of new bolt styles.

Serves for creation of new bolt styles. After selection, you are

asked for the name of the new style. Then, the style is created and is equipped with the settings of the current style.

Allows loading of a style from the file. The style is inserted at the current position.

The currently checked style is deleted without further query.

The currently checked style is moved upwards in the list.

The currently checked style is moved downwards in the list.

All style definitions stored in your corresponding files will be updated. The styles are stored as objects in the drawing. When the style definition is modified on the hard disk, normally the modifications are not transferred to the internal objects. They are carried out for all styles by this function.

Bolts

261

Insert Stiffeners

262

B.16 Insert Stiffeners

ProSteel offers an automatic command for the insertion of a stiffener into a shape. Although stiffeners are common poly-plates or flats, the program already calculates their dimensions according to the shape and user specifications. You may select from a number of variables and track the result immediately in the drawing, modifying it in “real time”. In the case of symmetric shapes such as HEA, HEB, etc., two opposite stiffeners are created between the web and the two flanges. When only one stiffener is needed for the structure, just delete the other one. However, it will not be restored during an update.

Insertion of Stiffeners You can insert stiffeners either in views or in the global view. When you have selected normal stiffeners (i.e. stiffeners running vertically to the shape axis), you are prompted to specify the shape where the stiffeners are to be inserted. After selection, the program prompts you to specify the center of the insertion point of the stiffeners. Click the point you want on the shape or on a construction line. Your pick point is generally placed perpendicular to the shape axis. When you have selected ‘Full Stiffener’, the stiffener is inserted to fit. When you have selected ‘Half Stiffener’ or ‘To Measure’, you are prompted to specify the fastening side of the stiffeners. Click the flange side with which the stiffeners are to be in contact. Let’s assume that you have drawn the construction lines on the upper flange in the top view as shown on the left. If you click the line at any point, the pick point is always positioned perpendicular to the axis and used as the insertion point of the stiffeners.

Insert Stiffeners

263

Dimensions

Layout Here you select the shape of the inner corners of the

stiffeners.

Insert Stiffeners

264

Use Flat.. A flat steel is used instead of a poly-plate. The flat is processed by Boolean operations in a way as if its shape would be identical with a poly-plate.

Search Closest Flat The current polyplate is replaced by the closest fitting flat steel. No user-specific flat steel is created.

Length Here, you specify the length of the stiffeners.

Full Stiffener The stiffener height extends over the complete web height of the shape.

Half Stiffener The stiffener height stretches over half the web height of the shape where the side is determined by the picked side.

By Length The stiffener is given the height specified by you. Only values between 10-90% of the web height can be used.

Square The height of the stiffener is determined according to the specifications, but the layout is a triangle shape.

Thickness Thickness of the stiffener plate; this value is taken from the table or it can be entered freely if this setting has been activated.

Flange Offset When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the flange side, i.e., the stiffener height is slightly reduced.

Web Distance When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the web side, i.e., the stiffener width is slightly reduced.

Length This is the value for the stiffener length when you have selected the stiffener length ‘To Measure’.

Offset When calculating the stiffener dimensions, this is the distance to the outer edge of the flanges, i.e., the stiffener width is slightly reduced. If the stiffener is to slightly project towards the outside, type a negative value.

Round to The Round to value describes a rounding accuracy applicable to the width of the calculated stiffened plate. Rounding is carried out after calculation of the projection. Using this command, it is possible, e.g., to permit only dimensions divisible by 5, so that flat steel bars can be used.

Radius In the Radius input field you specify the radius of the ribbed plate at the shape radii. If this value is 0, the shape radius is imported. If you have selected the create ‘Insert at Slant’, the radius is bridged by a slanted edge.

Insert Stiffeners

265

Click this button to move the stiffener with respect to the insertion point. After insertion, the stiffener first is placed in the middle of the insertion point. However, you can also align it to the upper or lower edge of the stiffener by clicking repeatedly on it.

Insert Stiffeners

266

Connect On this page you specify the weld style in the case the stiffeners have to be welded directly. You can also attach weld cracks to mark the stiffeners in the shape.

Weld Style Specify the weld style to be used.

Flange Side The flange side of the stiffeners will be welded.

Thickness If you want to overwrite the thickness of the selected style, you may do this here.

Web Side The web side of the stiffeners will be welded.

Thickness If you want to overwrite the thickness of the selected style, you may do this here.

Weld Mark Here, you specify whether small drill holes serving as weld marks have to be inserted into the shape after insertion of the stiffeners. These weld marks then can be output in the workshop drawings or in the NC-data. None – No marks are fixed. At Center - A mark is fixed at the center of the stiffener. At Edges - A mark is fixed at each of the outer edges of the stiffener.

Insert Stiffeners

267

Create Group If this field is checked, the stiffeners and the shape are arranged to create a group. If the shape is already part of another group, the stiffeners are allocated to that other group.

Options

Angle insertion If this field is checked, stiffeners can be inserted in the shape

using a slant. At insertion, you are prompted for a line specifying the direction. The necessary extension of the stiffener width is automatically calculated.

Insert Stiffeners

268

Angle Here you can enter the position angle related to the centerline.

2D-Section If this field is checked, an automatic 2D section is inserted directly at the stiffener. This section can be displayed during detailing. The cutting plane is situated slightly in front of the stiffener and it ends slightly behind the stiffener; the cutting direction is always in shape direction.

Assignments As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too it is possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the component part and then select the settings.

Oblique Stiffeners In principle, the insertion of oblique stiffeners is the same as described above, except for the fact that you are prompted to define a position line of the stiffeners. Click a (construction) line showing the orientation of the stiffeners. Now, the stiffeners are inserted into the shape in an oblique position. The distances refer to the outer corners of the stiffener plates. If you select the command via “PS_RIP_ANGLE”, you will be prompted for the position line right during input and can then click it. Show the center line of the shape in the top view and use the ‘virtual point of intersection without Z’, in order to get an exact center point of insertion using the ‘point of intersection’ of the axis and the construction line.

Plate Connections

269

B.17 Plate Connections

ProSteel automatically creates any plate connections such as stiff or rigid plates according to DAST (ocal standard), jointed plates, etc. but also completely freely definable connections. The program determines the type of possible connections based on the shapes to be connected and offers these to the user as well. In addition to the actual connection plate other components such as stiffeners, backer plates, bolts and even reinforcement haunches can be created with this command and assigned to the proper component groups directly. An entire plate connection can be created with just one single command. Hint: All possible plate connections are now contained in this shared dialog and, e.g., you can specify a stiff connection first and subsequently process this connection the same way you would a free plate.

Creating Plate Connections When selecting the plate connection command you are first prompted for the shape to be connected, which you have to click at the end to be connected. Then you have to click the supporting shape (the shape to which you want to connect) or you have to ignore it with RETURN. No supporting shape is considered when pressing RETURN or the right mouse button and you can create a simple end plate at the shape to be connected. No further action on your part is required because the program does the rest for you. The shape to be connected is cut to the proper length and is fitted with the connection plate. The plate and supporting shape are drilled and bolted together and – depending on your selection – the additional components for the stiffeners are attached. Then you will see a plate connection with the default values of the last connection created with this function followed by the display of the dialog for the parameter settings. If you want to create e.g. a plate resistant to deflection instead, just switch to the dialog tab for plates resistant to deflection and select the desired plate. On screen, the connection changes immediately to display the current settings. Switch back to the layout tab to see the current dimensions, which can be dynamically adjusted.

Plate Connections

270

B.17.1 Free Plate Connections

Layout and Dimensions This dialog opens when selecting the command after the shapes to be connected have been picked. You can enter the dimensions of any freely defined plate connection. This dialog tab is also the basic dialog of the other plate dialogs. Any selection from such objects as e.g. the plates resistant to deflection can still be changed here because any of the parameters on which the connection is based is entered and imported in this dialog from where they can be modified further at any time.

Plate Connections

271

Layout of Plate Specify the layout of the connecting plate. The following figure displays different connection types, which can be created.

If you selected the ‘Automatic’ option, the program decides which type to be used depending on the position of the shapes. The critical angle, which differentiates between, spliced and standard plate connection is approximately 45°. If you want to obtain the ‘Flange’ type, you have to set this option explicitly because otherwise always a plate connection at the web will be created.

Group Dimensions

Width means the width of the plate (in case of I shapes: parallel to the shape flange).

Thickness means the thickness of the plate.

Length means a fixed length of the plate independent of the shape height.

Entering the value 0 for the length, you can enter the plate length variably in the Offset Top and Offset Bottom fields as distance from the upper and lower edge of the selected shape.

Gap means that an indicated space is left between the supporting shape and the plate. This allows you to consider e.g. finishing tolerances.

Offset Top means the distance from the upper shape edge. Positive values reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle. Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the shape.

Plate Connections

272

Offset means the distance from the lower shape edge. Positive values reduce the plate dimensions towards the middle. Negative values increase the plate dimensions beyond the shape.

Doubler Plate Here, you can create a second plate with different dimensions than the first one. The input fields for the dimensions of the second plate are released after the option has been clicked.

As Poly-Plate The inserted end plates are not created as flats but as poly-plate.

Rotate Connection In case of asymmetric plates you can define the plate position here. Use this option to turn the complete connection by 180° around the insertion axis, if upper and lower side were exchanged at generation of the connection.

Equal Plates If you want to insert two identical plates, you have to activate the option Double Plate and set the option Equal Plates. Now the dimensions of the second plate are the same as for the first one and two identical plates are inserted.

Click this button to adjust the first plate to the cross-section of any existing shape.

Click this button to copy the data of the first plate into the input fields of the second plate.

Gap Indicates the width of the gap between supporting shape and plate.

Plate Offset Horizontal means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the flange of the connecting shape. Vertical means that the complete plate connection is shifted parallel to the web of the connecting shape.

Direct Call of Plate Functions The different default types can be called directly as well. If you have selected the connection type ‘Splice’, you can define a separation line for a continuous shape by pressing RETURN or the right mouse button when you are prompted for the supporting shape.

Normal: PS_ENDPLATE_NORM

Plate Connections

273

As Splice: PS_ENDPLATE_SPLICE

At Flange: PS_ENDPLATE_FLANGE

Plate Connections

274

Drill Holes

Without Holes The connection plate is created without drill holes.

Group Vertical

The drill hole spacing in a vertical direction (height) is determined. Depending on the entry, the values have different meanings. Examples are given at the end of the command description.

Upside Here, you enter the distance of the upper row of holes from the plate’s upper edge. If this value is 0, and the value in the box Downside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the Middle field.

Middle Here, you enter the distance of the first and second row of holes from the upper and lower plate edge. The holes will be distributed uniformly between the two outer holes if this value is 0. The other rows of holes will be arranged in the same manner if the number is greater than 4.

Downside Here, you enter the distance of the lowest row of holes from the plate’s lower edge. If this value is 0, and the value in the box Upside is also 0, the only entry that will be used is in the Middle field.

Plate Connections

275

Offset Here, you enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the plate upper edge. If you enter a negative value, shifting will be carried out with respect to the plate lower edge.

Asymmetrical If you have selected this option, the structure of the hole pattern input changes and a list with an input field appears. Depending on the number of holes, you can determine each distance individually by clicking the position in the list and by specifying the distance in the input field.

Measured from Here you can specify at asymmetrical distribution from which position the distribution of drill holes starts.

Group Horizontal

The drill hole spacing in a horizontal direction (width) is defined here. Examples are given at the end of the command description.

Left Here, you enter the distance between the outer left row of holes and the central left row of holes, if the number of rows is 4.

Middle Here, you enter the distance between the two inner rows of holes. The rows of holes are generally arranged centrally, unless they are offset by an entry in the Offset field.

Right Here, you enter the distance between the outer right row of holes and the central right row of holes, if the number of rows is 4.

Offset Here, you enter a simultaneous shifting of all rows of holes with respect to the right plate edge. If you enter a negative value, shifting will be carried out with respect to the left plate edge.

Plate Connections

276

Connect

Bolt Settings

Bolt style You can select the type of bolts (e.g., DIN 6914) to be used for the connection using this list.

Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection.

Workloose Here, you enter the required clearance of the bolted connection, in most cases 2 mm.

Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new one.

Weld Settings

Weld Style Specify the kind of weld seam.

Weld... You can specify which weld seams have to be created in the model using the options Weld Flange Side or Weld Web Side. The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding input fields.

Click this button to process the weld style or to create a new one.

Plate Connections

277

Stiffening Plates

As Poly-Plate All kinds of stiffening plates described here which normally are

carried out as flats can be transformed into a poly-plate using this option.

Backer Plates You can specify additional backer plates automatically or according to certain dimensions. Thickness, width and length can be specified separately.

Top Plate A cover plate can be created According to Girder in an automate way. The cover plate can be adjusted even further via thickness, edge distance and offset.

Web Plates

Web Plates Additional web plates can be generated as well. Indicate the position of the web plate by means of the option web plate left and web plate right.

Dimensions The size is specified by thickness, width and length.

Drill Holes No/Dia. indicates the number and the diameter of the drill holes. The Hole Distance and the horizontal and vertical offset of the web plate to the plate centre can be specified as well.

Plate Connections

278

Stiffeners

Stiffener On the side of the end plate, stiffeners are inserted into the supporting shape at the level of the flanges.

Inner Stiffeners Use this option to create additional stiffeners between the already created stiffeners. In the input fields, you specify the number and the distance to the upper and lower edge of the plate.

Support Stiffeners Here, you can insert additional diagonal ribs into the supporting shape. With the Height entry, you define the distance of the lower insertion point to the inner side of the flange. The prerequisite for generating this stiffeners is the use of a bottom flange haunch having a stiffener on the side of the bottom flange haunch and a cover plate.

Click this button to select the command for insertion or edition of stiffeners. Here, you can modify the values and create new templates.

Plate Connections

279

Please note that the settings for stiffeners cannot be made independently here. You only select a template containing the necessary parameters. The advantage is that you have to define a certain kind of stiffener only once and then only select it by using its name. However, you mustn’t forget that in case of modifying this page after having modified this stiffener template the existing stiffeners are updated as well (i.e. they will obtain the dimensions of the modified template).

Stiffeners at Bottom Flange Haunch

Supporting Shape Here, you specify the stiffener in the supporting shape at use of a bottom flange haunch.

Connecting Shape Here you specify the stiffener in the connecting shape at use of a bottom flange haunch.

Here, you see an example of an end plate connection with bottom flange haunch, cover plate and diagonal stiffener in the supporting shape:

Plate Connections

280

Bottom Flange Haunch You can add additional haunches and further stiffeners to each of the previous connections and create a strengthened connection. Bolted knees, etc. can be generated in a relative fast way.

Select Haunch If the entry Top Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created

on the upper side of the shape to be connected. If the entry Bottom Haunch is checked, the haunch will be created on the lower side of the shape to be connected.

Haunch Length the length of the bottom flange haunch

Cut Width the width of the bottom flange haunch at the intersection side

Top Height the width of the bottom flange haunch at the top side

Flange Width the width of the bottom flange haunch flange

Flange Thickness the flange thickness of the bottom flange haunch

Plate Thickness the thickness of the web plate of the bottom flange haunch

Facet Size chamfer preset at the supporting side of the web plate

Facet Horizontal specification of the horizontal part of the chamfer at the connection side

Facet Vertical specification of the vertical part of the chamfer at the connection side

Plate Connections

281

Cropped Shape A cropped shape is used as bottom flange haunch instead of a haunch of flat steel or plate. Additional stiffening plates can be inserted for a cropped shape. The dimensions are defined as follows:

Stiff. Plate... Indicate the dimensions of the stiffening plate: Width, Length and Thickness.

... as Plate The stiffening plate is not carried out as a shape but as a plate.

Rectangular Plate A rectangular plate is inserted as bottom flange haunch.

Perpendicular to Support A rectangular plate is inserted with the edges parallel to the support.

As Poly-Plate The inserted shapes of the bottom flange haunch are transformed into plates.

Rib Support In the supporting shape, stiffeners are inserted on the level of the bottom flange haunch. Select the style under Ribs.

Rib Connection In the connecting shape, stiffeners are inserted on the level of the bottom flange haunch. Select the style under Ribs.

Plate Connections

282

Form Group

Form Groups and Notches

Create Group At insertion of the end plate connection, groups are automatically created out of the inserted parts.

With Bolts Bolts are added to the group as well.

With Welds Welds are added to the group as well.

Safety Notches

Safety Copes... For the end plate connection, you can specify at which position a safety notch has to be inserted. This is a standard process in Northern America. You can choose whether you want to attach the notch on the Top left, on the bottom left, on the top right or on the bottom right.


Plate Connections

283

B.17.2 Connections Resistant to Deflection / Shear Forces

In the selection list, you can see the connections according to DAST, which is available for the selected shapes. You can control the basic connection data in this list, and the necessary shape stiffeners are displayed as well. Tension, Shear... Here, you can enter a maximum load for the connection (in

KN) for the corresponding load type. In the list, only the connections suitable for these loads will be displayed.

Plate List In this list, the possible connections according to DAST are displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking it. The individual list fields display the data on which the connection is based. You might have to shift the column size to view all data. After the selection, the connection is immediately updated with these data and the values are transferred to the other dialog tabs for possible adaptation.

No Connection Possible If - according to the guidelines - no connection is defined for the selected shapes, no dialog tab will appear after selection of the shapes to define the connection. In this case, you have to define yourself the dimensions of the connection.

Plate Connections

284

Connections Resistant to Deflection

Meaning of the List Entries Designation the standard designation of the connection

Width the width of the plate (parallel to the flange of the connecting shape)

Thickness the thickness of the plate

Length the length of the plate (parallel to the web of the connecting shape)

Horizontal the number of drill holes in direction of the plate width

Vertical the number of drill holes in direction of the plate length

Diameter the used bolt diameter

Bolt Standard the used bolt type

Stiffeners additional stiffeners are required for this connection

Backer additional backer plates are required for this connection

Strengthening Strengthening is required for this connection.

Projection the projection of the plate beyond the shape to be connected

Af the thickness of the weld seam at the flange

Plate Connections

285

As the thickness of the weld seam at the web

Tension, Shear,.. Maximum loading of the connection

Shear Force Connections The meaning of the list entries corresponds to those for connections resistant to deflection so that you can refer to this chapter for information.

Plate Connections

286

B.17.3 User-Defined Connections

Just as the data for plates resistant to deflection and those subject to shear forces is recorded in databases, you can also create a database containing user-defined plate connections and later load these stored types using a selection list. In principle, this serves the same purpose as storing and then loading free plates with the template function. User-defined plate connections can display a larger amount of data in a more clearly organized structure because all parameters are visible in the view. You can also process or export the data with any standard dBASE editor. HINT: Take advantage of this option by creating a database with frequently utilized and maybe company-specific connections, which are then always available to all program users within your company. Since the dialog and process after creation of the database is almost identical – except for the selection - with those for the plates resistant to deflection, you can refer to this chapter for the meaning of the settings (see ‘Plates Resistant to Deflection‘). How to create the database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask ProSteel dealer.

Plate Connections

287

Base Plates According To DSTV

288

B.18 Base Plates According to DSTV

Attach base plates to supports according to the specifications of the standardized connections used in the steel construction industry (DAST) using this command (with 2 holes). By indicating an additional distance, you have also the possibility to create base plates with 4 holes. In addition, you can define another hole field seizing any kind of drilling in a 2D grid.

Insert Base Plates After clicking a support and entering marginal specifications (e.g. load to be transmitted, concrete quality, etc.) a list of suitable base plates is displayed. Select a plate from the list and ProSteel will automatically carry out the complete processing and create the base plate. Since you have access to all plate dimensions, you can modify the defined values any time. Inclined support connections are also possible. Please note that the data concerning the load to be transmitted, refer to the vertical supports and connections according to DAST!


289

Layout

Selected Column Display which Selected Column is processed at the moment.

Plate Width Width of the base plate

Plate Height Height or length of the base plate

Plate Thickness Thickness of the base plate

Grout Thickness In this input field, you can enter an additional space between the "Base Plate" (point of reference) and lower edge base plate. Once you have entered the supporting shape from the "Base Plate", all length dimensions will be adjusted correctly.

Group Options

In Shape Direction If this option is activated, the plate is always attached normally beneath the shape. If the shape is slanted in the space, the plate is slanted as well.

Shorten Column The column is shortened by the lining value.


290

Form Group The shape and the plate are arranged to form a group.

As Polyplate The base plate is not formed as flat bar but as poly-plate.

Drill Holes

Group Inner Drill Holes

Hole Distance Distance of inner drill holes to the X-axis of the shape.

Hole Distance Distance of inner drill holes to the Y-axis of the shape.

Hole Diameter Diameter of inner drill holes

Group Outer Drill Holes

Hole Field Width Number of drill holes of the outer hole field in the X-axis of the shape and intermediate distance of the drill holes of the outer hole field in the X-axis of the shape.

Hole Field Height Number of drill holes of the outer hole field in the Y-axis of the shape and intermediate distance of the drill holes of the outer hole field in the Y-axis of the shape.

Hole Diameter Diameter of outer drill holes. Outer drill holes are only created if both axes have a valid description.


291

Bolts / Dowels On this page, you make the settings of anchor bolts or welds. Anchor bolts are only displayed as symbols and cannot be detailed.

Group Bolts

Tie Bolts Anchor bolts are inserted for the inner drill holes.

Label The designation of anchor bolts for the parts list; this name can contain two variables, $(ID) for inner diameter and $(OD) for outer diameter.

...Outside Anchor bolts are inserted for the outer drill hole field as well, if defined.

Use Dowel Dowel elements are created as volume bodies.

Input Field You can specify a database file from which the dowel definitions can be taken.

In Bolt Partlist The dowels are taken over into the bolt part list.

No Detailing The dowels are not taken over into the DetailCenter.

Group Weld Settings

Weld Style Style name for the welds if a weld has to be effected.

Flange Side Welds are inserted at the flange of the shape.

Thickness If you want to overwrite the style thickness, you can enter the desired thickness for the flange side here.

Web Side Welds are inserted at the web side of the shape.


292

Thickness If you want to overwrite the style thickness, you can enter the desired thickness for the web side here.

Standard Definitions Data base entries are saved for certain DIN shapes. If you have selected a shape having such entries, these will be displayed in this window. You can influence the selection by means of different selection criteria. Only data records corresponding to these criteria will be displayed.

Support Load Enter the minimum load of supports which is known. The

program searches the entries supporting this load or a higher load.

Hole Dia. The desired drill hole diameter for anchor bolts.

Concrete Quality Quality of concrete foundations

Select a displayed data record by double-clicking on it. All data are set accordingly. Please note that only the plate dimensions and the inner drill holes are set. Other settings are not modified.


293

Dowels In addition, you can specify the type of dowel for fixing the base plates.

You can modify the execution of the dowel with the anchor bolt by modifying the values for diameter, length and key.

Assignments As it is the case for each dialog creating component parts, here too, it is possible to make all assignments for each individual shape directly. Select the component part and then select the settings.

Web Angle

294

B.19 Web Angle

This command creates steel web angles in three types of shapes IPE, HEA and HEB. Two web angles will be fastened opposite of each other on the ends of the shape to be connected when a support shape is not selected. The shape to be connected is cut to length after the exact definition is entered. The connection, drilling and bolting is carried out automatically. You can also select web angle connections according to the standard DAST guidelines.

Create Web Angle Connection First click the shape to be connected and then the supporting shape to connect the plate. Press the ENTER key or the right mouse button, if there is no supporting shape. The web angle command retains the last connection settings. Using this setting creates the connection. In the now appearing dialog, the dimensions may be modified and the results checked in the model.

Shapes

Web Angle

295

Shape Class,... Here you can specify the angle shape of the selected

connection. Only shapes that are equal-sided angles and unequal-sided angles can be selected.

Use Flat The web angle will be made from bent plate steel instead of angle steel. Enter the required dimensions in the Thickness, length of Long Leg, length of Short Leg and Bent Radius input fields. The program will determine the actual length of the steel plate.

Position Here you determine the side of the shape (Left or Right) to be connected to the web angle. If both have been checked, a web angle is created at each side of the web.

Turn Angles The long and short side of the web angle are exchanged so that the long side is situated at the connecting shape.

Gap Here you indicate the distance to be kept between the end of the connecting shape and the supporting shape.

Side Offset Here you indicate the distance between the web of the connected shape and the web angles (normally 0 or a slight clearance).

Vertical Offset Here you indicate the distance the web angle is shifted from the axis of the shape to be connected, upwards or to the right (depending on the position). A negative entry will cause shifting in the opposite direction. Selecting one of the following options permits you to make additional specifications referring to the dimension.

From Edge Means that the vertical offset is measured from the upper edge of the shape up to the upper edge of the web angle.

Lower Edge The vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web angle instead of to the upper edge.

Up to First Bolt The vertical offset refers to the centre of the first bolt instead of to the edges of the web angle.

Web Angle

296

Distances

Number (All Directions)

Shape Direction The number of drill holes in both sides of the web angle cross-wise to the shape to be connected (in the original position parallel to the connecting shape).

Connect. Shape The number of drill holes in the long side of the web angle (in the original position parallel to the shape to be connected).

Support Shape... The number of drill holes in the short side of the web angle (in the original position cross-wise to the connecting shape).

Distances (All Directions)

Inner Distances These distances refer to the outer edge of the angle shape for each direction. If you indicate an additional Slot Length in the input fields beside Number, the drill holes are carried out as slotted holes with the indicated slot length. If you have checked the field Absolute Inner Distance, the inner distance of the holes in the short leg means the distance between the holes.

Dist. Between These distances specify the distance between two holes for each direction.

Web Angle

297

Connect

Bolt Settings

Bolt Style Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list

Dia. Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.

Workloose Enter the desired clearance for the bolt connection, usually 2 mm.

Diagonal Offset A shift of the bolt axes between support and connecting bolts.

Gap Spacing Distance between the web of the supporting shape and the web angle.

Click this button to edit the bolt style or to create it anew.

Web Angle

298

Welding

Weld Settings

Weld Style Specify the kind of weld seam.

Weld... You can specify which seams have to be created in the model via Weld Side of Connecting Shape or Weld Side of Supporting Shape. The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding input fields. Click this button to edit the weld style or to create it anew.

Web Angle

299

Cope In addition, you can add a cope to the connecting shape. Here, you enter the specifications of the cope.

Cope Select an already stored cope template or you enter the cope

data directly.

Connect. Shape Here you define how the connecting shape has to be coped. You can select Upper Side, Lower Side or Both. Specify the necessary gap distance for the cope in the Gap field.

Click this button to create or modify the cope template.

Safety... Here you can specify whether a safety cope has to be carried out. In addition, the inserted angle can be shortened.

Web Angle

300

Standard Data In the selection list, you can see the web angle connections available in the database. In this list, you can verify the basic parameters of the connection data.

H(kN), Hz(kN) You can select a web angle according to the DAST guidelines.

Enter the desired load in the input fields. The possible connection angles will be displayed in the selection list.

List In this List, the possible connections filed in the database are displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry. The basic data of the connection are displayed in the different List Fields.

Meaning of the List Entries

Shape Web angle shape

Bolt Bolt type used

Dia Bolt diameter used

Material Material designation of the web angle

Shape Direction Number of drill holes along the shape to be connected

Web Angle

301

Transversal Dir. Number of drill holes cross-wise to the shape to be connected

W1, W2, W3,... The meaning of the distances can be seen on the illustration of a cut-up web angle connection.

Web Angle

302

Form Group

Create Group At insert of the web angle connection, the inserted parts are

automatically arranged to form a construction group.

With Bolts... Bolts and weld seams are added to the construction group as well.

Each Angle An individual construction group is created for each inserted web angle.


Web Angle

303

Shear Plates

304

B.20 Shear Plates

This command creates a plate connection (shear plate connection) made from plate steel and attached to a support shape. If you do not select a support shape, only one or two web plates are attached to the end of the shape to be connected. After you have indicated the specifications the shape to be connected is cut to fit and the connection is created by the program automatically including all drill holes and bolt connections. You also can select connections from an editable database. How to create the database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask your ProSteel dealer.

Creation of Shear Plate Connections First you have to click the shape to be connected and then the support shape, each one at the connection point (or use the enter key or the right mouse button if you don’t have any support shape). If you select the shear plate command, it is based on your last settings and the connection is created with these settings first. In the appearing dialog you can adjust the dimensions and verify the result in the model immediately. Shapes

Thickness Here, you indicate the thickness of the web plate.

Cut Plate If this field is checked, the plate is cut at the connecting shape in case of bevelled shapes to be connected.

Shear Plates

305

Normal to... If this field is checked, the plate is not inserted in shape direction at bevelled connecting shapes but always perpendicular towards the connecting shape.

Poly-Plates Poly-plates are inserted instead of flats.

Turn Flat If a flat is used, it will be created with the size length x 10 instead of with the size width x 10. (Example: FL 110x10 becomes BRFL 250x10)

Position Specify the web side of the shape to be connected (left or right), which is to be used for attaching the web plate. If Both is checked, a plate is attached to both sides of the web.

From Edge means that the vertical offset is measured from upper edge shape to upper edge web plate.

Lower Edge The vertical offset refers to the lower edge of shape and web plate.

Up to 1st. Bolt If you have checked the field Up to 1st. Bolt, the vertical offset doesn’t refer to the edges of the web plate but to the center of the first drill hole.

Gap In the input field Gap you enter the distance to be adhered to from the outer edge of the support shape to the outer edge of the shape to be connected.

Vertical Offset In the input field Vertical Offset you enter the distance of the offset for the web plate from the axis of the shape to be connected towards top or to the right (depending on position). Negative values effect an opposite offset.

Shear Plates

306

Distances

Group Division in Shape Direction

Number Number of drill holes in shape direction

End Offset… Distance of the last center of a drill hole to the end of the web plate on the side of the connecting shape.

Connection… Distance of the last drill hole to the end of the connecting shape on the side of the support shape.

Dist. Between. Distance between two drill holes in the direction of the connecting shape.

Group Division in Transversal Direction

Number Number of drill holes in transversal shape direction

Edge Distance Distance of the drill holes to the outer edge of the web plate.

Dist. Between Distances between two drill holes in the transversal direction of the connecting shape.

Shear Plates

307

Connect

Bolt Settings

Bolts Select the bolt style (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list

Dia Specify the bolt diameter for the connection.

Workloose Here, you enter the desired clearance of the bolted connection, mostly 2 mm.

Click this button to process the bolt style or to create a new one.

Weld Settings

Weld Style Here, you specify the kind of weld seam.

Click this button to edit the weld style or to create a new one.

Weld... Specify which seams to be created in the model using the option Weld Flange Side or Weld Web Side. The Thickness of the different weld seams is specified in the corresponding input fields.

Shear Plates

308

Cope In addition, you can notch the connecting shape. Enter the corresponding specifications in this dialog box.

Notch You can either select an already stored notch variant or you

enter the data directly.

Cope Connect… Here, you specify how the connecting shape has to be notched. You can select Upper Side, Lower Side or Both. Define the necessary gap distance for the notch in the Gap field.

Shear Plates

309

Standard Data In the selection list, you can see the shear plate connections available in the database. In this list, you can verify the basic parameters of the connecting data.

H(kN), Hz(kN) Here, you can select a shear plate according to the loads.

Enter the desired load in the input fields. Then, the available connection plates will be displayed in the selection list.

List In this List the possible connections filed in the database are displayed. Select the desired connection by clicking it. In the different List fields, you can see the basic data of this connection.

Shear Plates

310

Meaning of the List Entries Designation Connection name

Thickness Thickness of the web plate

Material Material descriptions of the web plate

Dia The utilized bolt diameter

Bolt The utilized bolt type

Shape Direction The number of drill holes along the shape to be connected.

Crosswise The number of drill holes in perpendicular (crosswise) direction of the shape to be connected.

MaH, MaHz Max. Load for this connection

W1, W2, W3,... The following picture illustrates the meaning of the distances:

Shear Plates

311

Form Group

Create Group At insertion of the shear plate connection, the inserted parts

are automatically assigned to a construction group which is created.

With Bolts... The bolts and weld seams are also added to that group.

Each Plate An own construction group is created for each inserted shear plate.


Splice Joints

312

B.21 Splice Joints

Use this command to create a web and/or flange plate joint between two shapes out of flat steel or dissolved sheet metal shapes. Both of the shapes have to be in alignment along the surfaces to be connected. If you do not select a second shape, plates are attached to the end of the first shape. After you have indicated the specifications, the shape to be connected is cut to fit and the program, automatically including all drill holes and bolt connections, creates the connection. You can also select connections from an editable database. How to create the database is listed in the technical supplement or just ask your ProSteel dealer. HINT: Take advantage of the dialog templates and save frequently required connections as templates. These templates can then be easily loaded. However, if you are working with a great many connections, we recommend using a database with user-defined types.

Splice Joints

313

Options

Gap Distance Here you indicate the distance between the two shapes to be respected.

Bolts Specify the desired bolt style for the connection.

Dia Specify the desired bolt diameter from the list or enter the value directly if this option has been activated.

Workloose This field is used to specify the hole clearance of the desired drill holes, which usually consists of 2 mm.

Upper Side If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the upper side of the shape.

Lower Side If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the lower side of the shape.

Single Side If this field is checked, the splice joint is attached to the side of the second shape to be connected in the form of a welded connection.

Upper Inside If this field is checked; an additional plate is attached to the inner upper side of the shape.

Lower Inside If this field is checked, an additional plate is attached to the inner lower side of the shape.

Splice Joints

314

Diagonal Use this option to create a bolted connection at one upper side and a welded connection at the other. For the lower side, it is just the opposite.

Left If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the left side of the shape.

Right If this field is checked, a plate connection is attached to the right side of the shape.

Create Group If this field is checked, the web plate is assigned to a construction group together with the shape to be connected. If the shape is already part of another component group, the web plate will be assigned to the same group.

With Bolts If this field is checked, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also added to that group.

Top/Bottom On the second page, you can enter the settings for the upper and lower splice.

Number Shape.. Indicates the number of bolts in shape direction

Edges Outside Indicates the projection of the splices beyond the last bolt

Splice Joints

315

Edges Inside Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to the first bolt

Dist. Between Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other

Number Cross.. Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape direction.

Edge Outside Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts

Inner Distance Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.

Dist. Between If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this value indicates the distance from one outer bolt to the other.

Thickness Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated the free selection option, you can enter this value directly.

Vertical This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the shape.

Weld If this setting is activated, no bolts and drill holes will be inserted, but the parts will be welded with each other. Length settings are still valid.

Length Here you specify the length of the splice to be welded.

As Enter your value here if you want to overwrite the thickness using the desired weld style.

Weld Style Select the weld style to be used.

Splice Joints

316

Left/Right On the third page, you can enter the settings for the left and right splice.

Number Shape.. Indicates the number of bolts in shape direction at each side

Edges Outside Indicates the projection of the splices beyond the last bolt

Edges Inside Indicates the distance from the starting point of the shape to the first bolt

Dist. Between Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other

Number Cross.. Indicates the number of bolts transversal to the shape direction.

Edges Outside Indicates the distance of the plate beyond the outmost bolts

Inner Distance Indicates the distance from one bolt to the other.

Dist. Between. If there are more than 2 bolts in transversal direction, this value indicates the distance from one outer bolt to the other.

Thickness Select the plate thickness from the list. If you have activated the free selection option, you can enter this value directly.

Vertical This value moves the splices in transversal direction to the shape.

Splice Joints

317

Weld If this setting is activated, no bolts and drill holes will be inserted, but the parts will be welded with each other. Length settings are still valid.

Length Here you specify the length of the splice to be welded.

As Enter your value here if you want to overwrite the thickness using the desired weld style.

Weld Style Select the weld style to be used.

Data When you have defined a database for the selected shape, another page will be displayed. There, you can select the desired entry.


Purlin Connection

318

B.22 Purlin Connection

This function permits the connection of purlin courses to roof girders. Different kinds of connection are possible. The connection can either be carried out as standard bolted connection, as connection with a purlin socket made out of a bent flat steel or by means of a splice or a shape. The assignments can be managed in a database to allow the selection of the suitable connections for the different shape sizes (e.g. the correct size of a purlin socket). When the command is selected, the specified connections available for selection are offered in a list. As to how to create the data base, please refer to the technical supplement or ask your ProSteel dealer.

Bolted Connection

Number Transv. Here, you enter the number of drill holes in transversal

direction of the purlin shape.

Distance Transv. Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill holes.

Purlin Connection

319

Number Length Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of the purlin course.

Distance Length Here you can indicate the axis distance at two or more drill holes.

Bolts Select the bolt type (e.g. DIN 7990) for the connection in the list


Workloose Enter the clearance for the connection.

Offset Here, you can indicate an offset value for the bolted connection in longitudinal direction. If you enter positive values, the drill holes are moved in shape direction of the purlin course; negative values move them in the opposite shape direction.

List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry. In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed.

Purlin Connection

320

Purlin Socket

Drill Holes Here, you specify the dimensions of the purlin socket as well

as the drill holes of the connection.

The meaning of the distances is displayed in the figure below:


Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between roof girder and purlin socket.

Purlin Connection

321

Dia Side Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between purlin socket and purlin course.


Create Group The purlin socket and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the roof girder is already belonging to another construction group, the purlin socket will be assigned to this other group.

With Bolts The bolts are assigned to the roof girder belonging to the construction group as well.

Opposite Side The purlin socket is attached at the opposite side of the purlin course.

Backer Plates Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding input fields. These plates have to be used between roof girder and purlin socket. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates will be created.


List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry. In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed

Purlin Connection

322

Connection Plate

Purlin Connection

323

Drill Holes Here, you determine the dimensions of the plate as well as the drill holes of the connection. The meaning of the distances is displayed in the following figure of a purlin connection. If you enter the value 0 for w2, only one hole will be created in longitudinal direction of the purlin course.

Length – length of plate in shape direction of the purlin course. Height – height of plate in vertical shape direction. Thickness - thickness of the connecting plate.




Supporting Plate An additional supporting plate is created perpendicular to the plate which can be determined separately.

Click on this button to open the dialog for determining the dimensions of the supporting plate.

Create Group The plate and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the roof girder is already belonging to another construction group, the plate will be assigned to this other group.


Opposite Side The splice is attached on the opposite side of the purlin course.

Purlin Connection

324

Weld Seam The plate is welded to the roof girder. In the Af input field, you can specify the thickness of the weld seam, and in the selection list you can indicate the type of the weld seam.


List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry. In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed

Purlin Connection

325

Additional Supporting Plate

Thickness The thickness of the supporting plate

Length The length of the supporting plate in shape direction of the shape

Height The height of the supporting plate in vertical direction of the shape

Inner/Outer Chamfer Here, you enter the horizontal and vertical dimensions of the inner (1) or outer (2) chamfer.

Weld Seam The plate is welded to the roof girder. In the Af input field, you

can specify the thickness of the weld seam, and in the selection list you can indicate the type of the weld seam.

Purlin Connection

326

Connection Shape

Length The length of the shape in shape direction of the purlin course

Number Here, you enter the number of drill holes in shape direction of the purlin course. In the input field w3 you can indicate the axis distance in the case of two or more drill holes.

Base Drill Holes Specify the distance of the roof girder holes to the outer edge of the purlin course.

Lateral Drill… Here, you indicate the distance of the drill holes in the purlin course to the upper edge of the roof girder.


Dia Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between roof girder and shape.

Dia Side Here, you specify the bolt diameter for the connection between shape and purlin course.


Perpendicular The shape is positioned in a perpendicular way in order to insert e.g. a U-shape vertically.

Turn The shape is rotated by 90° around the longitudinal axis.

Purlin Connection

327

Create Group The shape and the roof girder are assigned to a construction group. If the roof girder is already belonging to another construction group, the shape will be assigned to this other group.


Opposite Side The shape is attached at the opposite side of the purlin course

Backer Plates Specify the dimensions of backer plates in the corresponding input fields. These plates have to be used between roof girder and shape. If you enter the value 0, no backer plates will be created.


Shape Type Here, you can select the shape to be used for the connection. Special shapes can be used as well.

List Any possible connections filed in the database are displayed in this list. Select the desired connection by clicking an entry. In the different list fields, the data on which the connection is based are displayed.

Purlin Connection

328

Gusset Plates

329

B.23 Gusset Plates

This command is used to create a gusset plate which combines several shapes with each other. The form is optimally defined on the base of the shapes to be connected and further limiting edges. The shapes and the gusset plate are automatically drilled and combined with each other by bolts. To create a gusset plate, you first have to select the shapes to be connected and then you can select even further shapes serving as additional limiting edges. These limiting edges influence the form of the gusset plate. For example you can connect three shapes with a support using a gusset plate and it is guaranteed that the gusset plate is fit tightly to the web of the support.

Plate Thickness Specify the thickness of the gusset plate.

Bolt Style Enter the bolt type.

Dia Indicate the hole diameter.

Workloose Indicate the hole clearance.

Offset Here, you specify the value by which the gusset plate has to extend beyond the shape edges in transversal shape direction.

Gusset Plates

330

Gusset Pos Here, you specify the position of the plate to be created, related to the connected shapes. If you have selected ‘Plate Center’, the gusset plate will be created in the center of the shapes. If you have selected ‘Plate Upper and/or Plate Lower’, a gusset plate will be created at the upper edge and/or at the lower edge of the shapes, depending on the selection. It is possible to connect shapes with two plates as well.

Limiting Shape If this field has been checked, it is not the edge of a limiting shape situated next to the gusset plate, which is used as borderline, but the opposite line. Iit is possible to design a gusset plate in a way that it overlaps e.g. the complete flange of a limiting shape.

Weld Bracing If this field has been checked, the shapes and the plate are not drilled. It is possible to combine them with each other using a weld.

Form Group If this field has been checked, a group will be formed on the base of the gusset plate and the connected shapes.

With Bolts If the 'With Bolts' field has been checked as well, the bolts of the shape to be connected are also added to that group.

Use Existing Holes Existing holes are used instead of drilling new ones.

Click on this button to add further shapes to the gusset plate connection. Now, the form of the gusset plate is calculated anew and the new shapes are also connected with the plate.

Click on this button to remove a shape from a gusset plate connection.

Click on this button to add further shapes as limiting edges for gusset plate calculation. You can e.g. extend a gusset plate up to a support.

Click on this button to remove an additional limiting edge.

Gusset Plates

331

Drill Hole Distances

Number Shape Number of drill holes in shape direction.

1 Edge 1 Hole Distance of the shape edge to the first hole.

Hole – Hole Distance of one drill hole to the other in shape direction.

n Hole - Edge Distance of the last drill hole to the edge of the plate.

Number Transv. Dir. Number of drill holes in transversal shape direction.

Transversal Distance Distance of drill holes in transversal shape direction.

Drill Hole Pos. Insertion axis of drill holes.

Please note that you can indicate all distances either as absolute values or as many times the amount of bolt diameter. Enter e.g. *2 for the double value to obtain many times the amount of bolt diameter.

Assignments As it is the case with each dialog of the component parts, here too it is possible to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. Select the component part and then select the settings.

Gusset Plates

332

Dynamic Bracing

333

B.24 Dynamic Bracing

This function generates a wall bond or bracing. You can select between varieties of different design variations. Available are shape bracings, tension bar bracings, as well as pressure pipes. The entire bracing including gusset plate is generated. To generate a bracing first place your user coordinates system over the bracing plane and then calls the function. You are now prompted to click on a system line of the bracing. Finally, click on both shapes to which the bracing is to be joined. The following dialog box appears. The first two folders are the parent folders for all others; the other folders can be selected according to the desired type of bracing.

Dynamic Bracing

334

B.24.1 Common Settings

Generalities

Shape Selection: Here you indicate the utilized shapes for the bracing bars.

Enter the shape catalogue into the first selection box, the shape type into the second, and the shape size into the third.

Plate Thickness indicates the thickness of the gusset plate.

Edge distance Here you can specify the distance from the outermost edge of the bracing bar to the boundary edge of the bracing (this is most often a shape edge).

Round shapes this value is used to round off the length of the shape.

Plate width Here you indicate the minimum gusset plate width at the shape.

Position The position of the gusset plate in reference to the bracing plane can be specified with the fields Plate Position Front Edge, Center, and Rear Edge.

Dynamic Bracing

335

Form Here you determine the shape of the gusset plate.

Opening Angle Here you can determine the opening angle of the gusset plate

towards the bracing bar at the shape ‘Triangle bent’.

Cross Bracing: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the shape of a cross stay. Otherwise, only one bracing bar is added to the clicked on system line.

Welded Bracing If this switch is checked, the bracing is welded in its entirety. No borings are added in that case.

Form Group: If this switch is checked, the individual bracing elements are formed into groups.

Symmetrical: If this switch is checked, the bracing is designed in the form of a cross stay and remains symmetrical if modified with its grips. Otherwise, every bar can be changed individually.

No Gusset Plates If this switch is checked, no gusset plates are created at the supporting shapes.

Dynamic: If this switch is checked, the bracing immediately depicts the modifications made in the dialog. If you would like to modify many values, you can deactivate this option for the time being.

By clicking on this button, you can add additional boundary edges (lines) for the gusset plate calculation. This method enables you to lengthen a gusset plate up to the base plate, for example. If the vertical of a gusset plate end point cuts this boundary line, the gusset plate is extended up to this point. Otherwise, the nearest end point of the line will be accepted.

To add a boundary edge, just click on a line or specify a line by indicating two points.

To delete an additional boundary edge, just click on this button.

To stop the creation of a gusset plate at the end of a bracing bar, just click on this button.

Dynamic Bracing

336

Click on this button to include any bracing bar which doesn’t belong to the bracing in the creation of a gusset plate.

Click on this button to exclude any bracing bar which doesn’t belong to the bracing from the creation of a gusset plate.

Dynamic Bracing

337

Bolts

Group Bolts

Bolts Specify the bolt type.

Dm Specify the hole diameter.

Work loose Specify the hole work loose.

Group Holes

Here you enter the number of borings and the spacing of the drilled holes to be observed. You can either specify absolute values or how many times the amount of the hole diameter. If the entries have to be a multiple of the hole diameter, put an asterisk (*) in front of the multiplier.

Shape Direction The number of drilled holes in the direction of the bracing bar (on both ends).

Edge-1st hole the distance from the end of the bracing bar to the first hole center in the direction of the bar.

Hole-Hole sets the space between the drilled holes in the direction of the bar.

n-th Hole-Edge The distance from the last hole to the outer edge of the gusset plate in the direction of the bar.

Dynamic Bracing

338

Cross Direction The number of drilled holes crosswise to the bracing bar.

Distribution The distance between the drilled holes, crosswise to the bar direction.

Dynamic Bracing

339

B.24.2 Shape Bracing

If you would like to create a bracing from shapes and gusset plates, select the

folder SHAPE BRACING. Group Shape Offset

Shape Position Here you select the position of the shapes in relation to the gusset plates.

Front- the shapes are located in front of the gusset plate. Back - The shapes are located behind the gusset plate.. Cross - One shape is located in front of the gusset plate and one behind. Centered - The shapes are located in the bracing plane. Double – One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate (total of 4 shapes for cross stay). Replaced – One shape each is located in front of and behind the gusset plate with one being offset to the left and one to the right (total of 4 shapes for cross stay). 4-Times– One shape is located on each side (front, rear, left, right), which makes a total of 8 shapes for cross stay.

Shape distance the distance of the shapes for offset or 4-Times bracings.

Rotation Angle Is used to specify a rotation of the shapes.

Dynamic Bracing

340

Shape Insertion Specify the insertion position of the shapes Centred - The shapes are inserted along the shape axis... COG Line - The shapes are inserted along the COG (Centre of Gravity) line. Pitch Line – The shapes are inserted along the pitch line. Diagonal – The shapes are inserted along their corner points ”Upper Edge Left“ up to “Lower Edge Right“.. Inverse Diagonal – The shapes are inserted along their corner points from „Lower Edge Left“ up to „Upper Edge Right“.

Hole Position Here you set the hole positions in the shape. Centred - The holes are drilled on the shape axis. COG Line - The drill holes are drilled on COG line. Pitch Line – The holes are drilled on the shape pitch line.

Offset Specify a projection of the central gusset plate extending past the shape edges of the bracing bars. Positive values increase the size of the plate whereas negative values decrease it.

Shorten Here you can specify a value to be used to shorten the shapes after the bracing has been generated.

Mirror Shapes If this field is checked, the shapes are mirrored and then inserted.

Center Hole At a cross stay and selected shape position 'Crossed', a common hole is drilled into the shapes that are crossing each other.

Divide All If this field is checked, all shapes of a cross stay are separated at the center gusset plate.

Group Bind Plates

Bind Plates Opposing shapes have batten plates as stiffeners. The following input fields can be used for a further description of the batten plates:

Distance The distance of the batten plates; the program divides the distances regularly according to this specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.

Offset In the field Offset, you specify the distance of batten plates from the shape edges. Positive values decrease the size of the plate whereas negative values increase it, i.e. the plate has a projection.

Number The number of bolts which are used to connect each batten plate with the shapes.

Dynamic Bracing

341

Edge-1st hole The distance from the end of the batten plate to the first hole center in the direction of the bar.

Hole-Hole The space between the drilled holes in the direction of the bar

Dia Diameter of bolting in the input field Dm

Work loose the hole work loose of bolting

Weld The batten plates are not connected by bolts but by a weld. Indicate the weld style in the selection list. Indicate the weld thickness in the input field, if it differs from the default settings of the style.

Click on this button to process the weld style or to create a new style.

Dynamic Bracing

342

B.24.3 Rod Bracing

If you would like to create a bracing from tension rods, select the folder Rod Bracing. You can select a variety of different variations.

Layout Select the layout for the rod bracing

Tension Rod with Cam.

A bracing with a traversing tension rod is generated. The shapes connected with the bracing are penetrated and fastened in the back with a tension element

Dynamic Bracing

343

Offset The Offset field is used to specify the projection of the tension rod beyond the shape. The Hole Dia. field is used to specify the diameter of the oblong hole to be drilled. The Slot Axis field is used to specify the length of the oblong hole to be drilled. The Part Description field is used to specify a term for the tension element to be used with the parts list.

If the field Create Element is checked, the tension element is generated and displayed. The dimensions of the tension element can be specified in the input fields Width, Thickness and Radius.

Turnbuckle A bracing with two tension rods joined by a tension element is generated. A butt strap is welded to the end of the tension rod, which is used to connect to the shapes via a gusset plate.

When you selected the version Sliced, the strap receives a slit and the tension rod is welded to the center. If, on the other hand, you selected Welded, the tension rod is welded to the strap. The Butt Strap Length field is used to specify the length of the strap. The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the strap. The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the plate thickness of the strap. The Offset field is used to specify by how much the tension rod and the butt strap are overlapping. The Gap field is used to specify a gap between the cut out butt strap and the tension rod for production tolerances, if the 'Sliced' option has been selected. The Turnbuckle field is used to specify the length of the tension element. The Offset field is used to specify the length of projection. The Dm field is used to specify the diameter of the tension element. The Distance field is used to specify the distance of the tension element from the outer end of the bar. If the value 0 is indicated here, the element will be placed in the center of the corresponding bracing segment. The Part Description field is used to specify a term for the tension element to be used with the parts list.

Dynamic Bracing

344

Tension Rod

A bracing with a tension rod is generated, which has a welded on connection element.

The Butt Strap field is used to specify the length of the connection element. The Butt Strap Width field is used to specify the width of the connection element. The Butt Strap Thickness field is used to specify the thickness of the connection element.

The Bolt Diameter field is used to specify the bolt hole diameter in the connection element. The Outer Radius field is used to specify the outer radius of the connection element. The Part Description field is used to specify a term for the tension element to be used with the parts list

Beneath please find an example for the different variants of a tension rod bracing:

Bracing Catalogues Databases may be generated for the tension elements of all three types. The terms and dimensions can be loaded from these databases. An additional folder “Bracing Catalogues” will be displayed where you can select a dBASE-file. After selection of a valid file, you can choose a tension element for the different versions from a selection list. This element is defined in the database. The dialog entries will then be filled with the corresponding values.

Dynamic Bracing

345

B.24.4 Pipe Bracing

If you would like to create a bracing from pressure pipes and butt straps, select the folder Pipe Bracing. You can select a variety of different variations.

Gruppe Butt Strap Form

Butt Strap Type Here you set the variant of the connecting butt strap. Inserted - The butt strap is welded into the pipe. Pipe sliced - The pipe is slit and the strap is welded at that point. Strap sliced - The strap is slit and the pipe is welded at that point. T-Shape – A T-shape section is welded onto the pipe. You can select a shape in the Selection Lists depicted opposite. Endplates – A head plate is welded onto the pipe and a butt strap is welded onto this head plate.

Butt Strap Length Specify the length of the strap.

Butt Strap Width Specify the width of the strap.

Butt Strap Thick Specify the thickness of the strap.

Dynamic Bracing

346

Butt Strap Offset Specify the overlap length of the pressure pipe and the strap

Escape Gap Width of the gap between pipe opening and butt straps

Shapes: You can select the shapes in the selection lists, if you have selected 'T-shapes' as butt strap type.

Create Group with Pipe Forms a group out of a bracing.

With Bolts The bolts are inserted into the group.

Group Endplates

You can indicate further specifications for the head plate, if you have selected 'Head Plate' as butt strap type.

Width Enter the width or the diameter of the head plate.

Thickness Enter the plate thickness of the head plate.

Type If the Edge field is checked, a square head plate is created with the same width as specified under 'Width'. If the Round field is checked, a round head plate is created with the same diameter as specified under 'Width'. If the Use Polyplates field is checked, the head plates are created as plates.

Example for a pipe bracing

Assignments The created component parts can receive different assignments such as material and so on.

Static Bracing

347

B.25 Static Bracing

This command supports you when bracings have to be created. You can add bracing rods, drill and design the appertaining gusset plates, or have them designed automatically. The program always enters bracings in the active UCS plane, i.e. you should place the UCS with its origin into the desired bracing plane and align it parallel. Since the rods are aligned in accordance with the system lines, they should have been created previously. In case of a cross-stay with uniformly staggered rods, the middle of the system will be sufficient. The rods can be arranged alternatively. In contrast to the dynamic bracing, this bracing here doesn’t react to modifications. However, it can be created individually piece-by-piece.

Static Bracing

348

B.25.1 Settings

Shape Definition

Shape Type Here you select the type of shapes to be used.

Resolution Here, you specify the resolution.

Shape Class Select the desired shape class from the selected types.

Shape Size Select the desired shape size of the selected shape class.

UCS-Position Select the alignment of the gusset plates and thus of the bracing shapes with regard to the current UCS-system.

Static Bracing

349

Rod Position Determine the position of the bracing rods with respect to the gusset plate. Front means on the positive Z-axis, Back means on the negative Z-axis, Both means on both sides and Centered means that a rod is positioned in the middle of the axis.

Rod Insertion Here you specify the position of the rod with respect to the insertion line (system line). You can insert the rod in the middle, on the gravity line or on the root line.

Rotation: You can insert the rod in its normal position or rotated by +90 degrees or -90 degrees. You can check the selected mode in the shape window of dialog field.

Mirror: You can insert the rod in its normal position or in a mirrored way. You can check the selected mode in the shape window of dialog field.

Plate Thickness: The thickness of the gusset plates

Bolts

Bolt Style The bolt style to be used

Dia The diameter from the bolt diameter table

Workloose The clearance between bolt and hole diameter

Static Bracing

350

Number Shape The number of bolts in shape direction

Number Cross The number of bolts transversally to the shape direction

Drill Hole Pos. Here, you specify the position of drill holes in the rod.

Distance Cross The distance from one bolt to the other in transversal direction.

Weld Bracing If this field is checked, the shapes and gusset plates are not drilled. The dimensions of the gusset plates, however, are determined as if drill holes existed.

Plate Without.. If this field is checked, the corners of the gusset plates are not bevelled but a rectangular plate is created.

Create Group A group is formed for each rod.

With Bolts The bolts are also allocated to the group.

Edge Distance The third page serves for managing the edge distances depending on the bolt diameter which have to be respected when the bracing shapes are installed.

Static Bracing

351

List: You can directly click on the corresponding entries and the processing mode will be switched on. Then you can directly enter the value.

Edge- 1st Hole Distance of the outermost hole axis in the bracing rod to the rod front edge.

Hole – Hole Spacing of the hole axes in longitudinal direction

Hole – Edge Spacing of the outermost hole axis in the gusset

Limit Edges Specify the desired distance of the bracing rods to the limit edges.

Bracing Rod Specify by which value the bracing rod has to be shortened after its insertion. Thus, the rod will be kept in tension.

Static Bracing

352

B.25.2 Creation of Bracing Parts

To a large extent, you can make the program automatically create the components of a bracing. However, it is possible as well to generate single components such as gusset plates, etc. individually. For this purpose, several individual functions are available which will be described in the following.

BRACING

Click this button to generate bracing rods and gusset plates in one operation. However, this function is not suitable for the connection of several rods

from different systems. In this case, you should use the individual functions instead. After the action has been finished, you return to the dialog.

SINGLE ROD

Click this button to insert single bracing rods that are directly drilled.

DRILL ROD

Click this button to drill existing shapes on their ends, according to the definitions in the dialog field. You must select the shapes for this purpose. You will return to the dialog field afterwards.

PLATE AUTO

Click this button to create a gusset plate automatically. Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and then click boundary lines for the plate edges.

The program will try to find a suitable plate dimension by keeping the edge distances and the boundary lines.

Static Bracing

353

PICK PLATE

Click this button to determine yourself the shape of the gusset plate. Select the drilled bracing rods that have to be connected and pick a point on the planned bracing end. Click the approximate position of the gusset plate. The edge distances will be displayed.

UCS

If you have not yet aligned the UCS before using the command, you can do this subsequently: the active UCS plane (and consequently the plane of the bracing) will be determined by clicking 3 points. You will return to the dialog field afterwards.

Static Bracing

354

Creating a Bracing Let’s start out from the fact that you want to design a simple roof bracing. The diagonals are to intersect (without the gusset plate in the middle).

Select the command for bracing and select the ’Plate Middle’ for the UCS position. Determine the position of the shape and the settings for bolts, plate thickness, etc. Since the two rods are to intersect, select the ‘Front’ rod position beforehand. Then click the BRACING button. The program will prompt you to enter the system line of the

bracing rod. Click one of the two system lines, e.g., the one leading from down below on the left to the top on the right.

You must determine the limit edges of the bracing rod (i.e. the edges from which the outermost rod edge is to have the distance as defined in ‘Options’). Click the inner web line of the roof girder - as shown on the left. Repeat this on the other rod end. If you have clicked the wrong line, you can cancel this by entering the letter b (Back).

When you have selected both limit edges, confirm this by pressing the ENTER key or by using the right mouse button. A dialog field will be displayed, which shows exactly the calculated rod length. You can round the value in the desired rod length field. The rod is now displayed with drill holes. You must now determine the gusset plates.

Gusset Plates The program will prompt you to enter the boundary line for the gusset plate. You can control the shape by selecting these lines - some variants are shown on the

left side depending on selection. You may need construction lines which have either been created beforehand or which can be ‘shown’ using two points. You can confirm by pressing the ENTER key or by clicking the right mouse button. The next gusset plate can be created afterwards.

Static Bracing

355

The first bracing rod is complete. The second rod is created in the same manner with the exception that you select the rod position ‘Rear’ (to avoid intersecting rods). If you want to create a bracing with a gusset plate in the point of intersection, do not stagger the rods. Open, shorten, and drill the rods manually at the point of intersection. Create a single gusset plate with the function for the bracing (button PLATE AUTO or PICK PLATE).

Static Bracing

356

Connection Editor

357

B.26 Haunches

ProSteel automatically generates haunches by clicking two shapes or by picking points on a construction line. For instance, after having inserted a column and roof girder in the model, all construction lines that are necessary for a normal haunch have been created. In addition to the actual haunch, you can also create additional stiffeners using this function. These stiffeners then can be directly assigned to the corresponding groups (see ‘Groups’ command). This command enables the creation of tapered haunch connections, i.e. adaptation of the upper and lower haunch chord to the support / connecting shape. Therefore the complete haunch creation is limited to one single function call.

Upper Chord Enter width and thickness of the haunch top chord.

Lower Chord Enter width and thickness of the haunch bottom chord.

Web Enter the thickness of the haunch web plate.

Coped Shape If this field is checked, and you selected Bottom flange haunch as haunch type, the haunch is not made from individual plates but from a coped shape. The shape size corresponds to the connection shape; all other shape size fields are then ignored. In the neighbouring input field, you can specify the distance from the bottom flange haunch at the end of the cropped shape (analogue to the ‘Haunch Head Width’).

Connection Editor

358

Bottom Stiffener If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the base point of the haunch of the support shape. You can select a stiffener type in the list displayed here. Just select a stiffener template, which you previously saved using the command ‘Stiffeners’.

Top Stiffener If this field is checked, a stiffener is attached to the head point of the haunch of the connected shape if you selected ‘Bottom flange haunch’ as haunch type. You can select a stiffener type in the list displayed here. Just select a stiffener template, which you previously saved using the command ‘Stiffeners’.

Length,... In the following figure, you can see the meaning of the inputs for haunch length, roof pitch, bottom width, head width and offset.

A modification in the input field roof pitch has only an effect if a haunch has been created without supporting shape. In the input field Cone Width you enter a width to which the haunch tapers if required.

Create Group If this field is checked, top flange, bottom flange and web plate are arranged to form a group

Bottom flange haunch If this field is checked, no top flange is created, e.g. for the construction of frame corners.

Cone If this field is checked, a tapered haunch is created by fitting the width of the haunch flanges to the support and connection shape and then tapering them. Use the ‘Cone Width’ field to specify a cone width if you have a specific value in mind. However, the ‘Fixed Size’ field cannot be checked as well.

Connection Editor

359

Fixed Size If this field is checked, the head width and any existing cone

width are fitted to the shape to be connected. Inputs in these fields will be ignored in this case.

Turn If this field is checked and ‘Bottom flange haunch’ has been selected as haunch type, the haunch on the topside of the shape is selected. If the connection appears to be turned, you can rotate it here.

Click this button and the data of an existing connection are transferred to the connection to be created now. You have to click the existing haunch connection to achieve the transfer.

Creating Haunch Connections When using the haunch connection command, the first prompt is for the shape to be connected. Click the shape near the end to be connected. If the ALT-key is pressed while clicking the shape to be connected, the haunch connection is directly created as a bottom flange haunch. Then, you are prompted for the supporting shape (the shape to connect to) that has to be clicked as well. No supporting shape is considered when pressing RETURN or the right mouse button, and a simple haunch can be created at the shape to be connected.

Connection Editor

360

When using the haunch command, the last settings are used to create the connection. Adjust the dimensions in the open dialog and track any changes immediately in the model. If you keep the ALT-key pressed when clicking the supporting shape, the dimensions of the haunch flanges and of the web plate are fitted to the dimensions of the supporting shape.

Unrestricted Haunch Positioning Another option is to specify a user-defined position for the haunch. Just press the ESC-key after the command has been selected. The program prompts you now for the intersecting point of the base boundary line with the upper flange that you have to select by clicking it (consider using the virtual intersecting point without Z). Finally, click the approximate direction of the haunch. The haunch is now created at the specified position and you can dynamically adjust any of the settings in the dialog. Any shape adjustments have to be carried out manually, of course.


Connection Editor

361

B.27 Connection Editor

ProSteel permits you to edit and exchange all connections of a construction in a comfortable and clear way. A separate editor dialog is available for this purpose. If you select the function via the command name or by clicking on the CONNECTIONS button, you first have to select all parts of the connections of which have to be edited. Then, these parts are displayed in a uniform marking colour (for better orientation) and all other parts are hidden. If a connection exists between the selected component parts, this connection is displayed as coloured symbol. You can select the complete connection for further processing by picking the symbol. You avoid having to look for the connection via the shape properties. After the command has been selected, the following dialog opens, the modifications will not be valid before re-opening of the command for a second time.

Connection Editor

362

Group Display

Length Here, you specify the length of the 3D-arrow for the connection symbol. The direction of the arrow shows from the connected part to the component to which it was connected.

Diameter Here, you specify the diameter of the 3D-arrow for the connection symbol.

Colour Here, you specify the marking colour for the surrounding construction as AutoCAD-colour number. Since the construction only has to serve for your orientation, you should select a “weak” colour here so that the symbols can be easily recognized. The symbols themselves are displayed in green, red and yellow.

Group Options

Hide... The selected objects are hidden to increase a clear view. You can hide work frames and structural elements (the construction lines of structural elements). Bolts are always hidden.

Standard Connections All standard connections are displayed as symbol. These are the normal connections such as end plates, etc. which are integrated in ProSteel.

Cut Connections All cut connections are displayed. These are the cuts at objects or mitred cuts.

COM-Connections All external connections realized via the COM-PlugIn‘s are displayed.

Delete with When a connection is deleted, all attached parts generated by this connection will be deleted as well.

Dialog-Commands

DELETE

Click on this button to remove the selected connections completely, i.e. all component parts and processing actions created by means of these connections will be deleted as well. To do so, you have to select the connections by clicking on the symbols.

Connection Editor

363

EDIT

Click on this button to edit the selected connection. After the desired connection has been clicked via the symbol, the corresponding dialog of this connection opens and the values can be modified.

CLONE

Click on this button to transfer the settings of a connection to another one. It is also possible to change the connection type if this is reasonable

(e.g. you can replace a plate connection by a web angle connection). First, you have to select the connection the data of which have to be transferred to another one. All connections not being able to seize these data are hidden. Then, you have to select all connections having to take these data.

Verify Connections If the ‘Verify Connections’ option has been checked, all connections are verified with regard to collisions and marginal distances before being displayed as symbol. The status of this verification is displayed by means of the colour of the symbol. They have the following meaning: Green The connection is correct Yellow The hole distances are not observed Red The connection has collisions

Edit Single Connection If there is only one connection in a component part, such as e.g. a connected cantilever, you can easily edit it via the context menu of the right mouse button. Select the component part and click on the MODIFY CONNECTION entry in the context menu. This entry doesn’t exist if the part has no or several connections. A connection is also if there are other parts connected to the component part in question.

Connection Editor

364

Positioning

365

B.28 Group Structure

B.28.1 General Information about Groups

Various single components, bolts and special parts can be combined to form groups - i.e. a support with welded endplates and stiffeners. The groups can be hierarchically structured in subgroups, standard component part groups and assemblies. Each parent group can itself contain subordinate groups of a lower type. The group structure existing in the model is taken into account for the parts lists and when the model is automatically detailed and transformed into 2D workshop drawings. Many of the settings can be done separately for assemblies, component part groups, subgroups and single components. Certain functions apply to the complete group, even if you only select one part of the group. After the command has been selected, the main window opens where the available functions can be selected. Click on the corresponding button to apply them. Most of the commands can be directly selected via a separate menu command. To permit rapid processing of several groups one after the other, some functions are self-loading (loop version). If you want to cancel the function, you have to press the ESC-key or the right mouse button. In the settings, you can specify for which group commands a loop version is required and for which not.

Structure of Component Part Group ProSteel-material groups consist of a main part and the associated accessory parts. You can choose any assignment, or it is automatically set for some commands on request. In addition, you can add subgroups to component part groups. In order to do so, just insert the main part of a subgroup into the material group. In practise, these component part groups mostly correspond to the dispatched parts that are delivered to the site in a preassembled condition. Such a combination is recommended but not mandatory. You can decide how to best combine the parts.

Positioning

366

Structure of Subgroup Like standard component part groups, ProSteel-subgroups consist of a main part and the associated accessory parts. In practise, these subgroups mostly correspond to the purchase or stock parts that in a preassembled condition are again used in component part groups or in assemblies. Subgroups and standard component part groups are based on the same logic and therefore nearly behave identically.

Structure of Assembly ProSteel-assemblies consist of any component parts without having a determined main part. This permits to form free groups of parts and structures. In addition, component part groups and subgroups can be inserted into an assembly as well. In order to do so, just insert the main part of the subgroup or of the material group into the assembly. In practise, assemblies mostly correspond to several material groups, subgroups and single parts which are combined on the site. For more detailed useful information about group structure and its application in practise for drawing generation, please refer to the different chapters of detailing.

Positioning

367

B.28.2 Creation and Processing of Groups

Parts can be combined to form groups, and you can detach such groups by using the functions described here. All functions described below can be used equally for component part groups, subgroups and assemblies. This is why the functions are described only once. In the following, the term Group therefore is supposed to mean a material group, a subgroup or an assembly. It is also possible to store groups as block and to take them over into other drawings – the structure will remain unchanged. Please note that special functions are needed in this case. The AutoCAD standard commands for blocks cannot be used.

Create and Delete

Positioning

368

Click on this button to assign individual parts to groups. Click on the main part of the group and then select the parts to be assigned. The accessory parts to be assigned can also be selected in a field. The parts that may have been selected twice are ignored. Only steel or special parts can be selected for a group.

Main Part Data The parts list data of the main part are accepted as group data for the parts lists (not available for assemblies).

Display as 1 Part The group is displayed completely as one coherent part after selection(not available for assemblies).

Click on this button to dissolve a group. To do so, click any part of the group.

Click on this button to delete all parts of the selected group from the drawing. To do so, click any part of the group.

Click on this button to add or edit the parts list data. After the group has been clicked, the following dialog opens:

You can enter the parts list data of the selected group in the

input fields. The position in the field Posnum has been taken over from the main part provided the “Take Main Part Info” field was selected. In addition, the outer dimensions and the overall weight of the group will be displayed. These input fields can also be accessed via the context menu “Change PS Properties”, when you select a part that belongs to the group.

Positioning

369

Processing of Structure Subsequent adding of parts to a group or removal from a group is possible as well. Click on this button to add new parts to a group.

The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Further accessory parts can be added by clicking them.

Click on this button to remove existing parts from a group. The complete group will be selected when you click any part of the group. Then, remove the parts from the group by clicking on them.

Export and Import

Click on this button to store a group as external block (like an AutoCAD-‘WBLOCK’) in a file. It can be inserted into another drawing by using Import Groups. The group structure will remain unchanged. The procedure is the same as the AutoCAD command “wblock”. When prompted select objects, click on any part of the group.

Click on this button to insert a stored group into your drawing. The group structure will remain unchanged, when the field Explode Blocks after Insertion has been clicked, or if you explode the imported block using the command PS_EXPLODE. Do not use the standard AutoCAD command for this task!

Complete Group The complete group will always be exported, even if only one component part of this group was selected.

Dissolve Blocks The inserted block is automatically exploded after the import of groups. The structure of the group remains unchanged.

Positioning

370

Miscellaneous

Click on this button to choose whether the whole group has to be selected by selecting only one part of the group, or whether the parts have to be independent of each other. To do so, click any part of the group. Then, the mode will be switched over correspondingly and the current status will be displayed in command line. AutoCAD group mode is modified here in the group. This means that you can select the whole group by clicking only one part when e. g.moving it by means of standard AutoCAD commands.. You can switch on or off this behaviour using the AutoCAD-command for groups.

All groups existing in the drawing are counted and the number is displayed in the Number input field.

Positioning

371

B.28.3 Check Groups

Using the commands available here you can check the created groups, make the settings and modify the group data for the parts list.

This function checks whether all the groups have a main part.

When a group without a main part is detected, this group is dissolved. In addition, when using the command ’Highlight Orphans’ you can make display the parts that don’t belong to a group. Groups without a main part may occur when the main part was deleted and the group has not been detached.

Click on this button to downgrade a component part group to a subgroup. However, this material group mustn’t contain any subordinated subgroups.

Click on this button to upgrade a subgroup to a standard component part group.

Positioning

372

Mark Orphans If this field is checked, all valid groups are hidden according to the specifications when checking a group. Parts that belong to no group are marked in colour. Coloured markings are removed once you select the command ‘Regenerate’ or when you assign the parts to a group.

Release Single Part Groups If this field is checked; all valid groups consisting of only one component part are released when checking a group.

You can search different groups by highlighting and zooming found groups or by hiding the other groups. Enter the position numbers of the groups to be searched in the input field. Then, select the parts to be searched (in most cases, you will select all of the parts in one field) and confirm your selection by pressing the ENTER key or the right mouse button. In the selection list, you can specify how the result has to be displayed. Several position numbers can be entered at the same time, provided they are separated by a decimal point. Complete position areas must be separated by a hyphen. If you search e.g. the positions No. 5 and 7 resp. 17 up to 28, you enter the value 5,7,17-28 in the Search Numbers field. When you use the command ‘Regenerate‘, the other groups can be made visible again resp. the marking in colour is removed. The position number of a picked component part is taken over in the preset field for search.

Selection List Here you select how the result of a search has to be displayed. Hide – All parts are hidden except the found parts. Zoom – The found parts are highlighted. Zoom Extents – The found parts are zoomed.

Use this function to hide all parts of a group together (depending on the parameters for hiding). To do so, click any part of the group. When you use the command ‘Regenerate’ or Display Parts, the parts of the group can be made visible again.

Positioning

373

Use this command to make all hidden parts of a group visible again. Alternatively, you can also use the ‘Regenerate’ function.

Selection List Here you select which parts of a group have to be hidden. Main Parts - only the main part will be hidden Single Parts - all accessory parts will be hidden. All Parts - the whole group will be hidden.

Click on this button to make display the hierarchic group structure of a component part. To do so, you have to click on the component part. Then, a dialog opens which informs you about the belonging to and the status of the main part. In this dialog, it is possible to highlight the group structures in colour.

An independent component part group is created with all

single parts not belonging to a group.

Click on this button to compare two component part groups with each other. To do so, you have to select the two groups to be compared. Then, a dialog appears showing you the result in detail (see also ‘Positioning’ function): Compare+Modify Component part groups having the same position number, which however are not recognized as identical at comparison, will be corrected. The position numbers are modified according to the settings of positioning (see also ‘Positioning’ command).

Positioning

374

Display in ProSteel-Properties When you process the parts of groups via the ProSteel properties and you change to the tab “Group”, the complete group will be highlighted in colour for your information. You can choose different colours for main part and accessory parts. Use the global settings of ProSteel to specify what colours to apply. When it is a matter of nested structures (such as e. g. the component part group of an assembly), you will normally get the lowest group level at shape selection – e. g. the properties of the own component part group. However, you may ‘scroll up and down’ the structure and thus modify the parent group properties.

Positioning

375

B.28.4 Settings

This page specifies the behaviour of the commands for group function. You can control the behaviour of each single command.

Part Selection Here, you can specify the behaviour of part selection at the

different functions. Multiple – Each part has to be selected separately. All – You select the whole group.

Execute in Loop For the marked functions the command is repeated in a loop without having to display the dialog again after each run. Operation of the different functions is facilitated in case of several parts.

End Dialog The dialog is automatically closed after the selected function is finished.

Positioning

376

Positioning

377

B.29 Positioning

Positioning of the existing parts is one of the last steps before final detailing of the 3D model for workshop drawings. ProSteel can do this automatically for you. It searches parts of the same type and defines their number in the model. Of course, you can also assign position numbers manually. In the first step before detailing, only the number of pieces (quantity) and their position numbers must be defined. This data record is the basis for the parts lists, which can then be generated and printed at once. Later, when preparing the 2D parts, the position flags with the user-defined layout are attached to single parts and groups. In this version, the position flags as well as the height indicators and weld marks are related to the style. This means that the pre-setting how the position flag looks like can be set with a style. This style specifies the geometry and the display properties of the flag.

Positioning

378

B.29.1 Automatic Positioning

Automatic positioning is an important means for the creation of parts list. Separate position numbers or shipping numbers according to your specifications are automatically added to component parts and groups via this function. You can even integrate additionally bought or own software (a so-called “Plug-in”) into the positioning of ProSteel.

PlugIn You can select a Plug-in to carry out positioning in ProSteel.

This PlugIn carries out the positioning exactly according to the guidelines of your company if you don’t find an appropriate setting in ProSteel. Activate it using the button ‘Use external PlugIn’ and the automatic positioning then will be exclusively carried out by this external program and not by ProSteel.

Positioning

379

Type Here, you enter the type of the position number. Numerical – The position numbers are composed of numbers only. Alphanumerical - The position numbers are composed of letters only. The order then is A, B, ..., Z, AA, AB, ... etc. Mixed - The position numbers are composed of a numerical and an alphanumerical part. The numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order is A1, A2, ..., A9, B1, B2 etc. The number of numerical positions can be preset under ‘Limits‘.

Filter If you want to position only certain component parts, you can apply a filter defining which elements of your construction have to be equipped with a position number or with a shipping number.

Last Single Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Subgroup Here, you see the subgroup position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Group Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Assembly Here, you see the assembly position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Connection Here, you see the connection position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Next Enter the single part position number that has to be added to the first part to be positioned anew.

Increment Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the increment is 1).

Send Number The automatic positioning either adds position numbers or shipping numbers. Use this button to select whether the function has to add position numbers or shipping numbers.

Positioning

380

Use XRefs If external references have been inserted into the drawing, the component parts are also positioned in these external references.

Use PlugIn If you have selected an external PlugIn for positioning, you can add it using this button. The internal positioning of ProSteel is deactivated in this case.

Click this button to reset the settings of all fields to standard values.

Click this button to make further specifications for seizing the shapes etc. Another dialog opens which will be described in detail in the following.

Click this button to add the position number for the single parts, subgroups, groups and assemblies. For this purpose, you have to select the parts to be positioned. The program checks whether they are of the same type and adds a position number according to your specifications.

Click this button to add only the position numbers for the single parts. Thus it is still possible to make some modifications before positioning the groups, if need be.

Click this button to add only the position numbers for the groups. Of course, the position numbers for the single parts have to exist already.

Positioning

381

Positioning Results When positioning is finished, a dialog opens where the position number and further parts list information is displayed for each part.

Now, you can edit the proposed position numbers by double-clicking the position number of the component part. Modifications are immediately adopted into the parts. When single part positioning including the modifications is finished, the position numbers of the groups are placed. Double-clicking the position number in the column New Number can also modify the positions displayed.

Specifications for Positioning The pre-settings define how the automatic positioning of component parts has to be carried out.

You determine which parts are equipped with a position number at all and according to which guidelines the positioning is carried out. If the proposed position numbers don’t meet your requirements, you will find a solution here in most cases.

Positioning

382

Filter and Sorting

Filter These kinds of parts are taken into consideration during automatic positioning. Check all kinds of parts (standard shapes, special shapes, poly-plates, bolts, miscellaneous) that have to be equipped with a position number in one process. If you have added parts list data to any graphical elements, these are included via ‘Miscellaneous’.

Connections Can also be taken into consideration at positioning and get a so-called ID. Naming of the links (connections) is created with the options below.

Only with Names Connections are only positioned, if they have been named before.

Positioning

383

1st Sorting List Here, you determine the order of positioning. The selected parts are sorted in the indicated order according to the type of component part (shapes, plates, etc.). Put the type of part that has to be positioned first to the top, the next type to the second position and so on. In the example dialog of positioning, all shapes are seized first, then all special shapes, and finally the concrete parts. If there are several parts of the same type, these will be sorted according to the settings for the 2nd criterion. Change the order of criteria by using the arrow keys.

2nd Sorting List Here, you specify a subordinate order. Within each part type, sorted according to the 1st criterion, the parts will be sorted according to the order specified here. If you have e.g. seized more than one shape - with the settings of the example dialog - these shapes then are sorted according to the length first; if the length is identical, they are sorted according to the weight, and so on. Then, the special shapes again are sorted in the same way, etc.

Flats like Flats (which actually are ‘shapes’ as type of part) are treated like any plates at positioning. Therefore, they are displayed together with any plates when a parts list is sorted according to the 1st criterion.

Click this button to specify the criteria for the detection of identical parts by means of parts properties like name, note, etc. Then, another dialog opens where you can check the properties relevant for differentiation:

Positioning

384

Further Options

Positioning

385

Overwrite Exist… Existing position numbers are overwritten when assigning new ones.

Equal Part De… Single parts are checked for equality. If they are identical, they are assigned the same position number. Parts are considered identical when deviations with respect to dimensions and drill diameter are within the values given as reference tolerances.

Group Detection The groups are checked for equality as well. Groups are considered identical when identical single parts are arranged in the same mounting position. However, single parts are only compared using their position number because positioning has already been carried out before. If parts are identical but have different position numbers, the groups will also be assigned different position numbers. Subgroups, assemblies and connections can be compared with each other in the same way.

Save Single Part Pos.No. When a single part, which already has a position number, gets a new position number at positioning, the existing position number is saved in the field OrigPosnum in the parts properties.

Save Group Pos.No. When a group, which already has a position number, gets a new position number at positioning, the existing position number is saved in the field OrigPosnum in the group properties.

Weld Marks The attached weld marks are taken into consideration as well when the single parts are checked for equality. Weld cracks are small drill holes with parts that have to be mounted.

Include Subgroups Subgroups are completely included in the calculation of equality. Otherwise, only the main parts of the subgroups are used.

Positioning

386

First Main Part… First, all main parts of groups are positioned (and sorted according to the sorting criteria within the groups), followed by the accessory parts (also sorted according to the sorting criteria). This can be deemed as an additional, even higher ranking sorting criterion. If this field is checked and you have entered a position number in the input field Start Accessory Parts at, positioning of the accessory parts will start at the defined position number. You may for instance start with 1 for main parts and with 100 for accessory parts.

Groups

Differentiation: When the group is assigned the position of the main part (normal case), it may happen that two different groups having the same main part are assigned identical position numbers. In such cases, the program will check in a second run whether or not the groups are really identical. If not, it will change the group position number.

25 → 25.1 – The changed group positions are identified by the index ‘.1’ etc. following their position number (i. e. 100.1 , 100.2 , ...). 25 → 25A - The changed group positions are identified by the index ‘A’ etc. following their position number (i.e. 100A, 100B, ...). 25 → MAX+1 – Positioning of the changed group positions is continued after the highest position currently assigned. When the last group was position 50, the changed groups now have the positions from 51 onward.

Main Part → Group The position of the main part is taken over as group position. If necessary, the group position is changed afterwards during second check. If this option is not requested, but you rather prefer a separate number area, the numbers will start at the position entered in Start Groups at.

Individual Positioning of Subgroups Subgroups are individually positioned from the specified position number onwards. For assemblies, the value in the field below is valid.

Positioning

387

Prefixes

Here, an explanatory text can be entered before the positions of groups, subgroups and assemblies. It is possible to differentiate between support beams, girders and other groups, the differentiation always being related to the main part of the group.

Columns Here, you enter the designation for all vertical shapes. In the attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be vertical.

Beams Here, you enter the designation for all horizontal shapes. In the attribute field Position Tolerance, you enter an angle within which the shape is still considered to be horizontal. Vertical and horizontal are always related to the model, i.e., to the XY-plane of the WCS.

Other Here, you enter the designation for all other groups.

Family Prefixes The family classes prefix is set in front if the component part belongs to a family class and a prefix is planned.

Positioning

388

Tolerances to Recognize Equal Parts

Geometry At recognition via geometry, all outer edges of a component part are determined and individually compared with each other. In the following, you will find a description of the tolerances specifying that two parts are recognized as identical.

> Tolerances Here, you specify the tolerances for recognition of identical parts via geometry. You can positively exclude that e. g. rounding errors in the case of bevel cuts or notches lead to different parts. Minimum Line Length - Lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Length Tolerance – Length deviations of two lines up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Drill Hole Tolerance – Deviations of the drill hole axes up to the specified length are not considered for a comparison. Weight Tolerance – Differences in weight between two component parts are ignored up to the indicated value.

Positioning

389

Volume A second method to recognize equal parts is the real volume comparison. Here, you carry out a detection of identical parts based on the volume of the component part. The tolerances can be set for groups and single parts as relative value to the compared volume (e.g. 0.1 percent for component parts and 0.2 percent for groups).

Connections

Names These settings are used for naming the connections (positioned logical links). Consecutive Numbering – The connections are numbered consecutively. PosNum+PosNum – The name is built using a combination of the position numbers of the connecting and supporting shape. PosNum+Index – The name is built using the position number of the connecting shape and a continuous index. For more detailed information about connections, please refer to the main chapter of detailing.

Positioning

390

B.29.2 Manual Insertion

After a position number has been attached to the component parts, no matter whether it has been attached automatically or manually, you can display this number and further parts list information at the part using a position flag. If a position number has not yet been attached to the parts, you can specify new numbers and enter them into the part. The dialog tab mostly corresponds to the tab of automatic positioning. Please refer to this section for a detailed description. Style Select the style of the position flag to be inserted if no

separate style has been specified for the corresponding part type (or the command). This is the standard style.

Type Here, you enter the type of the position number. Numerical – The position numbers are composed of numbers only. Alphanumerical - The position numbers are composed of letters only. The order then is A, B, ..., Z, AA, AB, ... etc. Mixed - The position numbers are composed of a numerical and an alphanumerical part. The numerical part is following the alphanumerical part, the order is A1, A2, ..., A9, B1, B2 etc. The number of numerical positions can be preset under ‘Limits‘.

Last Single Here, you see the single part position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Group Here, you see the group position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Subgroup Here, you see the subgroup position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Last Assembly Here, you see the assembly position set last. At the beginning, you have to enter the value 0 at numerical position numbers, if you want to start counting at 1.

Next Enter the single part position number that has to be added to the first part to be positioned anew.

Positioning

391

Increment Enter the automatic increase in numbers (normally the increment is 1).

Click this button to reset the manual positioning to standard values.

Click this button to assign the corresponding position flag styles to the selection commands described below. This style describes the depiction of the position flag, i. e. which information is depicted in which way. Then, the following dialog appears, the assignments of which are self-explanatory.

Scale Enter the scale for display scaling of the position texts and other things. The scale should correspond to the scale of the detail. If a global scale has been defined, it will be automatically taken over here.

Paper Area Here, you specify whether a position flag has to be created in the paper area.

Shipping No. In ProSteel, you have the possibility to add a position number and a shipping number to a component part. If this option is activated, the shipping number will be displayed in the position flag.

Enter The number specified here will be taken over as position number or as shipping number into the parts properties.

Positioning

392

Attach Position Flag Different selection commands are available for attaching the flag. The corresponding position flag style of the pre-settings is assigned to the commands.

SINGLE PART

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for single parts.

GROUP

Select the part to which a group position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for

groups/subgroups/assemblies.

GROUPS-SINGLE PART

Select the part of a group to which a position flag has to be attached. Depending on the part hierarchy, the position flag is created with the set style for main part or accessory parts.

BOLT

Select the bolt connection to which a position flag has to be attached. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for bolts.

SHORT POSITION

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a short position. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for short position.

MOUNTING POSITION

Select the part to which a position flag has to be attached in form of a mounting flag. Then, the position flag is created with the set style for mounting.

Positioning

393

FREE

Select the insertion point to which a position flag has to be attached. Specify the position flag properties such as style, position number, etc. in the following dialog.

Attaching the position flag via FREE permits you to create position flags even without direct reference to a component part. You can make use of this option e.g. for position flags in 2D drawings the parts of which have been dissolved or drawn manually.

Positioning

394

B.29.3 Automatic Insertion (Distribution)

This command serves for automatic distribution of position flags in views or in detail drawings. The properties stored in the component parts are displayed in a position flag according to the set style.

Scale The scale specifies the size of the position flags to be entered.

If e.g. the text height in a position flag style is indicated with 3,5, the position flag will be created with a text height of 3,5 * scale.

Shipping No. The shipping number is selected instead of the position number of the part and entered into the position number.

Paper Area The distribution is made in the paper area and the position flags are created there.

Click this button to start the automatic distribution of position flags. Select the parts to which position flags have to be attached. Then, the program starts distribution.

Click this button to exchange the position of two flags.

Click this button to make further specifications for automatic distribution.

Positioning

395

Options for Distribution Specify the pre-settings for the automatic distribution of position flags by clicking this button. You can define the position flag styles and different optimizations.

Positioning

396

Selection list Here, you specify to which parts position flags have to be attached. After having selected a part type, you can choose a position flag style for this part type which has to be used to display the flag. No group sub parts means that group sub parts are not given a position flag. This is equally valid for subgroups and assemblies.

Distribution

Don’t care about collision At distribution the position flags are placed on the component part without verifying the surroundings of the part. This is the fastest distribution method, however the most inexact method as well.

Iterations This value indicates how often a new position has to be searched for a position flag. The higher the value, the better the positioning result will be, but the longer the search for a suitable position of the position flag.

Insertion Point The minimum distance between the insertion point and the end of the position flag’s guideline

Local Centre Your model is divided into different positioning sections with so-called local centres. The position flags are arranged in a circle around these centres and inserted. This value sets the minimum distance between two local centres.

Offset Flags This value indicates the projection of the flag beyond the edge of the visible geometry.

Free Hold This value specifies the minimum distance between two neighbouring position flags.

Flag Angle In this field, you specify how the position flags have to look like. The angle is measured between the guideline and the alignment of the text of the position flag. The angle is always indicated as angle area, because an exact angle specification cannot be carried out with distribution algorithm.

Number of Shape Sections For long shapes you can specify on how many positions except the center of the shape position flags have to be placed. At the value 0, the position flags are placed on the center.

Positioning

397

Compare Radius Here you specify the radius to be used for verifying the current position flag with regard to collisions with existing part geometry, position flags, elevations, texts or dimension texts. The bigger the value, the longer is the processing time.

Options

One Part per… Only one position flag is inserted for a part having the same position or shipping number (depending on the setting).

... per Centre Only one position flag is inserted with the same position or shipping number (depending on the setting) for each local centre in the drawing.

Place Only Out… The position flags are attached outside of the model geometry.

Break Lines At The guidelines are interrupted in the case of collisions with dimensions or texts.

Animation You can follow positioning procedure on screen if this option is activated. This may require a lot of time in case of bigger models and cannot be interrupted.

Group Flags Position flags referring to parts with identical position or shipping number are arranged to form a common flag. The insertion points mustn’t exceed the maximum distance to form a group.

Group Distances The maximum distance up to which identical parts can be arranged to form a group.

Guideline A separate guideline to the flag is created for each identical part of a group.

Show Count… If you have arranged position flags to form a group, you can select which number of parts has to be displayed in the ‘Part Number’ of the flag. Normally, the sum of the combined parts is inserted. However, you can alternatively enter the entire number of all parts in the model having this position number.

Positioning

398

Distribution Procedure The distribution of position flags takes into consideration the geometry of the component parts, texts and dimensioning objects. At first, distribution searches for the geometry within the compare radius around the insertion point of the position flags. Then, the position flag is created and placed on its origin. If the distributor doesn’t find an appropriate position of the position flag (in case of collision), the flag is moved at shapes along the centerline of the shape and a new insertion position is searched where no collision with existing geometry takes place. If there is still no appropriate position for the position flag, the flag will be created at a greater distance towards the insertion point i. e. the guideline is extended. If there isn’t any appropriate place for the position flag, it will be placed at the originally destined insertion point (center of the shape). Working off flag distribution happens according to part size. First, the flags for the small component parts are created and then the rest of the flags in ascending order. Distribution algorithm may be switched off using the option ‘Don’t care about Collision’. Flags for Main Parts and Groups Different kinds of depiction are possible when a flag has to be attached to the main part of a group or to the corresponding group. Since the settings are more complex, we will display the combinations here. 1. A “normal group flag” is attached to the main part, containing the data of the corresponding construction group.

2. A group flag is attached to the main part, however containing the single part data of the main part.

Positioning

399

3. A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data of the main part and a group flag, containing the group data is attached to it as well.

4. A single part flag is attached to the main part, containing the single part data of the main part and a group flag, containing the data of the main part is attached to it as well.

5. No flag is attached to the main part.

6. A normal single part flag is attached to the main part.

The default settings for subgroups and assemblies can be carried out similarly like the settings for groups.

Positioning

400

B.29.4 Other Auxiliary Commands

Here, you will find different commands for processing the position flags and for checking or searching for the position numbers.

Use this button to search for the highest group or part number

in the selected component parts. The result is displayed in the neighbouring input fields.

Click this button to search for component parts in the model. Enter the position you are looking for in the field Search Number. Use the options Hide, Check, Zoom Extents to select how the found result has to be depicted in the model.

Use this command to delete position numbers in component parts and groups. For this purpose, select the parts the position numbers of which have to be deleted. You can specify in which part the number is deleted using the filters Single Parts and Groups.

This command enters the current position number of the part as original position number. The original number can only be modified using this command.

Use this command to add a second part to a common position flag.

Use this command to remove the arrow to a component part from a position flag.

Positioning

401

Use this command to interrupt the guideline of a position flag by specifying two points e.g. to not overwrite a text. Only one interruption per guideline is permitted.

Use this command to remove the interruption from the position flag’s guideline.

Use this command to take over the current part properties into the position flag.

Use this command to look at the position numbers of the selected parts and to modify them. Press the ALT-key when loading the command to call the function for editing the position numbers of the group. When you press the STRG-key at component part selection, component parts without position number will be displayed in the dialog for processing as well.

Use this command to compare two parts with each other. Select the two parts and the result is displayed in a dialog box.

Here, you see two results for comparing the position. In the left figure the parts are identical. In the right one they are not identical. In the dialog window, you can see in detail where the parts differ from each other.

Positioning

402

B.29.5 Add Drawing Number

The drawing number of the workshop drawing can additionally be integrated as prefix or postfix into the position number (e.g. Pos 1234 – 100). In case of big projects, this permits a better identification of the component parts. The drawing number is added in a separate step after detailing, when the drawing numbers of workshop plans are knows and primarily serves for the depiction in overviews.

Default Format Specify the default format with variables so that you can add

additional text.

$(DWGNUM) for the drawing number $(DWGIDX) for the drawing index

Position Here, you specify whether the drawing number has to be entered as prefix or as postfix of the position number.

Single Parts The drawing number of single parts is taken over into their position number.

Groups The drawing number of groups is taken over into their position number.

Shipping No The drawing number is taken over into the shipping number instead of into the position number.

Positioning

403

Click on this button to modify the position numbers. In order to do so, you have to select the component parts.

Positioning

404

B.29.6 Depiction of Position Flags

You determine the depiction of a position flag by specifying a position flag style where the geometry, the content and the colours of the position flag are defined.

Style Use this box to select the style you want to use for the

depiction.

Click this button to save the current settings.

Click this button to load templates via the templates management and to use them again.

Create Geo... The depiction of position flags is specified in this dialog by preset parameters.

Block Geometry The depiction of position flags is specified by an AutoCAD-block. You can select any block you like.

Block Path In this field, you define from which path the blocks for selection of position flag geometry have to be read.

Bitmap You can set a separate bitmap for a style to facilitate the recognition. This bitmap then is displayed in the selection box as well.

Click this button to set the defaults of the depiction.

Positioning

405

Settings for Depiction

Geometry

Line Type Here, you define the kind of guideline to be used. None – No guideline will be displayed. Line – Only one line will be displayed. Arrow – A line with an arrow will be displayed. Point - A line with a point will be displayed. Block – A line with any block at the starting point will be displayed.

Line Block Here, you can select the AutoCAD block, if you have activated the option ‘Line with Block’.

Bubble Form Here, you define the kind of position number. None – Only the number is displayed. Round – The number is displayed in an oval. Rectangular Bubble – the number is displayed in a field. Hexagonal Bubble – The number is displayed in a hexagon. On Line - The number is displayed on the construction line.

Positioning

406

Text Type Here, you set the type of shape designation in case of length indication. U100..160 - The designation is as follows IPE270..7890. U 100 160 – The designation is as follows IPE270–7890. U100x160 - The designation is as follows IPE270x7890. Format Template – The designation is as indicated in the ‘Format Template’ input field.

Alignment Here, you determine the direction of the construction line with respect to the position text. Shape – The alignment is parallel to the shape. Line – You are prompted to enter a reference line by clicking. The text will be aligned accordingly. Horizontal – The alignment is in horizontal direction. Vertical - The alignment is in vertical direction.

Text Style Specifies the text style for the text of the position flag.

Default Format Specifies the format for the user-defined shape designation if you have selected ‘Format Template’ as text type. The following parameters are available.

$(N) for part name $(L) for part length $(W) for part width $(T) for part thickness

The result of the format string $(N) $(T)x$(W) would e.g. be plate 5x380.

Prefix / Postfix In the input field Prefix or Postfix you can enter a text which is displayed in front of or after the position or shipping number of the position flag. The default can be set independently of each other for both numbers.

Separator Specifies a text which is written between position number and shipping number, if both numbers have to be displayed as position number entry in the position flag.

Positioning

407

Layout Here, you determine which part information to be displayed in the position flag. Total Number – The number of these parts is displayed, e.g. 17 x IPE 270. Part Name – The designation is displayed (e. g. the shape designation). Comment – The comments of the parts list information are displayed. Length/Scale – The length in the selected text type is displayed. Position Number – The position number is displayed. Shipping Number – The shipping number is displayed. Material – The material designation is displayed. Item Number – Any existing item number is displayed. Orig. Posnumber – The fixed (former) position number is displayed.

Options

No Line No line is drawn beneath the text of the position flag.

Dynamic The depiction of the position flag is dynamically adapted to the current view.

Length For Group The entire length of the group is output instead of the part length.

Sizes Here, you define the text sizes in mm for general lettering (Text Size) and for position numbers (Pos. Size). For printing, the AutoCAD text sizes are scaled according to selected scale.

Colours You set the corresponding colour for the flag as AutoCAD colour number using the fields Line, Number, Bubble und Text. If you enter -1 as value, the pre-setting will be used.

When you click a position flag via the context menu ‘Change PS Properties’, you can subsequently modify the properties of each single position flag. This tab will not be described here in detail because the possibilities for setting correspond to the parameters explained above.

Positioning

408

B.29.7 Management of Styles

In this part of the dialog, you maintain your position flag styles. You can create new styles, load , update or delete styles.

Use the displayed button to create a new position flag style.

The style will be stored as *.sty-file together with the pre-settings in the directory for position flag styles. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

If you want to work with a special style which is not stored in the drawing but on the hard drive, you can load this style using this button. Select the corresponding *.sty file in the directory of position flag styles and load the file. The style will be available at once.

Use this command to remove a style that you don’t need any more in the drawing.

Click this button to change the display order. The display order of the style list is not sorted. You can specify the order yourself. For this purpose, use the two arrow keys to move the checked style up or down in the order.

If you want to update the styles loaded in your drawing, use this function. Now, all styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.

Drawing Information

409

B.30 Drawing Information

When using this command, you can add drawing information to your drawing. This information will be directly taken over into the parts list. By this way it is also possible to fill in the title block of 2D drawing when having entered a drawing border by means of ‘Drawing Border’ command. Always enter the order drawing number and the modification index, if present, since this information is evaluated during the 2D detailing process. You can later query the Detail Centre to find out, which drawing contains the parts and will receive the file path as well as the probably more useful drawing number.

All Text Fields In the different text fields you enter general information on the

project and on the drawing. Since these fields are self-explanatory, they are not explained in detail.

Project Name Here, you select a block using the SELECT button for entering data in its block attributes via the entry fields, provided you have assigned such entry fields to the variables of the block attributes.

When the drawing border for the 2D workshop drawing has been entered as block using the ProSteel command ‘Drawing Borders’, you can select the block of the drawing borders. The entries may either be taken over into the title block (export), or the entries can be taken from the title block into the dialog (import).

Drawing Information

410

Click on this button to retrieve the data of the entry fields into the block attributes of the selected block.

Click on this button to retrieve the block attributes of the selected block into the entry fields.

Click on this button to define the variables assigned to the block attributes of the different entry fields. An identical dialog box will be displayed, where the variable names of the block attributes are entered.

When you have selected the Prepared On, Checked On, or Released On fields and click this button, the current date will be entered

Create Parts Lists

411

B.31 Create Parts Lists

After having positioned a model or a detailed workshop drawing, a parts list can be created based on the part data. The creation of parts lists by ProSteel is divided into two sections, i.e., the actual creation of the list of materials on the basis of the parts, and the processing of the list of materials for a printout. By separating these two functions, the data of the parts lists is also available to other programs. For ‘Creating the Parts Lists’ a file is written in the dBASE format as a *.dbf file. This database format is compatible with many other applications. You can import, further process and read out the file (in this case, this would finish the work on the parts lists by using ProSteel). As a matter of fact, ProSteel also provides the most important functions for processing and reading out of the data according to your requirements with the ‚Processing Parts List’ command. In fact, you need no further programs but you have the possibility of using them. This is the reason for separating the two functions.

Create Parts Lists

412

B.31.1 Register Parts Lists

When creating a parts list, you first select the parts to be processed, preferably parts of a group or, in addition, independent single parts. You can decide whether or not parts of your selection are to be included in the list - either collectively via the filter function during creation of the parts lists or individually for each part. If the ‘Select’ button has not been clicked in the corresponding parts properties, the part will not be included in the parts lists, even though you have selected it. Since further processing and printing of the parts list is carried out with an extra function, you can register all required parts lists first and store them under different names.

Part Selection Here, you select the parts on the basis of which a parts list is

to be created. 3D-parts – you select the parts from the model. 2D-position flags – the parts list will be deducted from the position flags of a detailed workshop drawing. From modified 2D drawings you can generate new bills of materials.

Group Options

Verify Position... Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists that have a valid position number.

Create Parts Lists

413

Only Group Parts Only those selected parts will be taken over into the parts lists that are assigned to a group.

Subgroups Subgroups are included when the group structure of the parts list is created.

Assemblies Assemblies are included when the group structure of the parts list is created.

Only Selected Only the selected parts are taken over into the parts list.

Create Group Record A group entry is written into the parts list only for completely seized groups.

Start Part List Parts list processing is started immediately after creation of the parts list file. You needn’t use this function separately if you want to continue your work directly.

Create XML file In addition to the standard output data, an XML file containing the parts list data will also be created..

Calc. NC-Cut.. The angle of intersection is calculated by ProSteel according to the NC-guidelines of the DSTV.

Straight End The parts are rotated that the straight end is situated at the front.

With Welds Information about welds is written into the parts list file.

Combine Welds Identical welds are summed up to one single entry.

XRef The selected XRef-objects are included when the parts list is created.

Group Bolts

Bolts without ... Bolts will be included in the parts lists, even if they have no position number.

... Extra The additional parts for the bolts are separately specified in the list of materials.

Without Weight Bolts are imported into the parts list without indication of weight.

Output File The file for the list of materials is stored in the file displayed in the Name field in ‘dBASE-format’. By clicking the FILE button you can set the directory in the same manner as you use to do under Windows. The instructions below detail how placeholders are to be used in this input field.

Create Parts Lists

414

Placeholders for the output path To avoid having to update the filename every time a new version is created (particularly if you are working with templates and want to avoid overwriting them), various placeholders are supported in the edit line of the file path in order to permit variable file paths. The following table gives an overview of the potential variables: %DWGDIR% Directory in which the current drawing is saved %DWGNAME% Name of the current drawing (without the .dwg file extension) %DAY% Current date %MONTH% Current month %YEAR% Current year %HOUR% Current hour %MINUTE% Current minute %DWG_PROJECT_NAME% Project name from drawing information %DWG_PROJECT_NUMBER% Project number from drawing information %DWG_ORDER_NAME% Order name from drawing information %DWG_ORDER_NUMBER% Order number from drawing information %DWG_DRAWING_NAME% Drawing name from drawing information %DWG_DRAWING_NUMBER% Drawing number from drawing information %DWG_DRAWING_INDEX% Index from drawing information %DWG_CREATED_NAME% Created name from drawing information %DWG_CREATED_DATE% Creation date from drawing information %DWG_CHECKED_NAME% Checked name from drawing information %DWG_CHECKED_DATE% Checked date from drawing information %DWG_CLEARED_NAME% Cleared name from drawing information %DWG_CLEARED_DATE% Cleared date from drawing information %DWG_LVPOS1% LVPOS1 from drawing information %DWG_LVPOS2% LVPOS2 from drawing information %DWG_LVPOS3% LVPOS3 from drawing information %DWG_LVPOS4% LVPOS4 from drawing information %DWG_COMMENT1% Comment1 from drawing information %DWG_COMMENT2% Comment2 from drawing information %DWG_COMMENT3% Comment3 from drawing information %DWG_COMMENT4% Comment4 from drawing information %DWG_CUSTOMER% Customer from drawing information %DWG_DRAWING_PAGE% Drawing page from drawing information %SOPRO_DIR% Directory of special profile %DAWA_DIR% Directory of ceiling/wall profile %COMBI_DIR% Directory of combination profile %WELDSHAPE_DIR% Directory of weld profile %TEMPLATE_DIR% Template directory %TEMP_DIR% Directory of temporary files %PARTLIST_DIR% Parts list directory %NC_DIR% NC output directory %DETAIL_DIR% Detail directory (output from detail blocks) %STYLE_DIR% Style directory

Create Parts Lists

415

%EXPORT_DIR% Export directory %FRAME_DIR% Frame directory %LOCALISED_DIR% Cross-language “Localised” folder %LANGUAGE_DIR% Language directory

Create Parts Lists

416

Dialog-Commands WITH BOLTS

By clicking this button, you start part selection. The selected bolts will be considered as well.

WITHOUT BOLTS

By clicking this button, you start part selection. Bolts will not be considered, even though they have been selected.

MOUNTING LIST

By clicking this button, you start part selection. Only the main parts of groups including bolts will be considered.

Importing the Parts If you select the command for the first time, a display field with drawing information will be displayed. You should complete it already, since in this case the information on drawing numbers will be known for all entries in the parts list (see → ’Drawing Information’). After having set the filters and selected the function concerned, the program will check whether or not the specified file for the parts lists already exists. If the file already exists, you are given a warning, and you can decide whether to overwrite or to cancel the function. Then you select the parts to be imported. You can select all parts, since only the defined type of parts will be imported. You also have the possibility of manually excluding parts. For checking purposes, all parts imported into the parts lists are hidden. Using the command ’Regenerate’, you can recall them again. Hint: If a part is not imported and should have been, use the context menu “Change PS Properties“ to check if the “Takeover“ button was not clicked.

Create Parts Lists

417

B.31.2 Process Parts List

After you have created one or several parts lists using the command ‘Create Parts List‘ you can further process the bills by using this command. The files of the parts list can be loaded, modified, formatted, and printed using this command. The substantial form generator makes it possible to freely design the formatting and layout of any parts list, add company logos, and preview the parts lists. You do not need any special knowledge about this utility since its normal operation is smoothly integrated into ProSteel's program environment. However, if you would like to customize the enclosed parts list forms to your individual needs, please read the online help of the form generator “List & Label Designer”, which will explain the customization of existing and creation of new forms in easy to understand steps. The following sections will describe how to generate and output a parts list first before discussing the individual options of the parts list processing method.

Create Parts Lists

418

Parts List Output

In the FILE menu click the menu option OPEN FILE and select the *.dbf-file you want to process. The directory and the file name should be known to you (have been previously defined with the command ‘Create Parts List‘). The dialog box now fills with the parts list data. Each part (even construction group descriptions) is listed individually and unsorted; equal positions are not combined until the time of output. If there is an error in the parts list file (such as for example components with the number=0 or different parts with the same position number) the program creates and opens a file named stkerr.dbf where these errors are displayed. These parts won't be listed in the standard parts list. In the SETTINGS menu, click the menu option SET PARTS LIST HEADER and then enter the data for the parts list header. If you have defined order data previously (command ‘Drawing Information‘), these data can be imported into the parts list header. Finally, click the OUTPUT menu and select the parts list variation (e.g. parts list of individual parts), which you would like to print. Depending on the settings, the program now prompts you for the layout for the parts list formatting and can then generate a print preview. All or specific pages are printed from within this preview.

Create Parts Lists

419

Preview Here, you can see an overview about the most important functions required for printout and navigation within the preview. As the actual printout is completely taken over by the additional application “List & Label”, please refer to the online help of this program for more detailed information.

Page selection Zoom Print page Print All Exit Other Output Targets You can, however; also directly print the parts list without preview or you can convert it into other formats like e. g. the Rich-Text-Format (RTF). To determine the output target, select in the output dialog of “List & Label” under Output on ... the desired target in the selection list and click on START afterwards to output the parts list.

Create Parts Lists

420

Parts List Processing Main Window

If you select this command, the main window for the parts list processing will open – first without any entries. This dialog has its own program menu offering you most of the utilized commands for this command. If you have selected one or several files for processing via the menu ‘File‘, the window will show the following information. The left column displays the currently open files. Clicking a file name makes this file your current working file and all components of that file – mostly unsorted – are listed in the right list of the dialog.

The component parts list offers only a draft display of the entries. By double-clicking an entry, another dialog opens listing all parts lists data for this entry. You can modify any data at this point, which are saved in the corresponding file immediately once you exit the window with the OK button. This means you are not working with just a working temporary buffer copy but with the actual file!

Create Parts Lists

421

Function Selection Menu Option FILE

Open By clicking this button, you can open one or several files of a parts list for processing. The open files are displayed in the list on the left of the main dialog. When being clicked, the selected list becomes the current working file.

Delete By clicking this button, you can delete a stored file.

Close By clicking this button, the current working file is closed and removed from the list.

Sort By clicking this button, you can sort the current working file according to two layers of a parts list in an ascending or descending order.

For this purpose, a further dialog box will be displayed, where you can select a primary and a secondary layer. The data will first be sorted according to the contents of the primary layer and then, in case of equal contents, according to the contents of the secondary layer.

Data content is modified according to the sorting.

Cancel By clicking this button, the parts list processing is terminated.

Function Selection Menu Option DATA RECORDS

Add By clicking this button, you can manually add a new data record to the end of the file. An empty dialog box will be displayed; where the parts list data can be entered.

Delete By clicking this button, the data record currently selected in the part list on the right will be deleted from the file.

Add from File By clicking this button, you can add the data of a second parts list file to the current working file. You have to select an additional file.

Please note that the content of the current file is permanently changed when using this option!

Create Parts Lists

422

Function Selection Menu Option SETTINGS

Definition Click this option to edit an existing print layout or create a new one.

The print layout specifies which parts list data to print in what format. You can freely design your layout and also add text and logos. The following dialog box opens where you can edit the template:

Now you will see a list with the existing form layouts in the form of templates as well as a description and preview of the form. If you would like to edit a form just double-click the file name and the utility program „List & Label“ (see intro to this chapter) opens. A detailed description of the functionality would extend beyond the scope of this manual. Please see the online help of this utility program for further details. If you would like to create a new form, enter a new file name, which will return an empty form ready for editing.

List Header By clicking this option, you can edit the header of your parts list. The program will give you first the opportunity to import data from the drawing information (see command ‘Drawing Information‘) into the parts list header.

Filter Click this entry to set the filter conditions if you want to output a parts list with filtered data Only data meeting the filter condition are output in the parts list.

Create Parts Lists

423

List Names By clicking this button, you can preset standard print templates for single part, group and bolt lists. A dialog opens where you enter the print template files to be used as standard selection. You can also select these files by a File Selection Dialog. In addition, you can switch off error check here.

If the field Switch off Posnum Equal Part Detection has been

checked, their position number only recognizes identical parts. If this field has not been checked (recommended), the parts are additionally compared with regard to name, length, etc. If these values don't match for component parts having the same position number, an error message is created.

Create Parts Lists

424

Function Selection Menu Option OUTPUT

Group List Click this entry to output a construction group list.

If you have imported parts using the ‚Assembly List‘, you should select this output format. If you used the command ‘Create Parts List‘ to import parts that do not belong to a group, these parts are added to the list.

After selecting the command, you have the option to change the current Windows system or default printer. The data is now formatted according to the selected standard template (see ->‘Preselection Parts List Names) and, if desired, presented in a preview before. You can now print the list.

Please note that the selected form also fits a construction group list. Of course, it is possible to print a group list with a list form for individual parts but this output might not meet your expectations.

Also remember that only those parts can be printed, which have been defined/imported previously (command ’Create Parts List’.

Single Parts Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts. The remainder of the process is the same.

Bolt List Click this entry to output a bolt list. The remainder of the process is the same.

Filtered List Click this entry to output a list featuring individual parts, with only those parts that match the current filter conditions. Use the command ‘List Definition/Filter‘ to set these conditions. The remainder of the process is the same.

Free ...List By clicking on one of these three entries the corresponding parts list will be output. The proceeding is identical with the group list. The only difference is that you have to select a format template here instead of using the set standard template.

Create Parts Lists

425

The following figure shows you an example of an component part group list displayed as preview in “List & Label”:

Create Parts Lists

426

Drawing Parts List

427

B.32 Drawing Parts List

B.32.1 Parts List Creation

This command permits the creation of a parts list and its output in the drawing. Therefore, it is suitable for drawing-dependent parts lists in plans showing e.g. only one single group. Since this parts list is an "intelligent" object, modifications in the model can be automatically seized and displayed in the parts list. In addition, various formatting options are available which can be controlled directly. After having selected the command, select the desired parts first and then determine the desired insertion point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point. Then the following dialog appears where you can make the basic settings.

Drawing Parts List

428

Style Here, you select the name of the output style. This output style specifies the appearance of the output, i. e. which values are displayed in which lines, the size and position of the columns, etc. The ‘Standard’ output style is created by the program and therefore is always available. You can create and manage as many styles as you like. Here you select a style and thus re-structure the list by selecting a list entry.

Origin Here, you select whether the data have to be taken from normal 3D component parts or from 2D position flags.

List Type Select the type of parts list here. Single Parts List – An own entry is created for each element. The data don’t have any reference to each other; the quantity of output parts corresponds to the seized parts. The determined number of groups is not (!) taken into consideration for selection. Group List – Output as group list; here the data are output separately according to groups and the quantity of single parts is output as parts per group. Dissolved Group List – A "real" single parts list is output taking into consideration the number of parts depending on the quantity of the corresponding group.

Insertion Point Here, you specify the position of the parts list related to the previously selected insertion point.

Tolerances This value indicates in which tolerance ranges the length of component parts is compared and considered as identical.

Scale The scale of the output is specified. The size of the complete list output can be increased or decreased.

Current Layer If this button is activated, the list is generated on the current layer. Otherwise, it is generated on the layer specified by PS_TEXT in the configuration.

Autom. Update If this button is checked, ProSteel is controlling all activities with regard to their influence on the parts list. When you delete an element or you modify the size of an element adopted into the parts list, the list will be calculated anew and updated. Please note that this option may require some time for calculation. Therefore, you should thoroughly consider whether you want to make use of this possibility and risk the inconveniences of speed. You have always the possibility to update the list manually.

Drawing Parts List

429

Check Position... If this option is activated only parts having a valid position number will be evaluated.

Only Groups... If this option is activated only parts belonging to a group will be evaluated.

Total Amount... If quantities are used, the total amount will be displayed.

Number*Quantity Groups The displayed amount results from the number of parts in a group multiplied by the quantity of these groups in the model.

Total Amount at Total Values If total values have to be used at output, the total amount instead of the number is used at calculation.

Bolts... If this option is activated, bolts having no valid position number will be evaluated as well.

Washers... If this option is activated, washers will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.

Nuts... If this option is activated, nuts will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.

Safety Nuts If this option is activated, safety nuts will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.

Wedge Washers... If this option is activated, wedge washers will be evaluated and listed as separate parts.

Without Weight Bolts are displayed in the parts list without indication of weight.

Welds Welds are displayed in the parts list.

Add... Identical types of welds are added in the parts list to a common length.

Click on this button to add further component parts to the component parts list of the parts list. You then have to select the parts to be added.

Click on this button to remove component parts from the component parts list of the parts list. You then have to select the parts to be removed.

Click on this button to calculate anew and update the parts list. Here, you can force an update of the list if the automatic update option has not been activated.

Drawing Parts List

430

B.32.2 Processing of Parts List Styles

Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing parts list style and select the style to be edited.

EDIT

Click on this button to edit the selected style.

Edit List Properties In the display list you can see any kind of information, such as e.g. which columns are output in which order and with which settings in the parts list. In addition, you can make general settings concerning the list format.

Drawing Parts List

431

Style Name The name of the current style; all modifications are related to this style.

Display List Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the parts list. They are displayed in this order from the left to the right in the drawing parts list

Click on this button to modify the line selected in the display list (parts list column). Then, another dialog opens.

Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) to the end of the list. Then, another dialog opens.

Click on this button to add a new line (parts list column) in front of the checked line. Then, another dialog opens.

Click on this button to delete the selected line (parts list column) from the list.

Click on this button to save the parts list style. Please remember to save the style after modifications; otherwise all modifications will be lost.

Click on this button to modify the formatting of the summated text of the parts list. Then, another dialog opens.

Text Size Determines the text size in drawing units at a scale 1:1

Height Scaling Increases the height of the lines in question by a factor. Depending on the text style, the readability of the parts list is increased.

Left Margin Distance of the signs to the left margin at left-justified insertion.

Right Margin Distance of the signs to the right margin at right-justified insertion.

Offset Distance of the group list entries of group parts to the main part.

Rotation Rotation of the whole list by the indicated degrees

Block Size Indicates after how many lines a horizontal line has to be inserted. This only serves for a clearer overview.

Move Up If this field is checked, the list is running from the bottom to the top, i. e. the column headers are below.

Divide Groups At group lists, the groups are divided by horizontal lines. The settings under 'Block Size' don’t have any influence in this case.

Align Numbers All numerical values are aligned to the right margin.

Drawing Parts List

432

Fill up with Noughts All numerical values are filled up with noughts according to the indicated format length and digits after the decimal point.

Header The header of the list is taken over to output.

Text Style Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD manual for more detailed information about AutoCAD text styles.

Sort Depending on the field selected here, the output is sorted in rising order from the column header onward.

Invert Causes a sorting in descending order from the column header onward.

Use Prefix At sorting, the entries are separated in prefix and number and then sorted separately.

The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the parts list. In addition, individual colours can be assigned to the different columns as well. Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the colour in the dialog as usual. Header Colour of column headers

Label Colour of column texts

Frame Colour of list frame

Hor. Lines Colour of the horizontal separation lines of the list

Ver. Lines Colour of the vertical separation lines of the list

Drawing Parts List

433

Processing of Column Properties Each column of the parts list styles can be adapted and formatted in many different ways. After an entry to be modified or created has been selected in the display list of parts list format dialog, the following dialog opens:

Field Name Select the desired field from the data fields.

Name1 The name of the column header resp. the first name if an entry has been indicated in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two rows are available altogether.

Name2 The second name of column header.

Length Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The exact column width depends on the selected text style.

Dec. Point The number of desired positions after the decimal point.

Text Size Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the value 0, the general text size of the list style is used.

Enter the colour of the column text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is used.

Drawing Parts List

434

Position Enter the alignment of the column: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.

Units Enter the unit format Metric, Imperial or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, the default units of the drawing are used.

Process Sum Text Block

The overall weight or similar data can be indicated in a sum text block (foot lines), which can be output below, or above the parts list. Up to ten lines are available for that purpose where you can insert additional variables, which then will be replaced by the current values.

Drawing Parts List

435

Footer Enter the desired foot lines. You can use pre-defined variables as well. The following variables are available as foot lines:

$(N) The number of lines is indicated.

$(F) Multiplication factor addition in %

$(L) Overall length of all parts without addition

$(LF) Overall length of all parts with addition

$(W) Overall weight of all parts without addition

$(WF) Overall weight of all parts with addition

$(P) Overall area to be painted of all parts without addition

$(PF) Overall area to be painted of all parts with addition

Addition Percentage by which the determined values have to be increased. These increased values can be output by means of the variable $(xF).

Dec. Point. The number of desired positions after the decimal point.

Offset The distance to the corresponding margin.

Enter the colour of the text (colour number). If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is used.

Position Enter the alignment of the text: Left, Center, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.


Group Row In the Prefix input field, you can indicate a prefix for the position numbers of group lines. In the Colour input field you can specify the colour of the group line. If the value -1 has been indicated here, the normal text colour will be used. These settings can be made separately for groups, subgroups and assemblies.

Drawing Parts List

436

B.32.3 Management of Parts List Styles

The management of the existing parts list styles is organized in the third tab “Order”.

Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard

drive into the drawing.

Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you have to enter a style name (please pay attention that the name does not exist already). Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which is current at the moment, and it will be used as new current style. The settings of the style can be individually modified afterwards.

Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer structure of your parts list styles.

Click on this button to delete the selected style.

Drawing Parts List

437

B.32.4 Processing the Content of Parts List

Move to the forth tab “Content” to look at the content of the parts list and to modify it manually. To modify an entry, double-click the corresponding field and you can edit the entry.

Drawing Parts List

438

Containment List

439

B.33 Containment List

B.33.1 Creation of Containment List

After having created groups in a drawing, you can make lists and insert them into the drawing. These lists can display the belonging of certain parts to component part groups. You can insert these drawing containment lists in the DetailCenter Express as well. First select the desired parts after having selected this command. Then, specify the desired insertion point of the list in the drawing by clicking a point. The following dialog appears displaying the basic settings.

Style Here, you define how the list has to look like on the base of a

style. The list templates are saved as template via the template management.

Insertion Point Here, you specify the insertion point of the created list. You can choose between several insertion points.

Current Layer The list is placed on the current layer of the drawing instead of on the configuration layer.

Containment List

440

Scale Specifies the insertion scale of the list. The scale affects text heights and distances within the list.

Click on this button to add further parts to the component parts list of the drawing containment list. You have to select the parts to be added.

Click on this button to remove parts from the component parts list of the drawing containment list. You have to select the parts to be removed.

Click on this button, to calculate anew an update the drawing containment list. You can force an update of the list if automatic update has not been activated.

Containment List

441

B.33.2 Processing of List Styles

Move to the second tab “Display” to edit a new created or existing list style. Select the style to be edited.

EDIT

Click on this button to edit the selected style.

Edit List Properties In the display list you can see any kind of information, such as which lines are output in which order, with which settings in the drawing containment list. In addition, you can make general settings concerning the list format.

Containment List

442

Style Name The name of the current style; all modifications are related to

this style.

Display List Here, you see an overview of all displayed columns of the drawing containment list. They are displayed in this order from the left to the right in the drawing containment list.

Click on this button to modify the line selected in the display list (column of drawing containment list). Then, another dialog opens.

Click on this button to add a new line (column of drawing containment list) to the end of the list. Then, another dialog opens.

Containment List

443

Click on this button to add a new line (column of drawing containment list) in front of the checked line. Then, another dialog opens.

Click on this button to delete the selected line (column of drawing containment list) from the list.

Click on this button to save the style of the drawing containment list. Please remember to save the style after modifications; otherwise all modifications will be lost.

Text Size Determines the text size in drawing units at a scale 1:1

Height Scaling Increases the height of the lines in question by a factor. Depending on the text style, the readability of the drawing containment list is increased.

Left Margin The distance of the signs to the left margin at left-justified insertion.

Right Margin The distance of the signs to the right margin at right-justified insertion.

Offset The distance of the group list entries of group parts to the main part.

Rotation The rotation of the whole list by the indicated degrees

To the Top If this field is checked, the list is running from the bottom to the top, i.e. the column headers are below.

Separating Lines The groups are divided by horizontal lines.

Header A column description is displayed for the columns of the list.

Text Style Select the desired text style. Please refer to the AutoCAD manual for more detailed information about AutoCAD text styles.

Invert Causes a sorting in descending order from the column header onward.

Prefix Separate prefixes can be predefined here for entries of groups, subgroups and assemblies.

The display colours can be globally selected for all elements of the drawing containment list. In addition, individual colours can be assigned to the different columns as well. Enter the colour directly by indicating the AutoCAD colour number or click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, you can select the colour in the dialog as usual. Header Colour of column headers

Containment List

444

Label Colour of column texts

Frame Colour of list frame

Hor. Lines Colour of the horizontal separation lines of the list

Ver. Lines Colour of the vertical separation lines of the list

Containment List

445

Processing of Column Properties Each column of the list styles can be adapted and formatted in many different ways. After an entry to be modified or created has been selected in the display list of list format dialog, the following dialog opens:

Field Name Select the desired field from the data fields.

Name1 The name of the column header resp. the first name if an entry has been indicated in input field ‘Name2’ as well. Two rows are available altogether.

Name2 The second name of column header.

Length Here, you enter the desired column width in text signs. The exact column width depends on the selected text style.

Decimal Pt. The number of desired positions after the decimal point.

Text Size Enter the text size of the column. If you have entered the value 0, the general text size of the list style is used.

Containment List

446

Enter the colour of the column text. If you have entered the value -1, the text colour of the list style is used.

Containment List

447

Position Enter the alignment of the column: Left, Centre, Right or Automatic. If 'Automatic' has been selected, all texts are aligned to the left and all digits are aligned to the right.


Containment List

448

Management of List Styles The management of the existing list styles is organized in the third tab “Order”.

Click on this button to load the selected style from the hard

drive into the drawing.

Click on this button to create a new list style. To do this you have to enter a style name (please pay attention that the name does not exist already). Then, this style is created with the settings of the style, which is current at the moment, and it will be used as new current style. The settings of the style can be individually modified afterwards.

Click on this button to create a new folder for a clearer structure of your list styles.

Click on this button to delete the selected style.

Containment List

449

Processing the Content of Drawing Containment List Move to the fourth tab “Content” to look at the content of the drawing containment list and to modify it manually. To modify an entry, double-click the corresponding field and you can easily edit the entry.

Containment List

450

Detailing

451

C Detailing

Detailing

452

DetailCenter

453

C.1 DetailCenter

C.1.1 The 2D-Detailing

Once you have created the model, finished editing of the model, have positioned all of the necessary components, and may have issued a (preliminary) parts list, the Finishing or Detailing of the 3D components can commence.

Detailing 3D Models The program generates the usual 2D views of the components for the workshop plans using the model, which means that the program will disassemble the model into its components, analyse the geometry of all the individual parts, and ascertains any existing but invisible edges. Then – depending on the requirements or your selections – the shape is displayed in several views and dimensioned and the position flag is attached. All of this takes place in a split second and in the background. Once the program has finished with one component, this component is deposited in a library in the form of a block – clearly organized according to the individual construction groups and design sections. After this procedure has concluded you can use the program to help you with the layout of the parts on your drawing sheets. From here on, you can treat the parts as if they were the usual drawings generated with a CAD program – but ProSteel offers you a few extra functions, which facilitate your work.

Intervention Options You do not have to worry that you are going to be at the mercy of the program and that from now on all your drawings will reflect the wishes of the software designers. A vast number of parameters help you to specify the appearance of your mapped design. These parameters can be saved as data records and re-imported depending on the type of drawing (overview, life-size, 1: 10 workshop details, etc). This saves you time by being able to detail several parts at once applying one of these styles – that might already be enough to satisfy the requirements of your assignment. However, you can also detail small groups of components – one after the other – or even a single part in different styles. You always have access to the smallest detail.

DetailCenter

454

Basic Detailing Principle In general, the program distinguishes between two basic detailing methods: automatic and manual detailing. Automatic detailing takes place within the open model, and you tell the program to detail a certain part using a certain style. You have previously defined or selected this suitable style. The rest is out of your hands (for now). The result is a block with the views as interpreted by the program according to your specifications. Manual detailing requires that you determine the respective model section yourself. You are working within a work frame and may use the auxiliary functions of the program to attach and assign dimension chains, position flags, height indicators, etc. You can also use such standard AutoCAD elements as lines, texts, etc. The program only displays the invisible edges correctly and saves the details as a block – nothing more. This does indeed offer you the greatest level of influence on the appearance of the details but you have to carry out each step manually. The following chapters discuss the ProSteel DetailCenter and all of the tasks described shortly in the text.

DetailCenter

455

C.1.2 Detailing with the DetailCenter

What is the DetailCenter? Users control the complete 2D drawing and plan generation from within the DetailCenter – from a first overview of the components to the workshop drawing with multiple changes and manipulations. Think of the DetailCenter as a program within the program because it offers vastly more possibilities and options than one can see at first glance.

When you open the DetailCenter for the first time, a clear dialog box will be displayed with only a few settings. There is nothing more required after the adaptations to your personal requirements were made. As you know, you „only“ want to get your shop drawings from the model. However, if need be, you can at any time penetrate deeply inside the drawing derivation. You can make a great number of settings, ask for information, and check drawings. The philosophy behind this development is that you can get the same result in various ways, that you can make a lot of modifications – but you do not have to!

DetailCenter

456

General Dialog Info The DetailCenter is accessible via a dockable dialog which can be linked on the left or on the right of AutoCAD and which you can change in size. Double-clicking on the header line toggles between the freely moveable and the docked status of the dialog. Most of the work within the DetailCenter is carried out using the context menus of the right mouse button or using drag & drop, where you drag an entry onto another entry. You will also work with tree lists that resemble Windows Explorer trees. Since these functions are similar to standard Windows functions, they will not be described here. Most of the dialogs that can be selected from within the DetailCenter are non-modal dialogs. These dialogs are not always closed once a function has been selected but can remain open. This has the advantage of saving you a few mouse clicks and you can adapt these dialogs to the current situation, which means you are always informed about the status of the work. You can change settings and watch the changes immediately on the screen – just as you can do with many of the ProSteel commands. All dialogs of the DetailCenter are synchronized with one another as much as possible. Since this means that it does not take very long to accumulate a great many open dialogs on the screen, the DetailCenter will here support your work as well. Any non-required dialogs are hidden whenever necessary. They are exchanged with others if the command association changes. Dependent subordinate dialogs are closed automatically if you close a parent dialog.

DetailCenter

457

DetailCenter Surface The following page will give you an overview over the work area of the DetailCenter. This chapter includes an introduction and explains some of the basic detailing terms. The individual function areas are described later in special chapters.

DetailCenter

458

DetailCenter

459

In general, the DetailCenter is divided into three main work levels. Usually, your building part or component will pass through all three levels until it is visible on the workshop plan in the form of a detail. However, your work in the different levels is limited to only a few mouse clicks, if all the basic settings of detailing are adapted to your requirements. Even if these works seem to be too awkward and involved for you, because you do not need the flexibility of the DetailCenter, you can use the DetailCenter Express. This part of the program once again combines the remaining steps until a workshop plan is created. Detailing is worked through according to a pre-determined pattern. „Detailing by one single mouse click“ became a reality. Level 1: Component Overview (Prepare) Here you will obtain an overview of the parts of the model and their functional associations and relationships. You can view construction groups, single parts or whole areas of the model – all clearly structured in tree format. This is the place where you can manage and change detail styles and link your components with these styles as well as manage the modification mechanism. In addition, DetailCenter Express! Is started here. Level 2: Display Views Overview (Detailing) The second work level offers you an overview of the component or model views created by the program. You can add or remove views, display a preview and fine-tune the detail style. In this overview you decide what exactly is to be processed as a detail block and start the actual detailing process. Level 3: Detail Block Overview (Import) The third and last level features the detailed parts, which are located on your hard drive in the form of detail blocks. You receive an overview of the detail blocks of the current model (or other models) and decide which parts to import or integrate into which drawing. Placing the parts on a drawing sheet finishes the workshop plan, unless you would like to carry out a few adjustments manually. You can create automatic multiple sheets according to your own rules by means of DetailCenter Composer! which can be started here.

DetailCenter

460

Construction Parts List Each of the three levels offers access to a window with the settings for the display of construction parts lists using the function button bar. Here you can specify which components are displayed in which logical sorting in the tree structure of the display. You can set any filter you like and store these settings in their own templates for each work level separately. In addition, a standard display is available for each level, which allows reasonable working already from the beginning.

Work Tools Each of the three levels offers access to a window with work tools using the function button bar. These tools are assigned to the corresponding area. In order to keep the display area of the construction parts lists as large as possible, many of the infrequently used functions and settings have been delegated to these subordinate dialogs.

Information Window In addition, the context menu offers access to another dockable information window. All three-work levels are subordinate to this information window, which shows the current status of the selected entry. Depending on the list, this window displays the name and type of the part, data of detailing, insertion location, current status, and much more.

Context Menu A supplement to every level is a level-specific context menu accessible through the right mouse button, which lists only those functions that are significant to the respective list. You will probably use the context menus quite often because they represent the fastest way to access a command.

DetailCenter

461

Templates As you already know from the other ProSteel functions, the basic settings of the DetailCenter can be saved as template for each level. The settings of work tools and of construction parts list are stored. These templates (as reference) may again be stored in a parent template together with the global settings for the DetailCenter. This allows individual configuration of the complete DetailCenter. Later, you only have to load the suitable configuration for the current working process.

Favourites After defining some of the templates as favourites for the complete DetailCenter, this allows fast selection from the favourite list. This is the most comfortable way if you have to change the setting frequently during one session.

Detail Styles The detail styles are the cornerstone of the entire detailing process. They describe how a part is to look as a workshop detail or how the model is to appear as an overview. The content of the styles is described in detail in the chapter 'Detailing Styles'. The management and modification of a style is described in detail in the chapter 'Component Overview'. Just a preliminary note: A component without detail style cannot be processed and is ignored by the program when it comes to detailing!

Preview The detailing of a selected part can be previewed from within the views overview or directly from within the model. This will create a small AutoCAD drawing displaying the exact result of the detail style settings applied to this part. The small drawing shows how the part will be detailed. This window and its drawing can be zoomed or queried for information because it is an independent AutoCAD drawing. Since you can now open this part's detail style, you can track the effects of different style settings in „real time“. We call this fine-tuning of the detail style. If you open the preview for another part, you do not have to close this window first. The content is updated automatically. After viewing the detail, the window must be closed manually.

DetailCenter

462

While the preview is open, most of the functions of the DetailCenter are inaccessible. Please remember: The preview might be hidden behind some other drawing because so many windows can be open simultaneously. Also consider the speed of your computer when viewing a great many details such as construction groups or entire overviews. Do not become impatient if your computer seems to be busy calculating for what seems like a long time. Even fast computers need a little computation time, but some of the latest computers will surprise you with the speed of the update.

DetailCenter

463

C.1.3 Launching DetailCenter

You can launch the DetailCenter in several modes, some of which are optimised for a subdomain of detailing. Executing the function (PS_DETCENTER) initially displays a selection dialogue from which you can choose the mode you want.

The major advantage in this approach lies in the improved response times and the reduced number of objects displayed. This is not, however, a form of display filter; it is a genuine reduction in the quantity of data. The only objects that now need to be analysed and displayed are those that are actually needed for the mode selected. DetailCenter modes

DetailCenter Standard (PS_DETCENTER_STANDARD))

The component overview contains all objects and model views, so the full range of possibilities for detailing remains open. This is the default status, as in the previous program version.

DetailCenter Layout (PS_DETCENTER_LAYOUT)

The component overview contains only the model views, and no individual parts or groups for workshop plans.

DetailCenter Workshop Plans (PS_DETCENTER_SHOP)

The component overview contains only the individual parts or groups for the 3d model, and no model views for layout plans.

DetailCenter Express (PS_DETCENTER_EXPRESS)

DetailCenter itself is no longer displayed, and DetailCenter Express is launched directly instead. A few clicks of the mouse or even loading one single template leads to a finished 2D result, via the application of a few practical restrictions. See also ‘DetailCenter Express’

If you use the same mode of DetailCenter on a regular basis, you can also launch it using direct commands from AutoCAD.

DetailCenter

464

DetailCenter

465

C.1.4 General Information – Scale and Dimension Styles

There are two options for detailing a part when working with the DetailCenter: Either the part keeps its original size and the surrounding text (e.g. dimensions, labels, etc.) is scaled to fit the part or the part is scaled and the text keeps its original size. This is to support both of the methods typical for AutoCAD.

Scales The first method allows for a simple – and unscaled – processing of the drawing and does not generate the scale until the time of plotting. Components can also be inserted (unlabeled!) into other plans easily and comfortably. The disadvantage of this method is that this involves some thinking, to keep different scales and the same text sizes within one drawing and still have to copy parts from other drawings. This is where the second method is more practical: You always plot using the scale 1:1, always use the same text size, and scale the parts to fit the plotting scales – just as you would do when drawing by hand. This allows you easy management of different scales within one drawing. ProSteel permits both methods when detailing, but you have to stick to one or the other method within one drawing. This is because the dimensioning styles are the problem.

Dimensioning Styles You define certain AutoCAD dimensioning styles in your model, which you can use within the detail styles for dimensioning. When detailing, the program creates a copy of the style, and from your settings determines the required text and length scaling. This style is assigned a new name indicating the length scaling and is used in the detail block. Although the program does set the dimension text into the dimension permanently, e.g. to evaluate contractions, you do want to receive an AutoCAD associate dimensioning after the detailing has been concluded; thus the copy. This also keeps your original style intact and you do not need to create separate styles for each individual scale.

DetailCenter

466

If you want to work with the first method using a scale of 1:10, you will obtain a style with a text scaling=10 and with a length scaling=1. The name could be, e.g., PS_STD_1_10. Process another detail with different settings of the AutoCAD dimensioning style and you will obtain the same name for the style. No problems occurred up to now. Now insert both details into a drawing and the first one will „win out“ because the name is identical. However, this is typical for AutoCAD and ProSteel has no intention of changing that. If you have problems with the dimensioning styles, you can be assured that this is due to not being consequent in this case. This is the reason you should make sure that your prototype file, into which you want to import the details, does not contain any dimensioning styles (if possible), and that the basic styles with the same name are also identical in different models if you want to mix together the details of different models. Do not change the size by only changing the scale (e.g., when manually dimensioning), but rather define a new style with a new name. This is the way it should be when using AutoCAD „pure“ because there is a good reason for it: If you rescale the parts manually, you are simply exchanging the dimensioning style and all is well again.

DetailCenter

467

C.1.5 General Information - Detail Types

At detailing, the DetailCenter differentiates between different detail types, such as single parts or component part groups. In most cases, these definitions come from 3D-modelling so that you don’t have to take into account anything else.

Single Parts These are all parts that correspond to a real 3D-component part in the model and normally are the smallest unit of detailing. The DetailCenter itself, however, cannot differentiate between production parts and parts of additional purchase or on stock. A single part drawing can be generated of every ProSteel volume solid. In this drawing, the part edges, angles of intersection and drill holes are dimensioned. Normally the coordinate system of the component part defines the alignment of standard views, such as front view, plan view, etc. Weld shapes are an exception. They consist of several single components, but in most cases they are considered and treated as one component part.

Component Part Groups This is a logical arrangement of single parts that you have already created in the 3D-model by using the command ‘Groups’ (PS_GROUP). A drawing of the component part group is created so that the add-on dimensions of the single parts and/or groups to each other are dimensioned. It is also possible to insert subordinate structures and single part dimensions of component parts. As the structure of component part groups has been considerably extended since version 18.0, it will be described in detail in a separate chapter.

Views This is a three-dimensional arrangement of component parts in the model as they can be seen from a defined view direction and with a previously defined view depth, which is not to be confused with the component part views. An overview drawing is created in which the position of the component parts to each other and to existing reference axes (constructional axes) is dimensioned. Views are derived from the existing model views which were either created automatically by the workframe (PS_WORKFRAME), or which were added by you later.

DetailCenter

468

Isometric Views These views show the model in a three-dimensional depiction and are often desired without the hidden edges. View direction is determined by the five global 3D-model views of the configuration. It is possible as well to add isometric views to individual details (e.g. groups). In this case, these are depicted as component part view together with the other partial views.

Anchorage Plan This view refers to the plan view plane and shows the plan view including dimensions together with the depiction of the base plates and supports. As special feature, it is possible to use different scales for plan view and base plate details. The dimensioning of the holes can be referred to the plan view grid.

DetailCenter

469

Manual Details In principle, these are also views of the model, but you can freely determine the involved component parts and the view direction during detailing. Manual details allow you to generate unusual views or special detail sections. As the name implies, you have to attach the dimensioning yourself and you don’t have any possibility to have the view automatically checked with regard to modifications. Manual details don’t appear in the component part list nor do they have their own detailing style. Scale and display of the component parts are, however controlled by a temporarily assigned detailing style during generation. It is true that after generation manual details can be inserted into the drawing in the same way like standard views.

Multi-Shapes These are single parts consisting of several components that are normally treated and dimensioned like a single coherent component part (e.g. weld shapes). Depending on the situation it may be that these component parts are not ordered but individually produced. Therefore, in the DetailCenter you can consider a multi-shape as components. That means that it appears as an individual subpart in a component part group, but on the other hand you can still create single part drawings of the components. Therefore, it is necessary to activate the option ‘Treat Parts as Single Parts’ in the 3D-component parts properties for the parts in question.

DetailCenter

470

Gusset Details These are views on the model showing the involved component parts of a connection (2) or of a group of connections (1) as detailed section.

In most cases, the connecting elements such as plates, bolts, etc. can be completely seen whereas the connected shapes are only partially displayed. The connections are recognized via the existing logical links if at least one of these links is named with an identification code. A gusset detail appears as separate ‘component part’ in the component part list of the DetailCenter and a detailing style can be assigned to it. Afterwards, you treat it in a similar way like a component part group.

Create Named Connections For this purpose, activate the ‘Extended Inputs’ for logical links in the global settings of ProSteel, if not yet effected. In the property dialog of the connection, you can now enter a clear identification code and optionally a designation.

DetailCenter

471

Assignment to Common Gussets If there are several connections in one three-dimensionally coherent area, a common gusset detail can be created out of these connections. Only one of the involved connections has to (and should) have an identification code. The main shape of this connection now defines the alignment of the gusset detail. Within a search area (defined by you in the global settings of the DetailCenter) all other connections are now assigned to this gusset. Then, they won’t create an own main entry any more – even if they themselves have a code. Here, you see a section of the connection data of an endplate. If you don’t have any explicit links, perhaps because you modelled everything manually, the necessary relations can be generated via manual links (PS_MANUAL_LINK).

DetailCenter

472

C.1.6 General Information – Group Structure

ProSteel manages a 4-level group structure which clearly extends the possibilities of logical or constructive structuring. This structure is completely depicted in the DetailCenter and can be detailed with its own detail styles to workshop plans on each level separately. Traditional steel construction mainly uses single parts and standard component part groups. This is the reason why you often only talk about this in the chapters about detailing. However, what is valid for standard component part groups, is mostly also valid for the extended group structures. A – Single Parts These are the real component parts from which the next higher levels can be built. Depending on the selected grouping, these individual single parts then turn into main parts or add on parts or assembling parts. B – Subordinate Groups (Subgroups) Subgroups functionally correspond to the standard component part groups described below. However, they can be applied logically as independent subordinate structures in the higher structures. You can e.g. declare assemblies on stock as subgroups from which a separate workshop drawing won’t be required any more. C – Groups Each standard component part group, sometimes called main group, too, consists of a so-called main part and several subparts (add-on parts) – the main part defines the alignment of the different views on this component part group. In addition, each group can have subgroups. Conventionally, the component part group is a group of component parts which are inseparably connected to each other, e.g. by welding. D – Assemblies This is the highest structure because it can be built from any single parts, subgroups and component part groups (which can contain subgroups themselves). An individual object determines the alignment of the different views on the assembly so that they can be independent of any component parts involved. Assemblies often are any already mounted part constructions.

DetailCenter

473

Use of Group Structure In principle, there are nearly no limits for you how to group the component parts because the examples for application only represent few of the great number of possibilities. It is up to you whether you want to apply grouping according to construction for the order and the parts list or whether you only carry out a logical grouping for later 2D-drawings. Within the DetailCenter, you find a hierarchic tree structure of grouping and you can filter and sort the display according to the different planes. Each structure and subordinate structure can be detailed as separate detail and inserted in the 2D-drawing. The following example shows the practical use of group structure at detailing: A column of a storage rack builds an assembly (1) of two component part groups (1a) which are bolted with each other. The lower of the two groups contains two welded base points which here however are assigned to the group as subgroups (1b).

The detail drawing of the assembly (2) is showing the column of the storage rack standing and only with the main dimensions as a kind of total overview of the construction.

DetailCenter

474

The detaill of the component part group (3) now displays the position of the add-on parts in the component part group. The two base points are not dimensioned in a more detailed way, but they appear only as complete part.

The base points can be inserted into the drawing as separate detail of the subgroup (4) with detailed mounting dimensions. In case of stock items this could of course be omitted.

When the base point is manufactured together with the remaining group, you require perhaps single parts details (5) of the base plates which again can have a completely different detailing style.

DetailCenter

475

DetailCenter

476

Advantages of Assemblies The use of assemblies may also be useful in situations where normally you would use only groups. As groups always determine the alignment of the views as well as the direction of dimensioning according to their main part, you often get a very unfavourable combination for certain oblique constructions.

In contrast, a superior assembly permits free selection of alignment and thus also of dimensioning. In addition, you can of course also dimension the group in main part direction in this drawing.

For more detailed information on dimensioning of complex group structures, please refer to the chapter “Detailing Style” of this manual.

DetailCenter

477

C.1.7 Intelligent 2D-Details

If you have inserted the results of the detailing into a drawing and want to further process this drawing manually, you have to observe a few things described in the following section.

Intelligent Details The result of the detailing process is a detail, as you would draw it with standard AutoCAD. You can see centrelines, visible and hidden edges, holes, etc. and the part is still not a true „flat line graphic“. Intelligent details are still displayed as three-dimensional details when viewing the page containing individual parts or construction groups at a slant. However, when you print the part it appears completely two-dimensional The advantage is that you can subsequently add cuts or dimensions while taking any possible shape shortening into account. If you want to change the geometry subsequently, that is in the detailed part, you have to import the changes with the ProSteel functions if you still require the intelligent features. However, if you want to dissolve the detail in its entirety, you have to „explode“ the component like a block. This gives you a group, which can be ungrouped to reach the lines. Of course, the consequence is that all of the intelligence is lost. Thus, omit this if at all possible. Overviews and manual details are an exception – those are already non-intelligent line depictions.

Shape Shortening During the detailing you can select whether you want to shorten any parts that are especially long. Contracted sections are then attached to those sections of a component that do not show any manipulations in a longer stretch and are actually of no interest. This gives you the opportunity to display the sections that are important for the detailing in an optimal size (because you can select larger scales) or show more components on a given page. The picture below clearly illustrates the difference. Both shapes are detailed with the same scale and scaled to the same length.

DetailCenter

478

The problem of shortening is the subsequent dimensioning with AutoCAD. However, if you work with the ProSteel dimensioning, you can consider any shortening at a later time because your work is object-related. This requires that the components are not dissolved down to the lines after detailing because then this property is lost!

Pick Helpers The intelligent components of groups have the disadvantage that the individual parts of a detailed construction group are inaccessible if e.g. you want to move them subsequently. It would also not help to activate or deactivate the group using the AutoCAD-groups. This is why ProSteel features the "Pick Helpers”, which you might view as a grip variation. If you do not have any part selected in the drawing and you access the context menu using the right mouse button, you will see the option ProSteel SETTINGS and the entry Pick Helpers. Use this entry to toggle the pick helpers on and off. Small little triangles now appear on the components, which you can now use to select and e.g. move the parts of a group. When working with the pick helpers, don't forget the following special feature: If a building component of a construction group is moved, a new drawing of the group is only created when you keep the ALT-key pressed during the movement. Otherwise, the drawing has to be regenerated to obtain the modified display.

DetailCenter

479

C.1.8 Display of Construction Component Lists

Construction component lists are most substantial within the three work levels. In these lists, the construction components or detail blocks are displayed in a tree structure that can be used for working in the selected work level. The user can freely configure Sorting and filters of the parts. Thus there can be different displays for different tasks.

Display Sorting (Structure) Select the dialog for the display structure via the STRUCTURE button to modify

the display sorting. After modification of preset values and closing of the dialog box, the display will be restructured. However, it is also possible to select your individually created template for the different work levels in the global settings of DetailCenter.

DetailCenter

480

Group Display Type

Display Type Here you select the fundamental type of display. ProSteel Standard – the component parts are displayed in the usual group/single part structure. In addition, loose single parts and model views will be displayed as well. User defined – you determine the hierarchy of the display individually, i.e. you specify in which order the parts have to be sorted according to which properties.

Available Display Fields Select the desired property field of a part, which has to be added to the tree structure.

Selected Data Fields The currently selected property fields of the structure. The order corresponds to the hierarchy level in the tree display (sorting order). The property field corresponds to the type of this property. It depends on the data of the parts to be represented which entries will actually be displayed. If you have e.g. selected the length as property, an entry will be created on this hierarchy level for each existing shape length and all components having the same length will be subordinate to this property.

Group Display Filter

Standard Filter Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified filter condition. In the selection list, some pre-defined filter conditions are offered for selection, which however cannot be modified by you.

User-defined Filter Only those parts will be displayed that meet the specified filter condition. The filter condition here is completely user-defined. The selected properties for the structure and those for the filter don’t have to be identical. It is for example possible to display a sorting only according to the length but filter out the component type rib completely with it.

User-defined Additional Filter An additional second filter; this filter is logically linked with the user-defined filter by AND, thus, a component part has to meet both conditions (and if need be the conditions of the standard filter).

DetailCenter

481

Selection List Select one of the filter templates that you specified in the corresponding list. Select Current Settings when you haven’t created any template and you want to use the current settings of the filter dialog instead.

EDIT By clicking on this button you can edit the display filter or store/select a filter template.

Group Options

Sort Order Here, you select the order of the entries. Ascending – The entries are displayed in an ascending numerical or alphabetical order (1,2,3,4...). Descending – The entries are displayed in a descending numerical or alphabetical order (...4,3,2,1). No Sorting – The entries are not sorted.

Show Entries 1x Each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure. The position numbers serve as criterion of comparison, separated in groups and single parts. If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is only displayed in the first group.

> New Per Group Each component part is displayed only once in the whole tree structure, but each single part of a group will be registered anew per group. If a part having the same position (e.g. a rib) is situated in two different group positions, this is displayed exactly once in each group.

DetailCenter

482

Group Display Here, you select the way group parts will be displayed. As Group Structure – The building components, substructures and bolts of a group are subordinate to the group entry. This allows an easy selection of any part of a group. Only Single Parts – Only the actual parts of a group are displayed, but not the group entries themselves. Group and Single Parts – The groups (as an entry without subordinate parts) and the actual parts of this group are displayed of equal value side by side. The advantage of this separation is that in case of a user-defined sorting you can arrange the group and the component parts separately. Otherwise, it wouldn’t be possible to register the single parts in the case the group has not been registered. Nor would it be possible to separate e.g. in groups, substructures and building components of equal value side by side.

With Pre-sort The entries are preliminarily sorted according to views, groups, if need be, main parts /building components, substructures and loose single parts (depending on the selected group display), if you have selected ProSteel standard sorting.

No empty Folder The entry of preliminary sorting is not displayed if it doesn’t contain any further entry.

Display Filter The display filter allows a very detailed filtering of component parts according to their properties. You can describe any logically nested filter condition on the basis of the existing properties (there are no limits with regard to the complexity of the query). A standard filter and two filters of equal value (user-defined filter and additional filter) are available which are linked with each other by the logical AND. You may store these filter conditions as templates which can be easily selected. This allows you to prepare frequent filter conditions that are perfectly adapted to your application. Although each filter is logically nested by any condition such as 'All shapes longer than 5000, but no IPE270 or IPE240', it sometimes is easier to work with the additional filter, too. If e.g. no sheet metal plates are required for a task, you can exclude them permanently already via the additional filter. The user-defined filter then serves for your daily work and you can modify this filter without having to add the condition 'No sheet metal plates' each time.

DetailCenter

483

Group Comparative Term

List Here, you see all property fields of the parts that may be used for the filter criteria. Each field can be used as often as you like.

Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will appear in the display on the right.

Display Fields Here, you specify a single comparative condition consisting of field name, comparative operator and parts’ data. Several comparative conditions may be combined with logical operators to build the complete filter condition.

> Left Side The current property field that can be modified by clicking on it in the list.

> Center Here, you select the comparative operator that links the property field and the parts’ data (content of the field) to build a comparative condition.

> Right Side Possible parts’ data (contents of the field) of the selected property field in a dropdown-list. Thus, impossible comparative conditions are avoided. It is possible as well to use the standard wildcards * and ? for variable signs in text fields.

DetailCenter

484

When all of the three components of a comparative condition have been preset, you can add them to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions and on the selected logical link, the appropriate brackets will be set.

Group Filter Condition

Display Field The complete filter condition as logical link consisting of several comparative conditions. When you have already inserted a comparative condition, the active logical operator of the next comparative condition will be displayed, too.

Dialog Commands

OPERATOR AND

By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator AND as logical link for the next comparative condition.

OPERATOR OR

By clicking on this button, you select the logical operator OR as logical link for the next comparative condition.

BRACKETS

Clicking on this button forces the program to manually add brackets to the filter conditions existing up to that moment. Brackets are always necessary if you want to link the complete result of a

(partial) condition with another one, because the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).

INSERT

By clicking on this button you add the current comparative condition to the complete filter condition.

DetailCenter

485

DELETE

By clicking on this button you delete the comparative condition that was added last.

DELETE ALL

By clicking on this button you delete the complete filter condition.

Use Filter Templates As you already know from nearly all ProSteel functions, you can store the filter conditions as templates, too. This filter can be applied in the settings of the display via the name of this template. Don’t forget that this is only a hint. If you should modify the template of the filter, the template of the display, where this filter was used will produce another result as well.

DetailCenter

486

C.1.9 Component Overview

Since the component overview constitutes the starting page of the DetailCenter, the functions described here also apply to the other work levels. These are especially the individual sorting of list display and the use of filters. When selecting the DetailCenter command, this tab will always be active first, and the current drawing is „scanned“ by the DetailCenter. All model parts are searched according to predefined criteria and then displayed. This might take some time when large models are involved. All detail styles are also searched and displayed. A great number of the described functions may be selected via the context menu of the right mouse button. Look there whether the corresponding entry is available if there should be no hint in this documentation. If you need only a section of a model, use the visibility classes to hide the unneeded parts. Any parts hidden with the visibility class command are not recognized by the DetailCenter. Please note however that these parts are then no longer recognized by any of the details. This is the function bar of the component overview. Buttons no. 1-3 are available in each work level with the same function.

DetailCenter

487

Dialog Commands RECURSION (1)

By clicking on this button, recursive processing is alternatively switched on or off. If it is switched on, any processing applied to a parent entry in the

component parts list (e.g. assign style) is also applied to all subordinate entries. Otherwise, only the selected entry is processed or all entries on the same level, if this option is activated in the “model“.

STRUCTURE (2)

Click on this button to open the dialog for display sorting of component parts list. Here, you can select the standard display or an individual structure and set user-defined filters.

SETTINGS (3)

Click on this button to open the dialog for the work tools where you can specify additional settings only for this work level. Depending on the work level, the global settings are valid, too, which can

be defined separately.

UPDATE (4)

Click on this button to search the selected drawing once more. This is required if you activated a different drawing in the MDI environment or if changes were made to the current drawing (e.g. new position).

EXPRESS (5)

Click on this button to start the DetailCenter Express, to carry out a complete detailing according to a specified pattern.

DetailCenter

488

PREPARE (6)

Click on this special action button to import all parts selected in the parts list into the view list and determine the views pre-selected in the detail style. Component views can be generated only for parts linked with a detail style.

WORK LEVELS (7)

Switch on a different work level by clicking on the corresponding tab. Any open dialog is updated accordingly. Here, you can switch over to the page for the global settings of the DetailCenter where you can specify the settings, which are valid for the whole DetailCenter or for several work levels.

TITLE BAR (8)

If you double-click on this area, the dialog switches from docked to free moving. Alternatively, you can also grab the dialog and “pull it out” while keeping the left mouse button depressed.

SEPARATOR (9)

Use this separator to enlarge the docked dialog. The drawing next to it will decrease in size accordingly. In addition, there is a scrolling bar between the two display lists (if two lists are available), which you can use for modifying the scale of the two lists.

CLOSE (10)

Click on this button to close the DetailCenter.

REVISIONCENTER (11)

Clicking on this button launches the RevisionCenter. From here you can manage all drawings and modifications generated, plus additional documents, from the model.

The RevisionCenter can also be run without the DetailCenter as an independent module.

DetailCenter

489

Detail Style List This list displays all available detail styles. The selection consists of the styles saved in the drawing as well as the style files saved on the hard drive.

You can classify the detail styles available in as many groups as necessary using the ‘detail style themes’ and thus organise them thematically. A symbol also makes it easier to find the appropriate style for a given construction type..

Creating detail styles Select the entry Create detail style in the Context menu. The Detail Style Assistant will then take you through the step-by-step process of creating a new detail style for the drawing. This process combines standard templates under the construction kit principle and can be processed further after completion. For further information see the chapter on ‘The Detail Style Assistant’. View and Modify Detail Styles Double-click on the desired list entry to open the dialog for the detail styles where you can modify the entries. Alternatively, you can also use the context menu option Edit Detail Style. Modifications apply only to the current session. If you want to save your changes permanently, you have to save the model or export the detail style as an independent file to the hard drive. Clicking on another list entry while the detail style dialog is open updates the display of the detail style dialog.

DetailCenter

490

Load Detail Styles At first loading of the DetailCenter, only those detail styles are displayed in the list, which were saved in the drawing. You can, however, load additional style files (e.g. the defaults of certain customers), when you start detailing. If you then save the drawing, these additional styles will be permanently available in the drawing and will be displayed at the next loading. To load an additional style select the context menu option Load Detail Style. Now, you can select a style file by the file selection dialog. If you directly want to load all existing style files from the standard folder, then you select the entry Load all Detail Styles instead. Before the styles are loaded into the drawing, you can select whether the styles are to retain their original (saved) theme, or whether they are to be assigned to the currently selected theme. This additional loading of styles is reasonable if you require a great number of different styles in your company all in all, but only a part of them has to be used per order. If you load a detail style existing in the model, the existing style will be overwritten. Kindly also take care of the hints concerning the modified file format at the end of this chapter. Save and Copy Detail Styles Select the detail style you want to save from the list. Then select the context menu option Save Detail Style. Now, the style is exported as a file with its name to the hard disk. If you want to save all styles of the drawing, you select the entry Save All Detail Styles instead. Now, each style is saved in its own file. If you want to copy a detail style, select the entry Copy Detail Style. Then, a dialog appears where you can indicate the new name of the style. The new detail style is now displayed in the list and can be processed further. Kindly also take care of the hints concerning the modified file format at the end of this chapter. Delete Detail Styles Select the detail style you want to delete from the list. Then use the context menu option Remove Detail Style. The detail style is now deleted from the list and the drawing. The styles exported to the hard drive are not affected. Please note that this deleted detail style is then no longer available for later sessions unless you have exported it to the hard drive before.

DetailCenter

491

Creating and assigning a detail style theme Detail styles can be grouped together as required using detail style themes, although a style can still be assigned to only one theme at a time. This grouping makes it easier to organise styles in the model, but does not affect the use of the style. To create a new theme, select the Create theme entry from the Context menu. A dialogue box opens in which you can enter the name of the theme. The entry then appears in the list. When you select a detail style using Drag&Drop to a theme entry, that style is assigned to the relevant theme. When you save the style, the theme is also saved, and is automatically generated when the style is loaded in another drawing, if it is not already available. Set and Remove Default Detail Styles Some detailing functions such as manual detailing require a default detail style. Just select the desired style, followed by the entry Set as Default Detail Style in the context menu. The current default detail style is identified in bold type. To modify the default detail style, just select another style and set this one as default detail style. To completely remove it, select the current default detail style, followed by the entry Remove Default Detail Style. File Format of Style File As the volume of a detail style considerably increased compared with earlier versions, from version 17.2 on the file will only be saved as binary file with the file ending *.stx. All commands for loading a detail style wait for the style files in this format. Hint: The former text files (*.sty) will not be supported any more from version 18.0 on and, if need be, have to be converted together with the previous version.

DetailCenter

492

Component Parts List This list is the primary working list of the DetailCenter because it displays all parts of a model for current status verification. Display and sorting of the list depends on the display settings. Status Indicator Depending on the component status, the entries feature small pictures. Only entries with such pictures consist of parts that can be detailed. All other entries are only parent sorting entries. Symbol Colours

Gray Parts without any special status. Probably, these parts have not yet been processed with the help of the DetailCenter.

Blue A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the detail block so that this block can be inserted.

Yellow A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the detail block so that this block has to be detailed anew before it can be inserted.

Green A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has not been modified compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail is currently valid in the 2D drawing.

Red A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing. The original part in the model has however been modified compared with the inserted detail block so that this detail has to be updated in the 2D drawing. Additional Checkmarks

Checkmark A detail style has been assigned to the component part.

Asterisk (*) the part in question is the main part of the associated group.

DetailCenter

493

Information about the Component Parts The meaning of the different entries can be easily differentiated by means of the symbols, because single parts, sheet metal plates, groups, views, etc. have their own typical symbol.

In addition to this, you can open a dockable information window via the entry Display Information in the context menu. This window informs you in detail about all properties of the part selected at that moment. This call can be found in the other work levels too. The content of this window is always automatically adapted to your current selection.

Multiple Selection and Drag&Drop Use the SHIFT and CTRL keys to select multiple entries. This is a Windows-specific function, which will not be explained here. Many operations can also be carried out using drag&drop. For example, by dragging a component list entry on a detail style, you can link the two. Selection of ProSteel Properties Via the DetailCenter, the properties of component parts can be directly modified in the model. Select the entry PS3D Properties in the context menu after having selected the desired list entries. For more detailed information about parts properties, please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual. In principle, selection is as if you select the part(s) in the model and then load the properties. In combination with the sorting possibilities of the component parts list, however, it is possible here to modify e.g. only the material of head plates. If you are working with a big model, using the traditional way would be much more complicated. Don’t forget to update the DetailCenter after a modification was made because the program doesn’t carry out an automatic update deliberately.

DetailCenter

494

Reference to the Model (Search) The component parts list has a direct reference to the model drawing in both directions, which allows an easy and fast orientation. On one hand, the components of the entries selected in the list can be displayed in the model. This allows you to see directly which parts belong to a group, to a view, etc. To do this, select the option Display Parts Selection in the Model in the work tools. Now, select an entry in the component parts list and the assigned parts are colourfully checked in the model. Choose the entry 'Model’ to remove the marking. On the other hand, a part selected in the model can be checked in the component parts list (and selected). To do this, pick the part in the model and select the menu point Search/Selection Single Part via the context menu of the right mouse button. Now, the list scrolls to the position with the assigned entry, the entry is checked and selected. The parent entries such as group list nodes etc. are "opened“. Sorting

Sorting of the component parts list always depends on the work tools settings. The numerical sorting of position within the sorting according to groups, part types, etc. is always carried out in three steps: At first, sorting is effected according to the main position number. This number again is sorted according to an existing position index. If additional prefixes are available, theses are sorted in the last step. Position numbers, which only consist of letters, are displayed at the beginning in an alphabetical order. If the filter 'Display Each Part only 1x’ is checked, only those positions are assumed to be identical which only differ in their part prefix unless the button 'Don’t Use Position Number Prefix' has been activated. Standard Pos AA with Filter: Pos AA Sorting: Pos BC Pos BC Pos 1-1 Pos 1-1 Pos 1-2 Pos 1-2 Pos TR 1-2 (lapses) Pos 2-2 Pos 2-2 Pos ST2-3 Pos ST2-3 Pos TR2-3 (lapses) Pos 2-4 Pos 2-4

DetailCenter

495

Assigning Detail Styles Partial views and thus details can be created from every component part with a style. These different sortings help you to link the correct parts with the necessary style in a rapid way. You can only detail parts having a detail style. Which details you get can already be determined here. Associate a Style In the list, select the parts and then use drag&drop to pull them onto the detail style – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select the option Link with Detail Style. If you want to pick the parts directly from the model, you have to select a detail style first. Then, you call the entry Pick Parts to be Linked in the Model in the context menu, followed by picking the parts in the model (or you select them by a window). However, you can assign only single parts with this method. Recursive Association If a single part has a detail style, this part is detailed with this style in the form of a single part detail. If, however, a construction group has a detail style, this style becomes the detail style for the entire construction group detailing. If you want to generate only group details, the associated single parts do not really require their own detail style because the group style also applies to the parts within that group.

Use the recursive or non-recursive association to assign styles to the parts you want to detail. If you selected the recursive association (the 'Recursive Processing’ button is pressed) and you assign a style to a group, this style also applies to the single parts of that group. If in this case you pull the entire model onto the detail style via drag&drop, all groups and all single parts are assigned the same style.

DetailCenter

496

If you assign style "A" to the model and 'Recursive' is activated, every entry is linked with this style. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only the entries Outline, Complete Plan View, BG 100 and BG 101 are linked with this style, because they are located hierarchically immediately underneath the model. Since the model itself is only a sorting entry, it passes the association along to its subordinate entries. If you assign style "B" to the BG 101 and 'Recursive' is activated, every single part of this group is linked with this style as well. If 'Recursive' is deactivated, only this construction group is assigned style "B". Separate Detail Styles Select the parts in the list and then use drag&drop to pull them towards the top and away from the DetailCenter – and you are finished! You can also select the parts and use the context menu to select the option Separate from Detail Style. Remember that parts without a detail style cannot be processed unless the parts belong to a group and you want to detail only the group views. Write-Protection Use the Set Write-Protection command in the context menu to write-protect certain entries. The entries are highlighted and cannot be overwritten with a new style or separated from a style. You have to remove the write-protection before change or delete the style of such an entry. The combination of recursive processing and write-protection facilitates assigning different styles to groups and single parts: Deactivate recursive and active write-protection and drag the "model“ entry on the group style. Only the groups are assigned a style (due to the recursive setting) and are then saved. Activate recursive and drag the "model“ entry on the single part style. The style association is passed on to all parts but the groups themselves are write-protected. Hide Parts You can temporarily remove undesired parts from the component parts list to get a better survey. To do this, select the corresponding parts and then activate the menu point Hide Entry in the context menu.

DetailCenter

497

Visibility only refers to the component parts list. Don’t mix up this function with the visibility classes in the 3D-model, which really hide the parts visually and thus switch to permanently invisible parts. When the DetailCenter is started anew or when you use the command UPDATE, all hidden entries will be visible again.

Import for Detailing All parts with a detail style can be imported for detailing, which means that the corresponding views are created. The import for detailing concludes your work in this work level and you can switch to the next level. Create Partial Views To import parts into the view list just drag the desired parts on the action button PREPARE using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse. If you have checked the ‚Import Directly to Views’ option in the settings, you do not need to do anything else because the style association also transfers the parts. If you separate parts from their style, they are also removed from the view list. When the part already exists in the view list, the entries will be corrected correspondingly. When the corresponding group already exists in the view list, the single part will be assigned to this group. Process and Delete Partial Views It is always possible to add or remove partial views by modifying the detail style correspondingly and importing the part anew. However, if you want to add a partial view only for a certain component part and the detail style has to remain unchanged, you can add or remove partial views in the second work level 'Views’ independent of the style settings. The manual details where the 2D-details are generated largely independent of the part hierarchies and detailing automatisms are also created in this work level.

DetailCenter

498

Special Settings You have access to the hereafter described settings via the button SETTINGS.

Group Behaviour during Style Association

Protect The entry is protected at once after association of a detail style and is shown in bold. It cannot be modified unless the protection is removed.

Hide The entry is hidden from the list after association of a detail style. Only the parts without association of a detail style are shown. The DetailCenter has to be started anew or updated to make the entry visible again. Remember that in case of hiding a group its single parts will be hidden too – even if they do not have any style yet.

Take over The entry is immediately imported to the next work level (views) after association of a detail style. It is available for detailing.

DetailCenter

499

Group Behaviour during Update

Restore Manual Changes During automatic update of 2D-drawings, the program tries to restore modifications which were made later in the details. Otherwise, the detail is displayed as completely new detailed according to the detail style.

> Deleted Dimensions Dimensions or position flags deleted by the user are deleted again.

You will find a more detailed description of automatic 2D-Update in a separate chapter of this documentation.

DetailCenter

500

C.1.10 Views Overview

If you have imported all of the parts for detailing, the generated views are displayed in this work level, the views list. Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.

Dialog-Commands

ADDITIONAL VIEW

Click on this button to add further views to the selected component part or to create manual details. Then, another dialog opens (see also: Additional Views).

After an entry has been checked in the views list, the corresponding parts for the manual detail are automatically selected. On the other hand, when you select the first entry of the list, you can select any part by clicking on it in the model.

DETAILING

Click on this special action button to detail all of the parts selected in the views list, including the mentioned partial views, and to store them on the hard drive as detail blocks. The created detail blocks then can be inserted in your 2D-drawings.

DetailCenter

501

Views List Here, you will see all views of the imported parts in the form of entries, which can be checked for their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the display templates. Status Display The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for further details. If the view has already been detailed it is marked with a checkmark. Preview Before detailing you can display a preview of the detail or of a single view. Detailing will take place as it is displayed there. If you choose only one view you will see exactly that view in the preview. However, if you select the entire component or group, you will see all existing views of the part in an order determined by the program. To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select Preview via the context menu. After some computing time displayed by the status indicator, a drawing window opens containing the possible detailing as a preview. If the detail style dialog and the preview are open, you can now change the different detail style settings and check the effects of the modifications. If the detail style is not yet open, you can open the dialog via the context menu Edit with Detail Style. The correct detail style belonging to this view is then already selected. Add and Remove New Views Should you notice that the views displayed are too few or show an unfavourable line of vision on the part, you can add or remove any view. Just drag the view to be removed towards the top and away from the DetailCenter using drag&drop. If you select an entire component, the entire component will be removed; if you select the “Detail Views” entry, all generated views are removed. To add a view to a component just select the corresponding part and call the entry Additional Views via the context menu (see also: ‘Additional Views’).

DetailCenter

502

Detailing To start the detailing just drag the desired parts onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and the parts are transferred. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the entry Create 2D via the context menu. During detailing, the information line of views overview informs you about the estimated remaining time required for detailing the selected parts. This estimated time is based on the average value of the parts detailed in the current process and is an approximate value. .A detail block with the date and time of the detailing is created and saved on your hard drive every time the detailing process is activated. Every variation of the same type is thus still accessible later during the insertion process. You must save the model after the detailing has finished, since the modification management requires information that has to be written to the drawing. If you do not save the model, this information is lost.


Group Behaviour during Detailing

Hide Part The part is hidden in the model after detailing. You can e.g. at a detailing via direct part selection see directly from the model which parts still have to be detailed.

DetailCenter

503

Definition of Main View Within ProSteel, there are different variants to specify the main view (front view) of a shape for detailing. Experience showed us that in most of the cases it isn’t enough to assume a firm guideline here because this specification is individually made by the executive design engineer and mostly also depends on the constructive environment. As it is a matter of component parts in the space, you cannot clearly define top/bottom or left/right. Front View based on the Part Coordinate System (A) Since each component part has its own coordinate system, a clear and constant main view can be specified with the help of this coordinate system. In case of standard shapes, the Y-axis of this coordinate system is always aligned parallel towards the web so that it can serve as reference axis for the plan view. The Z-axis normally runs in longitudinal direction of the shape. The direction of the X-axis determines the front view to guarantee that the plan view is always from the top to the web and that in case of non-symmetrical shapes (e.g. U- and L-shapes) in front view you can always look inside the shape. This is defined in this way for all shapes without any exception in favour of a uniform guideline from the 3D model. In case of symmetrical shapes, however, you can influence the later alignment by selecting an appropriate insertion direction.

The figure on the left shows the part coordinate system of an L-shape (X, Y, Z) with the starting point S and the endpoint E of insertion direction. For detailing the front view, the coordinate system now is rotated in the way as shown by the new axes (X', Y’, Z’ and S' resp. E').

Front View based on the Global Front View (B) To avoid exchanging up and down you can determine two global front views. The view in the direction of the ”nearest” part coordinate axis is assumed as front view of the corresponding shape. To avoid the view on a cross-section you can define an alternative front view, which mostly has been rotated by 90°.

DetailCenter

504

You obtain the result that the position is always independent of the insertion direction of the part (base plates are always „at the bottom“), but the front view once can show the web and once the flange – depending on the rotation of the shape in the view. Tough, parts that are situated further back in construction are displayed as seen from inside. Select the entry Set Global Reference View in the context menu of the component parts list to specify the global front views. Then, you have to click into the model to get the cross hairs for selection. After that, you select the desired view direction of the front view and then the alternative view direction. When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the views are reset to the default values (0,-1,0) and (1,0,0). The current values are displayed in the information window. Front View based on the Outside of the Model (C) This variant is similar to the global front view. The difference is that instead of specified reference views you always choose the part coordinate axis, which show most clearly from the center of construction to the outside. This means that the front view is always what you would see from the outside if you looked towards the center of the whole construction. This method largely corresponds to human imagination, but depending on the rotation of the shape, once the web and once the flange can be displayed. The following example shows the effects of the selected main view on the 2D-display of a shape:

DetailCenter

505

Positions 1-4 have been inserted at a rectangular, the Y-axis of the part is showing to the top and the Z-axis is showing in shape direction. The views A and B are the specified global front views. Depending on selection, you will get the front view displayed on the right. Specify Individual Front View (D) The last variant is that you can specify for each individual part separately which part coordinate axis has to serve as front view. In general, you can decide to use variant (B) or (C) and align unfavourable parts individually and independently. Select the entry Set Individual Reference View in the context menu of the component part list to specify an individual front view. Then, you have to select the desired part to get the cross-hairs for selection. After that, you choose the desired view direction of the front view. When you press the ESC-key instead of selection the individual front view of the part is deleted. The current value is displayed in the information window. Select the entry Reset All Reference Views in the context menu of the component parts list to delete the specifications for all component parts simultaneously.

DetailCenter

506

Other Views You have the option to add additional views to a part or to create manual details from entire model areas. Since the manual details are actually free views, they too are controlled via this dialog. You have access to this function via the button ÄDDITIONAL VIEW or via the entry Additional Views in the context menu. The following dialog window is also a non-modal dialog which means that you can change your part selection in the views list of the DetailCenter at any time.

Group Detail Style

Selection List The detail style that has to be used for a manual detail. When you select the option 'From 3D-Component Part', the style assigned in the component part list will be used. If the component part doesn’t have a detail style, or if it is a view with freely selectable parts from the model, the default style will be used instead. It this style has not been defined, a manual detail cannot be created. By clicking on the small button on the right side of this field, you can edit the selected detail style. Please note that only those detail styles are displayed which have been classified for use in manual details.

DetailCenter

507

Group Given Views

Input Field Here, you can change the names for free views.

List The available views, which can be added to the part, are displayed here. Select the desired view by clicking on it in the list. Already existing views are highlighted and cannot be selected.

Group Selection

Input Field Here, you see the currently selected detail style, which is used for a manual detail.

PICK VIEW Click on this button to define the view level for free views by picking in the model.

ADD Click on this button to add the selected view to the selected part.

MANUAL DETAIL By clicking on this button, you can create a manual detail of the selected part or of any part selection from the model.

Pick on Plane The points picked during definition of a view plane are projected onto the current view plane.

Add View If you want to add one of the six basic views, just select the corresponding view from the list and click on the ADD button. To add a free view, just select one of the free views 'View A to View F' from the list. The input field above can be used to change the name to get a more suitable one. Then, click on the PICK VIEW button to specify the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) to pick any view or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen. Finally, click on the ADD button. The added views are treated during detailing just like directly created views and automatically further processed.

DetailCenter

508

Manual Detail from the Model Select the first entry 'Detail Views’ in the views list of the DetailCenter to create a manual detail with any part selection from the model. Now, click on the MANUAL DETAIL button and enter a name for the detail in the then opening input field. Then, pick any view by specifying the UCS (origin, X- and Y-axis) or use the ESC key to import the current view on screen. After that, you are prompted to select the parts, which are to be processed for this manual detail. A window similar to the preview opens, which displays the parts as 3D objects for now. You can now dimension manually, attach position flags or any 2D-lines and texts. Manipulations of these 3D-parts are possible as well since they are only copies from the model. Then you click on the modified CREATE 2D button, and the 2D-projection calculation for the 3D-parts is carried out. Of course, you can continue to work in this window, but you will not have the intelligent properties of the components available. Once you have finished your additions, save the window without renaming it. If you do rename it, the unique allocation for the DetailCenter is no longer active. Manual Detail from Components You can also create a manual detail from construction groups or single parts without having to select the parts specifically in the model. Just select the entry of the desired part in the views list. The rest is the same as for the manual detail from the model apart from parts selection.

DetailCenter

509

C.1.11 Detail Block Overview (Insert)

If you have detailed all of the parts you can then insert the generated detail blocks into the workshop plans. You will see the saved detail blocks in this last work level, the insert list. Since most of the important points have already been discussed under Component Overview, here are just a few special commands of this work level.

Dialog Commands

UPDATE

Click on this button to search the current output directory of the DetailCenter once more. This is required if you detailed a new model drawing or if a manual copy of

a complete detail folder was entered into the output directory.

EXPRESS

DetailCenter

510

Click on this button to start the DetailCenter Composer for automatic insertion of detail blocks into the workshop plans as collective tabs according to a specified pattern.

DetailCenter

511

EXCHANGE Click on this button to exchange a detail block inserted into the 2D-drawing for its detailed version with another detail style. Thus it is possible to exchange unfavourable detail styles of detailed

component parts for more suitable ones without explicit assignment, detailing and insertion.

List of Detail Folder The default setting fills this list with the folder names, which are located in the detail folder of ProSteel. New details are always saved in a subdirectory of this detail folder. The name of that folder corresponds with the associated model drawing. Users should leave this structure as it is. However, you can select at short term another output path in the global settings of the DetailCenter so that – in special cases – you can access to other directories outside of the output path (detail path) created by ProSteel. Select Detail Library Just click on the corresponding list entry to select a detail library for insertion. Then, the list of existing detail blocks will be updated. Delete Detail Library To delete a detail library, click on the corresponding list entry and use the context menu to select the entry Delete Detail Library. All detail blocks including the folder are then deleted. Please remember that the program doesn’t take into consideration possibly existing foreign files! ProSteel assumes that the detail libraries only contain detail blocks for insertion and that no finished drawings or other files are contained in these libraries.

DetailCenter

512

List of Details Here you will see all of the generated detail blocks as their own separate entries with date and time when they were created and you can check their current status. The display and sorting of the list depends on the settings of the work tools. Status Display The significance of these pictures matches the component part overview; please refer to that section for further details. If the detail block has already been inserted, the entry is marked with a checkmark. Preview Before inserting the detail block, you can display a preview. To activate the preview, just select the corresponding entry and then select the entry Preview via the context menu. A new drawing window opens displaying the result of the detailing in the form of a preview. This detail block can be processed as well. In case of modification, you mustn’t change the name of the drawing on any account. Otherwise the detail block cannot be identified any more. Delete Detail Blocks Click on the corresponding list entry and select the entry Delete...Entry via the context menu to delete a detail block. Then, the selected detail block will be deleted in the detail library and will not be available any more.

DetailCenter

513

Insert Detail Blocks To insert detail blocks just drag the desired details onto the action button using drag&drop. The button will then temporarily turn red so that you know it is active. Let go off the mouse button and you can start inserting blocks. You can also highlight the parts and click on the action button with the mouse or select the entry 2D-Insert via the context menu. Insertion Every inserted detail block first appears in the current target drawing in its origin and can then be moved to the desired position within the drawing („sticking to the checkmark“). You can open several drawings and click on a drawing to set it as the active one before inserting the blocks. Any details will then be displayed there. You can track the parts you have just inserted if you have opened the info window. You can ignore this part insert or cancel the entire insertion process. Target Drawing In order to activate the modification mechanism the program has to know, into which drawing you are inserting the details. You cannot insert parts until the drawing has been saved. You should refrain from making any subsequent drawing name or folder changes as well. Although the DetailCenter has a verification function for “lost” drawings or details, you will save yourself a lot of time and effort by just leaving the plans where they are. The location for saving the plans should be considered beforehand. Revisions Once the details have been inserted into the drawing you can manually revise the drawing. Please remember that the single parts and groups are intelligent details. For further information please read the comments in the corresponding chapter of this manual. Ideally, you should optimize the detail style of the detailing in such a way as to eliminate any revisions. Only then the modification mechanism can function correctly, since subsequent changes in the details are otherwise lost if you select the modification function. It is however true that there are modifications which are automatically kept, too.

DetailCenter

514

US-Mark Numbering During insertion, you can issue component part numbers according to a US drawing standard. These marks (mostly consisting of sheet number, component part code and a continuous index) serve for identification of the workshop drawings of the parts within the model and within the parts lists. As in practice, each of these marks has an individual structure; they are based on a definition file describing the structure and value range of the marks. In the settings, you can select the current definition file to be used under 'US-Mark Numbering”.

At first insertion, a small dialog opens if the 'US-Mark-Numbering' option has been activated. This dialog can be docked beside the DetailCenter. The active fields depend on the default settings in the definition file. For each new inserted detail a component part index is counted up according to definition file. However, this index can be changed at any time. The resulting number (e.g. a1) will now be entered in the model into the field ’Shipping Number’ of shape characteristics and in the 2D drawing into the field ‘Shipping Number of Position Flag’. The position flag display is changed to ‘Shipping Number’.

Click on the button NEW DRAWING to count up the index for the drawing number and the component part index will be reset to its start value. You can continue insertion in another drawing sheet. Drawing Synchronization When you are inserting the detail blocks, the insert information is saved to special files of the detail library. After all, it could be that you did not open the model when inserting blocks and opening the drawing in the background can be quite frustrating because very large models especially require a long computing time for this operation. Every time you open the model, the model drawing is compared and synchronized with these data. You should never delete these files until the synchronization process is finished and you have saved the model. The modification mechanism cannot function reliably if the program lacks the information telling it which part has been inserted into which drawing. Your work is better protected, if you do not delete the blocks and folders until after the assignment is completed.

DetailCenter

515


Group Behaviour during Insertion

Remove Detail Block Each inserted detail block will be deleted on the hard drive immediately after insertion. However, this is only possible if the model drawing is open at the same time, as the program has to make some entries here. Please remember that the model drawing has to be saved afterwards.

US-Mark Number You can issue mark numbers as they are usually used in the USA at insertion.

Display Fields Here, you see the definition file used for mark numbers including a short description. This file includes the format description of the numbers. If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed there as <prg> or <prj>.

DetailCenter

516

C.1.12 Global Settings

In addition to the settings of the different work levels, you can use this page to make the fundamental settings of the DetailCenter. However, you will also find special default settings, which are valid for several work levels at the same time and which are set centrally.

DetailCenter

517

Group Behaviour during Opening

Load Model When the DetailCenter is opened, the model is automatically analysed and the component part structure is displayed according to all default settings in the component parts list. Since this process may require some time in the case of big models, this function can be deactivated. You also can select the analysis of the model structure manually at a later moment via the button UPDATE in the component parts list.

Recompute The group dimensions are calculated anew when the model structure is analysed. If you created e.g. a parts list before and the data therefore are current data, you may reduce loading time of the DetailCenter by switching off this option.

Bolts When the model structure is analysed, all bolts of groups existing in the component parts list will be displayed as well. This allows an easy check of the used bolts, but the resulting great number of parts has a negative effect on the speed. This setting doesn’t, however, influence the information about the bolts in-group details.

Workframes When the model structure is analysed, the view levels of the working areas are also displayed as entries in the component part list. Normally, only planes are seized which also contain ProSteel component parts.

>Blanks too The view planes containing no ProSteel component parts are seized as well. This option should be used when a master drawing is used the component parts of which are exclusively integrated via XREF’s.

Standard Views When the model structure is analysed, horizontal projection, plan view and anchor plan are also displayed as entries in the component part list.

Connection Gusset When the model structure is analysed, the gusset points of the construction (e.g. several connections) are also displayed as entries in the component part list.

Group Behaviour during Selection

Show Part The part (or complete groups) clicked in the list is (are) highlighted in the model. When another entry is selected, marking switches over to the new part.

DetailCenter

518

Synchronize Detail Style The program selects exactly the detail style the currently checked entry has in the component part resp. views list. When the dialog window for processing of detail style parameters is open, the corresponding settings are also directly displayed there.

> List of Detail Styles dependent The detail styles displayed in the component part list depend on which type of part is checked. If you have checked for example a single part, only the styles classified for single parts will be displayed. Style classification is effected in detail style dialog. The result is that only the styles appropriate for the component part or function will be displayed later.

> Parameter dependent The displayed parameter pages in the detail style dialog depend on the type of the checked component part. If you have e.g. checked a single part, the pages for groups will not be displayed.

Synchronize Part List The DetailCenter is always updated to match with the active model drawing, if several drawings are open. Since this process may require some time, you can switch off this option in the case of big models. Update can be selected manually via the UPDATE button in the component parts list. In addition, you often don’t want to update the lists while you are only looking up something in another drawing.

Group Others

Update Preview The preview of a detail is automatically updated when you modify a parameter in the detail style dialog window. In case of many modifications, it is however reasonable to deactivate the update first and to select it manually afterwards.

Use PlugIn's External plugIn's will be integrated which allow an individual adaptation of the detailing results. A plug In-manager and additional dialog windows allow you to control further defaults which may be completely different depending on the supplier. At the moment however, there are no plugIn's supported.

Search Joints Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which the different single connections (these are recognized via the logical links) are combined to a connection gusset. For more detailed information please refer to ‘Gusset Details’ in this chapter.

DetailCenter

519

Modeller-Tolerance Here, you set the tolerance for contour calculation of the modeller. In some rare cases it may be that the contour cannot be determined correctly at 2D-derivation. This especially occurs when component parts having very small angles are rotated towards view direction. If you detect an incorrect behaviour or if the error message "Can't calculate Extents" is displayed in the command line of AutoCAD, you can set here a smaller tolerance value.

Ground Zero Here, you enter the height level which correspond to the X-Y-plane in the model with the height Z=0 (world coordinates). For detailing of groups and overviews it is thus possible to display correct height dimensions. Thus, you can start with a model at z=0 which should however correspond to the height level -700 of a building plan for the coordinate dimensioning.

Base Plane (z) Here, you enter on which height (z-coordinate) the plane for the plan view and for the anchorage plan has to be laid in the model (world coordinates). When you indicate the value <min>, the deepest point which exists in the model will be taken. The effect will be that any concrete foundations beneath supports existing in the model don’t have an influence any more.

Connection Here, you enter how the connection gussets have to be displayed. Only Gusset – only the entry for the complete gusset is displayed. As Structure – The entry for the complete gusset is displayed and, subordinate to this gusset, the single connections, too. Thus it is easy to check which connections are combined.

Multiple Here, you enter how combined weld shapes are displayed. Only Shape – Only the entry for the complete weld shape is displayed. As Structure – The entry for the complete weld shape is displayed and, subordinate to this shape, the single components, too. Thus it is easy to check out of which components the shape consists. In addition, it is possible to create each single component individually as a detail.

DetailCenter

520

Pos. No. Here, you enter a general format template for the position number of weld shape components. This number is used as an alternative, if there isn’t any position number known from the 3D-model. For more detailed information please refer to ‘Weld Shapes’ in this chapter.

View Depth Here, you enter the distances for the plan view plane and for the anchorage plan of the sectional area.

Group Display Templates

Parts Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the component parts list. In the display field, the currently selected template is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on the right side of the display to select another template. Click on the small button (x) to reset the display to standard display. Only the templates you created before via display sorting of component parts list will be offered for selection. If, in the mean time one of these templates has been changed, the modified display will be shown, too.

Views Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the views list. Selection is analogously to the one for component parts list.

Insert Here, you set the desired template for sorting and filter of the insertion list. Selection is analogously to the one for component parts list.

DetailCenter

521

Group Configuration Files

Application Path Here, you can see on which path the details will be stored later. A subordinate directory with the model name is created there. You can modify the path by double-clicking on the field. It is however recommended to avoid modification of the path unless it is absolutely necessary!

Program Path Here, you see the complete path of your ProSteel installation. If other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this program path, the corresponding part is only displayed there as <prg>.

Project Path Here, you see the complete path of your current project in the case that project management is used. If other displayed paths are further subordinate directories of this project path, the corresponding part is only displayed there as <prj>.

Translation File Here, you see the desired translation file for drawing labelling. In the display field, the currently selected file is displayed. Click on the small button (...) on the right side of the display to select another file. Click on the small button (x) to reset the display to standard default. If the program or project path is an element of the information, the part will only be displayed there as <prg> or <prj>.

US-Mark-Number Here, you see the definition file used for US-mark numbers. This file includes the format description of the numbers. Selection is analogous to translation file.

DetailCenter

522

Dialog-Commands

TEMPLATE

Click on this button to save your settings of the DetailCenter in a template or to select one of these templates. In this template, the individual settings of all work levels as well as the

global settings are saved. Display sorting and filters can only be processed by indicating the corresponding templates in the global settings of the DetailCenter. When you have defined one of the templates as “favourite”, this allows fast selection from the neighbouring selection list.

DetailCenter

523

C.1.13 Automatic Translation

ProSteel permits a multilingual labelling of drawings, which is controlled by a translation database. This database can be freely edited so that it is possible to add any language you like. The form of the translated terms (e.g. only as abbreviation) can also be adapted to the corresponding requirements. Before you can work with the translation database, it has of course to contain the currently used terms. For this reason, the model can be searched automatically for new terms of the object properties (like name, note, etc).

Edit Data Base Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the DetailCenter and click on the entry Edit Translation. The following dialog opens.

List Here, you can see the terms of the database, which have to

be translated. If you click on one of these terms, it will be displayed in the Original Text field and you can add or revise the translation. Please note that only those terms are displayed, which exist in the database at the very moment. Therefore you have to update the database after having modified the model.

Language Here, you select the language, which has to be translated.

Original Text Here, the current entry from the list will be displayed the translation which you can edit.

DetailCenter

524

Translation Here, you can enter the translation of the currently selected term. Click on the INSERT button and the entry is accepted as translation into the selected language. If the term has already been translated into the selected language before, the translation will be displayed. Click on the MODIFY button and the translation will be modified correspondingly.

All Entries If this field has been checked, all entries available in the database are displayed in the list of the terms, which have to be translated.

Unknown Entries If this field has been checked, only those entries are displayed in the list of which a translation into the selected language is not yet available.

File Path Here, you see the path of the translation database. Click on File button to modify the database.

Click on this button to modify (select) the translation database.

Click on this button to save the translation database.

Click on this button to add a new language to the database.

Click on this button to add the entry in the Translation input field as translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

Click on this button to replace the current translation in the Translation input field as translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

Click on this button to delete the current translation of the Original Text entry in the selected language.

DetailCenter

525

Update Database After having modified the model, you should search the model for new terms for the translation database. These terms are taken from the object properties so that own comments or component part names for the position flags etc., which were inserted there, can be translated. The program tries to synchronize the entries with those of the shape database of ProSteel so that not modified shape names are not displayed in the translation. Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the DetailCenter to search in the model. Click on the entry Enlarge Translation from Model. The model is searched for new terms and these are imported.

DetailCenter

526

C.1.14 Transfer Drawing Paths

This function permits you to transfer the drawing numbers saved in the drawing database or the file paths of the workshop drawings to the component parts properties of the model drawing. It is possible to display the drawing numbers of the processed details in the position flags of an overview. In addition, it would also be possible to export the parts data via ProSteel standard interface and to have them evaluated by foreign programs.

Start Transfer Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the DetailCenter to click on the entry Take over file Paths. Then, you still have the possibility to verify the drawing database of the model, if in the meantime you moved some details or modified the drawing numbers. After the drawing verification was finished (or if you don’t want this option) the following dialog opens:

Group Data Selection

Data Selection Here you specify which data have to be transferred into the component parts properties. In addition, you can still add any extra text. Drawing Number – The drawing number of the corresponding 2D drawing will be transferred.

DetailCenter

527

Only File Name – Only the file name of the 2D drawing is transferred (without specification of the path). File Path – The complete file path including the drawing name of the 2D drawing will be transferred. Only Text – Only the specified text of the 'Prefix' input field would be transferred.

Prefix Here you can specify a text which has to be placed in front of the real data or which has to be transferred as only text (option Only Text).

Postfix Here you can specify a text, which has to be placed behind the real data.

Group Target

Target Here you specify into which property fields of the parts the data have to be transferred. Note 1 – The data are transferred into the note field 1 of the parts properties. Note 2 - The data are transferred into the note field 2 of the parts properties.

Group Links Only the data of the corresponding group are transferred to each part in the model; e.g. detailed stiffeners are marked with the reference to the corresponding group drawing.

Equal Positions The data are transferred to all component parts having the equal position number (separated according to single part and group) and this even if only the workshop drawing to one of these positions exists.

Remove before In all component parts, the contents of the selected property field are removed before transfer is started. All existing entries are overwritten, this would, however, permit to transfer and display the drawing numbers of all parts first and then only the drawing paths of the groups (the drawing numbers of the single parts would thus be deleted again).

Now, click on the OK button to transfer the current entries of the drawing database in the component parts properties.

DetailCenter

528

Drawing Verification Each time when you insert some details in a drawing, a dependence of the component part on the workshop drawing and vice versa will be saved in the drawing database of the model drawing. These saved dependences later permit an automatic update of the workshop drawing or the transfer of drawing numbers to the component parts properties of the model. These links are the reason for your having to enter a valid drawing name of the destination drawings before insertion of details. It is also the reason for your having to save the model after insertion. Nevertheless it may be that you have to modify the physical position of the 2D-drawings after the complete detailing was finished. This is the case if you have to save them in an assembly folder of the order in the network. In addition, it may be that you want to move some details from one drawing to the other in order to add some completions or just because there is not enough place in the drawing any more. However, if the model has saved the wrong dependences, and the DetailCenter thus cannot function completely as it should, you can correct this subsequently. This correction partly is carried out automatically, partly by means of your manual support. It is divided into the two areas Drawing Path Verification and Detail Verification.

Start of Verification Please select the context menu in the component parts list of the DetailCenter and click on the entry Check Dependences. After the note that this function may require some time and that if need be you can cancel the function the verification starts. At first, it is verified whether all paths of workshop drawings saved in the drawing database still exist. Then, the drawings, which were not found, are displayed in the dialog. Now, you have the possibility to set the paths or drawing names anew.

DetailCenter

529

Group Invalid Drawing Paths

Click on this button to change the path of all displayed drawings at the same time and start a new search. Then, the list either contains the remaining drawings, which are still lacking or the verification function changes to detail verification. If you only changed the physical position of the plans on the hard drive, you don’t have to make any further corrections.

Click on this button to change the path and/or file name of a certain drawing selected before in the displayed list. If a drawing was renamed or if a certain drawing was saved on another physical place, you can thus make the necessary corrections.

Click on this button to ignore the selected drawing during the following verification. Thus you can also remove deleted drawings.

Please note, however, that you cannot add further drawings. If therefore you copied and renamed a drawing, please assign the new name to it instead of ignoring the drawing.

DetailCenter

530

After verification of paths was finished, and any necessary corrections were made, the program passes on to the verification of the details contained. It is now verified whether all details are contained in the original or now modified drawings.

DetailCenter

531

All the details, which were not found, are now displayed in the list. You have thus the possibility to link any moved details anew or to remove deleted details.

Group Details not Found

Current Search Path The current search path used for the ‚Search Detail' option is displayed in this field. You can modify the path by clicking on the right button beside the display.

Click on this button to search for any details not found in the drawings of the current search path. For this purpose, each drawing will be opened in the background and searched for all listed details individually.

Please note that each file having the extension *.dwg will be opened, as it could be a workshop drawing. This means that also any existing ProSteel-models or other AutoCAD-drawings will be opened. You should therefore take care that only 2D-plans with details are in the list to avoid unnecessary waiting periods.

Click on this button to specify the new drawing where a certain detail is which was selected before in the list. Then, it is verified at once whether the detail is really situated on the new drawing.

DetailCenter

532

Click on this button to ignore the selected detail; the original entry is kept. Thus you can also remove deleted details as you can remove the detail hints from the drawing database after end of verification.

Please note, however, that you cannot add further details. If therefore you moved a detail, please assign the new drawing to it instead of ignoring the detail.

End of Verification After the verification has been finished, the assignment is structured anew and the drawing database is updated. You still have the possibility now to remove the ignored or invalid detail hints from the drawing database. If you refrain from doing this, the original entries of these details will be kept and you can repeat the verification at a later moment.

Including Ignored If this field has been checked, the detail hints on ignored

drawings will be taken into consideration, too for correction (all details giving a hint of these drawings are set as ignored details). Otherwise, these are not affected in order to avoid destroying hints to temporarily moved drawings.

Delete Ignored If this field has been checked, the hints of 2D-drawings of all ignored details will be removed as well. The data base entry with possible further information is however kept.

Delete Invalid If this field has been checked, the data base entries of any details, which were not found, will be completely removed. Otherwise, only the hints of 2D-drawings of these details will be removed.

DetailCenter

533

When you click on CANCEL in this dialog, the data base will not be modified. You can repeat the verification process at any time you like by means of correction. Thus you can first look at the result of drawing verification in a text file (model name_LogFile.txt) which are situated in the subdirectory ..\detail of your ProSteel installation. There, you will find a list of all workshop drawings linked with the model as well as the status of the details expected to be there. ; ProSteel for AutoCAD – Drawing Verification ; ------------------------------------------- [HEADER] Verification file=h:\testmodel.dwg [drawing file: h:\testmodel_views.dwg] Status=moved or deleted view hall_FRONT=can not be found [drawing file: h:\testmodel_details.dwg] Pos 2 (HE 140 B)=valid Pos 47 (PLATE 10x137...191)=not found BG 3 (HE 200 B)=valid BG 9.1 (HE 200 B)=valid

DetailCenter

534

C.1.15 Direct Detailing

The ProSteel DetailCenter can also be used to detail parts directly from within the model or display a preview of the detail. This means dimensions of construction groups can be checked, or only a few selected parts within a complex building, which are urgently needed, can be detailed. Perhaps area classes have not been used, but it is now desired to detail a special truss. Large models pose the problem of being able to identify this part directly. The DetailCenter offers a few helpful tools, but the following method is even easier: To detail a component part directly from within the model, select a default detail style first, so that parts without a detail style can be detailed. Now highlight the parts to be detailed within the model and then select the context menu via the right mouse button. Depending on the parts selected, a preview can be created from a single part or a group or these parts or groups can be detailed directly. Select the desired function from the context menu.

DetailCenter

535

Processing of Nested Structures You can only select the next higher hierarchic plane. Therefore, if you have selected a component part of a subgroup, only this subgroup can be detailed as component part group. On the other hand, at detailing of an assembly including add-on parts only the directly subordinate single parts resp. groups will be processed. Direct Detailing If you want to work with direct detailing, you will be prompted to specify if all of the selected parts without a detail style are to be linked with the default style first. If you confirm this question, these parts will be highlighted in the DetailCenter as well since the linking is permanent. If you answer no to the question, only those parts are detailed, which already have a detail style. The parts will then be directly detailed or the preview is displayed. Direct Detailing with Insertion If additionally valid and saved 2D-workshop drawings are open, the parts can even be inserted into the drawings directly after detailing. In the context menu, a list of the valid drawings will be displayed in a subordinate tab of the corresponding detailing selection (respectively the entry Detail Library for 'Not Insert'). If such a drawing is selected, you will directly reach the insertion mode for the selected drawing after detailing has been finished. The parts can be placed there.

DetailCenter

536

C.1.16 Modification Management

The modification management is one of ProSteel’s special DetailCenter features. Once the model has been detailed and any resulting detail blocks have been distributed to the different workshop plans, the detailing or processing is considered finished. The next time you load the model most of the entries will appear in green – this colour signifies that the detailing of these parts matches the original parts of the model. However, if you have changed parts of the model they will be shown in red. This tells you that the detail blocks (and thus maybe the workshop drawings as well) are no longer current and have to be updated. The program performs this update. In addition to this feature for managing modifications, ProSteel also offers the comprehensive RevisionCenter, which can manage other documents from the model in addition to drawings, and provides more comprehensive information. Modification management works in synchronisation with this data.. Status Indicator Valid Details

Blue A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.

Green A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing.

Modified Details

Yellow A detail block of this part has already been created. However, it has not yet been inserted into a 2D drawing.

Red A detail block of this part has already been created and inserted into a 2D drawing.

Open a Drawing from Within the DetailCenter Just click on a part in the component list of the DetailCenter to have a quick look at a certain workshop drawing. Now select the context menu and use the entry Open 2D drawing to automatically open the drawing containing this detail – presuming it has been inserted.

DetailCenter

537

Update Drawings Any parts highlighted in red can be updated automatically. Select a specific component or a parent and only the parts contained in these are updated. If you select the "Model" entry, all parts are updated. Selecting the context menu after having selected the part, use the entry Update only modified 2D-drawing to activate the modification mechanism. However, if you want to force also an update of non-modified (green) parts to replace e.g. the detailing by another detail style you have to select the entry Update 2D-drawing in the context menu. One by one, all of the affected drawings are opened in the background, the parts are newly detailed and inserted directly into the original drawing position, replacing the old ones. Should you have one of these drawings open at the time, you can watch this replacement happen “live” right in front of you. Subsequent Modifications Depending on the settings in the work tools of component overview, modifications of the details, which you carried out later, will be adopted again. This is of course only possible to a limited extent. At the very moment, moving of position flags, weld marks, height indicators and of dimension texts in all 2D-drawings as well as modifications of sketch display at overviews are adopted. If a dynamic drawing parts list possibly exists, it will also be updated in the case the component parts have changed. Please note, however, that only the position of the dimension text can be restored (in the case that you “sorted out” unfavourably placed texts), but not the dimension itself or modifications of the dimension text. To avoid a reset of such modifications, you can protect them against update. This procedure might take some time to complete; then all plans are once again current and the latest detail blocks are ready for insertion. Use the ‘Display only Latest Blocks’ option for the insertion to place the details. You should remember, however, that the modification mechanism functions optimally only if the tips and notes from the previous chapters are observed and if you proceed correspondingly at 3D-modelling and positioning as well. You should, therefore, work through those chapters very diligently.

DetailCenter

538

Anchorage Point In the 3D-model, it is possible to use the command Set Anchorage Point to create an anchorage point which can serve as a reference point for the inserted overviews. The result will be that the modified detail blocks are inserted congruently relating their anchorage points. If you place e.g. a horizontal projection, a longitudinal section and a cross-section aligned with each other and you don’t make use of an anchorage point, the views will probably be displaced towards each other when up-dated. Normally, they are inserted in a centered way and the center point of course moves when the size of a single view is modified. Use the „Anchorage Point“ option for the insertion position in the detail style at detailing to make use of the anchorage point. For overviews, this should always be done beginning with the first detailing when the deternination of views is required. If need be, it may also be modified. Here you see a 3D-model and three detailed views which have been favourably placed towards each other after insertion. Now, the drawing is up-dated after a modification, first with and then without anchorage point. The anchorage point (A) has been inserted at the highlighted spot into the 3D-model. In the views, the position has also been highlighted to make things clear.

Afterwards, the construction is modified so that the overall dimensions (and thus the sizes of the views) change. After the update without anchorage point the position is clearly shifted from the highlighted reference line (manual completions would of course remain at

DetailCenter

539

the former position). Due to the additional dimensioning chains, the longitudinal view and the gable view shift towards each other in the base plane.

On the other hand, when the update is carried out with anchorage point, the position of the elements towards each other is kept as it was in the original drawing. The base planes remain aligned to each other and manual completions at unchanged parts remain still suitable.

DetailCenter

540

DetailCenter

541

Protection against Update To exclude modifications of dimensions, position flags, weld marks or height indicators completely from being updated, you may protect them or set them free again. This is recommended for example for subsequent modifications of dimension texts or in the case dimensions were completely moved. During automatic update of the 2D drawing, the program now checks whether e.g. a dimension has been protected. If this is the case, this dimension is kept exactly as it is and the corresponding „new“ dimension is deleted from the updated detail. The result may be that the position or the dimension text won’t match any more. Therefore, this option should only be used in the case you assume slight modifications (such as modifications of display or of position numbers) which only have few influences on the dimension. Since in future versions keeping of modifications will become more and more efficient, this protection against update is only a temporary help, which will become superfluous again later. The adoption of modifications combined with the efficiency of the automatic mechanisms of ProSteel requires an enormous amount of time and energy in program development. This is the reason why modification management will only become perfect according to our requirements step by step. Select the entry Protection against Update in the component parts list of the DetailCenter to protect the dimension or the position flags; weld marks, etc. against update or to release them again. Then, the following dialog opens which is described below.

DetailCenter

542

Group Selection-Filter Selection-Filter Here, you can enter the filter for automatic object selection.

Only those objects will be taken into consideration, which meet the filter condition. Select Objects – You specify manually by your selection, which objects have to be protected or released. No filter will be applied in this case. All Objects – All objects in the drawing are automatically selected without applying a filter. Processing of course only refers to dimensions, position flags, weld marks and height indicators. Dimension – Only dimensioning objects are automatically selected in the drawing. Each Flag – All position flags, weld marks and height indicators are automatically selected in the drawing. Only Position Flags – All position flags are selected in the drawing. Only Weld Marks – All weld marks are selected in the drawing. Only Height Indicators – All height indicators are selected in the drawing.

Click on this button to activate the protection against update for the selected objects unless it already exists. If you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be selected first.

Click on this button to remove the protection against update for the selected objects if they have one. If you have checked the entry ‘Select Objects’ as selection filter, the desired objects have to be selected first.

Of course, this function has to be applied in the 2D-workshop drawings and not in the 3D-model. Please also remember that you cannot compare the protection against update with a blocked layer. If the dimension to be protected was only on a blocked layer, it would be kept there, but the newly created (synonymous) dimension would not be deleted.

DetailCenter

543

Reset Modifications Before the first detailing takes place, the drawing should be initialized, i.e. it should be set to „zero“. This will ensure that the modification mechanism functions optimally. This can of course always be done if you want to continue your work on a neutral state. As the component parts in the model remember their modification even during modelling, it may be that the corresponding markings have already been set. This could cause some irritations. Select the entry Reset Modification Code via the context menu of component parts view to reset any existing information about model modification. The entries, which details are situated on which drawings, are kept as well as the already detailed detail blocks. Please select the entry Initialize All Anew from the context menu to reset the model completely. Initialize Component Part selectively resets the currently selected component part. Please note, however, that now any information will be deleted (unless the assigned detail styles)! It will then no longer be possible to ask the model where the different component parts were inserted or to insert component parts already detailed but not yet inserted. This complete initialization is reasonable if you made some detailing beforehand „as a test“ or for a meeting and you now want to create the final workshop plans.

DetailCenter

544

Drawing List At any time, ProSteel can create a drawing list giving you a survey on the inserted details and their status of modification. This drawing list is based on the current entries in the drawing database and on the status of the so-called “modification flags” of the component parts. Therefore, it is recommended to verify the drawing first. The program automatically offers this drawing verification after the function has been selected. It is of course also possible that hints which were recognized as invalid shall nevertheless remain valid because the drawings have only been moved temporarily. Creation of File Select the context menu of the component parts list and click on the entry Output of Drawing List. A text file (Modelname_DrawingList.txt), will be created in the subdirectory.. \detail of your ProSteel-installation containing first a survey on all 2D-drawings and the number of inserted details. If one of these details has been checked as modified in the DetailCenter, this drawing is reported as being modified. Therefore, this statement doesn’t mean that the drawing has actually already been modified. It means that it still has to be modified. In addition, you will find a detailed list per drawing, which details (position numbers) are contained and which of them has already been modified in the model. On the following page, you will find an example of a drawing list. Since an external program via code words might evaluate the content of this list, the output of these key words is always in English. As you can see in the example, there are 6 single parts (2 of them modified) and 2 groups in the drawing with drawing number ABC_PL03. Therefore, the drawing is checked as being modified.

DetailCenter

545

; ProSteel – Drawing List ; ----------------------------------------------------- [HEADER] Created=02-04-2003 * 11:34 AM ModelFile=h:\testmodell.dwg FileContent=Drawing list and object reference Drawings=3 DrawingNumber|Changed |Parts |Groups |Views |DrawingFile =============|========|========|========|========|======================== ABC_AN01 |no | | |2 |h:\testmodel_view.dwg ABC_BG02 |yes | |5(3) | |h:\testmodel_bg.dwg ABC_PL03 |yes |6(2) |2 | |h:\testmodel_plates.dwg [h:\testmodel_views.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_AN01 Changed=no Parts= ChangedParts= Groups= ChangedGroups= Views=Hall_SEI_R,Hall_X_1 ChangedViews= [h:\testmodel_bg.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_BG02 Changed=yes Parts= ChangedParts= Groups=3,7,10,31,49 ChangedGroups=3,7,31 Views= ChangedViews= [h:\testmodel_plates.dwg] DrawingNumber=ABC_PL03 Changed=yes Parts=35,38,40,43,45,46 ChangedParts=40,46 Groups=50,55 ChangedGroups= Views= ChangedViews=

DetailCenter

546

C.1.17 Replace Detail Blocks

This function allows new detailing of detail blocks directly in the workshop drawing by simple selection. This permits you for example to assign a better detail style to some “unfavourable” details still during insertion.

Settings

Display Field Here, you see the currently selected detail style used for replacing.

List The available detail styles for new detailing. When you have activated the option ‘List of detail styles dependent on Part’ in the global pre-settings of the DetailCenter, only the styles are displayed here which have been classified for the corresponding type.

DetailCenter

547

Click on this button to process the currently selected detail style. The detail block is replaced with the modifications. Please note however, that this function actually changes the detail style of the model. If it is still required, you first have to make a copy and use this copy to replace the detail block.

Click on this button to detail the detail anew with the currently selected detail style; then it is replaced in the drawing.

Click on this button to select a new detail block for replacing.

Replace a Detail Block To replace a detail block you have to open the corresponding 2D-workshop drawing (with the inserted detail blocks) as well as the original 3D-model drawing. Now select the entry Replace 2D-Detail Block in the context menu of the component part list. Then pick any element of the detail block you want to replace and the dialog opens. Now you can modify the current detail style or select another style from the list. Afterwards, you press the UPDATE button, and the detail block will be automatically replaced. Further detail blocks to be replaced can be selected directly from the dialog. Since the last selected block remains connected, you can assign another style to it if the result didn’t meet your requirements. When modifying detail style parameters please don’t forget that you change the detail style from the model. Replacing takes place as follows: The selected block is detailed anew (this is why the model drawing has to be opened) and then it replaces the former block in the drawing. If you assign a new style as well, this modification will be transferred into the model and the component part will be permanently linked again with the desired style. Therefore, don’t forget to save the model drawing afterwards.

DetailCenter

548

Detailing Style

549

C.2 Detailing Style

C.2.1 Working with Detailing Styles

The detailing style offers you some decisive influence over the style of the detailing because it is here that you determine what is to be dimensioned, how to dimension it, what texts to include, whether to attach position flags, and much more. A great number of parameters are available to specify the appearance of your drawing. You can save and load these styles individually and even import or export them from other parties. Since it is possible to manage entire parameter records you can create specific styles for specific detailing tasks (e.g. for overviews, workshop plans, life-sized displays, etc.) and just select them later. Your main task consists of defining the suitable styles once. The program offers the option to immediately check each change using a preview feature (see DetailCenter / Preview) – until details look exactly like you want them to be for your orders. This chapter will discuss the setting options first with an example of a detailed component at the end of the chapter. The chapters describing the detailing process also describe how to work with styles.

Saving Styles Normally, the detailing styles are saved together with the 3D-model of the drawing. This means that you always have to save your model if the modifications of detailing styles are to be kept permanently. In addition, there is the possibility to write a detailing style as file on the hard drive and to re-import it. It is also possible to replace only partial sections of a style. This permits you to exchange, update or transfer the detailing styles of different models. Furthermore, you can create a collection of detailing styles and use in the model only a selection of those styles, which are required for that moment. As the volume of a detail style considerably increased compared with earlier versions, since version 17.2 the file will only be saved as binary file with the file ending *.stx due to long loading times. All commands for loading a detail style wait for the style files in this format.

Detailing Style

550

C.2.2 General Info

When you select the detailing style, a dialog with a tree structure appears on the left where the different dialog pages are sorted hierarchically in groups according to different areas. When you click on an entry in the tree, the assigned dialog page opens on the right and you can modify the values. If you move to another entry, your previous entries are saved and the new page will be displayed.

To allow a clear view, some of the tabs have subordinate tabs themselves which are accessible via a button or via a context menu (right mouse key) and which are used for further settings. in most cases, these are settings which depend on the selection on the corresponding dialog tab. The commands of the dialog frame are the ones all dialog tabs have in common. Only the new specific commands will be described here. The other commands are found in the general description of ProSteel-dialogs.

Partial Loading of Style Parameters

If you want to combine e.g. the default settings for dimensioning and the default settings for labelling of two existing styles to a new style, you can do this by partial loading of pages. Select the desired page in the selection tree and then call the context menu by pressing the right mouse button. Now you have the possibility to replace the parameters of the currently selected page by the equivalent parameters of an existing style file. Alternatively, you can however also load all the pages subordinate to this page to replace a much bigger set of parameters.

Detailing Style

551

Importing and exporting style parameters In addition to loading complete dialogue pages, you can also import and export the templates for complex dimension settings using ProSteel templates. This gives you the option when creating a new style of referring to your own library of different dimensioning rules and using these rules multiple times. For more information please see the definition of dimension settings for detail styles.

Standard templates If no detail style has yet been applied to a drawing, a detail style is automatically created with standard values and simplified dimensioning rules when the DetailCenter is opened. Advanced rules can also be added to the dimensioning pages to load standard templates. If you want to reset an existing detail style wholly or partially to this standard, you can do this using the standard templates for individual pages. Select the desired page from the selection tree and right-click to open the Context menu. You can now replace the parameters of the currently selected page with the internal standard parameters (including for broader dimensioning). Alternatively, you can reset all the pages subordinate to that page or the complete detail style to standard values.

Detailing Style

552

Dialog-Commands

SAVE

When you click on this button, the complete detailing style is saved in a file on the hard drive. This file has the name of the style and the file ending *.stx.

It is possible to load this file later into this or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.

SAVE AS

Click on this button to save the detailing style under another name on the hard drive. Your detailing style copy automatically gets the name of the style pre-set here as file name. It is possible to load this file later into this

or into another model or to transfer it to thirds.

UPDATE PREVIEW

When you click on this button, preview detailing of a detail is calculated anew and updated if the window is open. Within the DetailCenter you can look in a preview on the effects of a

detailing style for detailing of a detail. Normally, this preview is automatically updated at each modification of the detailing style. However, if you have e.g. a very complex overview which requires a lot of time or if you want to modify a lot of parameters, you can switch off the automatic update and release it manually.

Detailing Style

553

C.2.3 Global Settings

This is the tab for global default settings ranking higher than all other tabs. If, for instance, dimensioning is deactivated, no dimensioning will be carried out - independent of what has been indicated in the individual dimensioning tabs.

Tab Common

Group Display

Scale Here, you set the scale of your details. Depending on the selection under ‘Don’t Scale Parts’ either the part or the text size is scaled. Please remember the hints under 'DetailCenter/Generalities Concerning Scale and Dimensioning Styles'.

Don’t scale parts The parts keep their original size and only the text is scaled for output on a printer /plotter.

True 2D Lines The details are transformed into pure AutoCAD line diagrams. Intelligent properties of the 2D-details of course won’t be available any more.

ACIS if Plates Poly-plates are always temporarily transformed into ACIS elements for detailing to allow for better dimensioning of radii. The plate properties in the model are not affected by this.

Detailing Style

554

Dimensioning Dimensioning texts and lines are attached according to the settings entered in the DIMENSIONING tab.

Position Flags Position flags are attached according to the settings entered in the POSITION FLAGS tab.

Weld Flags Welding symbols are attached according to the settings entered in the WELDING SYMBOLS tab.

Labels Additional label texts are attached according to the settings entered in the ADDITIONAL TEXTS tab.

Group Alignment

Projection Method Here, you specify the system according to which the different part views (front view, plan view, top view, etc.) are aligned towards each other. Method 1 (E) – The distribution of the views is effected according to DIN. Method 3 (A) – The distribution of the views is effected according to American standard.

Alignment Here, you specify the alignment of the details at detailing. At groups, the main part specifies the alignment of the whole group. Horizontal – The parts are aligned horizontally when detailed. Vertical – The parts are aligned vertically when detailed. Like Model – AutoCAD aligns the parts during detailing according to their WCS position, which means that a slanted support remains slanted.

Front View Here, you indicate how the front view of a component part has to be specified. The other views then derivate from this front view. From Component – The element coordinate system of the component part is used for the determination of the front view. From Global Views – The global views are used for the determination of the front view. Outside Model – The view from the outside into the model is used for the determination of the front view. Individually per Part – The individually fixed front view of a part is used for the determination of the part’s front view. If it has not been defined, the element coordinate system will be used instead.

Like Group Single parts views are displayed according to the views of the corresponding groups, if existing. The left view of a stiffener is e.g. the view onto a plate (normally this would be the plan view), because the left view of the group would show the stiffener in this way.

Detailing Style

555

> Only first View Only the first view of the part is displayed corresponding to the group; all other views are tilted according to standard related to this modified view.

Group Add

Description Allows a description of the detail style to be entered in order to give more information about its precise function.

Style class symbol Allows the detail style to be allocated to an existing style class. The relevant icon is then displayed in the DetailCenter’s selection list to enable the essential function to be identified more quickly (e.g. detail style for individual parts, structural groups, etc.). Selecting a style class has no effect on potential use. If the style can really only be used in a limited set of circumstances, the style class or the symbol cannot be changed. If you subsequently replace the style with a restricted-use style, that style will receive the type of the currently selected style class and will be usable for that object type only.

Insertion position This is used to enter the location at which detail blocks are subsequently to be inserted. Select one of 9 distinctive insertion points, from Top-Left to Bottom-Right, to which the detail block (including for the 2D update) is to be anchored. If the additional option Anchor is used, the details can subsequently be updated from the overview screen without dislocating the geometry. For detailed information about anchor points, please see the chapter “Detail Center/Modification management”.

Detailing Style

556

Tab Common PartialViews Here, you specify which views of a part will be displayed and whether these are limited in their visual depth. However, you can also make use of the automatic process of the program, which determines the required views due to the processing.

Group Partial Views

Automatic Selection The program automatically displays the required views according to the existing detailing processes of the part. Thus, all detailing processes can be displayed and dimensioned. In addition, you can add the basic views, one or more global isometric views and the unfolding (only in case of bent plates). These views will be used in any case.

Cut A cut is made in this view frame for any model views you like. Position, cut depth and displayed parts are determined by means of this frame.

Default You can choose the views to be generated from the six existing basic views. In addition, you can add one or more global isometric views and the unfolding (only in case of bent plates). Here, you also pre-set the desired views for the overviews of detailed points; for standard overviews, however these settings haven’t any meaning,

Detailing Style

557

> Selection Here, you pre-select which views have to be created during the detailing process. In the DetailCenter, you also have the possibility to delete views or to add further views.

Group Visual Depth

Max. Depth Here, you can indicate a visual depth up to which the subparts are seized at construction group display. This filter can be switched on separately for the different views to limit the depth only at left and right views.

Limit View Depth When displaying construction groups, the visual depth for the selected view is limited to the value specified under 'Max. Depth'. Please note, however, that unlike cut areas at views nevertheless the complete component part will be displayed. The specification of this value only serves as depth filter for seizing of the complete component part.

Group Miscellaneous

Distance Views Here, you specify the distance of the basic views incl. dimensions and text towards each other if several views are to be generated within one detail block.

Distance Isometries Here, you specify the distance of the isometric views towards the basic views and towards each other.

Distance Unfolding Here, you specify the distance of the unfolding of a bent plate towards the basic views.

Detail Style Isometry If need be, you specify another detailing style here with which an isometric view has to be depicted. If you indicate ‘This Style’, no separate detailing style will be used.

Isometry Position Here, you specify the position where the isometric views have to be depicted with reference to the basic views. They can be positioned above, below, on the left or on the right side of the basic views.

Repeat Partial view Here you indicate whether a partial view (e.g. top view) is to be represented repeatedly. No repetition - only one view is presented. If concrete reinforcement - One view each of the upper and lower layer of the reinforcement is presented, if several layers are used.

Detailing Style

558

Detail Style Unfolding If need be, you specify another detailing style here with which an unfolding has to be depicted. If you indicate ‘This Style’, no separate detailing style will be used.

Unfolding Position Here, you specify the position where the unfolding has to be depicted with reference to the basic views. They can be positioned above, below, on the left or on the right side of the basic views.

Combination of standard views with an isometric view (A) which is depicted with its own detailing style. The isometry here only shows the position flags so that they can be omitted in dimensioning.

Additional depiction of unfolding of a plate (B) and an isometric view (A) with regard to the basic views at a bent plate.

Detailing Style

559

2D-Display These dialog tabs offer the opportunity to specify the display type of the component parts (centerlines, drill holes, hidden edges, etc.), which line types have to be used and which special default settings have to be valid for the different detailing types.

Tab Common

Group Add

Visible Edges All visible lines are displayed according to their line type. This field should always be checked.

Invisible Edges The invisible lines are displayed according to their line type.

2D-Bolts The put in bolts are depicted by a bolt symbol.

> Real Bolts The bolts are depicted as real view with nut and bolt head.

2D-Weldmint The welding joints imported to the model are depicted as weld symbol.

2D-Elevation symbols The height indicators imported to the model are depicted.

Special Parts Special parts inserted into the model are depicted. These may be any parts (such as e.g. blocks) containing ProSteel component part caracteristics.

Real Cross-Sections The shape cross-sections are depicted with their exact radii – otherwise, the simplified depiction in the form of straight lines is selected.

Detailing Style

560

> At Dimensioning At dimensioning, all edges and radii of cross-section display are used. Otherwise, only the outside dimensions are depicted.

Bearing Bar Direction A symbol for the bearing bar direction is attached (which corresponds to the lengthwise direction of the grid) if it is a matter of plates having a grid.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol, which is used for the direction of the plate grid.

Combined ACIS components are represented as one combined component in calculation of the concealed edges. Thus you can avoid unneeded edges in representation of the concrete bodies.

Group Shape Shortening

Shape Shortening Shapes are “compressed” in areas without detailing and a shortening symbol is attached. Whether a shape can be shortened depends on its detailing processes and on the limits specified by you hereafter.

Symbol-Distance The gab in the shape or the distance between the lines if a shortening symbol with two lines is used.

Min. Shape Length Shortenings are to be attached starting at this length. You can use your page optimally by displaying the shapes as long as possible.

Min. Shortening The shape has to be shortened by at least this value to even activate any shortening.

Max. Number The maximum number of shortenings inserted into the shape.

Distance Edge Shortenings cannot start at the edge or margin area but can only start this indicated distance from the edge. This prevents shortening a shape without detailing too much.

Shortening Symbol Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted into the shape at shortening position. Single Line – The symbol is a simple straight line. ZigZag Single – The symbol is a serrated, wave-like line. Double Line – The symbol is a double straight line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field. ZigZag Double - The symbol is a serrated, wave-like double line with the gap set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field. Only Gap – There is no symbol depicted, but only a gap with the distance set in the 'Symbol-Distance' input field.

Detailing Style

561

Break Symbol Here, you select the symbol, which has to be inserted at the break edge of the completely cut-off shape end. Please also refer to ‘Shortening Symbol’.

Group Others

2D Display Here you can select the processes used to create plans from ProSteel and ProConcrete elements during overviews. The opposing elements will then usually be displayed in a less true-to-life manner. Automatic – The process with the largest number of objects will be used. ProSteel – The ProSteel method will always be used. ProConcrete – The ProConcrete method will always be used.

Hatch pattern Used to enter the template setting out the pattern or type of line used for hatching cut objects. You can create new templates using the function for manual 2D cutting (PS_MAN_CUT), where only the templates for hatching are used.

Hatch size Allows a scaling to be entered for the hatching pattern selected. This scaling affects the line spacing of the hatching.

Detailing Style

562

Tab Common Tab Holes

Group Drill Hole Axes

Axes View At a view on the drill hole the axis is depicted.

> Excess Length Here, you specify the excess length of the axis beyond the outside edges of the shape.

Axes Plan View At a plan view on the drill hole the two axes (horizontal and vertical) are depicted. In the selection list, you can specify whether all holes, only the visible holes or the invisible holes have to be displayed or whether there has to be no display at all.

> Excess Length Here, you specify the excess length of the axis beyond the drill hole depiction.

> Rotated by 45° The two axes lines are rotated by 45° to prevent that they overlap with dimension lines or others.

Group Drill Hole Depiction

Detailing Style

563

Hides only Axes The hidden (invisible) drill holes are depicted using a dotted line in plan view. Otherwise, only the axes are depicted if these are chosen for display. However, if you selected ‘Old Standard’, the axes are always displayed.

Real Drill Holes The holes are depicted according to their diameter as either circular holes or hidden edges. Otherwise, only the axes are displayed if these are chosen for display.

> Filled The hole depicted is completely filled.

According to Style Template The drill holes are displayed with a depiction which can be defined freely. Thus it is possible to get your own depictions (e.g. true to no scale or symbolic), too, depending on the current hole diameter for the application of different standards and special cases.

> Symbol Size The symbol size according to the hole style template.

> Style Template The desired hole style template for depiction. Create a hole style template in the function for hole depiction and just load it here. Use the neighboring button to get direct access to the dialog for the creation of hole style templates.

Detailing Style

564

Tab Common LineDisplay

Group Colour and Line Type

2D line definition Used to select the source from which the definition of the line type representation is taken for the three object line types ‘Visible’, ‘Hidden’ and ‘Center line’. This determines which line type and line colour are used for an object in 2D mode. From detail style – The definition is taken from the settings on this page. From configuration – The definitions are taken from the ProSteel configuration file. From description file – The definitions are taken from a separate instruction file. This file contains descriptions of parts that can also be used for dimensioning and representations in overviews. From part family – The definitions are taken from the part family under which the relevant part is classified.

Colour Enter the colour to be used for lines. The appropriate AutoCAD colour code should be used.

Line type Enter the type of line to be used for lines.

Detailing Style

565

On part layer The lines are shown on the same layer name as the original part in the 3D model. Otherwise they are shown on the layers for visible or invisible lines.

Detailing Style

566

Dialog-Commands

SELECT COLOUR

Click on this button to open the AutoCAD-standard dialog for colour selection and you can select the colour number in the diagram.

Customised line display In addition to the three main types (Visible, Hidden and Center lines) that can arise from various definition sources, you can also define two customised line types. These extra types make it possible to represent freely definable structural element groups independently from the existing basic settings. This can be used to distinguish adjoining buildings or similar from the construction itself, for example, by using ‘soft’ lines. For further information please see the definition of “2D display in overviews” in this manual.

Detailing Style

567

Tab Common LineDisplay CenterLine

Group General:

With Center Lines The center lines of the component parts selected on this dialog tab are displayed.

Offset Here, you specify the excess length of the center line beyond the two ends of the shapes.

Group User Shapes

User Shapes Center lines for user shapes are depicted.

Roof/Wall Panels Center lines for roof-wall shapes are depicted.

Combi Shapes Center lines for combi shapes are depicted.

Welded Shapes Center lines for welded shapes are depicted.

Group Others

Detailing Style

568

Shape List Select for which types of different standard shapes the center lines have to be depicted by highlighting them in the list.

When displaying overview plans, you can use freely definable object groups in combination with standard settings to control how center lines are displayed. For further information please see the definition of “2D display in overviews” in this manual.

Detailing Style

569

Tab SingleParts

Group Add Section

Standard Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of standard shapes.

Special Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of special shapes.

Roof-Wall Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of roof-wall-shapes.

Combi Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of combi-shapes.

Weld Shapes Additional cross-sections are added to the views of weld shapes.

At End Plates In the plan view of a base or end plate, the cross-section of the welded shape is displayed.

Position Section In the selection list, you define on which side of a partial view the cross-section of the shape has to be displayed. Left Side – The additional cross-section is displayed on the left. Right Side – The additional cross-section is displayed on the right.

Detailing Style

570

Group Others

Direction Symbol The direction symbol is displayed at main parts.

Display Origin The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the single part is displayed as reference point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimensions”.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the size of the symbol.

Detailing Style

571

Tab Groups

Group Cuts

Display Sections 2D-cuts (manual or automatic at e.g. stiffeners) inserted into the main part are added as additional view to the group. Here you have to differentiate between 2D-cuts in the model and 2D-cuts in the details: 2D-cuts inserted in the model only define whether and how a detail has to be cut at detailing process.

Only manual Only manually added cuts are displayed. Cuts automatically determined by the program are not depicted.

Arrangement Here you determine how the customized 2D-cuts are arranged in detail. On the left and on the right – the cuts are indicated on the left of and/or on the right next to the main view (usually the front view). Down stacked –The cuts are shown in several rows below the last partial view, depending on their number. Down sequentially – The cuts are shown side by side below the last partial view. The following figure indicates the variants ’left/right` (A), ’down sequentially` (B) as well as ’down stacked` (C).

Show Identical 1x Cuts having an identical display are only depicted once.

Arrange Below The cuts are not depicted on the left and/or on the right of the main view (mostly the front view), but beneath the last views, one beside the other.

Detailing Style

572

Symbol Outside Cut arrows are displayed outside of the last dimensioning chains. Otherwise, they are fixed directly at the part even in front of the dimensioning chains.

Symbol Template Here, you can select a template describing the display of cut labeling. These templates can be defined within the command “Insert 2D cut”.

Labeling Here, you indicate the cut designation (without the code letter for cut) that has to be used for labeling the cut views

Cut Code Here, you enter the code letter (or number) that has to be used to describe the first cut of a group. All other cuts of this group will be counted accordingly in increasing order.

Group Neighboring Parts

Display The neighboring parts of a group are also depicted. These are the parts where the group is connected, which however don’t belong to this group any more.

With Position Flags The position flags of the neighboring parts are also inserted in the view.

Detailing Style The detailing style used for displaying the neighboring parts.

Search Area The size of an imaginary box around the whole group. Everything inside of this box will be displayed as neighbouring part up to the edges of this box. You may define the box in the three input fields separately for X-, Y- and Z-direction of the group.

Group End Plates:

Display A single part detail of the end plates will be depicted with displayed connection shape on the corresponding side of the group, if end or base plates exist.

With Component Group Style The end plates are depicted with the detailing style used for the component group. Otherwise, they are always displayed with their own detailing style.

Detailing Style

573

View Direction Here, you specify the view direction of the end plate detail related to the group. Inside – The shape to be connected is depicted as cut. Outside – The shape to be connected is depicted as hidden. Above – The shape to be connected is depicted as cut together with base plates and as hidden together with end plates.

Min. Distance The distance of the end plate details towards the other views of the group.

Detailing Style

574

Group Others Display Origin The zero point reference of coordinate dimensioning of the

group is displayed as reference point or at American dimensioning option as special symbol for “Running dimensions (RD)”.

> Symbol Size Here, you can enter the size of the reference point. The RD symbol characteristics at American dimensioning option are specified in dimensioning parameters.

Show Northern Direction A mark is displayed at the group showing the alignment with regard to a global northern direction. In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.

With Part Number The US-part number or position number as well as the quantity of pieces is shown together with the longitudinal dimension chain. However, the US-part number has to exist already, i.e. the option is not activated unless an update has been made. In the global settings, the American dimensioning style has to be activated.

Indicate Mounting Position In the case of stiffeners and web angles, it is specified whether these are situated on the front or back side of the web or on both sides of the web (in case of identical parts). To recognize identical parts, the parts have already to be equipped with a position number. Only a simple comparison is made here by means of position number and position of the part’s center.

Detailing Style

575

Tab Connection node

Group Selection and Cut

Selection with Box All component parts situated within the indicated box are depicted. Otherwise, only the parts belonging to the main connection of the gusset are displayed.

Box Size (X,Y,Z) Enter the size of the selection box in the input fields X, Y and Z. The distances refer to the component part coordinate system of the main shape and are measured from the center of the main connection.

Cut at Box Here you select the distance to be used for cutting the depicted shapes. At Selection Box – The selected parts are cut off at the borders of the selection box. At Cut Box – The selected parts are cut off at the individual borders of a cut box. The result will be that e.g. the supports are depicted a little bit longer, but no other component parts of this extended area will be depicted.

Detailing Style

576

Box Size (X,Y,Z) Enter the size of the cut box in the input fields X, Y and Z. The distances refer to the component part coordinate system of the main shape and are measured from the center of the main connection.

Group Others

System Point The system points (work points) of the involved connection shapes are depicted. These are the points of intersection between the center lines of the individual connection shapes and the main shape such as e.g. a support.

> Symbol Size Here, you enter the symbol size.

For more detailed information about how to create a gusset detail, please refer to the chapter ’DetailCenter/Gusset Details’ of this manual.

Detailing Style

577

Tab Views

Group Display Variant

Standard View The overview is displayed as standard 2D-depiction where all hidden edges are correctly determined.

Anchor Plan An anchor plan with alternatively two different scales is generated. Display of the base plates can thus be depicted in an enlarged display.

> Details Sc 1: Here, you enter the scale of base plate details in the anchor plan. However, an anchor plan can only be generated if you have linked the view “Anchor Plan” in the component parts list with this style setting.

> With Columns In addition to the anchor details, the columns are also displayed as cross-section.

> Columns As Object The columns in the anchor plan are displayed as intelligent 2D-Objects.

Detailing Style

578

> Offset Edge Here, you specify the distance the beginning of the sketch drawing has to have from the insertion point of the shape. If you indicated a relative length smaller than 100%, this is also the beginning of the center line.

Rel. Length Here, you specify the length of the sketch drawing as relative value related to the shape length. The rest will only be displayed as center line.

Only Within Only those parts are taken into consideration which are situated completely or at least up to their half within the work frame. Thus you can make a special selection out of the area – otherwise, all parts are shown which are situated on the level of the work frame (i.e. in the way you would see them in reality.

Use XRef The parts added to the model via XREF’s are displayed and dimensioned as well. The above mentioned display filters are also valid for these component parts. Please refer to your AutoCAD documentation where you will find a description how to work with XREF’s.

At original Position The generated view is not put into x/y plane (z=0), but it is aligned and placed in the same way like in the model. This permits the insertion as overlapping in an already existing 3D-model (e.g. for facilities construction). The option is not available when the view output is scaled.

Limit to work area Here you determine the effect of the limit of the work area on the represented components. Not used - The border has no effect, all parts are shown which are located in the plane of the frame (that is, as it appears in reality). Only parts inside – Only the parts wholly or at least half within the work area are included in the selection. 2D-Cutout – the 2D-contours of the components are cut out at the lines of the frame. Dimensions, texts etc., whose insert point is located outside are no longer represented.

Group View Depth

View Frame The view depths assigned to the work frames are used for views.

Dialog Default The view depths specified in this dialog are used for views.

Detailing Style

579

> Front/Back Enter the view depths Front and Back, which have to be used for the views.

Advanced view depth Provides an extended view depth for the purpose of identifying bracings (where these are controlled via a separate structural element). See also “View depth” in this chapter. If the structural element is located within this area, all parts it contains will be affected provided that at least one part falls within the normal view depth.

> Front/Back Used to specify the visual depths Front and Back to be used for the extended view depth.

Max. Distance Enter the maximum distance another work frame is allowed to be removed from the current view to be interpreted there as construction axis for axis display and dimensioning.

Displacement Enter a displacement the plane used for the view has to have from the actual work frame (in view direction). If the view plane doesn’t have to be exactly in the work frame plane, this will save you an additional view.

Concrete reinforcement Here you specify which reinforcement objects are to be represented in the view if a component contains reinforcing objects. Do not represent – no reinforcement is used. Complete component –all reinforcement objects of the component are used, even if these already are outside of the field of vision. With field of view – only those reinforcement objects of a component are used which are also within the field of view. Please note that this only pertains to a preselection which you can additionally limit. Further details are found in ‘ProConcrete`.

Group symbol dimensions

If you use the ‘US Stick’ part display mode, specific object groups can be displayed in the form of symbols. See also under “Displaying as symbols” in the “Displaying parts” chapter.

Symbol size The size of the symbol for moment connections. (A)

Extension The maximum extension for symbols for bracings, where symbol type ‘A’ has been selected. (B)

Length/Spacing The line length for symbols for bracings. Negative values determine the spacing between two symbol lines. (C)

Horizontal offset The inward horizontal offset when bracings are displayed as symbols. (D)

Detailing Style

580

Vertical offset The outward vertical offset when bracings are displayed as symbols. (E)

The dimensions given for bracings always pertain to the insertion lines of the structural element (at bracing level), so bracings located off-centre are displaced accordingly in the display.

Detailing Style

581

Construction Axes in Overviews The figure below shows the connections between current view and construction axes. In the current view (gray) of work area 1 the construction axes A, B and C would be displayed. The corresponding work frames contain the information about axis description and text display. As, however, the construction axis C is situated outside the displayed construction, it could be hidden with the “Axes only within” option. The axes of the small work area 2 would only be displayed if the smallest distance of the corresponding relevant work frame was smaller than the preset value of ‘Max. Distance’ for the visual depth. If different values have been indicated for the left and right axis description, the description is used which is next to the current view.

View depth The view depth for a view, i.e. which parts can be displayed, is defined based on the intersecting distances in the working area or the settings of the detail style. If an object lies outside the zone parallel to the plane of projection, it cannot be displayed. A distinction is drawn here between normal view depth and extended view depth, e.g. for bracings.

Detailing Style

582

The following illustration shows the relationships between the current plane of projection, the direction of projection and the view depths: The parts of the bracing B1 and B2 can be included in the view from above in their entirety under the settings for the view, since their structural elements (crosses) lie within the extended view depth. This enables all parts of a bracing to be displayed or faded out – regardless of whether only individual parts lie within the normal view depth. At least one part of the bracing must however lie within the normal view depth, since this depth takes first priority.

Displacement of Reference Plane The reference plane of the depiction can be displaced towards the corresponding work frame by an additional value. Thus you can get a more suitable display especially in case of intersections without having to generate a separate view frame. In the example below, the intersection view has to be generated at the constructional axis 2. As all shapes are situated centrally, the result would normally be a depiction like (1), because the shapes of the web are cut, too. IWhen you enter a small value for displacement, the intersection plan can be situated outside of the web, and only the roof of the building gets a visible shading.

Detailing Style

583

Connection Details and Cranked Views or Cuts In addition to standard views on work areas, ProSteel can also generate cranked views and detail point overviews (connection details). The kind of view is determined by the kind of work area defining the view. Typical connection details can alternatively be generated automatically if connections with named logical links are available at the corresponding position. Please also refer to Connecting Gusset or Gusset Details. If a depth has been indicated for the work area, it is a matter of detail point overview allowing you to display several views on this area simultaneously (front view, plan view, etc.). Detailing is effected like that of a standard overview, i.e. all parts are exported as AutoCAD lines and dimensioned according to the settings for overviews. If a cranked cut has been inserted, you can display a cut though the model which is situated in different levels. You can hide undesired sections or refrain from an additional view. Depending on the position of the cutting line, the parts are cut or displayed as view. The neighboring figure shows you the different variants:

The standard front view shows the supports 1, 2 and 3 as view unless the visual depth of the work area reaches up to support 4. The cranked view only shows the supports 1 and 4 in the area of the indicated visual depth. If there were parts on the thick, black cutting line, they would be displayed as cut.

The detail point overview shows the construction 5 in the selected views (here front view and view from the right), the cutting depth results from the corresponding 3rd dimension of the cube.

Detailing Style

584

The result of detailing process for the different kinds of overviews is displayed in the following figure. The display of dimensions, position flags, etc. depends on the selected detailing style. Example (A) shows the standard view, example (B) the cranked view and example (C) a detail point overview consisting here of three partial views.

Detailing Style

585

Tab Object Display

Settings

Here you select which components will be represented in the overview plans and how they are to be represented.

To this end, you define corresponding rules and attribute these rules to the part types that you wish to include. Note: Since the procedure at this point is in principle very similar to the definition of customized dimensioning rules (and is documented in detail there), much information and many functions are to be found in the description of "Dimensioning." The procedure is consequently explained very briefly below and only the differences are described in detail.

Working with display rules You determine how different components are represented in the overview with the so-called display rules. For each rule you have the choice between several versions of representation (e.g. normal, outline or center line), you establish the position of an additional labeling text, select the line type etc. You can define as many rules as you like, which means that you will receive a drawing that features mixed representation and labeling of individual components. You now assign each rule to the desired component, whereby you can use other filters like length or field class in addition to the type of component.

Detailing Style

586

The following example shows a view in mixed representation. Only the most important profiles are fully represented and labeled in detail here. Secondary profiles, on the other hand, are reduced to single lines and adjacent buildings are represented with their own type of line and without labels.

Processing is based on the exception principle: all components for which no individual rules are defined are represented according to the specifications of the standard group. This means that you can quickly and easily define settings if many objects are to be represented in the same way. If you do not wish to represent certain components at all, that is also an individual display rule. You manage display groups exclusively via customized commands in the context menu of the allocation list. You can add display groups, allocate them certain components and delete, copy and rename existing groups. Adding and processing display groups If you select the entry Display group / Add in the context menu, a rule from the selection tree is immediately added. You can subsequently add every component to this rule. In order to add components, select a display group in the tree structure and then click on the entry Add components in the context menu. The dialog for determining individual component filters subsequently opens. For other processing functions like remove, rename etc. first select the desired group or allocation in the tree structure and then call up the context menu.

Detailing Style

587

Display settings You can determine settings within a display group independently for the primary and secondary view of a single component (based on the current detail view like, for example, the outline). In the tree structure select the display group whose settings you wish to change. You can subsequently change the values of this group on the right side. Primary/secondary view Here you select whether you wish to process the settings for the primary or secondary view. You always process the settings represented by the symbol currently displayed.

Selection symbol for primary / secondary

Settings

Display (I) The basic form of representation of a component. Not all components can be represented in all versions that differ from the standard version.

Display (II) Here you can input further specifications regarding the selected representation form if necessary.

Center line Independently of the general specifications, you can activate and/or deactivate the display of center lines here.

Line reference Here you select the starting and end point for the display of the centre / single line.

Line display Here you select the combination of line type and color (see also 2D-Display/General/Line display). The selection normally refers to the visible lines.

Component name(I) The position of the additional label text on the component.

Component name (II) Selection of the information that is to be displayed in the label text.

The following two pages contain a table listing the options to be found in the selection lists.

Detailing Style

588

Display (I)

No display The component is not represented System line Components are only represented as centre lines (if possible) US Stick Components are only represented as single lines (if possible), whereby

this can also be another reference line alongside the middle line. US Sketch The profiles are only indicated as sketch representations. These sketches

do not have to be visible from the beginning until the end of the component, but can also be displayed as a center line.

Outline Profiles are represented with the calculation of a simplified outer contour without details.

Standard The component is represented with the calculation of all available object edges.

As object The component is represented as a single, independent object (’intelligent’ 2D component).

Display (II)

No additional option The component is represented without any further changes according to the variant represented.

No holes No holes are displayed. No hidden lines No hidden lines are displayed. …hidden lines, holes No hidden lines or holes are displayed. Same line colors All lines are displayed in the color of the visible lines. Same line colors and types All lines are displayed in the color and with the line type of the visible lines. No reinforcement No reinforcement objects for the component are displayed … covered lines, reinforcement No covered lines and also no reinforcement are displayed Stick Symbols A On selection of "US Stick" bracing and moment connection elements are

represented with special symbols. See "Symbolic display." Stick Symbols B On selection of "US Stick" bracing and moment connection elements are

represented with special symbols. See "Symbolic display." 2D-representation When selected ’as object’ the component is shown in the 2D-Mode. 3D-representation When selected ’as object’ the component is shown in the 3D-Mode

Center line

Like standard specification The center line is displayed in line with the standard specifications for the center line of the detailing style.

Do not display The center line is never shown. Always display The center line is always displayed.

Line reference

Detailing Style

589

Center line The center line displayed corresponds to the center line of the component. Reference line The center line displayed corresponds to the reference line of insertion line

of the component. Reference points The center line displayed corresponds to the line between both reference

points of the component (if available).

Line display

Like standard specification All lines are represented according to the standard specifications for the line display of the detail style.

Visible, hidden etc. The visible lines (depending on the setting, however, the hidden and center lines too) are represented with the line representation selected.

Component name (I) No display No labeling text is represented. Component start The text is represented above the component at the start of the

component. Component start area The text is represented above the component in the front area. Component middle The text is represented above the component in the middle. Component end The text is represented above the component at the end of the component. Beside component The text is represented on the right side of the component. Inside component (middle) The text is represented inside the component in the middle. Inside component (start area.) The text is represented inside the component in the front area. Below component The text is represented below the component in the middle. Rotated on component The text is represented on the right side above the component at a 45°

angle.

Component name (II) Name The component name is given. Short name The short name of the component (from profile data base, if any) is

displayed. Otherwise the name is displayed. Position number The position number is given. Shipping number The shipping number is given. Name and distance from level The component name and the relative position of the component to the

view plane are given. See also "Relative height reference." Short name and distance to the plane

The short name of the component (from profile data base, if any) and the relative position of the component to the representation plane are indicated. See also ’relative height reference’

Global format specification The text is given according to the format specification of the detail style (see description of "labeling"‘). This specification may contain placeholders for the current component data.

Detailing Style

590

Individual format specification The text is given according to the format specification of the component (Entry "Note 2"). This specification can contain placeholders for the current component.

Individual or global format specification

The text is given according to both format specifications. If no entry is available in the component (individual specification) the format specification of the detail style (global specification) is used.

Detailing Style

591

Individual component labeling In addition to standard labeling featuring the component name or position number, you can create customized label texts from set and variable text components. The various placeholders are thereby replaced with current component data. If you are satisfied with a standardized text format, all you need to do is define this once in the detailing style (see "labeling"). However, it is also possible to enter the format specification in the characteristics field "Note 2" of the component and thus retain individual labeling for certain components. Possible placeholder: $(N) Name $ (LV) short name $(P) Position number $(S) Dispatch number $(M) Material description $(E) Distance to plane $(R1) Note 1 $(R2) Note 2 $(X,…) Special treatment of empty texts (see further below) Text alignment Depending on the scope of the construction, you may need different text positions and alignments to retain a clear drawing image.

The adjacent image shows examples of the different text positions, alignment and insertion points.

Output of the relative height reference The relative height reference can either be given as a complement to the component name or through the use of the placeholder $(E) in a format specification. The relative distance of the upper edge and/ or front edge of the profile to the respective view level is added, insofar as the profile is not on a level with it. The prognostic thereby depends on the direction of the view of the level. The placeholder is thereby replaced with the currently measured value. The text "O.K. =$(E" is then given as "O.K.=+50" for example. If you are working with the predefined option "Name and distance," on the other hand, you receive an output like "HEA 100 (+50)" for example.

Detailing Style

592

Special treatment of empty texts A special formatting input enables a special treatment of text replacements with empty texts. For the output of the relative height reference with a value of "0" there is no explicit text output and even the note fields do not always have content. To exclude unnecessary additional texts like "O.K.=" or Spaces, for example, you can control this with the formatting input $(X,…) independent of the replacement value. The text after the comma including a replacement value is only outputted if this replacement value for the component is not empty. Please note that you can only use one placeholder in every $(X,…) allocation. Nesting is not possible. However, you can use several allocations with different respective placeholders. Below you can see examples of components with the names HEA 100 with and without the content-controlled formatting specification respectively. Format specification Value for $(E) Output P$(N) [OK=$(E)] +50 HEA 100 [OK=+50] P$(N) [OK=$(E)] HEA 100 [OK=] P$(N) $(X,[OK=$(E)]) +50 HEA 100 [OK=+50] P$(N) $(X,[OK=$(E)]) HEA 100 P$(N) $(X,[OK=$(E)] )*** +50 HEA 100 [OK=+50] *** P$(N) $(X,[OK=$(E)] )*** HEA 100 ***

Detailing Style

593

Symbolic display If the display version "US Stick" is selected, you can also obtain a symbolic display for bracings and moment connections in addition to display as a single line. This is often used in the U.S. for the top view of vertical bracings and strut layouts. The advantage of this representation is that the key information is contained in the symbols, but the drawing is simplified. Assignment of components The assignment of components to a display group is possible via a joint selection of the components concerned. In the component selection select Bracing connection elements to select a complete bracing element and Moment connection elements to select a complete moment connection element. To enable correct recognition of the components, the latter must be modeled with the corresponding functions ("Structure object bracing connection element" for the bracing elements and/or "Moment connection element" for the moment connections). Symbols for bracing elements Bracing elements are represented by different symbols according to their construction. You have the choice between type A (slanting) and type B (straight), whereby a fixed line length should be used for type B, should the direction be represented for individual rods. If the bracing element lies above the view level the symbol is always represented above and/or left of the vertical bracing level. The beginning of the rod as a symbol is always the nearest point to the view level. The length of the lines and distances can be defined in the general specifications for views (see "symbol dimensions").

Symbols for moment connection elements

Detailing Style

594

Moment connection elements are represented by a triangle at the end of the horizontal steel girder. The size of the symbol can be specified with the general specifications for views (see "symbol dimensions").

Primary and secondary view A special rule applies to the display settings for the primary and secondary views of these object groups. This particularity can of course be used here too, for example to show a bracing for real in the front view but only as a symbol from the top. If this entire object group is assigned, the selection is always determined by the parts to which elements are attached and not by the assigned parts themselves. If, for example, at least one column appears in the secondary view, this is the secondary view for the bracing as well.

The image opposite illustrates the end plate connections between a horizontal beam and two vertical columns. The view from the top and the front view (i.e. the 2D plan) would not show any difference in the way this image is displayed, since the horizontal beam is always displayed in its primary view. A difference can however be drawn based on the columns (since elements are attached to them), as the columns appear as primary or secondary depending on the view.

Detailing Style

595

C.2.4 Dimensioning

Here, you can indicate all of the settings for the dimensioning of the components. Since this is a rather complex area, the settings are distributed among several subordinate dialogs within this main group. In addition, you will find completing dialog boxes and commands which can be opened directly from the different pages or via the context menu of the right mouse key. Dimensioning settings occupy an important place in the detailing style and contribute a great deal to the quality of workshop drawings. Therefore it is important that you have a closer look to their way of working. The following chapters first will give you a survey on the functioning and on the terms before the different options will be described in detail. Common or similar things will only be described once due to a better clarity. Extended Conception It is for the first time that a new conception for automatic dimensioning was introduced with version 17.1. The distribution of ProSteel all over the world led to considerably increasing demands on a flexibly adaptable dimensioning. The idea of previous versions was to cover a wide range of variants with a few fixed default settings by intelligent automatic mechanisms. An increasing number of “exception-buttons”, however, meant increasing confusion. This is the reason why the new conception now permits precise default settings for the different sections so that you can better adapt your detailing style to the construction and to necessary drawing standards. With version 18.0, this new conception has once again been modified to facilitate the proceeding of settings, quality remaining unchanged. On the other hand, this had the result that many times the amount of new dimensioning possibilities has been created. At the same time, the program has been adapted to the extended group structure of ProSteel. At first glance, the great number of parameters and possibilities will perhaps frighten you. However, when you take a closer look, you will fast find out that the default settings for dimensioning follow a standardized logic and that therefore things are logically repeated. The example on the following page shows dimensioning of a complexe component part group as it now is possible with the new detailed setting structure automatically and without further follow-up treatment. Example for a complex component group dimensioning

Detailing Style

596

Optimum Prerequisites in 3D-Model The prerequisites for practise-oriented dimensioning are already generated by appropriate steps during 3D-modelling. The references between the different component parts are generated by means of logical links. However, when you have deleted them afterwards, it is not possible any more to determine all relations via detailing and dimensioning can less get its bearings. Appropriate insertion or reference lines which can still be modified later generate the prerequisites for the desired dimensioning references. Thus, when you want to have a correct dimensioning of openings, disturbing edges, etc., just set the corresponding reference edges already in the model. Of course the right modelling function, too decides on the later result of dimensioning. When you want e.g. to have recognized end and base plates as such, you have to create them with the corresponding 3D-function, too.

Detailing Style

597

Dimensioning Structure ProSteel dimensioning is divided into several main groups for single parts, component part groups, model-views, etc. which can be set independently of each other. Within each main group, there are still other subordinate groups the parameters of which are also independent of each other. Trans-sectoral settings facilitate the common use and reduce the number of necessary parameters – e. g. dimensioning of the main parts of component part groups are controlled via single parts setting.

Detailing Style

598

However, this structuring is only the major selection of parameters. Each subordinate group itself again consists of an inner structure with independent default settings for the different detailing processes (of single parts) or for the different component parts (of component part groups or model-views). Each single component part or detailing type permits individual default settings for different dimensioning directions and component part views. However, a considerable repetition degree is reached here. Inner Structure Here, you see the inner structure of a subordinate group as it exists for dimensioning of add-on pieces in component part groups.This is the structure with the most variants as the dimensioning of a component part group has to take into consideration a lot of different conditions. In the following, we will therefore describe the essential matters with the help of the settings for dimensioning of a component part group. As you can see it is possible to preset a different dimensioning point for shapes in bent component part groups (radial) compared with the standard component part groups (linear). For stiffeners things may again be different.

Dimensioning Groups You can generate any dimensioning groups with identical settings you like by using the component parts of the inner structures. The advantage is that identical settings for different component parts can fast be made or modified. The number of parameters still allows a clear view. At the same time, an essential limit of previous versions is superseded: synonymous component parts which were differently modelled in the 3D-model can be dimensioned together by means of one setting. Let us take stiffeners in a shape here as an example which have once be manually created as polyplates and once by using the stiffener function. Nesting Complex group structures such as e.g. an assembly can consist of several component part groups and subgroups. Nesting in dimensioning (individual dimensioning) permits complete dimensioning even of subordinate groups within a parent group. Additional detail drawings can thus be omitted. As there is only one set of parameters per hierarchy type available for subordinate structures, individual structures can be excluded or limited in dimensioning via filter.

Detailing Style

599

Typical applications of nested dimensioning are for example the dimensioning of the detailings of add-on parts in groups or the dimensioning of the position of component part add-on parts in assemblies.

Besides the add-on dimensions (1) of polyplates, this detail of a component part group still has an individual dimensioning like a single part dimensioning (2).

Detailing Style

600

Dimensioning Groups All essential parameter settings are made per partial sector via freely definable dimensioning groups with any assignment of component part types, i.e. you can define if need be how complex the structure of dimensioning has to be. Compared with previous versions, this proceeding is considerably more practise-oriented because first you decide (a) how you want to dimension and then (b) which component parts have to be dimensioned in this way. In the easiest case of component part group dimensioning only the settings for the overall dimension and the settings of a common dimensioning group for all add-on parts – independent of their type – is available. However, if a more complex dimensioning is required, you can add further dimensioning groups or special dimensions as you like and thus specialise the default settings even further. Define Guidelines for Dimensioning In principle, a dimensioning group complies with a clear guideline for the component parts to be dimensioned. By means of the parameter set of the group you define how the component parts have to be dimensioned. This parameter set is divided into different rules for straight and bent dimensioning directions, favourable and unfavourable views, etc. By means of the assigned component parts you define which component parts have to be dimensioned with these rules. This can either be a very general selection (e.g. all shapes) or a very special selection (e.g. sheet metal plates bigger than 200x200 mm). Dimensioning is worked off according to the principle of exception: All component parts or detailings for which no own rule has been defined, are treated together with the settings of the so-called standard group. This group exists in any partial sector of dimensioning and permits a fast selection at identical rules. If certain component parts don’t have to be dimensioned, they have to be assigned to a group as well, because ‘No dimensioning’ is a kind of rule, too. For example, you could define the different rules for all component parts having to be dimensioned and then set the standard group to ‘No dimensioning’. Special Component Part Groups, Detailings and Special Dimensions Each component part can be assigned to a standard dimensioning group. However, apart from their common properties shapes and sheet metal plates also have features which don’t mean anything to the other of both types.This is the reason why in a standard group only the common properties of dimensioning are available.

Detailing Style

601

If you want to make use of the extended properties, you can e.g. insert a shape dimensioning group to which exclusively shapes can be assigned. However, this group offers many more setting possibilities – especially just for shapes. The detailings of single parts (drill holes etc.) as well as certain other dimensions are dimensioning rules to which nothing else can be assigned. However, here it logically is a matter of dimensioning groups as well which can be added if need be. These very often are very special groups and can only exist once per dimensioning area. The overall dimension of a detail is also a special dimension. As it is often required, it is a kind of standard dimension which always exists. User-defined dimensions constitute a special case. As many dimension points can be dimensioned on as many reference points as desired, although these points need to be defined individually on the 3D model. Multiple Dimensioning Normally, a component part is dimensioned only once, e.g. drill hole dimensioning. This option is already known from previous versions. The flexible structure now also permits multiple dimensioning of component parts. Thus it is possible to (a) dimension all shapes via the drill holes as you did up to now and (b) to dimension certain shapes additionally via the center axes by using completely independent default settings.

Multiple dimensioning of a straight shape. The outside girders are equipped with an additional dimensioning chain via the center axes.. Multiple dimensioning of a bent shape. The connection plates are equipped with an additional dimensioning chain with the angle dimensions towards the edge of the component part.

Detailing Style

602

The following example of an assignment shows the structure of a more complex dimensioning. Three additional dimensioning groups with independent rules are defined and an additional special dimension is fixed.

default setting for all shape types (standard group, added as an option) Additional dimensioning for U- and C-shapes for completion, i.e. multiple dimensioning (special shape group, added as an option) default setting for all sheet metal plates and stiffeners (standard group, added as an option) default setting for all other component parts (standard group, always existing) system dimensions of the construction (special dimension, added as an option) overall dimension of the construction (standard group, always existing)

As the standard group has to process all other component part types, this in principle is a standard dimensioning group. Copy Settings Most of the dimensioning groups can be copied within a partial sector. At first, no component parts are assigned to this copy, even if there are already some assignments in the original group. Copies have always the same type, i.e. if the original group is a shape group, the copy again is a shape group, too. Then, you can rename the copy and assign the desired component parts to it. Special dimensions and single part detailings can exist only once and therefore cannot be copied.

Detailing Style

603

Standard Default Settings When a new dimensioning group is created, it is equipped with standard default settings which in most cases produce proper results. You can always reset a group into this standard state if it appears to be “hopelessly altered”. In addition, it is also possible to create a complete standard default setting for each partial sector of dimensioning (e.g. dimensioning of add-on parts in groups). Apart from the settings, this standard default setting also contains an assignment of component parts. The standard default setting has been optimized for typical support/girder constructions and is a good starting-point for user-defined adaptations. The standard default settings were defined by the manufacturer and cannot be modified in order to find a uniform starting position at each user and at any time. Kindly make use of the standard loading functions of the detailing style to define your own standards. Conversion of Former Drawings Models which were created with version 17.1 or 17.2 had a fixed default setting of independent parameter records. When you open these models with version 18.0, a separate dimensioning group will be created for each of these parameter records so that the behaviour will be analogous to the previous version in case of parameter modifications. You can of course remove groups which are not required or modify the assignment of component parts afterwards. If desired, you can thus sum up identical default settings to a common group.

Detailing Style

604

Dimensioning Areas ProSteel differentiates different dimensioning areas which you can imagine as independent local areas. The respective alignment is determined by the involved component parts and influences the indications of place and direction in the dialogs. As an option, there is also a forced horizontal or vertical alignment independent of the position for each part dimensioning in a dimensioning area. Local Areas in Component Part Groups Within a view – that means e.g. the front view – these areas can exist several times except for the global area.

Global Area (1) These are all dimensioning chains which are situated outside the component part group and which describe the position of the subparts with regard to the main part. The horizontal alignment is always determined by the main part of the group and the smallest extent corresponds to a rectangular which you could draw around all component parts in direction of the main part. Since the inner dimensions which are perpendicular to it are always fixed at the corresponding add-on piece (inner dimensions), they are assigned to the local area if distances have been specified. The checked example here shows the area below the group. Local Area (2a and Connection Area (2b)

Detailing Style

605

These are all dimensioning chains which are situated inside the component part group and which describe the position of the subparts with regard to their direct reference part. In case of dimensioning of subparts with local reference (2a), the horizontal alignment is determined by the corresponding reference part and the smallest extent corresponds to a rectangular around this reference part. In case of aligned dimensioning of subparts (2b), the horizontal alignment is determined by the corresponding add-on piece and the smallest extent corresponds to a rectangular around this add-on piece. .

Here, you see a comparison of the three possible variants by which the butt strap can be dimensioned as an add-on piece of a component part group. The dimensions according to variant (1) and (2a) are alternatively possible; the dimensions according to variant (2b) can be attached in addition.

Individual Dimensioning (3) These are all dimensioning chains which are situated inside the component part group and which describe the production dimensions of individual subparts. The horizontal alignment is determined by the corresponding subpart and the smallest extent corresponds to a rectangular around this subpart. Additional Views (4) These are all dimensioning chains which are situated outside the component part group in possible additional views so that here it is strictly speaking a matter of another global area. These additional views are for example the turned down endplates (here production dimensions) or cuts and details (here dimensioning of position). The horizontal alignment is determined by the alignment of the view and the smallest extent corresponds to a rectangular which you could draw around all component parts in this view direction. The notion ‘inside’ here refers to a typical setting of dimensioning distances. At corresponding default settings, these ‘inside’ dimensioning chains can actually be situated outside of the group as well. If the main part of a component part group or the local reference parts are bent shapes, the dimensioning direction or the surrounding rectangular will follow this bend.

Detailing Style

606

Individual Areas in Complex Group Structures When the corresponding detail is a complex group structure (such as e.g. an assembly), individual dimensioning is not exclusively limited to production dimensions of single parts. Within an assembly, the contained component part groups can be dimensioned individually as well as it is the case with standard component part groups (see ‘Nested Dimensioning’). In this case, several independent types of individual areas exist which can be managed separately. Each of these areas would correspond to the global area of the corresponding substructure if you displayed them as separate detail. Assignment It depends on the kind of 3D-modelling whether a component part can be reliably assigned to a local area. Most of the ProSteel functions create logical links between the involved component parts. By means of these links it is possible to determine which component part has been connected to another component part and by means of which connecting component parts this connection was realized (e.g. web angle). Thus, the assignment connected part and reference part is clearly defined. When you cut however for example two shapes by means of a cutting line so that they match with each other, no logical link will be created there. In this case, you can force a relation of the component parts by the manual link (PS_MANUAL_LINK). The manual link should also be used when the automatically created link of a connection can - for whatever reasons - not be evaluated for determining the relations. When the assignment cannot be determined and you selected a local reference of the component part, the component parts in question will be assigned to the global area.

Detailing Style

607

Local Areas in Overviews Different local dimensioning areas can be determined for overviews, too. They are however not realized via component part relations but via a geometrical analysis of shape dimensions. The shapes are classified according to length and position and then possible segments are built after an evaluation. Finally, these segments are brought together to local areas within certain tolerance ranges. You can preset the parameters for area analysis in detail; we have, however, to admit that this requires a high degree of experience.

The above figure shows the plan view on a platform construction as it is automatically dimensioned by using several local areas. You can make separate settings for horizontal and vertical shapes as well as for shapes visible in cross-section – each one in longitudinal and transversal direction. In addition, there is another global out-lying area having its own default settings. Only those shapes are dimensioned in common dimensioning chains which are situated completely or partly in one of these areas, if these should also be

Detailing Style

608

assigned to the inner area. The global outer/inner area is determined by means of a simple snap area without special analysis algorithm.

Outer Area (1) The global outer area is a uniform area which is seen from the overall dimensions of the view to the inside. The dimensioning chains are always situated outside of the view. Inner Area (2) The remaining area is the global inner area. Depending on the default settings, the dimensioning chains are always situated inside or outside of the view or the shapes are completely excluded from dimensioning.

Alternatively, you can have determined local areas by means of an analysis algorithm and dimension them instead of the global inner area (but in addition to the global outer area).

Local Area (1) Here, you see a local area with vertical alignment containing the complete platform part on the left side. Altogether, the example contains three areas (1x horizontal, 2x vertical). Subdivision of Areas (2) (3) Each local area can again be divided further. Then, each segment (2) resp. (3) contains its own dimensioning chain.

The direction of the local area (horizontal dimensioning direction) is determined by the proportions of sides. The limit for a direction change to main direction is at 2/3 of the long side. If there is, however, a further subdivision of the area in

Detailing Style

609

segments, direction change will not be effected any more.

Indications of Place and Direction Indications of place such as beginning, end, above, left, etc. always depend on the alignment of the component part or area. In the neighboring figure, the position of the top (horizontal, long side) and the position of the left side (vertical, short side) of a component part are displayed, dependent on its insertion direction. In addition, the figure also shows that the direction is not inevitably running from starting point to endpoint of the insertion (starting point here is checked by the black point). The standard reference point of the dimensioning (bottom left) is indicated by a black triangle. When it is a matter of local dimensioning areas of connected shapes, the standard starting point is always the end of the shape which is situated nearer to the corresponding reference part. So to speak, this reference part is the “higher ranking” part with regard to the main part. However, all indications of place continue to follow the logic described above. The decision whether a component part now is situated ‘above’ or ‘below’ another component part, depends on the direction of the selected reference part.

Detailing Style

610

The example on the previous page shows a component part group with the main part (1) and several add-on shapes (2) and (3), which for their part are containing stiffeners (4). A local dimensioning reference with ‘Component Part Start’ as refererence point was selected for dimensioning the stiffeners. As you can see, dimensioning is done along the component parts containing the stiffeners and each dimensioning chain starts near the reference part. In this example, the component part (2) is situated above the main part (1) and the component part (3) is situated below component part (2). Position of Dimensioning Chains You can either by force preset the position of the dimensioning chains within an area or you make select them automatically. Component parts can be dimensioned on the side on which – with regard to their reference part – they are situated. In addition, a favourable side is defined, depending on the position, as it is displayed in the following figure:

Detailing Style

611

Dimensioning chains which are situated close together can be summed up according to rules which have to be defined. Thus, a clear drawing will be possible and collisions of dimensions will be avoided right from the beginning.

Detailing Style

612

Reference Axis of the Shape In the shape properties, you can assign so-called reference points or axes to a shape, which first are identical with the insertion axis of the component part after insertion. This allows you to force dimensioning on a pre-defined reference to relate e.g. all important hole dimensions symmetrically to the center axis or to “Upper Edge Steel” for plateform girders. In overviews, you will also get the most important dimensions of the construction directly by means of these reference points. Since these reference points can be modified later, you can for example insert a shape on its center line in the grid, dimensioning, however, can nevertheless be related to the upper edge of the shape.

Reference Axis (1) The insertion axis of the shape or an explicitely assigned reference axis in the 3D model (A) Reference Point (2) Derived target point of dimensioning in the 2D-plans (B)

System Points of Construction The system points here are the theoretical intersection points between the center axes of two connected shapes. A logical link has to exist between these component parts, which is the case in most construction situations (such a link is for example also created by an intersection at welded-in diagonals of a truss). When a logical link doesn’t exist, you can define dependence later via “manual link” (please also refer to Dimensioning Areas/Assignment).

Detailing Style

613

Primary and Secondary View Settings permit separate defaults for primary and secondary views of subparts. This allows you e.g. to stop the dimensioning of shapes in cross-section position or to dimension plates by means of the contained drill holes or alternatively by the plate thickness.

Primary View (1) At shapes – except for flats – this is the view showing the component part in its longitudinal direction. At plates or flat steel shapes, on the contrary, it is the view, showing the component part in plan view. Secondary View (2) At shapes – except for flats – this is the view showing the component part in its cross-section. At plates or flat steel shapes, on the contrary, it is the view, which normally shows the thickness. Please don’t forget that the differentiation is made via the coordinate system of the component parts. If it differs – for whatever a reason – from standard, you will get different results with regard to quality.

Detailing Style

614

Linear and Radial Dimensioning Chains When the reference part is a bent shape, the dimensioning points can be dimensioned with radial dimensioning chains along the arc direction. You can choose between circular lengths, angular deviations or both values. Measured circular lengths are always related to the center axis of the reference shape; as an option, it is also possible to indicate the reference radius in all combinations.

Sometimes a mixed dimensioning, i.e. a combination of linear and bent dimensioning chains is possible at the same time (as displayed in the above example) which you can gather from the following table. Dimensioning variant Linear Radial

Detailing in single parts Yes Yes

Single part dimensions of Yes Yes main parts in comp. part groups

Single part dimensions of depending on type depending subparts in comp. part groups on type

Add-on dimensions of subparts Yes Yes with global dimension reference

Add-on dimensions of subparts depending on type depending with local dimension reference on type

If simultaneous dimensioning is not possible, only the preset settings will be used for the type in question; selection depends on the current reference shape. Thus it is possible to use always the outer edges of subparts in case of straight reference parts and to indicate only the angles in case of bent shapes together with local dimension references.

Detailing Style

615

Reference Points of Dimensioning In principle, each dimensioning chain is created by fitting together individual dimensions which start in a selected reference point and end in the dimensioning point in question. In case of overlapping, the line segments are divided accordingly to form a continuous dimensioning chain. Reference Point (Starting Point) In most of the cases, the starting point of a dimensioning chain is the beginning of the component part; at groups, this often is the beginning of the main part (resp. of the local reference part in case of local references). Reference Points of Dimensioning Chains

Beginning Ref. Part The dimension begins in the start point of the reference part.

Beginning Group The dimension begins in the start point of the group.

Edge Ref. Part The dimension begins in the edge point of the reference part (starting or end point) which is situated closer to the component part to be dimensioned.

Edge Group The dimension begins in the edge point of the group (starting or end point) which is situated closer to the component part to be dimensioned.

Center Ref. Part The dimension begins in the center of the reference part.

Reference Point The dimension begins in the first reference point of the reference part. Often, this is also the projected point of the insertion or reference axis of the component part.

Edge Ref. Point If two reference points exist, the dimension begins in the reference point which is situated closer to the component part to be dimensioned. If only one reference point exists, this corresponds to the default setting ‘Reference Point’.

Connecting Shape The dimension begins in the point of intersection of the center axes of the reference part and of the connecting shape belonging to the component part to be dimensioned.

The example on the following page shows some important reference points of dimensioning chains. Web angle dimensioning could be made on the starting point of the group (1) or on the starting point of the main part (2). Dimensioning on the edge of the reference part would dimension the two web angles on the left on point (2) and the web angles on the right on point (3) – in case of edge group, this would be the points (1) and (4).

Detailing Style

616

In the present example, however, the variant connecting shape was selected and thus you obtain the two dimensioning chains (A) as result. Dimensioning chain (B) results from the fact that, in addition, the reference points are dimensioned, too.

Dimension Point (Target Point) The target point of dimensioning is determined by the component part to be dimensioned or by the detailing (e.g. drill hole). Depending on the kind of component part or detailing, you often have a great number of different options for selection. Most of the options are self-explanatory so that we will only describe some common features here. For more detailed information, please refer to the short descriptions of the different sections. The importance of the component part’s reference edges depends on the dimensioning direction of the dimensioning chain (see also: Indications of Place and Direction). From top to bottom, the example shows the dimensioning chains reaching from the beginning of the component part to the reference edges front edge, rear edge, outer edge, inner edge.

Detailing Style

617

Here, too the center of the reference part in question is the dividing line for the options ‘inner edge’ and ‘outer edge’. To allow fast and practical dimensioning of different shapes, an automatic selection of dimension points is available (depending on the component part) which is sufficient for most cases. Here, you see the defaults for the different shape types, positions of component parts and directions of dimensioning chains:

Apart from dimensioning on the insertion-reference point, on possibly existing drill holes or even on combinations of both, you can select some special forms as target point. The example shows the dimension point contact area for the dimensions in longitudinal direction. The edge which is turned to the reference or connecting shape will be dimensioned.

Additional Dimensions You can add different additional dimensions to each dimensioning chain. These are added later to obtain „closed“ dimensioning chains. The additional dimensions permit uniform dimensioning running; on the other hand the dimensioning reference can be made clearer, you can eliminate insignificant remaining dimensions and thus reduce the number, when you don’t use them.

Detailing Style

618

American Dimensioning When you selected American Style as general default setting for dimensioning, you obtain additional labels and dimensions as they are common in the USA. At the moment, only a limited configuration of these additions is possible. They depend on the importance of the component parts in the model. Together with the generally available settings, you have thus the possibility to create drawings according to these standards, too.

Connecting Condition (1) You are informed about the used shapes and hole distances for web angle connections. However, this is only the case, when the web angles belong to the component part group. Control Dimensions (2) (3) At girders, the residual dimensions related to the system points of supports are indicated as negative values (2) and the distance between the system points (3). When it is a matter of supports, only the height level will be indicated. Information about Main Part (4) Data concerning shape and length of the main part are added to the dimensioning chain containing the overall length of the component part group. Rebound (5) The distance between the main part and the overall measure of the component part group is indicated as individual dimension. Reference Point (6) The origin of the group for coordinate dimensions is indicated by the symbol ‘RD’ and reference arrow instead of by a simple point.

Detailing Style

619

Dimensioning of Steel and Concrete ProSteel permits dimensioning of component parts made of concrete in overviews even if the application ‘ProConcrete 3D’ is not available. This enables e. g. the design engineer to put appropriate overview plans at the disposal of customer or planner. If this additional option is not necessary or if separate plans have to be made, the corresponding group can be completely deactivated without having to deactivate the corresponding component parts separately. In addition, there are less component parts in the selection lists, a contribution to a better clarity. Here, you see an example for dimensioning a plan view:

Detailing Style

620

Dialog Structure of Dimensioning As already mentioned in the introduction, dimensioning clearly is the most substantial area within a detailing style. There, you can make independent settings of different detail types or nested dimensioning structures in a great number of part areas so that reasonably set parameters can be used in several detailing styles at the same time. When you work with the preview of the DetailCenter while making the setting, it may be helpful to use the ‘intelligent’ arrangement of parameters. Depending on the selection, the number of displayed parameters is reduced and sorted. See also chapter DetailCenter/Global Settings. Menu Structure By selecting a dialog tab in a part area (1), you frequently come to the settings for dimensioning chains. Here, you find another list or tree structure (2) where you can create or process the dimensioning groups. Each dimensioning group controls one or several dimensioning chains in the actual drawing. The essential commands for the management of dimensioning groups, assignment of component parts and some additional functions are found in the context menu of the right mouse key (3), depending on the selection.

On the following pages, you will find a detailed description of the different part areas, their settings and additional functions.

Detailing Style

621

Structure of Part Areas The following survey shows all independent part areas of dimensioning in standard dialog display. When you selected the ‘intelligent’ arrangement of parameters, some of these areas are hidden or they are situated on another position of the tree structure. However, it is always exactly the same data record.

General default settings which are valid for all areas (e.g. distance of one dimensioning chain to the other, dimensioning styles, dimensioning of drill holes etc.) Dimensioning of single parts details, individual dimensioning of the main parts in groups Dimensioning of group and subgroup details, individual dimensioning of groups and subgroups and single parts in assemblies, individual dimensioning of subgroups in groups; individual dimensioning of add-on parts in groups Dimensioning of assembly details Dimensioning of connection details Dimensioning of overviews and anchor plans

Detailing Style

622

The arrangement corresponds to the hierarchic structure of the part area. By selecting an entry, you directly reach the parent or subordinate dialog tabs of the corresponding part area. As e.g. the entry “Cut” is situated below the entry “Reference Points” in the part area “Group”, the dimensioning chains for intersections in groups are set here.

Detailing Style

623

Working with Dimensioning Groups Dimensioning groups are exclusively managed via separate commands in the context mensus and their subordinate menus on the different dialog tabs. You can add user-defined dimensioning groups; assign certain component parts to them depending on their type and delete, copy, etc. existing groups. Add Component Part Groups Select the entry Dimensioning Groups / Add in the context menu to add a standard dimensioning group to the selection tree at once. You can add any component part type to this group. However, not all setting parameters for dimensioning chains are available here. Use the command Dimensioning Groups / Rename to enter a suitable name for the new group afterwards. On the other hand, when you select the command Dimensioning Groups / Add Component Part Group, you can determine the group type as well as some further information in an additional dialog. Thus, the group is specialised in certain component part types with more setting parameters.

Group Dimensioning Group

Detailing Style

624

Type Group Here you select the type of dimensioning group. General Group – for each component part type Group Shapes – for straight and bent shapes Group Polyplates – for all plate types and stiffeners Group Connecting Part – for end plates, web angles, etc. Group Subgroups – for special subgroups

Group Name the name of the group in the selection tree

Group Labelling

Type Labelling Here you select the type of labelling for the dimensioning chain. You can choose between None, Automatic, Group Name and User-defined Default.

Selection Direction Here you indicate which dimensioning chains have to be equipped with a labelling.

Labelling Text Here you enter a suitable labelling text if you selected the option ‘User-defined Default’.

For more detailed information about labelling, please refer to the section ‘Labelling of Dimensioning Chains’ in this chapter.

You can add or copy any number of component part groups and assign component parts to them. If need be, it is thus possible to build very complex dimensioning structures. Add Special Dimensions and Detailings Select the entry Dimensioning Groups / Add Special Dimensions or Dimensioning Groups / Add Detailing in the context menu to add special dimensions and, at single parts, the detailings, too. The selection dialog already described under Component Part Groups appears where you can select the corresponding special dimension or detailing. The offered selection depends on the part area of dimensioning. You can add special groups only once and they cannot be copied. Already inserted groups therefore are not displayed any more for selection. Copy, Rename and Delete In order to do this, you first have to select the desired group in the tree structure and then call the context menu. When you copy a component part group, a new group of the same type will be created and all parameter settings will be adopted (possibly existing

Detailing Style

625

assignments of component parts will however not be copied). Select the entry Dimensioning Groups / Copy. Then, you can rename the copy and assign the component parts. Rename the group using the entry Dimensioning Groups / Rename. Enter the new name directly in the tree structure. Delete the group using the entry Dimensioning Groups / Delete. In case of component part groups, it may be that the component parts once registered by this group will be processed by other groups.

Detailing Style

626

Assign Component Parts Depending on the type, certain component parts can be assigned to any standard dimensioning group or to the special component part groups. Select the desired group and then click the entry Add Component Parts in the context menu. The following dialog opens:

The content of the selection lists depends on the type of dimensioning group, on the settings and on the component parts already assigned to. Group Selection Lists

Detailing Style

627

Upper List Here you select the principle component part type (main type) such as shapes, plates, etc. you want to add. If you do not want any particular restriction here, select the ‘All types’ entry.

Subtypes Here you select a subtype with which you can limit the selection of the upper list. However, subtypes are not available for all component part types. Thus you can limit an assignment e.g. only to all U-shapes. Select the entry ‘All Shape Types’ if you don’t want to limit the assignment.

Group Size Area

Length, Width,... Enter an area with which you limit the selection in the fields From and To. If you enter the value 0 in both fields, this size will not be taken into consideration.

Relative position Used to select the position of the part with regard to the projection plane used to narrow the selection. If ‘From front only’ is selected, the parts under that level (local negative z-direction) will not be taken into consideration.

Group Component Part Description

Area Enter the area class of the part (or a section of the area class with placeholders) used to limit the selection.

Family Enter the part family (or a section of the part family with placeholders) used to limit the selection.

Display Enter the visibility class (or a section of the visibility class with placeholders) used to limit the selection.

Description Enter the description of the part (or a section of the part description with placeholders) used to limit the selection. In 3D models every part can be given a description, which can then be used to compile a separate classification. These descriptions are not available for integrated elements, but both can be used in combination.

<< If this button is clicked, any valid entry may be selected from a list of the currently available area classes, visibility classes, part families or part descriptions.

Detailing Style

628

Name Enter the name (or a section of the name with placeholders) to be used to limit the selection.

Please note that, for the input fields for the various classes or part descriptions, leaving the field empty is the same as ‘Any’, i.e. the value will not be taken into consideration. If on the other hand it is necessary to filter out parts that have not been allocated to any family, the value ‘None’ may be entered.

Group Others

Only New Parts If this field has been checked, already added component parts are not displayed any more, even if they are situated in other dimensioning groups. Comparison is only made via main type so that the complete type is hidden even if there had been a limitation before. Thus, you can see which types have not yet been seized by dimensioning. In this case, multiple assignments are not possible (any more).

Multiple Assignments If this field has been checked, component parts or areas of component parts can be added several times unless it is a matter of the same dimensioning group.

For more detailed information about multiple assignments and wildcards, please refer to section ‚Automatic Assignment Check’ in this chapter.

Click on this button to add your defaults as new assignment or to modify the selected assignment accordingly.

The neighboring example shows the dimensioning of a construction having approximately identical shape types and shape lengths. With the help of component part description, you can nevertheless automatically generate a dimensioning which shows the connection of the component parts with each other in a reasonable way.

Detailing Style

629

Modify and Delete Assignment First select the desired assignment in the tree structure and then call the context menu. Modify the assignment using the entry Modify Part. Then, the above-described dialog for assignments opens where the current setting is displayed. Now, you can modify the data and make new assignments. Delete the assignment using the entry Delete Parts. It may be that the component part or the part area will be processed by other groups.

Detailing Style

630

Automatic Assignment Check When component parts are assigned, the program automatically checks whether the type, name or size areas overlap and therefore the result would be an indefinite assignment. If this is the case, the new assignment will not be accepted and an error message will be displayed. The check is made at each insertion or modification of assignments and depends on the option ‘Multiple Assignments’. If this option has been activated, the check is only made in the current dimensioning group – the assignment can be repeated in another group of the part area. If multiple assignments option has been deactivated, the program checks the complete part area by means of all groups that a component part will be registered only once. The following diagram shows some examples of desired assignments: Existing Assignment Additional New Assignment Shapes Shapes not possible Shapes Shapes, only U-Shapes not possible Shapes, only L-Shapes Shapes, only U-Shapes OK Shapes, up to 2000 mm length Shapes, from 1500 to 2500 mm length not possible Shapes, up to 2000 mm length Shapes, from 100 mm height onward not possible Shapes, up to 2000 mm length Endplates,from 100 mm height onward OK Shapes, Name=HEA* Shapes, Name=HEB* OK Shapes, Name=HE* Shapes, Name=HEB* not possible The symbol ‘?’ can be used as wildcard for any single character in the name or in the component part description. The symbol ‘*’ can be used for any sequence of characters. It is true that you can use the symbols as you like, but a correct check with regard to overlapping only takes place for the symbol ‘*’ at the beginning and/or end.

Detailing Style

631

Labelling of Dimensioning Chains Many dimensioning chains can be equipped with a labelling text indicating which component parts, detailings or situations are dimensioned. This text may be controled individually per group via dimensioning groups if a labelling is generally provided there by the program and it has been switched on globally (see dialog tab General Info). In the global area of the usual dimensioning of add-on parts or detailing most of the dimensioning chains can be equipped with a labelling text. At nested individual dimensioning, it often has been internally deactivated. The mentioned labelling consists of additional functional info texts. The possible indication of hole diameters at separated dimensioning chains is not affected by this. You can directly enter individual data with regard to the labelling text when inserting the dimensioning group. If you want to modify the data later, you have to select the dimensioning group and then call the command labelling of dimensioning chains in the context menu. Then, a dialog opens, identical to the dialog for generating a dimensioning group. Labelling Types

None No labelling texts are added to the dimensioning chains.

Automatic A labelling text is added to the dimensioning chains, and this text is automatically defined by the component part types or detailings – analogous to previous versions.

Group/Assignment The labelling text corresponds to the name of the associated dimensioning group or to the assignments. If ‘Separate Dimensioning Chains’ have been defined for a component part group, the text corresponds to the name of the assignments (main type).

User-def. Default The labelling text corresponds to your own default which can be entered in the labelling text field. Thus it is possible to use e.g. short texts or completely different texts.

Select Direction

Both Directions A labelling is added to horizontal and vertical dimensioning chains.

Only Horizontal A labelling is added only to horizontal dimensioning chains.

Only Vertical A labelling is added only to vertical dimensioning chains.

Detailing Style

632

Examples for Dimensioning Structures Beneath please find some examples for different dimensioning groups and assignments: 1) Here a general default “Outside Edges for Each Component Part” is created simply and fast via standard group.

2) Dimensioning via drill holes at dimensioning chains separated by type is desired for poly-plates and shear plates; all other component parts have to be dimensioned via the center axes (via standard group).

3) The result here corresponds to the second example, dimensioning of shape axes however has been defined via a separate independent group. The standard group doesn’t have any effect at these parts.

Detailing Style

633

User-defined dimension points and dimension references If the objects are very complex or if there are special requirements with regard to dimensions, the existing methods that come as standard are not always sufficient for the desired results. Instead of having to dimension objects manually after they are produced, it is possible to add individual dimension points and dimension references (in addition to the two main reference points) to each object in the 3D model. The functions for adding and modifying separate dimension references are located in the 3D object properties for profiles and panels. Dimension point This is used to define any number of points on the object that

will then be available in structural group dimensioning in addition to inner diameters and outer edges.

Reference point This is used to define any number of points on the object that will then be available as reference points for other dimensions, such as hole dimensions or welding dimensions.

Reference area This is used to define any number of areas of two points each on the object that will then be available as reference points for other dimensions, such as hole dimensions or welding dimensions. The difference between reference areas and reference points is that only modifications or objects located within such an area (tested in dimension direction) are allocated to that area.

If the dimensioning group added is a user group, a separate dimensioning chain can be generated via the user-defined points and areas, in order to allocate it to the object edges for example.

Detailing Style

634

The above example shows the use of separate dimension references to dimension individual elements: the three inner contours are allocated to the reference point C, and the inner diameters to the relevant reference areas A1-A2 and B1-B2. The points and areas themselves can then be assigned separately to the overall dimensions.

Dimensioning Chain Settings The settings for the different dimensioning chains are made in the corresponding subordinate groups of dimensioning on the dialog tabs “Reference Points”. Since the structure is the same everywhere, we will now centrally describe the possible selections here without going into special details. The description is based on the general information about dimensioning which you can find abouve. In the overall view of the individual dialog tabs, you will then only find a short survey and hints related to possible special cases.

Detailing Style

635

Individual Default Settings The dialog tab consists of two essential areas: On the left, you select the desired dimensioning group the settings of which you want to modify. To create and edit dimension groups you have to use the right-mouse menue. On the right, you can make separate settings for horizontal and vertical dimensioning direction. Each possible combination can be set independently of the other so that the content on the right changes depending on selection. However, not all combinations are available in all dialog tabs..

Detailing Style

636

Selection Range Selection Tree (1) Click on a list entry to select the dimensioning group or the component part assignment you want to work on. When it is a matter of add-on dimensions in groups, the possible assignments of component part types and sizes, which can be dimensioned separately, are displayed in the list. When it is a matter of production dimensions at single parts, all selected detailings are displayed which can be dimensioned. Dimensioning Area (2) Here, you select the dimensioning area and the reference direction where the component parts in question have to be dimensioned. Area Selection

Global In principle, the component parts are dimensioned in the global area, i.e. outside of the component part group and with the alignment of the main part.

Local In principle, the component parts are dimensioned in the local area, i.e. with the alignment of the corresponding reference part.

Global+Local If the component part in question is directly connected to the main part of the group, it will be dimensioned in global area. On the other hand, if it is connected to another subpart, it will be dimensioned in the local area of this part.

Global+Ignore The component part in question is dimensioned in global area, if it is directly connected to the main part of the group. Otherwise, it will not be dimensioned.

Ignore+Global The component part in question is not dimensioned, if it is directly connected to the main part of the group. Otherwise, it will be dimensioned in global area.

Ignore+Local The component part in question is not dimensioned, if it is directly connected to the main part of the group. Otherwise, it will be dimensioned in the local area.

Alignment

According to Ref. The component part is dimensioned according to the reference direction of the area selection.

Horizontal The component part is always dimensioned in horizontal and/or in vertical direction, independent of its reference part. However, this option is not available for all cases.

Detailing Style

637

Sum Up Dimensions (8) Here you select whether the component parts summed up in a common dimensioning group have to be dimensioned together, too or whether a separate dimensioning chain has to be created for each part. Decrease Order of Precedence (3)

Click on this button to move the selected entry one place down. If a dimensioning group has been selected here, the complete group will be moved. Otherwise, the component part will be moved within the dimensioning group.

If there are several dimensioning chains per page, the list order corresponds to the order of the dimensioning chains in the drawing. Special dimensions will always be added to the part at the end, even if they are placed at another position. Increase Order of Precedence (4)

Click on this button to move the selected entry one place up. If a dimensioning group has been selected here, the complete group will be moved. Otherwise, the component part will be moved within the dimensioning group.

If there are several dimensioning chains per page, the list order corresponds to the order of the dimensioning chains in the drawing. Special dimensions will always be added to the part at the end, even if they are placed at another position. Linear/Radial Dimensioning Direction (5) Here, you select whether you want to work on the settings for linear or radial (bent) dimensioning chain. You work on the settings the symbol of which is currently displayed.

Selection symbol for Linear / Radial

Primary/Secondary View (6) Here, you select whether you want to work on the settings for primary or secondary view. You work on the settings the symbol of which is currently displayed.

Selection symbol for Primary / Secondary

Detailing Style

638

Normal/Aligned Dimensioning (7, single parts and groups) Here, you select whether you want to work on the settings for normal or aligned subpart dimensioning. Normal dimensioning is assigned to the global or to the local area, depending on selection, and the aligned dimensioning is independent of this. You work on the settings the symbol of which is currently displayed.

Selection symbol for Normal / Aligned Outside/Inside Area (7, views) Here, you select whether you want to work on the settings for outside or inside area at overviews. You work on the settings the symbol of which is currently displayed.

Selection symbol for outside / inside area

Detailing Style

639

Adjustment Range Longitudinal Direction (A) Here, you determine the default settings for the position of the dimensioning chain and the used reference points in horizontal dimensioning direction. The values of the currently selected dimensioning chain are displayed. Transversal Direction (B) Here, you determine the default settings for the position of the dimensioning chain and the used reference points in vertical dimensioning direction. The values of the currently selected dimensioning chain are displayed. The meaning of ‘Horizontal’ and ‘Vertical’ refers to the direction of the used dimensioning area any may locally differ from main direction. The offered possibilities of the different selection lists depend very much on the part area and on the selected dimensioning group. Settings

Reference Part (I) Target point of dimensioning; in most cases, this is a special point, but it can also be a “rule” such as e.g. drill holes.

Reference Part (II) If need be, you can give further information about the selected part reference.

Reference Connection Reference point of dimensioning; dimensioning chains start here.

Additional Dimensions These dimension points are added to the dimensioning chain later and/or occasionally completed as separate dimensioning chain.

Style Variants Here you can select the dimensioning style variants as combination for relative dimensions and coordinate dimensions.

Pos. Dim. Chain (I) Position of the dimensioning chain with regard to the component part or to the reference part

Pos. Dim. Chain (II) Here you can limit the display of the dimensioning chains to certain main views of the component part (front view, plan view, etc.) or to a certain position.

Detailing Style

640

Coordinate Dims. Execution of coordinate dimensions resp. certain dimensioning chains are excluded from coordinate dimensioning. Since radial dimensioning chains as well as inside areas of overviews don’t support any coordinate dimensioning, an alternative is imposed on this input field:

Circular Dimensions Execution of radial dimensioning

Info Line

Labelling Information about the current setting of labelling for the dimensioning chains of a dimensioning group: You can enter the data immediately when the dimensioning group is created or later in the selection area via the context menu.

On the following two pages, you will find a table with the most frequent options which are available in the selection lists. In addition, there is a short explanation of the meaning. The selected example refers to inputs for subpart dimensioning of shapes, you can, however, transfer the information to the other component parts or detailings. For an explanation of other special options, please refer to the description of the corresponding dialog tabs.

Detailing Style

641

Reference to Component Part (I and II) No dimensioning The component part is not dimensioned Outer edges Both outer edges in dimensioning direction Center of component part Geometrical center Drill holes Each hole All holes First hole Only the first hole in dimensioning direction Last hole Only the last hole in dimensioning direction First + last hole The first and last hole in dimensioning direction Reference point The projected insertion-/reference axis Reference points Both reference points Front edge Near edge in dimensioning direction Rear edge Far edge in dimensioning direction Inner edge Near edge seen from center of reference part Outer edge Far edge seen from center of reference part Contact edge Inner edge Contact edge to reference part (near web) Outer edge Contact edge to reference part (outside) Both edges Contact edge to reference part (web and outside) Inner + slope Inner contact edge and length of gradient Outer + slope Outer contact edge and length of gradient Reference point + drill holes Combination reference point and drill hole Outer edges + drill holes Combination outer edges and drill hole Drill holes or outer edges Outer edges if there are no drill holes Arc center Center of the circle if circular shape Automatic depending on type Reference point depending on shape User dimension points User-defined dimension points

Reference Connection

Standard At the bottom/on the left of the reference part or reference point (depending on global default setting).

Reference point The projected insertion-/Reference axis of the reference part Border reference parts Next of the two reference points of the reference part Border / Edge reference part Next outer edge of the reference part Border Group Next outer edge of the complete group Beginning reference part Near edge of reference part in dimensioning direction Beginning group Near edge of complete group in dimensioning direction Middle reference part Geometrical center of reference part Center reference part Center of the circle if circular shape, otherwise geometrical center

Detailing Style

642

Connecting shape System point of the axes of reference part and component part/connecting shape

Reference point/Reference area Special user-defined dimension references

Additional Dimensions

None No further additional dimensions Ref. part / connecting shape Outer edges of reference part Group Outer edges of complete group Group and reference part Outer edges of reference part and of complete group Reference points Both reference points of the reference part Reference part + ref. points Outer edges and reference points of the reference part Group + reference points Outer edges of the group and reference points of the reference part All additional dimensions Reference points of the reference part and outer edges ref. part + group

Style Variants

No style variants The program always uses the basic styles LIN1- / COO-2 etc. Combinations of different style variants

Position of Dimensioning Chain (I) To part position Side on which the component part is lying towards the reference part Opposite part position Opposite side on which the component part is lying towards the reference

part Always below Below reference part Always above Above reference part Regular Increase number of dimensioning chains below and above reference part

regularly Favorable side Favorable side of the component part towards the reference part Unfavorable side Opposite to the favorable side of the component part towards the

reference part Front edge Near edge in area direction Rear edge Far edge in area direction Inner edge Near edge in area direction seen from the center of the reference part Outer edge Far edge in area direction seen from the center of the reference part Center Center of the component part Front edge + border Like front edge, but alternatively in the outer area too if border position Rear edge + border Like rear edge, but alternatively in the outer area too if border position Inner edge + border Like inner edge, but alternatively in the outer area too if border position Outer edge + border Like outer edge, but alternatively in the outer area too if border position Center + border Like center, but alternatively in the outer area too if border position

Detailing Style

643

Position of Dimensioning Chain (II) In each view Dimensioning in each main view of the detail Only 1x best view If one dimension of the component part is dimensioned, new dimensioning

will not take place Only if orthogonal Dimensioning only if component part orthogonal towards the reference part Only if diagonal Dimensioning only if component part diagonal towards the reference part Only if perpendicular Dimensioning only if component part perpendicular towards the ref. part Only if parallel Dimensioning only if component part parallel towards the reference part Only in front view Dimensioning only in front view of the detail Only in top view Dimensioning only in top view of the detail Only in front view Dimensioning only in front view of the detail Only in rear view Dimensioning only in rear view of the detail Only in left view Dimensioning only in the left view of the detail Only in right view Dimensioning only in the right view of the detail Except for in front view Always dimensioning except for in front view of the detail Except for in top view Always dimensioning except for in top view of the detail Except for in front view Always dimensioning except for in front view of the detail Except for in rear view Always dimensioning except for in rear view of the detail Except for in left view Always dimensioning except for in left view of the detail Except for in right view Always dimensioning except for in right view of the detail

Detailing Style

644

Adopt Primary Default Settings When you want to use the same default settings as selection for primary and secondary view, you can select in the secondary settings the option ‘like primary’ as component part reference. Any modifications in the primary settings then will be valid for the secondary view, too. Copy and Reset Functions Since you can define up to 6 different dimensioning variants for a single list entry, some auxiliary functions are available which can facilitate the setting task. You have access to these functions by calling the context menu of the right mouse key in the selection list of the selection range. Copy Selection of Primary The settings of the primary area for the currently selected group are copied into the secondary area as far as longitudinal and transversal direction are concerned. However, this is only valid for the currently selected dimensioning area. This function is reasonable when you want to modify only one value in the secondary view compared with the primary view. Deactivate Selected Group The component part reference of the currently selected group is set to ‘No dimensioning’ for longitudinal and transversal direction for all views and all dimensioning areas. For secondary views it is set to the option ‘Like Primary’. Thus, you can easily deactivate dimensioning of component parts without having to remove the whole group. Deactivate All Groups The component part reference of all existing groups is set to ‘No dimensioning’ for longitudinal and transversal direction for all views and all dimensioning areas. For secondary views it is set to the option ‘Like Primary’. Thus, you can easily deactivate complete parts of dimensioning without having to remove the whole group. The use of the deactivate functions in practice facilitates the optimization of existing settings, because you can rapidly deactivate the entries without having to look for them by means of the different selection possibilities.

Detailing Style

645

Selected Group Standard Values All settings of the currently selected group are reset to the internally specified standard settings for longitudinal and transversal direction for all views and all dimensioning areas. These correspond to the initial values at creation of the corresponding dimensioning group. All Groups Standard Values All settings of all existing groups are reset to the internally specified standard settings for longitudinal and transversal direction for all views and all dimensioning areas. These correspond to the initial values at creation of the corresponding dimensioning groups. Create Complete Standard Default Setting A complete, internally specified standard setting is created for the selected part area of dimensioning. This setting contains the creation of dimensioning groups to be selected including the component part assignments (as far as possible) as well as the setting with standard default settings. Please note that all existing dimensioning groups, component part assignments and settings will be lost when this function is used! The use of the standard settings functions in practice facilitates the building of user-defined dimensioning structures, because it is always possible to return to a clearly defined initial position in case of unsuccessful setting attempts.

Detailing Style

646

Style Variants The allocation of style variants permits you to design a more clearly structured dimensioning. Outer dimensions can be emphasized with larger texts or different dimension ranges can be colored. You could also use dimension chains with tolerance specifications for hole dimensions or, in case you anticipate many “tight” dimensions, you could also work with smaller text. There are many ways to use this option to your advantage. Definition and Assignment of Style Variants One of the existing style variants can be assigned to each dimension chain, independently for relative dimensioning and coordinate dimensioning. However, it is selected as a combination for both types simultaneously via selection list. A dimensioning style is assigned to a style variant in the general settings for dimensioning so that you can read the proceedings on the corresponding dialog tab. Compared with a direct selection of dimensioning style, the advantage of the proceeding via style variant is that you can modify the dimensioning style for several dimension chains together (e.g. after import of detailing style parameters). If you only want to modify the text sizes, you can also make use of the "auto" setting, because here a style with smaller and bigger sizes (factor 0.7 or 1.4) will be automatically created from the selected dimensioning style for standard size. However, if you also want to modify the colors or select other text sizes, you have to select a separate AutoCAD dimensioning style. Combinations (Selection)

No Style Variant: The corresponding basic style is used for relative dimensions and for coordinate dimensions.

Always Variant 1: The corresponding style variant 1 is used for relative dimensions and for coordinate dimensions.

STD / COO-1: The corresponding basic style is used for relative dimensions and the correspoinding style variant 1 is used for coordinate dimensions.

LIN-1 / STD: The corresponding style variant 1 is used for relative dimensions and the correspoinding basic style is used for coordinate dimensions.

LIN-1 / COO-2: The corresponding style variant 1 is used for relative dimensions and the correspoinding style variant 2 is used for coordinate dimensions.

Detailing Style

647

Settings for Individual Dimensioning In contrast to the standard settings for dimension chains where you find independent parameter records for the different component part groups, only one single data record per part area of dimensioning is available for individual dimensioning (nested dimensioning). In very complex cases such as e.g. dimensioning of component part groups within assemblies, you don’t find an individual parameter record any more. Due to the great number of settings for component part groups, the parameter records for standard dimensioning of component part groups will be used here instead. It is assumed that the settings are very similar in most cases. This is analogous to dimensioning of main parts in groups which is also controled via the default settings for dimensioning of single parts. A differentiation can be made here via filter specifications. It is true that there is only one single parameter record for dimensioning, but you can include or exclude certain component parts and parameters by means of filters.

Individual Filter The dialog tab consists of two essential areas: On the left side you select the desired dimensioning group the settings of which have to be modified. The dimensioning groups can also be managed via a context menu. On the right side you can specify the filter settings for the parameter record of individual dimensioning.

Detailing Style

648

Selection Area Selection Tree (1) Here you select the dimensioning group or component part assignment you want to work on by clicking an entry. The assignments of component part types and sizes forming an individual independent filter group will be displayed. Dimensioning Area (2) Here you select the reference direction to which a limitation of alignment (e.g. only perpendicular) refers. Setting Area Component Part and Parameter Filter (A) Here you determine the default settings for component part and parameter filter. The values of the currently selected dimensioning group will be displayed. You can only exclude properties, i.e. if the function has not been generally activated in the parameter record, the default setting doesn’t have any effect here. Settings

Part Reference (I) Here you specify whether an individual dimensioning has to be effected for the assigned component parts. If it is the individual dimensioning of a group, filtering takes place via the main part of this group.

Part Reference (II) Detailings or add-on parts are dimensioned.

Overall Length The overall length is dimensioned.

Overall Width The overall width is dimensioned.

Hole Labelling The hole diameters are labelled.

Pos. Dim. Chain (I) Here you can limit the individual dimensioning to certain views of the component part to be dimensioned.

Pos. Dim. Chain (II) Here you can limit the individual dimensioning to certain views of the actual detail (front view, plan view, etc.) or to alignments with regard to the reference part.

Filter Here you can specify additional filter conditions.

On the following page, you will find a table with the most frequent options which are available in the selection lists. In addition, there is a short explanation of the meaning.

Detailing Style

649

Reference to Component Part Default Reference Points Detailings or add-on parts are dimensioned as specified. Default Hole Dimensions Only drill holes are dimensioned as specified. Default Contour Dimensions Only contour dimensions are dimensioned as specified No Detailings No detailings or add-on parts are dimensioned.

Overall Length/Overall Width

Dimension The overall length/width is dimensioned as defined in ‘‚Reference Points’. No Dimension The overall length/width is not dimensioned

Hole Labelling

Default Labelling The drill holes are labelled according to the defaults settings for labelling. No Labelling The drill holes are not labelled

Position Dimension Chain

Only Primary The component part is only dimensioned if it is visible in primary position. Only Secondary The component part is only dimensioned if it is visible in secondary

position. Primary+Secondary The component part is dimensioned in primary and secondary position.

Filter

No Filter No additional filter has been activated. Each Part 1x Parts having the same position number are only dimensioned 1x. Example for Individual Dimensioning Let us assume that you have a shape, a poly-plate and some more add-on parts in a group. As for the shape, you only want to dimension the drill holes, but the poly-plate has to be dimensioned completely and the other component parts haven’t to be dimensioned at all. In order to do this, you create two dimensioning groups and assign ‘Shapes’ to the first and ‘Poly-plates’ to the second as component part type. All desired dimensioning options are now permitted in the parameter record, i.e. all detailings and the overall dimensions as well and they are set accordingly. Now, activate the dimensioning group with the assigned shapes only for ‘Default Hole Dimensions’, and the dimensioning group with the assigned poly-plates for all possible options. Deactivate the dimensioning group ‘Standard’ to exclude all remaining parts from dimensioning.

Detailing Style

650

Tab Common

Group Dim Chains

Method Here, you define the fundamental method of automatic component part dimensioning. Steel Standard – Standard dimensioning of ProSteel; however, only ProSteel component parts will be evaluated. Steel US - Additional information is added to dimensioning chains and details as common in the USA. Only ProSteel component parts will be evaluated Concrete Standard - Standard dimensioning of ProSteel; however, only ProSteel component parts will be evaluated. Steel + Concrete Standard - Standard dimensioning of ProSteel; however, all component parts will be evaluated Steel + Concrete US - Additional information is added to dimensioning chains and details as common in the USA. All component parts will be evaluated. As far as the difference of US-dimensioning to standard default settigs is concerned, please refer to a separate section of this chapter for more detailed information.

Detailing Style

651

Kind of Dimensioning Here, you select the kind of distance measuring between the different dimensioning points. Relative – customary relative dimension chains are attached. Coordinates – dimensioning chains are attached with continuous dimensioning to a fixed reference point. Mixed – relative dimension chains and – at the same time here included – the corresponding coordinate dimensions are attached. However, you have the option to exclude certain freely selectable dimensioning chains from coordinate dimensioning.

Associative Dim. The dimensioning is created as really associative dimensioning without text overwriting as far as possible. In case of manual manipulations dimensioning is automatically adapted to the measured values.

With Optimization The program will position the dimensioning texts in a better way according to the settings on the page ‘Optimization’. Optimization can be switched off later if you want to displace the dimensions manually according to another method or if you do not expect overlaps. You will then obtain the dimensions on the position where AutoCAD would place them automatically.

Divide Hole Rows At hole dimensioning each individual hole diameter gets its own dimension chain. The dimensioned hole diameter then is indicated on the dimension line.

Weld Cracks Extra Small welding cracks will be assigned their own dimensioning line. This is a minor option if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected because here a distinction is made between diameters anyway.

Diameter on Line At hole dimensioning the hole diameter is indicated on the dimension construction line if ‘Divide Hole Rows’ has been selected.

Label Dim. Lines The things located by dimension chain are written as additional text to the end of dimension line. The text depends on the settings for dimensioning groups.

> Hole Assignment If this field has been checked, a text is added to inform about the assignment to position (top/bottom) for dimension chains of drill holes which are divided according to depth position (Z-direction).

Gradient Reference Angle dimensions can be indicated as gradient instead of as angle. Here you enter the reference value for calculating the gradient.

Group Standard Dimensioning Style and Coordinate Style

Detailing Style

652

Upper Selection List Here you can select the dimensioning style (AutoCAD) to be used for the dimensioning in question. This style is going to control all properties such as text colour, text size, etc. For radii and angles the corresponding subordinate style of an AutoCAD dimensioning style can additionally be used.

Variant 1 / 2 / 3 Here, you can indicate three alternative styles to be assigned as style variant to different dimension chains. If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Smaller', a copy with smaller text sizes (factor 0.7) is generated from the basic style. If you have selected the entry ‚Auto Larger', a copy with larger text sizes (factor 1.4) is generated from the basic style. Style variants allow you e.g. to emphasize overall dimensions or to use smaller texts when space is limited.Please also refer to section Style Variants in this chapter.

Coordinates Here you select the kind of coordinates. Rotated Dimensioning Chain – The coordinates are attached beside the second construction line as a measure which is rotated by 90°. Some parameters of dimensioning style are modified at this occasion. Like Dimensioning Style – The coordinates are attached in the indicated dimensioning style without any modifications. AutoCAD Coordinates – The coordinates are attached in the indicated dimensioning style without any modifications as real AutoCAD coordinates.

Coordinates Extra Any possibly existing coordinates dimensioning chains are summed up to one dimensioning chain per dimensioning side and attached completely outside. Mixed dimensioning chains are transformed into standard relative dimensioning chains.

Detailing Style

653

Tab Common Holes

Group Holes in Plan View

Diameter The hole diameter is written beside the hole groups. If the value doesn’t change, the diameter is only indicated once per hole row or complete hole group. The text is always aligned in main dimensioning direction.

> Text Size Enter the text size for labeling here.

> Distance Here, you can indicate the distance of the insertion point of diameter labeling from the hole. This distance is measured from the border of the hole.

> Angles Here you can enter the angle between the insertion point of diameter labeling and the hole. The value 0 corresponds to the main dimensioning direction. You can indicate positive (rotating to the left) and negative values.

> Connect Axes Common axis lines are displayed within the hole groups if the ‘Divide Hole Groups’ setting has been checked.

Detailing Style

654

Only Visible Holes Only those holes are dimensioned which are visible in the corresponding view. At a plan view for example, the holes of the shape’s bottom flange are not dimensioned unless they were visible due to gaps in the upper flange.

Divide Top/Bottom The drill holes of upper and bottom side of the component part are dimensioned in an individual dimension chain. The assignment refers to the relative position towards view plane (Z=0).

In end plates also The hole diameter is also given for folded plate details..

Oblong Holes Here you can select how to dimension and label oblong holes. You may choose between different combinations of hole axes and hole lengths to dimension according to production. For more detailed intormation please refer to the general explanations with regard to oblong holes

New Dimensions to Here, you enter the distance from one hole group resp. drill hole dimensioning to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned identical hole screen dimensions as the dimension chains resp. the indications of diameters are repeated.

Group Holes in View

As Back Pitch You enter the back pitches including the diameter of the parallel drill holes. Continous constant back pitches are displayed as a group.

> Text Size Here, you enter the text size for back pitch labeling.

> Distance Here, you can indicate the distance of back pitch labeling from the edge of the component part. Positive values signify a labeling outside the component part, negative values signify a labeling inside the component part.

> Marking Area Beginning and end of a hole group are displayed by a marking.

Oblong Holes Here you can select how to dimension and label oblong holes. You may choose between different combinations of hole axes and hole lengths to dimension according to production. For more detailed intormation please refer to the general explanations with regard to oblong holes

Detailing Style

655

New Dimensions to Here, you enter the distance from one back pitch to the other at which a new (redundant) dimensioning has to be carried out. This permits a clearer dimensioning of far away positioned identical back pitches as the indications are repeated.

Oblong Holes The horizontal dimensioning and labelling of oblong holes depends on the kind of production. Four independent variants are available here beside the option ‘No Dimensioning’ (for manual dimensioning) and the option ‘According to Hole Type’ (not yet supported at the very moment):

Hole Axes The hole axes are dimensioned and the hole distance is indicated at labeling. Hole Length The outer edges are dimensioned and the hole length is indicated at labeling. Hole Center+Hole Axes The center of the hole is dimensioned and the axis distance is indicated at labeling. Hole Center+Hole Length The center of the hole is dimensioned and the hole length is indicated at labeling.

Detailing Style

656

Tab Common Distances

Group Dimensioning Area

Selection List In the selection list you choose the dimensioning area you want to work on. The current values are entered in the input fields on the right. Global Area – The global outer area of dimensioning. Local Area – The local inner area of dimensioning; as vertical dimensions of a component part group are always local, they are controled here as well. Connection Area – The local inner area of dimensioning at aligned dimensioning. Individual Dimensions... – The different inner areas at individual dimensioning within component part groups, etc. Manual Dimension Points – The areas of manual dimension points.

Group Distances

Detailing Style

657

Most data can be indicated here independently for horizontal, vertical and inner dimensioning direction. The fields on the left correspond to horizontal direction (main direction), the fields in the middle correspond to vertical direction (transversal direction), the fields on the right correspond to inner direction (independent direction).

To 1st. Dim. Chain Here, you enter the distances from the outer limit of the component up to the 1st dimension line.

Between Dim. Chains Here, you enter the distance between the individual dimension lines of an area succeeding the first line.

Construction Line to Component Here you enter the distance from the start of construction lines up to the outer limit of the component or of the dimensioning area in question. Entering the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the edges but they are extended to the corresponding points to be dimensioned. If you selected ’Fixed Construction Line Length’ option, the meaning of the fields changes, and you enter the length of the dimension construction lines.

Construction Line to Dim. Chain Here you enter the distance of the construction lines of a successive chain up to the previous dimension chain. Entering the value 0 will not cut the construction lines at the previous dimension chains but they are extended to the outer limit of the component or of the corresponding area to be dimensioned.

Fixed Line Length If this field has been checked, the construction lines have exactly the length specified in the input fields ‘Length of Construction Lines’. If this field has not been checked, the dimension chains are cut at each other with the distances indicated in the distance fields.

Edge Horizontal Here you indicate the minimum distance hole group dimensioning or subpart dimensioning may have up to the end of the component before it is moved to the outside.

Group Tabular Survey

In the diagram, you see a survey on all available settings to be able to control them at a glance. Information about horizontal and vertical dimension is summed up (Horizontal/Vertical).

Rows the different parameters for setting

Detailing Style

658

Columns the different dimensioning areas

Please refer to the corresponding chapters of the introduction to dimensioning for the meaning of the different dimensioning areas and of individual dimensioning (nested dimensioning).

Detailing Style

659

General Miscellaneous

Reference points group

Connection shapes The reference points of the connected shapes are dimensioned in a separate dimensioning chain, where the adjoining parts in the structural groups have been dimensioned in relation to them.

From reference point The reference points of this profile are used to determine the reference points for the connected profiles. Otherwise, its center axis is used.

Coordinate dimensions Used to select how the reference points for the connected profile are dimensioned using coordinate dimensions. None – No coordinate dimensions are used. Origin point Detail – Coordinate dimensions are used and measured from the point of origin of the structural group (main part). Origin point Model – Coordinate dimensions are used and measured from the origin point of the model. This enables, for example, using the absolute level of columns in the model as a coordinate value.

Detailing Style

660

Hole group reference Selects how holes are dimensioned in main parts or sub parts (only in the longitudinal direction) if the ‘Hole group reference’ option is selected there as well. None – The hole group reference is completely deactivated. Connection profile – The hole groups are assigned to the intersection with the center axis or reference line (depending on settings) of the appropriate connection profile. First hole – The hole groups are assigned to the first hole of the hole group in the dimensioning direction. Last hole – The hole groups are assigned to the last hole of the hole group in the dimensioning direction. For further information see the general comments on hole group reference.

Search area Used to specify the maximum spacing within which a hole in a sub part or main part will be allocated to the relevant reference point of the connected profile or the hole group.

Gusset plate group

Holes in gusset plates can be dimensioned in structural groups with reference to the system axes of the connected profiles. This function is used to define the basic settings. For further information see the general comments on gusset plate dimensioning.

With System axis The system axes of the profiles connected to the gusset plate are displayed.

> Offset System Extends the system axis shown beyond the system point.

> Offset Plate Extends the system axis shown beyond the gusset plate edge.

With bevels The bevels of the profiles connected to the gusset plate are displayed. Do not measure – The bevel is not shown. Bevel symbol – The angle is drawn as a triangle based on the reference length or -height (see ‘bevel reference’). Angle from the vertical – The angle from a vertical reference line perpendicular to the direction of the structural element. Angle from the horizontal – The angle from the horizontal direction of the structural element.

Detailing Style

661

Hole Group Reference Hole group in component parts, here mainly in component part groups, get further reference dimensions in addition to the standard add-on dimensions of subparts. In this example, a connecting butt strap is dimensioned with reference to the holes.

Add-on Dimension in Component Part Group (1) The butt strap is dimensioned with reference to the connecting shape, here to its insertion reference point. Hole Group Reference (2) The connecting shape is selected for hole group reference as well. Alternative Possibility (3) (4) Alternatively, the hole group reference can also be made to the first hole (3) or to the last hole (4).

The drill holes are always dimensioned with relative dimensions at hole group reference, selection of coordinate dimensions, however, influences the dimension of hole group reference (2). Gusset-Plate Dimensioning Drill holes in gusset-plates of component part groups can be dimensioned as displayed in the example. In most cases, this dimensioning serves for drawing control, if single part drawings are generated.

Longitudinal Direction (1) Here, the reference point of dimensioning is the edge of the plate. In addition, the dimensioning chain is completed to the system point (3). Transversal Direction (2) Here, the reference point of dimensioning is the system point (3); however, a reference to the edges of the plate is possible as well.

The defaults are displayed as additional entry in the selection list for component part types of group dimensioning and therefore can be attached in addition to standard dimensioning of poly-plates.

Detailing Style

662

Tab Common Miscellaneous Text

Group Text Display

Text Size The text size for dimension chain labelling.

Elevation Prefix This text is placed in front of the coordinate dimensions, if you have selected ‘origin model’ as dimension reference.

Distance RD The horizontal distance of the RD symbol from the reference edge of the component part at American dimensioning.

RD Symbol Size The size of the RD symbol at American dimensioning.

No Inch Signs The inch signs are suppressed at dimensioning in the imperial system (foot/inches).

Group Colour Selection

RD Symbol Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the text of the RD symbol has to be displayed at American dimensioning.

Detailing Style

663

End Condition Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the text of the RD symbol has to be displayed at American dimensioning.

Diameter Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the text of the hole diameter has to be displayed.

Gage Dimension Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the text of the gage dimension has to be displayed

Description Here, enter the AutoCAD colour number that is to be used to display the text for the labels on each dimension chain.

Mounting Here, you enter the AutoCAD-colour number with which the text of the mounting of subparts has to be displayed

Detailing Style

664

Tab Common Miscellaneous Min/Max

Group Distances

Smallest Distance Here, you enter the smallest length to be dimensioned. If the distance to be dimensioned is smaller than this value, it will be added to the next dimension.

Max.Snap Area Here, you enter the maximum distance up to which a component part is still assigned to the border area of a group. This influences the arrangement of dimension chains at local dimensioning.

Group Diagonals

Angle Min./Max. Here you enter the minimum and maximum angle the shape must resp. is allowed to have towards main dimensioning direction to be recognized as diagonal. This option permits you to prevent that e.g. a roof girder is dimensioned as diagonal.

Detailing Style

665

Min. Length Here, you enter the minimum length the shape must have to be recognized as diagonal.

Flat Steel not as... Shapes of flat steel are not recognized as diagonal and excluded from diagonal dimensioning. You can thus prevent that e.g. a top chord of a haunch is dimensioned as diagonal.

Detailing Style

666

Tab Common Optimization

Group Text Position

Don’t alternate The text remains on its original height on the dimension line and is only optimized according to the other default settings.

Only Above The text is moved only above the neighboring text so that they overlap horizontally, but not vertically.

Above and Below The text is moved above and below the dimension line so that they overlap horizontally, but not vertically.

Above Dim.Help Lines The text is moved across the construction help lines if it does not fit in between above the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other neighboring dimension).

No text between... The text is supposed to be colliding and optimized if it does not fit in between above and below the dimension line (even if otherwise not colliding with any other neighboring dimension).

Move Outer Dimensions Outside The two outer dimensions are moved beside the dimension line in horizontal direction.

Detailing Style

667

Move Inner Dimension Horizontal The inner dimension texts are moved horizontally across the construction help lines into a neighboring dimension if there is enough place.

Adapt Text Size A dimension chain is automatically changed to the style variant 1 Auto smaller (x0.7), if thus collisions can be avoided. If the dimension chain has already this style variant, no modification takes place. If a dimensioning style has been assigned to style variant 1, this style will be used instead, even if it wouldn’t have such a favourable text height – which might be as well as reinforcement!

Group Build Groups

Similar Dimension Lines Dimension chains containing few dimensions (e.g. one single drill hole) are integrated into another dimension chain. It may be that something different has been dimensioned in this other dimension chain (e.g. outer contour). The overall dimensions are excluded from this.

Same Dimensions Several consecutive identical distances are combined into one shared dimension, e.g. 3 dimensions à 100 are combined into one dimension with the dimension text 3x100.

> Min. Count Here, you specify the number of identical dimensions from which on they are combined in a group.

> Postfix Here, you specify which text has still to be added to the number (if you enter e.g. ‘x’, you’ll get ‘5x100’).

The picture below shows the different optimization settings for texts in dimension chains:

Detailing Style

668

Tab Common Optimization Min/Max

Group Distances

Min. Text Distance In the field on the left you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts within a dimension chain may be without triggering the collision alarm. In the field on the right you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts may be at a neighboring dimension when moved into this. Thus, a movement can be avoided if there might be any possibility of confusion of dimensions due to the small distance.

Min. Dist. Between... Here, you enter a value indicating how close together dimension texts of different dimension chains may be without triggering the collision alarm.

Sum up Here you enter the maximum distance up to which subpart dimension chains in transversal direction at groups are summed up to a common dimension chain.

Detailing Style

669

Tab SingleParts

Group General

Radius Circle radii of component contours are dimensioned. If defined, the subordinate radius style of the selected AutoCAD dimensioning style is used

Reference Point At selection of ‘Standard’ option for the reference to the component part, the dimensioning is related to the reference point of the component part. Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges.

Detailing Style

670

Tab SingleParts ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach single part dimensions in the detail and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general descriptions of defaults for dimensioning chains.

List of Dimensioning Groups The following dimensioning groups can be added: Modifications

Outer Contour Running of outer contour Inner Contour Running of inner contours (inner sections) Drill holes as plan view Drill holes which can be seen as visible or invisible hole circle Drill holes as view Drill holes which can be seen as intersection or hidden solid Angle of intersection Diagonal edges of components in the outer contour Radius center Centers of radii in outer and inner contour

Special Dimensions

Reference Points Dimensions of the position of the two reference points

Detailing Style

671

US-Cope American lengths and depths for copes at the end Local reference planes Position of reference planes (connection profile) when reference is set to

the connection profile

Part Groups

Fittings Dimensions of the position of integrated fitting elements at concrete panels Special Forms of Dimensioning Apart from the usual dimension of outer contour and drill holes over length and width of the component part, you can select different other forms of dimensioning for single parts, too. Outer Contour / Inner Contour Standard Normal dimensioning over the outer contour in dimensioning direction Individual outside Each edge is individually dimensioned in its alignment; placing outside Individual inside Each edge is individually dimensioned in its alignment; placing inside Standard + Individual outside Combination of Standard and Individual edges outside Standard + Individual inside Combination of Standard and Individual edges inside Min / Max Min/Max contour dimensioning (see ‘outer contour’) Standard + Min / Max Combination of Standard and Min/Max (see ‘outer contour’)

Drill Holes

Common Normal dimensioning over the drill holes in dimensioning direction Reference to Edge The holes are dimensioned to the next edge of the component part Hole Groups Groups of identical holes are dimensioned once in transversal direction Common + Edges Combination of standard dimensioning and reference to edge Hole Groups + Edges Combination of hole group dimensioning and reference to edge

Angle of Intersection

Angle towards Vertical Line The angle towards the imaginary vertical reference line (opening angle) Angle towards Horizontal Line The angle towards the horizontal component direction (material angle) Bevel Symbol Bevel symbol (triangle) of the edge related to reference length or -height The following examples show you the results of the different extended forms of dimensioning for single parts: Reference to Edge (1) and Individual Edges (2) The holes are related perpendicularly to the following edge of the plate; the edges of a plate are dimensioned individually.

Detailing Style

672

Min/Max (1) At a hollow shape, the maximum extension of the interior wall (A) is dimensioned with the dimension chain (C) and the minimum extension is dimensioned with the dimension chains

B. Possible cut-outs haven’t any influence.

Min/Max (2) At a standard shape the longest exterior area on the upper and lower side is dimensioned with a single measure at a time despite the cut-outs. Reference to Edge Inside/Outside

The outer contour is dimensioned with the combination of standard dimensioning and individual edges inside (only the diagonal edges are dimensioned with individual dimensions). The inner contour is dimensioned with the combination of standard dimensioning and individual edges outside (all edges are always dimensioned with individual dimensions).

Common Drill Holes (1) The drill holes are dimensioned in a common dimension chain at the edge. Hole Groups (2) Inner hole groups are dimensioned separately in their own dimension chains.

Detailing Style

673

Dimensions of reinforcing bars in ProConcrete ProConcrete components also contain in most cases elements for reinforcement, whose dimensions and position you can specify together with the component part. For the different reinforcement objects at present only one size group type is available (Reinforcement group), but you can append them repeatedly and thus form different rules. Similar to the attachments for modules, you can add the customized reinforcement objects there as desired. At present the following reinforcement objects are supported; their English names are often found in the dialogs:

• reinforcing cage RebarBeam consisting of supporting members (Rebar) and bracket (Stirrup)

● rod distribution of RebarSet consisting of rods (Rebar) in Lattice arrangement or longitudinal distribution

● single rod RebarSingle

Single rod (Rebar) Further information is also found in ’settings for ProConcrete components’ as well as in documentation on ProConcrete. The following figure indicates the components which are used for the dimensioning, based on the example of an individual reinforcing rod:

The component is created by selecting the base points 1, 2, 3 and 4. These form the insertion polygon (A) which was presented next to the component for clarity. From this insertion polygon we now obtain the main segment (B), which consists of straight and curved sub-segments.

Detailing Style

674

In addition, final treatments (C) can also occur at the ends. The possible inputs correspond as far as possible to settings for component part dimensioning. However, you can select different measure points. Component reference (II)– Reinforcement group

All All possible points of the reinforcement element are dimensioned Main segment All terminator points are dimensioned for the individual sub-segments

comprising the main segment. Final treatments

All terminator points are dimensioned for the individual sub-segments comprising the final treatments.

Origin path The system points of the insertion polygon are dimensioned.

Dimensioning of the insertion polygon component – Reference, origin path reference‚ start component “additional dimensions, component” Dimensioning of the segments Component reference ‘main segment “reference‚ start component “additional dimensions, component” Dimensioning of the final treatments Component reference, final treatments “reference, edge component” additional dimensions “none”

Detailing Style

675

Tab SingleParts US-Cope

Group General

Equal Cope 1x Copes with the same dimensions are dimensioned only once.

Remarks Generally added annotation (if need be, it is replaced by automatically created annotations).

Create Remarks An annotation is automatically added to the dimensioning to indicate identical copes.

> Up/Below Annotation which is added above and below in case of identical copes.

> Start/End Annotation which is added at the beginning and at the end in case of identical copes.

> Type Annotation which is added for more than two identical copes.

Group Left Side

Measure Selection Here you indicate, whether the dimensioning of the cope has to be indicated in the form Length x Depth of cope or in the form depth x length of cope.

Prefix This text is placed in front of the dimension.

Postfix This text is added to the indicated measure.

Detailing Style

676

Group Right Side

Measure Selection Here you indicate, whether the dimensioning of the cope has to be indicated in the form Length x Depth of cope or in the form depth x length of cope.

Prefix This text is placed in front of the dimension.

Postfix This text is added to the indicated measure.

Dimensioning of cut-outs according to this scheme is often used in the USA and replaces a detailed dimensioning of outer contour for standard-shapes with copes at the end.

Detailing Style

677

Tab Groups

Group General

Main Part The main part of the component part group is dimensioned with the most important dimensions like a single part.

> Main Part First The first dimension chains in the global dimensioning area of the component part group are the dimension chains of the main part; otherwise the dimension chains of the subpart

> Direct at the Part The dimension chains of the main part are attached directly to the component part. Normally, they are also attached in the global area. In case of very extensive groups it is however reasonable to select this option.

Subparts The position of subparts in the group is dimensioned.

> Repeat Parts Within a view, identical part dimensions are dimensioned only once in transversal direction. Otherwise, each sub part is dimensioned multiple times redundantly.

> Include Main part The position of the main part in a structural group is also dimensioned as a sub part. This option can be useful when dimensioning interlaced structural groups (structural group with subgroups).

Detailing Style

678

Section The positions of sub parts in sections are also dimensioned.

Endplate The additional tilt endplate details are dimensioned like a single part as well.

Reference Point The dimensioning of subparts is related to the reference point of the main part unless no other defaults were made at the corresponding places. Otherwise, it is related to the outside edges of the main part.

Group Detail Dimensioning

For Add-on Parts Subparts in component part groups are dimensioned in separate local areas together with the most important dimensions like single parts. You can enter further specifications on a separate page of this parameter group.

For Subgroups Subgroups in component part groups are dimensioned in separate local areas together with the most important dimensions like component part groups. You can enter further specifications on a separate page of this parameter group.

Dimensioning of Main part and Sub parts The following two examples illustrate a practical selection for organising the dimensioning of main and sub parts in a structural group and the selection of various local dimensioning options.

The conventional setting of dimensioning everything outside the group is optimum for this structural group. Dimensioning the main parts (1) is carried out first, before dimensioning sub parts (2). The haunch flange (3) is however dimensioned with reference to local elements, so the position of the dimensioning chain is independent from the other dimensioning chains

Detailing Style

679

Here, on the other hand, individual dimensioning for sub parts is selected for sub parts (2) and the main part (1) is dimensioned close to the part. The standard sub part dimensioning, which refers to the main part in the group, is completely deactivated..

Detailing Style

680

Tab Groups ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach add-on dimensions in the main views of the detail (front viw, plan view, etc.) and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains.

List of Dimensioning Groups The following special dimensions may be added apart from the different component part groups for shapes, poly-plates, etc already described in the introduction: Special Dimensions

Reference Points Position dimensions of the two reference points of the main part System Dimensions System dimensions of the components connected to the main part Diagonal Dimensions Length and system dimensions for diagonal shapes Manual Dimension Points Manual dimensioning objects from the 3D model for groups Local reference planes Position of reference planes (connecting shapes) at reference to the

connecting shape Additional dim. gusset plate Additional dimension for drill holes in gusset plates

Detailing Style

681

Special Forms of Dimensioning Some additional dimensionings for diagonal shapes as well as system dimensions may be added via special dimensions. System points here are the points of intersection of the center axes of connected shape and reference shape. Diagonal Dimensions

Length Overall length of the diagonal System distance Distance of the end points to the system point which is situated next System length Distance of system points

System Dimensions

On system position The position of the dimension chains depends on the position towards the axis of the main part

Own dim. chain (secondary) System dimensions of secondary position always get their own dim. chain Primary dim. chain (secondary) System dimensions of primary/secondary position only get one dim. chain

Additional Dimensions Gusset Plate (Related to Reference) System point Reference to the system point of reference part and hole field direction Plate edge Reference to the plate edge situated next in hole field direction Diagonal and System Dimensions Here you can see some examples of diagonal and system point dimensioning:

Diagonal Dimensions Here you see the length of a diagonal (1), its distances to the two system points (2) and the system length (3). In addition, dimensioning of the system points (4) of the main part has been added.

System Dimensions Here you see the system dimensions of connecting shapes which are in primary (1) and secondary (2) position to the main part. Separated dimesion chains have been selected.

Detailing Style

682

Tab Groups ReferencePoints Endplate

Settings

Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach single part dimensions in the tilt endplates of the detail and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains and to the default settings for single part reference points.

Detailing Style

683

Tab Groups ReferencePoints Section

Settings

Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach add-on dimensions in the section views of the detail and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains and to the default settings for group reference points.

Detailing Style

684

Tab Groups IndividualParts

Settings

Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach individual single parts dimensions in the main views of the detail. You also determine which fundamental dimensions have to appear in which views. The fundamental settings with regard to dimensioning (position etc.) are globally valid for all individual dimensionings together; however, you can individually exclude certain component parts and dimension chains here. For some settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of the default settings for individual dimensioning.

Detailing Style

685

Tab Groups IndividualParts ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach individual single part dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains and to the default settings for single parts reference points.

Detailing Style

686

Tab Groups SubGroup

Settings

Here, you select the subgroups for which you want to attach individual add-on dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine which fundamental dimensions have to appear in which views. Filtering is made via the main part of the subgroup. The fundamental settings with regard to dimensioning (position etc.) are globally valid for all individual dimensionings together; however, you can individually exclude certain component parts and dimension chains here. For some settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of the default settings for individual dimensioning.

Detailing Style

687

Tab Groups SubGroup ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the add-on parts for which you want to attach individual add-on dimensions in the main views of the detail (front view, plan view, etc.) and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains and to the default settings for groups reference points.

Detailing Style

688

Tab Assemblies

Group Detail Dimensioning

For Add-on Parts Loose single parts in assemblies are dimensioned like single parts in their own local areas together with the most important dimensions. You can enter further instructions on a separate page of this parameter group.

For Sub groups Subgroups in assemblies are dimensioned like groups in their own local areas together with the most important dimensions. You can enter further instructions on a separate page of this parameter group.

> Like groups The settings for the reference points of standard group sub parts are used.

> Like subgroups The settings for the reference points of sub parts in subgroups are used. Here you specify which reference point settings in groups should be used for dimensioning subgroups. According to the importance of the subgroup, you will get a uniform dimensioning for multiply nested groups within an assembly.

Detailing Style

689

For Groups Groups in assemblies are dimensioned like groups in their own local areas together with the most important dimensions. You can enter further instructions on a separate page of this parameter group.

Detailing Style

690

Components of Structural Dimensioning Assemblies are the most complex structure within ProSteel. Dimensioning accordingly is rather extensive if you make use of all possibilities offered by individual dimensioning. All directly subordinate structures within the assembly are treated like one single component part, i.e. a complete group is dimensioned on its maximum dimensions. If you want to dimension the inner structure of such a group, use individual dimensioning instead. Since group dimensioning including possible subgroups requires a great number of parameters, no separate independent parameter record will be available any more in the part area assemblies. In this case, the program falls back on the settings for groups.

The following picture shows the reduction to subordinate structures. You see the complete assembly (1), the group (2) contained in the assembly and the subgroup (3) which again is contained in the group.

Detailing Style

691

If you now look on the different sharets of dimensioning, you will recognize very well that the different areas are independent of each other. Since you can globally deactivate complete areas, even complex structures can be clearly set without losing track. Basic Dimensioning The group here is considered as a whole and globally dimensioned using the default settings ‘Reference Points’. Each individual dimensioning of the assembly has been deactivated.

Group Dimensioning Here, the basic dimensioning has been deactivated and the individual dimensioning for groups in assemblies has been selected. For groups the dimensioning of subgroups contained in these groups has been deactivated. Subgroup Dimensioning Here, the basic dimensioning has been deactivated and the individual dimensioning for groups in assemblies has been selected. There, however, all add-on parts have been deactivated and only the individual dimensioning of subgroups has been selected.

Detailing Style

692

Tab Assemblies ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the component parts or main and subgroups for which you want to attach individual add-on dimensions in the main views of the detail (front view, plan view, etc.) and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. A complete group is dimensioned over its outer dimensions like a single component part. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chains and to the default settings for groups reference points.

List of Dimensioning Groups The following special dimensions may be added apart from the different component part groups for shapes and poly-plates, as well as a general group already described in the introduction: Special Dimensions

Diagonal Dimensions Length and system dimensions for loose diagonal shapes Manual Dimension Points Manual dimensioning objects from the 3D model for assemblies

Detailing Style

693

Tab Assemblies GroupDetails

Settings

Here, you select the groups for which you want to attach individual add-on dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine which fundamental dimensions have to appear in which views. Filtering is made via the main part of the group. The groups can either be standard component part groups (these are groups which themselves can contain subgroups) or they are explicitely named subgroups on the same hierarchy level as the standard component part groups. The fundamental settings with regard to dimensioning (position etc.) are globally valid for all individual dimensionings together; however, you can individually exclude certain component parts and dimension chains here. For some settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for individual dimensioning.

No separate independent parameter record is available for the individual dimensioning in assemblies. In this case, the program falls back on the parameters for groups or subgroups in component part groups. If it is an individual dimensioning of single parts, the corresponding parameter record for groups will be used as well. Apart from a reduction of parameters a constant drawing view of component part groups between (a) complete assemblies with individual dimensioning or (b) individually displayed component part groups of this assembly will be guaranteed by this – assuming that both groups are using the same detailing style.

Detailing Style

694

Tab ConnectionNode

Settings

Here, you select the component parts for which you want to attach individual single part dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine which fundamental dimensions have to appear in which views. The fundamental settings with regard to dimensioning (position etc.) are globally valid for all individual dimensionings together; however, you can individually exclude certain component parts and dimension chains here. For some settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for individual dimensioning.

The details of connection nodes mainly show the connection elements such as endplates, webangles etc. of the connections. The involved main shapes are only displayed as section. Therefore, dimensioning is limited to an individual dimensioning of the involved connection elements and of the final detailings of shapes. Group - detail dimensioning For component parts in views, the normal 2D-components with the most important dimensions are provided with dimensions in their own local ranges. You can make additional inputs on a separate page for this parameter group.

Detailing Style

695

Tab ConnectionNode ReferencePoints

Settings

Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach individual single part dimensions in the main views of the detail and determine the dimension points and the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimension chains as well as to the default settings for single parts reference points.

The neighboring figure shows a node built out of the endplate connection of two girders and a support. Dimensioning of drill holes in the view is related to the system axis of the connected girders. Reference to edge has been selected for the cut-out in the shape. The filters of individual dimensioning permit a perfect separation of the settings also they have the parameter record in common.

Detailing Style

696

Tab Views

Group General

Connect Dimensions Similar inner dimension chains which are situated close together are connected to one common dimension chain each.

System Axis Only the axis distances of the outer profiles are used to calculate the total dimensions of the entire steel construction (outer edge steel).

Outer Edge Steel The definition of the outer edge steel of the construction (including filter) is used as the total dimensions of the view and as the reference point ‘View’. Otherwise the outer grid axes are used for this purpose, if represented..

Display Areas The determined dimension areas (if local areas have been activated) are displayed in colour for control purposes. This option is only an auxiliary for the configuration of the local areas and should normally be deactivated.

Group Filter For Outside Edge Steel

Here, you have the possibility to exclude certain parts from the calculation of outer dimensions to prevent it from increasing e.g. by the projection of base plates.

Detailing Style

697

Endplates horizontal End and base plates in horizontal direction (width) are not taken into consideration.

Endplates vertical End and base plates in vertical direction (height) are not taken into consideration.

Poly-plates horizontal Poly-plates and stiffeners in horizontal direction are not taken into consideration.

Poly-plates vertical Poly-plates and stiffeners in vertical direction are not taken into consideration.

Counter Type horizontal The shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in horizontal direction is not taken into consideration.

Counter Type vertical The shape type opposite to the view (i.e. at views the shapes in cross-section display and at plan view the shapes in view display) in vertical direction is not taken into consideration.

Group Dimensioning Areas

Dimensioning Area Here, you determine the principle method for component part dimensioning in views. Standard – All shapes are dimensioned outside the view. Only Outside – Shapes which are situated in the defined outside area are dimensioned outside the view. All other shapes are not dimensioned. Outside and Inside – Shapes which are situated in the defined outside area are dimensioned outside the view. Shapes which are situated in the remaining inside area of the view are locally dimensioned. Outside and Area Analysis – Local inside areas of the view are automatically determined according to your defaults. Shapes which are situated in the defined outside area are dimensioned outside the view. Shapes which are situated in the determined inside areas are locally dimensioned. You can give additional information on a separate page of this parameter group. For more detailed information about inside and outside areas of a view, please refer to the general explanations of local areas in overviews.

Area Sizes Here, you indicate the distance from the corresponding outer edge of the view to the inside up to which a shape is still assigned to the outer area.

Detailing Style

698

> Outer Fields Here you enter the distances of left, right, lower and upper side individually.

> Inner Field Here, you enter the size of the sections into which a local inner area is additionally subdivided. Each section can contain its own local dimension chains. The size is an approximate value and can be bigger or smaller in reality. If you enter the value 0, the areas are not subdivided any more. For more detailed information about inner and outer areas of a view, please refer to the general explanations concerning local areas in overviews.

Filter for Overall Dimension Normaly, ProSteel uses all shapes to determine the outer dimensions. For practice-oriented dimensioning of overviews, however, it is often reasonable to exclude certain shapes from the determination of overall dimensions. The example shows a typical form of dimensioning, when e.g. the outer dimensions are taken from drawings which are part of a quotation or which have been realized by an architect and these shall be found in the approved plans.

Base Plates (1) The base plates are included into the determination in vertical direction, but excluded in horizontal direction. Counter Type (2) The wall latch-bolts are also excluded in horizontal direction. As the type of overview drawing is a view (global Z-direction visible), the cross-sections are the counter type.

Detailing Style

699

Tab Views ReferencePoints

List of Dimensioning Groups The following special dimensions may be added apart from the different component part groups for shapes and poly-plates, as well as a general group already described in the introduction: Special Dimensions

Construction Axes The existing construction axes (frame working area) of the view Outer Edge Steel Outer dimensions of steel construction related to the border axes Diagonal Dimensions Length and system dimensions for diagonal shapes Manual Dimension Points Manual dimensioning objects from the 3D model for overviews Special Forms of Dimensioning Dimensioning of overviews differs a bit from dimensioning of groups with regard to possible reference points and position of dimension chains, especially if local areas are used. For the dimension points (target points), however, nearly the same possibilities are available as at shapes in construction groups. Reference Connection Start View Left resp. lower side of the overall view Start Construction Axes Extreme left resp. lower visible construction axis Start Area Left resp. lower side of the corresponding local area

Detailing Style

700

Edge View Side of the overall view which is situated next Edge Construction Axes Outer visible construction axis which is situated next Edge Area Side of the corresponding local area which is situated next Component Part Extreme left resp. lower dimension point which is used (self reference) Next Construction Axis The next visible construction axis in dimensioning direction

Additional Dimensions

View Outer edges of the overall view in dimensioning direction Construction Axes Utmost visible construction axes in dimensioning direction View + Construction Axes Outer edges and utmost visible construction axes in dimensioning direction Area Outer edgesof the corresponding local area in dimensioning direction

Position Dimension Chains (I) (Only Inner Area)

Middle Geometrical center of the area Middle Top / Left A little bit above resp. left of the geometrical center of the area Middle Bottom / Right A little bit below resp. right of the geometrical center of the area Half Top / Left In the middle of the upper resp. left half of the area Half Bottom / Right In the middle of the lower resp. right half of the area Top / Left Above resp. left of the area Bottom / Right Below resp. right of the area To Inside Near area edge seen from the center of the overall view To Outside Far away area edge seen from the center of the overall view

Position Dimension Chains (II)

Each Alignment Dimensioning in each alignment towards the reference direction Only if horizontal Only dimensioning if part horizontal (parallel) towards reference direction Only if vertical Only dimensioning if part vertical (perpend.) towards reference direction Only if orthogonal Only dimensioning if part rectangular towards reference direction Only if diagonal Only dimensioning I fpart diagonal towards reference direction

Detailing Style

701

Area Assignment (Only Inner Area) According to Belonging Position of dimension chains in the belonging outer or inner area Separate Outer Area Position of dimension chains in the outer area, separate dimension chain

for inner area Common Outer Area Position of dimension chains in the outer area, common dimensions In the following figure, you see a simple example for dimensioning a view including construction axes display.

The first dimension chain from above shows the dimensioning of the shapes related to the construction axes, the second dimension chain shows the dimensioning of the construction axes and the third dimension chain shows the dimensioning of outer edge steel (2600). The overall dimension (3000) is measured over the outer axes. Construction axes 1 and 3 could be hidden in the settings for overviews. In this case, they wouldn’t be dimensioned.

Detailing Style

702

Tab Views ReferencePoints AnchorDetails

Settings

Here, you select the treatments for which you want to attach individual single part dimensions in the anchor details and determine the dimension points as well as the position of dimension chains. For the essential settings on this dialog tab, please refer to the general description of defaults for dimensioning chain and of defaults settings for single part reference points.

Reference to next Constructional Axis The holes of the anchor plates refer to the construction axis which is situated next. Reference to Connecting Shape The holes refer to the center of support. The center of support itself refers to the construction axis which is situated next. Coordinate Dimensions The coordinate dimensions refer to the absolute position in the plan view (origin of axes dimensioning).

Detailing Style

703

Dialog page - views of single details

Settings

Here you select the components for which you want to provide customized component dimensions in the view and you specify which basic dimensions are to appear. Basic settings for dimensioning (position etc.) are valid globally for all customized dimensions simultaneously, but here you can exclude certain components and dimensional chains. Some settings on this dialog page can be found in the general description of the inputs for customized dimensions.

Detailing Style

704

Dialog page - views of details of reference points

Settings

Here you select the processing where non-standard component part dimensions are desired in the view, and can determine the dimensional points and location of the individual dimensional chains. The relevant settings for this dialog page are found in the general description of the specifications for dimensional chains and in the specifications for the component reference points.

Detailing Style

705

Tab Views AreaAnalysis

Group Analysis Shapes

Analyse Type Here, you determine how to define the final local areas from the analysis. Main Direction – Only the analysed main direction of dimensioning is used to build an area. Transversal Direction – Only the analysed transversal direction of dimensioning is used to build an area. Overlay Single – New areas are built by overlaying the areas of the analysed main and transversal direction. Overlay Groups – New areas are built by overlaying the areas of the analysed main and transversal direction. Then, bordering areas are new combined.

Min. Count The minimum number of direction-determining shapes which must exist when comparing the length classes in one direction to decide which is the main direction of dimensioning.

Threshold (%) The relative difference in length with regard to the longest shape of a higher class to permit building of a new lower class

Min. Length The minimum length of the shape to be used for analysis at all

Max. Distance The maximum distance of one shape end to the other to be connected to an imaginary continuous shape.

Max. Offset The maximum offset of the center axes of two parallel shapes to be connected to an imaginary continuous shape.

Detailing Style

706

Group Extend/Combine Area

Max. Distance to Border horizontally If the distance to the next bordering edge in analysis direction is smaller than this value, the previous area in this direction will be extended up to the new border.

Max. Distance to Border vertically If the distance to the next bordering edge transversal to the current analysis direction is smaller than this value, the previous area in this direction will be extended up to the new border.

Combine Max. Wide Width a section (disk) at least has to have in analysis direction to be processed as separate area. Otherwise, the previous area will be extended perpendicularly completely up to each of these borders if the width is also bigger than the value brought into line.

Max. Distance for Collect Maximum distance between two areas which came into being by overlaying to be collected again to a common area.

Min. Number of Border Shapes This number of direction-determining shapes of high classes has to be used at least for building the borders of the area. Otherwise, the shapes of the next lower class will be used as well.

Min. Total Size Minimum length and width of a new area by overlaying. Smaller areas are assigned to the previous neighboring area.

Method of Analysis The analysis of the local areas is made by cutting the whole view in thought in several disks. These are limited by those shapes which visually appear as continuous shapes. The resulting imaginary shape lengths are classified according to their length and – starting with the longest class – the number of direction-determining shapes is compared until a clear majority is found. This determines the cutting direction and thus (perpendicular to it) the main direction of dimensioning.

Detailing Style

707

Now the possible sections are collected in analysis direction via pre-defined minimum widths. The final area size is limited by the shapes which are running transversally to the cutting direction. Finally, possibly existing bordering edges are brought into line. An overlaying permits to build new areas out of the intersection of main and transversal direction. Here, too a collection and bringing into line can be made (however only in cutting direction). Thus, empty areas (e.g. notches) are better taken into consideration. Unfortunately, there is no generally applicable solution with fixed parameters which can be used for all kinds of constructions. Therefore, it is inevitable to make some experiments with the parameters, especially in case of complexe constructions, until a favourable division is reached.

Detailing Style

708

C.2.5 Label Settings

Use this dialog tab to specify if and what type of position flag or welding symbol to attach to the construction parts. In addition, you indicate how the details and views have to be labeled.

Tab PositionFlags

Group General

Pos. Flags First The position flags are attached before part dimensioning so that they are near the part.

Only 1st Part View In case of several partial views of a detail, the position flags are only attached to the first view (except for possible 2D cuts and folded end plates).

In Sections Position flags are also attached to all 2D-cuts.

No Cross-Sections Position flags are not attached to component parts, which are visible as cross-sections in the view.

Plates in Views A position flag is also attached to polyplates and stiffeners in model-views (overviews).

Alignment Here, you select the aligment of the position flags in the detail drawing. Horizontal – all position flags are aligned horizontally. Vertical – all position flags are aligned vertically. According to style – all position flags are aligned as indicated in the distribution style.

Detailing Style

709

Group Position Flags

For Main Parts A position flag is attached to the main parts of construction groups.

For Group Parts A position flag is attached to the subparts of construction groups.

For loose Single Parts A position flag is attached to the component parts not belonging to a group.

For Bolts A position flag is attached to the bolts of a construction group.

Pos.Flag Template Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of position flags. The template controls what has to be displayed in the individual position flags, how the flag is structured and according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected. You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.

Click on this button to move directly to the dialog tab for setting the distribution templates. You can modify the selected template or create new ones. Please note that you have to save a modified template first before the modifications become valid.

Detailing Style

710

Tab WeldingSymbols

Group General

At End Plates The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in single parts views for base and endplates, if the connection shape is shown, too.

At Groups The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in group views.

Folded Plate The welding symbols of the inserted welding joints are displayed in group views for folded end plates.

Group Welding Symbols

Pos. Flag Template Here, you select the template for automatic distribution of welding symbols. The template controls what has to be displayed in the individual welding symbols, how the flag is structured and according to which criteria the distribution in the detail or in the view is effected. You create a distribution template in the positioning command and only load it here.

Click on this button to move directly to the dialog tab for setting the distribution templates. You can modify the selected template or create new ones. Please note that you have to save a modified template first before the modifications become valid.

Detailing Style

711

Distribution of Welding Symbols Distribution of welding symbols takes place similar to distribution of positioning flags. Surrounding geometry is recognized in the drawing. Please refer to chapter Positioning for the corresponding meaning of the settings.

Group Sorting

You will find the meaning of the different settings in the description of distributing position flags in the chapter about positioning.

Group Options

Group Flags Flags having the same content are combined to a common flag if they are situated within group distance.

> Group Distance Distance two identical flags may have to be combined to a common flag.

Detailing Style

712

> Always Guideline For each flag for which a guideline is created; otherwise only one guideline will be created altogether for the combined flags.

Layer Layer on which the welding symbols have to be created.

Detailing Style

713

Tab AdditionalText

Group Detail Description

Partial View The name of the partial view is displayed.

Scale The detailing scale is displayed. If you have selected ‘Partial View’ and ‘Scale’, both are used to create an entry in the form of "Front View (M1: 10)".

> Prefix Here, you specify which text is positioned in front of the scale (if you enter e.g. ‘M 1:’, you will get ‘M 1:10’).

Number The total quantity of component parts in the model is displayed. Of course the quantity of parts is only valid after previous positioning.

> Postfix Here, you specify which text is still added to the number (if you enter e.g. ‘x’, you will get ‘5x’). If you want to have an independant text for number “1”, you indicate the complete output separated by comma in front of the postfix (e.g.’SINGLE,x’).

Shape Description The name of the component part or view is displayed.

Shape Length The length of the component part is displayed.

Detailing Style

714

Material The material designation of the component part is displayed. If you have simultaneously checked ‘Shape Description', 'Shape Length' and ‘Material' , all are used to create an entry in the form of "HE 200 B...7800 RST-37-2".

Change Note The modification status of the component part is displayed.

Position No. The position number of the component part is displayed.

> Prefix Here, you specify which text has to be positioned in front of the position number.

Shipping No. The shipping number of the component part is displayed.

Remarks Comments are displayed, which have been assigned to the part e.g. with "Change Properties".

Group Language

Standard The drawing is exclusively labeled in the original language of the program installation.

One Language The drawing is labeled in the language chosen as ‘First Language’ in the selection list.

Two Languages The drawing is labeled in the two languages chosen as ‘First Language’ and ‘Second Language’ in the selection list. The two terms are displayed separately, divided by oblique stroke, e.g. "Ansicht A / view A". The selection 'Standard' as language corrsponds to the original language of the program installation.

The translation of the terms is based on a translation database with a translation 1:1. If the corresponding term is not defined there, the original language of the program installation is used instead. If there are identical terms at bi-lingual labeling, only one term will be displayed.

Group Text Sizes

Normal Text Here you enter the text size for the label.

Text Scale Here, you enter the text sizes for the position number, view and scale text.

Text at Shape Here, you enter the text size for the text label at shapes in overviews.

Text Style Select the text style (script) which has to be used for displaying the text entries in the selection list.

Detailing Style

715

Tab AdditionalTexts Views

Group Construction Axis

Display Axis The axes descriptions of the work frames perpendicular towards the current view are displayed. Text sizes and display form are adopted from the work frame properties.

> With Axis Lines The actual axis is also displayed as 2D-line in the corresponding view.

> Only Inner Axes Only those axes are displayed which are situated within the determined overall dimensions of the view including a snap range.

Length (%) Here, you enter the relative length of the axis line (in %) related to the overall dimensions. Normally, the axis line is running towards the outer edges of the display (= 100%). If you enter a value bigger than 100, the line will be extended over these edges. If you enter a value between 1 and 100, the line will only partly be displayed from the bottom resp. from the left, e.g. to hint only at it in views.

Text Distance Here, you enter the distance of axes label towards the last outer dimension chain.

Axis Display Here, you enter a snap range up to which the axes situated outside the overall dimensions are still displayed.

Detailing Style

716

Group Shape Label

Display Labels Labels are attached to individual parts in overviews, insofar as a label for them is activated. This enables you to activate and/or deactivate the labeling for all parts without having to change individual inputs.

Text specification Here you can input a format template composed of fixed and variable text components for labeling parts. The various placeholders $(…) are thus replaced with the current values of the respective part. Possible placeholders $ (N) Name $(L) Short name $ (P) Position number $ (S) Shipping number $ (M) Material description $ (E) Distance to view plane $ (R1) Note 1 $ (R2) Note 2 $ (X, etc.) Special treatment of empty texts

Individual Shape labeling

In the representation of general plans you have individual influence over the labeling of parts thanks to freely definable display groups. You can determine whether, how and where a part should be labeled. In addition to the general style sheets listed above, various standard labels may also be selected, as well as individual labels for specific parts. Further information is available under the description of the "2D display in general views" in this manual..

Detailing Style

717

C.2.6 Settings for ‘ProConcrete 3D’ Parts

On these dialog pages you can determine how reinforcement elements present in the drawing produced with the ‘ProConcrete’ application are presented and captioned. The order to handle the large number of settings and still to retain conciseness, the inputs are organized according to the basic reinforcement elements and drawing tasks (such as captions, for example). Within a group of settings you can still differentiate between the individual 3D-objects of the model. This differs from other detail style settings which are arranged according to the detail types and functional areas. Since the ‘ProConcrete’ user interface is presently not available in German, to ensure consistent terminology no translation is provided for the detail style parameters. The specific ‘ProConcrete’ documentation indicates what the customized elements mean and how they can be generated and manipulated. The following discussion presupposes the necessary basic knowledge.

Detailing Style

718

Reinforcement elements ProConcrete offers several possibilities to add reinforcement to a concrete element. The detail style specifications can be adjusted separately for the individual reinforcement elements (e.g. supporting member or bracket) or their superordinate 3D-Objects in the model (e.g. reinforcing cage). Reinforcement element 3D-Object Supporting member(Rebar) reinforcing cage (RebarBeam)

rod distribution (RebarSet) single rod (RebarSingle)

Yoke (Stirrup) reinforcing cage (RebarBeam) Matte (Mesh) reinforcement mat (Mesh) The representation is controlled by the superordinate 3D-Object. That means for example, that evenly distributed rods within a RebarSet can be combined and counted with distribution symbols. But if these rods are inserted as single rods, then that is not possible. Hierarchy: The concrete object (e.g. base plate) can contain several3D-Objects (e.g. reinforcing cage) for the reinforcement. The concrete object (e.g. base plate) can contain several3D-Objects (e.g. reinforcing cage) for the reinforcement. These again consist of the individual reinforcement elements (e.g. supporting members). Longitudinal view and cross section With some functions different specifications are possible for the longitudinal view and the cross section. The definition of this view in most cases depends on the superordinate 3D-Object, and its type and component coordinate system (or the main distribution direction) are used for this. If we are dealing with a single rod or a longitudinal distribution, which is used e.g. at a connection reinforcement (starter bar), then the direction of the longest sub-segment is crucial. However if the actual rod is only visible as a cross section, i.e. its direction runs along the Z-axis of the current view, then basically the diameter of the rod is represented.

Detailing Style

719

Dialog page - Rebar

Display Group

Display Longitudinal Here you indicate how the rods are displayed in the longitudinal view. None – no rods are displayed. All single – all rods are fully displayed as a simple line. All Outline –all rods fully represented as double line, whose spacing corresponds to the diameter. Single+Symbol – all rods that can be combined are displayed with a symbolic representation which shows the position and distribution range. However, one rod of the distribution is fully displayed as a pattern rod by use of a simple line. Outline+Symbol – all rods that can be combined are displayed by a symbolic representation which shows the position and the distribution range. However, one rod of the distribution is fully displayed as a pattern rod by use of a simple line. Only symbol – all rods that can be combined are displayed by a symbolic representation which shows the position and the distribution range. However no pattern-rod is represented.

Rebar line type the line type which is used for the representation of the rods (or the pattern rod for symbol representation).

Rebar Color the color used to display the rods (or the pattern rod for symbol representation). Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Detailing Style

720

Display CROSS section here you can specify how the rods will appear in a cross section view. None – no rods are represented. All single – all rods are fully displayed as a simple line. All Outline – all rods fully represented as double line, whose spacing corresponds to the diameter.

Group symbol

Symbol Type Here you specify what type of symbol display is to be used if you selected this under ‘Display Longitudinal.’ You may choose between different variants which can be represented as simple circles (Circles) or filled circles (Donuts). An overview of the possible variants is found under ‘symbol representation of rod distribution’.

Symbol Line Type The line type used for symbol representation (except for the pattern rod).

Symbol Color The color used for representation of the circle symbols. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Symbol diameter The diameter of the circle symbols.

Division Color The color used for representation of the short rod cutouts. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Division length The length of the short rod sections.

Ladder Color The color used for representation of the region contained by the distribution. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Ladder pos. hor. The horizontal position of symbols for the distribution of horizontal rods. Input a value between 0 (full left) and 100 (full right); the input refers to the component coordinate system. Thus it pertains to the distribution range having a vertical extent

Ladder pos. vert. The vertical position of symbols for the distribution of vertical rods. Input a value between 0 (full left) and 100 (full right); the input refers to the component coordinate system. Thus it pertains to the distribution range having a horizontal extent

Detailing Style

721

Sample Pos. hor. The horizontal position of the vertical pattern rod. Input a value between 0 (full left) and 100 (full right); the input refers to the component coordinate system. This always refers to the nearest position where a vertical rod is actually located.

Sample pos vert. The vertical position of the horizontal pattern rod. Input a value between 0 (full left) and 100 (full right); the input refers to the component coordinate system. This always refers to the nearest position where a horizontal rod is actually located.

Detailing Style

722

Symbol representation of rod distribution

The symbol representation displays the total distribution range and the position of homogenous reinforcing bars, without having to represent each rod completely. Frequently representations are used which are similar to a ladder (Rebar ladder) and only one additional reinforcing rod is shown as a pattern. The following figures show the possible symbol types for ‘Circles;’ as basic representation, the ‘Single+Symbol’ is selected.

For comparison: Without symbol representation. (All reinforcing bars of a concrete surface are indicated separately and completely)

All Circles (you see the pattern-rod (A) and the distribution (B) in each case for the horizontal and vertical direction)

All Circles + Arrows

Main Circles

Main Circles + Arrows

Only line

Detailing Style

723

Dialog page - Rebar Annotations

Group label

Display Here you can input how the captions are to appear on the reinforcing bars. None – No captions are used. Text aligned– the caption text is represented as simple text which is aligned in the direction of the rod. Leader aligned (45°) – Caption text is attached as text flag which is aligned in the direction of the rod. The leader line is always bent at around 45°. Leader aligned (90°) – Caption text is attached as text flag which is aligned in the direction of the rod. The leader line is always bent at around 90°. Leader horizontal – The caption text attached as text flag which is basically aligned horizontally.

Text Format Here you can input a format pattern from fixed and variable text constituents for lettering of the reinforcing bars. The different placeholders $ (…) will then be replaced by the current values of the respective rod or the rod distribution. You can define two different text lines.

> Text Size Input the letter size of the respective text line.

Detailing Style

724

Range text format Input here the format pattern used for variable values (value range) instead of a constant value. If you do not input anything, then the default value (like e.g. 100… 200) is always used.

Cross section labels Here you input which superordinate 3D-Object is used for captioning the rods in the cross-sectional view, if these are generally displayed. None – Captioning is not used for any object. Only RebarSet – Captioning is used for only one rod distribution. Only RebarBeam – Captioning is used only for one reinforcing cage. RebarSet and RebarBeam – Captioning is used only for one rod distribution and one reinforcing cage. Except of RebarSingle – Captioning is used for each object except the single rods. Always – Captions are supplied for each object.

Information on the superordinate objects and their views is found under ‘reinforcement elements’. Detailed information on the captions and possible placeholders is found under ‘definition of the caption texts’.

Group options

Text style In the selection list you select the text style (fonts) used for display of the captions.

Text Color The color used for representation of the caption texts and leader lines. Use the corresponding autoCAD color number.

Text Distance Input the distance of the caption text from the reinforcing rod here. If the value is negative, then the text is presented underneath the rod (depending upon rod direction).

Text Position The horizontal insertion point of the caption text or of the leader line if we are dealing with a single rod. Input here a value between 0 (full left) and 100 (full right); the input refers to the component coordinate system.

Standard leader style Input here a style of the leader line if you selected a text flag with leader line under ‘Display’ and if the reinforcing rod is seen in the longitudinal direction. Line only – A simple line is represented. Arrow – the point of origin of the line is an arrow. Circle – the point of origin of the line is a circle.

> Symbol size The symbol size for the point of origin of the leader line.

Detailing Style

725

Section leader style Here you input the style of the leader line if you selected a text flag with leader line under ‘display’ and the reinforcing bar is seen in cross section. Line only – A simple line is represented. Arrow – the point of origin of the line is an arrow. Circle – the point of origin of the line is a circle.

> Symbol size The symbol size for the point of origin of the leader line.

Defininition of marking texts

If you do not provide information in the first text line under ‘text format’ then you receive a standard caption with quantity and name (e.g. 7xR20) of the reinforcing bars. However, with the help of the format defaults you can create your own caption texts from fixed and variable text constituents. The different placeholders are then replaced by current component data.

Possible placeholders:

$(C) quantity $(N) name $(P) item number $(W) distance of the rods with distribution - desired value $(RW) distance of the rods with distribution - actual value $(D) indication of direction $(ML) length of the main segment $(tl) total length of the rod including finishing $ (mA) identification (‘Mark’) $ (GR) quality (‘degrees’) $ (CT) coating (‘Coating’) $ (SU) surface (‘Surface’) $(X,…) Special treatment of empty texts (see below)

Additions to the number notation and accuracy:

i The value is output- basically only in inches (imperial) f The value is output basically in foot and inches (imperial) 0 round off to next integral value 1 round off to 1/10 (metric) or to 1/2 (imperial) 2 round off to 1/100 (metric) or to 1/4 (imperial) 3 round off to 1/1000 (metric) or to 1/8 (imperial) 4… 9 etc. Placeholder for format template for value ranges:

$(MIN) minimum value $(MAX) max. value

Detailing Style

726

With value ranges for e.g. lengths, first the minimum and the maximum value are converted into text in accordance with the placeholder for the corresponding value. The two texts are then combined in accordance with the format template for value ranges into a new part-text which is finally used in place of the original placeholder.

The following examples indicate a practical application for a reinforcing bar with name “R20” in the metric and imperial system: Format template Exact Length output

$ (N) - $ (TL) 5000.13 R20– 5000,13 2�–6 5/8 R20– 2�–6 5/8

$ (N) - $ (TL0) 5000.13 R20– 5000 2�–6 5/8 R20– 2�–7

$ (N) - $ (TL1) 5000.13 R20– 5000,1 2�–6 5/8 R20– 2�–6 ½

$ (N) - $ (TLi) 5000.13 R20– 5000,13 2�–6 5/8 R20– 30 5/8

$ (N) - $ (TLi0) 5000.13 R20– 5000 2�–6 5/8 R20– 31

If you would like to obtain the statement “R20 (4000 to 5000)” for value ranges, but for simple lengths only “R20 – 5000”, then the two format templates will be:

$(N)– $ (TL0) Format template for caption text ($(MIN) to $ (MAX)) Format template for value range A special formatting template permits special treatment of text replacements with empty texts or with the value. For example, with single rods a distribution distance of 0 is not output, and also the coating does not always have any content. Then in order to exclude unneeded text in these cases, such as “@” or blank spaces, you can control this with the formatting command $(X,…) depending on the replacement value. The text after the comma, including a replacement value for an additional placeholder, is output only if this replacement value is not empty for the component. Then for a rod distribution, the result is e.g. the text “7xR20@300,” but for a single rod only “1xR20.” Note that in each $(X,…)- instruction you can only use one placeholder. Nesting is not possible. However, you can use several of these instructions with different placeholders in a formatting instruction.

Detailing Style

727

Dialog page - Rebar Optimization

Group - RebarBeam, - set, - single Here you input additional settings to optimize the display and the marking on the reinforcing rods – each independently for customized superordinate 3D-Objects. Since the parameters are identical, they are described only once. However, not all parameters are available for each type.

Display Clipping mode Here you input a limit for depth of view. Only the rods are displayed that are situated in the viewing direction within this range. View plane – Viewing depth is always measured from the current viewing plane. Individual – the viewing depth for each 3D-Object is measured from the first visible rod. Partial view settings – the used viewing depth corresponds to the inputs for the partial views. See also under ‘basic adjustments/partial views.” Hide all – No rods are represented.

> Clipping depth Input the desired viewing depth here. The value 0 means that the viewing depth is not limited.

Detailing Style

728

Label Clipping mode Here you indicate a limit for viewing depth for the caption texts. Only the rods are captioned which are located within this range in the viewing direction. View plane – viewing depth is always measured by the current viewing plane. Individual – The viewing depth is measured for each 3D-Object individually from the first visible rod.

> Clipping depth Here you input the desired viewing depth. The value 0 means that the viewing depth is not limited.

Further information on viewing depth is found under ‘Individual Viewing Depth’ in this chapter.

Cluster mode Here you input how homogenous rods may be combined to obtain distribution ranges. These ranges can be displayed with the help of symbol representation. Only regular – Only rods with the same length and the same distance to the distribution direction are combined. Rank (Main segment) – Rods of different length and position are combined only if the differences are within the tolerance values. The comparision length depends on the main segment. Rank (total length) – Rods of different lengths and position are combined if the differences are within the tolerance values. The comparision length is governed according to the total length. Rank (Longest AREA) – Rods of different lengths and position are combined if the differences are within the tolerance values. The comparison length is governed by the longest sub-segment in the main segment.

Length range The max. difference of the comparison lengths at which the rods are still combined.

Position range The max. difference of rod positions at which the rods are still combined.

Increment range The max. difference of rod distances at which the rods are still combined.

Level range The max. difference of the position levels at which the rods are still combined.

Further information on rod distribution is found under ‘Combining rods’ in this chapter.

Detailing Style

729

Customized viewing depth

The customized viewing depth offers the advantage over the normal viewing depth that in overviews only the upper reinforcement positions can be displayed (if a 3D-Object creates several positions). That is also the case if the components are on different levels of the view. This is achieved because for each 3D-Object the position of the individual rods is determined relative to the position of the highest particular rod.

Here you see the relationships when using the normal viewing depth (measured from the representation level arrow). In the 3D-Objects 1,2 and 3 there are in each case two reinforcement positions A and B. Now if only the upper position is to be displayed, then that is not possible since the selected viewing depth for object 1 already covers both positions. Object 3 is not covered yet and only for object 2 is everything as required.

Object selection when using normal viewing depth

The customized viewing depth provides better results here, since the highest position A of each 3D-Object is always covered. With a low viewing depth it is now possible that the deeper situated reinforcement layers B no longer fall within the selected range. The layer depth is measured individually for each 3D-Object starting from layer A.

Object selection when using the customized viewing depth

Please make certain they you have not already faded out certain 3D reinforcing objects during the general pre-selection of components for display. Thus you should select the option ‘Complete Component’ on dialog page ‘2D-display/views’ under ‘Concrete reinforcement’ if you wish to work with the customized viewing depth.

Detailing Style

730

Combining of rods

During the symbol representation of rod distributions, homogenous rods are combined into a group and captioned simultaneously. That is frequently the case with the reinforcement of ceiling slabs or walls. If we are dealing with rectangular structures here, it usually presents no problem. It is more difficult if the single rods follow any cut-outs or irregular bodies are present. The rods then have different lengths, spacing or insertion positions. Basically only reinforcing bars of the same type (e.g. “R20”) can be combined and must also originate from the same 3D-Object. The program now differentiates between a regular bundling (the data remain constant) and a range bundling (the data vary within a value range).

Here you see the reinforcing bars of a rod distribution (RebarSet) in a plate which contains a sector of a circle. Some of the rods thus have different lengths.

If symbol representation with regular bundling is selected, only homogenous rods are combined into groups. That is, the rods may vary neither in length nor in position to each other. The advantage of this representation is that each group and each deviating rod can receive its own caption, e.g. length.

With the help of range bundling different rods can now also be combined. You can use the tolerance values to specify the maximum deviations for forming customized groups. The advantage of this variant is a representation which indicates the distribution, but does not explicitly place a caption on each rod. Instead, value ranges are stated, like e.g. Length 1500 to 2000”

Detailing Style

731

For the analysis the rods are arranged first along the distribution directions to enable recognition of groups. Subsequently, the first rod is sequentially compared with the following rods. If the following rod corresponds to the comparison criteria and tolerances, it is accepted to the group. If it deviates, the group is finalized and the rod becomes the first comparison rod of a new group.

The figure shows on the left side the meaning of the tolerances and on the right side their effect on the grouping.

● Increment rank The distance A from the first to the second rod determines the distribution spacing of the group. If the deviation of the following distances is less than the specified tolerance, then the condition for the group is still fulfilled. ● Length range Length L of the first rod (depending upon input) determines the reference length of the group. If the deviation B of the length of the next rods is less than the specified tolerance, then the condition for the group is still fulfilled. ● Position range The center of the longest part in the main segment determines the position of the group. If the deviation C of the position of the next rods is less than the specified tolerance, then the condition for the group is still fulfilled. ● Level range Corresponds to the value ‘position range’, however the distances in the depth direction (position level) are examined here. The rods 1, 2 and 3 already form a group and then rod 4 is examined next. Since the distribution distance still fits and also the length corresponds to rod 1, it could be included also. However, the deviation D of its position is above the tolerance value, so that rod 4 now forms the beginning of a new group of rods 4, 5 and 6.

Detailing Style

732

Dialog page - Stirrup

Settings essentially correspond to settings for the reinforcing bars, so that you can reread the information there (see dialog page ‘Rebar’). These settings can be transferred accordingly. However, all parameters are not always available. Only modified or new parameters are described below.

Group symbol

Sample range Here you input in which range (equally to left or right) brackets are to be represented around the pattern bracket illustrated in the symbol display. Thus you can also represent several brackets as patterns. The top of the figure shows the normal symbol representation and on bottom the symbol representation with ‘SampleRange.’

Detailing Style

733

Dialog page - Stirrup Annotations

Settings essentially correspond to settings for the reinforcing bars, so that you can reread the information there (see dialog page ‘Rebar/annotations’). These settings can be transferred accordingly. However, not all parameters are always available.

Detailing Style

734

Dialog page - Stirrup Optimization

Group - RebarBeam

Display Clipping Here you input a limit to the viewing depth. Only the brackets are represented which are situated in the viewing direction within this range. View plane – The viewing depth is always measured from the current viewing plane. Individual – The viewing depth is measured for each 3D-Object individually from the first visible bracket. Individual from Rebar– The viewing depth is measured for each 3D-Object individually from the first visible reinforcing bar. Partial view settings – The used viewing depth corresponds to the inputs for the partial views. See also ‘basic adjustments/partial views’.

> Clipping depth Here you input the desired viewing depth. The value 0 means that the viewing depth is not limited.

Further information on the viewing depth is found in the description of the reinforcing bars (see dialog page ‘Rebar/Optimization’).

Detailing Style

735

Dialog page Mesh

Display Group

Display Longitudinal Here you input how the mats are represented in top view. None –No mats are represented. Cover – Each individual mat is represented as an outline with the associated shifting direction. Boundary – The outline of the entire design of all mats is presented. Cover+Boundary – Each customized mat is represented as an outline with the associated shifting direction. Additionally, the outline of the entire design is represented. The figure shows the representation with the option ‘Cover’ (A) as well as ‘Boundary’ (B). At the same time, the captioning is activated. The ‘Boundary’ option is at present only available for representation as component part.

Detailing Style

736

Mesh Line Type The line type which is used for representation of the customized mats.

Mesh Color The color used for representation of the customized mats. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Display Cross Section Input here how the mat cross sectional view is to appear. None – No mats are represented. All single – All mats are represented as a simple line.

Group symbol

Boundary Line Type The line type used for representation of the outline of the overall design.

Boundary Color The color used for representation of the outline of the overall design. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Detailing Style

737

Dialog page - Mesh Annotations

Settings essentially correspond to settings for the reinforcing bars, so that you can reread the information (see dialog page ‘Rebar/Annotations’). These settings can be transferred accordingly. However, not all parameters are always available. Only modified or new parameters are described below.

Group label

Boundary text format Here you can input a format template from fixed and variable text constituents for captioning the outline representation of the overall design. The different placeholders $ (…) will then be replaced by the current values of the design. Possible placeholders: $(N) name $(A) surface of the design

> Text Size Input the font size of the text line.

Options Group

You can likewise adjust the color and spacing of the caption text for the outline representation of the overall design.

Detailing Style

738

Dialog page - Mesh Optimization

Mesh Group

Display Clipping mode Here you input a limit for viewing depth. Only the mats are represented which are situated in the view direction within this range. View plane – The viewing depth is always measured from the current viewing plane. Individual – The viewing depth is measured for each 3D-Object individually from the first visible mat. Partial view settings – The used viewing depth corresponds to the inputs for the partial views. See also ‘basic adjustments/partial views.’

> Clipping depth Input the desired viewing depth here. The value 0 means that the viewing depth is not limited.

Further information on the viewing depth is found in the description of the reinforcing bars (see dialog page ‘Rebar/Optimization’).

Detailing Style

739

A.1.7 Example – Detailing of a Single Part

The picture below displays the example of detailing a single part with optimized settings. The example is based on the following main settings: Front and plan view are processed in one detail. The parallel holes are created with the ‘Separate Hole Tracks’ option. The ‘Separated Hole Tracks’ option is activated. The ‘Shape Shortening with Zigzag Double-Line’ option is activated. The ‘Combine Same Dimensions’ option is activated; min. = 3. Length and width were specified with the variant ‘Auto Larger (x1.4)’. The effects of the settings can be seen in this detail; no further revisions were required

Detailing Style

740

Detailing Style Assistant

741

C.3 Detailing Style Assistant

C.3.1 Easy creation of detailing styles

The detailing style assistant helps you to create new detailing styles by requesting the key parameters in a step by step process. On the basis of an internal default standard, the new detailing style is "mixed together" from various rules and the individual style parameters are set according to these rules. You benefit because you only have to make decisions regarding a small number of parameters and a complex, ready-to-use detailing style is nevertheless created. You are supported in this process by many help texts and illustrations, which make the assistant extremely useful, especially for ProSteel beginners.

Construction kit principle The assistant is based on a large number of pre-defined components, which are offered as a selection according to your specifications. Only when you wish to add dimensions to a model view, for example, are you asked for further information. In this way you build from the "floor slab" step by step up to the "roof." The result is a detailing style that already comes very close to your ideas. However, since this is a completely standard detailing style, fine-tuning can still be performed at a later date. A "creation rule" that has already been created can be saved with ProSteel template functions and managed to enable you to quickly create similar styles.


742

Restricted detailing styles With the help of limited detailing styles it is even easier to create and use a suitable style for a component. These styles are optimized for the detailing in question (e.g. the profile as a part) on their creation, but can only be used for this type of detailing subsequently. In the list of detailing styles these styles can be recognized by red symbols, the detail style dialog also contains a clear indication. Advantages A major advantage of restricted styles is their clarity. During their creation only information relevant to the detailing is requested and all unimportant pages are deleted and/or unnecessary parameters are deactivated during subsequent revision.

Here you see the parameter pages of a detailing style which is restricted to manual details. Since the latter cannot automatically be given dimensions or position flags, the corresponding pages are not available. The choices in the basic settings and the 2D display are also limited.

A restricted style has the advantage that you can only seldom change parameters that have no impact on the detailing. Moreover, an assignment filter is directly integrated, so that only suitable components can be assigned this style. Should you assign a group of profiles, stiffeners and 3D solids a detailing style restricted to profiles, for example, only the profiles will be attributed this style. Disadvantages Restricted styles can no longer be assigned any other detailing type at a later date (a group style cannot be assigned to a single part, for example) - which tends to be an advantage in most cases. You can transform a restricted style into a universal style retrospectively. You must consider, however, that the parameters required for the other type were not requested on creation of the style and therefore must be adapted manually.


743

Context-related content Depending on the default settings on creation, some parameter pages can also be deactivated after the creation of the style. If you have inputted in the assistant that you do not want any dimensioning for the style, for instance, you will find no pages with dimensioning parameters in the style. However, since the style (whether restricted or not) would in theory support dimensioning, in this case dimensioning is only deactivated. Should you subsequently activate this function, the pages will be available once again. This is where it differs from a restricted detailing style for manual detailing, for example, where you can never activate dimensioning in the detailing style since 2D detailing does not support any dimensioning in this instance.


744

C.3.2 Launching the detailing style assistant

To launch the assistant, call up the context menu in the component overview of the detail centre in the list of detailing styles. Click here on the entry Create detailing style and this opens up the following dialog box.

Procedure list In the procedure list you see an overview of the steps taken so

far, as well as the procedural step in progress. Click on an entry, you can still change any input here later on and thus influence the subsequent procedure.

Click on this button and the first page will be displayed.

Click on this button and the previous page will be displayed.

Click on this button and the next possible page will be displayed

Click on this button and the last page will be displayed. This is only possible if you have already gone through all previous pages. Here you will find a summary of your inputs at all stages.


745

Click on this button and the detailing style will be created in the model according to your settings. You then go through the normal dialog for processing a detailing style and can make further adaptations. This button is not available until you have reached the last page.

Number of pages Here you can see which input page you are on and how many pages are to follow.

On the first and last input page you have the option of loading and/or saving your inputs as a ProSteel template. This gives you access to certain creation standards at any time. After completely going through steps you can transfer between pages at any time, make corrections and then jump to the end again. Should the change impact the procedure as of the modified page, you must go through all subsequent steps again until the end of the process.

Colouring and support graphics

Support with inputs within the individual steps is provided by various help texts, help graphics and colors. This should help you to create a suitable style even without deeper detailing style knowledge. Blue texts explain which basic information is to be compiled by this assistant page and to which detailings this information applies. Red texts explain the meaning of a current selection within a page. These texts change according to your selection. Yellow fields are obligatory fields, which require a valid input in all events. Support graphics on the right serve to schematically illustrate the meaning of a current selection or selection set.

Selection from standard templates

Since the detailing assistant partly changes several parameters in the detailing style via your selection, some selection sets - especially dimensioning - can be selected via templates supplied with the product. As an alternative to a combination of supplied (sub-) templates, you can often also select your own customized, user-defined template, which you have created within the standard detailing style dialog. This enables you to combine customized and standard templates with each other in the creation process. An overview of the templates supplied with the product is available in the sub-section that follows this section.


746

C.3.3 Content of standard templates

The following compilation should explain the practical impact of the individual templates supplied, since this cannot currently be viewed directly on the assistant pages. A support graphic for this template group is all that appears on selection from a selection list. Like all templates in ProSteel, the templates are organized as a hierarchical structure whereby only the complete path appears in the selection list (and not the tree structure).

General information on the dimensioning templates Here you will find a compilation of all possible selection sets for dimension chain settings, from which you can compose a complete dimensioning within the different component areas. Since a description of each individually available template is beyond the scope of this manual, only the structure and some of the abbreviations used in the names will be described. Many of the terms here are self-explanatory. The example below shows the selection of two dimensioning templates for the creation of a dimensioning for sub parts in structural groups.


747

Selection sets of dimensioning templates Contour dimensions These are the modification dimensions of the outer

contour (if necessary the inner contour) through sections, notching etc. for parts.

Hole dimensions These are the holes in their top view (and in the side

view too, if necessary) for parts. Additional dimensions Special dimensions like reference points, axis etc. Total dimensions The total dimensions of the component or model

view. Mounting dimensions These are the mounting dimensions of profiles, poly

plates, stiffeners etc. inside the structural groups. Connection dimensions These are the mounting dimensions of the end

plates, brackets, purlin angles etc. within the structural groups.

Elevation dimensions These are the mounting dimensions of profiles, which

appear in the model view as a view of their flange or web.


748

Section dimensions These are the mounting dimensions of profiles, which

appear in the model view as a view of their cross-section.

Structure of template names Here you can see a typical example of the structure of a template name for the dimensioning of sub parts: Straight / Only primary view/ Outer edges Used dimensioning points Restriction of the position (not always available) Main orientation of the dimensioning .


749

Meaning of the main orientation Most of the templates begin with Radial and Straight. This describes the main orientation of the dimensional chains. The meaning of these terms is as follows: Radial This template is very suitable for bent profiles, since

they contain dimension chains along the circular arcs. In addition, however, horizontal and vertical dimension chains can also be included. A combined name such as "length and arc length", for example, implies a mixed dimensioning in this case.

Straight The dimensional chains here only run horizontally (for

radial profiles this is the direction from the starting to the ending point of the arc) and vertically.

Meaning of the component position Primary view View of the web or flange of a profile and/or the

surface of a slab (and flat-rolled steel). Secondary view View of the cross-section of a profile and/or the

edges of slab (and flat-rolled steel). The pages below contain a list of the most important format types for the dimension points in the various selection sets and components and/or model views.


750

Dimensioning for parts, end plates and anchor details Contour dimensions Cluster dimensions Continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning

to the end of the part respectively on the processing side.

Edges individually Individual dimensions along each edge that is

available in the part view.

Edges merged Individual dimensions along each diagonal edge. In

addition, continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning to the end of the part.


751

Hole dimensions Cluster dimensions Continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning

to the end of the part each on the side of the holes.

Hole groups Continuous dimensioning chains in a horizontal

direction from the beginning to the end of the part. Individual dimensioning chains per hole set in a vertical direction.

Edge reference Individual dimensioning chains per hole set, based

respectively on the nearest part edge.

For the anchor details there are various selection options for the cluster dimensions, each with different reference points. Cluster dimensions Continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning


752

Object reference to the end of the anchor plate. Cluster dimensions The dimensioning chains begin at the middle axis of Column reference the corresponding struts without closed components. Cluster dimensions The dimensioning chains begin at the nearest axis Grid axis without closed components..


753

Additional dimensions Reference The distance between both component reference

points in a horizontal direction.

Total dimensions Radian dimensions The length of the arc, as well as the enclosed angle,

in the longitudinal direction are given simultaneously. The length of the arc refers to the middle axis.

Length, width and In addition to the radian dimensions, the orthogonal radian dimensions dimensions are also given.


754

Dimensioning for groups, subgroups and sections Mounting dimensions Outer edges Continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning

to the end of the main part in a horizontal direction. Vertical from the main part edge or the insertion axis, mostly without closure dimensions.

Outer edges and Dimensioning of the holes is preferred,

dimensioning hole dimensions on the outer edges if no hole is available. Otherwise

a similar option is "outer edges.

Subgroups Only the available subgroups are dimensioned like a

single part (outer edge). Horizontally from the beginning of the group to the end of the group, vertically from the reference point without closure dimensions.


755

Connection dimensions Outer edges Continuous dimensioning chains from the beginning

to the end of the main part in a horizontal direction. Vertical from the main part edge or the insertion axis, mostly without closure dimensions.

Outer edges and Dimensioning of the holes is preferred,

dimensioning hole dimensions on the outer edges if no hole is available.

Dimensioning only in the secondary view. Otherwise a similar option is "outer edges.

Additional dimensions Reference The distance between both main part reference

points horizontally related to the total dimension of the group.

Diagonals Dimensioning of diagonally running profiles in a

longitudinal direction related to the system points of the center axis.

Total dimensions Radian dimensions The arc length as well as the enclosed angle are

given simultaneously in a longitudinal direction.


756

Dimensioning for assemblies Mounting dimensions Groups Only the (sub-) groups are dimensioned such as

single parts (outer edges). Horizontally and vertically from the beginning to the end of the assembly.

Profiles and/or plates Only profiles and/or plates that do not belong to any

(sub-) group are dimensioned. The dimensioning point for profiles depends on the respective type of profile. Horizontally and vertically from the beginning to the end of the assembly.

Connection dimensions These dimensions are not available here. Additional dimensions Manual dim. points The distances between manual dimensioning points

and/or dimensioning point groups (reference dimensions), which were added to the assemblies. The type of dimensioning (horizontal, vertical) is individually controlled through the dimensioning points.

Diagonals Dimensioning of diagonally running profiles in a

longitudinal direction related to the system points of the center axis. Additionally distance between the system points.

Total dimensions The dimensions are self-explanatory.


757

Dimensioning for overviews For the main orientation a distinction is drawn between Elevation view and Plan view (these are all views along the global z-direction), so that you can make an advantageous pre-selection. Elevation dimensions Profile automatically The profiles available are dimensioned, even if these

belong to (sub-) groups. The dimensioning point depends upon the type of profile in question. Horizontally and vertically from the beginning to the end of the view.

Assemblies Only the available assemblies alike a single part

(outer edges) are dimensioned. Horizontally and vertically from the beginning to the end of the view.

Grid axis offset The distance to the center axis of a profile to the

nearest grid axis is dimensioned.


758

Reference axis The insertion axis of the profile (or the subsequently added changeable reference axis).


759

Section dimensions As the same terms are used here as with the elevation dimensions, you can find their meaning there. Additional dimensions Axes The dimensions taken is the gap between the grid

axes (these are formed from the various work area frames). However, in the main “Elevation view“ alignment, these are merely the vertical axes, which are dimensioned horizontally from the start of the view to the end of the view.

Levels The dimensions taken is the gap between the

elevation levels that are formed from the grid. Overall dimension The dimensions are self-explanatory.


760

Templates for dimension line distances The template name here consists of a specification of the distance for the first dimension line and for the handling of the following dimension lines. First dimension line The distances, including between the dimension lines, are usually 10 mm. Wide distance The distance to the first dimension chain is 25 mm. Wide individual distance The distance to the first dimension line for individual

dimensions (e.g. dimensioning subgroups in groups) is 25 mm.

Next dimension lines Full length The various dimension extension lines begin at the

object to be dimensioned.

Broken The individual dimension extension lines are cut to

the previous dimension line with a hole.

Fixed length The individual dimension extebsion lines have a

predefined length (no matter what the distance between the dimension lines).

DetailCenter Express

761

C.4 DetailCenter Express

The DetailCenter-Express! is an extension of the DetailCenter to carry out recurring detailing tasks as fast as possible. In the actual DetailCenter, you can make exact detailing settings and you can decide for each component part separately whether and how it has to be detailed and placed on drawings. On the other hand, the DetailCenter Express! works off the complete detailing according to a pre-set pattern. Start such a detailing pattern with the preparation of the model for detailing and complete it with clearance work functions after insertion of the 2D-details in the workshop plans. You can define the patterns for different tasks by means of templates and then carry out the detailing with a single mouse click. As you perhaps know already from the installation assistants of this and other programs, the DetailCenter Express! will guide you through the necessary settings for the detailing pattern. You only can start detailing after having made all necessary settings. For this purpose, the dialog offers you different pages one after the other which can vary depending on your default settings. In this manual, we can therefore only describe any possible pages in the order of their being displayed. It can, also be that one or more pages don’t exist due to your default settings.


762

C.4.1 Running DetailCenter Express

The model has to be saved under a valid drawing name first to be able to work with the DetailCenter Express! Now click on the EXPRESS button in the component parts list of the DetailCenter or select the context menu. Here, you click on the entry DetailCenter Express! and the following dialog opens. Alternatively you can also start it directly from AutoCAD.

Click on this button to display the previous page.

Click on this button to display the following page.


763

Click on this button to start detailing. Detailing will be worked off according to your current settings. In the selection pages, you can watch in a display what is in process at the very moment.

It is true that you can work with AutoCAD or other applications during detailing process, depending on the computing capacity of your hardware. We recommend, refraining from this! After the DetailCenter Express! has completed its work, you are informed about it in an info box.


764

C.4.2 Selection Pages

In the following, you will find a description of the different possible selection pages. The pages are displayed in the main dialog box after having been selected with the buttons MORE and BACK. Each following page depends on your previous settings. If the previous settings are modified, you can ignore already filled in pages again. Nevertheless, the program will remember the specifications for later activation. Click on the PROCEED button with the mouse and you can start the process at any time you like, if your specifications are complete.

Starting Page This page is always displayed first. Here, you will set which tasks have to be done for you by the DetailCenter Express!


765

Prepare Here, you specify which corrections have to be made first before style assignments and detailing will be started.

Single Parts Here, you can connect loose single parts and group parts with detail styles.

Groups Here, you can connect standard groups and subgroups with detail styles.

Assemblies Here, you can connect assemblies with detail styles.

Views Here, you can connect views of work fields as well as plan and top views and anchor plans with detail styles.

Detailing Here, you can have the parts detailed as detail blocks.

Single Sheet Here, you can insert detailed detail blocks into workshop plans or activate the single sheet drawing output of details. If single sheet drawing has been selected, the parts will be detailed in any case. Detailing therefore has not to be activated extra.

Clean Up Here, you can set which corrections still have to be made after end of detailing.

To give you an example: If you want to put out all stiffeners and plates as well as the groups as DIN A-4 single sheet drawings, independent of already existing style assignments, select the following entries on the starting page: Prepare Detailing (to delete former assignments), Connect Single Parts with Detail Style, Connect Groups with Detail Style and Insert Detail Blocks/Single Sheet Drawings. There you will make the further settings. Please note that the DetailCenter Express! always works off the complete component parts list. The list is worked on as if you had transferred the complete model for detailing.


766

Prepare Detailing On this page, you will set which tasks have to be done before starting all further steps.

Cancel Write Protection Any existing markings are cancelled. Thus you can be

sure that all component parts will be seized by the following actions, if desired.

Delete All detail styles, which have already been assigned before, will be separated from the parts. Thus you can be sure that a detail style will be assigned only to the component parts selected in the DetailCenter Express!.

Reset All modify flags set by the program will be reset to initialize the model.

Delete links All pointers referring to detailed or inserted detail blocks entered in the model drawing will be deleted.

Delete Blocks Former detail blocks in the detail library of the model will be deleted.

If all fields on this page have been checked, your model drawing will be completely initialized. It is the same as if a detailing never took place before. Depending on the time of application of the DetailCenter Express! it is, however, also reasonable to exclude some points.


767

Detail Style for Single Parts On this page, you make the default settings, which single parts have to be connected with which detail styles. Both group parts and parts without group are treated here. The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the DetailCenter.

Upper List Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to the

corresponding component part type. The parts can of course only be recognized as such if they were created, with the corresponding ProSteel functions.

Left List Here, you select the component part type you want to assign a detail style to.

Right List Here, you see the current assignments. These can be removed again or modified.

Click on this button to assign the detail style displayed in the selection list to the component part selected in the left or right list.

Click on this button to cancel the assignment of the component part type checked in the right list.

At style selection, you can differentiate between the detail styles currently existing in the model drawing and the detail styles saved on the hard drive. If you select a detail style from the hard drive (marked with a [HD:] put first, e.g. [HD:] plates), it will be automatically loaded and it will replace the style possibly existing in the drawing.


768

Detail Style for Groups On this page, you make the default settings, which groups have to be connected with which detail styles. Only the groups as such are used for assignment, but not the corresponding single parts (non-recursive connection). The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the DetailCenter.


corresponding group type of standard groups. The type depends on the main part of the group; for subgroups, however, only a common detail style can be used.

As the assignment of detail styles corresponds to that for single parts, please refer to “Detail Style for Single Parts” for more detailed information.


769

Detail Styles for Assemblies On this page, you make the default settings, which assemblies and connecting gussets have to be connected with which detail styles. Only the assembly as such is used for assignment, but not the corresponding single parts (non-recursive connection). The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the DetailCenter.

Upper List Here, you choose the desired detail style to assign to all

assemblies and connecting gussets existing in the model.



770

Detail Style for Views On this page, you make the default settings, which views on the model have to be connected with which detail styles. The same defaults are valid for automatic connections and for the manual connections in the component parts list of the DetailCenter.


corresponding view.



771

Detail Styles Additional Tasks On this page you make further settings, which have to be valid for the connection with detail styles for single parts, groups and overviews.

Part Family Single Part At the connection of single parts, the program first

uses the style of a part family assigned to this part. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.

Part Family Group At the connection of groups and subgroups, the program first uses the style of a part family assigned to this group. If there isn’t any part family assigned, or if this part family hasn’t a detail style of its own, the standard assignment will be used.

Assignment An already existing style assignment of the part will not be overwritten. A detail style is only assigned to parts without any detail style.


772

Detailing On this page, you make the default settings, how the component parts have to be detailed. If you choose the automatic single sheet output, you don’t have to make any additional settings here.

Position once Only one detail block is created of each position number,

divided into single parts and groups.

Overwrite Detail blocks of the same part existing in the detail library are overwritten.

Left List Here, you select which component parts or component part groups are to be detailed, if a detail style has been assigned. This can be the complete detail or even only some components of a detail..


773

Component Parts Selection The following details or components of a detail can be individually selected or dropped: Overviews model views, horizontal projection, anchorage plan etc. as overview drawing Assemblies complete assembly as assembly drawing ...main groups groups in assemblies as group drawing ...subgroups subgroups in assemblies as group drawing ...single parts single parts in assemblies as single part drawing Groups complete group or loose subgroup as group drawing ...main parts main parts in groups or in loose subgroups as single part drawing ...build. components building components in groups or in loose subgroups as single part drawing ...subgroups subgroups in groups as group drawing Other single parts loose single parts not belonging to a group as single part drawing Connecting gusset connecting gusset as gusset detail


774

Insert Details On this page, you make the default settings, how the worked out detail blocks have to be inserted into the drawing. In addition to the actual insertion task, the DetailCenter Express! also permits to fill in the frame field of the drawing frame as well as to create a parts list. You can select the drawing frame etc. on the following pages.

Single Sheet A drawing will be created for each single detail block.

> Scale At single sheet output, the existing detail scale is adopted to the drawing sheet (the default setting of the detail style is ignored).

> Sheet Size At single sheet output, a suitable drawing frame is searched for the existing detail block.

Arrange several details are automatically arranged on a drawing sheet according to your default settings.

Title Block The title block of the drawing frame is filled with the corresponding specifications.

Belonging to on the drawing frame, a list is created displaying the information about belonging of the parts (e.g. in which groups a certain single part is contained).

Parts List A parts list of the displayed details is created on the drawing frame (parts list related to the drawing).

US Mark Number At insertion, the US mark number is directly created according to the current setting in the DetailCenter.


775

Single Sheet Output At single sheet output, a separate drawing sheet is used for each created detail block. You can define different guidelines for detailing and sheet selection and each drawing sheet can contain its own parts list and containment list. For more detailed information about single sheet output of ProSteel, please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output further on in this manual.’

Multi Sheet Output Apart from single sheet output, it is also possible to arrange several finished detail blocks on a multi sheet drawing. The program tries to place as much details as possible according to determined guidelines. Generally, the sheet is created with a scale 1:1 and the component parts are inserted in a scaled way – the functions for parts list and containment list are not available. For more detailed information about multi sheet output of ProSteel, please refer to the chapter 'DetailCenter Composer’ further on in this manual. As the DetailCenter Express only offers a part of the possibilities of multi sheet output, the (often identical) dialog parameters will be described in detail in this chapter, too.


776

Single Sheet Output ... Insertion Options When you have selected the automatic single sheet output, the following dialog will be displayed where you indicate which kinds of component parts have to be detailed and stored as single sheet drawing.

Left List Here, you select which component parts or component part

groups are to be detailed and inserted, if a detail style has been assigned to them. This can be the complete detail or even only some components of a detail.

The following details or components of a detail can be individually selected or dropped: Overviews model views, horizontal projection, anchorage plan etc. as overview drawing Assemblies complete assembly as assembly drawing ...main groups groups in assemblies as group drawing ...subgroups subgroups in assemblies as group drawing ...single parts single parts in assemblies as single part drawing Groups complete group or loose subgroup as group drawing ...main parts main parts in groups or in loose subgroups as single part drawing ...build. components building components in groups or in loose subgroups as single part drawing ...subgroups subgroups in groups as group drawing Other single parts loose single parts not belonging to a group as single part drawing Connecting gusset connecting gusset as gusset detail


777

For more detailed information about the drawing frames and how to prepare them for the output of title block and parts lists, please refer to the chapter ‘Automatic Single Sheet Output’ further on in this manual.


778

Multi Sheet Output ... Insertion Options When you have selected the multi sheet output, the following dialog will be displayed where you can indicate the guidelines for the automatic arrangement of the detail blocks to be inserted.

In Assemblies All detail blocks belonging to an assembly are inserted in one

or several sheets.

In Groups All detail blocks belonging to a group or subgroup are inserted on one or more sheets.

Ascending The created detail blocks are sorted ascending by their position number and then inserted into the drawing.

Separated Single parts, group details and overviews are inserted separately on different drawings.


779

Multi Sheet Output ... Optimize Insertion The actual arrangement of detail blocks on the multi sheet can now still be commanded via the following parameters.

Arrangement The detail blocks are inserted in lines or in columns into the

drawing.

Failed Insertion Maximum number of failed insertions before the output is continued on the next page. 0 means that, if a detail block doesn’t fit on the sheet, the detail block is immediately inserted on a new sheet.

Increment X Grating for the insertion algorithm in X-direction; the bigger the selected value, the faster the dispatch is carried out.

Increment Y Grating for the insertion algorithm in Y-direction

Distance Minimum distance of one detail block to the other


780

Insert Details ... Common On this page, you make the further default settings for the automatic single or multi sheet output. Depending on the selected insertion type, you don’t have access to certain fields because they have no meaning then.

No Scale The component parts are displayed without scale. The

settings in the detail style are ignored.

Different Frames You can specify different drawing frames for groups and polyplates.

Alternative Frames You can specify another frame for details in upright format.

Scale File Here you see the file on which the valid drawing scales are based if you have selected the option ‘Optimized Scale’ at single sheet output. .

Sheet Pattern File Here you see the file on which the valid drawing frame definitions are based.

Mark Number File Here you see the file on which the valid definitions for US mark numbering are based if you have selected the option ‘Use US Mark Numbering’.

Output Path Here you see the directory where the finished workshop drawings are stored.

You may modify the files and paths of the templates by clicking on the small button on the right beside the corresponding display.


781

Insert Details ... Drawing Frames On this page, you select the desired drawing frame(s) for the single or multi sheet output.

Selection Lists Here, you choose the desired frame type for the output. Only

the borders defined in the sheet pattern file will be displayed. It is always the set standard frame which will be used under ‘Drawing Frame’ unless there is an exception for the corresponding detail at single sheet output. At multi sheet output, you principally can only specify one drawing frame.


782

Fill Title Block ... Drawing Number On this page, you make the default settings for filling in the frame field including the generation of a drawing number. You can also pre-set under which file name the completed workshop plans have to be stored.

Model Data The order data for the frame field are transferred from the

drawing information table of the models. Otherwise, another page will be displayed where you can specify the most important order data.

Store Drawing Number The file name of the workshop drawing is identical with the drawing number in the frame field. Otherwise, the current position number is used at single sheet output or a describing name at compilations.

Drawing Count Here, you enter the page number for the drawing which has to be created next.

User Variable Here, you can enter any text you like which will be entered into your drawing number, depending on whether you make use of the corresponding variable or not.

Drawing Number Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you temporarily want to modify the default of your sheet pattern file.

Drawing Name Here, you can indicate another definition of the drawing name, if you temporarily want to modify the default of your sheet pattern file.


783

Template Here, the current definition of the drawing number of the sheet pattern file is displayed for your information.

Sheet Number Here, you see the current continuous number for your information.

The variables at drawing number and drawing name permit you a mixed structure of fixed and current values. Please refer to the chapter 'Automatic Single Sheet Output' for a description of the templates for drawing number and drawing name and the used variables.


784

Fill Title Block ... Data Entries On this page, you enter the order data for the fill header. 'Adopt Model Data’ option has to be deactivated. When some data have been entered in a field, the corresponding input in the drawing information – if existing – will be overwritten. If it is a blank field, the specification of the drawing information will be used.

Input Fields Here, you can enter the desired data. Then, they are inserted

into the frame field.


785

Clean Up Detailing On this page, you make the default settings, which tasks have to be done after end of detailing or style assignment.

Remove All detail styles, which are not connected with a detail, will be

removed from the model drawing. Copies on the hard drive are saved.

Delete views Entries existing of manual assignments in the view list of DetailCenter will be deleted.

Detail Blocks All inserted detail blocks existing in the detail library will be deleted. If this field is not activated, the detail blocks e.g. of the single sheet output can still be used for other purposes.

Save The model drawing is saved after completion of the DetailCenter Express! Otherwise, you have to save it manually to avoid that the information about the worked out and inserted details will be lost.


786

C.4.3 Single Sheet Output

The automatic single sheet output permits to create an individual drawing for each detail to obtain e.g. a handy compilation of all bracing plates on DIN A-4 sheets or a compilation of documents. Two variants are offered which have only one difference in procedure. The first variant is the optimized scale. Here, the program decreases scale until the detail is completely displayed in the selected drawing border. Scale setting of detail style is ignored and a file with the available scales is used instead. This avoids use of scales which are not based on practical work or which are not customary in the corresponding workshop. The second variant is the optimized size. Here, the component part is worked out as usual with the scale of the corresponding detail style. Then, the smallest drawing frame will be specified where this part can be completely displayed. If the optimization cannot be carried out due to unfavourable defaults (e.g. a 1:10 scale overview on a DIN A-4 sheet), the best possible variant will be carried out nevertheless and the program hints to the fact that the detail doesn’t match completely.

Scale File If you selected the Optimized Scale option, the scale selection of the program is based on the entries in the scale file. You can thus create specific files for different customers and be sure that no other scales will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your customers. The file is a text file having the extension .scl, which can also contain some comments marked with a semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is in the subordinate folder of your ProSteel installation.


787

Structure of a Scale File The desired scales are entered per line one after the other, a special order is not required. ; ProSteel - Scale Definition File ; -------------------------------------------------------- ; Customer: Messrs. XYZ, Hamburg 1:2.5 1:5 1:10 1:20 1:50 1:100

Sheet Template File If you select the drawing borders of the selection pages or the Optimized Size option, this selection is based on the entries in the sheet pattern file. You can create specific drawing borders and insertion definitions for different customers and be sure that no other frames will be used at the output. In the DetailCenter Express! you can create specific defaults with different files for your customers. The file is a text file having the extension .frm, which can also contain some comments marked with a semicolon at the beginning of the line. The default file is pro_st3d.frm in the subordinate folder of your ProSteel installation. Structure of a Sheet Template File The file is divided into the areas header, frame field attributes and the actual frame definitions. All entries consist of a group name in pointed brackets and the data group of keyword, equals sign and the following data. [GROUP NAME] Keyword1=Data1 Keyword2=Data2 ... You needn’t fill in entries, which are not required, or the complete entry can be omitted.


788

1) Header Area, Group Name [HEADER] You enter a short name under the keyword Name (for later program options) and a short file description under the keyword Description. The description will then be displayed in the selection page of the DetailCenter Express! 2) Frame Field Attributes, Group Name [TITLEBLOCK] Here, you specify which current program data will be transferred into which block attribute of the frame field at running time. You can thus even specify your own defined frame fields with your own attributes. For more detailed information about how to assign block attributes to blocks, please refer to your AutoCAD- documentation. You can assign block attributes to the following keywords. Depending on the settings in the DetailCenter Express! these are filled with the current values (Express) or with the drawing information of the model drawing. In addition, you can connect some of the properties of the corresponding detail with block attributes. This allows you e.g. to refrain from a position flag or detail labelling at single parts and thus to obtain more space for display. FileName complete path of the created 2D-drawing (Express). Customer client (Express). ProjectName project name of the model ProjectNumber project number of the model JobName order (Express) or order name of the model. JobNumber order number (Express) or number of order number of the model. DrawingName component part description with position number (Express) or drawing name of the model. DrawingNumber drawing number (Express) or drawing number of the model. DrawingPage sheet number (Express). DrawingIndex drawing index (Express) or drawing index of the model. DrawingScale scale (Express). DoneBy 'done by' (Express) or 'signed by' of the model. Date 'done on' (Express) or 'signed on' of the model. CheckedBy 'checked by' of the model. CheckedDate 'checked on' of the model. ClearedBy 'cleared by' of the model. ClearedDate 'cleared on' of the model. Specification 1-4 'LV Pos 1' etc. of the model. Note 1–4 'comment 1' etc. of the model DetailPosNumber position number of the detail DetailShipNumber shipping number of the detail DetailName designation of the detail DetailMaterial material designation of the detail DetailLength length of the detail DetailWeight total weight of the detail DetailCount total number of the detail DetailNote note field 1 and 2 of the detail DetailFamilyClass component part family name of the detail


789

3) Drawing Number Definition, Group Name [DRAWINGNUMBER] Here, you define according to which pattern the drawing number and the file name of the drawing have to be structured. You can mix fixed and variable parts and build the designations of variables as you like, (in order to avoid e.g. identical names with used terms). In the first two entries ‘Drawing Number Template’ and ‘Filename Template’ you indicate the definition, consisting of fixed values and the variable symbols which are mentioned in the following. You may use your own template for the file name if your drawing number has to contain signs, which mustn’t be used in a Windows-file name. If you don’t fill in the field 'Filename Template', the specified drawing number will be used instead as file name. Drawing Name Template definition for the drawing name DrawingNumberTemplate definition for the drawing number FileNameTemplate definition for the file name ProjectNumberSymbol variable for the project number JobNumberSymbol variable for the order number DrawingNumberSymbol variable for the drawing number of drawing information DrawingPageSymbol variable for the continuous sheet number DrawingIndexSymbol variable for the modification index DwgNumberCodeSymbol variable for the frame code of the frame definitions PositionNumberSymbol variable for the position number of the detail GroupPositionNumberSymbol variable for the position number of the parent group ObjectNameSymbol variable for the component part name ObjectTypeSymbol variable for the component part type YearSymbol variable for the current year MonthSymbol variable for the current month (numeric, 1-12) DaySymbol variable for the current day (numeric, 1-31) DrawingTypeSymbol variable for the drawing-type UserVarSymbol variable for the free text from the fill frame field dialog DefaultObjectType text for component part type, Others except the following types ColumnObjectType text for component part type, Support BeamObjectType text for component part type, Horizontal support StiffenerObjectType text for component part type, Stiffener WebAngleObjectType text for component part type, Web angle StandardPlateObjectType text for component part type, Poly-plate ConnectionPlateObjectType text for component part type, Head-plate BasePlateObjectType text for component part type, Base plate MainPartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing for main part of group SubPartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing for sub part of group GroupDrawingType text for drawing type, group drawing SinglePartDrawingType text for drawing type, single part drawing without group OverviewDrawingType text for drawing type, overview drawing


790

If you want e.g. to obtain a drawing number containing your company’s name "ABC", the year, the drawing type "BG" for groups or "ET" for single parts as well as the position number (each one separated by points, such as e.g. ABC.2002.BG1000), you have to define the following fields. All other fields don’t have to be filled in. DrawingNumberTemplate=ABC.#J#.#DWG##POS# FileNameTemplate=ABC.#J#-#DWG##POS# ...(additionally because of the points) PositionNumberSymbol=#POS# YearSymbol=#J# DrawingTypeSymbol=#DWG# MainPartDrawingType=ET SubPartDrawingType=ET GroupDrawingType=BG SinglePartDrawingType=ET As already mentioned before, you can define the designations of the variables, as you like. Of course it is recommended to use special symbols there, too for better identification or in order to avoid a wrong replacing of text. (#POS# instead of only POS). 4) Frame Definitions, Group Name [NAME1], [NAME2] etc. Here, you enter which drawing frames are used and specify the insertion areas of details and parts lists. Each available frame obtains an own group. The group names then will be displayed in the selection lists of the DetailCenter Express! . Please note: The keywords ‘Path’, ‘SizeX’, ‘SizeY’, ‘Area1’ and Area2 have to be assigned with current values; otherwise the frame will not be accepted for selection. Path complete path of drawing frame;

If you enter a file name without path, the file will be expected in the subordinate folder of ProSteel SizeX the dimensions of the drawing frame in X-direction SizeY the dimensions of the drawing frame in Y-direction Area1 the insertion area of details as 2D-points; specify the lower left and the upper right corner of the area in the format (x1,y1)-(x2,y2) Area2 the area of the title block of the drawing as 2D-points ExcludeArea1 exclusion area as 2D-points where no detail block can be inserted ExcludeArea2 exclusion area as 2D-points where no detail block can be inserted ExcludeArea3 exclusion area as 2D-points where no detail block can be inserted ExcludeArea4 exclusion area as 2D-points where no detail block can be inserted Later, the exclusion areas can e.g. be used for the insertion of parts lists. DwgNumberCode The code of the drawing frame; this code can be adopted into the drawing number


791

The following entries describe the position of the parts list ListStyle the name of parts list definition for the drawing parts list ListScale scale of the drawing parts list ListInsertPoint insertion point for the drawing parts list as 2D-point; enter this point in the format (x, y). ListHorizontalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in horizontal direction; Enter left for left or right for right. ListVerticalStart description of the position of the parts list’s insertion point in vertical direction; Enter top for top or down for down.

The two entries describe the position of the point related to the list (on the left at the top, etc.). The list is extended according to this default.

ListType type of drawing parts list (allowed values: group, single, released) ListGroupCount the number of groups is used in the parts list ListGroupMultiplayCount the number of pieces is multiplied with the number of groups

The following entries describe the position of the containment list ContainmentListStyle the name of the definition for the containment list ContainmentListScale scale of the containment list ContainmentListInsertPoint insertion point of the containment list as 2D-point ContainmentListHorizontalStart horizontal alignment of the containment list (left, right) ContainmentListVerticalStart vertical alignment of the containment list (top, down) If you define your own frames, please note that the lower left point of the drawing frame has the world coordinates (0, 0) and that you store the drawing in top view on the frame. The positive X-axis is showing to the right, the positive Y-axis to the top. Enter the frame field as a block with the name of the drawing file (i.e. as block 'dina4', if the drawing frame has to be saved as 'dina4.dwg'.


792

Insertion Areas of a Sheet Template File The following example once again shows you the most important specifications of a frame definition:

The parameters used for multi sheet output are described in chapter DetailCenter Composer.


793

Drawing List At single sheet output, a drawing list is automatically created as text file (*.txt) and as DBASE-file (*.dbf). The file is saved in the ProSteel detail folder under the drawing name of the model. You can see the position of the corresponding part and the file name of the created drawing in this file. The drawing number, scale (and whether it is suitable) and drawing frame are displayed as well. The data depend on the selected type of single sheet output. DetailCenter Express! drawing list ---------------------------------- Output date: 13.09.2007 Output path: d:\ps18.0\detail Output mode: Best scale Job number: Model drawing: e:\dwg\halle.dwg 1.) created group drawings Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File ====|======|====|=============|========== 100 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.7 |BG100.dwg 101 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A3-Bl.23 |BG101.dwg 103 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.20 |BG103.dwg 104 |1:10 | |DWG-A3-Bl.4 |BG104.dwg 105 |1:15 | |DWG-A3-Bl.18 |BG105.dwg 2.) created single part drawings Pos |Scale |Max |Dwg-Number |Dwg-File ====|======|====|=============|========== 1 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.6 |Pos1.dwg 2 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.22 |Pos2.dwg 5 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.3 |Pos5.dwg 6 |1:50 |Max |DWG-A4-Bl.17 |Pos6.dwg 7 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.16 |Pos7.dwg 8 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.14 |Pos8.dwg 12 |1:10 | |DWG-A4-Bl.8 |Pos12.dwg 14 |1:5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.1 |Pos14.dwg 15 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.21 |Pos15.dwg 16 |1:2.5 | |DWG-A4-Bl.2 |Pos16.dwg


794

DetailCenter Composer

795

C.5 DetailCenter Composer

DetailCenter Composer is an extension of the DetailCenter allowing carrying out the permanently returning tasks of insertion and distribution of detail blocks on one or several drawing sheets as fast as possible. In DetailCenter Express you can carry out a complete detailing starting with definition and assignment of a detail style up to single part drawing, whereas DetailCenter Composer helps you with the insertion of already created detail blocks. You can save the created insertion patterns as templates and use them again later in individual or batch insertion mode. With the help of the templates, you can define the pattern for different tasks and then carry out detailing with a single mouse click. As you perhaps already know from DetailCenter Express, DetailCenter Composer is guiding you through the necessary settings for an automated insertion pattern. You cannot start the insertion until all necessary settings have been made. For this purpose, the dialog offers you various pages one after the other which may differ depending on your pre-settings. In this manual, we can only describe all possible pages in the order of their appearance, it may be that one or more pages don’t exist according to your pre-settings.


796

C.5.1 Start DetailCenter Composer

To be able to work with DetailCenter Composer, you must already have created some detail blocks from a model in ProSteel. Move to the insertion page in the DetailCenter and select an existing detail block library there to start DetailCenter Composer. It is not before a detail block library has been selected that the button calling DetailCenter Composer will be released. When DetailCenter Composer is started, the following dialog appears.

Click on this button to show the previous page.

Click on this button to show the next possible page.

Click on this button to start detailing which then will run according to your current settings. In the area of selection pages a display appears allowing you to observe the currently running process.


797

On this starting page, you select in the selection list whether you want to use DetailCenter Composer in manual or batch insertion mode. In Manual Insertion Mode, you can define a specific insertion process that will then be carried out. You can save the settings of this manual insertion as template and use it again later in manual or batch insertion mode. In Batch Insertion Mode, you can select one or more templates that will then be carried out one after the other in DetailCenter Composer. You will find a more detailed description of the different operation modes in the following chapters. Below, you can see a typical batch page with several automatically inserted details:


798

Save Templates You can save all settings for insertion – like in most ProSteel functions – under a file name in the templates management of DetailCenter Composer so that you can use them again later.


799

C.5.2 Manual Insertion Mode

In manual insertion mode, a single insertion of several detail blocks is carried out. In the following dialog box, you specify which detail blocks of the previously selected detail library have to be inserted.

Library All detail blocks saved under the selected library are inserted.

Selection All detail blocks checked in the browser have to be inserted.

Browser All detail blocks displayed in the browser are inserted.

Filter In the following field, you can define a list of search filters that are used for searching in the selected detail library. The found detail blocks are inserted later.

Note: To be able to use the option “Takeover Selection from Browser“, you have to select the detail blocks to be inserted before starting the DetailCenter Composer. You should pay attention to the status of the “Recursive” button on the insertion page in the DetailCenter.


800

Selection with Filter When you have selected the option “Use Filter Conditions from the Library”, you can collect different filters that you already know for the display of DetailCenter, in a list. These filters are logically linked with OR, i. e. all detail blocks corresponding to one of these filters are taken over for selection.

Right Arrow Click on this button to transfer the selected entry in the left list

to the right filter list.

Left Arrow Click on this button to remove the selected entry in the right list.

Click Twice Click on a list entry to process the selected filter condition.


801

Define Filter You can define the filters and store them as template on the insertion sheet in the display options of the DetailCenter. A possible filter selection may look as follows to filter out all straight shapes type HE.

Then the filter can be saved under a certain name (e.g. HE-shapes) using the template management. This name will be found later in the above-displayed filter selection.


802

Insertion Options After having defined which detail blocks have to be inserted, the next step is to specify what has to be done in the drawing when the blocks are inserted.

Title Block The title block on each drawing sheet has to be filled out

according to the specifications which still have to be made in the following.

US Mark Number An US mark number is generated for each detail block which later will be entered automatically as shipping number in the model drawing.


803

Sorting of Detail Blocks In the following dialog, the dispatch and the sorting of the selected detail blocks are specified.

Dispatch in Assemblies

A set of drawings is generated for each assembly. Detail blocks not assigned to an assembly are not inserted.

Dispatch in Groups A set of drawings is generated for each group. Detail blocks not assigned to a group are not inserted.

Ascending All selected detail blocks are inserted ascending by their position number.

Separated Detail blocks are inserted one after the other separately. At first, all single parts are inserted, then all groups (without their single part drawings) and finally the overview drawings. These are inserted ascending by their position number.

When you have selected the option “Insert Separated by Single, Group, View”, the following options are available in addition as well.


804

Single Parts The single parts are inserted separated from each other and ascending by their position number in the following order: - Shapes - Poly-plates - End and Base Plates - Stiffeners - Bent Shapes - Other Component Parts

Groups Here, the group details are dispatched on different drawings, separated according to type: - Supports - Cross Girders - Other Standard Shapes - Bent Shapes - Other Groups

Views The views are dispatched as follows: - Working Areas - Ground Plan - Plan View - Anchorage Plan

At first, all above-mentioned part types are collected per type and then inserted one after the other in ascending order each on a separate drawing sheet (or more, if necessary).


805

Arrangement of Detail Blocks After having specified in which order the detail blocks have to be inserted, you can define here the alignment of the detail blocks on the drawing and how good the drawing blocks are arranged in the drawing.

Failed Insertion If this number of detail blocks couldn’t be inserted into the

current drawing, a new drawing will be started.

Increment X Grating distance for the insertion grating in x-direction

Increment Y Grating distance for the insertion grating in y-direction

Distance Minimum distance of the detail blocks after insertion

Arrangement The detail blocks are inserted in columns or in lines.

Note: The parameters specified here control the output accuracy; they can however also have a considerable influence on the time needed for the insertion process. Failed Insertion At a failed insertion, the detail block is inserted outside the drawing on the coordinate (–5000, -5000). The rest of the drawing remains empty.


806

Output Specifications Certain parameter files control the following selection parameters for drawing insertion. The description of the files can to a large extent be found in the chapter “DetailCenter Express”. In the following, we will only describe the parameters necessary for DetailCenter Composer in the chapter “Technical Details”.

Scale File Here, you see the file which gives rise to the drawing scales.

Border Frame File Here you see the file which gives rise to the drawing frame definitions.

Mark Number File Here, you see the file which gives rise to the definitions for the US mark number, if you have selected the option ‘Use US mark number’.

Detail Output Here, you see the directory where the finished workshop drawings will be stored.

You can modify the files and the paths of the specifications by clicking on the small button on the right side of the corresponding display.


807


808

Drawing Sheet Specifications Here, the drawing sheets available in the sheet template file will be displayed into which the detail blocks can be inserted.

Drawing Frame The drawing sheet into which the detail blocks have to be

inserted.

Scale The scale that has to be the base for the output drawing file.

Do not Scale Indicates whether the loaded drawing has to be enlarged. In this case, the scale text is only entered into the title block.

Note: If you want to work with scaled (bigger or smaller) drawing frames or true to life sizes, please take care that all detail blocks to be inserted here have the same scale like the drawing. Otherwise, type sizes and symbol scaling (position flags, labelling...) will not match together. The best is to detail all detail blocks in a smaller size (1:xx) and to use the option “Do not Scale Frame“. Then, everything will be ok.


809

Title Block and File Name After having decided on which sheet template the detail blocks have to be inserted, you specify here the name of the output files and the title block entries.

Start DWG Counter at Here; you enter the sheet number of the

next drawing to be created.

User Variable Here, you can enter any text that will be inserted into your drawing number, depending on whether the corresponding variable is used.

Drawing Number Here, you can indicate another definition of the number if you temporarily want to modify the specifications of the sheet template file.

Drawing Name Here, you can indicate another definition of the drawing name if you temporarily want to modify the specifications of the sheet template file.

Template Here, you see the current definition of the drawing number of the sheet template file for your information.

Next Page Here, you see the current continuous number for your information.


810

Title Block Entries Due to the fact that model data are not available any more at automatic insertion of detail blocks, it is possible to enter additional project-related data for the insertion process here.

Then, the indicated values are entered into the header of the drawing corresponding to the sheet template file.


811

Finalising Works Finally, you can specify whether you want to delete the detail blocks after insertion.

Note: When the detail blocks are deleted here, the insertion information cannot be transferred into the model and an automatic update of the 2D-drawing would not be possible any more.


812

C.5.3 Batch Insertion Mode

When you combine several insertion processes, you can have run a complete detail library according to your specifications. To do so, change over to batch insertion mode and use the existing templates.

Select and Edit Templates On the following page, you can create a list to be run which is used for automatic creation of production drawings on collected sheets.


813

A filter is inserted into the list

A filter is removed from the list

Double Click the corresponding template is edited

Edit Templates You can also edit the existing templates in batch insertion mode by double clicking.

The edited template is saved. By clicking on this button, you

save the current state of the template in the template management.

Editing process is interrupted


814

C.5.4 Format File

Apart from the dialog settings, at the output of collected sheets by means of DetailCenter Composer there are various other parameters, too, which are important for a correct output of the program. These can be found in a format file (*.frm), which can be specified in the settings. For more detailed information about the format file, please also refer to the chapter “DetailCenter Express“. Important Parameters

Area1 Drawing area where detail blocks may be inserted (have to have a valid value).

Area2 Area of the header (has to have a valid value). In this part of the drawing, no detail blocks are inserted.

ExcludeArea 1-4 Drawing areas where detail blocks mustn’t be inserted. Later, these areas may e.g. contain parts lists, company stamps or other information about the company.

The example shows the most important areas. In addition, the meaning of the detail distance (dialog specification) is displayed as well.


815

Drawing Directory At the output of collected sheets, a drawing directory is automatically created as text file (*.txt) and as dBASE-file (*.dbf). The files are stored under the name of the model in the detail directory. At the next output with DetailCenter Composer both files are overwritten. DetailCenter Insert Express! drawing list ---------------------------------- Output date: 27.02.2006 Output path: C:\Programs\Bentley\ProSteel\R18.0\autocad 2008\detail Job number: A23-5674F 1.) inserted drawings Pos |GroupPos |Name |GroupName |Scale |DwgFile ========|=========|=====================|==============|=========|========== 01 |01 |IPE 400 |IPE 400 |1.000000 |C:\Program 02 |02 |RRK 250x150x8 |RRK 250x150x8 |1.000000 |C:\Program 03 |03 |RRK 250x150x8 |RRK 250x150x8 |1.000000 |C:\Program …. …. 2.) error report Pos |Info ========|===== In this file, you can see position, group position, name and group name of the corresponding component part as well as the file name of the created drawing and the scale. If an error occurs during insertion, this will be indicated, too.

RevisionCenter

816

C.6 RevisionCenter

C.6.1 What is the RevisionCenter?

The standalone RevisionCenter goes much further than the modification management system in the DetailCenter. With Version V8i users can, for the first time, very clearly manage and version the different documents generated from the model. To do this, the document creation data from a 3D model is saved to the model drawing, as in a database, and can be displayed, versioned and updated. The modification management system in the DetailCenter, which only deals with updating detail blocks on workshop drawings, is based on the same data, so it is a sort of sub-group of the RevisionCenter The image below shows a 3D model with some associated documents. These documents are usually edited at other points in the process chain, so they need to be updated after any design changes.

RevisionCenter

817

Documents Documents, in the context of the RevisionCenter, are any outputs based on the associated 3D model. The following are currently supported:

• Detail blocks (details) • 2D drawings (combination of inserted detail blocks) • Database for parts lists (create parts list) • Parts lists output (process parts list) • NC data file • PPS data file

If the relevant document is created, certain data is written to the model. The document can then be opened from the RevisionCenter, re-generated, or sorted and filtered based on its creation data (name, date, etc.). Update documents Since the components involved also form part of the creation data, when components are changed you can immediately see which documents do not match the current version of the model. These usually need to be updated, and you can do this through the RevisionCenter. The update can be done without versioning (if, for example, you are still at the editing stage) or by issuing unique version numbers if the documents are finalised. Versioning documents If you are working with document versions, you can open earlier, interim versions of a document. Before the document is updated, the system creates a copy of the old document file and creates a separate entry for it with creation data. This means that you can, at any point, view a workflow history and verify when and where something was changed. You can, of course, open these interim versions just as you can the current document.

RevisionCenter

818

Modifications Modifications are any alteration that you make to a component after a document has been created from that component. Unlike an earlier solution in which the component was merely marked as “changed”, you can now record the detail of when a component was altered by which action. This gives you a tool that you can use to keep track of the intended (and unintended) alterations made to your model. Relationship to the creation data The relationship between component and document results in the fact that a modified component, like a document, can also be marked as “changed”. But there is room here for the system to be more intelligent: Since all the modification data is recorded, particularly the reason for the modification, though moving a profile does indeed impact on the associated group drawing, it has no effect on the drawing of the individual part. Further into the future, this relationship will also mean that it is possible that, for example, changing the material of a component only marks a parts list as changed if the parts list also displays the material.

Data management All the data about modifications is also recorded in the model, which of course may result in very large volumes of data, depending on the scope. However, you may also deactivate this option so that you identify changes less comprehensively, as was the old style. Important: Because parts lists, NC data, etc., is also now being managed, the model also needs to be saved after any such output if you are using the RevisionCenter. Otherwise you will lose data and there is no guarantee that the RevisionCenter will continue to work correctly.

RevisionCenter

819

C.6.2 Structure of the RevisionCenter

The structure of the RevisionCenter is similar to that of the DetailCenter, and it also provides similar functions for controlling the display. Therefore you can refer to the DetailCenter section for many details regarding its use and the display. So here we shall only describe them briefly, particularly the differences. The dialog is one that can be docked, and can run in parallel to the DetailCenter or as a standalone. If both are running, some functions are synchronised. It is a good idea to run it as a standalone when you are not using 2D detailing or when you only want to review the parts lists.

RevisionCenter

820

The RevisionCenter interface In general terms, the RevisionCenter is, like the DetailCenter, broken down into three work levels. However, they differ in terms of their relevance, so you do not always need to work with all three levels. Level 1: The document overview This page gives you an overview of all the documents generated based on the model. Here you will find your 2D drawings, parts lists and, for example, NC files. There is also a summary of the version history and the creation data for a document, and you can access earlier versions of documents. If you wish to completely update a document or give it a new file name, you can do it here. Level 2: The component overview This gives you an overview of the parts in your model, and of their functional relationships. It shows groups, individual parts and whole areas of the model. This overview is identical to that in the DetailCenter, but goes further by displaying the modifications. It shows a component’s version history, i.e. which changes have been made to the component at what time. As in the DetailCenter, you can also update a modified component here on the workshop drawing. Level 3: The conflict overview This page is used to control and avoid errors and is an important stopping-off point prior to any update. If you have positioned components and added their detail blocks to 2D drawings, an inserted component often represents all the same position numbers. If changes are made and repositionings follow, a simple update is often not enough. This helps you see whether other components need to be detailed and whether you have any positioning errors, and helps you to find the solution. As many conflicts can only be resolved manually, since specific decisions need to be taken, you are given all the useful information.

RevisionCenter

821

Display document and component lists Within the three work levels, the document and component lists take up most of the space. These lists show, in a tree structure, the documents and components that you may work with. You are free to configure the sorting and filtering of the display so that you can get different displays for different tasks. Display sort and display filter To change the display sort, use the STRUCTURE button to select the dialog for the display structure. After changing the specifications and closing the dialog box, the display is restructured. The way you use the display controls and the setting options is the same as in the DetailCenter and you can look them up there under ‘Display component lists’. However, all the parameters are not always available if they are irrelevant at the point concerned. You can, whenever you wish, use a predefined standard filter to hide the display of the workflow history to keep the display easy to read. If you do this, only the last valid version of a document or component is displayed and you cannot access earlier versions.

RevisionCenter

822

C.6.3 Document Overview

Opening the RevisionCenter takes you to the Document Overview page, which gives you access to all the documents. Here you can open, update or revise any document. You will also find the list of documents (A), and depending on the settings a preview of 2D drawing documents (B ) along with a summary of creation dates (C) linked to the selected document. Coloured symbols identify the nature and status of the document, with the status being determined from the status of the components in the 3D-model. If the component has been changed, the related documents (i.e. the documents containing the component) will also be changed.

Version history If there are older versions of a document, these are shown as subordinate to the current version, unless filtered out. The documents can likewise be opened and their creation dates viewed. However preview is not possible.

The example on the left shows a drawing which has already been changed three times. On creation each new document is version number “0”, and each revision can be supplied with a comment.

RevisionCenter

823

Dialogue commands

STRUCTURE (1)

Click on this button to open the dialogue for details of how the components list is displayed. You can select the standard display or an individualised structure, and set your own filters.

UPDATE (2)

Click on this button to start a search for the selected drawing or to analyse it. You have to do this if you activate a different drawing in the MDI environment or if you have modified the current drawing (e.g. issue of new documents).

INFO / PREVIEW (3)

Click on this button to switch the display of the document data. You can choose between a simple list display with the creation dates or a combined display which allows a rough preview of drawing documents. The size of this preview graphic is automatically modified if the height of the above list is changed.

Create new document version In order to create a new version of a selected document, select Create new version in the popup menu. A dialogue appears, for you to input another comment on current revision. Now the system creates a copy of the selected document and supplies it with the current creation dates. After that the selected document is given a new version number and the creation dates are updated. The previous details are now shown below as original or intermediate. Setting up a new version document is worthwhile if you want or need to “freeze” a defined status at a particular point, and enables you to search for it more precisely later.

RevisionCenter

824

Update document If components have changed, it is usually necessary to update the relevant documents. You have two options for doing this: Updating with and without a new version number. Updating without version number

To do this, select Update document in the popup menu. The content of the document is updated, but no copy of the old versions is stored. One exception is the internal component versions (see following section “Component Overview”), which are changed. Updating without version number may be used if you have already created a new version and further revisions are necessary which do not require a separate version (e.g. correcting errors, provided the document has not yet been distributed). Updating with version number

To do this, select Update document (with new version) in the popup menu. A dialogue appears, for you to input another Comment on current revision. This results first of all in a new version of the document being created (see also under “Create new document version”) and then the content is completely updated.

Moved or renamed documents

Documents are often subsequently moved (e.g. to a server) or renamed for whatever reason. In these cases you have to change the data path. To do this, click on Change data path in the popup menu and select the new document folder. Important: Always take care only to change the name and directory, because other changes – such as of the type of file – are not recorded in the creation dates.

Display document

To do this, click on Open document in the popup menu and select the desired document folder. The document is now opened in ProStructures or a suitable program. For certain types of document, e.g. PDF, you should however link the type of file with an appropriate program.

RevisionCenter

825

C.6.4 Component Overview

Component Overview shows you the hierarchical structure of the model and is basically identical to the component list in DetailCenter (both lists are synchronised). Here you can however also find the version history of all changes to the components. Component version history Each component has an internal version number complete with a list of changes, and this number increases each time a document is created or updated. This means you can tell precisely which revisions were made following a release of the component.

In this example a hole and then a polycut was added to the part item number 1 As this part has now been changed, the relevant group also receives an revision entry (group change due to changed group part). If item number 1 is now updated, the group initially remains changed.

Update document

If a component is changed, you can automatically update it on the drawing documents which contain this component. To do this, select Update 2D-drawing in the popup menu. The component is then reworked and replaced in the documents. Updating does not however result in an updating of the entire document. Only the individual component is dealt with and there is also no new version of the document.

Display document To do this, select Open 2D-drawing in the popup menu. The drawing file that contains the component is then opened. If you have inserted the component in several drawings, you will receive a list of all the files to select from.

RevisionCenter

826

C.6.5 Conflict Overview

This section is used to run a preliminary check before updating components in documents. It detects errors which cannot be automatically resolved and therefore require manual intervention. It is often the case in practice that one single component representing all the components with the same item number is finalised. After changes, which also result in changed item numbers, the internal component/document correlations may lead to confusion. Analysis using this conflict summary provides the necessary clarity and offers some tools for a solution.

Potential conflict scenarios

There are several possible conflict scenarios which are automatically detected by the system. A requirement for this however is careful work with revision control – in particular as regards the storage and updating of models. The following assumes that components with the item number 1 are present twice in the model. Only component (A) has been finalised and therefore also represents component (B).

Imagine you have a change which applies equally to both components or else – more unfortunately – just one of the components. Or one of the components has been deleted or copied, that means the total number of parts is changed. Both changed, both item numbers unchanged In this case an update can take place, as nothing changes in the significance of the correlations. Therefore this is simply a deficient updating of the document (Updating conflict).

RevisionCenter

827

Both changed, both item numbers also new This is also not a problem, as following updating the document will likewise display the new item number. Therefore this is simply a deficient updating of the document (Updating conflict). One component changed, related item number remains same Now you have an error in the positioning. This has nothing to do with document management, but is likewise detected. First of all you have to correct the positioning (Very severe conflict). One component changed, related item number changed

The relationship of the documents will now lead to problems. Depending on which component you have changed, you will receive different responses (Severe conflict). If you have changed the subordinate and therefore the not-inserted component (B), then the updating will correctly detect the drawing for the inserted component (A). However you now lack the new detailing for component (B). If however you have changed the primary and therefore the inserted component (A), then updating will amend the drawing to the changed status and show the changed item as well. However, you lose the correlation to the formerly subordinate component (B), which was also represented by the drawing and is now missing. Component deleted or copied As the total number of components is not automatically updated, an incorrect number of parts will be displayed in the updated documents where these are shown (Severe conflict).

Identifying conflicts As detection of conflicts can demand some time, especially for larger models, detection does not take place automatically. Use the UPDATE button to start an analysis of the model and reconciliation with the internal creation dates of the components and documents. The conflicts are then displayed in the list.

RevisionCenter

828

Displaying conflicts Conflicts are basically identified individually for each item number. Under the conflict entry you can find entries for all the components used in the model – these are known as error log entries. The colours and symbols immediately give you information on the nature of the conflict. Conflict symbols

The conflict summary differentiates between two key types of conflict, which are also displayed in different colours: Serious conflicts are identified with red symbols and mean that the document will be faulty following updating. To deal with these first and foremost manual intervention is necessary. Updating conflicts are identified with grey symbols and mean that the document is currently faulty, but will be corrected following updating.

The individual error log entries for each conflict distinguish between the subordinate components (1) and the components that create the document (2).

All data naturally relate only to the reconciliation with the 3D-model and the item number shown in the conflict. Description of conflict

Special significance is given to the display of creation dates in the conflict overview. Here you have detailed information on the nature of the conflict and possible solutions. In particular comparison of item numbers and group structures on creation of the document with the current status of the model are of major assistance when correcting errors.

Displaying the relevant components Select a conflict or error log entry from the list and then in the popup menu click on Mark components to mark the components in the model. In this way you can rapidly find the individual component or the entire conflict group visually and deal with the problem.

RevisionCenter

829

Resolving conflicts

As already mentioned, the conflict overview is primarily used for information, so that you can take suitable activities. Many things cannot be dealt with automatically or can arise owing to an application error (which it will at least warn you of here). Nevertheless the conflict overview does offer you two auxiliary functions: Directly repair conflict Updating conflicts which are repaired by simple updating of the document can be dealt with directly. First select the conflict entry and then in the popup menu Repair conflict. The component concerned is then automatically updated in the document and the conflict should disappear. Change component features If you want to view other component features or change the item number manually because of an error, you can do this easily via the error log entries (which represent one component in the model). First select the error log entry and then in the popup menu PS properties. This opens the dialogue for changing object properties in the model. You can find more information on the object properties in the appropriate sections of this manual. All other problems must be dealt with using the functions and procedures described elsewhere in this manual.

Cranked 2D-View

830

C.7 Cranked 2D-View

You can insert cranked views into the model if you require cuts and views through your models that are not situated on one plane. During detailing, they are treated like standard plane views; they show, different depths of the model simultaneously in one view and allow hiding of unwanted or less interesting areas. Example for a cranked view (here only as view): In the 2D-view, the supports A1, B1 and C2 are displayed.

Add Cut After starting this function, you first have to click on the start of polyline (intersection line) and then add the other points of the intersection line. Please pay attention that the line doesn't intersect nor that it is “running backwards”. In addition, the segments have to be perpendicular to each other. Otherwise, you don't obtain a satisfactory result. Terminate the entry by pressing the right mouse key if you do not want to add any further points. Now, you are prompted to specify the direction and depth of projection by clicking on another point (in relation to the start). All areas of the component parts, which are intersected by the polyline, are later displayed as cut – all areas which are situated within the intersection depth, are displayed as standard projection. Then, the following dialog appears which is also opened in case of modification of a cranked view via ProSteel properties.

Cranked 2D-View

831

Name: The name of the cut.

Depth: Here you specify the projection depth of the view.

Height: Here you specify the height of projection of the view. All areas that are situated outside of this height are not displayed.

Colour: Here you specify the colour of intersection line.

3D-Display: The height of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the coverage area.

Display Depth: The depth of projection will be displayed as well so that you can check the coverage area. Together with '3D-display' you obtain a three dimensional display of the cranked view.

The parts that are within the coverage of the cut are displayed. All other parts are hidden.

The hidden parts are displayed again.

North Symbol

832

C.8 North Symbol

This function allows you to add a benchmark to your model, which may be evaluated later in different ways. At the moment, US-benchmark-symbols are available to help with the assembly of girders by indicating their alignment during installation. The point of the compass, which indicates north, is situated at the left side of the symbol or above if it is aligned horizontally (or at the upper end if it is aligned vertically).

North symbol (Reference) When the function is loaded, you first have to define the benchmark of construction. Click on the insertion point (reference point) first, then on another point for the benchmark. A north symbol will be created at the insertion point. Then, the following dialog will be displayed for further definition of the symbol and display in the shapes:

North Symbol

833

Options: In the input field Elevation above, you can enter a reference height corresponding to the model coordinates, z=0. Select the layer on which the benchmark has to be displayed in the Layer selection list. In the input field Block path, you may indicate a path to previously defined benchmarks if you don't want to apply the built-in symbols. Click on the File Select button and a Windows file selection dialog will be displayed where you can select the block folder. Alternatively to the built-in symbols, you can also use any block as a symbol. The Y-axis of this block then corresponds to northern direction; it will be inserted with the corresponding rotation.

Symbol: If the field Symbol is checked, the built-in symbols will be used for displaying the north arrow. You can select the desired symbol in the selection list. In the input field size, the scaling of the symbol can be defined.

Block: If the field Block is checked, an external block will be used for displaying the north arrow. The scale factor of the block is entered in the input field Scale. Normally, the blocks of the folder entered in the input field Block path will be used. Then, you may select the existing drawings as blocks which have to be used. If the field "Display only DWG Blocks" is checked, you can select the blocks already contained in the drawing as blocks which have to be used. Select the block which has to be used as north symbol in the selection list block.

The above-mentioned inputs describe the display of benchmark in the model (which may exist only once), whereas the following dialog page describes the display of alignment in the shapes. On one hand, the benchmark has to be inserted into the model and, on the other hand, the option 'Benchmark' has to be selected in shape properties, otherwise the alignment of a shape cannot be displayed.

North Symbol

834

Horizontal Alignment

Here, it is possible to select either the built-in symbols or external blocks. As the proceeding is the same as already mentioned concerning the actual benchmark, we don't repeat these settings here, but only describe the additional options. Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the points of the

compass is set here. In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the left resp. lower end of the shape. In the input field Center distance, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the center of the shape. In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.

Horizontal is valid for horizontal girders and vertical is valid for vertical girders.

North Symbol

835

Vertical Alignment

Settings The display for the alignment symbol for the upper edge of the

component is set here. In the input field End Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the left lower edge of the shape. In the input field Offset, you enter the distance between the insertion point of the symbol and the upper edge of the shape. In the input field Colour, you enter the colour of the symbol as AutoCAD-colour number.

User-defined Symbols You have to define an AutoCAD-block in your model drawing or as external drawing (wblock) containing the block attribute “LABEL” to apply user-defined symbols. This attribute is filled with the current text for alignment.

North Symbol

836

Shape Labelling

Annotations: Enter the text which is to be displayed in the represented

symbols in the input fields for the points of the compass and for Upside.

DetailCenter…: The global view of the DetailCenter can be set here. Check the corresponding point of the compass in order to set the global view.

North Symbol

837

Manual Dimensioning Points

838

C.9 Manual Dimensioning Points

Some steel constructions are very complex so that the system is not always able to determine the suitable dimensioning automatically. Often it is even not possible to find all suitable points because important reference dimensions such as, weld check dimensions, or similar values have to be defined individually and are not automatically known to the system. For this purpose, you can define dimensioning points directly in the model for the derivation of group drawings or overviews; the system has to be forced to dimension them. In contrast to the subsequent manual dimensioning of 2D workshop drawings, the advantage of this function is that they can be updated at an automatic 2D-update.

Group General

View: Here, you specify how the dimensioning points have to be depicted in the 3D-model. Only Points – Only the two dimensioning points and a short connecting piece will be depicted. With Line – Apart from the dimensioning points, the connecting line is displayed as well. This facilitates checking of the corresponding measured points. With Text – The directly measured dimension is additionally displayed as check text. Please note that these default settings don’t have any influence on the depiction in the 2D-plans.The dimensioning objects there are subsequently replaced by a usual standard measure of ProSteel.


839

Only Points Here, you specify the size to be used for depiction of the two measured points.

Layer Here you specify on which layer the object has to be inserted.

Only in Plane The picked points are projected onto the current view plane. Thus, an object snap into the depth is avoided.

Loop The command is carried out as a loop. You can insert several manual-dimensioning objects one after the other without having to call the function again each time.

Group Options

Horizontal A measure is created in dimensioning direction of the group or of the overview that runs from the first to the second point.

Vertical A measure is created perpendicular to dimensioning direction of the group or of the overview that runs from the first to the second point. When there is more than one target point, the dimensioning direction is determined by the first added target point.

Direct A direct (e.g. diagonal) measure is created in the group or overview, running from the first to the second point.

Baseline Dimensioning When you have seized a reference point with several target points, each target point will get its own dimension (starting from the reference point). Otherwise, reference point and target points are created as continuous dimension chain.

In Groups The dimensioning object is evaluated in the group to which it has been assigned.

In Views The dimensioning object is evaluated in the overview drawing where it is included.

ECS-System The coordinate system of the dimensioning object is displayed in the model so that you can check the position.

By highlighting both entries an identical dimensioning object can appear both in a group drawing and in an overview.


840

Beneath, you see an example of the variants in case of multiple dimensioning points: The dimensioning points which first seem to be similar in the 3D-model (above) create different results in the 2D-drawing (below). For both objects, only the ‘Horizontal’ dimensioning direction has been activated. The dimensioning object on the left here has been created with the option ‚Baseline Dimensioning’ so that all dimensioning points refer to the left reference point (1). On contrast, the right dimensioning object has been created without this option, and a continuous dimensioning chain (2) is created with the right reference point.

Dialog Commands

SINGLE

Click on this button to add a single dimensioning object consisting of the start and target point. You first have to click on the group this dimensioning object is to be


841

assigned to. Then, you click on the start and afterwards on the target point of dimensioning.

SEVERAL

Click on this button to add a dimensioning object with a reference point and several target points. You first have to click on the group this dimensioning object is to be assigned to. You then click on the base point of dimensioning and

afterwards the other dimension points. Pressing ESC key ends adding further dimension points.

Selection of Views In principle, dimensioning objects have to be assigned to a group or to an assembly, even if the dimensions only appear in an overview drawing. At use in nested group structures, they are always assigned to the lowest hierarchy and controlled by means of their parameters at detailing. If you pick e. g. the subordinate part of a subgroup which is part of a standard component part group, the dimensions will only be displayed in the detailing of the component part group, when manual dimensioning points have been activated there for subgroups. At the later detailing, the dimensions are only displayed in the view that corresponds to a view at insertion (or to the opposite direction). Therefore, you should insert a dimensioning object on a component part in the view in which later you want to see the length to be dimensioned. Hint: When the dimension doesn’t appear in the desired view, it was probably inserted in a wrong UCS plane and perhaps the dimensioning points were only corrected later. You can check this by making display the coordinate system of the dimensioning object. Its X/Y-pane has to be parallel towards the view plane. If you want to see the length in two views that are not opposite to each other, from view direction, you have to add the dimensioning object for a second time.

Modification of Dimension Points You can modify an existing dimensioning object later via the ProSteel properties by e.g. adding further dimension points using the PLUS button or by removing them using the MINUS button. Other properties such as the desired dimensioning directions can also be modified. All picked dimension points can be moved later by means of the grips, if you modify your construction.

Manual Object Link

842

C.10 Manual Object Link

The logical links are required for dimensioning and recognition of neighbouring parts. These are created during most ProSteel processing functions. However, if there isn’t any link between two component parts, a so-called “manual link” can be placed between the parts. The only task of this link is to create a dependency; it hasn’t got any additional function. To create a manual link, first select the attached part of the connection (this should be the adjacent part, e.g. the latch-bolt) and then the part that it has to be connected to (e.g. the support). A logical dependency between the component parts is created which is important for dimensioning.

Manual Object Link

843

Global Scale

844

C.11 Global Scale

Like AutoCAD, ProSteel works in drawing units according to the scale less method, a natural scale of 1:1 being assumed (i.e. a drawing unit corresponds to one millimetre natural size). Any detailing with respect to the 2D shop plans, however, is prepared in a scale you entered beforehand. However, if you want to attach e.g. position flags later – that have been entered in the original size (mm) in the pre-settings – you must set a scale in order to ensure uniform sizes of these elements and a uniform aspect of your drawings. This so-called Global Scale basically corresponds to the later plot scale of your drawing. When the program needs a scale and no special scale is entered, the global scale will be adopted. When using the command, the following prompt is displayed in the command line

Previous ProSteel Scale = 1.0000 Please enter the new default scale 1: ?

The current scale is displayed. Now enter the new scaling factor to be used for your work. When you enter e.g. the value 10, the default scale 1:10 will apply. Do not confuse the global scale with the length scaling. The global scale refers to the later printout of the drawings and scales text sizes, symbol sizes, etc.

Global Scale

845

Drawing Border

846

C.12 Drawing Border

ProSteel allows you to easily insert drawing frames in different formats and scales. The program package comes loaded with several sample frames and borders. You can also add your own frames and borders. A drawing border is inserted as a scaled block corresponding to the drawing scale. The matching original blocks are filed in scale 1:1. After having defined a title block with block attributes within a border, you can fill it in using the command ’Drawing Info’. A dialog box gives you access to several well-sorted border variations. The data are filed in a tree structure. The standard version already includes the main entries A0-A4. You can either delete them or add further entries. The actual entries can only be entered as subordinate item under a main item.

Drawing Border

847

Click on this button to generate a new entry beneath a gusset which had been selected before.

Click on this button to generate a new gusset beneath a gusset which had been selected before.

Click on this button to work on the selected entry..

Click on this button to delete the selected entry or gusset with all contained subordinate entries.

Scale The drawing border is inserted in the scale entered here.

Activate Limits If this field is checked, the drawing limits are put on the edge of the border to avoid drawing outside of the border.

Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the model area.

Here, you load the selected entry and the drawing block into the paper area.

Creation of Entries Select the main point and either press the right mouse button for the subordinate menu or the button CREATE. The following dialog opens:

Drawing Border

848

Block Path Enter the path to the block to be inserted.

Width Enter the width of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale. It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.

Height Enter the height of the block if you want to work with active limits. If the field ‘Active Limits’ has been checked, these values are preset as limits with the specified scale. It is of course possible as well to specify different values for the limits.

Comment Here, you can enter a comment for identification.

Click on this button to select the block via a file selection dialog. Then, the path is entered in the input field block path.

Click on this button to select the standard sizes for width and height by means of a dialog.

After these data have been inserted, a new subordinate entry is displayed in the tree, which still has to be named. Then, the entry is created and can be used immediately.

Drawing Border

849

Manual 2D-Cut

850

C.13 Manual 2D-Cut

This command is used to insert a cut into 2D details. The prerequisite is that the details are still intelligent details. From object selection, the program independently recognizes which objects can be cut and which objects only represent the borders of the cutting arrows (e.g. dimensioning). This means that the cutting arrows are in any case attached outside of dimensioning if you select e.g. a completely dimensioned group including the dimensions. Alternatively, cut information can be added to the 3D-components in the model which describes the position of the desired cut in the 2D-drawing. The addition can likewise be made via the 2D-Detail. Additional information is found in ‘automatic 2D-cut’. The following dialog opens after selection of the command. There, you can make the settings for label and depiction of cutting symbols:

Label Here, you enter the text without the cutting code that has to

be used as designation. Enter e.g. Cut.

Sign Enter the desired cutting code such as e.g. the letter A.

Manual 2D-Cut

851

Text Style Select an AutoCAD-text style for the labels.

Layer Select the AutoCAD-layer the text and the cutting symbols have to be created on.

Line Type Select the line type to be used for the depiction of the cutting line.

Detailing Style Select the detailing style to be used for the depiction of the component parts (e.g. shadings etc.)

Colour Symbol/Text In the input fields for Symbol and Text you enter the colour of the cutting arrow and of the text. You can either specify the colour directly by entering the AutoCAD colour number, or you click on the desired input field and then on the SELECT button. Then, the AutoCAD dialog for colour selection is displayed where you can select the colour directly.

Text Size Here, you enter the size of the label text.

Create Block A common block is formed consisting of the cutting arrows and the codes. Otherwise, they are still single lines and text.

Complete Groups If his option is activated, always the complete group will be selected even if only a single component part of the group has been selected.

Dialog-Commands

LINE

Click on this button to create a cut through component parts along a line to be selected. Select the parts to be depicted, then the cutting line. Then, you have to

indicate the depth of the cut. If you press ESC here, only a cut at the corresponding position will be made. Otherwise, the parts will be cut at the position and the projection of the rest will be displayed. After having created the cut and after having attached the cutting code, you can place the result anywhere you like.

OBJECT

Click on this button to create a cut on the base of a cut object. This may be a view frame or an offset cut. You only have to select the object; selection of the parts is carried out automatically.

Manual 2D-Cut

852

UCS

Click on this button to create a cut of 3D component parts at the current UCS. After selection of the parts, the cut is created at the XY-plane of the current UCS.

Manual 2D-Cut

853

Position Flags Apart from the actual cut display, it is also possible to attach position flags in manual cuts. In addition, you can add component part information to 2D-lines to enable the attachment of position flags at a later moment.

Position Flags Position flags are additionally attached.

Template Select the distribution template for the position flags which you created before using the function for position flags.

Scale Scale for the size of the position flags

Element Data The component part data of the original 3D-elements are added to the created 2D-elements so that it is possible to attach position flags later.

Manual 2D-Cut

854

Depiction of the Cut You can generate the cutting code either via a generated graphic or via blocks to be selected.

Group Symbol

Symbol The cutting code is created as a symbol consisting of cutting arrow and code.

Continued The two partial lines are connected through the cut part.

By Side The cutting code is written beside the cutting arrow; otherwise it is written above the cutting arrow.

Arrow Size Specify the size of the arrow.

Distance/Length Here, you specify the distance of the cutting lines, from their beginning to the utmost bordering edge (e.g. the dimensioning), and what has to be the length.

Group Block

Block A freely selectable block is used for the cutting code instead of a cutting arrow. In the input fields Top Block and Down Block you see the selected block path. You can assign a block drawing by clicking on the SELECT button.

Manual 2D-Cut

855

Block Path Here you indicate the directory with the files containing the

block definitions for the cutting arrows. Select the directory via the neighboring button.

Block Top Here you select the block for the upper cutting arrow.

Block Bottom Here you select the block for the lower cutting arrow.

Example of a Cut at a Group The edge of the cut is located in front of the left stiffener and the depth of the cut extends beyond the head plate – you see all of these parts from the right; the shape is cut and the drill holes are invisible.

Manual 2D-Cut

856

Manual Dimensioning

857

C.14 Manual Dimensioning

The ProSteel dimensioning commands allow dimensioning of component parts and groups automatically in the drawings as well as manual dimensioning with useful help functions. For example, the overall views of the model may be dimensioned for an overview. However, it is also possible to dimension individual component parts or groups and then create details manually in cases where automatic detailing is not suitable for your application. In addition, all major standard functions of regular AutoCAD dimensioning are available for revision or modification of 2D workshop drawings. The dimensioning functions are principally based on the settings for detailing style (dimensioning), therefore general settings like AutoCAD dimensioning style, optimization, etc. have to be executed in the respective dialog box. The detailing style dialog can also be accessed using the dialog box described below and then the style can be modified or a new detailing style can be created. HINT: Please take care that the settings of scale and scaling of the component part are correct. Please refer to the chapter “Detailing” and carefully read through the chapter “Dimensioning Style”.

Manual Dimensioning

858

Group Settings

Alignment Here, you set the general direction of dimensioning. Horizontal – The dimension chain is always running in X-direction. Vertical – The dimension chain is always running in Y-direction. Line – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like a pre-set line. To carry out the function, click on the line determining the direction. You can use this method to dimension e.g. along a cut edge. As picked – The dimension chain is running in the direction specified by the two points first picked. This is e.g. reasonable if you want to dimension diagonal holes in a gusset plate. Like Part – The dimension chain is running in the same direction like the length direction of a component part. This is the optimal method to dimension along a diagonal shape by clicking on the shape. Arc Dimension – You can dimension the length of an arc. Angle Dimension – You can dimension an angle.

Manual Dimensioning

859

Origin Here, you specify which origin is used for alternative coordinate dimensioning. Auto – The dimensions are preferably related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating or to that of the group’s main part. If it doesn’t exist, they are related to the current UCS. Default – The dimensions are related to any point specified by you. UCS-Origin – The dimensions are related to the origin of the current UCS. Part – The dimensions are related to the lower left point of the reference part’s coating or to that of the group’s main part. Start Dimension Chain – The dimensions are related to the beginning of the dimension chain.

Reference Point Here, you specify whether a reference part has to be used for dimensioning. This is necessary to evaluate shape shortenings correctly. However, the part has to be an intelligent 2D part’. No – A reference part is not used for dimensioning and all lengths are evaluated in the measured length.

Default A pre-set part is used as reference part. Thus, you don’t have to select it each time you apply this command. This option helps you to dimension more complex groups. Select – You are always prompted for the reference part, which then has to be selected.

With Angle At arc dimension, the included angle is additionally entered as well into the dimension.

With Radius At arc dimension, the reference radius is additionally entered as well into the dimension.

Continuing Dim. Chain A dimension chain can be built continuously by clicking on individual points. If this field is not checked, you have to continue dimensioning single distances and you can obtain a dimension chain with gaps.

Scale automatic The settings for scale and object scaling are automatically determined by the global scale and by the reference part. If your work has been logical according to ProSteel (either un-scaled details and global scale for plot or scaled details and scale 1:1 for the plot), incorrect default settings are avoided.

No Scaling The parts to be dimensioned are not scaled. Thus, the original measured lengths can be used. However, if the field has not been checked, all measured lengths are multiplied with the indicated scale under 'New Scale'.

Manual Dimensioning

860

New Scale The scale used for converting the measured lengths and text sizes depending on the settings for part scaling under ‘Parts Not…’ Here, you enter e.g. the value 10 if you have selected the ‘scale 1: 10 with object scaling’ at detailing. The details now have been decreased by factor 10.

Group Fence Chains

Outside Dimensions The outside edges of the seized component parts are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Shape Center Starting and end points of the shapes are created as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Shape Edges The corner points of the coating are evaluated as fence points and dimensioned in a dimension chain.

Overall Dim. An additional dimension chain is created stretching over the overall dimensions of the fence chains.

Group Coordinate Dimensions

At Overall Dim. Normally, the coordinate dimensions for overall dimensions are omitted at automatic detailing or part dimensioning. If this option has been selected, these are displayed as well to allow e.g. in overviews to specify the position of component parts related to a reference point by means of the overall dimensions of these parts.

Always positive If this option has been checked, always positive coordinate dimensions are indicated. You can obtain a relative dimensioning around a reference point when the direction is not important.

Display Zero If this option has been checked, the coordinate measure having the value “0” is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if the origin (reference) is only indicated once.

Display First If this option has been checked, the first coordinate measure is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is reasonable if you want a connection with an existing dimension chain or an identical starting point has only to be indicated once.

Manual Dimensioning

861

Display Last If this option has been checked, the last coordinate measure is displayed in a dimension chain. Deactivation is only possible if you have a dimension chain of normal dimensions and simultaneously existing coordinate dimensions.

Others

Info Window Depending on the selection, you are informed about the type of dimension chains, global scale of the drawing, pre-selected origin of coordinate dimensioning and pre-selected component part for part reference.

Detailing Style Here, you select the detailing style controlling the settings for dimensioning style, optimization, etc. At automatic part dimensioning, you also specify the points of a part or of a group to be dimensioned in the detailing style. Therefore, at identical detailing style the result of automatic detailing and automatic part dimensioning are in no way different.

Dialog-Commands

SINGLE PART

Click on this button to dimension a shape or any plate automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached. You have to click on the part to be dimensioned. If the ‘Choose Position’

option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.

GROUP

Click on this button to dimension a group automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.

You have to click on any part of the group you like. If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can, however, specify other directions as well.

Manual Dimensioning

862

END PLATE

Click on this button to dimension an end plate automatically. The relevant points for dimensioning are determined according to the settings in detailing style and the dimension chains are attached.

You have to click on the end plate first and then the connecting shape (this is the shape to which the end plate belongs). If the ‘Choose Position’ option has been activated, you can place the created dimension chains at any position you like. For pre-selection of dimensioning direction, the option ‘As Part’ is recommended for most cases, you can specify other directions as well.

INSERT DIMENSION

Click on this button to insert new dimensions in an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions will be adapted. Select all dimensions belonging to this chain. Then you have to pick a

dimension as reference dimension for the position of the dimension chain. If this demand is only confirmed with RETURN, the first dimension of your previous selection will be used. Now the program filters the dimensions, which are not situated in a line with this reference dimension. Dimensions of other dimension chains may also belong to your selection (e.g. due to “Crossing” the selection). Now, the dimension chain will be reconstructed and you can then insert the new dimensions.

DELETE DIMENSION

Click on this button to delete a dimension from an existing dimension chain. The other dimensions will be adapted. Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the

dialog command INSERT DIMENSION it has not to be described once again.

MODIFY DIMENSION CHAIN

Click on this button to modify the style of a dimension chain, e.g. to convert it from normal dimensions to coordinate dimensions or to modify the detailing style.

Selection of the dimension chain and of dimensions is identical with the dialog command INSERT DIMENSION; it does not have to be described once again.

Manual Dimensioning

863

SINGLE DIMENSION

Click on this button to attach a single dimension.

Linear Dim: Click on the first and second dimension point as well as the position of the dimension line. The dimension is aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part.

Arc Dimensions: Click on the centre of the arc first and then the starting point and end of the arc (the end will be corrected correspondingly). Afterwards, you pick the dimension line position. An arc is principally looked on counter-clockwise from beginning to end.

Angle Dim.: Click on the vertex of the angle first and then the end of the first and second side. After you pick the dimension line position. An angle is principally looked on counter-clockwise from beginning to end.

DIMENSION CHAIN

Click on this button to attach a dimension chain out of several dimensions. Click on the position of the dimension line first and then the points to be dimensioned.

The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part. If you selected the option ‘As Picked’ for the direction, the first two dimension points determine the direction of the dimension chain. If you selected the option ’Continuing Dimension Chain’, you are dimensioning according to the AutoCAD-dimensioning function ‘Continue’. If this option has not been activated, you continue indicating pairs of points for all dimensions following the first one. You can obtain an interrupted dimension chain with several dimensions.

Manual Dimensioning

864

FENCE CHAIN

Click on this button to create a fence chain dimensioning. The dimensions are aligned according to the direction. Depending on the settings for direction and part reference, you still have to click on a reference line and/or a reference part.

CHANGE DETAIL STYLE

Click on this button to open the dialog for setting parameters for the detail style. If you move to another style in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list, the display in the detail style dialog will be updated as well.

LOAD DETAIL STYLE

Click on this button to load a detail style from the hard drive into your drawing. Select the desired style file (*.sty) in the file selection dialog (*.sty).

A new loaded detail style at the same time is the current detail style of dimensioning and it is displayed in the ‘Detailing Style’ selection list.

SPECIFY ORIGIN

Click on this button to define the origin (reference point) of coordinate dimensioning for the time of a ProSteel session. Click on the corresponding point in your drawing.

This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within an overview or a more complex group. Select the setting Default under ‘Default Origin’ if all following coordinate dimensions have to be calculated related to this reference point.

SPECIFY REFERENCE OBJECT

Click on this button to define the reference object for shape shortening etc. for the time of a ProSteel session. Click on the corresponding part in your drawing.

This is reasonable if dimensioning has to be made e.g. within a more complex group. Select the setting Default under ‘Part Reference’ if all following actions requiring a reference object have to be related to this selected part.

Manual Dimensioning

865

Dimension Chains During the acquisition of the measurement points the dimension chains are able to capture the points correctly even if the dimensions have been indicated in a different sequence or if the dimensions overlap. The picture below illustrates the interconnections:

Example (1) shows a dimensioning using the ’Continuing Dimension Chain’ option and the following sequence: First, click the distance C/F, then point D, and finally point A. Example (2) shows the result if the first dimensioning is like (1) and the next input is the dimensioning of the distance from the dotted line to point B. The ‘Combine Identical Dimensions from 3 on’ option in the detail style is active as well (since A/B, B/C and C/D were created!) Example (3) shows a dimension chain without the ‘Continuing Dimension Chain’ option. The following was dimensioned: the distance A/C and then D/E. A new measurement of the distance B/F would now divide the distance of 400 and create a second measurement from point E to F.

Manual Dimensioning

866

Alignment and Coordinate Dimensioning Some variants of dimensioning are admitted especially in combination with overviews due to the possibility to specify the reference points for coordinate dimensioning and the alignment of the dimension chains differently. The picture below shows two dimension chains with coordinate dimensions. The dimension chain (a) has been related to the UCS origin (a1) and the first and last coordinate measure has been deactivated. The dimension chain (b) has been fixed to a free reference point (b1) and negative coordinate dimensions have been admitted. These now can serve as relative height indicators. In addition, a dimension chain (c) has been attached the position of which is determined by the first two measurement points (c1) and (c2). Then, the two holes (c3) have been added as further measurement points. This would also have been possible by modification via the INSERT DIMENSION dialog command.

Manual Dimensioning

867

Fence Chain Dimensioning Fence chain dimensioning is a semi-automatic dimensioning mode, where the program determines the relevant points for dimensioning in several different objects. Once this is done, you can position the dimensioning lines via pre-settings for ‘Fence Chain Dimensioning’ you can select the dimension chains and the reference points. With the settings for ‘Direction’ you have determined the general dimensioning direction. This figure gives you an example for fence dimensioning:

First, select the objects to be dimensioned – here the three shapes. Then, you can still click on the two reference points (A) and (B) which then will be added to the dimension chains and which will influence the overall dimension if they are situated outside of the shape dimensions. The program then prompts you to indicate the starting point of the auxiliary lines (C) and the insertion point of the first dimension chain (D).

Depending on the selection, the dimension chains for shape centers (a), shape edges (b), outer edges (c) and overall dimension (d) are then inserted and, depending on the combination of dimension chains, extended to the outer edge of the overall dimension resp. of the outer shapes.

Manual Dimensioning

868

Elevation Flags

869

C.15 Elevation Flags

Using this command, you can insert elevations for component parts in the display windows. This command may also be used to insert length and width distances as elevation symbols. The parameters length, width, and height correspond to the related parameters of the work frames.

Elevation Flag The style used for displaying the elevation.

Layer The elevation is inserted on the selected layer.

No Dynamic The dynamic of the flag is switched off after insertion. This is meant for application in 2D-mode, to avoid moving a view that forces an update of the displayed values.

Scale Indicates the scale used for displaying the inserted elevation symbol in the drawing.

Length Scaling The length scaling for the distance value; it is also possible to attach elevations in scaled details.

Elevation Flags

870

The distance in z-direction is indicated in the elevation.

The distance in y-direction is indicated in the elevation.

The distance in x-direction is indicated in the elevation.

A symbol is created within a group, which will be output as elevation at later detailing.

Click on the button representing the desired measurement and the elevation can be inserted. First click on the definition point (dimension point), then you can position the elevation symbol (ORTHO is activated automatically) and finally, you position the dimension text (ORTHO is deactivated again when it was in the OFF-position before the function was selected).

Elevation Flags

871

Specification of the Origin Coordinates

X, Y, Z-Coordinate Here you enter the coordinates of origin for Length (Y), Width

(X) and Height (Z) measurements. The picked points will then be referenced to these coordinates. Usually you enter the origin of the corresponding work frame.

The coordinates can also be defined in the drawing using the mouse.

Elevation Flags

872

Elevation Depiction

Elevation Style Use this box to select the style to be applied for the depiction.

Create Geometry The depiction of elevations is specified by preset parameters in this dialog.

Block Geometry An AutoCAD block specifies the depiction of elevations. Any block can be selected.

Block Path In this field, you specify from which directory the blocks for selecting the geometry of the elevations have to be read.

Bitmap You can set an own bitmap for a style for easy recognition. This bitmap then is displayed in the selection box as well.

Click on this button to save the current settings as style.

Click on this button to load a style for the elevations and thus to use it again

Click on this button to modify the display of the elevation if ‘Create Geometry’ has been selected.

Elevation Flags

873

Geometry Definition

Line Type Lines means that the elevation symbol is represented as a line

triangle. Filled Triangle means that the elevation symbol is represented as a partly filled triangle.

Default Format You can indicate a certain text format with a variable $(V) for the measurement to the elevation. The variable then is replaced by the current value.

Text Style Presets the text style to be used for depiction of the texts in the elevation.

Note The indicated notes are output as text together with the elevation.

Elevation Flags

874

Group Options

Guide Line The elevation has a guideline to the definition point.

Dynamic The elevation is visibly displayed during insertion process.

Bottom Side The elevation symbol is turned upside down (point to the top, e.g. for the indication of lower edges).

Thousand sep The thousand position is separated from the other digits by a point, i.e. 2.500 instead of 2500. If you require the digits after the decimal point, this option should be deactivated.

Group Sizes

Symbol Size the size of the elevation symbol.

Text Size size of text of elevation data

After Decimal The number of digits after the decimal point of the calculated value

Pre-Decimal The number of digits in front of the decimal point of the calculated value, if the value is smaller than the number of pre-decimal digits, the rest is filled up with noughts.

Group Colours

Colours Use the fields Line and Text to set the corresponding colour for the height object. -1 as value means that the presetting is used.

In the following, you can see an example of different elevations:

Elevation Flags

875

Style Management Your elevation styles are managed in this part of the dialog. New styles can be created; existing styles can be loaded, updated or even deleted.

Press the above-displayed symbol to create a new elevation

style. The style then will be saved by means of presetting in the directory for elevation styles as a file having the ending *.sty-file. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

If you want to work with a special style, which is not in the drawing, but stored on the hard drive, you can load it using this function. Select the corresponding *.sty-file in the directory of elevation styles and load the file. The style will be available at once.

If you don’t require a style any more in the drawing, use this function to remove it.

Click on this button to modify the order of the display. The order in the display of the style list is not sorted. You can specify your own sorting. For this purpose, use the two arrow buttons to move the highlighted style towards the top or towards the bottom of the order.

Elevation Flags

876

Weld Symbols

877

C.16 Weld Symbols

Using this command, weld seams or weld symbols may be inserted in the model or in any 2D-drawing. To conserve memory, a weld seam in a 3D model is represented by a line only. But it contains all necessary data, so that a weld symbol can be added later. After inserting the weld symbol, you can still change data in the dialog and check the result immediately in the drawing. A symbol can be composed of an upper and/or a lower part. Since the settings are identical, only one variation is described here. Weld seams are objects, and allow any kind of alteration at a later date by using the context menu “Change PS Properties”. Define the required seams by using the dialog and store them by using the function ‘Templates’. This allows fast access to the different symbols.

Creating Weld Symbols and Seams

Weld Symbols

878

Weld Style The style used for displaying the weld seams.

Layer The weld seam is inserted on the selected layer.

Thickness Top Side Here, you can overwrite the value of the welding thickness of the style to create different thicknesses with identical default settings.

Thickness Bottom Side Here, you can overwrite the value of the welding thickness of the style to create different thicknesses with identical default settings.

Scale Indicates the scale used for displaying the inserted weld symbol in the drawing.

Click this button to insert weld symbols. For this purpose, select the start point of the guideline and the insertion point of the flag.

Click this button to insert a weld seam. For this purpose, select the start and the end point of the weld seam and the weld seam will be created with the specified style.

Click this button to attach a weld flag at an existing weld seam. Select an existing weld seam and then specify the insertion position of the weld flag.

Click this button to attach another guideline at a weld flag. First select an existing weld flag and then draw the new reference arrow to its target point.

Click this button to remove a subsequently added guideline.

Click this button to weld component parts with each other. Select two parts to be welded. ProSteel now creates a weld group with the corresponding weld seams using the specified settings for weld groups (see also ‘Form Weld Groups’).

Click this button to define the properties of a weld group.

Weld Symbols

879

Form Weld Groups

Create Group A new group is formed out of the two component parts, unless

it already exists

Treat as one If this option has been activated in the CAD system the group is set on this selection mode.

With Welds The weld seams are integrated into the group as well.

Min. Weld Length A weld seam created using this command may not be shorter than the indicated length.

Gap The minimum gap between these parts is specified. If the gap is bigger than the specified value, the parts will not be welded. The value should not be equal 0 to avoid problems with tolerances.

Weld Symbols

880

Depiction of Weld Symbols

The depiction of weld symbols is determined by styles, which have to be selected at the corresponding positions. You may set these styles here.

Weld Style Use this box to select the style that has to be applied for the

display. Created Geometry The depiction of weld symbols is defined in this dialog by means of specified parameters.

Block Geometry The depiction of weld symbols is defined by means of any AutoCAD block that can be selected.

Block Path In this field you specify the block path for selecting the geometry of the weld symbols have to be read.

Bitmap You can set your own bitmap for better recognition of the style. This bitmap is displayed in the selection box as well.

Click this button to save the current settings as style.

Click this button to load a style for the weld symbols and to use it again.

Click this button to specify the general settings of the weld symbol or the weld seam.

Weld Symbols

881

Click this button to specify the special settings for the upper side of the weld symbol (upper weld seam).

Click this button to specify the special settings for the lower side of the weld symbol (lower weld seam).

Click this button to specify further settings for the evaluation in the parts lists.

General Default Settings

Line Type Here you specify the type of the guideline.

No Line – No guideline will be displayed. Line – The guideline consists of only one single line. Line with Arrow – The guideline has an additional arrow at the origin of the line. Line with Point – The guideline has an additional point at the origin of the line. Line with Block– The guideline has an additional block of any kind at the origin of the line.

Line Block Here you can select the AutoCAD-block, if the option ‘Line with Block’ has been selected.

Text Style Here you indicate the AutoCAD text style for the labels.

Weld Symbols

882

Options Select the type of weld seam. All around – The weld symbol is added for an all around weld seam. Field Weld – The weld symbol is added for an on-site seam. Replaced - The weld symbol is added for an alternating weld seam. Staggered – Staggered entries are displayed instead of an extra symbol for an alternating weld seam. Tail –The weld symbol is added by using this sign.

Text Size Size of the label text

Symbol Size Size of symbol representation.

Scale Enter the scale for the data in the entry fields Text Size and Symbol Size. When selecting this function, the default scale is entered automatically.

Colour Specify the colour numbers for the Line, the Symbol and for the Text.

Defaults Upper and Lower Side

Thickness The thickness of the weld seam.

Prefix A prefix placed in front of the thickness of the weld seam.

Length The length of the weld seam

Weld Symbols

883

Gap Here you can indicate a gap in the weld seam.

Comment Here you can indicate a comment to the weld symbols.

Add. Length Additional length details

Symbol In this list, you can select the type of the weld seam (flat-flap weld, HV weld, etc.).

Toward Position Indicates whether the weld seam has to be carried out in this way

Symmetrical The bottom side data corresponds to those of the top side (only available in ‘top side’).

Defaults Parts List

Material The weld material which has to be used

Register The created weld seam has to appear in the parts list.

Weight/LU The weight of the weld seam per length unit.

Price/LU The price of the weld seam per length unit.

Weld Symbols

884

Style Management In this part of the dialog, your weld styles are managed. You can create new styles, load styles, update or delete styles.

Press the above symbol to create a new weld style. The style

then will be stored as *.sty file with the default settings in the directory for weld styles. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

If you want to work with a special style which is not stored in the drawing, but on your hard drive, you can load this style using this function. Select the corresponding *.sty file in the directory for weld styles and load the file. The style will be available at once.

Use this function to remove a style, that is not required any more, from your drawing.

Click this button to change the order of the display. The order in the display of the style list is not sorted, but you can sort yourself. Use the two arrow keys to scroll the highlighted style up or down in the order.

Use this function to update the styles loaded in your drawing. All styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard drive.

Caption texts

885

C.17 Caption texts

With this function you input caption texts with or without leader lines into your drawings. These can contain up to four text lines, and each line can also have a different text size and text color. Contrary to the use of standard text commands, in autoCAD you have the advantage with this function that you can arrange and also modify caption texts (e.g. as text flag) in different ways. Additionally the style templates together with their own standard texts can be administered in templates and transferred between available text flags. This makes it easier to supplement a drawing at a later time in a style already used there or to change certain parameters simultaneously for all texts. Handles and Leader Lines Available text flags can be easily changed across several handles. The most important functions of shift and rotation are supported, and you can determine the behavior by using the style input. It is likewise possible to attach a common text to different targets with several leader lines.

Caption texts

886

Representation style Here you decide what style to use for display of the caption text and how the caption flag behaves after manual changes.

Leader lines Here you input the basic form of the text flag.

No leader line – A simple text without leader line is created. Baseline – A text with leader line is created. The first text line is on top, all further text lines then appear below the leader line. Center line – A text with leader line is created which ends before the middle of the first text line. The example indicates the two variants of ‘baseline’ (left) and ‘center line’ (right), however with different start symbols:

Start symbol Here you specify the start symbol for the leader line if you selected it under

‘leader line.’ Line – A simple line without symbol is presented. Arrow – The point of origin of the line is represented as an arrow. Circle – The point of origin of the line is represented as a circle.

Size - The symbol size for the point of origin of the leader line.

Color The color used for representation of the leader lines. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Caption texts

887

Overhang Here you input the overhang of the leader line past the end of the text block if you have selected the ‘baseline’ option under ‘leader line.’ If you selected ‘center line’ there, then the value determines the length of the leader line before the text block.

Indentation Here you input the horizontal indention of the text block, if you selected the ‘baseline’ option under ‘leader line’. If you selected ‘center line’ there, then the value determines the horizontal distance of the text block from the end point of the leader line. The example shows the meaning of the inputs for overhang (A) and indention (B), in each case for the leader line type ‘baseline’ (1) and ‘center line’ (2):

Line spacing The distance of the text lines above and below the leader line or the spacing

of customized text lines among themselves.

Turning grid Here you input a value greater than 0, the text can be turned with the help of the handles only in a given angle grid.

Scaling Input the scaling (scale) if you want to use an input for several scales.

Leader line transposed If this field is marked, the leader line and the text is aligned to the particular, opposite side. However, the Pick-points for the text insertion and for the starting point of the leader line remain unchanged..

Automatic rotation If this field is marked, then the orientation of the text flag changes, depending upon the position of text insertion with respect to the starting point of the leader line. This will prevent an overlap of text and leader line. In the case of several starting points, the first used starting point is crucial.

Caption texts

888

Text contents Here you input which texts are displayed in the customized text lines. You can select text sizes and colors for each customized line.

Main text Here you input the first text line of the caption text. If you selected the

‘baseline’ option under ‘leader line,’ this is the text line above the leader line.

Additional text 1,2,3 Here you input the additional text lines of the caption text. If you selected the ‘baseline’ option under ‘leader line,’ this is the text line below the leader line.

Text size Here you input the letter size for the particular text line.

Text color The color used for representation of the respective text line. Use the suitable autoCAD color number for this.

Caption texts

889

Copying and inserting Here you specify which data you can read from or transfer into other text flags.

Group - data copy

Here you input which data you read from another text flag, if you call up the corresponding function. Select the option ‘all parameters’ or use ‘selected parameters’ to limit the selection. In the second case only the marked values are transferred from the selection described below.

Representation style The inputs for the representation style, i.e. the data on the leader line and spacing, are transferred. The setting for scaling is not overwritten.

Main text Text style The letter size and the text color of the first text line are transferred.

Main text The content of the first text line is transferred.

Additional text Text style The letter sizes and text colors of additional text lines are transferred.

Additional text The content of additional text lines is transferred.

Scaling The value for scaling is transferred.

Group - insert data

Here you input which data you transfer into other text flags. Settings are identical to the ‘data copy’ group.

Caption texts

890

Dialog commands

CREATE HORIZONTAL

If you click on this button, you can insert a caption text with horizontal orientation into the drawing. The text and the representation style are transferred from the dialog. If you selected the ‘baseline’ or ‘center line’ option, then first click the starting point of the leader line (this is omitted with the ‘no leader line’ option ). Next, click on the insertion point of the text.

CREATE ALIGNED

If you click on this button, you can insert a caption text with any orientation into the drawing. The text and the representation style are transferred from the dialog. If you selected the ‘baseline’ or ‘center line’ option, then first click the starting point of the leader line (this is omitted with the ‘no leader line’ option ). Next, click on the insertion point of the text. Subsequently, you pick an additional point for the orientation of the text. Alternatively you can press the ENTER key here to align the text horizontally. The likewise permitted input of the value 45 or 90 aligns the text to the selected angle.

DATA COPYING

If you click on this button, you can copy the data of an available caption text from the drawing into the dialog. In this way additional texts can be created with the same or similar inputs. For this you must click the caption whose data you would like to transfer. The inputs on the ‘copy and insert’ page will determine which data are transferred for overwriting the current content.

DATA INSERT

If you click on this button, you can write the data from the dialog into already available caption texts of the drawing. Elements can be easily modified in this way. For this you must select the captions which you would like to modify. The data to be modified in the drawing depends on the inputs on the ‘copy and insert’ page. This function also offers the simple possibility to supplement already existing texts by the use of placeholders. Further information is found under ‘Manipulation of Captions’

Caption texts

891

Processing of Captions The extensive possibilities available to you in selection of data to be copied and replaced provide numerous variants for manipulation of existing captions. Your settings for copying and inserting are saved in the templates, however not in the captions themselves. The following examples give you some suggestions, of course, many additional combinations are possible:

Customized processing All available captions can of course be customized subsequently via the component characteristics and the handles.

Complete change If you marked the all parameters option in a particular case, all values are modified expect for the insert points and the orientation. Thus you can transfer the data from one caption to other captions.

Transfer or modify Style In order to transfer styles without changing the contents, you mark for example only the options representation style, main text Text style, additional text Text style. This means that the text contents and scaling (this is usually defined by the scale) are not changed.

Transfer or modify Texts Modifying the texts takes place in a similar way as a change to the styles, only you must mark the options main text and/or additional text. This means that the type of representation is not changed. If you would also like to include the existing content in the new text, you can use the placeholder $(T) in the text input field of the dialog. In this case during the transfer, the text line present in the object is inserted at this point, thus it is mixed with the input in the dialog. Text input dialog current text text after transfer Support $(T) at site HE-100 A support HE-100 A at site

Caption texts

892

Short 2D manually

893

C.18 Short 2D manually

Since shapes are shown in full scale during detailing, they may sometimes be very long and not fit in the drawing. Under certain circumstances, you might deliberately want to have some “out-of-scale” shapes (lengthwise) in your drawing, e.g., if large areas of the components do not have any drill holes or similar features. This command allows you to shorten finished shapes in a way that areas with many details remain unchanged and a break is inserted in an insignificant area. The figure below shows the original shape and then the shortened display (slightly enlarged).

Select this command and you will be first prompted for the shape to be shortened which you have to click. Then you are prompted for the starting and end point of the shortening, which you can either enter or pick. If you press the ESC-key instead, the shortening is automatically determined and carried out, as it is the case for detailing. If you want to dimension the shape manually later, you can then consider the shortening as well. Note: In some cases it may be that the command doesn’t work as it should. In this case, check whether the drawing elements you want to treat are blocks (which cannot be dissolved). You first have to dissolve these blocks before you can go on.

Short 2D manually

894

2D-Cutout

895

C.19 2D-Cutout

Using this command, you can cut any 2D lines at a polyline at the same time. After selecting the command, you have to pick the points of the polyline. The same command functions are available as when drawing a polyline. Then, all of the lines extending past the polyline are cut off at this line. When you want to use this function to cut out “intelligent” ProSteel-2D-objects (such as shapes after detailing), you first have to explode them into AutoCAD-lines. However, don’t forget that after that the objects have lost their properties.

2D-Cutout

896

Hole Display

897

C.20 Hole Display

Apart from standard geometrical display of holes, in 2D-plans it is possible, too to display the holes by means of any user-defined hole display style. This hole display style describes the display of a drill hole dependent on the view direction, the hole type and the corresponding diameter – a symbolic and non-true scale display can be realized as well. The actual display in the drawing is determined by blocks to be assigned to.

Hole Display Indicates the currently selected hole display style.

The selected hole display style is edited independently for plan view and view on a hole. Then, a list appears with the assignments of diameters to display.

Block Path The path where the blocks for hole display have been stored.

Bitmap A symbol, which facilitates the recognition of the corresponding style in the selection list

Saves the current definition in the drawing and in a file; when you modify the style and you leave the page without saving, you are asked whether you want to save the modifications.

Permits loading the current style definition from a style file; all current definitions of the current style will be overwritten.

Hole Display

898

Processing of Hole Display Style List A complete hole display style consists of a list of entries allowing to assign the hole diameters to the desired display. It is also possible to define a value range for the diameter to show e.g. all holes between 12 and 16 mm with the same display.

The current data record is edited. Then a dialog opens to

select the blocks for the different hole types.

Click on this button to add a new entry at the end of the list that can be processed.

Click on this button to remove the selected entry from the list.

Hole Display

899

Processing of Hole Style Entry Here, you assign the different blocks for each diameter range that have to be used for visible and hidden holes. Each kind of hole can have its own variant.

Min. Dm The minimum diameter from which on the selected display will

be used.

Max. Dm The maximum diameter up to which the selected display will be used.

Visible Here, you select the block to be used for displaying the different hole types Normal, Countersunk, Step and Threaded Hole if the hole is a visible hole in the drawing.

Hidden You select the block to be used for displaying the different hole types Normal, Countersunk, Step and Threaded Hole if the hole is a hidden hole in the drawing.

Hole Display

900

Style Management In this part of the dialog, your hole styles are maintained. You can create new styles, load, update and delete styles.

Click on the displayed button if you want to create a new hole

style. Then, the style is saved with pre-settings in the hole style list as *.sty-file. Now you can work with this style on all other pages of this dialog.

When you want to work with a special style which is not saved in the drawing, but on the hard disk, you can load this style using this function. Select the corresponding *.sty-file in the hole style list and load the file. The style is immediately at your disposal.

Hole Display

901

This function allows you to remove a style which is not needed any more in the drawing. Click on this button to modify the display order. The display order of the style list is not sorted, but you can define the sorting yourself. Use the two arrow keys to move the checked style up or down the order. This function allows you to update the styles loaded in the drawing. All styles in the drawing are replaced by the styles stored on the hard disk.

Automatic 2D-Cut

902

C.21 Automatic 2D-Cut

This function helps you to define 2D-cuts in components of the model. When detailing, these cuts can be displayed and dimensioned automatically as separate details. You may exactly define where cuts are required unless they had been inserted automatically during modelling, later in the 2D-workshop drawing. This function doesn't create the cut itself. You only define where, which direction and how deep a cut has to be displayed later. In contrast to the manual cuts which are inserted in a finished detail by means of the command->'Insert 2D-cut' (Manual 2D-cut), here you have the advantage of automatic positioning and dimensioning of the cuts. They will be up-dated together with a drawing-update.

Add Cut

Adding the cut information usually occurs during modelling in the 3D-Model. However, you have the possibility to do this also in the 2D-drawing if the model is available to you. Add Cut in the 3D-Model After having loaded the function, you first have to select the shape, where a cut is to be inserted. Then, you have to click a point on the cutting plane. The cutting plane will always run through this point perpendicular to the center line. Finally, you are asked for depth and direction of cut, which will be defined by clicking on another point. On one hand, you indicate the view direction of the cut and on the other hand, you determine its depth (this point will also be perpendicular to the center line). The resulting cutting planes will be displayed dynamically during selection for control reasons. The depth of the cut decides how much of the components situated behind the cutting plane is to be displayed. Add Cut in the 2D-Detail This variant also uses the cut information of the 3D-component (see above). However, you can pick the reference points for the cutting planes in the appropriate 2D-Detail, which is then automatically updated. This has the advantage that you make the decision dependant on the “quality”of the detail. Sometimes an additional cut is helpful, even though this may not be absolutely necessary. In order to be able to use the function, you must have opened the 2D-drawings with the details and the pertinent 3D-Model. The detail must be prepared as object (see also ‘intelligent details’) because with simple coordinate graphics no more computations are possible.

Automatic 2D-Cut

903

Start the DetailCenter and make sure that your 3D-Model is the active model. Usually that is the case, if you prepare components from the model and insert them into 2D-drawings. Now switch to the desired 2D-drawing and then in the context menu on the component side of the DetailCenter, call up the command Add 2D-cut. Now in the drawing you must select the detail block to be applied to the cut and then select the additional details such as cutting plane, cut direction and cut depth. These inputs are entered in the same manner as described under ‘Add cut in the 3D-Model.’ Abbreviations of the detail are taken into account in the computation, so that the picked range in the 3D-component is extended accordingly. Note also that the detail style must support the representation of cuts.

The above-figure again shows the technique for how to introduce an automatic cut by means of the definition in the 2D-Detail:

In the 2D-workshop drawing you pick detail block (A) and define a range (1) to be represented as a cut – that is, the cutting plane, direction and depth. The cutting plane always runs vertically to the center line through the picked plane point. This information is now converted into the model (2) and added to the 3D-component (B) as cut information. With respect to the component there is now no longer any difference to the 3D-variant. Subsequently, the component is automatically processed again (3) and the old detail block in the drawing is replaced (4). You thus have the representation of the cut (5) according to the specifications in the detail style.

Automatic 2D-Cut

904

Modification of Cut Cuts can be modified or deleted from Shape Properties.

Actual ... From Here, you see the number of cuts existing in the shape as well

as the number of the current cut.

Active If this field is checked, the cut will be taken into account during detailing. It is possible to exclude a cut without having to delete it.

Cut Depth Here, the depth of the cut can be modified. Alternatively, this can be done by using the AutoCAD-grips on the cut-symbol which are displayed when the cut is selected.

Alignment Here, you enter the view direction of the cut. Shape direction: The cut runs from the indicated cutting plane in shape direction. Opposite direction: The cut runs from the indicated cutting plane opposite to the shape direction. Cutting plane always remains at the same position. If you want to reverse the cut completely, select the option ‘Turn Round’.

Zone This option hasn’t any meaning here. It is provided for the extension ProConcrete 3D.

Create Cut This option hasn’t any meaning here. It is provided for the extension ProConcrete 3D.

Automatic 2D-Cut

905

Click on this button to delete the selected cut from the shape.

This button exchanges insertion point and back limit point. This means that the cutting plane now is the end of cutting depth and the end now is the cutting plane.

If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the next cut by using this button.

If you defined more than one cut, you can change to the previous cut by using this button.

Automatic 2D-Cut

906

Flatten Viewport

907

C.22 Flatten Viewport

By using the command PS_VIEWPORT_FLATTEN you can make display a viewport with hidden edges in the layout area of AutoCAD. The output can also calculate hidden Xrefs which may neither be nested nor scaled.

Name Any name with which the viewport can be displayed in later

versions in the DetailCenter as well.

Ident Handle of the viewport

Flatten Viewport

908

Part Selection Here you predefine the kind of part selection for output. Manual Selection –at output, you are asked to select the parts which have to be visible later in 2D-output. Automatic Selection (recommended) – the program automatically determines the component parts visible in the viewport and carries out a flatten viewport command. The output is cut off at the borders of the viewport, the visual depth of the viewport is taken into consideration, here. With Selection Set – You specify which component parts have to be adopted into 2D-depiction using the + and – button. All Component Parts – All component parts being in the model area of the drawing will be selected for output. Any possibly existing XRef’s will always be completely selected as well in all cases.

Flatten Viewport

909

Output You can realize the output either in model or in paper area. We recommend output in paper area.

Switch off Layer After the 2D-output was created, all layers in the viewport are switched off except the layers required for the depiction of 2D-output.

Click on this button to add or remove component parts to/from selection set for 2D-output.

Click on this button to carry out the calculation of the hidden edges. This button is only visible after selection of a valid detailing style.

Click on this button to delete again the drawing elements which had been newly generated together with the creation of the hidden edges. The layers in the viewport are switched on again.

Here an example for output with automatic selection in paper area. The position numbers were inserted into the drawing before in paper area.

Flatten Viewport

910

Select Detailing Style The selection of a detailing style is the prerequisite for a correct derivation of the drawing. Here, you specify colours, line types, center lines, etc. If it isn’t yet possible to select a detailing style in the list, you first have to create or load a detailing style by means of the DetailCenter.

Detailing Style Here, you specify the detailing style to be used for displaying

the hidden edges.

Flatten Viewport

911

User-Defined Component Parts

912

D Miscellaneous


913

D.1 User-Defined Component Parts

D.1.1 Special Parts

It may be that you don’t want to display detailed component parts, but you need the parts list information nevertheless. Or, you want to display certain elements, which have not been created with ProSteel, as a block and you want their parts list data in your model as well. By using the special shape command, you can add parts list information to any existing component parts. You only have to select the parts in question. After having selected the command, you can select the component parts directly or you can create a block from these parts by pressing ESC. Then, you select the parts and define the insertion point of the block. When you keep the ALT-key pressed while calling the function, you can create several special parts with the same properties. After that, the following dialog appears:

Here, you can enter your parts list data and then, this part will be recognized as ProSteel component part. You can modify this property using the properties command. You can use it at positioning and in the parts list as well. However, a 2D-depiction cannot be generated when no volume parts are contained.


914

D.1.2 Special Shapes

By using the special shape management of ProSteel, you can add your own custom shapes to the program which will then be processed like pre-defined standard shapes. These special shapes can be saved in any number of catalogues containing any number of shapes, i. e., you can establish same sorting as with standard shapes. The selection menu then shows catalogue names as a shape type and the shapes contained in each catalogue appear as shape size, making it easy to choose between different system shapes. You can create special shapes as combination of existing shapes or by using a drawn cross-section or a variant (qualitative generation instruction) with corresponding data base.

Create and Manage Special Shapes The program once again manages these shape catalogues in four special shape master groups, which all basically have the same properties and are consequently described together in this chapter. There is a distinction between general special shapes, roof-wall shapes, combination shapes and weld shapes. You create the first two groups by drawing a cross-section; for combination shapes you combine existing shapes to create a new shape (e.g. two U-shapes welded together). The weld shapes are created using a special dialog.

These are two examples of possible special shapes. The left shape was drawn as a cross-section and then stored as a special shape, the right one is a combination of two U-shapes.


915

In addition, you can store each shape in three different display modes (low, normal and high – which must be created individually). You thereby avoid having to deal with a confusing number of lines when working with rather complex shapes like in the left example, but you can show the complete shape if needed. Nonetheless, you can always select the ProSteel standard display modes (only center line, envelope, etc.) without having to change any parameters. Here, you see the dialog for special shape management. It is organized in a tree structure and consists of 4 main tabs for the different types of special shapes.

Each of these branches can contain subordinate directories and each subordinate directory can have any number of special shape definitions. However, you cannot make any further subordinate division. Select a shape and the stored cross-section will be displayed on the right monitor. Creation of a Catalogue Select one of the tabs to layout a catalogue and use the right mouse button. A subordinate menu is displayed offering you the option to layout a catalogue. A subordinate directory is created and you can edit the name. Creation of a Special Shape A special shape layout is made analogously to the layout of a catalogue. Select the desired catalogue and use the right mouse button. Then, you can select the option Layout Shape. Enter the name and the shape appears as an entry. This name is the access name and not the name, that later will be displayed in a parts list.


916

Please note that until now you only created a blank cover that has to be filled with creating a resolution. It is not before then that the special shape has been filed. If you don’t do that, the blank shape cover will be removed at next selection. Layout of a Depiction Resolution After the layout of a blank special shape definition has been affected, you have to define a resolution. Select the shape and use the right mouse button again.

Here, you select the desired resolution. If resolutions have already been defined for the special shape, you can modify the defined resolution using this method. Definition of Cross-Section Defining the closed and the not crossing contour of the cross-section normally creates a special shape. Depending on the setting, this can be done using poly-lines or individual lines and arc segments. Alternatively, you can define special shapes of regular wall thickness (e.g. cold rolling shapes) by means of an open poly-line and by specifying the thickness. See ‘Settings’.


917

After selection, choose your outer contour and the possibly existing inner contours. You can utilise any number of inner contours that must not cross the outer contour and must not have any intersection points between each other. Now, the program automatically calculates the possible standard insertion points of this shape (center line, envelope). Finally, you can still define a center line which can be used alternatively and further insertion points.

After end of the geometrical definitions, now the property dialog for specifying the parts list data will be displayed.

Enter the name of the parts list, notes, material, etc. Starting from the cross-section drawing and the entered material data, the program calculates the weight in kg/m and displays it in the entry field Weight. You can determine which shape data will be applied to the standard parts list. It is also possible to change the calculated weight. When you have defined a user-defined center, you also specify here whether it is used to determine the center line or whether the calculated center line has to be used. Then, the special shape is saved and can be used by you in the 3D-model. As you can see, the defined resolution is displayed. You could repeat this procedure with different resolutions or modify any existing resolution afterwards as described above.


918

Settings

Selection Mode Here, you specify whether the contour selection has to be

effected via an existing poly-line or via selection of individual segments.

Shape Thickness When you have selected an open poly-line, the contour will be created along the poly-line with the indicated thickness. The poly-line is the neutral fibre.

Shape System Here, you select whether the following created shapes have to be available only for steel (ProSteel), only for concrete (ProConcrete 3D) or for both applications.


919

Roof-Wall-Shapes The creation of roof-wall-shapes is identical with the creation of general special shapes. The only purpose for dividing them is to have a clearer survey and still another feature of differentiation.

Combination Shapes Combination shapes are not created using poly-lines or line elements. You have to arrange the shapes in the WCS in the way they have to be built later for definition. The best is to apply short shape pieces (e.g. with a length of 100 mm) in the cross-section. Please note, however, that they mustn’t be mirrored.

The definition of a combination shape is analogous to that of the other special shapes, with the exception that you are not asked for poly-lines but for the shapes contained. Select the decisive shape first, and then the other ones. An inserted combination shape has the same properties like an individual shape. In contrast to standard shapes, you can dissolve the combination shapes into their individual parts and any processing of the individual segments is kept. Combination shapes are especially suitable for planning tasks or for tasks where several partial shapes have to be processed analogously (such as e.g. at the construction of fronts of buildings).


920

Special Shapes Via Variant and Database The creation of special shapes via drawing a cross-section is especially suitable for individual types that cannot be summed up in special shape series or, for types where you only need some special shapes for your construction. However, if you require whole shape series of similar types, which only differ in their dimensions but the quality, of which is identical, it is recommended to create them via a variant with corresponding database. Using this method, you only determine how the shape has to look like in a description file by describing a polygon with variables. This means you describe a shape like “line from point (0, 0) to point(a, b)" etc. and then define the values a and b in a DBASE-file. If you enter 10 different data records with names and variants for a, and for b, you will immediately obtain 10 different shapes which are similar to each other. Create Variant Please also read through the section about the standard method via a drawn poly-line, because basic information about special shapes is not described once again here. To create a variant, you have to create a new file tab in the special shapes directory (...\sopro) first. The name of this file tab simultaneously defines the “shape type”, which will be displayed later in the selection lists for shape selection. Now, this file tab has to contain an ASCII-file with the name rules.dat. This file contains the variant description and the corresponding DBASE-file (*.dbf), the name of which can be freely determined. In the variant file you enter this name explicitly. Hint: Please note that there mustn’t be a common special shape file (*.psp) in this tab. You can create a shape of the same type designation only via the standard method or via a variant. Structure of Variant File (Geometry) All commands in this file have to be entered in capital letters, and the order specified here has to be kept. The values for x and y can either be pre-defined or be values from the database. If you want to apply a value from the database, you define continuous variables $1, $2, $3 etc. for this purpose, which will then be replaced by the values of the data records. You can indicate all three-resolution variants in one file.


921

FILE=TEST.DBF Enter the file name of the corresponding database file.

RESOLUTION=NORMAL; Enter the display variant LOW, NORMAL or HIGH.

THICKNESS=5.0; Optional entry, see command description

STARTPOINT(x, y); Starting point of the outer poly-line ..further polygon description

STARTPOINT(x, y) Starting point of the 1st. inner poly-line ...further polygon description

INSERTPOINT(x, y) Additional insertion points, up to 16 pcs. You can only define one set of insertion points, i. e. you cannot define 16 points for each resolution!

RESOLUTION=END End of a depiction variant

RESOLUTION=LOW New depiction variant, if required ...

RESOLUTION=END

For the description of the polygon segments, commands for lines and arcs are at your disposal which can be described with relative or absolute coordinates. LINEAR_TO(dx, dy) Line segment from the last indicated point

in relative coordinates x and y (analogously to AutoCAD-line input)

LINEAR_AT(x, y) Line segment from the last indicated point in absolute coordinates x and y (analogously to AutoCAD-line input)

ARC_TO(r, phi) Arc segment from the last indicated point, tangential at this point with the indicated radius r and the arc angle phi in degrees. A positive angle causes a rotation to the right, a negative angle causes a rotation to the left.


922

ARC_AT(cx ,cy, ex, ey) Arc segment from the last indicated point, tangential at this point with the indicated center point cx and cy as well as the end point ex and ey in absolute coordinates each.

Normally, the special shape is described using one or more closed poly-lines. However, an easier description can be selected for thin-wall-shapes (cold-rolled shapes in most cases). You can specify the wall thickness d by indicating the command THICKNESS=d and only have to describe the neutral fibre (open polygon) of the cross-section. The program then automatically calculates the required closed polygon. Create Database (Shape Sizes) In the database, a common DBASE-file, you only have to file the data records of the different variables and some information about the parts list. Field Field Name Field Type Content 0 KEY Text ProSteel-shape designation (access key) 1 NAME Text Shape name (display, parts list) 2 NOTE1 Text annotation field 1 3 NOTE2 Text annotation field 2 4 ITEM Text item number 5 MATERIAL Text Material index, not implemented

at the moment 6 WEIGHT Double weight per meter 7 FIELD1 Double value of the first variable ($1) 8... n FIELD2 ... n Double value of the next variable ($2...$n)


923

D.1.3 Weld Shapes

Weld shapes consist of several plates welded together to a shape cross-section. In most cases, they are considered as one shape at construction. In principle, they are some kind of combination shape consisting only of plates. As it is the case with the other special shapes, weld shapes are managed in catalogues as well. Thus, you may refer to the essential information there with regard to catalogues; shape names and parts list entries. Two different kinds of weld shapes are managed by ProSteel. Standard Weld Shapes Standard weld shapes can have any plates at any positions. You can create box shapes, U-shapes or others using these shapes. The shapes have a constant cross-section and can be adapted via the slope. I-form Weld Shapes I-form weld shapes consist of three plates that are organized like an I-shape. These plates can b e individually adjusted. However, the greatest advantage of this kind of weld shapes is that the web plate can be individually adjusted. Even very complex weld constructions can thus be depicted via a shape.


924

Creation of Weld Shapes If you want to layout a subordinate directory under the main tab and create a shape there, you can select between a standard shape and an I-shape. Standard Weld Shapes Here, you can specify and change the shape contour. In addition, you can add plates and determine their position either relative to the origin or relative to other plates. When you leave the dialog with the OK-button and enter the parts list data, the weld shape will be created.

Click this button to add a new plate to the current definition.

Click this button to remove the currently selected plate from the definition.

The previous plate is checked as currently selected plate.

The next plate is checked as currently selected plate.


925

Act This option displays which plate is checked as current plate at the moment. There is a separate display on the monitor.

From The number of plates is displayed.

Width The width of the current plate is indicated.

Height The thickness of the current plate is indicated.

Item The item number of the current plate is indicated.

Material The material of the current plate is indicated.

Treat Parts.. If this option is activated, the shape is treated like the contained individual parts at positioning, parts list and detailing. You have access to the subordinate properties of each single plate without having to explode the shape.

Check Flats When you dissolve the shape, it is verified whether flats can create the included sizes. Then, flats will be created instead of poly-plates.

Monitor Point Here, you can define whether you want to see and modify the insertion points of the current plate or whether you want to see and modify the insertion points of the reference plate. The current plate will be aligned correspondingly.

X-Pos The x position of the insertion. This can either be relative to the origin or to an insertion point of a reference plate.

Y-Pos The y position of the insertion. This can either be relative to the origin or to an insertion point of a reference plate.

Rotation The rotation of the plate around its insertion point.

Insertion Point Depending on the setting, you can see here the insertion point of the current plate related to the reference point or the selected reference point at the reference plate.

Relative to If this field is checked, the insertion point is relative to a reference plate.

Element The number of the reference plate.

Pos The number of the insertion point of the reference plate.


926

Create Weld Shapes I-Type Here, you can specify the dimensions, item number and the material of the three plates. You cannot configure as you like but you don’t have to place the shapes in their position.

Top Flange Specifications for the top flange

Bottom Flange Specifications for the bottom flange

Web Plate Specifications for the web plate

Treat Parts If this option is activated; the shape is treated like the contained individual parts at positioning, parts list and detailing. You have access to the subordinate properties of each single plate without having to explode the shape.

Create Flange If you dissolve such a shape and you have modified the web in a way that the flanges have to be bent, they normally are built like arc shapes. If this option is activated, straight flange segments will be created.

Check Flats When you dissolve the shape, it is verified whether flats can create the included sizes. Then, flats will be created instead of poly-plates.


927

D.1.4 Parametric Shapes

Apart from the special shapes defined as poly-line in the cross-section, parametrically defined shapes are available as well. The size of these shapes is defined by means of the shape’s base type and by some variable parameters. Parametric special shapes are created in the shape manager.

At the very moment, 34 shape types to be processed and created are available in all for selection.


928

A Z-Shape is described here as example:

Each number indicates a parameter the value of which is entered in the dialog. By means of preview, you can control at any time how your shape has to look like. Afterwards, the shape can be saved and the properties of the special shape can be indicated.

BlockCenter

929

D.2 BlockCenter

BlockCenter is an effective tool for creation and management of any blocks within ProSteel. If you are working e.g. with system constructions which together with individual adaptations form your final project, BlockCenter gives you fast access to these prepared constructions. As it is a matter of ProSteel-blocks, the behaviour of these construction groups after insertion is the same as if they have just been created out of individual components. Of course it is also possible to manage any 2D-blocks by means of the BlockCenter or to add these blocks to your shop drawings (e.g. special labelling fields for your customers, recurring details of construction, and so on). Within the BlockCenter, you will find a great number of useful functions for your working with blocks. In addition, there is also an efficient database included allowing a classification and later search for the required 3D- or 2D-blocks. Here, you see the two BlockCenter dialogs (navigation dialog on the left, selection dialog on the right) together with a ProSteel-drawing:

BlockCenter

930

D.2.1 Structure of the BlockCenter

Very similar to the DetailCenter, the BlockCenter, too, consists of dialogs which may either be docked on the left or on the right of AutoCAD or which may be positioned anywhere on the screen. When the function is loaded, two dialogs are displayed. The dialog on the left only serves for navigation, whereas the dialog on the right serves for selection of the blocks. Then, all functions are loaded via context menus of the right mouse button, except for the basic settings of the BlockCenter. These are reached via the tool button on the upper left of navigation dialog. If one of the two dialogs isn't needed for current work, it can be hidden temporarily. It can be activated again by means of the remaining dialog. BlockCenter function isn't finished unless both dialogs are closed or navigation dialog is closed by means of the "Close"-button (x) on the upper right of the dialog.

Navigation Dialog In a tree structure, all existing block directories or groups are listed in navigation dialog. You can either choose a display reflecting the directory structure of your hard disk or a user-defined display. Sorting of the user-defined display can be designed freely to a large extent and then saved as a template (see function ->'Template'). In addition, you may set different display filters. Navigation dialog is used when: - The current block directory (or block group) is modified - A directory is created or removed from hard disk - Blocks are created - The database structure is revised - The sorting of the display is changed. If a block group (e.g. system construction XYZ) has been selected, you also could hide this dialog to gain more space for construction on your screen.

BlockCenter

931

Selection Dialog In selection dialog, all blocks existing in the selected directory (or in the selected block group) are listed. They are displayed together with the drawing name and a preview. Of course it depends on the settings of sorting and filters in navigation dialog which block drawings are finally offered for selection. Selection dialog is used when: - a block is inserted into a drawing - an existing block is modified or deleted - the search data (classification) of the block are entered or modified The figures of preview are created by AutoCAD during saving of a drawing and show this drawing including current zoom setting at the moment of saving. Apart from scaling of size, you don't have any further influence on the display within the BlockCenter.

Database In contrast to other ProSteel-functions, where all required data are stored in the drawing, BlockCenter is working with an additional database. The advantage of this database is that the blocks, especially if there are a great number of blocks, available at once after the function has been loaded. Neither a prolonged search in the directories nor a query of drawing data is necessary any more. In addition, user has a greater influence which drawings are integrated into the BlockCenter and which ones are not integrated. The database format was developed for the BlockCenter and permits fast access to all data required for sorting and selection. The additional content of the database (user-defined database fields) can be designed as you like. You may decide yourself which data fields are used to classify your blocks for selection and search and how they have to be named. Different properties of the block drawing are already taken from the drawing when a block is created (or even at a later time) and entered in previously defined database fields. Some search criteria will be available at once. If these fields are not required, they can of course be removed from the database.

BlockCenter

932

D.2.2 Creation and Edition of Blocks

There must be blocks contained in the BlockCenter to be able to work with it. Blocks are individual drawings existing on the hard disk, which then may be inserted into other drawings. It is possible to insert existing drawings or to create new blocks by means of the BlockCenter.

Creation Select the option directory structure as display for the creation of a block. Now check the directory where the block has to be stored in navigation dialog and select the entry create block via context menu. Select all components of the model which have to be adopted in the block and pick the main insertion point of the block. Finally, you are asked for the alignment of the block to allow insertion with correct alignment afterwards: When you select ESC, the correct UCS will be used. Alternatively, it is possible to pick a point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane. Please note, however, that at later insertion the block will automatically always be aligned in a way that the coordinate system pre-defined here is corresponding with the current drawing UCS. It is however possible to define alternative insertion points and alignments. Now, a new drawing will be created and displayed containing the selected component parts. This drawing can be modified further as you like: you can e.g. add other ProSteel- and AutoCAD-elements or additional insertion points. Hint: As long as this drawing has not been saved, it cannot be adopted into the database. It is possible to cancel block creation. It is not before the block drawing has been stored once – which can also be done when you quit this function – that the block will be finally adopted into the database and be displayed as preview in selection dialog.

Selection Select an appropriate sorting in the settings and then check the desired block group in navigation dialog by clicking on it. Depending on the setting, this may either be a directory or any user-defined sorting criteria. Within navigation dialog, you may scroll up and down the tree structure, as you are accustomed to doing in Windows-Explorer.

BlockCenter

933

If you click on a new entry, selection dialog will be filled with small preview figures as well as with the file names of available blocks. Only those blocks are displayed, which have been adopted into the database and which meet the possibly activated filter condition. There may be other drawings included in the directory. Select the desired block by clicking the preview figure in selection dialog. Above the selection list, additional information on the selected block will be displayed which can also be defined freely.

Modification When you want to open an existing block for working or looking on it, select the entry Edit block in the context menu after block selection. The block drawing now is opened as new drawing that can be modified. If you want to keep the modification, the drawing has of course to be stored.

Delete Select the entry delete block in the context menu after block selection to remove a block from the database. Now, you can determine whether you only want to delete the entry in the database or also the complete drawing on your hard disk. If you don't delete the drawing, it is possible to adopt it again into the database at a later time. Any additionally entered data of this block are of course lost because they have been stored in the database and not in the drawing. Additional insertion points, are kept, because they are stored in the drawing as visible objects.

Create and Delete Directories Further directories e.g. new blocks may be created directly from the BlockCenter. Select the option directory structure as display structure and check the directory beneath which the new directory has to be created in navigation dialog. Now, select the entry create directory in the context menu and a small dialog box will be opened where you have to enter the name of the new directory. To remove a directory, select the directory to be deleted in navigation dialog and click on the entry delete directory in the context menu.

BlockCenter

934

D.2.3 Insert Blocks

At first, select the desired block in selection dialog and then, click on the entry insert block in the context menu. Now, you can see a preview of the block, „hanging on the cross-hairs“, and you have to click on the insertion point of the block. This insertion point is the main insertion point of the block determined during block creation. Alignment is effected in a way that the block coordinate system, which was also determined during block creation is corresponding with the current UCS of the target drawing. Press ESC-key instead, if you want to cancel the insertion.

Additional Insertion Points You can add further insertion points to a block that is used instead of the main insertion point. E.g. it is possible to insert a construction at all outer points. When the block is inserted into a drawing afterwards, you can jump from one insertion point to the other by mouse click and select the desired point. Additional insertion points can be determined directly during creation. It is, however, also possible to insert them later during edition of a block. As this is a matter of visible ProSteel auxiliary objects which will be deleted automatically after insertion, you can also copy, move or delete existing insertion points by means of the standard functions of AutoCAD. Each of these insertion points is displayed as small 3D-ball the size of which is user-defined. To add insertion points, open the block drawing for edition (resp. block creation is still activated) and select the entry add insertion points in the context menu. Now you can add insertion points by clicking on a point until you end the function by pressing ESC. The alignment at later insertion then corresponds to the main alignment of the block.

Insertion Points with Alignment In addition, you can store the later alignment for each insertion point at the point itself to increase the available alignment variants. Otherwise, only the block alignment determined during block creation would be available. The block can be rotated directly during insertion. If you want to add insertion points, which at the same time contain an individual alignment, click on the entry insertion points with alignment in the context menu. After clicking on the point, you have to pick another point on the later x-axis as well as a point on the x/y-plane. Here, too, you can add points until you quit the function by pressing ESC.

BlockCenter

935

Insertion via Additional Insertion Points When you defined additional insertion points for the block, you can select them one after the other. After insertion of the block by means of its main insertion point, the block is moved to the next insertion point by pressing the left mouse button. You may follow the result directly on the screen. After having reached the last insertion point, the block will again be moved to the main insertion point with the next mouse click and you can start right from the beginning.

BlockCenter

936

D.2.4 Display of Block Structure

The basic settings of the BlockCenter, and especially the kind of sorting, can be pre-defined in the pre-settings. An appropriate sorting avoids losing track if there is a greateer number of blocks. When you click on the button on the upper left of navigation dialog, the following dialog box will be opened:

Group Block Directory

Block path here, you see the basic directory of the blocks to be managed by the BlockCenter. These blocks are stored in subdirectories. In this basic directory, you will also find the database file so that you could work with different block directories (and databases). To modify the directory, click on the button on the right of the display. Then, you can determine the directory anew via file selection dialog. Please note that the blocks may only be in subdirectories of this basic directory.

Standard fields... Here, you determine the behaviour at a database update. The meaning of the options Do not replace, Always replace and Only replace blanks is described in detail in chapter 'Update database'.

BlockCenter

937

Group Options for Insertion

Group objects at insertion of blocks, the program ignores all block elements not belonging to a group. This option is, however, only valid for special insertion variants planned for future versions.

Insertion points here, you specify the ball diameter with which the additional insertion points will be displayed.

Pattern Rotation Angle

Here, you specify the angle of rotation of the block about the insertion point.

Group Display

Preview Here, you can set the height of preview windows in the display dialog.

Directory... In navigation dialog, the block groups are displayed depending on the directory structure on the hard disk. You always have to use this sorting for the creation of new blocks, because otherwise you won't be able to determine a target directory for the block file.

User... It is possible to create an individual sorting for the navigation dialog depending on the contents of the user-defined database fields. Sorting then will be made in an hierarchic structure in the order which is displayed in the list on the right.

ARROW RIGHT Click on this button to add a property field to the list. Then, a dialog box will be opened where the existing database fields are displayed. Select the desired field out of this list.

ARROW LEFT Click on this button to remove the checked field from the list.

Display All At user-defined sorting, the blocks, which cannot be clearly assigned, will be displayed as well. This is the case when the corresponding field doesn't exist in the database or when it is empty. Then, the block will be assigned to a standard field of the sorting level in question.

Incomplete At all sorting, only those blocks will be displayed the database fields of which have not been completely filled in. Thus, it is easy for you to find out whether all database fields which are used for a possible search exist with valid entries.

BlockCenter

938

Use Filter At sorting, the blocks are filtered depending on user-defined criteria. Only those blocks will be displayed which meet the filter condition (and of course the sorting condition). A specific selection is made possible.

Display Filter Here, you see the currently selected filter template. Click on the small button on the right of the information field to select a template. Please refer to chapter 'Display Filter' for a detailed description of how to create a filter template.

User-defined Sorting One important strength of the BlockCenter is the user-defined sorting according to any user-defined criteria. Fur this purpose, you can define your own database fields and fill them later with data of the corresponding block. In the settings, you may now specify a hierarchy according to which the blocks have to be displayed at a user-defined sorting. Here an example to make things clear:

Let us assume that – among others – you created database fields for the shape, for the whole pattern and for the shear protection to classify prepared root points and you indicate exactly these fields in this order as sorting. If you now switch over to user-defined sorting, the tree-structure in the navigation dialog will be as follows: the contents of the field 'shape' will be displayed on top level, the contents of the field 'hole pattern' will be displayed on the following level below, and so on. For each data input, e.g. in the field 'shape' (e.g. HEA140 and HEA160) an entry will be created on the same level in the tree-structure and blocks with identical contents will be sorted there (analogously to the directories and sub-directories on the hard disk). This helps you to find out similar blocks at a great number of blocks.

To avoid slightly differing entries for the same thing, all data existing for this field will be displayed in a list at data input. Assignments can be made, too. This helps you to avoid that once you enter e.g. HEA140 and once you enter HE140A.

BlockCenter

939

D.2.5 Database of Block Data

Working with the database is divided into four essential parts: definition of data fields, input of actual block data, maintenance of the database and use of the data for display and filter.

Definition of Data fields Click on the entry Edit Fields in the context menu of navigation dialog to add your own fields to the database or to Edit existing fields. The following dialog box will be displayed:

Group Field Definition

List Here, you see the field names of already defined data fields. If you want to edit or to delete one of the fields, click on it for selection.

Field Name Here, you enter the field name of the new database field. Field names always consist of capital letters (small letters will be automatically transformed) and already existing names are ignored. It is useful to enter reasonable field names as these are displayed in the selection dialogs for sorting and search. For each field a description may be added as auxiliary text for the other dialogs.

BlockCenter

940

Dialog Text Here, you specify the labelling of the input field for field data in the input dialog for block data.

Description Here, you may specify a describing auxiliary text for the database field, which will be displayed in the other dialogs at selection of this field. As you should use concise and easy field names, you can add more information to the field by this way.

Display: The data of the database field will be displayed in selection dialog after selection of a block. This helps limiting the display to some essential fields in the case that there is a great number of data fields.

Group Data

Text Field Data are evaluated as mere text. Sorting is made in alphabetical order so that the entry "11" would be sorted in front of the entry "2".

Integer Data are evaluated as integer. Here, the entry "B2" would be sorted in front of the entry "A11" because the numerical part has priority.

Floating Point Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units inch and foot will be displayed correctly.

Floating Point (fix) Data are evaluated as float. If the imperial unit system is used, the units will not be displayed in inch and foot (e.g. for angles).

Command Names of the Dialog

INSERT

Click on this button to add the defined database field to the database or to modify an existing one. Please note that it is not possible to modify a field name. If you select

an existing field and you modify the field name, the program assumes that a new field has to be created.

DELETE

Click on this button to remove the selected database field from the database. Please note, however, that all existing block data referring to this field will be deleted as well.

BlockCenter

941

Input of Block Data After having defined the database fields, you can enter the corresponding data for each created block. In order to do so, click on the entry Edit block data in the context menu of display dialog or double-click on a preview window in the display dialog. Then, a dialog box opens where you can enter the data. It can remain open even if another block is selected. In this dialog, you will find a list of existing database fields. The size of the dialog depends on the number of fields.

Enter the desired data in the input fields or select an entry from the list of existing data by clicking on the arrow on the right of the input field. When working with the lists, you avoid different entries for the same thing, which facilitates later searching.


MODIFY

Click on this button to take over your entries or to modify already existing data.

Pre-defined Data fields To facilitate the acquisition of standard data, certain pre-defined data fields (standard fields) will be created at the creation of blocks, the contents of which can be automatically taken from the drawing. These data fields are managed in the same way like any standard user-defined data fields and therefore can be modified or deleted, too. If one or more of these data fields are deleted, they won't be taken into consideration any more at database update or at the creation of blocks. To restore these fields, it is necessary to re-structure the database or to create the field manually together with the exact name.

BlockCenter

942

Automatic Creation of Database At first start of the program or at modification of block directory, it may be that there isn't yet any database existing. In this case, a blank database is always created to adopt blocks. The program offers you to search in the block directory including all sub-directories for drawings and to adopt them into the database. This allows you to manage even earlier created blocks via the BlockCenter. When you give a negative answer to this query, only those blocks are displayed which will be created later with the help of the BlockCenter – even if there are still other drawings in the directories. It is possible to create a complete new database at any time you like.

New Creation of Database At any time, it is possible to replace the existing database by a new one without having to delete the database file. Just click on the entry Create database new in the context menu of navigation dialog. Now, the program searches in all subordinate directories for drawings to be adopted into the database. Important hint: Please note, however, that all user-defined data fields and the corresponding existing contents will be lost! A new database will be created containing all drawings and blank standard fields existing in the directory.

BlockCenter

943

Update of Database Click on the entry Update database in the context menu of navigation dialog to update an existing database. In this case, the program searches for drawing files, which don’t exist any more in the block directory, and removes them from the database. At the same time, new drawing files and sub-directories will be adopted into the database. At update of the database, the entered data and modifications of data fields are kept. You may define via pre-settings what has to be done with the standard fields during update. When the option 'Don't replace standard fields' was selected, no entries in the standard fields will be modified, i.e. new drawings won't be examined either. When the option 'Always replace standard fields' was selected, all drawings will be searched for standard data and any possible modifications will be lost. When the option 'Only replace blank standard fields' was selected, newly added drawings will be examined, as their standard fields are still blank. All others won't be taken into consideration. When some standard fields were removed from the database, they won't be restored during update. By means of update, it is, however, possible to make sure that modifications in the block files will cause an update of the remaining standard fields. The program assumes that deleted standard fields won't be required any more. Please note that each drawing in question has to be opened for update in order to determine the drawing data. This process may require some time until it is finished.

BlockCenter

944

Display Filter Another strength of the BlockCenter is the display filter according to certain search criteria. Before the blocks are displayed in the selected sorting, the program first checks whether each single block meets the filter conditions on the basis of its database entries. For this purpose, logical links may be created between the existing data fields and their contents. There is no limit concerning the complexity of the query. Different filter combinations can be stored as templates and then defined as activated filter in the settings for the sorting.

You may e.g. specify that only blocks having holes will be displayed if they have 4 enforced holes. Then, the neighbouring figure will show you the result of filtering at a given sorting according to shape, hole pattern and if they are enforced. To be able to work reasonably with the filters, user should have a certain mathematical understanding of logically linked notions. It is very easy to create a filter condition never producing any positive result at all in combination with the existing data – a corresponding check doesn't take place.

Boolean operators Simple queries only consist of one comparing condition such as e.g. whole pattern = 4. It is, however, the logical link between several comparing conditions, which is really interesting. Therefore, you may specify a logical operator by means of which the next inserted comparing condition shall be linked with the existing condition. To facilitate input, previous pairs are automatically put into brackets, in case of a change of the operator. It is possible to create search queries such as (A AND B) OR (A AND C) in an easy way. A, B and C here are variables of simple comparing conditions of data field, operator and content. An existing term can be manually put into brackets, too, if the condition is not in pairs. The following condition serves as example: ((A AND B) OR C) AND D.

BlockCenter

945

Define Filter To define a filter term click on the entry Edit display filter in the context menu of navigation dialog. The following dialog box will be opened:

Group comparable term

List Here, all user-defined database fields are displayed which may be used for the search criteria. Each field may be used as often as you like. Select the desired field by clicking on it in the list. Then, the field name will be displayed on the right. In the information line, the auxiliary text for this field will be displayed containing more detailed information on the data field.

Display fields here, user presets an individual comparing condition consisting of field name, comparing operator and block data. Logical operators to form the complete filter condition can combine several comparing conditions.

> Left The current database field, which can be modified by clicking on it in the list.

BlockCenter

946

> Operator Here, the comparing operator is selected linking the database field and the block data (content of the field) to build a comparing condition.

BlockCenter

947

> Right Possible block data (contents of the field) of the selected data field in a dropdown-list. Impossible comparing conditions will be avoided.

After all three components of a comparing condition were preset; you can add this condition to the complete filter condition by clicking on the INSERT button. Depending on the existing conditions and selected logical links, appropriate brackets are set by the program.

Group Filter Condition

Display field the complete filter condition, if need be, as logical link consisting of several comparing conditions. If a comparing condition has already been inserted, the activated logical operator of the following comparing condition will be displayed as well.


OPERATOR AND

Click on this button to select the logical operator AND as logical link for the following comparing condition.

OPERATOR OR

Click on this button to select the logical operator OR as logical link for the following comparing condition.

BRACKET

Click on this button to force the program to put the existing filter conditions into brackets manually. Brackets are always necessary when the complete result of a (partial)

condition has to be linked with another, as the combination of (A AND B) OR C is different to A AND (B OR C).

INSERT

Click on this button to add the current comparing condition to the complete filter condition.

BlockCenter

948

DELETE

Click on this button to delete the comparing condition, which was added last.

DELETE ALL

Click on this button to delete the complete filter condition.

Use Filter Templates As you already know from nearly all other ProSteel functions, the filter conditions, too, may be stored as template. Then, the filter can be used in the settings of the display via the name of this template. Don't forget that this is only a hint. If the filter template is modified, the display template, in which this filter was used, will probably produce another result, too.

BlockCenter

949

Roof/Wall Panels

950

D.3 Roof/Wall Panels

This command allows you to divide any surface with roof-wall shapes and display them in colour. You choose orientation and grid spacing. The program then determines necessary cut-outs in the shapes. You can work with all shapes, including special shapes and plates. Layout is done on the active UCS plane. It is recommended to use a top view of the UCS plane.

Surface Layout To divide a wall surface by means of front shapes, outer bordering of the surface as well as possible inner cuts have to exist as poly-lines first. After having loaded the function, click the Outer Poly-Line of the Surface first and then the direction determining line for alignment. Now, pick the Origin of Division and the following dialog appears for further specifications:

Max. Length Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid length (i.e. the

lengths of the shapes to be installed).

Grid Width Here, you are prompted to indicate the grid width. If the grid width exceeds the shape width, the layout will show gaps - if the grid width is smaller, you will have overlaps. In the neighbouring input field, the shape width of the currently selected shape is displayed (see ‘Shapes’ tab).

Roof/Wall Panels

951

Depth Here, you enter the distance between layout and active UCS plane. By entering positive values, you move the surface along the positive Z-axis of UCS.

Offset Top Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the upper end. If you enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value, the shape is extended and overlaps with he next grid element.

Offset Bottom Here, you enter a projection of the shape over the grid length at the lower end. If you enter a positive value, the shape is shortened and a gap is shown. If you enter a negative value, the shape is extended and overlaps with the previous grid element.

Offset Side Here, you enter the dimension by which the shape insertion points to be moved horizontally from the center of the grid.

Dynamic The command automatically reacts to a modification of the polygon.

Cut If this field is checked, the shapes, which are longer or wider than the outer poly-line, are cut at this poly-line.

Offset Here you enter how grid lines are moved against each other in longitudinal direction. No offset means that they are not moved. Centered offset means that they are moved in a way that a new line begins in the middle of the previous line (“laid brick pattern”). Dimensions mean that the lines are offset against each other by a value you entered in the neighbouring input field.

Colour Normal Select a colour for all shapes not being cut by entering the AutoCAD colour code. The colour can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.

Colour Cut Select a colour for all shapes being cut by entering the AutoCAD colour code. The colour can also be selected by clicking the BUTTON which is situated at the right.

Original Colour Using this option resets the colours to their original values after the dialog function has been finished.

Roof/Wall Panels

952

Shape Selection Choose the component parts to be used for installation on the second page.

Shapes Unless having checked ‚Use Poly-Plates’ field, you select here

the shape to be used for installation. You can select the shape according to the shape categories in the lists.

Plates If the ’Use Poly-Plates’ field is checked, a rectangular poly-plate is used as installation element instead of a shape. You can determine the dimensions in the Plate Width and Plate Thickness input fields, the length corresponds to the ‘Grid Length’ corrected by the offset value. You can specify a name for the plate in the selection list. If the Grid field is checked, a plate grid (e.g. for a grating at the installation of stage coverings) is created for being displayed.

Roof/Wall Panels

953

Poly-Cuts You can enter additional cut outs into a surface at which the shapes have to be cut as well. In order to do this, the poly-lines of the cut outs are required which can, however, still be drawn when the function is activated.

Poly-Cuts Here, you can see the number of additional cut outs existing at

the moment.

By clicking this button, you can insert a cut out into the division. Click the poly-line of the cut out in order to do so. If the poly-line doesn’t yet exist, you can draw it directly before loading this option.

By clicking this button, you can delete the currently selected cut out and close the surface at this position. If you have several cut outs in the division, you can select the required cut out by pressing ‘<<’ and ’>>‘.

Roof/Wall Panels

954

Here the example of a gable wall automatically lined with wall facing elements. The dark surfaces show the elements that do not have to be cut out; the light surfaces have to be cut out. In addition, 2 openings have been inserted.

Roof/Wall Panels

955

Dispatch Bolts / Blocks

956

D.4 Dispatch Bolts / Blocks

Use this command to distribute as many AutoCAD blocks as desired evenly across a shape length and add their insertion points as markings to the shape (e.g. for NC-output). Of course, you can just add markings without inserting a block. In addition, the function allows for the parametric generation of thread bolts or similar solids of revolution at simultaneous distribution analogously to the distribution of blocks described above.


957

D.4.1 Insertion of Thread Bolts

Apart from manual input, you can save the definitions of thread bolts in a data base (*.dbf) as well. This database has to be indicated in your configuration file of ProSteel. The entries then are displayed there and are available for selection.

Group Distances

Spacing Here you enter the distance between the individual insertion points.

Front Offset Here you enter the distance from shape start to the first insertion point.

End Offset Here you enter the distance from last insertion point to the end of the shape.


958

Insertion Rules Since in most cases the length of a shape does not coincide with the settings, you can define the rules for distribution here. End Dimensions – The margin dimensions are exactly adhered to and the internal distance is averaged. Inner Values – The inner values are adhered to and the margin dimensions are averaged. Centre Inner Values - The inner values are adhered to and the rest is evenly distributed at the front and at the back. At Plate Drilling – This option is especially meant for distribution of anchor bolts or similar things at base plates. The parts are aligned at the existing drillings and fixed below a plate. Pick at Plate – You select the insertion points of the component parts within the plate. Position and height are determined from the plate.

Hole Dia. You enter the diameter of marking or nipple hole.

Slot Length You enter the depth of marking or nipple hole.

Group Options

Shape Center The markings are attached to the center of the selected shapes.

Create Marks.. The marking or nipple holes are attached.

Lower The component parts are attached below the plate.

No Detailing The component parts inserted here are not detailed in the DetailCenter.

Insert Blocks The selected weld bolts are attached.

Create Group The shapes and bolts form a group.

In Part List The component parts attached with this function are added to the parts list.

In Bolt List The component parts attached with this function are added to the bolt list.


959

Group Dimensions

Dia Bolt diameter

Length Bolt length

Bottom Dia Diameter of the bolt’s base

Bottom Length of the bolt’s base

Top Dia. Diameter of the bolt’s head

Top Length Length of the head

Bolt Dia. Diameter of bolt nipple

Bolt Length Length of bolt nipple

Group Others

Name The bolt name in the parts list

List The list of available entries in the selected bolt database

This button distributes the bolts on the selected shapes according to the preset rules.

This button permits individual placing of bolts on the selected shapes. Here, each insertion point is indicated individually.

Here you see two examples for the distribution of welded bolts on shapes:


960

Insertion of Blocks Alternatively, you can also make distribute existing self-created AutoCAD-blocks. Then you have to select the second page. The specifications concerning the parametric dimensions are omitted of course. The block is inserted exactly as you created it. Please note that the current UCS has to agree with the UCS of the block to grant a correct alignment of the block. The proceeding is identical as well. The only difference consists in the fact that no generated parts are inserted but the individually specified block. Therefore this is a very flexible command.

The options concerning the distribution are identical with the distribution of thread bolts. So you can refer to this chapter for more detailed information.

Hole Dia Sign You can specify a code for the drill holes to be created. This code serves for selection of special NC-programs being able to recognize this code.

Block path This is the path to the block to be inserted.


961

List The list of saved blocks from the database


962

D.4.2 Further Options and Data Base

As it is the case with many other ProSteel functions, here too it is possible to make some standard default settings directly under ‘Assignments’ for the component parts to be inserted. Data Base Select the database to be used.

Seize Parts The component parts are seized for the parts list.

Data Base Definition You can define a database with pre-defined thread bolts resp. paths to the blocks before you can optimally utilize the distribution command. Any thread bolts or blocks indicated there are then displayed in the selection list. This DBASE-file (e.g. bolts.dbf) has to be indicated in the configurations.


963

Meaning of the Data Base Fields TYPE indicates the entry type (1 = thread bolt, 2 = block)

NAME name of the thread bolt or block

BLOCKPATH complete path to the block (only for type 2)

HOLEDESCRI drill hole code (only for type 2)

HOLEDM diameter of marking hole

HOLELENGTH depth of marking hole

LENGTH length of thread hole (only for type 1)

DM diameter of thread hole (only for type1)

FOOTDM diameter of thread hole foot (only for type1)

FOOTHEIGHT height of thread hole foot (only for type1)

HEADDM diameter of thread hole head (only for type1)

HEADHEIGHT height of thread hole head (only for type1)

NIPPELDM diameter of thread hole nipple (only for type1)

NIPPELLENG length of thread hole nipple (only for type1)


964

Auxiliary Tools

965

D.5 Auxiliary Tools

D.5.1 Collision Check

An important task of modern CAD systems is to avoid errors during construction. First and foremost this is to avoid collisions. This functions serves for the detection and display of collisions within any kind of component parts. There are various reasons for collisions to occur. In addition this function helps you to check whether bolts can be mounted or not. The check is made on the base of the parts volume. If a collision is detected, the collision volume is displayed on screen and the component parts in question are highlighted. Then, you can zoom on all collisions one after the other and check the positions concerned. At collision check, xref-drawings are evaluated as well.

Min. Volume Minimal collision volume, from which on the collision is seized

as such. The display is made in drawing units (such as e. g. mmз). This avoids that your attention is distracted from important things by collisions, which are due to minimal tolerances.

Display Scaling Factor by which the zoom window is increased when you zoom on the found parts to get a survey on the whole situation.

Actual/Max. Display of the current collision solid and the total amount of solids found.

Auxiliary Tools

966

Use this button to start collision check. You are prompted to select all parts to be checked. All colliding components now are highlighted with a colour defined in the settings, and the collision solids are displayed. You can of course select a complete model. Please note that the required time increases with the square of the number of selected component parts. The reason is that each part has to be checked with each other part. Therefore, it is often more reasonable to check only a certain junction point at a time. All selected bolts are checked with regard to any possible collisions.

Use this button to remove the highlighting of the parts and to delete all found collision solids as long as they are situated on the collision layer.

Use this button to select the next found collision solid for examination.

Use this button to select the previous found collision solid for examination.

Auxiliary Tools

967

Options During collision check, you can specify which component parts have to be checked against each other. A filter is available for the selection of the parts to be checked.

Shapes can be checked for collisions with shapes, plates, bolts and

bodies. The collision volume is only displayed for the selected pairings.

Plates can be checked for collisions with plates, bolts and bodies. The collision volume is only displayed for the selected pairings.

Bolts can be checked for collisions with bolts and bodies. The mounting space of the bolts which can be specified in bolt style can be used as well. The collision volume is only displayed for the selected pairings.

Bodies Bodies can be checked against other bodies. The collision volume is only displayed for the selected pairings.

Highest Resolution The component parts are temporarily switched over to highest possible resolution for collision check.

Auxiliary Tools

968

Mounting Area At collision check with bolts, the mounting area of bolts is taken into consideration as well.

Auxiliary Tools

969

D.5.2 Center of Gravity

Use this function to calculate the center of gravity of any parts. Select the parts in question and the calculation is started. A ball in the model and numerically in the dialog line visually displays the result. There, you obtain information about the defined volume, the exact coordinates of the center of gravity (in world coordinates) as well as the total weight of the parts. Please note that, in contrast to previous versions than Release 18, different specific weights are taken into consideration.

Auxiliary Tools

970

D.5.3 Tube Unfold

Using this command you can unfold any kind of cutout shapes, tubes and bent plates and insert its development immediately into the active UCS plane. When you select this command, the following dialog box opens.

Resolution Max. Indicate the resolution of the unfolding. The higher the

indicated value, the more detailed is the scan of the component searching for any possible outlets or notches. The greatest acceptable value is 360.

Use ACIS Switches the component part from unfolding to ACIS. The result may be an increase of accuracy.

Inner Contour The inner contour of tube shapes is unfolded as well.

Auxiliary Tools

971

Group Colours Outer Contour

Outside Edges colour of the outer contour of the developments.

Tessellation L. colour of the tessellation lines of the outer contour.

Bend Line colour of possibly existing bent edges of the outer contour.

Create Tessel. If this field is checked, tessellation lines are displayed.

Group Colours Inner Contour

Outer Edge colour of the inner contour of the developments.

Tessellation L. colour of the tessellation lines of the inner contour.

Creating Development After you have exited the dialog, you have to click the shape that is to be unwound or developed. The desired operation is then supplied “sticking to the crosshairs”. Position it freely anywhere in the model and process it further if desired. If you have selected ‘Inner Contour’, both developments are sticking to the crosshairs in the form of two properly positioned blocks. Position them anywhere in the model and then process them individually.

Auxiliary Tools

972

D.5.4 Move Objects

Use this function to simulate moving of any parts along a line, poly-line or spline. This can be applied for visualizations or to check whether parts can be assembled. The objects are moved along a guideline in a set speed. In addition, you can choose whether you only want to move the parts or whether they have to be rotated as well.

Resolution Enter here into how many equal parts the guide line has to be

divided. The higher the value, the more regular and the more fluent the simulated movement will be.

Delay Wait in milliseconds after each single movement. This value controls the speed of the simulated movement.

Move and.. The objects are not only moved along the guide line, but also rotated around this line. This means, if you have a “sharp bend” in the line, the parts will be rotated along this bend.

After clicking the OK button, seize the guide line first. This may be a line, poly-line, spline or an arc. Then seize the parts and the simulation starts.

Auxiliary Tools

973

D.5.5 Create ACIS-DWG

If you process 3D-models using other 3D-programs, it often will be necessary to convert the existing ProSteel-component parts into mere ACIS-bodies. After having loaded the function, you have to select the component parts which you want to convert. Important: Please note that the converted component parts don’t keep their ProSteel-intelligence such as shape reference, logical links etc. The body, however, is inserted additionally and the original component part is only hidden. You can make it visible again using the command PS_REGEN.

Batch Processing To avoid having to process each drawing individually, batch processing is available if you have many drawings. All drawings of a directory are processed automatically and the converted drawings are saved in another directory.

Source Directory Enter the directory containing the drawings you want to have

converted automatically.

Target Directory Enter the directory where you want to save all converted drawings. The target directory mustn’t be identical with the source directory nor must it be beneath the source directory.

Purge Drawing Each drawing is purged before it is saved.

Auxiliary Tools

974

Recursive Drawings in sub directories of the selected directory are processed as well.

Groups Each component part group is converted as common ACIS-body. Otherwise, each component part of the group is converted individually.

Resolution The resolution of the component parts (without radii etc.) is kept individually per part. Otherwise, the ACIS-body is created with the maximum possible resolution.

Delete The original component parts are not only hidden after conversion, but completely deleted.

Keep Layer The converted ACIS-bodies are kept on the layer of the original component part. Otherwise, all bodies are created on the current layer. If this field is not activated, you can easily copy the result of conversion from the drawing.

Auxiliary Tools

975

D.5.6 Create AutoCAD Drawing

If you have to pass on 3D or 2D-drawings, it is sometimes necessary that they don’t contain any ProSteel objects any more. This command converts each object of the drawing into its original AutoCAD graphical elements so that the recipient doesn’t get any Proxy-message any during loading. Important: Please note that the information of the drawing is visually kept, but that the complete ProSteel-intelligence of the component parts such as shape reference, logical links etc. is irretrievably lost.

Batch Processing To avoid having to process each drawing individually, batch processing is available if you have many drawings. All drawings of a directory are processed automatically and the converted drawings are saved in another directory.

Source Directory Enter the directory containing the drawings you want to have

converted automatically.

Target Directory Enter the directory where you want to save all converted drawings. The target directory mustn’t be identical with the source directory nor must it be beneath the source directory.

Purge Drawing Each drawing is purged before it is saved.

Recursive Drawings in sub directories of the selected directory are processed as well.

Auxiliary Tools

976

D.5.7 Convert ADT shapes

This function is only available in a specific version of ProSteel for Autodesk Architectural Desktop (ADT) from Autodesk. This AutoCAD application is specifically designed for architects and contains a variety of steel shapes. With a call to this function you can convert the ADT shapes into ProSteel shapes for further use of the ProSteel manipulation functionality for steel construction. After a call to the function you should choose all the ADT shapes that should be converted. If ProSteel finds a corresponding shape in its database then the ADT shape is deleted and is replaced with the suitable ProSteel shape.

Auxiliary Tools

977

Add Effective Static Analysis Lines

978

D.6 Add Effective Static Analysis Lines

Analysis display allows you to control and to work on the effective static analysis lines of the shapes to get an optimum output for translation to static analysis programs. From the individual interfaces, you can force the output of analysis display. The effective lines defined by you will be output instead of the center lines of the shapes. If no modifications were made here, the effective lines correspond to center lines. This function offers you, the possibility to modify the effective lines independently of the insertion of a shape to balance e.g. eccentricities, if these have no importance for calculation or to close open nodes.

Effective Lines After loading the function, you first have to select the objects that are to be switched to analysis display. Having made this selection, you only see an individual line of each shape, representing the effective static analysis line. The different colours within the line help you to recognize whether the end is connected with another shape (representing a node) or whether it is open (e.g. a cantilever). If the end is open and not a cantilever, then you are dealing with eccentric shapes in most cases and you could create a closed system by means of this function. It is possible to modify the effective lines manually by using the offered options of this function or by modifying them via AutoCAD grips.


979

Check colours...: If this field is checked, the colours of the represented shape ends will be verified automatically, every time the function is loaded. See button ->'Update colours'

Check connect...: If this field is checked, the different parts will be verified automatically whether they are connected with each other or not, every time the function is loaded. Display is adapted accordingly.

Hide ... If these fields are checked, the selected objects will be hidden to provide a clearer view. You can hide work frames, structural elements (auxiliary lines of structural elements), polyplates, bolts and connecting parts such as web angles, etc.

Shorten offsets: If this field is checked, the “cantilevered” ends at a node will be shortened, so that there will be no offsets. You can specify the maximum possible offset in the corresponding input field Max. Offset. All values larger than the actual value e.g. a cantilever and will not be taken into account.

When this button is clicked, the program tries to connect the effective static analysis lines automatically to create a closed system. If the effective lines are situated in a common plane, they are extended to each other and a node is symbolically represented as a ball. At the same time, the ends adopt the same colour as the center part of the line to display a closed connection. Please note, that the penetrating lines are not divided at the nodes. You can force this division later during export.

When this button is clicked, the program verifies whether a connection to neighbouring parts or an open end exists. The represented colour will be modified accordingly. “Red” signifies that there is an open end and “green” means that this end is connected with a neighbouring part. The difference between this function and the function 'Automatic' is, that here the program only checks and the display is updated where as the function 'Automatic' tries to create a connection and when doing this can also modify the effective line.


980

If this button is clicked, the components in question are connected with each other by means of a manual link. For this purpose you have to select the components afterwards. The main part of the manual connection keeps its position; the connected parts are related to this main part so that their effective lines can e.g. be positioned diagonally towards it. A node will be created automatically. A manual link does not have any further meaning. It only serves for creation of intended connections. On one hand, these connections are used in this function for the definition of nodes. On the other hand, they allow dimensioning of system lines at detailing.

Query and Modify Static Effective Lines The data of effective static analysis lines can also be seen or modified in shape properties. This tab is only available after having been activated in the global settings. If this page is loaded, the display immediately switches over to analysis-display.


981

Start X,Y,Z the coordinates of the start point of the effective static analysis line in absolute coordinate values.

End X,Y,Z: the coordinates of the end point of the effective static analysis line in absolute coordinate values.

Manual input: If this field is checked, the values of the corresponding end have been modified manually (and mostly, they differ from the center line).

Connected with: If this field is checked, the corresponding end is connected with another shape by means of a node

No Discrimination If this field is checked, you can avoid a division of the shape in individual lines between the nodes of connecting shapes at export of static data. In export functions, you can, avoid this limitation so that you don't have to modify each single shape if this division is desired. See function ->'Export

Allows picking the start point of AEC.

Allows picking the end point of AEC.

Data Exchange

982

D.7 Data Exchange

D.7.1 General Information about Data Exchange

It is possible to send and receive data to and from other programs via the import and export interfaces of ProSteel. In most cases, these are 3D-constructions of other CAD-programs or the static analysis systems of programs for static analysis calculations. The exchange takes place via a special file format defined by independent standard committees like e.g. Deutscher Stahlbauverband DSTV (German Association of Steel Construction) or even by the program manufacturers themselves. The data to be exchanged are mostly saved as ASCII-text file; therefore they are independent of the used operating systems. In case of possible transfer problems they can be adapted with any text editor you like. Additionally to the "acknowledged" formats, ProSteel also has its own exchange format based on a clear text file. This format exactly describes the positioning and detailing of component parts, group structure and parts list or part information.

Data Exchange in Practice In practice, data are often exchanged between CAD and static programs. This exchange is limited to the exchange of systems. A static system is created for the rough analysis of costs (determination of the expected cross-sections). Then the system is transferred to the CAD-program to create overviews or visualizations for the offer. At the following construction, a more detailed model of the system is created and could be retransmitted to the static analysis program to carry out more detailed calculations. After construction, however, it occurs quite often that special NC-production data for DCC machines are transmitted which contain already all shape detailing processes. In addition, the parts list data are transferred to the corresponding PPS systems for storing and for the placing of orders.

Data Exchange

983

Data Exchange Problems ProSteel has a great number of interfaces to allow for a universal use. There should always be a common denominator to be found for the data exchange. The volume of exchangeable information always depends on the complexity of interface definition and the corresponding implementation degree of transmitter and receiver. It might be that ProSteel could interpret the complete 3D-model including all connections as file of a certain interface, the writing program, however, can only write the position of standard shapes. In this case, important data will of course be lost during transfer and would have to be re-modelled – if necessary. Another problem is that the designations for material and cross-sections of the concerned programs partly differ from each other. The data are imported correctly, but the reading program doesn’t recognize e.g. the shapes because in most cases the name is compared without error tolerance. To minimize this problem, ProSteel offers so-called exchange lists where a translation of the designations can be controlled exactly.

Data Exchange

984

D.7.2 Exchange Lists

Exchange lists can solve many problems occurring in the data exchange between ProSteel and other programs. Different designations are often used for the same shape or material – especially when the files in question are foreign formats, which are not subject to a common standard. While it isn’t a problem for the human mind to recognize that the designation HEA100 and HE-100A probably describe the same shape, this is a much bigger problem for the computer.

Principle of the Exchange List You can create exchange lists to allow for an adaptation to most different target systems; the required list can be selected for import/export. These links can be permanently saved via templates. Now, if a material or shape designation is read during import, the program is looking for the corresponding ProSteel-designation in the current exchange list. If the search was successful, this designation will be used in the further process. Of course, it is reasonable that several alternative designations are assigned to one ProSteel designation and that the list is able to learn. Each unknown designation can be temporarily or permanently saved in an exchange list which in the course of time will become more and more extensive. Vice versa during export process, the program is looking for the corresponding exchange designation of a ProSteel designation. This designation will be exported. Due to the capability to learn and to avoid errors, you should use one list for import and export. Therefore, if there are several alternative designations, you should explicitly specify one of them as export name.

The use of these lists also allows for an error tolerant handling of exchange files: Due to the three possibilities, the shape HE100-A will be recognized correctly and translated into the ProSteel-designation HE100A. During output, the correct preset shape designation (grey) will be used.

Data Exchange

985

Definition of an Exchange List One or more exchange lists can be created by means of a dialog or via a DBASE-file, which has to be converted afterwards. They are stored as binary file having the ending *.exm in the data directory of ProSteel. An exchange file processes shape and material names simultaneously. Therefore only one file is required and this is the reason why in the following only the term “Exchange Designation” will be used.

Group Exchange List

Internal Name Here, you will find a list of all designations used by ProSteel. You can assign as many alternative exchange designations to each of these internal names as you like. The current selection is displayed in the grey input field.

> List Field Here, you select the shape type. When the input field Material has been checked, this previous type selection is not available.

Data Exchange

986

> Selection List Here, you select the shape size or the material designation to which you want to assign the alternative names.

Replace as Enter a new designation and insert it into the list. The program doesn’t differentiate capitalization or the use of small initial letters. Since exchange designations can only be inserted, you have to insert the new entry first and then delete the old one, if you only want to modify an entry.

> Selection List Here, you will find the exchange designations of the ProSteel designation selected on the left. The first name in the list is the designation used during export of a ProSteel model.

INSERT By clicking this button, the new exchange designation specified in the input field Replace is assigned to the selected ProSteel designation.

DELETE By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is removed from the selected ProSteel designation.

DELIVERY By clicking this button, the selected exchange designation is selected for export and moved to the first position in the list.

Shapes Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for shape designations.

Material Here, you can make the above-mentioned assignments for material designations.

All all-internal names are displayed – no matter whether exchange designations have been assigned or not.

Ready Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange designations have already been assigned.

Open Only those internal names are displayed to which exchange designations have not been assigned.

Group Others

File the file path of the current exchange list.

Content A short description of the content of the new exchange list or of the list, which has been loaded at the very moment.

Add Names The exchange designations of the shape data base are entered when an exchange list is created or completed.

Data Exchange

987

Dialog-Commands

LOAD

By clicking this button, you can load an exchange list. It is also possible to import an exchange list in dBASE-format by selecting the file type in the file selection dialog, which opens then.

dBASE-import is not available when you select the dialog via the interface dialogs.

STORE

By clicking this button, you can store the current exchange list. It is possible to export an exchange list in dBASE-format by selecting the file type in the file selection dialog, which opens then.

dBASE-export is not available when you select the dialog via the interface dialog.

NEW

By clicking this button, a new exchange list is created based on the shape and material database of ProSteel. Thus, you obtain all available internal names and you can add the desired exchange designations to them.

If the field Add Exchange Designation at New/Update has been checked, the exchange designations of the shape database are entered, too.

UPDATE

By clicking this button, new entries based on the shape or material database of ProSteel are added to the current exchange list.

Data Exchange

988

Metric and Imperial When reading the data, the program determines the appropriate shape designation (metric or imperial) for the drawing. This means that you can import imperial shape names into a metric drawing if those have been specified as alternative designations. In this case, the internal metric name will be transferred to ProSteel. Since an explicit export designation has to be defined for the data export, you specify by means of the selected exchange list whether a metric or imperial designation has to be used. When both variants are required, you need two different exchange lists, too. Since import should be of universal use, both names are available in the list as possible exchange designation. You can copy one list after creation and use the copy to modify the order in the list for the shapes in question.

Exchange Designations of the Shape Data Base In the *.dbf-files of the shape data base, you will also find designations for data exchange in the fields TRANSMETRIC and TRANSZOLL. They come from earlier program versions and are named according to the DSTV-defaults for DIN-shapes. The new interfaces don’t use the data fields any more, in contrast to the old interfaces. Since here you have already “a set” of available exchange designations, these can be loaded as preset when a new list is created. Thus, you will immediately obtain a list, which is able to work as basis for your individual adaptations.

Data Exchange

989

Exchange List in dBASE-Format As an option to the processing possibilities of this function, the exchange lists can also be created and processed with the help of any other programs being able to read and write dBASE files. This method is recommended in case of more important modifications because programs like e.g. Microsoft Excel have been optimized with regard to working with lists. First, you can create a new list in this function to obtain the internal names. Then, you save these names as dBASE file which is processed with the help of the foreign program and re-import the file into ProSteel afterwards to save the list in the internal *.exm-format. Please note that this list has to be available as *.exm-file for use with ProSteel. Data Fields of dBASE-File The dBASE-file has to contain the following fields, which in general are chains of signs. The fields 0-5 are absolutely necessary, the fields 6,7 etc. can be used as an option. Since the dBASE-file only has a sequential structure of data records, whereas the exchange lists are organized in a tree structure, this tree structure has to be simulated by means of group-lines. Group lines only contain the fields 0-2, shape or material lines contain only the fields 0 and 3,4,... Field Field Name Content 0 TYPE line type, (F) group line (S) shape entry (M) material entry 1 FAMILY shape type when shape group or "Material" when material group 2 FILE ProSteel shape file (when material group: no entry necessary) 3 METRIC Internal ProSteel designation metric 4 IMPERIAL Internal ProSteel designation imperial (for material like field 3) 5 EXCHANGE exchange designation (1st list entry, is also export name) 6 IMPORT1 if need be, further exchange designation (2nd list entry) 7... n IMPORT2 ... n if need be, further exchange designations (next list entries) (shape file) The dBASE-file with the shape data of the data directory of ProSteel. Here specified without path with name and extension. (shape type) Type designation (e.g. DIN_HEA); the different sizes are the shape

entries up to the next group line.

Data Exchange

990

D.7.3 Interface Format Selection

Import and export of the new ProSteel interfaces like PXF or Product Interface Steel Construction is affected via a common dialog box for all interfaces, which will be described in this chapter. In addition, the commands of formats like DSTV-NC or DSTV-PPS, which have already existed for quite some time, are available. These are described in a separate chapter and cannot (yet) be loaded via the common dialog. When the import or export command is loaded, a file selection dialog opens first, where you can select the required interface format under File Type. If an interface dialog is planned for the interface, this dialog appears in form of individual pages in a dialog box that is identical for all formats. In addition, a page for ’General Settings’ and/or ‘Conversion’ can be displayed where you can enter data, which are independent of the corresponding interface. The following figure shows the dialog box. In this example, 2 property pages for ”Product Interface Steel Construction“ of the DSTV (’Control Field’ and ‘Options’) have been inserted; in addition there is the common page ’General Settings’ and/or ‘Conversion’.

Control Field Individual page of the selected interface.

Options Individual page of the selected interface.

General Settings Common page for all interfaces.

Conversion Common page for all interfaces.

Data Exchange

991

In the following chapters, you will find a description of the different interfaces and of their property pages. In most cases, the corresponding manufacturers or standard committees can obtain a description of the interface formats.

Dialog Commands

CONTINUE (OK)

By clicking this button, import or export will be continued, if the selected interface command is waiting for further specifications or if the process has been stopped for your information.

LIST

By clicking this button, you can select an existing exchange list for import or export.

PROCESS

By clicking this button, you can process an existing exchange list for import or export or select another list.

FILE

If you click this button, the read or created interface file will be displayed if it is an ASCII-text file.

ERROR REPORT

By clicking this button, you can view an error report, if it is created by the selected interface command. In this error report, you are e.g. informed whether errors have occurred in a read file or whether certain data cannot be evaluated by ProSteel.

Data Exchange

992

D.7.4 Data Import Command

This command allows for importing data of other programs in ProSteel via an exchange file. In most cases, these data are 3D-models of other CAD-programs or the static systems of programs for static calculations. At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the new arranged import dialog: - DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp) - PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf) - STAAD III (*.std) - STAAD.pro (*.std) - CIMSteel/2 (*.stp) - SDNF (*.sdf) - ProSteel Object-Exchange Data (*.psb) It is, however, possible that you will find already further formats in your ProSteel version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can have been extended, too. Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.

Import Data When this function is loaded, a file selection dialog opens where you can select the required interface under File Type. Then, you select the file to be imported. Depending on the interface, an interface dialog opens where you can make further specifications concerning the data to be imported. After file selection resp. after confirmation of import process in the dialog, the data are evaluated and the ProSteel model is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the volume of the data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current state in the AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the model has been finished, a note box will be displayed.

Working Areas A working area can be created automatically to allow you to work with the basic views of the imported model immediately. A rectangular working area will be created approximately describing the outer dimensions of the model (only the end points of the shape axes are considered at the calculation). This is an ideal starting point for the control of the imported model resp. for the creation of further views.

Data Exchange

993

Unknown Designations As the data in the exchange formats mostly are the used shapes and plates, it is recommended to provide all existing shape databases correctly. You should do this above all if you import constructions containing foreign shape series. In most cases, the interface formats only transfer one shape name as reference; the actual information on the geometry of the cross-section comes from the importing program. ProSteel supports so-called exchange lists to cope with the different designations. The imported name is translated into a valid ProSteel shape and the selection of substitute cross-sections is made possible. If the name does not exist, the shape is considered to be unknown. A dialog appears where you can assign a ProSteel shape to the unknown shape.

Unknown The imported shape name, which is not found.

ProSteel here, you enter the access code or you select the shape from a list by clicking SELECTION button. The shape type (e.g. HEA) is displayed first at selection. After having selected the shape type, you can select the required shape from the existing shape sizes by double-clicking the entry.

Permanent The specified assignment is permanently stored in a file. Otherwise, it is only valid for the current load of import command. Thus, it will also be available for later selections of this or other import commands.

The assignment of unknown designations is also available for material names. The process is the same as described under shape names.

Data Exchange

994

General Settings If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also contain a page for “General Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the import process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields are not activated.

Error Report An error report is created during import and model generation.

You can see here which data are defective or which cannot be evaluated by ProSteel. If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the ERROR REPORT button in the dialog box.

Working Area A working area of 6 basic views is created with the help of the outer dimensions of the imported model.

> Name Here, you can indicate the name of the working area. If it still exists, the new views obtain the index "2".

Connect Continuous shape parts (bars) are connected to a common shape. Only those shapes are connected which have the same size and position, which are situated on a common axis and which don’t exceed a preset distance of the end points.

Data Exchange

995

> Max. Distance Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for the end points to be connected to be recognized as continuous shape.

> Tolerance Value Here, you enter a tolerance for possible deviations of the gusset coordinates.

This is reasonable when you import data of static analysis programs as these are generating a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connection) although in reality it is a continuous shape.

Connecting Shapes The static program transfers this system as 4 bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-2 and 5-2. Four shapes are created first which are connected in the way that there will be one remaining shape of 1-3 and one of 4-5. Supposed the fact that bars of 1-2, 2-3, 4-4a and 5-5a were transferred, the bars 4-4a and 5-5a would only be connected to a shape if the distance of 4a to 5a was smaller than indicated in ‘Max. Distance’ input field.

Data Exchange

996

Conversion If the interface dialog is available in the selected import format, it can also contain a page for “Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the import process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields are not activated.

Query At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape

or material in a dialog so that you can select a replacing shape. If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot be created. However, it might be that certain parts are not required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not necessary.

Import-Table Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange list.

Data Exchange

997

D.7.5 Data Export Command

This command allows for exporting data of ProSteel into other programs via an exchange file. In most cases, this data is 3D-models as static analysis systems or the position and detailing of single shapes. At printing of this manual, the following interfaces have already been integrated in the newly arranged export dialog: - DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction (*.stp) - PXF Data Exchange Format (*.pxf) - STAAD III (*.std) - STAAD.pro (*.std) - CIMSteel/2 (*.stp) - SDNF (*.sdf) - KISS (*.kss) - ProSteel Standard Interface (*.ps3) - ProSteel Object-Exchange Data (*.psb) It is, possible that you will already find further formats in your ProSteel version. The performance range of the interfaces (implementation degree) can be extended, too. Please refer to the up-dated hints on your installation-CD.

Export Data When this function is loaded, you first have to select the parts to be exported in the model and a file selection dialog opens and you can select the required interface under the option File Type. Then, you select the file to be exported. Depending on the interface, an interface dialog opens where you can make further specifications concerning the format. After file selection resp. after confirmation of export process in the dialog, the model data are evaluated and the data record is created. Depending on the complexity of the interface and on the volume of the data, this process may take some time. You are, however, informed about the current state in the AutoCAD-command line or in the interface dialog. After the creation of the file has been finished, a note box will be displayed.

Data Exchange

998

General Settings If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also contain a page for “General Settings” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the export process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields are not activated.

Error Report An error report is created during exports and file generation.

You can see here which model data cannot be evaluated by ProSteel for the interface. If such an error report was created, you can display it by clicking the ERROR REPORT button in the dialog box.

Nodes Continuous shapes at connections or theoretical points of intersection with other shapes are divided.

> Protection A possibly existing protection against division at possible nodes is ignored at export of analysis display. Since the division is mostly desired, you should deactivate this option only in exceptional cases.

Data Exchange

999

> Max. Distance Here, you enter the maximum distance, which is allowed for the end point of a shape towards the continuous shape to be recognized as shape to be divided.

> Min. Length Here, you enter the minimum length of the bar, which has to be created by the division. If this length is smaller, a division will not be made and eccentricities will be determined instead.

This is reasonable when you export data to static analysis programs as these are expecting a system of bars from gusset to gusset (e.g. plate connections) although in reality it is a continuous shape. As ProSteel of course cannot be as specialized as a static program, you can switch off this option by this way, if the static program offers better functions for this purpose.

Analysis Instead of the CAD-position of the actual shape an alternative static effective line is exported. This line can be individually adapted for each shape to your requirements for the transfer of static systems by means of the ‘Analysis Display’ command. You can avoid e.g. open nodes or eccentricities (due to different insertion levels).

Dividing Shapes The ProSteel model has the shapes of 1-2, 3-4 and 5-6. The shape of 1-2 is divided first into two parts of 1-6a and 6a-2. Another division of the new created shape 1-6a and two other parts 1-4a and 4a-6a is made, if the resulting two bars have at least the same length as indicated in ‘Min. Bar Length’ input field.

Data Exchange

1000

Conversion If the interface dialog is available in the selected export format, it can also contain a page for “Conversion” apart from the specific pages. This page is identical for all interfaces and permits settings for the export process. Depending on the implementation degree of the interface, it is possible that certain fields are not activated.

Always Flat Steel It is always a flat steel shape, which is exported even if the

type has not been defined as flat steel in the database.

If Unknown A flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet) if the type has not been defined as flat steel in the data base.

Always Poly-Plate Each flat steel shape is exported as poly-plate (metal sheet).

Query At import process, you are prompted for each unknown shape or material in a dialog so that you can select a replacing shape. If this field has not been checked, the unknown shape cannot be created. However, it might be that certain parts are not required for very big models. Therefore, a replacement is not necessary.

Export-Table Here, you see the file name of the currently used exchange list.

Data Exchange

1001

D.7.6 Direct Data Exchange with RSTAB

There is a direct data interface to the analysis program for static analysis calculations RSTAB of Messrs. Ing.-Software Dlubal GmbH which works without explicit exchange file. The prerequisite is that ProSteel and RSTAB have been installed and started on the same machine. Apart from the transfer of the system and of the cross-sections, this exchange supports a better adaptation of the system to the requirements of static calculation with RSTAB as well as an intelligent modification mechanism. Only the corrected cross-sections or insertion points of existing bars/shapes are transferred so that already assigned data in the other software are kept. After having selected the command, you obtain a list of the interfaces supporting the direct exchange. Select the entry 'Dlubal RSTAB' and the dialog for data export with an RSTAB-extension will be displayed. Since the data exchange is based on an extension of the ’Product Interface Steel Construction’, please refer to the corresponding chapters there for further information. After the transfer was started, RSTAB will automatically report data import. For more detailed information, please refer to your RSTAB-documentation. If you want to work with the modification mechanism, don’t forget to save your model after data export because information is stored in the drawing database.

Import in ProSteel When you receive RSTAB data, ProSteel will automatically report the data import. If you want to work with the modification mechanism, the corresponding ProSteel model has of course to be open before. On an additional dialog page for RSTAB data import you can select which modifications have to be transferred to your ProSteel model.

Exchange without RSTAB-Installation When RSTAB has not been installed on your machine, you nevertheless can profit from the extensions. Please select the entry ’Dlubal RSTAB as export format’ as export interface (or import interface) when normally loading the function (PS_EXPORT or PS_IMPORT). You obtain a file of ’Product Interface Steel Construction’ where the RSTAB-extensions are added. However, this file can also be read with any other program supporting this format.

Data Exchange

1002

D.7.7 New Interfaces

In this chapter, you will find a description of the interface dialogs and implementation degrees of the different interfaces. Please note, however, that this is the state at printing of the manual and that your current ProSteel version can have been extended in the meantime. Please refer to the up-dated hints o n your installation-CD. As the implementation degree of import and export can differ from each other, these areas are treated separately at each interface description. These are data which can be interpreted or written by ProSteel at the very moment – the import exchange file might however contain further data which could be read at a later moment. Due to their data structure, most of the interfaces support this selective reading of data. Load data of static programs can e.g. be assigned to an element, the position in the space as well. If the load data cannot be evaluated, this doesn’t have any influence on the interpretation of position.

Data Exchange

1003

DSTV Product Interface Steel Construction The product interface steel construction of the German Association of Steel Construction (DSTV) is a relatively new data exchange format of all the programs participating in a production process. In a standardized format, it contains the data exchange between e.g. CAD and static programs, PPS-systems or DCC-machines and ideally is meant to replace the previous formats after good long testing. File Format: ASCII-text file with the extension *.stp The interface format was revised several times in the past. ProSteel is only supporting the latest valid version. Data Import ProSteel is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, i.e. the position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and connection elements. Plates, the contours which are transferred as polygons if displayed correctly. If the shape was, however, created by cuts or similar things, this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would be displayed. In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be read, i.e. the position of the parts in the space including eccentricities. After file selection, it is verified whether this is a valid file of this interface. Then the header area is read and displayed in the appearing interface dialog. The import can still be interrupted here, if you recognize that the wrong file was selected. Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the import. The data record is analysed and the function recognizes itself whether it is a matter of CAD or static data or whether both data types are together in a common file. Before the actual model generation will take place, you once again have the possibility to make individual import settings. You start model generation by once again clicking the OK button. You could e.g. select which data type has to be preferred at a common file or whether a working area has to be created, etc.

Data Exchange

1004

This page shows the entries of the exchange file header and doesn’t accept any further settings. You can only interrupt the import process if it isn’t the required file.

Data Exchange

1005

Group Others

Ignore Unknown interface commands of the current implementation degree are ignored and cannot be re-exported. This means that only those entries remain in the file, which can be processed by ProSteel.

This option is provided for a later implementation degree of the interface. In this degree, it will be possible to manage modifications and to transfer unknown data 1:1. If need be, the references will be up-dated.

Position Numbers The imported position numbers are adopted into the parts properties.

Control Entries The reference numbers and codes of the exchange file parts are adopted into the shape properties. This facilitates finding mistakes or incomplete data resp. controlling the origin of modifications.

Group Format-Selection

CAD At mixed data, the CAD elements (component parts) are preferred and any possible static analysis data are only evaluated as additional information.

Static Analysis At mixed data, the static elements (bars) are preferred and any possible CAD data are only evaluated as additional information. This is an option for a later implementation degree.

Data Export ProSteel is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, however without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of a number of polygons is exported correctly. If different detailing processes created it, only the basic polygon will be output. In addition, the static system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on the settings on the “General Settings” page, it is tried to determine intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities. After file selection, you can enter the header area specifications in the appearing interface dialog. Click on the OK button of the dialog box to continue the export. The model is analysed and the export data record is prepared according to your settings on the ‘Option’ page. The data then are written in the selected file by once again clicking the OK button.

Data Exchange

1006

Output File: You can see the selected output file as this name is entered in

the exchange file.

Input Field Here, you enter the variable header area data or the part code (authorization). The authorization is entered in the header area and builds – together with a time mark – the code for the origin resp. the modification of a component part.

Data Exchange

1007

Data Exchange

1008

CAD / Static the model data are exported as CAD system data (component parts) or as static system (bars).

Mixed A file of CAD and static data is written. The CAD data are preferred and the static data describe the static system of these CAD data. This is an option for a later implementation degree.

PS3-Interface (ProSteel Standard) The ProSteel standard interface is an exchange format of its own to put the ProSteel model data at the disposal of other programs. The format puts a rather exact copy of the construction including detailing processes at disposal. This is the reason why foreign programs can evaluate its data for their different requirements. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.ps3 The file structure follows the example of Windows *.ini files and is mainly self-explaining. The complete data records are always output serially for each single component part. References don’t have to be resolved during evaluation. In addition, references are created by indication to permit this kind of evaluation, too. You can obtain a detailed description of the data structure for the development of your own import routines in your programs at any time you like. Data Export ProSteel is able to export the model data including detailing processes, group structure; parts list data and drawing information. In addition, the used bolts are output, too. Concerning detailing processes, holes, cuts, polycuts and rectangular copes are transferred at the very moment. In case of detailing by means of Boolean operations between the component parts, this information will be lost because they are not evaluated.

Data Exchange

1009

Furthermore, only the names of special shapes are transferred at the moment, but not their cross-sections.

Group Others

Bolts All bolts existing in the model and being assigned to a group are output.

Processing the processing of component parts is output. Apart from that the output is only limited to the position of shapes and plates as well as to their parts list data to keep the file small e.g. for mere parts list programs.

Sum up Groups and single parts having the same position number are summed up to one entry and the corresponding number of pieces is indicated. In this case, the exported geometry and drawing data can only partly be used because they only refer to the first part acquired by chance. This option is, however, reasonable for the evaluation of parts list data because it can help to minimize the data record considerably.

Data Exchange

1010

Group Floating Point Output

Length/Size Here, you enter the accuracy for all values except for the coordinate points. It is always the complete number of digital places which is exported, if need be they are filled up with noughts.

Coordinates Here, you enter the accuracy for all values of CAD-coordinate points. It is always the complete number of digital places which is exported, if need be they are filled up with noughts.

Inches In drawings, the sizes are output in the imperial system e.g. 1´-2 3/8´´. Otherwise, the decimal value is output in inches (in our example 14.375).

PSB-Interface (ProSteel Object-Exchange Data) The PSB-interface serves for the exchange of models within ProSteel on the different 3D CAD systems supporting the operation of ProSteel. Data exchange is based on CAL technology (CAD Abstraction Layer) by keeping the complete 3D model intelligence (such as e.g. the logical links of connections). File Format: binary file with the extension *.psb Data Import All model data including detailing processes, structures and component part references (logical links) are entered which are necessary for the assembly of a complete ProSteel model. Afterwards, the model can be detailed with the same functionality as if it was created in the importing system. Data Export ProSteel can export the 3D-model data including any detailing processes, structures and component part references (logical links). This means that all data necessary for the assembly of a complete ProSteel model in another ProSteel target system will be sent. Afterwards, this can be detailed with the same functionality as if it had been created there.

Data Exchange

1011

STAAD III-Interface The STAAD III interface serves for the exchange of static systems between the programs of STAAD program family and ProSteel. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software being able to interpret this format. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.std The exchange format corresponds to the output file of the graphic editor of this program family. Data Import ProSteel is able to evaluate the static system data for standard shapes, i.e. the position of the parts in the space including eccentricities. Please note that it is not possible to interpret all shortened display forms like REPEAT etc. in the data format of the exchange file. The list shortenings of the form n TO m are, however, understood. Data Export ProSteel is able to export the static analysis system for standard shapes. Depending on the settings on the page ‘General Settings’, it is tried to determine even intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.

Data Exchange

1012

STAAD.PRO Interface The STAAD.PRO interface serves for the exchange of static systems between the programs ProSteel and STAAD.PRO. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software being able to interpret this format. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.std The exchange format corresponds to the output file of the graphic editor of this program family. Data Import ProSteel is able to evaluate the static system data for standard shapes (from the single shape table in STAADPRO), i.e. the position of the parts in the space including eccentricities. Please note that it is not possible to support plates/sheet metal plates and shapes with double cross-sections, back/back cross-sections and weld shapes in this version. Data Export ProSteel is able to export the static analysis system for standard shapes. Depending on the settings on the page ‘General Settings’ it is tried to determine even intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.

Data Exchange

1013

PXF-Interface The PXF interface serves for the exchange of constructions between the programs of REBIS program family and ProSteel. Data can also be exchanged with any kind of software being able to interpret this format. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.pxf Data Import ProSteel can evaluate the data group 4000 for standard shapes, i.e. the position of the parts in the space. In addition, general data groups and coordinates that are necessary for transfer are evaluated. Data Export ProSteel is able to export the data group 4000 for standard shapes. In addition, general data groups and coordinates that are necessary for transfer are exported.

Data Exchange

1014

SDNF-Interface The SDNF interface (Steel Detailing Neutral Format) serves for the exchange of CAD-data between programs being able to interpret this format. A static analysis system can of course also be transferred via the shape position. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.sdf Data Import ProSteel is able to evaluate the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates, i.e. the position of the parts in the space without detailing processes and connection elements. Plates, the contours of which are transferred as polygons are displayed correctly. If cuts or similar things created the shape, this information would be lost and only the mostly rectangular basic solid would be displayed. Data Export ProSteel is able to export the CAD-system data for standard shapes and plates without detailing processes and connection elements. A plate made out of a number of polygons is exported correctly. If detailing processes created it, only the basic polygon will be output. In addition, the static analysis system for standard shapes can be written. Depending on the settings on the “General Settings” page, it has tried to determine intermediate gussets for connections and eccentricities.

Data Exchange

1015

Input Fields Here, you enter the variable header area data of the SDNF-file.

Units Here, you can choose the units for the output of length and coordinate values. In combination with a suitable exchange list it is thus possible to create a file with imperial units from a metric drawing file or vice versa.

Degree of Implementation The implementation corresponds to standard SDNF-3.0; the following elements are supported in exchange: Packet 00 Head Data (Title Packet) Packet 10 Straight Standard Shapes (Linear Member Packet) Packet 20 Polygonal Plates (Plate Element Packet) Packet 22 Drill Holes (Hole Element Packet) Packet 60 Bent Shapes (Arc Member Packet)

Data Exchange

1016

KISS-Interface The KISS interface (Keep It Simple Steel) provides for the exchange of parts list data between programs, which are able to interpret this format. Therefore, only export is possible here. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.kss Data Export ProSteel is able to export the parts list data of single parts such as shapes and plates. Since the KISS format only indirectly supports the group structure, you can determine the belonging to a certain group by means of dispatch number, but this is lost in case of similar parts in different groups because each part is only exported once with its total amount.

Group Others

Customer Here, you enter the variable header area data of the KISS-file.

US-mark Number: The US-mark-number of the corresponding group the part is assigned to is exported as shipping number. Otherwise, the position number of the group the part is belonging to will be exported. When the component part doesn’t belong to a group, no shipping number will be exported. When it belongs to different groups, the selected number of the group which was found first will be exported.

Data Exchange

1017

Group Annotation

Note Here you specify which part data have to be exported as note into the file. No – A note is not exported. Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties is exported. Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties is exported.

Group Surface

Surface Here you specify which part data have to be exported as surface into the file. No – A surface is not exported. Note 1 – The content of the note field 1 of the parts properties is exported. Note 2 - The content of the note field 2 of the parts properties is exported.

Group Format Default

Format Default Here you specify the output format of the part designation depending on the indicated part type as a combination of format variable and constant terms. The output can be set separately for flat steel, plates and standard shapes.

Data Exchange

1018

Switches If the switch is checked, the program uses the format default specified by you. Otherwise, the standard export designation of ProSteel is used instead.

Input Field 1 Here you specify the format description for the name of the part.

Input Field 2 Here you specify the format description for the length of the part.

BUTTON (X) The format default is reset to a given standard value.

Description of Format Variables All format variables are in round brackets and inside of these brackets, they start with a $-sign which identifies them as variable. Then the format specifications for the desired dimension, unit system, display and accuracy follow in exactly this order. Dimension L length of the part W width of the part T height or thickness of the part Units c output according to the unit system of the drawing i output always in inches m output always in millimetres Display d floating point number f fraction (only with inches) Accuracy 0..8 number of digits after the decimal point or parts of fraction (1/2n) Thus, the format variable ($Lif3) means that the length of the part is exported in inches with fraction display and an accuracy of 1/8 inch, e.g. 10-3/8. If you require e.g. the specification of a plate with the thickness in inches as fraction (with an exact accuracy of 1/16 inch) as well as with metric dimensions for width and length having each one digit after the decimal point in the form PL3/4x200.0 or for the length 300.0, you have to set the default PL($Tif4)x($Wmd1) in the first input field and the default ($Lmd1) in the second input field.

Data Exchange

1019

CIMSteel/2-Interface The CIMSteel/2 interface is an internationally used exchange format of structural analysis and production data which is supported by many other programs as an industrial standard. File Format: ASCII text file with the extension *.stp Data Import ProSteel can evaluate the CAD system data of standard shapes and plates, i.e. the position of the component parts in the space including detailing processes such as drill holes or cuts. In addition, the structural analysis system for standard shapes can be read, i.e. the position of the component parts in the space including the eccentricities. ProSteel can automatically differentiate between the different types of CIMSteel/2. Data Export ProSteel can export the CAD system data of standard shapes and plates, including detailing processes such as drill holes or cuts. In addition, the structural analysis system for standard shapes can be written. In the export dialog, you can previously select whether the complete CAD data have to be exported or only the structural analysis system.

Data Exchange

1020

Degree of Implementation The implementation corresponds to CIM Steel Integration Standards Release 2. The file format is according to standard ISO 10303-21:94 (with the entity definition according to LPM6). ProSteel can export 3 different types of CIMSteel/2 data models with the entity definition on certain levels. Static Data (Analysis Model) Gusset points of standard shapes including eccentricities, cross-sections of shapes and material. CAD-Data (Design Model) Position and length of standard shapes, outer geometry of sheet metal plates, cross-sections of shapes and material Manufacturing Data (Manufacturing Model) Position and length of standard shapes, outer geometry of sheet metal plates, cross-sections of shapes, material, volume properties (e.g. drill holes, oblong holes, intersections)

Data Exchange

1021

D.7.8 Previous Interfaces

In the following chapter, you will find the description of the interfaces, which have already been integrated, in ProSteel for quite some time. They cannot or not yet be controlled via the common import and export dialog. You can reach these interfaces by their own command names and each single interface has its own user control, which often differs from the others. This does not mean that the used file format corresponds to an outmoded state. The content of the data is always on the latest passed version of the standard committees. All these formats have proved their worth in practice and are intensively used there.

Data Exchange

1022

DSTV PPS Interface Using this interface, data can be transferred from the parts lists under ProSteel to a PPS (Productions, Planning and Control) program. The data is transferred as an ASCII-file. PPS-data generation is made according to the rules of the DSTV interface description CAD parts lists issued in November 1997 (3rd. edition). After having created your 3D-model and carried out positioning (basic requirement), the PPS data can be generated. Use ProSteel menu item OTHER / GENERATE PPS-DATA.

Title Block Data Here, the title block data of the data records 1 through 5 of the

PPS file are defined.

Work No. Enter the work no. (max. 2 digits). It will appear in data record No. 1 of the PPS file.

Order No. Enter the order no. (max. 8 digits). It will appear in data record no. 2 of the PPS file.

Drawing No. Enter the drawing no. (max. 3 digits). It will appear in data record no. 4 of the PPS file.

Data Exchange

1023

Index Determine the revision index (1 character) of the drawing. It will also appear in data record no. 4 of the PPS and is added to the drawing number. A revision index defined in the title block (Rev. Index) will make this information superfluous.

Prepared by Specify the person in charge by a name (max. 12 characters). The name will appear in data record no. 5 of the PPS file. Definition of a name in the title block will make this information superfluous.

Output Weight Output of internally calculated weights. Otherwise, no output will take place, and the values will be given by the PPS.

Output Area Output of internally calculated surfaces. Otherwise, no output will take place, and the values will be given by the PPS.

Accord. to DSTV The order of the panels is according to the DSTV standards. Apart from this, you can determine yourself the order by entering the values 1-27 in the input fields under Panel Order.

Material=Name+ the name of the component part is set in front of the material name.

Header The header is output

Bolt Quality At the output of bolts, the bolt quality is output.

Separator The delimiters of data records are determined.

Point at Dec.Val. If this field has been checked, a point is used for decimal values instead of the comma.

Insert NC-Dat.. If this field has been checked, NC production data are output as well.

Without Group If this field has been checked, no groups (main parts and accessory parts) are output, but all component parts are output as single parts.

Title Block Here you find the optional fields of the drawing’s title block. They will all appear in data record no. 9.

Revision Index Define the revision index (1 character) of the drawing. When this panel is used, the Title Block Data / Index panel will be superfluous.

Data Exchange

1024

Group Identifier of groups consisting of 3 characters

Name Group name consisting of 30 characters

Surface Surface finish

Addition % Addition to weight in percent

Prepared by Name of the person in charge of TB

TB-Date Input of TB-date

Approval Date on which the drawing has been presented for approval.

Approved Date on which the drawing has been returned after approval.

Test Eng. Date on which the drawing has been transferred to the test engineer.

Release Product. Date of release for production

Field Order All fields available for output

Order List of fields to be used

Length Tolerance Tolerance value which is used to combine the output of component parts with similar length to one entry.

Path Output path of the file. Specify the path and the name of the PPS data output file via the left button. PPS-file name and path can be freely defined by the user. If possible, it should contain the order number and a drawing number.

Output of PPS-file is started.

The material designations correspond to the standard names for data transfer of steel construction issued in August 1993 (2nd. edition).

Data Exchange

1025

Hints for Transfer to Knierim Since the Knierim system cannot process different groups of components having the same main part as pos. no. 12.1 or12A, these groups require special handling. In such cases, use the option ‚25=Max+1’ at positioning. Thus you obtain different position numbers for such cases. The Knierim system will accept these numbers without any problem since they are handled as Z-parts. If you want all component groups to be handled as Z-parts, turn off the option ‘Transfer Mainpart Group’ and enter a start value for group positioning.

Data Exchange

1026

Example for the Output of a PPS-File ************************************************************ ** PPS-DATA FILE created by ProSteel PPS-MODUL V 1.00** ** ** Time 13:49 ** Date 25. 7.1996 ** ************************************************************

0&@ 1&11 2&2222222 4&33&3 5&gggg 9&&&&&&&&&&& S&M 16 x 70 DIN 6914&70&40&5000&6&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1 H&FL 120x20&315&120&11&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&6&&1 H&BRFL 160x15&239&160&14&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 18.876&&&&&4&&1 H&BLECH 8x791x864&864&790&8&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 26.187& 0.416&&&&&&1 H&IPE 240&3481&120&4&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1 H&BRFL 240x15&309&240&12&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 28.314&&&&&2&&1 H&BLECH 8x488x499&499&488&10&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 7.661& 0.122&&&&&&1 H&BRFL 160x10&698&160&9&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 12.584&&&&&&&1 H&BRFL 200x10&1030&200&6&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1 H&BLECH 10x84x95&95&84&18&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1 S&M 16 x 60 DIN 6914&60&30&5001&12&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&1 H&BLECH 10x95x168&168&94&15&2&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.423& 0.005&&&&&&1 H&BLECH 10x65x114&114&65&17&4&&&&&&&&&&&& 0.247& 0.003&&&&&&1 H&BRFL 200x10&985&200&7&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&&&1 H&BRFL 200x10&280&200&13&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 15.730&&&&&4&&1 H&HE 200 A&3850&200&2&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 42.300&&&&&9&&1 H&IPE 240&4317&120&1&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 30.700&&&&&&&1 H&HE 140 A&580&140&5&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 24.700&&&&&1&&1 H&FL 140x20&152&140&16&1&&&&&&&&&&&& 22.022&&&&&4&&1 S&M 16 x 45 DIN 7990&45&20&5002&4&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&&

Data Exchange

1027

DSTV Structural Output Using this interface, information from a structural analysis program (e.g. Dlubal) can be directly transferred into your model, provided that the structural analysis program is in compliance with the DSTV interface convention Structural Analysis / CAD issued in February 1992.

This interface can read and process data as described herein. Please note that the format mentioned previously does not give port definitions. Only the correct shapes can be entered in the defined position. Herein, the bi-directional information flow of the static → CAD → static is described. At the very moment, only the flow static CAD has been implemented. Import File Give full description of the path of the data record to be read in

or select a file by clicking the ’File’ button on the right. Data records of any static data end with *.sc2.

Export File This option has not yet been implemented.

System Lines All system lines being defined by the data are created. They are filed in the layer PS_RAHMEN.

Data Exchange

1028

Insert Shapes All defined shapes are inserted. First, no optimizing is made. Collinear shapes of identical type and alignment are not combined. Such shapes are due to the fact that structural analysis is made from one junction point to the next, whereas a shape can stretch over several junction points.

Connect Elements This option activates optimizing. Shapes of the same type and of same position are combined in a way that a shape has maximum length.

Collinear Tolerance This value in mm indicates up to which distance segments can be considered as collinear and thus suitable for connection.

Angle Tolerance This value in degrees indicates up to which angle distance segments can be considered as collinear and thus suitable for connection.

Shape Table Since the shape designations used in the different structural analyses are not always identical to those used by ProSteel, you will be asked when entering a file with an unknown designation. After selection of shape table, the following dialog window opens. Here, you can manage and delete the entered data, or even enter new data.

Data Exchange

1029

DSTV NC Data Output This interface gives you the opportunity to generate your NC data directly from within your ProSteel model. For this purpose, the program creates a manufacturer-independent NC file in ASCII format, which you may use for further processing with the postprocessor of your NC- machines. The generated NC data are production-means-neutral. The NC data generation is carried out according to the standards “Standard Description of Steel Construction Parts for the NC-Control” of the DSTV association issued in July 1998, 7th revised edition. General This is a standard interface of geometries for steel construction parts concerning the NC production operations sawing, drilling, burning, punching and signature with the goal to be independent from NC-machine manufacturers, which means that NC-machines are exchangeable as long as the same data processing organization exists. The interface uses standardized controls to regulate the link between CAD and graphics system to the NC controls via the CAM level. The part’s geometry is made available to the interface regardless of the type of production operation and then forwarded to the NC-machine via the NC- machine-specific postprocessor.

Data Exchange

1030

NC-Data Output After you have created your 3D model and performed a positioning (prerequisite), you may generate your NC data. This is done with the ProSteel menu option OTHERS / NC DATA GENERATION or by using the PS_NC_DATA command. The following dialog box appears after the command has been selected:

Format Choose the output format. You can either create a format

according to DSTV or a DXF-output for plates.

Order No. Here you enter the max.12 digits of the order number, which will later be the first entry in the parts description header in the NC file.

Drawing No. Here you enter the max.12 digits of the drawing number, which will later be the second entry in the parts description header in the NC file.

Data Exchange

1031

Overwrite any existing file with the same name will be overwritten without asking for confirmation first.

Straight End If this option is activated, every shape, if it is a straight one with an uncut end, will be turned so that this end is viewed as the shape start.

Sign This enables you to indicate a signature block.

3D Cuts If this option is activated, 3D cut information is created. This information consists of a SC-record with base on the cutting plane and the cutting plane perpendicular.

3D Holes If this option is activated, three-dimensional holes are indicated with one originating point and the perpendicular of the hole.

Metric Output If this field is checked, the NC-data are principally output in the metric unit system. Otherwise, the unit system of the current drawing will be used.

Upper Edge Mod.The output is arranged in a way that the parts are situated as in the model, i.e. the upper edge is at the top, no matter of the parts ECS position.

Insert ProSteel The ProSteel header is inserted into the file. There you will find information about date, etc.

Max. Hole Offset Here, you can indicate a maximum distance of the hole center to the outer edges of the part (reference area) to the inside, up to which a hole is still assigned to this view. This may be important for special shapes.

Shapes as Acis Shapes are converted into an ACIS-model before output.

Plates as Acis Plates are converted into an ACIS-model before output.

Powder Lines The powder lines of the tight fitting add-on parts are created for main parts.

INSERT

Click on this button to start the NC-output. You are prompted to select the parts for which the NC-data have to be generated. After all parts have been selected, the parts structure is analysed and the corresponding data records of the NC-file are generated.

Data Exchange

1032

Sign

Position No. The position number is entered into the signature text.

Send No. The dispatch number is entered into the signature text.

Job No. The order number is entered into the signature text.

Drawing No. The drawing number is entered into the signature text.

Label The shape name is entered into the signature text.

Note The comment row 1 is entered into the signature text.

After Input The text of the input field is entered into the signature text.

Position Select the position of the signature text.

Text Size Select the text size of the signature text in mm.

Input Field Enter here any additional input text.

Data Exchange

1033

DXF Options

You can specify the layer names and the colours for the DXF-output of plates. Contour Layer Name of the outer contour layer

Contour Colour Colour number of the layer

Inner Contour Layer Name of the inner contour layer

Inner Contour Colour Colour number of the layer

Hole Layer Name of the hole layer

Hole Colour Colour number of the hole layer.

Text Layer Name of the text layer

Text Colour Colour number of the layer

Line1/2 Any additional text which is written into the output file (Bottom corner on the left of output); wildcards may be used. The list of wildcards is as follows:

Data Exchange

1034

%DAY% file creation date %MONTH% file creation date %YEAR% file creation date %HOUR% file creation time %MINUTE% file creation time %DWG_PROJECT_NAME% Project name %DWG_ORDER_NAME% Order name %DWG_PROJECT_NUMBER% Project number %DWG_ORDER_NUMBER% Order number %DWG_DRAWING_NAME% Drawing name %DWG_DRAWING_NUMBER% Drawing number %DWG_DRAWING_INDEX% Drawing index %DWG_CREATED_NAME% Created by %DWG_CREATED_DATE% Created on %DWG_CHECKED_NAME% Checked by %DWG_CHECKED_DATE% Checked on %DWG_CLEARED_NAME% Cleared by %DWG_ CLEARED _DATE% Cleared on %DWG_LVPOS1% LV Pos1 %DWG_LVPOS2% LV Pos2 %DWG_LVPOS3% LV Pos3 %DWG_LVPOS4% LV Pos4 %DWG_COMMENT1% Comment1 %DWG_COMMENT2% Comment2 %DWG_COMMENT3% Comment3 %DWG_COMMENT4% Comment4 %DWG_CUSTOMER% Customer %DWG_DRAWING_PAGE% Drawing page

If the part belongs to a group

%GROUPNAME% Group name %GROUPNOTE1% Comment 1 %GROUPNOTE2% Comment 2 %GROUPPOSNUM% Position number %GROUPSENDNUM% Shipping number %GROUPARTICLE% Article number %GROUPCOUNT% Number of groups %GROUPTOTALCOUNT% Overall number %GROUPFAMILYCLASS% Family class %GROUPWEIGHT% Group weight %GROUPLENGTH% complete group length %GROUPWIDTH% complete group width %GROUPHEIGHT% complete group height

Data Exchange

1035

For all other objects (if available)

%NAME% Name %TRANSPORTNAME Transport name %INTERNALNAME% Internal Name %KEY% Shape key %NOTE1% Comment1 %NOTE2% Comment2 %KATALOG% Catalogue %POSNUM% Position number %SENDNUM% Shipping number %ORIGINALNUM% Original Position number %ARTICEL% Article number %HANDLE% AutoCAD Handle %STYLENAME% Name of detailing style %MATERIAL% Material number %COUNT% Quantity %TOTALCOUNT% Total quantity %PARTART% Part Type %DISPLAYCLASS% Display class as number %AREACLASS% Area class as number %FAMILYCLASS% Family class as number %PPSZPART% Marker for PPS output %AREACLASSNAME% Area class %DISPLAYCLASSNAME% Display class %FAMILYCLASSNAME% Family class %SHAPECLASS% Shape class %COLORINDEX% Object colour %FREEDESCRIPTION% Additional description %LENGTH% Length %WIDE% Width %HEIGTH% Height %SLOPEDHEIGTH% Sloped height %WEIGHT% Weight %CUTAREA% Cut area %PAINTAREA% Paint area %LENADD% Additional length %INSERTX% Insert offset X %INSERTY% Insert offset Y %SCALE% Scaling factor %TENSION% Tension (bolt) %DM% Diameter (bolt)

Data Exchange

1036

%KLEMMLEN% Clamp length (bolt) %MOUNTINGBOLT% Bolt type %ORIGIN% Point of insertion %XAXIS% X-axis %YAXIS% Y-axis %ZAXIS% Z-axis %GROUPREL% Group relevation %MODIFYFLAG% Modify flag

Text Height Height of the output text of line1 and line2

Slotted Hole as Two Holes A slotted hole is exported with two holes instead of with one.

Decimal Point Defines the number of exported digits after the decimal point of the DXF output. This influences the accuracy of the exported DXF files.

DXF-Output as 2D The exported geometry is exported as plane contour. All z-coordinates of the geometry are reset to 0 at output. The option Use Arcs and Lines instead of Polyline serves for division of polylines into arcs and lines at output.

Data Exchange

1037

Output Path

Folder Path Where your output files have to be filed.

Folder Name For output, a directory of this name is created under a path and the individual files are stored there.

File Appendix Define how the annex to your files has to look like(.nc, .output, ...)..

Use Drawing The drawing name is used as directory name.

Put P first A ‘P’ is put in front of the file name which is formed on the base of the position number.

Data Exchange

1038

Permits to look at created NC-files and to modify them

All files in the indicated directory are deleted when you click on this button.

This function creates a block in the drawing from a NC-file. Only outer contour and drill holes are created. Without outer contour, no drill holes will be created.

Example for the Output of a NC-File ST 123 125 3 3 RST_37-2 1 HE200B I 2980.00 200.00 200.00 15.00 9.00 18.00 61.30 1.15 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 BO o 492.48o 140.00 22.00 0.00 o 492.48o 60.00 22.00 0.00 EN

Appendix

1039

E Appendix

Appendix

1040

Structural Element Straight stair

1041

E.1 Structural Element Straight stair

This function generates a complete staircase construction with several stair heads including handrail and corresponding working frames. This requires that you just click the starting point and a point in the direction of the stairs (treading direction). The number of required individual steps will be automatically calculated based on your specifications. This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the staircase can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips. For a staircase with several stair heads you can add the floors one after the other in the open dialog. The complete construction including the handrail can be saved afterwards as template. For later staircase tower constructions, it is possible to create an assembly of standards which can be adapted to the local conditions if need be. Here you see a staircase with intermediate stair head and bent running as created from a template:


1042


1043

Dimensions

Width The width of the staircase across outer steel edge

Length Entire length of the stair construction

Height The height of the staircase from starting point to upper edge stair head including gridiron.

Riser The desired rise of the staircase steps

Upper Insertion Point If this field is checked, the insertion point is on the upper side of the staircase instead of on the lower side (and it is running to the bottom)

Riser Count The resulting number of steps

Angle The resulting gradient of the staircase

Treading real The resulting exact treading depth of the steps; however, you can specify a fixed value before and the construction will be calculated again based on this value.

Actual Rise The resulting exact rise of the steps; however, you can specify a fixed value before and the construction will be calculated again based on this value.

Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the changes of the settings immediately on screen.


1044

Landings

Lower Landing The length of the lower stair head. to create the stair head,

you have to check the input field in front of it. Otherwise, the staircase cheeks are cut at the basic plane and the stair head is omitted.

Upper Landing The length of the upper stair head

Create No Upper Platform No landing is created at the upper end of the staircase. The staircase shapes are cut off perpendicularly.

US-Definition The definition of the landing lengths is made according to American Standard.

Stair Foot Length Enter the dimensions of the staircase foot. If you enter the value 0, the staircase cheek directly hits the basic plane.


1045

Vertical Section Enter a vertical cut from the front edge of the staircase cheek. This field is only available if no length was specified for the staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase cheek directly hits the basic plane.

Ground Distance Here, you can insert a gap between the staircase foot and the basic plane, e.g. to have enough space for a completing construction or for foundations. This field is only available if no length was specified for the staircase foot, i.e. if the staircase cheek directly hits the basic plane.

Web Grating Height of the attached gridiron

Side Offset The projection of the attached gridirons beyond the outer edge of the staircase construction. Negative values decrease the dimension of gridirons.

Upper Edge Equal The upper edge of the inserted gridirons are mounted equal to upper edge lateral parts. The side offset is set to 0.

Platforms

No. of Platforms Enter the number of floors (intermediate stair heads).

Inner Distance Enter the measure between two staircases (including cheek shapes) if the intermediate stair heads are stair heads for change over.


1046

Platform No. Select the floor you want to process.

Angle to prev. If you enter an angle here, you can create the bent running of the staircase or stair heads for change over (180°). Negative values create an opposite sense of rotation.

Length, Height... Please refer to the figure below for exact meaning of the distances.

Here you see the most important dimensions of a staircase with intermediate stair heads and stair heads for change over (standard version):


1047

Shapes

Shape Type etc. Here, you select the shapes for the stair and the stair head

cheeks.

Bolts

Drill Stringer If this field is checked, the stair cheeks are drilled to permit

bolting the steps or the handrail.


1048

Bolt .../Handrail If this field is checked, the cheeks and the handrail are bolted, if a handrail exists. Select the required bolt type in the selection list.

Bolt .../Step If this field is checked, the cheeks and the steps are bolted. Select the required bolt type in the selection list.

Steps

Create Steps If this field is checked, the staircase steps are generated.

You can choose between standard steps, shape steps and block steps. When you have selected shape or block steps, you can select the shape type or the block in the selection lists as usual.

Increment Enter the depth of the staircase steps.

b,c,d Distances for the mounting holes of the staircase steps.

b is the distance of the holes from the upper edge of the steps, c is the height of the fastening of staircase steps, d is the hole spacing of both mounting holes.

Hole Distance The distance of the axes of the steps’ mounting holes

Hole Dia. The hole diameter of the steps’ mounting holes.

Slot Length The distance of the axes of the rear oblong step hole.

Offset The offset of the staircase steps from the front edge of the staircase to the back. Negative values move the steps to the front.


1049

Handrail

Create Handrail If this field is checked, a handrail is added to the staircase.

Simplified The handrails are not modelled, but only displayed as system lines.

Start Offset Here, you enter an offset value which moves the start of the handrail from the front edge of the staircase to the back. Negative values move the handrail to the front. In case of staircases without basic stair head, you can move the start of the handrail to a position where a bolt mounting is possible.

End Offset Analogously to start offset, you enter here an offset value for the end of the handrail.

Side Offset Here, you enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the outer edge of the staircase to the outside. This permits you to mount the handrail outside the staircase on other shapes or on the wall.

Height Offset Here, you enter an offset value that moves the handrail from the upper edge of the staircase cheek to the top. This permits you to attach a grout or an individual fastening.


1050

Connection Here, you specify the bolting of handrail and staircase cheek. Automatic – The program tries to determine the most suitable fastening. Vertical - The handrail is always bolted on the staircase cheek from above, independently of the settings in the used handrail template. By Side – The handrail is always bolted laterally on the staircase cheek, independently of the settings in the used handrail template. Individual – The settings in the handrail template are used.

Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0 in this input field, a vertical connecting plate is inserted between plate and staircase cheek in case of lateral mounting.

Hand. Template Select the template to be used for the handrail in the selection list. This template describes the exact structure. Click this button to preset the handrail structure (shapes, distances, etc.) or to edit the used handrail template. Another dialog opens then which is identical with the structural element ‘Handrail’. Thus you can refer to this dialog for further information. At staircases with handrail, this handrail will be created as structural element of its own. This permits you to construct and modify the handrail in detail independent of the staircase.


1051

Work Frame

Created Views A separate working frame can be created showing a direct

overview on the staircase to allow for better working at the staircase within the bounds of a bigger construction. By clicking the fields Front View, Lateral View Left, Lateral View Right or Top View, you can create the corresponding working frame.

Group Name Enter the general name of the working frame.

Edge Distance If you enter a value here, the size of the different frames is decreased. Therefore you can better select frames which are lying next to each other.


Structural Element Winding stair

1052

E.2 Structural Element Winding stair

This function creates a winding stair as a spiral stair or with outer and inner strings including a banister rail All you need to do is click on the Center of the spiral stair and on a point on the Starting line of the stair (footfall edge). The number of stairs required will automatically be calculated from your inputs. A dialog subsequently appears in which you can define your settings under direct screen control. The dimensions of the stairs can be subsequently changed by distorting the (yellow) object frame via its handles. Since a spiral staircase including banisters is a complex construction, the use of structural elements is currently to be seen in the fields of overviews and visualization. All of the construction information required has not yet been taken into consideration. Here on the left you can see a spiral staircase with strings on both sides and on the right a spiral staircase with central struts. Both stairs are each represented without banisters.


1053

Dimensions

Design Here you select the basic form of the staircase.

Central struts – The staircase is executed as a spiral staircase with a central strut and an outer string. Strings on both sides– The staircase is executed as a spiral staircase with an outer and an inner string.

Direction of rotation Here you specify whether the direction of rotation of the stairs is clockwise or anticlockwise. A clockwise spiral climbs in an anticlockwise direction.

Outer radius The distance of the outer string from the center of the spiral.

Inner radius The distance of the inner string from the center of the spiral (if available).

Gradient The gradient of the spiral in a vertical direction. That is the distance from the beginning to the end, which is reached at an angle of rotation of 360°.

Total angle Here you input the total sum of the rotational angles of the spiral. Should you require 2 full turns, for instance, input 720 here.

Step angles Here you input the horizontal step angles of the stairs, which refers to the respective distance from the front edge.


1054

Step angle overhang Here you input the overlapping angle of the stairs, i.e. an enlargement or decrease in the stair size. Positive values increase the size of the steps, negative values decrease the step size – whereby the front edge remains constant

Dynamic If this field is selected you can immediately check changes in the settings on the screen.


1055

Dimensioning - central struts

Lower overhang Here you input the value by which the length of the central struts on the underside (beginning of the spiral) is to be changed. Positive values lengthen the struts, while negative values shorten them

Upper overhang Here you input the value by which the length of the central struts on the upper side (end of the spiral) is to be changed. Positive values lengthen the struts, while negative values shorten them.

Create foot plate A foot plate is added to the central strut, but the strut is not shortened in the process.

> As plastic sheet The foot plate is made from a plastic sheet instead of a flat steel profile.

> Plate thickness The thickness of the foot plate.

> Foot plate width The width of the foot plate.

> Plate height The length of the foot plate.


1056

> Hole diameter The diameter of the holes in the foot plate. If you input the value "0", there are no holes made in the foot plate.

>Hole distance width The distance between the holes in the direction of the plate width.

> Hole distance height The distance between the holes in the direction of the plate length.


1057

Profiles

Assembly The settings apply for the profile group selected here.

Profile type The type of the profile selected.

Profile class The class or catalogue of the profile selected.

Profile size The size of the profile selected.

Vertical The insertion level of the profile in a vertical direction. You can choose between Middle, Lower edge or Upper edge.

Horizontal The insertion level of the profile in a horizontal direction. You can choose between Middle, Left or Right.

Angle The rotation around the insertion axis.

String profile same The profiles of the outer and inner strings are the same, so changes to the outer string have an impact on the inner string.

Insert profiles The profiles defined are actually inserted. So you can abandon the outer string in a spiral staircase, for example


1058

Steps

Create steps If this field is selected the stair steps are created.

You have the choice between Standard steps or Block steps. If you select block steps, you can choose the block desired.

Grouping Here you decide whether a group should be made of all step elements. You have the choice between No Group,Subgroup and Assembly.

Height difference Here you input the footfall height of the first step from ground level to the upper edge of the step.


1059

Steps - central struts Here you decide the dimensions of the steps if you have selected the "Central struts" design.

Plate thickness The thickness of the step.

Bending radius The inner radius of the fold, should any front or back edge length be given.

Front edge lengths The length of the front fold (this refers to the straight piece of the inner edge).

Back edge lengths The lengths of the back edge (this refers to the straight piece of the inner edge).

Straight outer edge The outer edge of the step is designed as a straight edge (string of the arch). Otherwise this is adjusted to the radius of the spiral.

Open at the top The fold of the step occurs towards the upper side of the step.

Enable banisters If this field is selected, the steps are drilled on the outer side to take the banister posts.

> Number of posts The number of post holes per step.

> Diameter The diameter of the post hole.

> Distance from front edge The distance of the post hole from the front edge of the step (in radian measure).


1060

> Spacing The distance between the respective post holes (in radian measure).

> Height difference The distance of the banister posts from the upper edge of the step.

Steps - strings on both sides Here you determine the dimensions of the steps if you have selected the "strings both sides" stair design.

Step width Input the depth of the step here.

Angular extension The outer edge of the step is bigger than the inner edge by this value, creating an angular stair.

b,c,d Spacing dimensions for the mounting holes for the steps.

b is the distance between the holes of the upper edge of the step, c is the height of the step mountings, d is the hole spacing of both mounting holes.

Hole spacing The center distance of the mounting holes of the steps.

Hole diameter The hole diameter of the step mounting holes.

Oblong hole axis The distance of the axis of the back oblong holes of the stairs.


1061

Indent The offset of the stair steps from the front edge of the step backwards. Negative values push the step forwards.

Bent outer edge The outer edge of the step is designed as a bent edge and adapted to the radius of the spiral. Otherwise this is designed as a straight edge (string of the arch).

Banister

Inner banister A banister is created on the inner string.

Outer banister A banister is created on the outer string or on the outer edge of the stairs (hole created).

Simplified display The banisters are not fully modeled, but only represented as system lines.

Banister connection Here you input how the banister should be screwed to the stair strings. Automatic - The program tries to determine the most convenient mounting. Perpendicular - The banister is always screwed onto the stair string from above, regardless of the specification in the banister template used.


1062

Laterally -The banister is always screwed onto the stair string laterally, regardless of the specification in the banister template used. Individual – The specification from the banister template is used.

Side offset Here you input an offset that pushes the banister from the outer edge of the step outwards. So you can also mount the banister outside the stair on other profiles or on the wall.

Height offset Here you input an offset that pushes the banister from the upper edge of the stair string upwards in order to be able to attach a lining or an individual mounting, for example.

Side spacing If you input a value greater than 0 here, a vertical connecting sheet will be inserted between the plate and stair string in lateral fitting.

Banister template In the selection list select the template to be used for the banister, which describes its exact construction. If you click on this button, you can specify the construction of the banister (profiles, spacings etc.) or edit the banister template used. A further dialog subsequently opens, which is identical to the structural element "banister" so that you can read your input there. For stairs with banisters the latter is created as an individual structural element. This gives you the option to construct the banister in detail independently of the stairs.


1063

Screws

Drill strings for steps If this field is selected, the stair strings are drilled so that the

stair steps can be screwed on.

Screw string/Step If this field is selected, strings and steps are screwed. You can select the type of screw desired from the selection list.

Drill strings for banister If this field is selected, the stair strings are drilled so that the banister can be screwed on.

Screw strings / banister If this field is selected, strings and banister are screwed, if a banister exists. You can select the type of screw desired from the selection list.

Assignment As in every dialog, once the parts are created you also have the option to make all assignments for each individual profile directly. To do this, select the part and choose the setting.


1064

Options

Data path Input the complete path to the block files here, if you wish to

use stairs from user blocks.


1065

Structural Element Handrail

1066

E.3 Structural Element Handrail

This function generates a handrail along a previously drawn 3-dimensional polyline. After calling the function, you will be prompted to pick this polyline, and the program then constructs the handrail along this line. You can choose between a parametrical construction of the handrail and a construction by user-defined blocks. At parametrical construction, all component parts are directly created from the default settings in your dialogs. At the second variant, you use any user-defined blocks which will be automatically adapted within certain borders. After the command was selected, a dialog opens where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and immediately on screen. The spatial development of the handrail may still be modified at a later time by changing the polyline using its grips.

Generalities

Layout Here you determine whether the handrail has to be carried out

as parametrical construction or with user-defined blocks. When you selected parametrical construction, you will find all further settings in the section ‘Dimensions’. When you selected blocks, you will find all further settings in the section ‘Blocks’.

Dynamic If this field is checked, you can verify the modified settings directly and immediately on screen. A modification of the polyline has immediate effects, too.


1067

Draw Diagonal If this field is checked, an auxiliary diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the different segments to facilitate its selection.

No Auto-Update If this field is checked, you can manually release the update of the handrail by pressing a button.

Group Status Here you determine whether another parent group has to be formed out of all handrail components (including their inner group structure). You can choose between No Group, Component Part Group and Assembly.

Group Name Here you indicate the name of the parent group. Wildcards for the overall dimensions ($(L), $(W), $(H)) are permitted.

For more detailed information about the group structure, please refer to the section about workshop drawings in this chapter.

Dimensions

Connection Height The distance between the drawn polyline and the beginning of

the posts including possible fastening plate.

Railing Height The distance of the upper edge of the newel posts or the center of the railing head (if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.

Upper Rail Height. The center distance of the upper knee-high rail (if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.


1068

Middle Rail Height The center distance of the middle knee-high rail (if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.

Lower Rail Height The center distance of the lower knee-high rail (if in place) measured perpendicular to the polyline.

Handrail Radius Radius of the railing head at the corners of the handrail. If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.

Knee Rail Radius Radius of the knee-high guardrail at the corners of the handrail. If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.

Kick Plate Radius Radius of the baseboard at the corners of the handrail. If a radius is specified the corresponding shape bends are applied; otherwise a mitred joint is cut.

Thickening Dia. Here you indicate the thickening radius at the gusset points between posts and e. g. knee-high guardrails.

Example for a thickening between posts and knee-high guardrails


1069

Post Distance

Post Spacing Here you specify the approximate spacing of the rail posts

within the individual polyline segments. Normal – The segment is regularly divided and the pre-determined post distance is adapted. Adapt First – The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the first part of the segment is corrected. Adap tLast – The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the last part of the segment is corrected. Adapt First/Last – The post distance of the default setting is kept and only the first and the last part of the segment are corrected equally.

Post Distance The distance of the rail posts within the individual polyline segments. Depending on the setting, the program uses this information to space out the newel posts in regular intervals and rounds the value up or down as needed.

Maximum If this button is checked, the values of the determined post distances are never rounded up. The post distance is regarded as the maximum value. If necessary, additional posts are inserted.

Edge Offset The spacing of the corner posts between two handrail segments starting with the intersection of the polyline segments.


1070

Min.Segment Length The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on posts are created. Thus you avoid e. g. the creation of posts at the inner edge of intermediate landings at staircases with changing direction.

Min.Segment 2nd Post The minimum length of a handrail segment from which on two posts are created at the beginning and at the end. If the actual length is smaller (but larger than the ’Minimum Segment Length’), only one post will be created in the middle of the segment.

Offsets

Posts Inside If this field is checked, the end posts are moved to the inside.

The post distances in the first and last segment are decreased by the value specified for the offset of the railing head.

Keep All Equal If this field is checked, the default settings for railing head offset are used for all shapes.

Start Offset Projection of the corresponding shape starting from the middle of the first rail post towards the outside.

End Offset Projection of the corresponding shape starting from the middle of the last rail post towards the outside.

All Input Fields Here you can individually determine start and end offset of the different shapes if the option ‘Keep All Equal’ has been deactivated.


1071

Segments

Create Segments The handrail is subdivided into several independent segments,

each having their own start, end and inner posts.

Length maximum... The indicated length is the maximum length of a segment and mustn’t be exceeded.

Segment Length Defines the length of the different segments. It may be that the length is corrected, depending on the default settings of spacing.

Gap Indicates the distance from 1 segment to the other.

Distribution Here you indicate the distribution of the segment lengths along the length of the handrail segment. Equally means that all segments have the same length. Adapt First or Adapt Last means that all segments have the indicated length, but the first or the last segment is shorter.

Group Status Here you determine whether another parent group has to be formed out of all segments (including their inner group structure). You can choose between No Group, Component Part Group and Assembly.


For more detailed information about the group structure, please refer to the section about workshop drawings in this chapter.


1072

End form You have the possibility to round off the railing head of the handrail at its corners in different ways or to combine it with the other component parts. These default settings can be individually determined for the beginning and the end of the handrail.

Transitions without End Offset

Selection List Here you specify the form of the handrail’s end. Leave – No detailing takes place. Up to Outer Edge – The handrail is extended up to the outer edge of the post. Mitre Joint – The handrail and the end post are cut to build a mitre joint. Round Off – The handrail and the end post are combined by means of a bent part. Enter the radius in the Radius input field.

Radius Indicates the radius for rounding off. It can be defined either as absolute value or as many times the amount of the handrail diameter. Enter e. g. *2.


1073

Transitions with End Offset

Selection List Here you specify the form of the handrail’s end. Additional shape parts are added in the handrail outside the end post. Leave – No detailing takes place. Mitre Joint – The additional shape parts in the handrail are cut to build a mitre joint. Round Off – The additional shape parts in the handrail are combined by means of a bent part. Enter the radius in the Radius input field.

Combine with Here you specify up to which height the handrail has to be extended to the bottom. When you select knee-high guardrail above, center or below (if they exist), an additional perpendicular part will be added.

Radius Indicates the radius for rounding off. It can be defined either as absolute value or as many times the amount of the handrail diameter. Enter e. g. *2.

Close If this field has been checked, the handrail will be extended up to the end support after detailing.


1074

Shapes Here you can select the shapes for the individual sections of the handrail. However, the corresponding section is generated only if checked appropriately in the check box. For example, if you would like to generate a handrail with only two knee-high guardrails, then deactivate one of the three options for knee-high guardrails. In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.

Click on the button to copy the default settings of another component part into the current selection. A small dialog opens where you can select the source. Thus it is e. g. possible to synchronize the settings for all knee-high guardrails. Comp.Part Group The settings are valid for the selected shape group.

Shape Class The class or catalogue of the selected shape.

Shape Size The size of the selected shape.

Shape Type The type of the selected shape.

Insertion Plane The insertion plane of the shape. Here you can choose between Center, Lower Edge and Upper Edge.

Angle The rotation around the insertion axis.

Mirror The shape is mirrored before insertion.

BUTTON + The settings of another component part group are copied into the current selection.


1075

Shapes Kick plate You can add a kick plate to the handrail. The kick plate will only be created, if you have added kick plates as shapes. In the selection lists you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.

Other Side If this field is checked, the baseboard will be inserted at the

other side of the railing posts.

Side Offset You specify the distance of outer edge of railing post and inner edge of baseboard. This permits you to keep some space for individual fastenings or grouts.

Height Offset The distance between the drawn polyline and the lower edge of baseboard. Negative values will move the baseboard towards the bottom.


1076

Shapes Filler Rods You can insert additional vertical filler rods as safety device against falling through or as reinforcement between the handrail and the knee-high guardrails. The filler rods are distributed anew within two posts.

Min. Segment Length The minimum segment length (distance from one post to the

other) from which on filler rods will be created.

Edge Distance The distance between the center of the first and last filler rod and the center of the corresponding handrail post

Intermediate Distance The distance of the center of two filler rods; this value can be corrected depending on the segment length.

Distance Top The distance between the filler rods and the upper insertion position.

Distance Bottom The distance between the filler rods and the lower insertion position.

Insertion Offset Filler rod offset from insertion plane towards the front or back side.

Insertion from Here you select at which position the filler rods start (upper insertion position).


1077

Insertion up to Here you select at which position the filler rods end (lower insertion position).

Insertion Position Here you select the depth position of the filler rods towards the knee-high guardrails. You can choose between front edge, center and rear edge.

Cut at Here you select the bordering edge of the knee-high guard rails or handrail the insertion points of filler rods refer to. You can choose between inner edges, center and outer edges.

If Collision Here you indicate how to treat a possible collision between filler rods and knee-high guardrails (e. g. in case of center position). Ignore – The collision is ignored. Divide – The filler rod is divided at the knee-high guardrails. Any information about distances top/bottom is taken into consideration anew for each divided rod. Perforate – The knee-high guardrails are perforated so that the filler rod can run through it.

Handrail segment with spacing bars between the handrail and the upper knee-high guardrail.


1078

Posts You can taper the post on top or bottom by means of cuts in order to reach a better adaptation to the base plate or to the handrail.

Top horizontal determines the horizontal length of the cuts at the upper end

of the post. Two cuts are made, one at the outside and one at the inside of the handrail.

Top vertical determines the vertical length of the two cuts at the upper end of the post.

Bottom horizontal determines the horizontal length of the cuts at the lower end of the post. Two cuts are made, one at the outside and one at the inside of the handrail.

Bottom vertical determines the vertical length of the two cuts at the lower end of the post.


1079

Post Connection Here you select the fastening of the handrail posts. If None is checked, no fastening will be provided. If Vertical is checked, the plates will be perpendicular to the post (base plates). If Lateral is checked, plates or bent connections will be welded to the outside of the post.

Layout Here you select how the handrail is fastened. Depending on

selection, you have different possibilities which may also influence other dialog tabs.

Outside If this field is checked, lateral connecting plates will be welded on the other side of the posts. This option is only available for lateral connections.

For Diagonals If this field has been checked, you can specify other dimensions for diagonal handrail segments e.g. at a stringer. This option is only available for vertical connections.

Plate Layout Here you indicate how the lateral connection plates have to be executed. This option is only available for lateral connections. Complete Plate – All plates are created with the complete dimensions. Shorten Outer – The plates at the two outside posts are cut at the outside to be flush with the support. Only Right Side – All plates are cut on the left side to be flush with the supports. Only Left Side – All plates are cut on the right side to be flush with the supports.


1080

Projection Side In case of plates which are cut to be flush (projection= 0) you can indicate a projection beyond the edges of the supports here and thus modify the plate size. Negative values will reduce the size of projection towards the inside. This option is only available for lateral connections. .

Plate Wiidth Specify the width of the connecting plates.

Plate Length Specify the length (height) of the connecting plates.

Plate Thickness Specify the thickness of the connecting plates.

Hole Dia Enter the diameter of fastening holes.

w (horizontal) Enter the axis distance of fastening holes.

w (vertical) Enter the vertical distance of fastening holes, if you selected lateral connecting plates. You can thus create a plate with four holes. If you enter the value 0, only two holes are created.

Zinc Hole Dia Enter the diameter of an additional zinc outlet hole (center position towards post axis).

Side Offset If you enter a value bigger than 0, a perpendicular connecting plate will be inserted between plate and post. If you indicated an ‘Inlet Radius’ in addition, the additional plate will be omitted and the connection will be made as bent post.

Start Radius If you enter a value bigger than 0, the connection will be made as bent post with perpendicularly welded plate.

As Poly-plate If this field has been checked, a poly-plate will be created instead of a flat steel.

Turn by 90° If this field has been checked, base plates will be rotated by 90°.

Plate Connections for Handrail Posts


1081

Post Post-Handrail Here you select how to connect the different handrail posts with the handrail. Depending on selection, you can describe the connection in a more detailed way by means of further parameters.

Layout Here you indicate the layout of the connection.

Leave – No processing is made. Straight Cut – The post is shortened up to the lower edge of the handrail. Complex Cut – The post is adapted to the handrail by means of two simple diagonal cuts. With Rod – An additional shape is inserted between posts and handrail. Boolean – The post is exactly adapted to the handrail by means of a boolean cut.

Gap Distance Here you enter an additional distance between post and handrail. When you have selected the ‘Rod’ option, this is the length of the rod.

Cover Thickness The thickness of an additional round cover plate at the upper edge of the post if the ‘Rod’ option has been selected.

Cover Diameter The diameter of an additional round cover plate at the upper edge of the post if the ‘Rod’ option has been selected.


1082

Post Post-Knee-high Guardrail Here you select how to connect the different knee-high guardrails with the posts. Depending on selection, you can describe the connection in a more detailed way by means of further parameters.

Layout Here you indicate the layout of the connection.

Leave – No processing is made. Straight Cut – The knee-high guardrail is divided into individual elements at the outer edges of the posts by means of straight cuts. Complex Cut – The knee-high guardrail is adapted to the post in question by means of two simple diagonal cuts and divided into individual elements. Drill – At the position of the knee-high guardrails, the posts are drilled so that the shapes can run through them as a whole. Boolean – The knee-high guardrails are exactly adapted to the posts by means of a boolean cut.

Gap Distance Here you enter an additional distance between post and knee-high guardrail if you have selected the ‘Straight Cut’ or ‘Complex Cut’ option.

Hole Diameter Here you enter the diameter of the drill hole in the post if you have selected the ‘Drill’ option.


1083

Blocks Apart from the parametrical construction, you can build the handrail by using user-defined blocks. Different blocks are available for the post variants (e. g. beginning, end, corners) and fillings. You will find all necessary settings on this page and on the subordinate dialog tabs. Partly they are identical with those of parametrical construction. For more detailed information about selection and distribution of user-defined blocks, please refer to section ‘Working with User-defined Blocks’ in this chapter.

Between Posts Here you specify how the user-defined blocks have to be

inserted in general. Leave – Only the post blocks are inserted. Connect Handrail –The post blocks are inserted and especially marked shapes are connected with each other (e. g. as handrail). Insert Inner Block – In addition, the blocks for the fillings are inserted. Insert and Combine – In addition, the blocks for the fillings are inserted and especially marked shapes of the post blocks are combined with each other (e. g. as handrail).

Block Directory The directory with the user-defined blocks for the handrails; it contains further divided subdirectories for posts and fillings.


1084

Blocks Post Distribution

The settings on this dialog tab correspond to the post distribution of parametrical construction. Please refer to this tab for more detailed information.

Blocks Segments

The settings on this dialog tab correspond to the segments of parametrical construction. Please refer to this tab for more detailed information.


1085

Blocks Posts

Selection Lists Here you select the block which has to be used for the

corresponding post variant.

Group Status Here you determine whether a parent group has to be formed out of the component parts of the posts. You can choose between No Group, Subgroup and Component Part Group.



1086

Blocks Fillings

Filling Here you select the block to be used for the filling of the

handrail.

Width Adaptation Here you specify how to adapt the inserted block of the filling in longitudinal direction to the current space between two posts. Leave – The block is not modified. Stretch Across Center – The block is stretched from the center to the left and to the right side. Stretch Poportionally – All elements of the filling are regularly stretched proportionally. Dynamic All, Start... – The elements are stretched dynamically within the indicated borders and multiplied. You can choose whether the length has to be balanced at the beginning, at the end or at beginning and end.

Check Block Sizes When the width is adapted dynamically, the information included in the block is evaluated for the minimum/maximum distances (e. g. at vertical filler rods).

Group Status Here you determine whether a parent group has to be formed out of the component parts of the fillings. You can choose between No Group, Subgroup and Component Part Group.



1087



1088

Working with User-Defined Blocks When you apply user-defined blocks, it is possible to create any handrail constructions you like which would be difficult to seize by means of parameters. Posts and fillings behave differently so that as many forms of handrails as possible may be created. The main problem is that the program has to select or modify the blocks defined by you in a suitable way to generate the handrail out of the determined poly-line. When the block templates are defined, you can add rules via part properties and block attributes how the component parts may be modified later. Any ProSteel component part or AutoCAD-element can be used for the definition of blocks. Additional ProSteel parts list information has to be added to the AutoCAD-elements. Posts Posts are inserted at any possible corner and intermediate points of the poly-line. You can specify different blocks for start, end and the straight intermediate points of the poly-line. In addition, you can determine different blocks for right-angled corners (+90° and -90° each) and for the angles deviating from this (positive and negative as well). However, only one deviating intermediate angle is possible. You could use corners of 45° beside the right-angled corners for your handrail, but not corners of 45° and 30° at the same time.

The neighboring figure shows the selection of the different post blocks. You see the beginning (1) and the end (2) of the poly-line as well as the intermediate post (3). The corner post (4) is a +90° corner, the corner post (5) is a -90° corner, corresponding to the UCS and the running direction of the poly-line. . For all other angles the corner rotating in positive direction (6) or the corner rotating in negative direction (7) is selected.


1089

The post has to be defined in WCS, the positive z-axis corresponds to the height of the handrail. At insertion on a staging post, the positive x-axis is always aligned towards the running direction of the previous poly-line segment (except for the initial post) – the origin (0, 0, 0) of the WCS corresponds to the later insertion point on the staging post. Indicate the code P in the parts properties of the actual post shape under ‘Note 2’. If you are working with fillings, all connecting elements, which have to be connected with the fillings later, get the code C here. Define a block attribute with the name DP for initial and final post to be able to place these fillings correctly (at intermediate and corner post, you have two block attributes DP1 and DP2). The filling is created later in a way that its block attributes are laying exactly one above the other as counterparts. Handlrails, Knee-High Guardrails and Kick Boards These are defined in the post blocks as well as they are in general connected to them. They are short shapes which have to be aligned parallel towards the x/y-plane and which contain the code R in the parts properties under ‘Note 2’. After insertion of the post blocks these marked parts are connected to common elements if possible. Enter the code R,NC if you don’t want to combine them. Fillings The special characteristic of fillings is the fact that the distance between the assigned posts is not known at definition. To avoid having to define an own block for each possible distance, the elements are adapted to the current dimension by means of the options Stretch/Upset and Move. In addition, filling elements which once were defined can be regularly multiplied by means of dynamic distribution. A twisted filler rod has e. g. to be modelled only once to arrange it in a grid of 100-110 mm in the handrail segments. The filling has to be defined in the WCS as well. The positive z-axis corresponds to the height of the handrail. At insertion, the positive x-axis is always aligned towards the running direction of the corresponding poly-line segment. The origin (0, 0, 0) of the WCS lies in the middle of the block.


1090

Define two block attributes DP1 and DP2 to be able to place the fillings correctly. The filling is created later in a way that its block attributes and those of the posts are laying exactly one above the other. If you want a dynamic distribution, all elements to be distributed get the code FB in the parts properties under ‘Note 2’. Two other block attributes FBSTART and FBEND determine the nominal grid size including the gaps. Depending on the default settings for length adaptation, the actual grid size can however be bigger or smaller. You can limit the area in order to determine borders – for example the protection against falling through the bars. If you enter the value MIN=100 in the input field for the block attribute FBSTART and the value MAX=110 in the input field for the block attribute FBEND, the distance will always be between 100 and 110 mm. Additional Hints No user-defined blocks may contain any group structures. In the handrail function, you decide at a later moment which component parts automatically have to form groups, subgroups or assemblies. The codes entered in the parts properties of the block templates under ‘Note 2’ will be removed after insertion. In the finished 3D-model, the data field can be used for the parts list as usual.


1091

Example The following example shows the possibilities of handrail construction with user-defined blocks and dynamic distribution of filler rods.

Corner support 45°

The different posts and the filling element are constructed in the block templates and the filling element only contains the principle. At generation along the poly-line it will be adapted to the current segment length. As it is only a matter of corners of 90° and 45°, the whole construction can be saved in a template and be reproduced.

The neighboring figure shows the block of the filling element in detail. Since both filler rods alternate, they are modelled together, too. An exact distribution in a 150 mm grid including length compensation at the beginning and at the end of the segment is desired. This is why you find two block attributes FBSTART and FBEND each on the right and left side of the bars (with the input demand MIN and MAX=150). The filler rods and spheres have the code FB and in the drill holes of the upper butt straps you will find the block attributes DP1 and DP2 for the adaptation to the posts. The posts also have such butt straps with the same attributes in the drill holes of the butt straps for fixation.


1092

In handrail function, it is specified that the filling element as well as the supports have to form their own groups. An assembly can be built out of two supports and a filling element in order to display the main dimensions of construction and installation as common drawing. The following drawing is an automatic 2D-production drawing of a filling segment. Here you see that the length compensation of the distribution was effected at the edges and that the desired grid is exactly kept.

The possible 2D-detailing of a whole assembly shows how the filling element is placed between the different posts.


1093

Due to a free construction via user-defined blocks (which adapt themselves dynamically) and due to the forming of parent and subordinate groups, you get complex handrails including 2D-plans in no time at all. Finally,here an the overall view as horizontal projection with the most important dimensions of the complete handrail.

Structural Element Hangar Frame

1094

E.4 Structural Element Hangar Frame

This function generates a hangar frame from two support members and two crossbars, which can be connected to one another in different ways. This requires that you click on the outer edge insertion point of the left and right vertical frame members. This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the frame can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.

Dimensions

Width The width of the hangar frame across outer steel edge.

Ridge Width Enter the roof ridge width into this field if you have selected an asymmetrical hangar frame.


1095

Centre Height Here you indicate the ridge height of the crossbars. Changing the value will affect the pitch of the roof.

Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the settings immediately on screen.

Symmetrical If this field is checked, a symmetrical hangar frame is generated by applying the values specified for one side to the other side.

Draw Diagonal If this field is checked, the hangar frame (object frame) is marked with two additional diagonals.

Box Frames If this field is checked, a frame is generated only with a crossbeam. In this case, the specifications for the ridge height are unimportant.

Left Eave Height Here, you indicate the left eaves height of the crossbars.

Right Eave Height Here, you indicate the right eaves height of the crossbars.

Top Side Base Specify the distance of the supports from floor level (the pick points of the supports) required to add base plates.

Left Column Offset Here, you indicate the projection of the left support upper edge beyond the height of the eaves.

Right Column Offset Here, you indicate the projection of the right support upper edge beyond the height of the eaves.

Left Roof Angle Here, you indicate the roof pitch of the left crossbar. Changing the value will affect the ridge height of the roof.

Right Roof Angle Here, you indicate the roof pitch of the right crossbar. Changing the value will affect the ridge height of the roof.


1096

Shapes This dialog tab is used to select the corresponding shapes for the left and right vertical frame members as well as the crossbars. If you have selected a symmetrical hangar frame, the values specified for the left side are applied to the right side.

Which Shape Here, you can select the shape the settings have to be applied

to. Please note that at ‘Symmetrical’ setting, the right shapes cannot be set because the values of the left shapes are applied to them.

Shape Type Here, you select the shape type (normal, special shapes, etc.)

Shape Class Here, you select the shape class or catalogue.

Shape Size Here, you select the shape size.

Alignment Here, you select how the supports have to be inserted related to the frame.


1097

Left and Right Knee This dialog tab is used to select the connection type for joining the left crossbar with the left vertical frame member. The same dialog tab is opened for the right knee. If you selected ‚Symmetrical’, the entries are locked there and the settings for the right knee are adopted from the left one.

Attachment Determines the kind of connection between crossbar and

support: Adapt - The crossbar is cut to the support. You can specify a distance in the neighboring field Distances. Angle Cut - The crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitred joint. You can specify a gap in the neighboring field. Haunch - The connection is designed as a frame haunch. You can select a haunch template in the neighboring field.

Free Plate The connection is designed as a plate connection. You can select a template for the plate connection in the neighboring field. Use the option Turn to rotate an unsymmetrical plate.

Align As is No connections are made.


1098

Apex

This dialog tab is used to select the connection type for joining crossbars at the ridge point. Attachment Determines the kind of connection between crossbar and

support: Angle Cut - The crossbar and the support are cut to have a mitred joint. You can specify a gap in the neighboring field. Free Plate - The connection is designed as a plate connection. You can select a template for the plate connection in the neighboring field. Use the option Turn to rotate an unsymmetrical plate. Align As is -No connections are made

Assignments As it is the case with each dialog creating component parts, here too, you have the possibility to carry out all assignments directly for each single shape. To do this, select the component part and then select the settings to be applied.


1099

Structural Element Truss Girder

1100

E.5 Structural Element Truss Girder

This function generates a truss girder from the upper and lower cord as well as the diagonals and many existing intermediate studs. Upper and lower cords can also be generated from two side-by-side shapes. This requires that you click on the left and right outer edge of the truss girder, which then adds the truss to the current plane of the user coordinate system. This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and immediately on screen. The dimensions of the binder can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.

Dimensions

Type Select the different variations of the framework (parallel or

alternating diagonals with or without intermediate studs).

Layout Select on which side the bracing has to be carried out.

Length The complete length of the girder

Height Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower cord up to intersection of upper edges of upper cords in the middle (top of roof ridge)

Roof Angle Roof slope of upper cord.

Side Height Height of the girder from bottom edge of lower cord up to upper edge of upper cord measured on the sides. This value remains constant, while the value in the height filed can change if you adjust the pitch of the roof and vice versa.


1101

Outer Distance The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs at the rim of the roof truss outer edge (represented with the object frame).

Inner Distance The distance of the axis of any existing intermediary studs in the center of the roof truss centerline

Segment Dist. The distance of the segments of the truss girder (spacing of the girder junctions with parallel diagonals)

Segment Numb. The number of truss girder segments

Plate Width The spacing of the shapes, if, for example, upper and lower cords are generated from two side-by-side (U-shaped) shapes.

Shapes

Shape Offset Select for which shape the settings are valid.

Shape Type Select the shape types to be used.

Shape Class Enter the class or the catalogue.

Shape Size Select the shape size.

Front/Back If these fields are checked, the selected shapes are added to the corresponding side of the truss girder. For example, you can also generate a truss girder from two side-by side U-shaped shapes.


1102

Distances

Top Chord The distance of the upper cord at the rim from the outer edge

of the roof truss (represented with the object frame).

Top Chord Inside The distance of the upper cord in the center of the roof truss centerline

Bottom Chord The distance of the lower cord at the rim from the outer edge of the roof truss (represented with the object frame).

Fit Shape Ends If this field is checked, the diagonals at upper/lower cord are cut to fit.

Top Diagonal The distance of the diagonal from upper cord, if, e.g., connective plates are to be inserted.

Bottom Diagonal The distance of the diagonal from lower cord, if, e.g., connective plates are to be inserted.

Fit Shape Ends If this field is checked, any existing intermediate studs at upper (vertical) or lower cord are cut to fit.

Top Vertical The distance of any intermediate studs from upper cord if connective plates are to be inserted

Bottom Vertical The distance of any intermediate studs from lower cord if connective plates are to be inserted


1103


Structural Element Purlin Course

1104

E.6 Structural Element Purlin Course

Command Name: PS_Pfette This function generates a purlin course within a specified plane. For this, you select the area to be filled by clicking on the left lower and the right upper corner. The purlins are then inserted into this area with their lower edge flush with the plane of the current user coordinate system. An additional application consists of the possibility to insert secondary beams (joists) within two main girders. For this purpose, you have to finish the input of area at the first point using ESC. Then, you are prompted to enter the first main girder, then the second one. The dimensions for the purlin course then are defined by the end points of the main girders. In addition, you have the possibility to connect them with each other by means of a template. This is followed by a dialog where you can set the specifications while verifying your input directly and immediately on screen. The spacing of the purlin course can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips. Diagonals are possible as well.


1105

General

Angle The purlins are rotated around this angle value, which means

they are arranged in a diagonal fashion.

Height Offset Here, you can move the purlin course in positive Z-direction by applying the indicated value.

Dynamic If this field is checked, the modifications of the settings can be monitored immediately on screen.

Symmetrical If this field is checked, modifications of the structural element will be carried out symmetrically by drawing the grips.

Draw Diagonal If this field is checked, the area to be filled (object frame) is marked with two additional diagonals.

Cut at Edge If this field is checked, the purlins at the edges of the area to be filled are cut flush. Values in the fields Left Projection and Right Projection are then not considered.


1106

Dimensions

Fixed Grid If the ‘Grid’ field is checked, you can indicate in the

neighboring input field the approximate distance of the purlins within the area between first and last purlin. The program divides the distances regularly according to this specification and the value is rounded up or down correspondingly. The actual distances then are displayed in the Effective Grid field.

Free Grid If the ‘Grid’ field is not checked, you can freely define the grid division within the area between the first and last purlin in the ‘Distances’ list. You can vary the number and the distance, as you like.

Turn The distances are used inverted.

Offset Bottom The distance from the centerline of the lowest purlin to the outer edge of the selected area.

Offset Top The distance from the centerline of the topmost purlin to the outer edge of the selected area.

Offsets Fixed If one of these options is activated, the selected distances are also kept in the grid; otherwise they are centered.

Offset Left Specify a purlin projection extending past the left outer edge of the selected area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten the purlin towards the inside.


1107

Offset Right Specify a purlin projection extending past the right outer edge of the selected area. In case of a diagonal edge, this value references the centerline of the purlin; negative values shorten the purlin towards the inside.

Shapes

Selection Lists Here, you can select the desired shape as usual; all shapes

are available for selection.

Position Indicates the insertion position of the girders related to the insertion axis.

Mirror If this field is checked, the shape position is mirrored at the length axis to turn the web side e.g. at U-shapes.

Rotation Specifies the rotation of the shapes around the insertion axis.

Alternatively, you can also use a joist girder instead of a standard shape (see structural element ‘Joist Girder’) the template of which can be selected on an additional dialog tab.


1108

Border Lines

Cut Lines Cutting edges can be added subsequently to permit the

creation of non-rectangular purlin courses as well.

Click this button to add a cutting edge. Then, you are prompted for a borderline to be clicked or to be defined by 2 points. All purlins intersecting this edge are divided at the edge with the distance specified in the Cut Width input field.

Click on this button to remove a selected cutting edge.

Poly-cut Apart from cutting edges, it is also possible to add sections for light domes or similar things. The procedure is the same as for sections; the only difference is that you have to click on a poly-line here.

Click on this button to add another section.

Click on this button to remove a section.


1109

Connections If you have selected alternative insertion on the base of two main girders, the following page will be displayed in addition:

Which Page Here you select for which side the settings have to be valid.

You can define both sides simultaneously or each single side individually.

No Connection The parts are only inserted; no connection is created.

Cope The girders are coped. You either select a previously defined template or the simplified specifications are valid.

Connection If you want one of the following connections, select the previously defined template.


Structural Element Ladder

1110

E.7 Structural Element Ladder

This function is used to create a ladder including its fastening at the wall. In addition, you can add a safety cage to the ladder. To do this, just click the left and right insertion point of the ladder and then the height point (to determine the length) or any other point you like, if the length has to be determined later. Then a dialog opens where you can set the specifications by direct monitor control. The ladder dimensions can be changed at a later time by modifying the (yellow) object frame using its grips.

Dimensions

Width The width of the ladder as clear dimension between the

uprights.

Height The height of the ladder without possible projection as help for climbing out.

Riser The desired distance between the rungs. The program divides the distances between first and last rung regularly according to this specification and the value is rounded up or down correspondingly.

Actual Riser The actual resulting distance between the rungs is displayed.


1111

Distance to Floor The distance between the upper edge of the first rung and the ground area of the ladder.

Top Distance The distance between the upper edge of the last rung and the climbing out surface of the ladder.

Offset The height of the help for climbing out related to the climbing out surface of the ladder (axis measure).

Stringer The depth of the help for climbing out (axis measure)

Sharp Bend The front jump-in of the help for climbing out (axis measure), if it has to be created with a bend.

Dynamic If this field is checked, you can monitor the modification of settings immediately on screen.

Diagonal If this field is checked, a diagonal of the actual structural element is drawn in the ladder to support an easier selection.

Fit… Rungs If this field is checked, the rungs are adapted to the uprights. Round tubes are e.g. cut with each other.


1112

Shapes

Selection Lists Select the shapes of the ladder uprights and rungs as usual.

All shapes are available for selection.

0 Degree You can rotate the shapes around their insertion axis here. The upright shape can be rotated by increments of 90° whereas the rungs can be rotated by increments of 45°.

Mirror If this field is checked, the corresponding shape will be mirrored before insertion.


1113

Wall Mounting

You can add a wall fastening to the ladder here. The wall shape is, however, only created if the Wall Shape field has been checked before. In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.

0 Degree You can rotate the wall shape around its insertion axis here by

checking the required angle.

Mirror If this field is checked, the wall shape will be mirrored before insertion.

Position Select the insertion position of the wall shape. Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside. Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis. Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.

Wall Distance The distance between upright axes and wall surface where the ladder has to be mounted.

Distance to Floor The distance between the axis of the first wall shape and the ground area of the ladder.


1114

Distance The desired distance of the wall shapes. The program divides the distances between the first and last wall shape regularly according to this specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.

Top Distance The distance between the axis of the last wall shape and the climbing out area of the ladder.

Safety Cage You can add a safety cage to the ladder here. The safety cage is only created if the Safety Cage field has been checked before. In the Selection Lists, you can select the required shape as usual. All shapes are available for selection.

0 Degree Here, you can rotate the shape around its insertion axis.

Mirror If this field is checked, the shape will be mirrored before insertion.

Position Here you can select the insertion position of the wall shape. Inner Edge –The wall shape is inserted at the inner edge of the upright and shows to the inside. Centrally –The wall shape is inserted in axis position on the height of upright axis. Outer Edge – The wall shape is inserted at the outer edge of the upright and shows to the outside.


1115

Radius Enter the radius of cage stiffeners.

No. of Rungs Specify how many longitudinal rungs the cage has to consist of. The bars will be divided regularly on the resulting semicircle.

Lower Radius Enter a bigger radius if you want to have a conical cage.

Lower Distance Specify the distance of the lowest shackle to the next shackle. If you don’t want to have a conical cage, you can keep the value 0 in this field and in the lower radius field.

Depth etc. Please refer to the below figure for the meaning of the other distances.

Distance to Floor Distance from the floor to the first shackle.

Distance The desired distance of the stiffeners (rings) of the safety cage. The program divides the distances between the first and last ring regularly according to this specification and the values are rounded up or down correspondingly.

Top Distance The distance from the top to the first shackle


1116

Lateral Climbing Out It is possible to define a lateral climbing out for the safety cage of the ladder.

Lateral Climbing Out

You can provide a lateral climbing out for an existing safety cage.

Position The lateral climbing out has to lead to the left, to the right or to both sides.

Upper Distance The distance of the lateral climbing out to the upper upright of the ladder.

Lower Distance The distance of the lateral climbing out to the upper edge of the safety cage.

Extended Distance The offset of the lateral climbing out in climbing out direction beyond the dimensions of the safety cage.



1117

Structural Element Joist

1118

E.8 Structural Element Joist

This function serves for creation of a joist as it is often used in the USA. This joist is a pre-fabricated element in lightweight construction that is offered in different executions and lengths.

Dimensions

Length the length of the joist

Height the height of the joist

Inner Distance the distance of shapes in transverse direction

Calculate Spacing The inner distance is calculated for the vertical and diagonal components based on the selected shapes.

Roof Angle The joist is built as a saddle roof.

Continuous... The joist is built as desk roof.

Seat Height defines the height of the lateral seats.

Seat Length Here, you can define the length of the seats for both sides separately.

Lower Retreat Here, you can indicate the lower retreat referring to the upper length for both sides separately.

Upper Shape Offset Here, you can indicate the upper shape offset above the selected length for both sides separately.


1119

Lower Shape Offset Here, you can indicate the lower shape offset for both sides separately.

Dynamic The joist rebuilds the shapes immediately after modifications.

2D Display The joist is depicted as 2D-display. No 3D-shapes are created or displayed. The display depends on the view direction.

Layout

Layout Here, you can select the kind of layout you want to have. 5

different types are available for selection: Symmetrical – The layout consists of upper and lower girder as well as of vertical and diagonal shapes. Single Lacing – The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists as well as of single bent intermediate beams. Double Lacing - The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists as well as of double bent intermediate beams. Tension Rods Type1 - The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists as well as of tension rods. Tension Rods Type2 - The layout consists of upper and ceiling joists as well as of tension rods.

Segment Count Here, you specify the number of individual segments. At option 1, this number has to be divisible by 2, at option 2 and 3, not to be divisible by 2. At the remaining options, you can enter any number.


1120

Segment Distance The distance from one segment to the other

Distance A The distance from the outside to the first minimum.

Distance B The distance from the last minimum to the last maximum.

Distance C The distance from the next to last maximum to the next to last minimum.

Distance D The distance from the next to last minimum to the inner maximum.

Distance E The distance of the inner segments.

Rounding Radius This indicates the rounding radius at the two lacing types.

Shapes

Shape Offset Here, you select for which rod area the corresponding settings

have to be valid.

Shape Type Here, you select which shape type is to be used. Depending on the offset you selected only certain shape types are available.

Shape Class Here, you select which shape class is to be used. Depending on the offset you selected only certain shape classes are available.

Shape Size Here, you select the desired shape size.


1121

Layout Here, you select which layout you want to have. Since normally the inner structure of the joist is not interesting, you can switch off this function. If you want to have it displayed nevertheless, but you don’t want to have displayed the individual objects, you can set the layout to Simple. In this mode, the shapes are displayed as part of the structural element. If you want to have displayed all details and you want to change some shapes, you can select Complete View. The settings don’t have any influence on the display of the seats.

Top Seats

Here, you specify the display and the design of the top seats. You can choose between shapes, plates and seat sockets which can be determined by means of parameters. Due to the great number of different designs, it is, however, possible as well to select the top seat as individual user block and to have designed it here.

Layout Select the design of the top seat here.

Seat Length Indicates the length of the shape, plate or socket.

Seat Width Indicates the width of the metal sheet or socket.

Seat Thick Indicates the thickness of the metal sheet or socket

Insert Holes Select this option if you want to insert a hole field into the seat.


1122

At Length Direction Indicates the design of the hole field at length direction.

In Cross Direction Indicates the design of the hole field in cross direction.

Diameter Indicates the hole diameter.

Workloose Indicates the additional value to the hole diameter.

Hole Distance Indicates the distance of the insertion point of the hole from the corresponding definition or endpoint.

Down Seat Here, you specify the display and the design of the down seats. For more detailed information, please refer to the description of top seats.


1123

User-defined Blocks You can design both seats and top and bottom chords as user-defined blocks. In this case, no top or bottom chord shapes are generated, but your individual blocks are inserted and resolved at the insertion position.

Upper Chords as Blocks You activate the insertion of upper chords as user-

defined blocks.

Connect Shapes If this option has been activated, the corresponding shapes – if existing – are connected with each other.

Left/Right Here, you select the blocks for left and right side separately.

The same options are available for the selection of user-defined blocks for the lower chord.


1124

Seat Blocks

If you have selected the top and down seats as blocks, you can select the corresponding blocks here.


1125

Data Here, you enter the general parts list data of the joist. They will be displayed in the parts list.

Name joist name

Item No. the item number of the joist

Note1,2 the two note fields for comments.

Pos No. the position number of the joist.

Weight the weight of the joist.

Line Type line type of the system lines.

In Partlist the joist is taken over into the parts list.


1126

Database

When a valid database has been entered in the options, you can choose a previously defined joist from the available values.


1127

Options

Allow Shapes in Partlist If this option is activated, the corresponding partlist

flag is set at inserted shapes.

Allow Shapes in DetailCenter If this option is activated, the corresponding detailing flag is set at inserted shapes.

Display Shapes in Overviews If this option is activated, the inserted shapes are displayed in 2D-overviews.

Block path Indicates the path where the available user-defined blocks have been stored.

Database Indicates the database which serves for the selection of previously defined values.


ProSteel Properties Dialogs

1128

E.9 ProSteel Properties Dialogs

It frequently occurs that the properties of existing component parts have to be modified. There are several different ways to select the properties function. There ProSteel puts in a context sensitive way all available parameters at disposal for modification. The most frequent way of selection is to highlight the part(s) and then to open the context menu by means of the right mouse button. There, you find the option ProSteel properties. Another possibility is to use the function PS_PROP_CHECK. In addition, the COM-module ‘Double-Click’ is available as well. You can call the PS-properties by double-clicking the parts. No matter which way you choose, ProSteel analyses which parts were selected and only provides the properties valid for these parts for modification. Make sure that the desired type of component part has been selected first if you want to modify several parts simultaneously. This means, if you want to modify all plates of a model, you have to make sure that the first selected object is a plate. All other selected elements are filtered accordingly. In this case, you can e.g. select a plate and then the complete model, and then all component parts that are not plates are automatically filtered out. The dialog windows can be divided into three different categories. 1. - Dialogs being specific for a component part type. 2. - Dialogs offering processing actions. 3. - Dialogs being generally valid for all component parts.

The first group depends on the selected type. The second group is not displayed if several parts have been selected and depends on the processing actions included. The third group is generally displayed for all elements.


1129

E.9.1 Shapes

Layout On this dialog tab, you can modify the display of shapes individually. At insertion, the shapes obtain the settings that were made and can be overwritten individually.

Layout Here, you specify how the shape has to be depicted.

Holes Here, you specify the depiction of drill holes.

Only Outer Cont. Only the first outer contour is displayed. At tubes, e.g., the inner cylinder will not be displayed.

Modeller The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software independently decides when the modeler has to be used for depiction. However, you can explicitly define it using this option. If the modeler has to be used, you cannot switch it off.

Acis The ACIS-modeler is used for depiction instead of the facet-modeler. ACIS is much slower but more precise than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-modeller volume models.


1130

2D Display A calculated 2D-depiction depending on the current view direction is displayed instead of standard 3D-depiction.

Center Line The centerline of the shape is displayed.

COG Line The gravity line is displayed.

Pitch Lines If crack lines have been defined for this shape, they are displayed.

Part Label The name of the component part is displayed dynamically at the part. The position depends on the angle of vision. The settings are made in the global settings.

Short name If a short position has been filed in the database; it will be used instead of the complete name.

ECS Axes The Entity Coordinate System is displayed. It mainly serves for verifying purposes.

Transparency The part is displayed transparent at shading.

Direction marker If the component part has got a benchmark during detailing, this will be displayed.

2D-Section Automatic 2D cut information is displayed.


1131

Shape Type Here, you can modify the shape type of one or several shapes.

Shape Type Select the type of the shape.

Resolution Select the desired resolution of the shape.

Shape Class Select the class or library of the shape.

Shape Size Select the size of the shape.

The data base information about this shape is displayed.

Treat As Singl… If you have selected a combi shape or a weld shape, you can specify whether the individual components have to be treated as single parts. The same is valid if the shape has not yet been exploded.


1132

Positions Use this dialog tab to specify the insertion or reference axis. You can select the desired points in the preview.

Select Line Here, you specify whether the insertion point or the reference

axis has to be set. As long as a reference axis doesn’t exist, this option cannot be accessed.

X-Offset X value of insertion

Y-Offset Y value of insertion

Rotation Angle Input value for rotation

+Phi The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the input value.

-Phi The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by the input value.

+90 The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by +90 degrees.

-90 The shape is rotated around the current insertion axis by -90 degrees.


1133

The insertion points are rotated and thus mirrored at the Y-axis.

A reference axis is added to the shape.

A reference axis is subtracted from the shape.

At Max. 2 reference points are added to the shape.

The reference points are subtracted from the shape.

Dimensioning points This dialog page is used to manage the additional dimensioning points and dimensioning references. Further information on work with dimensioning points can be found in the description of the 2D detail style.


1134

Apply for Here you determine which dimensioning points you would currently like to process. Dimensioning points – These are individual points that need to be additionally dimensioned. Reference points – These are individual points that may serve as the basis for other dimensions. Reference areas – These are individual areas (pairs of points) that may serve as the basis for other dimensions that are within this area.

Views Here you select in which component views the dimensioning points are to be used. However, this function is not yet available.

If you click on this button you can add a dimensioning point, a reference point or a reference area according to your selection under ‘Apply for’.

If you click on this button, you can delete an existing dimensioning point or -area.

If you click on this button, you can change the position of an existing dimensioning point or -area.

If you click on this button, you can change the characteristics of an existing dimensioning point or -area.

Arrow buttons Use these to select the next dimensioning point..

If you would like to add a dimensioning or reference point, you will subsequently be asked for the new point, which you must pick in the model. If you wish to change or delete an existing point, select it by clicking on the point. You define a reference area by picking two points in the model, which describe the start and end of the area.


1135

Data This dialog tab is used for management of non-graphical properties.

Name The name of the shape for parts list and output.

Material The material of the shape for parts list and output.

Note1 The blank note 1 field.

Note2 The blank note 2 field

Pos No. The position number of the shape

Shipping No. Shipping number can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number

Orig. Pos No Fixed stored position number

Item Item number of the part

Count The number of parts for this element. Normally this is always 1.

Total This is the number of parts of this position number in the model. This value is only correct after positioning.

Modified It is displayed whether this shape has been modified since last detailing. After scanning the parts with the DetailCenter, this field is automatically deleted and the modification information is managed in the DetailCenter.

Adopt The shape is adopted into the parts list.

No Detail. The shape is not displayed in the DetailCenter.


1136

Values This dialog tab is used for management of non-graphical properties.

Length Shape length; if this value is modified, the length is modified

from the shape end.

Width The width of the shape

Height The height of the shape

Weight The weight of the shape

Vol Weight The weight is calculated via the volume modeler and not on the base of the length and the weight in meters.

Addition Length addition to the calculated length

Number The number of parts for this element. Normally this is always 1.

Total This is the number of parts of this position number in the model. This value is only correct after counting.


1137

Conical Depending on the selected shape, this dialog tab can look different. This is the dialog tab of a standard shape.

Slope Change in height in mm per meter length

Show Cut The diagonal dividing cut is displayed.

For weld shapes, the slope can also be defined via the climb. It is, however, also possible to indicate starting and end height. In addition, some tools are available to manipulate the cross-section or to realize a cross-section that changes several times.


1138

Slope Change in height in mm per meter length

Start Height Height at the beginning of the shape; only available if no other manipulation was made.

End Height Height at the end of the shape, only available if no other manipulation was made.

Use this button to define the height of a weld shape at any point or along a line. If necessary, a new polygon point will be created. The side situated next to the picked point will be modified. Then, another dialog opens where you can indicate the height. The height up to then is displayed, and you can enter the desired new height.

A new edge is inserted into the web plate at the picked point. The height remains unchanged.

The edge situated next is deleted from the web plate.

This button permits modifying the edges of the web plate using the grips. All other grips of this shape are deactivated at that moment.


1139

This button permits the management of the projections of upper and bottom flange at the starting and end point. The following dialog appears.

Bottom Fl. Start The projection of the bottom flange at the starting point of the shape is indicated.

Bottom Fl. End The projection of the bottom flange at the end point of the shape is indicated.

Top Flange.Start The projection of the upper flange at the starting point of the shape is indicated.

Top Flange. End The projection of the upper flange at the end point of the shape is indicated.

This button permits the management of the flange thickness table. Using this table, you can assign different widths and thicknesses to individual segments of the shape. The following dialog appears:


1140


1141

This button permits to click on a flange edge to add it to the table. The preset values are taken over first, which however, can be directly modified in the table.

The current table entry is deleted using this button. The thickness is reset.

Upper and bottom flange are considered separately. The indication of the flange refers to the number of flanges from the starting point per side. It is recommended to edit the thicknesses after having determined the bend points. A modification of the form by insertion or deletion of points modifies the table as well because the number of flanges is modified.

Static View If the static view has been activated in the global settings, the static values are displayed in the dialog. For a more detailed description of the options please refer to the chapter Static View.


1142

Bend If the selected shape is an arc shape, this dialog tab is additionally displayed.

Radius The radius of the arc shape up to the center line

Starting Angle The angle between the x-axis of the ECS and the starting point of the shape in degree

End Angle The angle between the x-axis of the ECS and the end point of the shape in degree.

Rotation Rotation around the insertion axis in degree


1143

Shortening If the shape is displayed in 2D-mode, additional shortenings may have been inserted into the shape. You can see these shortenings on this dialog tab.

The selected shortening is deleted.


1144

E.9.2 Plates

Layout Use this dialog tab to modify the depiction of plates individually. At insertion, the plates obtain the settings that were made and thus can be overwritten individually.

Layout Here, you specify how the plate has to be depicted.

Holes Here, you specify the depiction of drill holes.

Modeler The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software independently decides when the modeler has to be used for depiction. However, you can explicitly define it using this option. If the modeler has to be used, you cannot switch it off.

Acis The ACIS-modeler is used for depiction instead of the facet-modeler. ACIS is much slower but exacter than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-modeler volume models.

2D Display A calculated 2D-depiction depending on the current view direction is displayed instead of standard 3D-depiction.

Grid A plate grid is displayed on the upper side of the plate. This grid represents a gridiron or similar things.


1145

Center Line The centerline of the plate is displayed

Part Label The object name will be displayed dynamic at the object.

Short Name The name of the component part is displayed dynamically at the part. The position depends on the angle of vision. The settings are made in the global settings.

Only view ports The element names will be displayed in an activated and prepared view port. Please run PS_VIEWPORT_DISPLAY.

ECS Axes The Entity Coordinate System is displayed. It mainly serves for verifying purposes.


Position

Use this dialog tab to specify the plate position related to the insertion point and to the insertion plane. Length Plate length; only available if the plate is in rectangular mode.

Width Plate width; only available if the plate is in rectangular mode.

Thickness Plate thickness

Height Offset Position of the insertion plane above the ECS plane

Insert Edge The edge at which the plate is inserted related to the ECS-plane.

X-Offset x-offset related to the insertion point.

Y-Offset y-offset related to the insertion point.


1146

Rectangular The rectangular basic form of the plate is kept, and you cannot change it into another form using the grips. If this option is deactivated, you cannot reset it.

Symbol Direction Size Specifies the size of the symbol direction on plate grids.

At most 2 reference points are added to the plate.

The reference points are subtracted from the plate.

Dimensioning points This dialog page is used to manage the additional dimensioning points and dimensioning references. Further information on work with dimensioning points can be found in the description of the 2D detail style.


1147

Apply for Here you determine which dimensioning points you would currently like to process. Dimensioning points – These are individual points that need to be additionally dimensioned. Reference points – These are individual points that may serve as the basis for other dimensions. Reference areas – These are individual areas (pairs of points) that may serve as the basis for other dimensions that are within this area.


1148

Views Here you select in which component views the dimensioning points are to be used. However, this function is not yet available.

If you click on this button you can add a dimensioning point, a reference point or a reference area according to your selection under ‘Apply for’.

If you click on this button, you can delete an existing dimensioning point or -area.

If you click on this button, you can change the position of an existing dimensioning point or -area.

If you click on this button, you can change the characteristics of an existing dimensioning point or -area.

Arrow buttons Use these to select the next dimensioning point.

If you would like to add a dimensioning or reference point, you will subsequently be asked for the new point, which you must pick in the model. If you wish to change or delete an existing point, select it by clicking on the point. You define a reference area by picking two points in the model, which describe the start and end of the area.


1149

Data This dialog tab is used for management of non-graphical properties.

Name The name of the plate for parts list and output.

Name The final name built according to the settings with dimensions.

Material The material of the plate for parts list and output.



Pos No The position number of the plate

Ship.No. Shipping number; can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number

Orig. Pos No Fixed position number

Item Item number of the plate

Modified It is displayed whether this plate has been modified since last detailing.

In Partlist The plate is adopted into the parts list.

No Detail. The plate is not displayed in the DetailCenter.

Don’t Position Prevents positioning of the element.


1150

Values This dialog tab is used for management of non-graphical properties.

Length The length of the plate

Width The width of the plate

Thickness The thickness of the plate

Weight the weight of the plate

Vol Weight The weight is calculated via the volume modeler and not on the base of the dimensions.

Number The number of parts for this element. Normally this is always 1.


Fixed Form The plate can only be modified by means of manipulations such as cuts or Boolean operations.

Man. Direction The dimensions of the plate are determined according to a selected direction.

Man. Surface The direction of the surface symbol was determined manually.


1151

E.9.3 Bolts

Layout Use this dialog tab to modify the depiction of bolts individually. At insertion, the bolts obtain the settings that were made and the selected bolt style; thus they can be overwritten individually.

Layout Here, you specify how the bolt has to be depicted.

Coating Here, you specify the coating.

Modeller The component part is displayed by means of the facet-modeler. Normally, the software independently decides when the modeler has to be used for depiction. However, you can explicitly define it using this option. If the modeler has to be used, you cannot switch it off.

Acis The ACIS-modeler is used for depiction instead of the facet-modeler. ACIS is much slower but exacter than the facet-modeler. Please note that it is not possible to mix ACIS- and facet-modeler volume models.

2D Bolt The bolt is displayed in a calculated 2D-depiction.


1152

Mounting Space The assembly room is displayed as well. It mainly serves for verifying whether an assembly is possible. Individually specifies whether the mounting space has to be read out of the bolt style.

2D The bolt is depicted as 2D-symbol.


Countersunk The bolt is displayed as countersunk bolt.

Hexagon Socket The bolt is executed as hexagon socket.

Mounting Bolt The bolt is checked as assembly bolt, in contrast to workshop bolts. This has an influence on the assembly parts list.

Bolt The bolt is depicted.

Washer The lower washer is depicted.

Nut The nut is depicted

Lock Nut The safety nut is depicted

Tapered Washer The tapered washers are activated, but not displayed. They serve as basis for the parts list entries. You can choose between U- and I-form washers.

2nd Washer The second washer is depicted.

2nd Tapered… The second tapered washer is depicted.

The insertion direction of the bolt is turned.


1153

Data

Name The name of the bolt for parts list and output.

Material The material of the bolt for parts list and output.

Style The assigned bolt style



Pos No The position number of the bolt

Ship.No. Shipping number; can be used alternatively or additionally to the position number

Item The item number of the shape

Number The number of bolts for this element. Normally this is always 1.


Don’t Position Prevents positioning of the element.


1154

Values

Length Bolt length

Dia Bolt diameter

Grip Length The calculated clamping length of the bolt

Weight The weight of the bolt

Addition Length addition to the bolt

Modified It is displayed whether this bolt has been modified since last detailing.

Adopt The bolt is adopted into the parts list.

Bolt The bolt is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

Washer The washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

Nut The nut is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.


1155

Safety Nut The safety nut is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

Tapered Washer The tapered washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

2nd Washer The second washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

2nd Tapered… The second tapered washer is listed in the parts list as single data record, if desired.

Pre-Tension The pre-tension of the bolt in percent.


1156

E.9.4 Volume Solids / Basic Primitives

Layout Please refer to the section about the shapes for the individual descriptions of these setting options.

Data The parts list data of these component parts are identical with the parts described until now. Please refer to the above chapters for the description of the different fields.


1157

Values The parts list values of these component parts are identical with the parts described until now. Please refer to the above chapters for the description of the different fields.


1158

E.9.5 Special Parts

Special parts are drawing elements with special properties added by ProSteel. You can edit these properties using this dialog tab for their being correctly displayed in the parts list.

In Bolt List The special part at parts list output has to be adopted into the

bolt list. You can differ between mounting bolt and workshop bolt.

PPS Z-Part The special part has to generate a Z-entry at PPS-data generation.


1159

E.9.6 Assemblies

Assemblies are separate objects in ProSteel. They serve for extending the group structures. In contrast to groups and subgroups, they are not connected with a main part and carry their group information themselves. The data are managed as follows.

Layout Kind of depiction of an assembly object; this may be no

depiction, UCS-symbol, sphere or wrapping box.

Sketch Size Indicates the size of the assembly symbol in the current drawing.

2D Indicates whether the assembly object is switched over to 2D-mode or not. This controls the depiction of the whole assembly structure in the drawing.


1160

All other properties are subdivided into the tabs data and values as it is the case with all other component parts.


1161

E.9.7 Work Frames / Views

In the case of work frame objects, you can modify the properties of the complete object according to the options described in the manual. Please refer to the corresponding pages of this manual.

E.9.8 Structural Elements

In the case of structural elements, you can modify the properties of the complete object according to the options described in the manual. Please refer to the corresponding pages.

E.9.9 Roof/Wall-Objects

Please refer to the corresponding chapter of this manual where the modification of roof/wall-objects is described.

E.9.10 Position Flags, Elevations, Weld Marks,..

The properties of label objects such as position flags, elevations, weld marks, manual dimensioning objects and benchmark can also be set specifically for each component part.

E.9.11 Drawing Parts Lists

Please refer to the corresponding chapters of this manual where the setting of a drawing parts list and of a drawing containment list is described.


1162

E.9.12 3D Modifications

The processing actions included in the ProSteel-elements can mostly be modified or deleted on the property pages described in the following. Please refer to the following chapters to find out how it works.

Drill Holes/Bolted Joints Use this dialog tab to modify or delete the drill holes or bolted joints included in the part. Please refer to the chapter Drill Holes/Bolted Joints in this manual for the description of the different parameters.


1163

Boolean Operations Use this dialog tab to modify or delete the Boolean operations included in the part.

Length Indicates the length of the discharge-solid.

Width Indicates the width of the discharge-solid.

Height Indicates the height of the discharge-solid.

Operation Indicates the kind of Boolean operation an.

Type Indicates the type of the discharge-solid.

Modeller Indicates the modeller-type of the discharge-solid. It is important here to keep the modeller on ‘Variable’ to be able to switch over the modeling of the complete component part correctly.

Click on this button to create the discharge-solid as new element.

Click on this button to remove the Boolean operation or all processings.


1164

Facet Use this option to edit the chamfers included in the part. The dialog tab is analogous to the Plate Editor. Please refer to this chapter for the description of the different processing parameters.

Click on this button to delete the chamfer or all chamfers.


1165

E.9.13 Flat Cuts

Use this dialog tab to process and delete flat cuts (diagonal cuts) included in the component part.

Phi Dx Indicates the rotation angle around the x-axis

Phi Dy Indicates the rotation angle around the y-axis

Center of Rota… Indicates the rotation point

Click on this button to delete the cut or all cuts.


1166

E.9.14 Poly-Cuts

On this dialog tab, all poly-cuts included in the part will be displayed.

Length Modify the length of the poly-cut using this button.

Offset Modify the offset of the poly-cut using this button.

Click on this button to delete the poly-cut or all poly-cuts.


1167

E.9.15 Edge Processing

Here, you can modify the edge properties of plates. Please refer to the corresponding chapter in this manual for the settings.

Click on this button to delete the processing of an edge or all

processings of an edge.


1168

E.9.16 Notches (Outlets)

Use this dialog tab to modify the properties of the currently selected notch.

Length Indicates the length of the notch.

Width Indicates the width of the notch.

Depth Indicates the height of the notch.

Insertion Position Indicates the insertion position of the notch.

Click on this button to delete the notch or all notches.


1169

E.9.17 Common Properties

In this section, you will find a description of the general parts properties. The properties described here are not always completely available, but are only displayed if required.

Group On this dialog tab the data of the group/subgroup/assembly are listed to which the component part in question belongs.

Use these two buttons to switch through the group hierarchy

of the selected component part.


1170

Logical Links On this dialog tab, the logical links of the part are listed.

Active Indicates whether the link is activated. You may also

deactivate the link here.

Index Internal code of the link

Link Type The action is described by which the link has been created.

Modification Indicates the modifications of the part caused by this link.

Name Is a name which is used to make this connection visible in the DetailCenter later. This entry can be written by automatic positioning.

Ident Is a designation which is used to make this connection visible in the DetailCenter later. This entry can be written by automatic positioning. The entries “Ident” and “Name” only exist when the option “Logical Links/Extended Input” has been activated in the global settings.


1171

Use this button to process the link directly.

Use this button to delete the link or all links directly. Click on this button to edit the static connection data of the connection. This entry only exists when the option “Logical Links/Extended Input” has been activated in the global settings.

Assignments Use this dialog tab to make the assignments to the drawing object. These assignments may differ from one part to the other. They are however described in the corresponding chapters.

Detail Style Here, you can assign a detailing style to the part.

Display Here, you can assign a display class to the part.

Area Class Here, you can assign the part to an area class that you created before.

Parts Family Here, you can assign the part to a part family (e. g. support or girder).

Process-Status Here, you can see the current process-status of the component part.


1172

ProSteel Command Reference

1173

E.10 ProSteel Command Reference

Here, you will find a short survey how you can call the ProSteel functions documented in the manual using AutoCAD.

Function Chapter Command Name

2D

2D-Cut Out C.16 PS_CUT_OUT

3D

3D-Modifications B.11 PS_MODIFY

A

Add 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_ADD

Add Shape Segment B.8.5 PS_ADD_SECTION

Area Classes B.5.4 PS_AREA_CLASS

Automatic 2D-Cut C.18 PS_ADD_2DCUT

B

Benchmark C.6 PS_BENCHMARK

Bend Edged Plates B.9.4 PS_PLATE

BlockCenter D.2 PS_BLOCKCENTER

Bolts B.14 PS_BOLT

Bracings B.24 PS_VERBAND

Bracings, dynamic B.23 PS_BRACING

Butt-Joint Connection B.20 PS_LASCHE

C

Calculate Center of Gravity D.5.2 PS_WEIGHTCENTER

Caption texts C.17 PS_TEXTFLAG

Chamfer Plate Edge B.12.2 PS_CHAMFER

Circular Stairs E.2 PS_CIRCULAR_STAIRS

Clean AutoCAD-Drawing D.5.6 PS_CLEAN_PROXY

Clean AutoCAD-Drawing (Batch) D.5.6 PS_BATCH_CLEAN_DWG

Collision Check D.5.1 PS_COLLISION


1174

Connection-Editor B.26 PS_EDIT_CONNECTIONS

Construction Lines B.2.1 PS_CONST

Containlist B.32 PS_DWG_CONTAINLIST

Convert ADT-Shapes D.5.7 PS_CONVERT_ADTSHAPES

Cranked 2D-Cut C.5 PS_CRANKEDVIEW

Create ACIS-Solid D.5.5 PS_CREATE_ACIS

Create ACIS-Solid (Batch) D.5.5 PS_BATCH_CREATE_ACIS

Create ACIS body reference B.11 PS_SOLIDREFERENCE

Create 3D-Cone B.10 PS_SOLID_CONE

Create 3D-Conic Pipe B.10 PS_SOLID_CONICPIPE

Create 3D-Cross-section transition B.10 PS_SOLID_RECT2CIRCLE

Create 3D-Cuboid B.10 PS_SOLID_BOX

Create 3D-Cylinder B.10 PS_SOLID_CYLINDER

Create 3D-Extrusion Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_EXTRUDE

Create 3D-Rotation Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_ROTATE

Create 3D-Solid B.10 PS_SOLID_HULL

Create 3D-Sphere B.10 PS_SOLID_SPHERE

Create 3D-Torus B.10 PS_SOLID_TORUS

Cut Plane B.3.6 PS_CUTPLANE

D

Data Export D.7.5 PS_EXPORT

Data Import D.7.4 PS_IMPORT

DetailCenter C.1 PS_DETCENTER

Dimensioning Points C.7 PS_INSERT_MANDIM

Dispatch Bolts and Blocks D.4 PS_DISPATCH

Display Pickhelpers C.1.6 PS_PICKHELPER

Display Program Version A.1.2 PS_VERSION

Drawing Information B.29 PS_DWG_INFO

Drawing Frame C.10 PS_FORMAT

Drawing Partslist B.31 PS_DWG_PARTLIST


1175

Drill and Bolt B.13 PS_DRILL

DSTV NC-Interface D.7.8 PS_NC_DATA

DSTV PPS-Interface D.7.8 PS_PPS

DSTV Static-Interface D.7.8 PS_STATIK

E

Edit Exchange Map D.7.2 PS_EXCHANGE_MAP

Elevations C.13 PS_KOTE

Endplates B.16 PS_ENDPLATE

F

Face UCS B.3.2 PS_FACE_UCS

Face View B.3.2 PS_FACE_VIEW

Family Classes B.5.5 PS_FAMILY_CLASS

Flatten Viewport C.19 PS_VIEWPORT_FLATTEN

Free View B.3.5 PS_FREEVIEW

G

Global Settings A.6 PS_GLOBAL_SETTINGS

Global Scale C.9 PS_SCALE

Global View B.3.3 PS_GLOBAL_VIEW

Groundplates B.17 PS_GROUNDPL

Groups B.27 PS_GROUP

Gusset Plates B.22 PS_GUSSET_PLATE

H

Hatches B.25 PS_VOUTE

Hide B.5.1 PS_HIDE

Hide Exclude B.5.1 PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE

Hide Exclude Plane B.5.1 PS_HIDE_EXCLUDE_PLANE

Hide Group Exclude B.5.1 PS_HIDE_GROUP_EXCLUDE

Hide Group B.5.1 PS_HIDE_GROUP


1176

Hide Plane B.5.1 PS_HIDE_PLANE

Hole Display C.17 PS_HOLE_DISPLAY_STYLE

I

Insert Gratings B.9.3 PS_PLATE

Insert Plates B.9 PS_PLATE

Insert Shapes B.8 PS_INS_PROF

Intersection 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_COMMEN

L

Language Selection A.2 PS_LANGUAGE

Layer Functions B.1 PS_LAYER

M

Manual 2D-Cut C.11 PS_MAN_CUT

Manual 2D-Shortening C.15 PS_SHORT2D

Manual Dependency of Part C.8 PS_MANUAL_LINK

Manual Dimensioning C.12 PS_DIM

Measure Distance B.2.2 PS_CONST_MSE

Move and Copy Parts B.4 PS_COPY

N

Notch B.11.6 PS_NOTCH

O

Object View B.3.1 PS_OBJ_VIEW

Object-UCS B.3.1 PS_OBJ_UCS

Outlet B.11.1 PS_OUTLET

P

Perspective View B.3.7 PS_PERSP

Plate Editor B.12 PS_PLATE_EDITOR

Positioning B.28 PS_POS

Process Partlist B.30.2 PS_CREATE_PARTLIST


1177

Project Management A.5 PS_PROJECT

Process Status B.5.6 PS_PROCESS_STATUS

Purlin Connection B.21 PS_PURLIN_CONN

R

Regenerate B.5.2 PS_REGEN

RevisionCenter D.6 PS_REVISIONCENTER

Roof and Wall Covering D.3 PS_ROWADISPATCH

Rounding off Plate Edge B.12.2 PS_BEND_EDGE

S

Search Parts B.5.7 PS_SEARCH

Seize Partslist B.30.1 PS_PARTLIST

Shear Plates B.19 PS_SCHEARPLATE

Simulate Movement D.5.4 PS_KINEMATIK

Special Parts D.1.1 PS_CREATE_SPEZPART

Special Shapes D.1.2 PS_CREATE_SOPRO

Static Effective Lines D.6 PS_ANALYSIS

Stiffeners B.15 PS_RIP

Structural Element Joist E.7 PS_JOIST

Structural Element Truss Girder E.4 PS_TRUSS

Structural Element Handrail E.2 PS_HANDRAIL

Structural Element Hangar Frame E.3 PS_FRAME

Structural Element Purlin Position E.5 PS_PFETTE

Structural Element Ladder E.6 PS_LADDER

Structural Element Stairs E.1 PS_STAIRS

Subtract 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_SUB

Subtract Intersection 3D-Volume B.11.7 PS_COMMEN_SUB

T

Top View B.3.4 PS_TOPVIEW

Tubes Unwind D.5.3 PS_UNWIND

V


1178

Visibility Classes B.5.3 PS_HIDE_CLASS

W

Webangle B.18 PS_STEGW

Weldmarks C.14 PS_WELD

Workframe Views B.7 PS_SETBKS

Workframes B.6 PS_WORKFRAME

Own Notes

E.11 Own Notes